Initial commit

54 files changed, 79848 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/README b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f40d9475af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/README
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+%% ****** Start of file README ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%%   Version 4.2c of REVTeX, January, 2019.
+%%
+%%   Copyright (c) 1999-2019 American Physical Society.
+%%
+
+Last updated 18 January 2019
+
+This file describes the contents of this distribution of REVTeX 4.2,
+version 4.2c. The definitive source of information about REVTeX 4
+is the APS web page http://journals.aps.org/revtex/.
+
+User queries should be directed to revtex@aps.org.
+
+Manifest
+--------
+All files in this release are contained within a second zip file within the
+main zip file called revtex4-2-tds.zip. This contains all of the REVTeX 4.2
+files in the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) layout used with most current TeX
+distributions. Install REVTeX 4.2 by unzipping the files in the appropriate
+place (usually the texmf-local directory of your local TeX installation) and
+running texhash or the equivalent command to index the files. Please consult your
+TeX distribution's guide for installing new packages.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.2 are those under 
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs:          tex/latex/revtex/
+                     -----------------  
+revtex4-2.cls     - The REVTeX 4.2 class file
+aps4-2.rtx        - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2
+aip4-2.rtx        - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2
+aapm4-2.rtx       - AAPM-specific custommizations for REVTeX 4.2
+sor4-2.rtx        - SOR-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2
+apsrmp4-2.rtx     - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.2 for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-2.rtx    - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX
+aps11pt4-2.rtx    - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX
+aps12pt4-2.rtx    - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX
+revsymb4-2.sty    - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX
+reftest4-2.tex    - A helpful diagnostics check for bibliographies when not using BibTeX
+
+ltxdocext.sty     - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX
+ltxfront.sty      - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX
+ltxgrid.sty       - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX
+ltxutil.sty       - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX
+  
+BibTeX inputs:       bibtex/bst/revtex/
+                     ------------------ 
+apsrev4-2.bst     - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-2.bst     - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-2.bst    - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-2.bst     - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+aapmrev4-2.bst    - BibTeX styles for AAPM journals
+
+
+Documentation:       doc/latex/revtex/
+                     -----------------
+README       - How to get started (this file)
+
+Author guide:           doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+                        ------
+auguide4-2.tex (pdf)  - REVTeX 4.2 Author's Guide
+summary4-2.tex (pdf)  - REVTeX 4.2 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty              - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide:              doc/latex/revtex/aps
+                        ------
+apsguide4-2.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.2
+
+AIP guide:              doc/latex/revtex/aip
+                        ------
+aipguide4-2.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.2
+
+APS Sample document:    doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+                        -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf)  - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+                     REVTeX 4.2 document
+fig_1.eps          - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps          - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps         - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps         - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib        - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex    - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document:    doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+                        -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf)  - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+                     REVTeX 4.2 document
+fig_1.eps          - sample figure for aipsamp.tex
+fig_2.eps          - sample wide figure for aipsamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib        - sample BibTeX source file for aipsamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex    - A template for AIP authors to follow
+
+AAPM Sample document:    doc/latex/revtex/sample/aapm
+                        -------
+aapmsamp.tex (pdf)  - A sample file showing most common features of an AAPM
+                     REVTeX 4.2 document
+fig_1.eps          - sample figure for aapmsamp.tex
+fig_2.eps          - sample wide figure for aapmsamp.tex
+aapmsamp.bib        - sample BibTeX source file for aapmsamp.tex
+aapmtemplate.tex    - A template for AAPM authors to follow
+
+
+SOR Sample document:    doc/latex/revtex/sample/sor
+                        -------
+sorsamp.tex (pdf)  - A sample file showing most common features of an SOR
+                     REVTeX 4.2 document
+fig_1.eps          - sample figure for sorsamp.tex
+fig_2.eps          - sample wide figure for sorsamp.tex
+sorsamp.bib        - sample BibTeX source file for sorsamp.tex
+sortemplate.tex    - A template for SOR authors to follow
+
+Programmer's docs:      doc/latex/revtex/source/
+                        -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf  - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf   - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf   - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-2.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4.2 document class
+aip4-2.pdf       - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files:        source/latex/revtex
+                     -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx  - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx   - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx   - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-2.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip4-2.dtx       - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included   
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://journals.aps.org/revtex/>.
+
+natbib.dtx   - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins   - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+               documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx       - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty       - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty      - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
+
+Recommended styles and packages
+--------------------------
+With REVTeX implemented as a native LaTeX2e document class, users can 
+take advantage of many of the well-supported LaTeX2e packages available.
+Here are some that are particularly useful and recommended.
+
+longtable.sty for tables running to multiple pages - part of a
+standard LaTeX2e distribution.
+
+hyperref.sty for hyperlinking - should work well with REVTeX 4.2.
+
+graphics.sty and graphicx.sty for figure inclusion - part of LaTeX2e's
+standard distribution.
+
+Credits
+-------
+David Carlisle created the first draft of REVTeX 4; Arthur Ogawa has 
+supported the TeX development versions 4.0 and 4.1. Patrick Daly was so kind
+as to incorporate needed changes into natbib and custom-bib. All worked under 
+commission from the APS, with the support of AIP, and was coordinated by Mark
+Doyle, APS. Version 4.2 was initially developed by Aptara Corporation under
+the guidance of Mark Doyle, APS, and Brian Goss, AIP. Development of the final
+version of 4.2 was done by Mark Doyle. The APS is the maintainer of REVTeX,
+and all bugs are our responsibility. Please e-mail feedback to revtex@aps.org.
+
+Backwards compatibility
+-----------------------
+The REVTeX 4.2 class file has been named revtex4-2.cls to distinguish it
+from its predecessors. Files prepared under REVTeX 4.0 or 4.1 may need minor
+changes to process under 4.2 and the output may be formatted differently.
+
+LaTeX2e requirements
+--------------------
+REVTeX 4 requires: 
+LaTeX2e [1996/06/01],
+natbib  [2009/11/07]
+textcase
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aapmrev4-2.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aapmrev4-2.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..38e829fddd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aapmrev4-2.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3496 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aapmrev4-2.bst', and is a hand-edited version of aapmrev4-1.bst
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"aapmrev4-2.bst 2019-01-14 (MD) hand-edited version of aapmrev4-1.bst"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #8 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #1
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {jhep} {"J. High Energy Phys."}
+MACRO {jcap} {"J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys."}
+MACRO {jinst} {"J. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jstat} {"J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "https://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint.controlled}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #1 =
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.comma}
+{
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.comma
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.comma
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "https://doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      "https://doi.org/" swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      format.date.output.check
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint.controlled output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {dataset}
+{ 
+  output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  article.title.produce
+  doi missing$
+  url missing$ not and
+  {
+    link.open
+    url "url" output.check
+    link.shut
+  }
+  {
+    link.open
+    doi "doi" output.check
+    link.shut
+  } if$
+  format.date.output
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { 
+      format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          nameptr
+          #2
+          =
+          numnames
+          #3
+          > and
+            { 
+              "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := 
+            }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  cite.name.font.apply
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+  seq.num  int.to.fix
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aapmrev4-2.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipauth4-1.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipauth4-1.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..97a52a3044
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipauth4-1.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3487 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipauth4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible aipauth4-1.bst 2010-07-25 ***
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ %   For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is    natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs aipauth4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #1 +
+  #8 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #0
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #0 <
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      doi.base.command swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      format.date.output.check
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { 
+      format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          nameptr
+          #2
+          =
+          numnames
+          #3
+          > and
+            { 
+              "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := 
+            }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  cite.name.font.apply
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.sort
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.sort
+        'author.sort
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipauth4-1.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipauth4-2.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipauth4-2.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..daa268a641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipauth4-2.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3501 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipauth4-2.bst', and is a hand-edited version of aipauth4-1.bst
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"aipnauth4-2.bst 2018-12-27 (MD) hand-edited version of apsauth4-1.bst"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #1 +
+  #8 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #0
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {jhep} {"J. High Energy Phys."}
+MACRO {jcap} {"J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys."}
+MACRO {jinst} {"J. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jstat} {"J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "https://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint.controlled}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #1 =
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    word.space * *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "https://doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      "https://doi.org/" swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      format.date.output.check
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint.controlled output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {dataset}
+{ 
+  output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  article.title.produce
+  doi missing$
+  url missing$ not and
+  {
+    link.open
+    url "url" output.check
+    link.shut
+  }
+  {
+    link.open
+    doi "doi" output.check
+    link.shut
+  } if$
+  format.date.output
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { 
+      format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          nameptr
+          #2
+          =
+          numnames
+          #3
+          > and
+            { 
+              "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := 
+            }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  cite.name.font.apply
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.sort
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.sort
+        'author.sort
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipauth4-2.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipnum4-1.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipnum4-1.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5233cc659d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipnum4-1.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3477 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipnum4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2010-07-25 ***
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ %   For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is    natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs aipnum4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #8 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #1
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #0 <
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      doi.base.command swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      format.date.output.check
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { 
+      format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          nameptr
+          #2
+          =
+          numnames
+          #3
+          > and
+            { 
+              "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := 
+            }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  cite.name.font.apply
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+  seq.num  int.to.fix
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipnum4-1.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipnum4-2.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipnum4-2.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..01be74110a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/aipnum4-2.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3496 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipnum4-2.bst', and is a hand-edited version of aipnum4-1.bst
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"aipnum4-2.bst 2019-01-14 (MD) hand-edited version of apsrev4-1.bst"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #8 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #1
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {jhep} {"J. High Energy Phys."}
+MACRO {jcap} {"J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys."}
+MACRO {jinst} {"J. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jstat} {"J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "https://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint.controlled}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #1 =
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.comma}
+{
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.comma
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.comma
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "https://doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      "https://doi.org/" swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      format.date.output.check
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint.controlled output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {dataset}
+{ 
+  output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  article.title.produce
+  doi missing$
+  url missing$ not and
+  {
+    link.open
+    url "url" output.check
+    link.shut
+  }
+  {
+    link.open
+    doi "doi" output.check
+    link.shut
+  } if$
+  format.date.output
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { 
+      format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          nameptr
+          #2
+          =
+          numnames
+          #3
+          > and
+            { 
+              "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := 
+            }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  cite.name.font.apply
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+  seq.num  int.to.fix
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipnum4-2.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrev4-1.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrev4-1.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5cd3c4cf01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrev4-1.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3457 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrev4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-07-25 ***
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ %   For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is    natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs apsrev4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #8 +
+  #64 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #1
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #0 <
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      doi.base.command swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      format.date.output.check
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  format.name.apply
+  s num.names$ duplicate$
+  #2 >
+    { pop$
+      cite.name.font.apply
+    }{
+      #2 <
+        'skip$
+        {
+          s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+            {
+              cite.name.font.apply
+            }{
+              bbl.and space.word *
+              s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+              cite.name.font
+              *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  short.list key field.or.null = or
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+  seq.num  int.to.fix
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrev4-1.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrev4-2.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrev4-2.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab91306171
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrev4-2.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3528 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrev4-2.bst', and is a hand-edited version of apsrev4-1.bst
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"apsrev4-2.bst 2019-01-14 (MD) hand-edited version of apsrev4-1.bst"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #8 +
+  #64 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #1
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {jhep} {"J. High Energy Phys."}
+MACRO {jcap} {"J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys."}
+MACRO {jinst} {"J. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jstat} {"J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "https://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint.controlled}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #1 =
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.comma}
+{
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.comma
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.comma
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "https://doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      "https://doi.org/" swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {parenthesize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  parenthesize
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.vol.num}
+{
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+    format.pages
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ *
+      warning$
+      pop$ ""
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ }
+    {
+      "year" bibinfo.check
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," *
+          word.space *
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+%% Handle special case of SISSA journals which require an issue number for unique citations and use volume/year interchangably
+    {
+      journal "J. High Energy Phys." =
+      journal "J. High Energ. Phys." = or
+      journal "JHEP" = or
+      journal "Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics" = or
+      journal "J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys." = or
+      journal "JCAP" = or
+      journal "Journal of Instrumentation" = or
+      journal "J. Instrum." = or
+      journal "JINST" = or
+      journal "Journal of Statistical Mechanics" = or
+      journal "J. of Stat. Mech." = or
+      journal "J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp." = or
+      journal "JSTAT" = or
+      {
+          link.open
+          journal
+          "journal" bibinfo.warn
+          "journal" 'bibfield :=
+          output
+          add.blank
+          format.vol.num output
+          number parenthesize
+          "number" bibinfo.warn
+          "number" 'bibfield :=
+          output
+          eid.or.pages
+          link.shut
+      }
+      {
+          eid missing$
+          pages missing$ and
+          doi missing$ not and
+          {
+            journal
+            "journal" bibinfo.warn
+            "journal" 'bibfield :=
+            output
+            add.blank
+            format.ser.vol.num
+            output
+            link.open
+            doi output
+            link.shut
+            format.date.output.check
+          }
+          {
+            link.open
+            journal
+            "journal" bibinfo.warn
+            "journal" 'bibfield :=
+            output
+            add.blank
+            format.ser.vol.num
+            output
+            eid.or.pages
+            format.date.output.check
+            link.shut
+          } if$
+      } if$
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint.controlled output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter and pages"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.date.output.check
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  format.date.output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  article.title.produce
+  format.eprint output
+  format.date.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {dataset}
+{ 
+  output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  article.title.produce
+  doi missing$
+  url missing$ not and
+  {
+    link.open
+    url "url" output.check
+    link.shut
+  }
+  {
+    link.open
+    doi "doi" output.check
+    link.shut
+  } if$
+  format.date.output
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  format.name.apply
+  s num.names$ duplicate$
+  #2 >
+    { pop$
+      cite.name.font.apply
+    }{
+      #2 <
+        'skip$
+        {
+          s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+            {
+              cite.name.font.apply
+            }{
+              bbl.and space.word *
+              s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+              cite.name.font
+              *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  short.list key field.or.null = or
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ *
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+  seq.num  int.to.fix
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrev4-2.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrmp4-1.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..77e253c9bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3448 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrmp4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs  (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs  (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-07-25 ***
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ %   For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is    natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs apsrmp4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #1 +
+  #2 +
+  #8 +
+  #64 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #0
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #0 <
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+              names.punctuate
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    space.word *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      capitalize
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      doi.base.command swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+    "????" *
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
+       pop$ "????"
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+  number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+      swap$
+      "~(" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+      ""
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      eid.or.pages
+    }
+  if$
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+    }
+  if$
+  format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output
+  date.block
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  format.name.apply
+  s num.names$ duplicate$
+  #2 >
+    { pop$
+      cite.name.font.apply
+    }{
+      #2 <
+        'skip$
+        {
+          s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+            {
+              cite.name.font.apply
+            }{
+              bbl.and space.word *
+              s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+              cite.name.font
+              *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  short.list key field.or.null = or
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+       "????" *
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ * 
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.sort
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.sort
+        'author.sort
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrmp4-1.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrmp4-2.bst b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrmp4-2.bst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d7a57cbf69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/bibtex/apsrmp4-2.bst
@@ -0,0 +1,3461 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrmp4-2.bst', and is a hand-edited version of apsrmp4-1.bst
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+ %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+ %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"apsrmp4-2.bst 2018-12-27 (MD) hand-edited version of apsrmp4-1.bst"}
+ENTRY
+{
+    address
+    archive
+    archivePrefix
+    author
+    bookaddress
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+    collaboration
+    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+    isbn
+    issn
+    journal
+    key
+    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+    organization
+    pages
+    primaryClass
+    publisher
+    school
+    SLACcitation
+    series
+    title
+    translation
+    type
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+}{
+}{
+    label
+    extra.label sort.label
+    short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  output.state before.all
+  after.word after.punctuation
+  after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+  punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+  'arith.multiplicand :=
+  'arith.mulitplier :=
+  #0
+    { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+    { arith.multiplicand +
+      arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+  chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+    { swap$ pop$ }
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+      duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+        { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+          duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+            { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+            { pop$
+              pop$ #-1
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+    { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+    { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+      duplicate$ #0 <
+        { pop$ pop$ ""
+        }
+        { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+          #2 global.max$ substring$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+  duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+  #0
+  'control.key             :=
+  #0
+  #1 +
+  #2 +
+  #8 +
+  #64 +
+  'control.author :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.jnrlst   :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.dotless  :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nospace  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.initials :=
+  #0
+  'control.author.nocomma  :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.first    :=
+  #1
+  'control.author.reversed :=
+  #0
+  'control.editor :=
+  #-1
+  'control.title  :=
+  #0
+  'control.pages  :=
+  #0
+  'control.eprint :=
+  #1
+  'control.year   :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+  " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+  control.editor
+    {
+      "editor formatted same as author"
+      control.author.reversed {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.first {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.first :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.nocomma {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    } 'skip$ if$
+  control.author.reversed 'skip$
+    {
+      "not reversed"
+      control.author.nospace {
+        duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+        #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+        duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+        #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+      } if$
+      control.author.initials {
+        duplicate$ ", initials" *
+        control.author.dotless {
+          duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+          #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+        } 'skip$ if$
+        pop$
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+  control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+    "not initials"
+    control.author.nocomma {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.nospace {
+      duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+      #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+    } 'skip$ if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+      #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+    } if$
+    pop$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$ pop$ pop$
+    }
+    { empty$
+        {
+          pop$ #-1
+        }{
+          str.to.hex
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$ :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+  duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+  "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+  *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+  - duplicate$
+  #0 <
+    {
+      skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+    }
+    {
+      swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+    }
+  if$
+  swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+  control.author
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+    {
+      int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+      warning$
+    }{
+      'control.author.jnrlst   swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+      'control.author.dotless  swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+      'control.author.nospace  swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+      'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$  #8 control.decode
+      'control.author.nocomma  swap$ duplicate$  #4 control.decode
+      'control.author.first    swap$ duplicate$  #2 control.decode
+      'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$  #1 control.decode
+      duplicate$ #0 =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          "Control: residue of author"
+          "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+          warning$
+        }
+      if$
+      pop$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+  type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+  "control.key"    key    control.dump *
+  "control.author" author control.dump *
+  "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+  "control.title"  title  control.dump *
+  "control.pages"  pages  control.dump *
+  "control.year"   year   control.dump *
+  "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+  top$
+  'control.key    key    control.parse
+  'control.author author control.parse
+  'control.editor editor control.parse
+  'control.title  title  control.parse
+  'control.pages  pages  control.parse
+  'control.year   year   control.parse
+  'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+  control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+  "Control: key "
+  control.key
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  pop$ *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+  "Control: author "
+  control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+  control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+  control.author.first    { " first"    * }{} if$
+  control.author.nocomma  { " nocomma"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+  control.author.nospace  { " nospace"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.dotless  { " dotless"  * }{} if$
+  control.author.jnrlst   { " jnrlst"   * }{} if$
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+  "Control: editor formatted "
+  control.editor
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "identically to author"
+    } {
+      "differently from author"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of article title "
+  control.title
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "required"
+    } {
+      "allowed"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+  "Control: page "
+  control.pages
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "none"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "range"
+    } {
+      "single"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+  "Control: year "
+  control.year
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  duplicate$ #0 <  {
+    pop$
+    "disabled!"
+  } {
+    #0 > {
+      "truncated"
+    } {
+      "verbatim"
+    } if$
+  } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+  "Control: production of eprint "
+  control.eprint
+  duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+  #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+  diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+  control.key.bib
+  control.author.bib
+  control.editor.bib
+  control.title.bib
+  control.pages.bib
+  control.year.bib
+  control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+  #0 'before.all        :=
+  #1 'after.word        :=
+  #2 'after.punctuation :=
+  #3 'after.sentence    :=
+  #4 'after.block       :=
+  #0 'punctuation.no    :=
+  #1 'punctuation.space :=
+  #2 'punctuation.yes   :=
+  "" 'bibfield          :=
+  "" 'output.bibfield   :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+  "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+  "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+  "(" *
+  output.state int.to.str$ *
+    "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+  ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+  swap$
+  duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+  swap$
+  output.state after.word =
+    {
+      block.punctuation *
+      word.space *
+    }
+    {
+      output.state after.punctuation =
+        {
+          word.space *
+        }
+        {
+          output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+            {
+              add.period$
+              "\EOS\ " *
+            }{
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      bibfield.command
+      " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  write$
+  bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+  output.state after.block =
+    {
+      newline$
+      "\newblock " write$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  punctuation.state duplicate$
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+  punctuation.no =
+    { pop$ before.all }
+    { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+  if$
+  'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+  "" 'bibfield :=
+    }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+  non.stop
+    {
+  bibitem.shut.nostop *
+    }{
+  bibitem.shut.stop *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+  "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+  ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      newline$
+      SLACcitation write$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+  bibitem.shut
+  write$
+    output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+    'skip$
+    { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+  new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+  word.space *
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+   "\hspace {0pt}" *
+   before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+  new.block.comma
+  skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+  control.author.dotless {
+    'z :=
+    ""
+    { z empty$ not }
+    { z #1 #1 substring$
+      z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+      duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+        { * }
+      if$
+    }
+    while$
+  } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+    "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { word.space }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+  "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+  "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+  "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+  "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+  "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+  "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+  "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+  "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+  "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+  "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+  "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+  "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+  "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+  "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+  "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+  "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+  "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {jhep} {"J. High Energy Phys."}
+MACRO {jcap} {"J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys."}
+MACRO {jinst} {"J. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jstat} {"J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      pop$
+      pop$ ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ pop$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }{
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }{
+          swap$
+          bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+  "https://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+  "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+  "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint.controlled}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+  control.eprint #1 =
+  or
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+  eprint duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      duplicate$
+      ""
+        archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+        "/" *
+        swap$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      swap$
+      ""
+        archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+        swap$ *
+        primaryClass  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+        "{" swap$ * "} " *
+      *
+      eprint.command swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ""
+      "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+      punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+  url duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "\url "
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+  { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+    {
+      bolden
+    }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+  control.author.initials {
+    control.author.dotless {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{}"
+      } {
+        "f{~}"
+      } if$
+    } {
+      control.author.nospace {
+        "f{.}."
+      } {
+        "f."
+      } if$
+    } if$
+  } {
+    "ff"
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+  "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+  control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+    {
+      control.author.initials {
+        "f"
+        control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+          "." *
+        } if$
+        "~" *
+      } {
+        "ff"
+      } if$
+      bracify
+      swap$
+    } {
+      format.names.fname
+      " " swap$ *
+      name.comma
+      bracify
+    }
+  if$
+  "jj"
+  " " swap$ *
+  name.comma
+  bracify
+  control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+  * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+  s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+  remove.dots
+  bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+  nameptr #1 >
+  control.author.first
+  and
+  control.author.reversed not
+  or
+  {
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      "f"                        % default: name + surname + comma junior
+    } {
+      "ff"
+    } if$
+    control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+      "." *                    % nm-init   % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith)                                           control.author.initials
+    } if$
+    bracify
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    swap$
+    *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } {
+    "," *
+    s nameptr
+    format.names.fname
+    "jj"
+    " "
+    name.comma
+    control.author.jnrlst {
+      swap$ * skip$
+    } {
+      skip$ * swap$
+    } if$
+    bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+    *
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+  "," *
+  " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+    duplicate$ num.names$
+    duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+    'namesleft :=
+    's :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    ""
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+      format.names.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        type$ "presentation" =
+          'check.speaker
+          'skip$
+        if$
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 > not
+          {
+            t *
+          } {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              } {
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+              names.punctuate
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " *
+                    bbl.etal
+                    emphasize
+                    *
+                  } {
+                    bbl.and
+                    word.space * *
+                    t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+    s nameptr
+    control.author.initials {
+      control.author.dotless {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"   % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+        } {
+          "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"  % nm-rv
+        } if$
+      } {
+        control.author.nospace {
+          "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+        }{
+          "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"   % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+        } if$
+      } if$
+    } {
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+    } if$
+    format.name$
+    remove.dots
+    bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+  control.author.reversed { %
+    control.author.initials { %
+      control.author.dotless { %
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+          "{f{}}"
+        } { % nm-rv
+          "{f{~}}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        remove.dots
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } { % !control.author.dotless
+        s nameptr
+        control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+          "{ff}"
+        } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+          "{f.}"
+        } if$
+        format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+        if$
+        s nameptr
+        "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+        s nameptr
+        "{jj}" format.name$
+        duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+          { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+        if$
+      } if$
+    } { % Full names !control.author.initials  nm-revf nm-revv1
+      s nameptr
+      "{ff}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+    } if$
+  } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+    s nameptr
+    "{f.}"
+    format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+    if$
+    s nameptr
+    "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+    s nameptr
+    "{jj}" format.name$
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+    if$
+  } if$
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+  control.editor #0 > {
+    format.names
+  } {
+    'bibinfo :=
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    's :=
+    "" 't :=
+    #1 'nameptr :=
+    s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    numnames 'namesleft :=
+      { namesleft #0 > }
+      {
+       format.names.ed.morfont
+        bibinfo bibinfo.check
+        't :=
+        nameptr #1 >
+          {
+            namesleft #1 >
+              {
+                names.punctuate
+                t *
+              }{
+                s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                  { 't := }
+                  { pop$ }
+                if$
+                numnames #2 >
+                  'names.punctuate
+                  'skip$
+                if$
+                t "others" =
+                  {
+                    " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+                  }{
+                   bbl.and
+                    space.word * t *
+                  }
+                if$
+              }
+            if$
+          }
+          't
+        if$
+        nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+        namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+      }
+    while$
+    } if$
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+  "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "," *
+      word.space *
+      get.bbl.editor
+      capitalize
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{ 
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+  "https://doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+  "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+  "\href@noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+  "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+  doi duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      pop$
+      url duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          pop$ "" noop.command
+        }{
+          href.command
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+      "https://doi.org/" swap$ * 
+      href.command
+    }
+  if$
+  "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+  "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+  link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+  link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+  link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        {
+          output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+            { "l" }
+            { "u" }
+          if$ change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+  "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+  punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+  non.stop {
+    block.punctuation
+  } { "" } if$
+   swap$ pop$
+  *
+  bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+  duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      string.enquote
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+  s nameptr
+  "{vv~}{ll}"
+  format.name$
+  cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { format.name.apply
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                {
+                  't :=
+                }
+                'pop$
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+                  " " * bbl.etal
+                  emphasize *
+                }{
+                  numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+                  bbl.and
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+  key editor author
+  type$ "proceedings" =
+  type$ "book"        =
+  type$ "inbook"      =
+  or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$
+          duplicate$ empty$
+            { pop$
+              cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+            }{
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ ""
+    "????" *
+  }{
+    skip$
+  } if$
+  extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+  newline$
+  ""
+  label
+  * ")" *
+   make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+   { pop$ }{ * } if$
+   bracify
+  "[" swap$ * "]" *
+  cite$ bracify "%" *
+  *
+  "\bibitem "
+  swap$ *
+  write$ newline$
+  "  "
+  duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+  punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }{
+                { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }{
+          t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+  bbl.in
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+      " (" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+  year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+      "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
+       pop$ "????"
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label *
+  date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+  format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+      title
+  } 'skip$ if$
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+      ": try using @inbook instead" *
+      warning$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    {
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+      bbl.volume
+      capitalize
+      swap$
+      tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+          ", "
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+  bbl.number
+  output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+  #1 or
+  #0 and
+    'skip$
+    { capitalize }
+  if$
+  number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+        {
+          series empty$
+            {
+              number "number" bibinfo.check
+            }{
+              format.number
+              series "series" bibinfo.check
+              word.space * swap$ *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+                        { s
+                            eng.ord
+                        't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      convert.edition
+      output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      word.space * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }{
+          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+  pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+          ","
+  word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        { volnum.punct *
+          swap$
+          control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+            pop$ pop$
+          }{
+            #0 >
+            {
+              n.dashify
+            }{
+              first.page
+            } if$
+          } if$
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { volnum.punct * }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+  series "series" bibinfo.check output
+  volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+  bolden
+  number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+      swap$
+      "~(" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+    {
+      ""
+    }
+    { type empty$
+        {
+          bbl.chapter
+          capitalize
+        }{
+          type
+          capitalize
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+      pop$ emphasize
+      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+  editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      bbl.edby
+      word.space * swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle
+      "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+  output
+  bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      "address" 'bibfield :=
+      output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+  format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    {
+      add.doi
+      word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+      format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+      format.bvolume output
+      author empty$ 'skip$
+        { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+    if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+  word.in
+  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ t }
+    { t duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+        {
+          "," word.space *
+          * swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+    ""
+    "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+    after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+    punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+  school  "school"  bibinfo.warn
+  address "address" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        {
+          ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+  output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+  control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+  { pop$
+  }{
+    format.title
+    "title" 'bibfield :=
+    swap$ #0 >
+    {
+      "title" output.check
+    }{
+      output
+    } if$
+    new.block.comma
+  } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors
+  booktitle empty$ {
+      "author" output.check
+    }{ output } if$
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  output.article.booktitle
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      link.open
+      journal
+      "journal" bibinfo.warn
+      "journal" 'bibfield :=
+      output
+      add.blank
+      format.ser.vol.num
+      output
+      eid.or.pages
+      pages empty$ {
+      doi output
+      } 'skip$ if$
+      link.shut
+    }{
+      format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+      eid.or.pages
+    }
+  if$
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint.controlled output
+  format.translation output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+      format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+      editor format.key output
+    }{
+      format.authors output.nonnull
+%     crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  format.edition output
+  author empty$
+    {
+    }
+    {
+      format.editor.in output
+      editor format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.number.series output
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.bvolume output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+    }
+  if$
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.chapter.pages
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.book.pages output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    {
+       format.editors "editor" output.check
+       editor format.key output
+    }{
+       format.authors output.nonnull
+       author format.key output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+
+  format.title output
+  new.block.comma
+
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.edition output
+      new.block.comma
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }{
+      format.chapter.pages
+      "chapter"
+      output.check
+      new.block.comma
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+    }
+  if$
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn.output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+      format.publisher.address output
+      format.isbn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      format.in.ed.booktitle
+      format.organization.publisher.address output
+      format.isbn.output
+      format.issn.output
+    }{
+      format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+    }
+  if$
+  format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.mthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output
+  date.block
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  format.btitle
+  output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  bbl.phdthesis
+  format.thesis.type
+  output.nonnull
+  link.shut
+  format.school.address.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+  new.block.comma
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  output
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+  month "month" output.check
+  year "year" output.check
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  new.sentence
+  type missing$ 'skip$
+    {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+      bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.number.series output
+  format.bvolume output
+  format.organization.publisher.address output
+  format.isbn.output
+  format.issn.output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output.check date.block
+  link.open
+  format.btitle
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  format.tr.number
+  output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+  format.org.or.pub output
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note output
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  link.open
+  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+  link.shut
+  new.block.comma
+  new.sentence.comma
+  format.note "note" output.check
+  format.eprint output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {dataset}
+{ 
+  output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+  author format.key output
+  format.date.output date.block
+  article.title.produce
+  doi missing$
+  url missing$ not and
+  {
+    link.open
+    url "url" output.check
+    link.shut
+  }
+  {
+    link.open
+    doi "doi" output.check
+    link.shut
+  } if$
+  format.note output
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+  word.space * bbl.etal
+  emphasize
+  *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  format.name.apply
+  s num.names$ duplicate$
+  #2 >
+    { pop$
+      cite.name.font.apply
+    }{
+      #2 <
+        'skip$
+        {
+          s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+            {
+              cite.name.font.apply
+            }{
+              bbl.and space.word *
+              s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+              cite.name.font
+              *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+  calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+  short.list key field.or.null = or
+    {
+      pop$ ""
+       "????" *
+    }{
+      control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "(" swap$ * 
+  * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{ll{ }}"
+      control.author.initials {
+        "{  f{ }}"  *
+      }{
+        "{  ff{ }}" *
+      } if$
+      "{  jj{ }}" *
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+            {
+              t sortify *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+  year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+  calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+  type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.sort
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.sort
+        'author.sort
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+  last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+  'extra.label :=
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  year.sort.key
+  field.or.null sortify
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+  title field.or.null sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+    "\texttt {"
+  pop$
+  "\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+  eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+  "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+  "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize@url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@sanitize@url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+  "\providecommand \bibnamefont  [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+  "``" "''"
+  "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+  "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+  bibinfo.command  "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+  bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+  "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+  "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" *           write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%"               write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%"  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%"   write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+  "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+  warn.bib
+  "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%"   write$ newline$
+  " \@ifx{#1\undefined}"                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%"          write$ newline$
+  " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"    write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%"            write$ newline$
+  " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo"      write$ newline$
+  " \fi"                                   write$ newline$
+  "}%"                                     write$ newline$
+  init.bib.ay
+  init.bib.quote
+  init.bib.namefont
+  init.bib.hypertex
+  init.bib.eprint
+  init.bib.doi
+  init.bib.lang
+  init.bib.bibinfo
+  init.bib.translation
+  init.bib.endbibitem
+  "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+  "\let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty"          write$ newline$
+  "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+  id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+  control.bib
+  preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+  number.label int.to.str$
+  * "}%" *
+  write$ newline$
+  init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}%"
+  write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrmp4-2.bst'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aip/aipguide4-2.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aip/aipguide4-2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c2d31960f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aip/aipguide4-2.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aip/aipguide4-2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aip/aipguide4-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..039bfe0372
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aip/aipguide4-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,430 @@
+%% ****** Start of file auguide.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the AIPP distribution of substyles for REVTeX 4.2
+%%   For version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014
+%%
+%%   Copyright (c) 2014 American Institute of Physics Publishing
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+ reprint,%
+%secnumarabic,%
+ amssymb, amsmath,%
+ aip,cha,%
+%groupedaddress,%
+%frontmatterverbose,
+]{revtex4-2}
+
+\usepackage{docs}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\hyphenation{title}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2}%
+
+\author{AIP Journal Program}%
+\email{tex@aip.org}
+\affiliation{American Institute of Physics Publishing Suite 300, 1305 Walk Whitman Road\\Melville, New York 11747-4300, USA}%
+
+\date{November 2014}%
+\revised{December 2014}%
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is the author's guide to the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.2, 
+providing a useful formatting tool 
+for \LaTeX\ users submitting papers to journals 
+published by the American Institute of Physics.
+This guide is intended as an adjunct to the documentation for \revtex\ itself 
+(published by the American Physical Society), 
+so information contained therein is not repeated here, 
+except as it bears on the specific features of the AIP substyles.
+
+
+\subsection{Prerequisite Documentation}
+
+The following documentation should be considered your first source of information 
+on how to prepare your document for use with this format; 
+they are to be found within the APS \revtex~4.2 distribution. 
+Updated versions of these are maintained at
+the \revtex~4.2 homepage located at \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/},
+are also available at the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network (CTAN, see \url{http://www.ctan.org/}), 
+and form part of the \TeX Live distribution of \TeX.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.2}
+\item \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary}
+\end{itemize}
+The present guide builds upon these documents, with which you should already be familiar.
+
+The AIP substyles distribution for \revtex~4.2 includes 
+a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}), 
+a good starting point for 
+the manuscript you are preparing for submission to an AIP journal.
+
+By using \revtex's \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.2}, you can develop your
+document until it contains all of the content you desire.
+This guide informs you on document class options, commands, and 
+markup guidelines specific to AIP journals. 
+
+\subsection{Software Requirements}
+
+This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.2 installation including the AIP substyles. 
+Please see the installation guide included with the distribution.\cite{Note1}
+
+Please note that the AIP substyles work {\it only} with \revtex~4.2: 
+the original \revtex~4.0 release does {\it not} make the AIP substyle available, nor is it compatible with them. 
+
+For your computer to run \revtex~4.2 with the AIP substyles, the following are required:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+a working installation of \LaTeX\,
+\item
+\revtex~4.2 and all packages it requires,
+\item
+the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.2, and
+\item
+any further \LaTeX\ packages used in your document. 
+\end{itemize}
+
+The easiest way to obtain all of the needed software is to install an up-to-date distribution of \TeX,
+like \TeX Live, available on CTAN.
+
+To obtain the most up-to-date version of this software, please see \url{http://publishing.aip.org/authors/preparing-your-manuscript}.
+
+
+\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals}
+
+Authors preparing a manuscript for submission to
+AIP journals should consult the Information for Contributors for the applicable journal,
+available through links at \url{http://scitation.aip.org/authors}. 
+These requirements are not covered systematically in this author's guide; 
+you are responsible for understanding the requirements of the particular journal to which
+you will submit your article.
+
+For further information about journal requirements, contact the Editorial
+Office of the appropriate journal. (Follow links at \url{http://scitation.aip.org/authors}.)
+
+\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:resources}%
+Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies concerning the AIP journal substyles
+should be reported to AIP support at \href{mailto:tex@aip.org}{tex@aip.org}. 
+Reports should include information on the error and a 
+\textit{small} sample document that manifests the problem, if possible. 
+(Please don't send large files!) 
+
+Feedback concerning \revtex~4.2 itself should be sent, as usual, 
+to the American Physical Society at\\ \href{mailto:revtex@aps.org}{revtex@aps.org}. 
+
+To determine if the problem you are experiencing belongs to \revtex\ or is specific to the
+AIP substyles, simply remove \texttt{aip} from your document class options and rerun 
+your document. If the problem goes away, you may assume that it is due to the AIP substyles;
+if not, it belongs to \revtex.
+
+\section{Sample \LaTeXe\ Document}
+As the \revtex\ documentation makes clear, your document employs a \LaTeXe\ document class
+(specifically \texttt{revtex4-2.cls}), so you should use 
+the \LaTeXe\ commands and environments familiar to you with, say, the
+standard article class \texttt{revtex4-2.cls}, and you will be able to 
+employ many of the packages you are used to using with \LaTeXe.
+
+Using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example, 
+your document will start with the usual \revtex\ \cmd\documentclass\ statement, but with
+a particular document class option \texttt{aip} that specifies the AIP substyle:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+You will then invoke the \LaTeXe\-compatible packages your document requires, say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{graphicx}%
+\usepackage{dcolumn}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\end{verbatim}
+follow up with your document content:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{document}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+and finish with a statement specifying your Bib\TeX\ database:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliography{aipsamp}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The books
+in the bibliography of this guide provide extensive coverage of all topics
+pertaining to preparing documents under \LaTeXe\; they are highly recommended. 
+
+\section{\revtex\ Class Options Specific to AIP}
+
+\subsection{Journal Substyle}
+To access particular features of the AIP substyle, you will specify an additional document class option: the journal substyle, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,jcp]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+in this case, \textit{J. Chem. Phys.}, the default. 
+A complete list of AIP journals with the corresponding journal substyle appears in Table~\ref{tab:journals}.
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:journals}AIP journal substyles}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\textbf{Journal} & \textbf{class option} \\
+\itshape AIP Advances            &\texttt{adv}\\
+\itshape Appl. Phys. Lett. &\texttt{apl}\\
+\itshape Appl. Phys. Lett. Mater.&\texttt{apm}\\
+\itshape Biomicrofluidics  &\texttt{bmf}\\
+\itshape Chaos             &\texttt{cha}\\
+\itshape J. Appl. Phys.    &\texttt{jap}\\
+\itshape J. Chem. Phys.    &\texttt{jcp}\footnotemark[1]\\
+\itshape J. Math. Phys.    &\texttt{jmp}\\
+\itshape J. Renewable Sustainable Energy&\texttt{rse}\\
+\itshape Phys. Fluids      &\texttt{pof}\\
+\itshape Phys. Plasmas     &\texttt{pop}\\
+\itshape Rev. Sci. Instrum.&\texttt{rsi}\\
+\itshape Structural Dynamics     &\texttt{sd}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Default journal substyle.}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Options for Citations and Bibliography}
+The citation style for AIP journals is:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item 
+numerical (default style), 
+\item
+author-year, and
+\item
+numerical author-year,
+\end{itemize}
+the latter two styles being only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}
+
+The familiar numerical citations and numbered bibliography are the default for most journals: 
+citations are superscript numbers, and the (numbered) bibliographic entries appear in the order cited. 
+
+Author-year citations are only allowed for 
+\textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, with citations given in author-and-year format. 
+Bibliographic entries are sorted by alphabetical order of first author's surname, then by year. 
+
+Numerical author-year citations 
+(only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}) 
+are superscript numbers, just like numerical citations, 
+but the bibliographic entries are sorted like the author-year entries and are numbered. 
+This means that the first citation will not necessarily be~1.
+
+To obtain the numerical style, simply accept the default, or supply a class option of \texttt{numerical}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,numerical]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+For author-year citations for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, 
+you may specify the \texttt{author-year} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,author-year]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+Each of the above two options are part of standard \revtex.
+
+To obtain numerical author-year citations 
+for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, 
+give the author-numerical option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,author-numerical]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that the \texttt{author-numerical} option is not part of standard \revtex\, so use of it
+outside of the AIP substyles may not have any effect. 
+
+\subsection{Formatting Options}
+There are two commonly used formats for an article you may write. 
+One will comply with the manuscript submission formatting requirements of the editorial office of the journal you are submitting to.
+The other will emulate the format of your article in the published journal itself. 
+
+For journal submission, accept the default, or you may specify the \texttt{preprint} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,preprint]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+To emulate the formatting of the journal, specify the \texttt{reprint} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that emulation is not by any means complete: the fonts used will differ, and therefore
+the length of the article will not represent an accurate estimate. 
+Other details may also differ. 
+
+A summary of class options of interest to AIP authors appears in Table~\ref{tab:options}.
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:options}Other class options}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\textbf{Function} & \textbf{class option} \\
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Citation and References}}\\
+superscript numbered&\texttt{numerical}\footnotemark[1]\textsuperscript{,}\footnotemark[2]\\
+author-year&\texttt{author-year}\footnotemark[3]\\
+numbered author-year&\texttt{author-numerical}\footnotemark[3]\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Format}}\\
+journal submission&\texttt{preprint}\footnotemark[1]\\
+journal emulation&\texttt{reprint}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Default option.}%
+\footnotetext[2]{Standard}%
+\footnotetext[3]{Only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}}%
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup}
+\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to structure your file. 
+In general, the use of low-level commands like \TeX\ primitives or Plain \TeX\ macros 
+is less preferable. 
+Please see the \revtex\ User's Guide,\cite{Note2} 
+the \LaTeX\ manual,\cite{LaTeXman} 
+and the \LaTeXe\ book\cite{Compan} 
+for further details. 
+
+\subsection{Title and Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+
+The \revtex\ User's Guide has complete information on using \revtex's special markup for your
+article's title, author list, abstract, and other front matter elements. 
+Note that class option \texttt{superscriptaddress} is the default for the AIP substyles, 
+as required by all AIP journals. 
+
+\subsection{Lead Paragraph}
+One AIP journal, \textit{Chaos}, requires a paragraph of text to precede the first
+\cmd\section\ of the article; 
+this is known as a lead paragraph and is formatted boldface. 
+To give your article a lead paragraph, 
+include a quotation environment ahead of the first \cmd\section\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-2}
+\begin{document}
+ \begin{quotation}
+  Here is my lead paragraph!
+ \end{quotation}
+ \section{Introduction}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \texttt{quotation} environment functions normally after the first \cmd\section\ command in the document.
+
+\section{Body}
+
+For general information on commands used in the body of the document, see the \revtex\ User's Guide.
+Herein are some features specific to the AIP author.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+If you are using numbered citations (numerical or numbered author-year), 
+footnotes are by default incorporated into the reference section 
+along with your bibliographic entries. 
+This automated feature is only effective if you use Bib\TeX\ to prepare your
+bibliography. 
+
+Author-year style bibliography does not lend itself to such a treatment, 
+so by default footnotes appear in text as is usual. 
+However, be advised that, if your article is accepted for publication,
+footnotes may be incorporated into text during the production process.
+
+\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes}
+
+The preparation of your bibliography ``by hand'' is possible; 
+however, if you do so, 
+you will be entirely responsible 
+for compliance with submission requirements for your bibliographic entries, 
+for incorporating any text footnotes into the references, 
+and for checking bibliographic entries. 
+(In this connection, you may find useful the file \texttt{reftest.tex}, distributed with \revtex.)
+
+There are numerous reasons to use Bib\TeX, not least because it automates the first and second of the above checks. 
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\protect\TeX}
+
+Refer to the \revtex\ User's Guide, the \LaTeX\ manual, and the Bib\TeX\ manual
+for full information about using Bib\TeX. 
+
+When using Bib\TeX\, keep in mind that changing your bibliography style or citation style
+(via the document class options described above) will require you to rerun Bib\TeX.
+The standard litany (using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example) for this is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+> latex aipsamp
+> bibtex aipsamp
+> latex aipsamp
+> latex aipsamp
+\end{verbatim}
+Here, the first invocation of \texttt{latex} has the effect of rewriting the
+\texttt{aipsamp.aux} file,
+and the invocation of \texttt{bibtex} creates a new \texttt{aipsamp.bbl} file. 
+The next two runs of \texttt{latex} are then required: 
+the first to update the \texttt{aipsamp.aux} file reflecting the new values of your citations
+and the second to employ those citations correctly. 
+Be sure to check the end of the \texttt{aipsamp.log} file for any message advising you to 
+rerun \texttt{latex}. 
+
+\subsection{Multiple References per Citation}
+In an article using numerical citations, 
+it is not uncommon to encounter the need for a citation 
+that refers to more than one article or other reference. 
+To accommodate such a case, \revtex~4.2 implements markup similar to that of the 
+\texttt{mcite} package for \LaTeXe. 
+
+Let's say that two citation keys \texttt{able} and \texttt{baker} 
+need to be combined into a single reference.
+The syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+word\cite{able,*baker} further text
+\end{verbatim}
+When you run Bib\TeX\, the resulting bibliography will contain the two entries, but run together
+as a single numbered reference.
+In the \cmd\cite\ command argument, any cite key that starts with the * character
+signifies that its bibliographic entry is to be joined together with the one preceding it;
+the \texttt{*} may join together any number of entries into a single reference.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}\label{sec:TeXbooks}%
+\bibitem{Note1}
+For help regarding the installation of this software and its use, please send email to \href{mailto:tex@aip.org}{tex@aip.org}.
+%
+\bibitem{Note2}
+Available with the \revtex\ distribution, see \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}.
+%
+\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman} 
+L. Lamport, 
+\emph{\LaTeX\, a Document Preparation System} 
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996).
+%
+\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan} 
+M. Goosens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin, 
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} 
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994).
+%
+\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook} 
+D. E. Knuth, 
+\emph{The \TeX book} 
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986). 
+%
+\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide} 
+H. Kopka and P. Daly, 
+\emph{A Guide to \LaTeXe} 
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995).
+%
+\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG} 
+M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and F. Mittelbach, 
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Graphics Companion} 
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997).
+%
+\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW} 
+S. Rahtz, M. Goossens \emph{et al.},
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion} 
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999).
+%
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aps/apsguide4-2.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aps/apsguide4-2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..02819f0cec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aps/apsguide4-2.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aps/apsguide4-2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aps/apsguide4-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f50d9a832e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/aps/apsguide4-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+%% ****** Start of file apsguide4-2.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution.
+%%   Version 4.2b of REVTeX, December 2018.
+%%
+%%   Copyright (c) 2019 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%%   See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\documentclass[twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, nobibnotes, aps, prd]{revtex4-2}
+%\usepackage{acrofont}%NOTE: Comment out this line for the release version!
+\newcommand{\revtex}{REV\TeX\ }
+\newcommand{\classoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\macro}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}}
+\newcommand{\m}[1]{\macro{#1}}
+\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\setlength{\textheight}{9.5in}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2}%
+
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email[REVTeX Support: ]{revtex@aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{December 2018}%
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+Articles published in American Physical Society journals are converted to 
+an XML file during final journal production. Other formats such
+as PDF are derived directly from the XML, which constitutes the version of record. 
+Even before journal production, the APS editorial process can make use
+of the information in a properly prepared manuscript. Information such
+as title, authors, affiliations, etc., can be automatically
+extracted and used to populate our manuscript database. References can
+also be culled, cross-checked for accuracy, and used to create a
+linked version for referees and editors. Moreover, time can be saved
+as referrals can be made electronically rather than by conventional
+mail. Thus, a well-prepared electronic manuscript can enhance the
+entire peer review process from author to reader while making the
+whole process less expensive. To this end, authors should follow the
+guidelines in this document when preparing their submissions to \textit{Physical Review Letters},
+ \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics},  \textit{Physical Review A-E, Physical Review X, Physical Review Applied. Physical Review Fluids, Physical Review Materials, Physical Review Accelerators and Beams,} and \textit{Physical Review Physics Education Research}.
+ 
+Updated versions of this document will be made available at  \url{https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}. For more complete
+descriptions of how to use the \revtex\ 4.2 macros, please see the
+\textit{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.2
+distribution. Questions about \revtex\ 4.2 and using it to submit to APS journals may be
+emailed to \texttt{revtex@aps.org}.
+
+\section{Formatting}
+\subsection{Preprint, reprint, and twocolumn options}
+\revtex~4.2 offers a \classoption{reprint} class option to typeset a manuscript
+in a format that is a close approximation to the actual journal's appearance. It should
+be emphasized that this is only an \textit{approximation}; a manuscript may be substantially different
+in length or appearance after it goes through our production process. This is mostly due to the choice
+of fonts and the scaling of figures.
+
+\revtex\ 4.2 is designed to
+make it straightforward to switch between two-column and single-column
+formatting just by changing the class option. Authors may submit with
+either the \classoption{reprint} or the \classoption{twocolumn} class options.
+The \classoption{preprint} primarily does three things: It increases
+the font size to 12pt, increases the line spacing, and changes the
+formatting to single column.
+
+\subsection{Paper size}
+Manuscripts should be submitted to APS formatted for letter size
+paper. Papers are sent electronically to referees who may
+want to print them out. Letter size formatting ensures that this will
+be trouble free for all referees.
+
+\section{Marking up front matter}
+Perhaps the most important macros are those 
+pertaining to the markup of the front matter (title, authors,
+affiliations, abstract, etc.). Note that proper
+use of the \revtex\ 4.2 macros means that explicit centering environments
+in the front matter are not needed and should not be used.
+
+\subsection{Title}
+The title of the manuscript should be specified using the \m{title} macro. A
+double backslash {\textbackslash\textbackslash} may be used to force a line break in a long
+title.
+
+\subsection{Authors, affiliations, and collaborations}
+\label{sec:authors}
+\revtex\ 4.2 makes it straightforward to input author names and link them up properly with affiliations. Authors should let \revtex\ 4.2 do the work of grouping authors and affiliations and, if using the superscript style, numbering affiliations. Please follow these guidelines:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use a single \m{author} macro for each author's name. \revtex\ 4.2 automatically puts in all commas and the word `and.'
+\item Use the \m{surname} macro to explicitly indicate if an author's family name consists of more than one name or if the family name is not the author's last name.
+\item The \m{email} macro may be used to specify an author's e-mail
+address. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the
+e-mail address itself may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{homepage} macro may be used to specify a URL associated
+with an author. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the
+URL may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{altaffiliation} macro may be used to specify an alternate
+affiliation or temporary address for an author. The \m{thanks} macro
+must not be used for this. Only the affiliation
+may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{thanks} macro may be used only if one of the more
+specific macros list above does not apply.
+\item Use a single \m{affiliation} for each affiliation.
+\item Superscripts linking authors to affiliations must be
+accomplished using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option
+rather than putting in explicit superscripts by hand.
+\item A collaboration may be specified by using the \m{collaboration}
+macro. The \m{author} macro must not be used for collaborations.
+\end{itemize}
+\subsection{Abstract}
+The abstract must be specified using the \env{abstract}
+environment. Note that in \revtex\ 4.2, the abstract must come before
+the \m{maketitle} command. \revtex\ 4.2 now allows the the use of the \env{description}
+environment within the abstract to provide \textit{structured abstracts}. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's  \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished in the following manner:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{References and footnotes}
+Authors are strongly encouraged
+to use Bib\TeX\ when preparing their bibliographies.  If Bib\TeX\ is used, current production processes
+require that the \texttt{.bbl} file be included directly into the
+manuscript's main \texttt{.tex} file. \revtex\ 4.2 comes with two Bib\TeX\ style files for formatting
+references, one for the \textit{Physical Review} journals and one 
+for \textit{Review of Modern Physics}. In 4.2, the Bib\TeX\ styles have been modified to display journal article titles in the bibliography.
+
+The following apply whether
+Bib\TeX\ is used or not.  
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Authors should use the \m{cite} and \m{bibitem} commands to create
+bibliographies and to refer to items in the bibliography. ``By hand"
+numbering of references should be avoided.
+\item \revtex~4.2 provides new syntax for combining multiple citations into a single entry in the bibliography and for putting extra text before and after a reference. Please refer to \textit{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.2 distribution for full details.
+\item Footnotes must be specified using the \m{footnote}
+macro. \revtex\ 4.2 will place the footnotes in
+the bibliography for the \textit{Physical Review}
+journals. Please note that even if you don't use Bib\TeX, you may have to run Bib\TeX\ to get the footnotes to appear. Footnotes giving additional information about authors (such
+as e-mail addresses) must not be specified using the \m{footnote}
+macro (see Section~\ref{sec:authors}).
+\item Avoid custom footnotes using \m{footnotemark} and \m{footnotetext} [except in the context of tables (see
+Section~\ref{sec:tablenotes})].
+\item References should be formatted and specified according to the
+\textit{Physical Review Style Guide}. Note that using Bib\TeX\ automatically ensures this.
+\item URLs should be specified using the \m{url} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take
+care of this if the \texttt{url} field is used.
+\item E-print identifiers should be included using the \m{eprint} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take care of this if the \texttt{eprint} field is used.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Please see the \revtex~4.2 Author's Guide for new features in \revtex~4.2's APS Bib\TeX\ styles, including support for citing data sets, journals that use DOIs in place of page numbers, and journals that use year and issue instead of volume to uniquely identify articles.
+
+\section{Body of the paper}
+\subsection{Sectioning and cross-referencing}
+For sectioning a manuscript, the basic rule is to use the appropriate
+sectioning commands (\m{section}, \m{subsection}, \m{subsubsection},
+\textit{etc.}). Cross-referencing a section must be done by using the
+proper \m{label} and \m{ref} commands. Cross-referencing by hand is
+not allowed. \m{part}, \m{chapter}, and \m{subparagraph} should not be
+used.
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+Appendices should be specified using the \m{appendix} command which
+specifies that all following sections create with the \m{section}
+commands are appendices. If there is only one appendix, then the
+\m{appendix*} command should be used instead.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+Any acknowledgments should be included by using the
+\env{acknowledgments} environment. Note that in \revtex~4.2, this is
+an environment and not a command.
+
+\subsection{Counters}
+No counters may be created and the standard ones may not be
+altered. If an exceptional label is needed for an equation, the \m{tag}
+command (requires the \classoption{amsmath} class option) should be used. Please
+note that the use of the \m{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package
+due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}.
+
+\subsection{Fonts}
+It is preferable to avoid the older \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ 2.09 macros for
+controlling fonts such as \m{rm}, \m{it}, \textit{etc.} Rather, it is
+better to use the macros introduced in \LaTeXe.  If the older font
+commands are used (they really should be avoided!), be sure to use
+curly braces to properly limit the extent of the font
+change. \verb+{\bf ...}+ is the correct method.
+Commands for controlling text and math font changes are summarized in
+Table~\ref{tab:fonts}.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ and AMS-\LaTeX\ font summary.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lp{2in}}
+\m{textit} & Italics. Replaces \m{it}\\
+\m{textbf} & Bold face. Replaces \m{bf}\\
+\m{textrm} & Roman. Replaces \m{rm}\\
+\m{textsl} & Slanted. Replaces \m{sl}\\
+\m{textsc} & Small caps. Replaces \m{sc}\\
+\m{textsf} & Sans serif. Replaces \m{sf}\\
+\m{texttt} & Typewriter. Replaces \m{tt}\\
+\m{textmd} & Medium series\\
+\m{textnormal} & Normal\\
+\m{textup} & Upright\\
+\m{mathbf} & Bold face\\
+\m{mathcal} & Replaces \m{cal}\\
+\m{mathit} & Italics\\
+\m{mathnormal} & Replaces \m{mit}\\
+\m{mathsf} & Sans serif\\
+\m{mathtt} & Typewriter\\
+\m{mathfrak} & Fraktur: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\
+\m{mathbb} & Bold blackboard: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\
+\m{bm} & Bold Greek and other math symbols: Requires
+\verb+\usepackage{bm}+ and may require the \classoption{amsfonts} class
+option
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Bold Greek letters and other bold math symbols should be accomplished
+with the use of \texttt{bm.sty} which is distributed as a required
+tool with the latest versions of \LaTeXe\ and should be loaded via
+\verb+\usepackage{bm}+. This package introduces the \m{bm}
+macro. Some bold characters may require using the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option.
+
+New fonts may not be declared with \m{newfont}. Font attribute
+commands for selecting a font family, shape, and series are all
+disallowed; the standard \LaTeXe\ font selection macros list above
+should be used instead.
+
+Finally, the \m{symbol} macro is also not allowed.
+
+\subsection{Environments}
+\subsubsection{Lists}
+The standard list environments \texttt{itemize}, \texttt{enumerate},
+and \texttt{description} are allowed. The \m{item} macro with or without
+the optional argument is also allowed. Customization of the list environments
+(with macros such as \m{labelstyle}, \m{labelitemi}, \m{labelenumi},
+\m{itemsep}, etc.) is allowed but may be ignored in production.
+Generalized lists (\m{begin\{list\}}) and trivial lists
+(\m{begin\{trivlist\}}) are not allowed.
+
+\subsubsection{Other Environments}
+Creating generalized new environments with \m{newenvironment} is not
+allowed. Creating a new theorem environment with \m{newtheorem} is
+allowed though.
+
+The tabbing environment and the macros \m{=}, \m{$>$}, \m{`}, and
+\m{'} are allowed but may be ignored in production. Conversion
+programs used in production should recognize the escapes \m{a=},
+\m{a'}, and \m{a`} for using the corresponding accents within a
+tabbing environment though.
+
+The \env{verbatim} environment is allowed.
+
+\subsection{Boxes}
+Most boxes and macros to manipulate them are not allowed. These
+include \m{raisebox}, \m{parbox}, \m{minipage}, \m{rulebox},
+\m{framebox}, \m{mbox}, \m{fbox}, \m{savebox}, \m{newsavebox},
+\m{sbox}, \m{usebox}, and the environment \m{begin\{lrbox\}}. Rules
+produced with \m{rule} are not allowed.
+
+\subsubsection{Margin Notes}
+Margin notes created with \m{marginpar} are not allowed, as are the
+associated style parameters \m{marginparwidth}, \m{marginparsep}, and
+\m{marginparpush}.
+
+
+\section{Math Markup}
+In general, all math markup and the standard math environments from
+\LaTeXe\ are allowed. These include \m{begin\{math\}},
+\m{begin\{displaymath\}}, \m{begin\{equation\}},
+\m{begin\{eqnarray\}}, and \m{begin\{eqnarray*\}}. The shortcuts \$,
+\$\$, \m{[}, and \m{]} are allowed. In addition, authors may use
+almost all of the additional markup introduced by AMS-\LaTeX\ by using
+the \classoption{amsmath} class option. The explicit exceptions are
+\m{genfrac}, \m{boxed}, and \m{smash}. The markup contained in
+\texttt{amsextra} and \texttt{amsthm} may not be used
+though. Commutative diagrams created with the \texttt{amscd} package
+are acceptable.
+
+\section{Figures}
+\subsection{Figure inclusions}
+Figures should be included into a \revtex~4.2 manuscript by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ macros. \LaTeXe\ includes
+several powerful packages for including the files in various
+formats. The two main packages are \texttt{graphics} and
+\texttt{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called
+\m{includegraphics};
+they mainly differ in how arguments for
+controlling figure placement (\textit{e.g.}, scaling and rotation)
+are passed to the \m{includegraphics}.
+
+The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the
+figure and to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they
+fit best.  If a figure needs to be referred to in the text,
+rather than manually numbering the figures a \m{label} should be added
+to the figure environment (best practice is to put the label within
+the argument of the \m{caption} command) and the \m{ref} macro should be used to
+reference this label. Figures that span the page should use the
+\m{figure*} environment. The \env{picture} environment must not be
+used directly (one can include an Encapsulated PostScript figure that
+was produced using the \env{picture} environment of course).
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:figplace}Figure placement}
+Figures should be placed as close as possible to the point where they are first
+referenced. There is no need to place all figures
+separately at the end of the manuscript and it is preferred that
+authors leave the figures in their natural locations. Authors may
+also find useful the \revtex~4.2 \classoption{floatfix} class option
+which adds emergency float placement processing to avoid ``stuck''
+floats which would otherwise be deferred to the end of the job (and
+can lead to the fatal \texttt{``Too many unprocessed floats''}
+message).
+
+
+\section{Tables}
+\label{sec:tables}
+The standard \LaTeXe\ table formatting environments are supported as is
+the use of the \texttt{longtable} package. Tables may be reformatted
+during production to meet APS style guidelines.
+Here are some helpful hints for trying to get tables formatted correctly:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use the \texttt{longtable} package to get tables to break
+across pages.
+\item The macro \m{squeezetable} will reduce the font size of the
+table. This macro must occur within a group outside the table
+environment. The proper markup is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\squeezetable
+\begin{table}
+...
+\end{table}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+\item Try using the float placement option \texttt{H} which will
+enable \LaTeX\ to break a float across pages. Long tables are more
+attractively set with \env{longtable} however.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}[H]
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}
+...
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Doubled rules and table formatting}
+\revtex\ 4.2 provides the \env{ruledtabular} environment which
+automatically puts the scotch rules (double lines) around tables and
+formats all enclosed \env{tabular} environments to the full width of
+the tables and improves inter-column spacing. This environment should
+be used whenever possible.
+
+\subsection{Wide tables}
+When typesetting using \classoption{twocolumn}, tables can either span
+a single column or both columns. Using the '\verb+*+'-ed version of
+the \env{table} or \env{longtable} environments produces wide tables
+that span the columns.
+
+Tables that are very wide and that may be better typeset in a
+landscape orientation (rotated 90 degrees) should be enclosed in a
+\env{turnpage} environment. This will place the rotated table on its own
+page. Note that some dvi previewers may not be able to show the table
+properly, but \texttt{dvips} and \texttt{pdflatex} work correctly.
+
+\subsection{Table placement}
+Tables should be placed as close as possible to the point where they
+are first referenced. There is no need to place all tables separately
+at the end of the manuscript and this is not desirable for APS
+purposes. The class option \classoption{floatfix} may be helpful for
+table placement as well as figure placement (see Section~\ref{sec:figplace}).
+
+\subsection{Aligning columns on a decimal point}
+The standard \LaTeXe\ macro package \classoption{dcolumn} should be
+used to accomplish this.
+
+\subsection{Tablenotes}
+\label{sec:tablenotes}
+Footnotes in tables (tablenotes) should use the \m{footnote}
+macro. However, if more than one reference to the same footnote is
+needed, authors may use \m{footnotetext} and \m{footnotemark}. This
+will produce notes (labeled by lower-case roman letters) inserted
+below the table rather than in the reference section or at the bottom
+of the page.
+
+
+\section{Author-defined macros}
+Authors may define convenience macros to save keystrokes. This means
+that the macros may not invoke \TeX\ macros such as \m{if} or other
+context dependent commands. Also, \LaTeXe\ provides three macros for
+declaring new commands: \m{providecommand}, \m{newcommand}, and
+\m{renewcommand} (as well as their `\verb+*+'-ed versions). These
+should be used. Authors may not use \TeX\relax's low-level commands
+\m{def}, \m{edef}, and \m{gdef}.
+
+\section{Summary}
+To ensure the best use of \TeX\ manuscripts, authors need to follow
+the guidelines specified here. Use of low-level formatting commands to
+finely control horizontal and vertical spacing may be ignored during
+production, or even worse, make it impossible to convert the
+manuscript to XML. Authors should keep
+things as simple as possible and correctly use the proper \revtex~4.2
+or \LaTeXe\ macros. Any questions about usage may be directed to
+\texttt{revtex@aps.org}.
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/auguide4-2.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/auguide4-2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aae56da335
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/auguide4-2.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/auguide4-2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/auguide4-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..deeaf3aeb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/auguide4-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1799 @@
+%% ****** Start of file authguide.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%%   Version 4.2b of REVTeX, January 2019
+%%
+%%   Copyright (c) 2019 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%%   See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+,aps%
+ ,twocolumn%
+ ,secnumarabic%
+,amssymb, amsmath,nobibnotes, aps, prl, floatfix]{revtex4-2}
+\usepackage{docs}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide}%
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email{revtex@aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{December 2018}%
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\clearpage
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is the author's guide to \revtex~4.2, the preferred submission
+format for all APS and AIP journals. This guide is intended to be a concise
+introduction to \revtex~4.2. The documentation has been separated out
+into smaller units to make it easier to locate essential
+information.
+
+The following documentation is also part of the \revtex~4.2
+distribution. Updated versions of these will be maintained at
+the \revtex~4.2 homepage located at \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2}
+\item \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2}
+\item \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary}
+\end{itemize}
+This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.2
+installation. Please see the installation instructions included with the
+distribution.
+\subsection{Changes in \revtex~4.2}
+The \revtex\ system for \LaTeX\ began its development in 1986 and has gone through three major revisions since then.  \revtex~4 was released in August, 2001. Since that time, many user requests for new features were received. These requests were taken care of in the \revtex~4.1, which was released in August, 2010. \revtex~4.2 is the current release.
+
+\revtex~4.2 incorporates the following changes:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Added support for additional APS journals,  \textit{Physical Review X},  \textit{Physical Review Accelerators and Beams}, \textit{Physical Review Applied}, \textit{Physical Review Fluids}, \textit{Physical Review Materials}, and \textit{Physical Review Physics Education Research}.} There are new options \texttt{prx},  \texttt{prab}, \texttt{prapplied}, \texttt{prfluids}, and \texttt{prmaterials}, and \texttt{prper}.
+
+\item \textbf{Added a unified \texttt{physrev} option for \textit{Physical Review} journal style (the \textit{Phys. Rev.} journals have no or few variations).}
+
+\item \textbf{The \texttt{prb} option now conforms with \textit{Physical Review B}'s updated style that uses the same non-superscripted citations as other APS journals}.
+
+\item \textbf{Added support for additional AIP journals, \textit{AIP Advances}, \textit{Applied Physics Letters Materials}, and \textit{Structural Dynamics} as well as \textit{AIP Conference Proceedings}. There are new options \texttt{adv}, \texttt{apm}, \texttt{sd}, and \texttt{cp}.}
+
+\item \textbf{Added support for the  Society of Rheology (\texttt{sor}) and its journal, \textit{Journal of Rheology} (\texttt{jor}).}
+
+\item \textbf{The \texttt{reprint} style for AIP's journal JMP was changed to one-column formatting.}
+
+\item \textbf{For all APS journal options, complete article titles are now displayed in bibliography entries citing journal articles when using Bib\TeX\ by default.}
+
+\item \textbf{In the \textit{Phys. Rev.} Bib\TeX\ style file, article titles in the bibliography are set in roman font}.    
+
+\item \textbf{The behavior of the \texttt{noeprints} option has been improved}.    
+
+\item \textbf{Support has been added for citing data sets in the Bib\TeX\ styles}.
+
+\item \textbf{Support for citing journals that use a DOI instead of pages or article identifiers has been improved (for APS \textit{Phys. Rev.} Bib\TeX\ style)}.
+
+\item \textbf{The indentation of tables of contents have been improved}.
+
+\item \textbf{The \texttt{onecolumn} option no longer defaults to creating a separate title page}.
+
+\item \textbf{The \texttt{showpacs} option is completely ignored now}.
+
+\item \textbf{A bug when using \texttt{booktabs.sty} has been fixed}.
+
+\item \textbf{The formatting of references for some commonly cited journals has been improved in the \textit{Phys. Rev.} Bib\TeX\ style}.
+
+\item \textbf{URLs generated for DOIs now use \texttt{https://doi.org/} as the base in the Bib\TeX\ styles.}
+
+\item \textbf{URLs generated for arXiv.org e-print identifiers now use \texttt{https://arXiv.org/abs/} as the base in the Bib\TeX\ styles.}
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{\revtex~4 Backwards Compatibility}
+Documents prepared under \revtex~4 and \revtex~4.1 should process correctly under \revtex~4.2. However, the formatting of the pages and, if using Bib\TeX, the references may change. Under 4.2, articles typeset with the \texttt{prb} option will be typeset \texttt{cite} commands differently and adjacent punctuation may need to be moved accordingly. Default behaviors some other options may also have changed as described above.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Submitting to APS Journals}
+
+Authors using \revtex~4.2 to prepare a manuscript for submission to
+\textit{Physical Review Letters}, \textit{Physical Review},  \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}, 
+or other APS journals must also read the companion document \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2}
+distributed with \revtex\ and follow the guidelines detailed there.
+
+The \revtex~4.2 distribution includes both a template
+(\file{apstemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{apssamp.tex}).
+The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the
+following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for
+creating a paper using \revtex~4.2.
+
+Further information about submissions to the American
+Physical Society may be found at \url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}.
+
+\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals}
+
+\revtex~4.2 includes support for the journals of the American Institute of Physics.
+The style files and authoring guides for these journals are distributed as part
+\revtex~4.2 distribution. The distribution includes both a template
+(\file{aiptemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}).
+The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the
+following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for
+creating a paper using \revtex~4.2.
+
+
+
+More information may be found at 
+\url{http://publishing.aip.org/authors/preparing-your-manuscript}. Please consult the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} for more information about submissions to AIP journals, AIP styles files, and other AIP-specific information.
+
+\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:aipresources}%
+Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies with \revtex\ or the APS journal style files should be reported to
+\revtex\ support at \verb+revtex@aps.org+. Reports should include information on the error and a \textit{small}
+sample document that manifests the problem if possible (please don't send large files!). Issues related to the AIP journal styles should be sent directly to \verb+tex@aip.org+.
+
+\section{Some \LaTeXe\ Basics}
+\revtex~4.2 must sometimes patch the underlying
+\LaTeX\ kernel. This means that \revtex~4.2 requires a fairly recent version of
+\LaTeXe. Versions prior to 2005/12/01 may not work
+correctly. \revtex~4.2 will be maintained to be compatible with future
+versions of \LaTeXe.
+
+\subsection{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup}
+\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to accomplish many basic tasks.
+
+\subsubsection{Fonts}
+
+Because \revtex~4.2 is based upon \LaTeXe, it inherits all of the
+macros used for controlling fonts. Of particular importance are the
+\LaTeXe\ macros \cmd{\textit}, \cmd{\textbf}, \cmd{\texttt} for changing to
+an italic, bold, or typewriter font respectively. One should always
+use these macros rather than the lower-level \TeX\ macros \cmd{\it},
+\cmd{\bf}, and \cmd{\tt}. The \LaTeXe\ macros offer
+improvements such as better italic correction and scaling in super-
+and subscripts for example. Table~\ref{tab:fonts}
+summarizes the font selection commands in \LaTeXe.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ font commands}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Text Fonts}}\\
+\textbf{Font command} & \textbf{Explanation} \\
+\cmd\textit\marg{text}  & Italics\\
+\cmd\textbf\marg{text}  & Boldface\\
+\cmd\texttt\marg{text}  & Typewriter\\
+\cmd\textrm\marg{text}  & Roman\\
+\cmd\textsl\marg{text}  & Slanted\\
+\cmd\textsf\marg{text}  & Sans Serif\\
+\cmd\textsc\marg{text}  & Small Caps\\
+\cmd\textmd\marg{text}  & Medium Series\\
+\cmd\textnormal\marg{text} & Normal Series\\
+\cmd\textup\marg{text}  & Upright Series\\
+  &\\
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Math Fonts}}\\
+\cmd\mathit\marg{text}  & Math Italics\\
+\cmd\mathbf\marg{text}  & Math Boldface\\
+\cmd\mathtt\marg{text}  & Math Typewriter\\
+\cmd\mathsf\marg{text}  & Math Sans Serif\\
+\cmd\mathcal\marg{text}  & Calligraphic\\
+\cmd\mathnormal\marg{text} & Math Normal\\
+\cmd\bm\marg{text}& Bold math for Greek letters\\
+                  & and other symbols\\
+\cmd\mathfrak\marg{text}\footnotemark[1]  & Fraktur\\
+\cmd\mathbb\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Blackboard Bold\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Requires \classname{amsfonts} or \classname{amssymb} class option}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsubsection{User-defined macros}
+\LaTeXe\ provides several macros that enable users to easily create new
+macros for use in their manuscripts:
+\begin{itemize}
+\footnotesize
+\item \cmd\newcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def} 
+\item \cmd\newcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\renewcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\renewcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\providecommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\providecommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\end{itemize}
+Here \meta{\\command} is the name of the macro being defined,
+\meta{narg} is the number of arguments the macro takes,
+\meta{opt} are optional default values for the arguments, and
+\meta{def} is the actually macro definiton. \cmd\newcommand\ creates a
+new macro, \cmd\renewcommand\ redefines a previously defined macro,
+and \cmd\providecommand\ will define a macro only if it hasn't
+been defined previously. The *-ed versions are an optimization that
+indicates that the macro arguments will always be ``short'' arguments. This is
+almost always the case, so the *-ed versions should be used whenever
+possible.
+
+The use of these macros is preferred over using plain \TeX's low-level
+macros such as
+\cmd\def{},\cmd\edef{}, and \cmd\gdef{}. APS authors must follow the
+\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} when defining macros.
+
+\subsubsection{Symbols}
+
+\LaTeXe\ has added some convenient commands for some special symbols
+and effects. These are summarized in Table~\ref{tab:special}. See
+\cite{Guide} for details.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:special}\LaTeXe\ commands for special symbols and effects}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lc}
+Command & Symbol/Effect\\
+\cmd\textemdash & \textemdash\\
+\cmd\textendash & \textendash\\
+\cmd\textexclamdown & \textexclamdown\\
+\cmd\textquestiondown & \textquestiondown\\
+\cmd\textquotedblleft & \textquotedblleft\\
+\cmd\textquotedblright & \textquotedblright\\
+\cmd\textquoteleft & \textquoteleft\\
+\cmd\textquoteright & \textquoteright\\
+\cmd\textbullet   & \textbullet\\
+\cmd\textperiodcentered & \textperiodcentered\\
+\cmd\textvisiblespace & \textvisiblespace\\
+\cmd\textcompworkmark & Break a ligature\\
+\cmd\textcircled\marg{char} & Circle a character\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\LaTeXe\ provides additional symbols in a
+separate package called \classname{latexsym}. To use these symbols, include
+the package using:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{latexsym}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Using \LaTeXe\ packages with \revtex}\label{sec:usepackage}%
+
+Many \LaTeXe\ packages are available, for instance, on CTAN at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/}
+and at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/}. Full \TeX\ distributions
+such as  \TeX\
+Live  \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive/} provide an excellent and complete installation of \TeX\ that is
+easy to maintain.  Some of these packages
+are automatically loaded by \revtex~4.2 when certain class options are
+invoked and are, thus, ``required.''  They will either be distributed
+with \revtex\ or are already included with a standard \LaTeXe\
+distribution.
+
+Required packages are automatically loaded by \revtex\ on an as-needed
+basis.  Other packages should be loaded using the
+\cmd\usepackage\ command. To load the
+\classname{hyperref} package, the document preamble might look like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{revtex4-2}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Some common (and very useful) \LaTeXe\ packages are \textit{a priori}
+important enough that \revtex~4.2 has been designed to be specifically
+compatible with them. 
+A bug stemming from the use of one of these packages in
+conjunction with any of the APS journals may be reported by contacting
+\revtex\ support.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{AMS packages}] \revtex~4.2 is compatible with and depends
+ upon the AMS packages
+\classname{amsfonts},
+\classname{amssymb}, and
+\classname{amsmath}. In fact, \revtex~4.2 requires use of these packages
+to accomplish some common tasks. See Section~\ref{sec:math} for more.
+\revtex~4.2 requires version 2.0 or higher of the AMS-\LaTeX\ package.
+
+\item[\textbf{array and dcolumn}]
+The \classname{array} and \classname{dcolumn} packages are part of
+\LaTeX's required suite of packages. \classname{dcolumn} is required
+to align table columns on decimal points (and it in turn depends upon
+the \classname{array} package).
+
+\item[\textbf{longtable}]
+\file{longtable.sty} may be used for large tables that will span more than one
+page. \revtex~4.2 dynamically applies patches to longtable.sty so that
+it will work in two-column mode.
+
+\item[\textbf{hyperref}] \file{hyperref.sty} is a package that is
+used for putting hypertext links into \LaTeXe\ documents.
+\revtex~4.2 has hooks to allow e-mail addresses and URL's to become
+hyperlinks if \classname{hyperref} is loaded.
+
+\item[\textbf{booktabs}] \revtex~4.2 improves compatibility with \classname{booktabs.sty}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+Other packages will conflict with \revtex~4.2 and should be
+avoided. Usually such a conflict arises because the package adds
+enhancements that \revtex~4.2 already includes. Here are some common
+packages that clash with \revtex~4.2:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{multicol}] \file{multicol.sty} is a package by Frank Mittelbach
+that adds support for multiple columns. In fact, early versions of
+\revtex~4.2 used \file{multicol.sty} for precisely this. \revtex\  
+incorporates its own support for multiple-column typesetting.
+
+\item[\textbf{cite}] Donald Arseneau's \file{cite.sty} is often used to provide
+support for sorting a \cmd\cite\ command's arguments into numerical
+order and to collapse consecutive runs of reference numbers. \revtex~4.2
+has this functionality built-in already via the \classname{natbib} package.
+
+\item[\textbf{mcite}] \revtex~4.2 already contains a lot of this
+functionality through its updated syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command and
+the latest  \classname{natbib} package.
+
+\item[\textbf{endfloat}] The same functionality can be accomplished
+using the \classoption{endfloats} class option.
+
+\item[\textbf{float}] \texttt{float.sty} provides a mechanism for creating new float classes with just a few commands. \revtex~4.2 has limited compatible with float.sty. If attempting to use this package, be sure to put any \cmd\newfloat\ commands after the \verb+\begin{document}+ line.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\section{The Document Preamble}
+
+The preamble of a \LaTeX\ document is the set of commands that precede
+the \envb{document} line. It contains a
+\cmd\documentclass\ line to load the \revtex~4.2 class (\textit{i.e.},
+all of the \revtex~4.2 macro definitions), \cmd\usepackage\ macros to
+load other macro packages, and other macro definitions.
+
+\subsection{The \emph{documentclass} line}
+The basic formatting of the manuscript is controlled by setting
+\emph{class options} using
+\cmd\documentclass\oarg{options}\aarg{\classname{revtex4-2}}.
+The optional arguments that appear in the square brackets control the layout of the
+document. At this point, one only needs to choose:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Either the \classoption{aps} (default) or \classoption{aip} society option
+\item One of the chosen society's journal styles such as \classoption{prl} or \classoption{apl}
+\item A layout option such as \classoption{preprint} (single-column formatting), \classoption{reprint} (an approximation
+to the selected journal's actual layout which may be one- or two-column depending on the journal), or \classoption{twocolumn}
+\end{itemize}
+Usually, one would want to use \classoption{preprint} for draft papers. Paper size options are also
+available as well. In particular, \classoption{a4paper} is available
+as well as the rest of the standard \LaTeX\ paper sizes. A
+full list of class options is given in the \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command
+and Options Summary}.
+
+\subsection{Loading other packages}
+Other packages may be loaded into a \revtex~4.2 document by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ \cmd\usepackage\ command. For instance, to load
+the \classoption{graphics} package, one would use
+\verb+\usepackage{graphics}+.
+
+\section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+
+After choosing the basic look and feel of the document by selecting
+the appropriate class options and loading in whatever other macros are
+needed, one is ready to move on to creating a new manuscript. After
+the preamble, be sure to put in a \envb{document} line (and put
+in an \enve{document} as well). This section describes the macros
+\revtex~4.2 provides for formatting the front matter of the
+article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite
+different from those provided in the \LaTeXe\ \classname{article} class.
+\subsection{Setting the title}
+
+The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the
+\cmd\title\aarg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line
+break in a long title.
+
+\subsection{Specifying a date}%
+
+The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the
+manuscript.  Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the
+current date whenever the file is run:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\date{\today}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations}
+
+The \revtex~4.2 macros  for specifying authors and their affiliations are designed
+ to save labor for authors and during production. Authors and affiliations are
+arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author
+groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set
+of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\
+macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of
+\cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified
+\cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied.
+
+For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune
+Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\end{verbatim}
+The default is to display this as 
+\begin{center}
+Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\
+\emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\
+Mickey Mouse\\
+\emph{Disney World}\\
+\end{center}
+This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is
+chosen by selecting the class option
+\classoption{groupedaddress}. Journal styles usually default this option,
+ so it need not be specified explicitly. The other major way of displaying this
+information is to use superscripts on the authors and
+affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option
+\classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display
+\begin{center}
+Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\
+\emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\
+\emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\
+\end{center}
+one would use the markup
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note that \revtex~4.2 takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join
+the author names together and font selection, as well as any
+superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should
+be given within their respective macros. See below for further information
+regarding the proper way to add footnotes to author names and affiliations.
+
+There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for
+controlling author/affiliation display. The default
+\classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the
+approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for
+each author. The markup:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\end{verbatim}
+will result in the same display as for the first case given
+above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To
+avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs
+Bunny, use the
+\classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest
+to list authors in the order they should appear and specify
+affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will
+afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally,
+it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the
+\classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered 
+in the order that they are encountered. These means that the order
+will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering
+can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before
+the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same
+text for each affilation when specifying them for each author.
+
+If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\
+macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Collaborations}
+
+A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\
+command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command. In \revtex~4.2, it can
+be used with both the \classoption{superscriptaddress} and \classoption{groupedaddress} class options. The
+\cmd\collaboration\ command should appear at the end of the list of
+authors. The collaboration name will be appear centered in parentheses
+between the list of authors and the list of
+affiliations. Because collaborations
+don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the
+\cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation.
+
+\subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau}
+
+Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an
+author, collaboration, or affiliation such as an e-mail address, an
+alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information. 
+\revtex~4.2 introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They
+are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\aarg{e-mail address}
+\item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\aarg{URL}
+\item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\aarg{affiliation}
+\item\cmd\thanks\aarg{miscellaneous text}
+\end{itemize}
+In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the
+actual information specified in the required argument. In the APS journal style files, \cmd\email\ and \cmd\homepage\ no longer have a default value. However, in the AIP styles, each have a default text for their optional arguments
+(`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\
+macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any
+author name can have multiple occurences of these four macros. Note
+that unlike the
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\
+that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow
+the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs@looney.com}
+\homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/}
+\altaffiliation[Permanent address: ]
+                     {Warner Brothers}
+\affiliation{Looney Tunes}
+\end{verbatim}
+This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs@looney.com},
+Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner
+Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the
+required argument in the curly braces.
+\item The font is automatically taken care of.
+\item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is
+desired in the output.
+\item Use the optional arguments to provide customized
+text only if there is a good reason to.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation\ , or even \cmd\title\ can
+also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data
+(\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or
+\cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any
+\cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\
+command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and
+the command is ignored.
+
+Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single
+shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are
+identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be
+identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote
+indicating a group e-mail address.
+
+Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the
+front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations
+on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for
+only the first instance of any particular institution's
+\cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary
+data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log.
+
+It is preferable to arrange authors into
+sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of
+affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate
+ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group
+of \cmd\affiliation\ commands.
+
+If affiliations have been listed before the first
+\cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure
+that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is
+an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is
+given in these later instances.
+
+
+Each journal class option has a default behavior for the placement of these
+ancillary information footnotes. For instance, the \classoption{prb} option puts all
+such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while the \classoption{prl}
+journal styles displays them on the first page. One can override a
+journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class
+option
+\classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the
+bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page).
+Please consult the documentation for the various journal style files for further information.
+
+\subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames}
+
+Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first
+or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure
+that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other
+purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion
+of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro
+as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an
+author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not
+necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate
+how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}}
+\author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The abstract}
+An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract}
+environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+Text of abstract
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that in \revtex~4.2 the abstract must be specified before the
+\cmd\maketitle\ command and there is no need to embed it in an explicit
+minipage environment.
+
+\subsubsection{Structured abstracts}
+A new feature in \revtex~4.2 is support for \textit{structured abstracts}. A ``structured" abstract is an abstract divided into labeled sections. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's  \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished by using the \texttt{description} environment within the \texttt{abstract} environment.  For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{PACS codes}
+PACS codes are obsolete. The \classoption{showpacs} option does nothing, but is present so that older documents may still be processed under \revtex~4.2.
+
+\subsection{Keywords}
+A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the
+article. 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like
+PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by
+two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and
+\classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be
+included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords.
+
+\subsection{Institutional report numbers}
+Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\
+macro. If the \classoption{preprintnumbers} class option is specified, these will be displayed in the upper right corner of the first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros maybe supplied (space is
+limited though, so only three or less may actually fit). Please note that the \classoption{preprint} class option does not automatically invoke \classoption{preprintnumbers}.
+
+\subsection{maketitle}
+After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS
+codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front
+matter of the manuscript is to execute the \cmd\maketitle\ macro by
+simply including it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}
+The \cmd\maketitle\ macro must follow all of the macros listed
+above. The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various
+class options that were specified in the
+\cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or
+explicitly).
+
+\section{The body of the paper}
+
+For typesetting the body of a paper, \revtex~4.2 relies heavily on
+standard \LaTeXe\ and other packages (particulary those that are part
+of AMS-\LaTeX). Users unfamiliar with these packages should read the
+following sections carefully. 
+
+\subsection{Section headings}
+
+Section headings are input as in \LaTeX.
+The output is similar, with a few extra features.
+
+Four levels of headings are available in \revtex{}:
+\begin{quote}
+\cmd\section\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\subsection\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\subsubsection\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\paragraph\marg{title text}
+\end{quote}
+
+Use the starred form of the command to suppress the automatic numbering; e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section*{Introduction}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To label a section heading for cross referencing, best practice is to
+place the \cmd\label\marg{key} within the argument specifying the heading:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{\label{sec:intro}Introduction}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In some journal substyles, such as those of the APS,
+all text in the \cmd\section\ command is automatically set uppercase.
+If a lowercase letter is needed, use \cmd\lowercase\aarg{x}.
+For example, to use ``He'' for helium in a \cmd\section\marg{title text} command, type
+\verb+H+\cmd\lowercase\aarg{e} in \marg{title text}.
+
+Use \cmd\protect\verb+\\+ to force a line break in a section heading.
+(Fragile commands must be protected in section headings, captions, and
+footnotes and \verb+\\+ is a fragile command.)
+
+\subsection{Paragraphs and General Text}
+
+Paragraphs always end with a blank input line.  Because \TeX\
+automatically calculates linebreaks and word hyphenation in a
+paragraph, it is not necessary to force linebreaks or hyphenation.  Of
+course, compound words should still be explicitly hyphenated, e.g.,
+``author-prepared copy.''
+
+Use directional quotes for quotation marks around quoted text
+(\texttt{``xxx''}), not straight double quotes (\texttt{"xxx"}).
+For opening quotes, use one or two backquotes; for closing quotes,
+use one or two forward quotes (apostrophes).
+
+\subsection{One-column vs. two-column layouts}\label{sec:widetext}
+
+One of the hallmarks of \textit{Physical Review} and many of the AIP journals is their two-column
+formatting. \revtex~4.2 provides the \classoption{reprint} class option that provides for each
+journal class option a close approximation to the journal's actual production formatting. Note that
+the \classoption{reprint} option will give either one or two-column formatting as appropriate for the particular journal.
+For most APS and AIP journals, the \classoption{reprint} option will take care of formatting the front matter
+(including the abstract) as a single column and will typeset the body in two columns. \revtex~4.2 has its own
+built-in two-column formatting macros to provide well-balanced columns as well as reasonable control over the placement of floats in either
+one- or two-column modes. When drafting papers, it is common to use a one-column format. This is best achieved by using the
+\classoption{preprint} class option. Authors may override a particular journal's formatting by using the lower level options \classoption{onecolumn} and \classoption{twocolumn}, but best practice is to stick with the \classoption{preprint} and \classoption{reprint} options.
+
+Please note that the \classoption{reprint} class option is only an \textit{approximation} of a journal's final layout. Because of font differences, figure rescaling, and other factors, authors should not expect the \classoption{reprint} option to give fully accurate estimates of an article's ultimate length after being typeset for the journal.
+
+Occasionally it is necessary to change the formatting from two-column to
+one-column to better accommodate very long equations that are more
+easily read when typeset to the full width of the page. This is
+accomplished using the \env{widetext} environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{widetext}
+long equation goes here
+\end{widetext}
+\end{verbatim}
+In two-column mode, this will temporarily return to one-column mode,
+balancing the text before the environment into two short columns, and
+returning to two-column mode after the environment has
+finished. \revtex~4.2 will also add horizontal rules to guide the
+reader's eye through what may otherwise be a confusing break in the
+flow of text. The
+\env{widetext} environment has no effect on the output under the 
+\classoption{preprint} class option because this already uses
+one-column formatting.
+
+Use of the \env{widetext} environment should be restricted to the bare
+minimum of text that needs to be typeset this way. However, short pieces
+of paragraph text and/or math between nearly contiguous wide equations
+should be incorporated into the surrounding wide sections.
+
+Low-level control over the column grid can be accomplished with the
+\cmd\onecolumngrid\ and \cmd\twocolumngrid\ commands. Using these, one
+can avoid the horizontal rules added by \env{widetext}. These commands
+should only be used if absolutely necessary. Wide figures and tables
+should be accommodated using the proper \verb+*+ environments.
+
+\subsection{Cross-referencing}\label{sec:xrefs}
+
+\revtex{} inherits the \LaTeXe\ features for labeling and cross-referencing
+section headings, equations, tables, and figures. This section
+contains a simplified explanation of these cross-referencing features.
+The proper usage in the context of section headings, equations,
+tables, and figures is discussed in the appropriate sections.
+
+Cross-referencing depends upon the use of ``tags,'' which are defined by
+the user.  The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to identify tags for
+\revtex. Tags are strings of characters that serve to label section
+headings, equations, tables, and  figures that replace explicit,
+by-hand numbering.
+
+Files that use cross-referencing (and almost all manuscripts do)
+need to be processed through \revtex\ at least twice to
+ensure that the tags have been properly linked to appropriate numbers.
+If any tags are added in subsequent editing sessions, 
+\LaTeX{} will display a warning message in the log file that ends with
+\texttt{... Rerun to get cross-references right}.
+Running the file through \revtex\ again (possibly more than once) will
+resolve the cross-references.  If the error message persists, check
+the labels; the same \marg{key} may have been used to label more than one
+object.
+
+Another \LaTeX\ warning is \texttt{There were undefined references},
+which indicates the use of a key in a \cmd\ref\ without ever
+using it in a \cmd\label\ statement.
+
+\revtex{} performs autonumbering exactly as in standard \LaTeX.
+When the file is processed for the first time,
+\LaTeX\ creates an auxiliary file (with the \file{.aux} extension) that 
+records the value of each \meta{key}.  Each subsequent run retrieves
+the proper number from the auxiliary file and updates the auxiliary
+file.  At the end of each run, any change in the value of a \meta{key}
+produces a \LaTeX\ warning message.
+
+Note that with footnotes appearing in the bibliography, extra passes
+of \LaTeX\ may be needed to resolve all cross-references. For
+instance, putting a \cmd\cite\ inside a \cmd\footnote\ will require at
+least three passes.
+
+Using the \classname{hyperref} package to create hyperlinked PDF files
+will cause reference ranges to be expanded to list every
+reference in the range. This behavior can be avoided by using the
+\classname{hypernat} package available from \url{www.ctan.org}.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+Use the \env{acknowledgments} environment for an acknowledgments
+section.  Depending on the journal substyle, this element may be
+formatted as an unnumbered section titled \textit{Acknowledgments} or
+simply as a paragraph. Please note the spelling of
+``acknowledgments.''
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+The authors would like to thank...
+\end{acknowledgments}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+The \cmd\appendix\ command signals that all following sections are
+appendices, so \cmd\section\marg{title text} after \cmd\appendix\ will set
+\marg{title text} as an appendix heading (an empty \marg{title text}
+is permitted). For a single appendix, use a
+\cmd\appendix\verb+*+ followed by \cmd\section\marg{title text}
+command to suppress the appendix letter in the section heading.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:lineno}Line numbering}
+\revtex~4.2 provides the \classoption{linenumbers} class option to enable line numbering. While it is
+possible to directly call in the \classname{lineno.sty}, using the class option ensures
+that the default parameters needed to properly typeset the line numbers are set up correctly. It is
+still possible for authors to override parameters such as \cmd\linenumbersep\ as usual, however.
+
+\section{Math and equations}\label{sec:math}
+
+\subsection{Math in text}
+
+Not surprisingly, \revtex\ uses the \TeX\ math \verb+$+ delimiters
+for math embedded in text. For example,
+\verb|$a^{z}$| gives $a^{z}$.  Within math mode, use
+\verb+^+\marg{math} for superscripts and
+\verb+_+\marg{math} for subscripts. If the braces after the
+\verb+^+ are omitted, \TeX{} will
+superscript the next \emph{token} (generally a single character or
+command). Thus it is safest to use explicit braces \verb+{}+.
+
+As with text, math should not require extensive explicit vertical or
+horzontal motion commands, because \TeX\ calculates math spacing
+itself automatically.  In particular, explicit spacing around
+relations (e.g., $=$) or operators (e.g., $+$) should be
+unnecessary. These suggestions notwithstanding, some fine-tuning of
+math is required in specific cases, see Chapter~18 in the \TeX
+book\cite{TeXbook}.
+
+\subsection{Text in math}\label{sec:textinmath}
+
+There are times when normal, non-italic text needs to be inserted
+into a math expression.  The \cmd\text\marg{text} command is the
+preferred method of accomplishing this.  It produces regular text
+\emph{and} scales correctly in superscripts:
+\verb+$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$+ gives 
+``$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$''. To use the \cmd\text\ command,
+the \classname{amsmath} package must be loaded: include a
+\cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{amsmath}} command in the document
+preamble or use the class option \classoption{amsmath}. Please note
+that \revtex~4.2 requires version 2.0 or higher of \classname{amsmath}.
+
+Other common alternatives may be less desirable. Using the standard
+\LaTeXe\  \cmd\mbox\marg{text} will give normal text, including a hyphen,
+but will not scale correctly in superscripts:
+\verb+$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$''.
+The \cmd\rm\ command
+only switches to Roman font for math letters.  It does not, for
+example, handle hyphens correctly:
+\verb+$$x_{\rm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\rm e-p}$''. But note that with
+\cmd\textrm{}, it does work: \verb+$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$''.
+
+\subsection{Displayed equations}\label{sec:dispmath}
+
+Equations are set centered in the column width or flush left depending
+on the selected journal substyle.
+
+For the simplest type of displayed equation, a numbered, one-line
+equation, use the \env{equation} environment.
+\revtex\ takes care of the equation number%
+---the number will be set below the equation if necessary.
+Use \cmd\[\dots\cmd\] for a single, one-line unnumbered display equation.
+
+Use the \env{eqnarray} environment when more than one consecutive
+equation occurs, putting each equation in a separate row of the
+environment, and using \cmd\nonumber\ before the row end (\cmd\\) to
+suppress the equation number where necessary.  If the equations are
+related to each other, align each on the respective relation operator
+(such as $=$).
+
+When an equation is broken over lines or is continued over multiple
+relation operators, it is called a multi-line or continued equation,
+respectively; here, too, use the \env{eqnarray} environment.
+
+For a continued equation, align each row on the relation operator just
+as with multiple equations, and use the \cmd\nonumber\ command to
+suppress auto-numbering on broken lines.  Also, use the starred form
+of the row end (\cmd\\\verb+*+) to prevent a pagebreak at that
+juncture.
+
+Short displayed equations that can appear together on a single line
+separated by \cmd\qquad\ space may be placed in a single
+\env{equation} environment.
+
+As explained in Section~\ref{sec:widetext}, occasionally in two-column
+mode a long equation, in order to fit it in the narrow column width,
+would need to be broken into so many lines that it would affect
+readibility. Set it in a wide column using the \env{widetext}
+environment. Then return to the normal text width as soon as
+possible.
+
+The sample file \file{apssamp.tex} illustrates how to obtain each of
+the above effects.
+
+\subsection{Numbering displayed equations}
+
+\revtex~4.2 automatically numbers equations.
+For single-line and multi-line equations, use the
+\env{equation} and \env{eqnarray} environments as described above.
+For unnumbered single-line equations, use the \verb+\[+\dots\verb+\]+
+construction.  The command \cmd\nonumber\ will suppress the numbering
+on a single line of an
+\env{eqnarray}.
+For a multi-line equation with no equation numbers at all,
+use the \env{eqnarray*} environment.
+
+A series of equations can be a labeled with a lettered sequence,
+e.g., (3a), (3b), and (3c), by
+putting the respective \env{equation} or \env{eqnarray} environment within a
+\env{subequations} environment. 
+The \classname{amsmath} package (can be loaded with the
+\classoption{amsmath} class option) is required for this.
+
+Use the command \cmd\tag\marg{number} to produce an idiosyncratic
+equation number: $(1')$, for example.  Numbers assigned by \cmd\tag\
+are completely independent of \revtex's automatic numbering.  The
+package \classname{amsmath} is required for using the \cmd\tag\
+command. Please
+note that the use of the \texttt{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package
+due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}. 
+
+To have \revtex{} reset the equation numbers at the start of each section,
+use the \classoption{eqsecnum} class option in the document preamble. 
+
+See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for some examples.
+
+\subsection{Cross-referencing displayed equations}
+
+To refer to a numbered equation, use
+the \cmd\label\marg{key} and \cmd\ref\marg{key} commands.
+The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used within the referenced equation
+(on the desired line of the \env{eqnarray}, if a multi-line equation):
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+ A=B \label{pauli}
+\end{equation}
+ ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli})
+that this is the case ...
+\begin{eqnarray}
+ A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\
+ A'& = &B'
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{verbatim}
+gives 
+\begin{equation}
+A=B \label{pauli}
+\end{equation}
+ ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli})
+that this is the case ...
+\begin{eqnarray}
+A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\
+A'& = &B'
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+Please note the parentheses surrounding the \cmd\ref\ command.
+These are \emph{not} provided automatically and, thus, must be
+explicitly incorporated.
+
+Numbers produced with \cmd\tag\ can also be cross-referenced by adding
+a \cmd\label\ command after the \cmd\tag\ command.
+
+Using a \cmd\label\ after \envb{subequations} to reference the
+\emph{general} number of the equations in the
+\env{subequations} environment. For example, if
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{subequations}
+ \label{allequations} % notice location
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+  E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa}
+ \\
+  E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb}
+ \\
+  E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+gives the output
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{allequations} % notice location
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+%
+then \verb+Eq.~(\ref{allequations})+ gives ``Eq.~(\ref{allequations})''.
+
+{\bf Note:} incorrect cross-referencing will result if
+\cmd\label\ is used in an unnumbered single-line equation
+(i.e., within the \verb+\[+ and \verb+\]+ commands),
+or if \cmd\label\ is used on a line of an eqnarray that is not being numbered
+(i.e., a line that has a \cmd\nonumber).
+
+\subsection{Using the AMS packages \classoption{amsfonts},
+\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath}}\label{AMS}
+
+The American Mathematical Society's AMS-\LaTeX\ packages provided extra
+fonts, symbols, and math markup that are quite convenient. \revtex~4.2
+supports the use of these packages directly. To use the \classoption{amsfonts},
+\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath} class options,
+AMS-\LaTeX\ (and perhaps the additional AMS fonts) will need to be
+installed. Please note that \revtex~4.2 requires version 2.0 or higher
+of AMS-\LaTeX. These packages can be downloaded from
+\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/}.
+
+There are two class options for accessing the AMS fonts:
+\classoption{amsfonts} and \classoption{amssymb}.
+The \classoption{amsfonts} option defines the \cmd\mathfrak\ and
+\cmd\mathbb\ commands to switch to the Fraktur and
+Blackboard Bold fonts, respectively.
+These fonts are selected with the \cmd\mathfrak\ and \cmd\mathbb\
+font-switching commands:
+\verb+${\mathfrak{G}}$+ gives a Fraktur ``$\mathfrak{G}$''
+and \verb+${\mathbb{Z}}$+ gives a Blackboard Bold ``$\mathbb{Z}$''.
+\revtex{} does not currently support the use of the extra Euler fonts
+(the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{eur} or \texttt{eus}) or the
+Cyrillic fonts (the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{w}).
+
+The \classoption{amssymb} class option gives all the font
+capabilities of the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option and further defines the commands
+for many commonly used math symbols. These symbols will scale
+correctly in superscripts and other places. See the AMS-\LaTeX\
+documentation for the complete list of symbols available.
+
+\subsection{Bold symbols in math}\label{sec:bboxamsfonts}
+
+\revtex~4.2 uses the standard \LaTeXe\ Bold Math (\classname{bm}) package as the
+basis for creating bold symbols in math mode. As usual, this requires
+an explicit \cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{bm}} in the document
+preamble. The command
+\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} makes \marg{symbol} bold in math mode, ensuring
+that it is the correct size, even in superscripts. If the correct font
+in the correct size is not available then result is the \marg{symbol}
+set at the
+correct size in lightface and a \LaTeXe\ warning that says
+``\texttt{No boldmath typeface in this size}\dots''. Most bold special
+characters will require that the AMS fonts be installed and the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option be invoked.
+
+\cmd\bm\ is the proper means to get bold Greek characters---upper- and
+lowercase---and other symbols.
+The following will come out bold with \cmd\bm:
+normal math italic letters, numbers,
+Greek letters (uppercase and lowercase),
+small bracketing and operators, and \cmd\mathcal. Fraktur
+characters will come out bold in a \cmd\bm; however, Blackboard Bold
+requires using the \cmd\mathbb\ command rather than \cmd{\bm}.
+The \classoption{amsfonts} option adds support for bold math
+letters and symbols in smaller sizes and in superscripts when a
+\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} is used. 
+For example, \verb+$\pi^{\bm{\pi}}$+ gives a bold
+lowercase pi in the superscript position: $^{\pi\bm{\pi}}$.
+
+Note that \cmd\bm\marg{math} is a fragile command and, thus, should be
+preceded by \cmd\protect\ in commands with moving arguments.
+
+\section{Footnotes}
+\LaTeX's standard \cmd\footnote\ command is available in
+\revtex~4.2. The footnote text can either appear at the bottom of a page or
+as part of the bibliography. This choice can be controlled by two class options:
+\classoption{footinbib} and \classoption{nofootinbib}. \revtex~4.2
+defaults to the former.  Specific journal options may select a
+different value than the default.
+
+Please note that even if  Bib\TeX\ is not being used for the references, you
+may have to run Bib\TeX\ if you are using footnotes without the \classoption{nofootinbib} option.
+The log file will contain errors about missing references such as \texttt{Note1} in this case and a file ending in
+\texttt{Notes.bib} will have been produced during the processing of the \TeX\ file.
+
+Note that in the latter case, the
+argument of the
+\cmd\footnote\ command is a moving argument in the sense of the \LUG,
+Appendix~C.1.3: any fragile command within that argument must be
+preceded by a \cmd\protect\ command.
+
+The \cmd\footnote\ macro \emph{should not} be used in the front
+matter for indicating author/affiliation relationships or to provide
+additional information about authors (such as an e-mail
+address). See Section~\ref{sec:footau} for the proper way to do
+this.
+
+Finally, footnotes that appear in tables behave differently. They
+will be typeset as part of the table itself. See
+Section~\ref{sec:tablenote} for details.
+
+\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes}
+
+\revtex~4.2 adds significant new functionality to \revtex~4's 
+typesetting of citations and references. The new functionality is
+designed to make it easier to use Bib\TeX\ and produce the desired output 
+in the reference section without having to edit Bib\TeX's output. The new features include:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Endnotes created with the \cmd\footnote\ command are automatically interleaved with the bibliographic references. \revtex~4 would typeset all endnotes at the end of the bibliography.
+\item Combining multiple references automatically into a single entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of Bib\TeX\ output. This is achieved by prepending an asterisk (*) to the reference's \textit{key} in the \cmd\cite\ command. \verb+\cite{{key1,*key2}+ would make a single entry in the bibliography by combining into one \cmd\bibitem\ the entries from the \texttt{.bib} file with keys \textit{key1} and \textit{key2}. See Section~\ref{sec:multiple} for more details.
+\item Text can be prepended or appended to an entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of the Bib\TeX\ output. See Section~\ref{sec:prepend} for an example of how to do this.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Proper formatting of references requires Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} citation package. \BibTeX\ style files
+for APS and AIP journals are created using his \classname{custom-bib} tool kit. From an author's point of view, all this means is that a proper
+\revtex~4.2 installation requires having \classname{natbib} (version 8.31a
+or higher) installed. It also means that the full set of
+\classname{natbib} functionality is available from within \revtex~4.2
+(but see the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} and \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} for restrictions if
+submitting to an APS or AIP journal). The \classname{natbib} documentation contains many examples; see in
+particular the \verb+natnotes.tex+ file for a convenient summary. Please also note that \classname{natbib 8.3} and later now gives an error (rather than merely a warning as in earlier versions) if you try to use a Bib\TeX\ file that isn't compatible with author-year style citations with a journal style that requires author-year citations (such as \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}).
+
+\subsection{Citing a reference}
+As in standard \LaTeX, references are cited in text using the
+\cmd\cite\marg{key} command and are listed in the bibliography using
+the \cmd\bibitem\marg{key} command. The \cmd\cite{} macro enables
+\revtex~4.2 to automatically number the references in the manuscript.
+
+A typical example might be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+String theory\cite{GSW} attempts to 
+provide a theory of everything.
+\end{verbatim}
+The corresponding \cmd\bibitem{} would be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem{GSW} M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and
+E.~Witten, \textit{Superstring Theory:
+Introduction}, (Cambridge University
+Press, London, 1985).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Journals differ in how the \cmd\cite\ will be displayed.  Most APS journals
+display the citation in-line, as a number, enclosed in square brackets,
+\textit{e.g.}, ``String theory[1] attempts\dots.'' Other journals
+may instead use a number in a superscript: ``String theory$^{1}$ attempts\dots.''
+Selecting the journal substyle using a class option will invoke the appropriate style.
+In journal substyles using superscripts,
+the macro the \cmd\onlinecite\marg{key} is necessary to get the number
+to appear on the baseline.
+For example, ``String theory (see, for example,
+\verb+Ref.~\onlinecite{GSW}+)'' will give the output
+``String theory (see, for example, Ref.~1).''
+
+The \cmd{\onlinecite} command has the same semantics as
+\classname{natbib}'s \cmd{\citealp} command.
+
+A \cmd\cite\ command with multiple keys is formatted with consecutive
+reference numbers collapsed; e.g., [1,2,3,5] will be output as
+[1--3,5].  To split the list over more than one line, use
+a \verb+%+ character immediately following a comma:
+\begin{verbatim}
+. . .  \cite{a,b,c,d,e,f,%
+g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z}
+\end{verbatim}
+The \verb+%+ avoids unwanted spaces.
+
+\subsection{Author/Year (Non-numeric) Citations}
+
+\textit{Reviews of Modern Physics} uses a citation style based on the
+first author's last name and the year of the reference rather than a
+simple number. Support for this style of citing references is the
+primary reason \revtex~4.2 uses the \classname{natbib}
+package. \classname{natbib} uses an optional argument to the
+\cmd\bibitem\ macro to specify what text to use for the \cmd\cite\
+text:
+\begin{quote}
+\cmd\bibitem\verb+[+\meta{short-name}\verb+(+\meta{year}\verb+)+\meta{long-name}\verb+]+
+\end{quote}
+where \meta{short-name} is the author name used in a parenthetical citation, 
+\meta{long-name} that used in a textual citation, and 
+\meta{year} is the year. More concretely, the \cmd\bibitem\ example
+above would appear as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem[Greene et al.(1985)Green,
+Schwarz, and Witten]{GSW}
+M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and E.~Witten,
+\textit{Superstring Theory},
+(Cambridge Press, London, 1985).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+When the citation constitutes part of the grammar of the sentence,
+the \cmd\textcite\marg{key} command may be used (analogous to the
+\cmd\onlinecite\ command above). Both \cmd\textcite\ and
+\cmd\onlinecite\ are built upon \classname{natbib}'s rich repertoire of
+macros (\cmd\citep{}, \cmd\citet{}, etc.). These macros are available in
+\revtex~4.2; however, APS authors must follow the
+\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2}
+guidelines regarding \classname{natbib}'s macros.
+
+\subsection{Combined Author/Year and Numeric Citations}
+
+AIP's \textit{Journal of Mathematical Physics} uses a combined author/year and numerical citation style. \revtex~4.2 supports this referencing style. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2} for more information about this style.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\TeX}
+
+The \cmd\bibitem{} entries can be coded by hand as above, of course, but the
+use of \BibTeX\ with the new style files provided with \revtex~4.2 makes
+it particularly simple to generate marked-up references that can, for
+instance, take advantage of packages like
+\classname{hyperref} for linking. They also save the trouble of having
+to specify formatting like the italics for the book title in the above
+example. And, for those wishing to use author/year citations, \BibTeX\ 
+will automatically generate the appropriate optional arguments for the
+\cmd\bibitem\ commands.
+
+\BibTeX\ is an adjunct to \LaTeX\ that aids in the
+preparation of  bibliographies. \BibTeX\ allows authors to build up a
+database or collection of bibliography entries that may be used for many
+manuscripts. A \BibTeX\ style file then specifies how to transform the
+entries into a proper \cmd\bibitem{} for a particular journal. Here we
+give a brief summary of how to get started with \BibTeX. More details can be
+found in the LaTeX books listed in the references.
+
+Selecting a journal style by using an appropriate class option will
+automatically select the correct \BibTeX\ style file from those included in
+\revtex~4.2. Five basic \BibTeX\ style files are included: \file{apsrev4-2.bst} (APS journals using a numeric citation style, \textit{i.e.}, all but RMP), \file{apsrmp4-2.bst} (author/year style citations for RMP),
+\file{aipauth4-2.bst} (AIP journal using an author/year citation style),  \file{aipnum4-2.bst} (AIP journals using a numeric citation style) and \file{aapmrev4-2.bst} for AAPM journals. The selection can be overridden by specifying an
+alternative \file{.bst} file using the standard \LaTeXe
+\cmd\bibliographystyle\ macro. This must appear in the preamble
+before the \envb{document} line in \revtex~4.2 (this differs from
+standard \LaTeX).
+
+The \BibTeX\ database files will contain entries such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+@Book{GSW,
+  author=``M. Greene, J. Schwarz,
+           E. Witten'',
+  title=``Superstring theory:
+          Introduction'',
+  publisher=``Cambridge University
+          Press'',
+  address=``London'',
+  year=``1985''
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+There are entry formats for articles, technical reports, e-prints,
+theses, books, proceedings, and articles that appear in books or
+proceedings. The styles provided with
+\revtex~4.2 also allows URL's and e-print identifiers to be specified
+for any of the different entry types. There is also an additional
+``collaboration'' field that can be used in addition to ``author'.'
+
+To actually create the bibliography in the manuscript, the
+\cmd\bibliography\marg{bib files} macro is used. 
+Here \meta{bib files} is a comma-separated list of \BibTeX\ bibliography
+database files, each with the \file{.bib} extension. The
+\cmd\bibliography\ macro should be placed at the location where the
+references are to appear (usually after the main body of the
+paper). When the manuscript is processed with \LaTeX\ for the first
+time, the keys corresponding for the \cmd\cite{} macros used in the
+manuscript are written out to the \file{.aux} file. Then \BibTeX\ should
+be run (if the manuscript is called \file{paper.tex}, the command would
+be \verb+bibtex paper+. This will produce a \file{.bbl} file containing all
+of the \cmd\bibitem{}'s for the manuscript. Subsequent runs of \LaTeXe\
+will call this file in to resolve the references. \LaTeXe\ should be run
+repeatedly until all references are resolved.
+
+The \BibTeX-produced \cmd\bibitem{}'s created using the \revtex\ style files appear considerably more complex than the example given
+above. This is because the style files add in \cmd\bibinfo{},
+\cmd\bibnamefont{}, \cmd\eprint{}, and \cmd\url{} macros for
+specifying additional formatting and tagging. The \cmd\bibinfo\ macro
+is mostly a do-nothing macro that serves merely to tag the information with
+the field information from the original entry in the \BibTeX\ database.
+The \cmd\eprint\ and \cmd\url\ macros can be used to create the
+appropriate hyperlinks in target formats such as PDF.
+
+For more information on using \BibTeX\ with \LaTeX, see Sections~4.3.1
+and~C.11.3 of the \LUG\cite{LaTeXman}, Section~13.2 of \cite{Compan},
+or the online \BibTeX\ manual \file{btxdoc.tex} from 
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/}.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{arXiv.org} support}
+
+\revtex~4.2 supports citing e-prints from \texttt{arXiv.org} For instance, the \texttt{.bib} entry
+\begin{verbatim}
+@Unpublished{Ginsparg:1988ui,
+  author    = "Ginsparg, Paul H.",
+  title     = "{Applied Conformal Field Theory}",
+  year      = "1988",
+  eprint    = "hep-th/9108028",
+  archivePrefix = "arXiv",
+  SLACcitation  = "%%CITATION=HEP-TH/9108028;%%"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will include the arXiv.org e-print identifier as \texttt{arXiv:hep-th/9108028} and hyperlink it (if using \texttt{hyperref}). The newer format for arXiv identifiers with primary classifications will produce appropriate output  For example,
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@Unpublished{Ginsparg:2014,
+      author = "Ginsparg, Paul",
+      title = "{Kenneth G. Wilson: Renormalized After-Dinner Anecdotes}",
+      year = "2014",
+      eprint = "1407.1855",
+      archivePrefix = "arXiv",
+      primaryClass = "physics.hist-ph",
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will generate \texttt{arXiv:1407.1855 [physics.hist-ph]} and hyperlink it.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{noeprint} option}
+In the \revtex~4.2 Bib\TeX\ style files, the behavior of the \texttt{noeprint} option was changed to only suppress the arXiv identifiers for journal references, but keep them for e-print references.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:datacitations}Citing data sets with a DOI}
+Bib\TeX\ styles in \revtex~4.2 add support for citing data sets using the new Bib\TeX\ type \texttt{@dataset}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@dataset{haigh:2016,
+ author = "Haigh, J. A. and Lambert, N. J. and 
+   Sharma, S. and Blanter, Y. and
+   Bauer, G. E. W. and Ramsay, A. J.",
+ year = "2018",
+ title = "{Data from Figures in``Selection rules 
+  for cavity-enhanced Brillouin light scattering
+  from magnetostatic modes" [Data set]}",
+ doi = "10.5281/zenodo.1284434",
+ note = "{Zenodo}"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+This results in the formatted reference: ``J. A. Haigh, N. J. Lambert, S. Sharma, Y. Blanter, G. E. W. Bauer, and A. J. Ramsay, Data from Figures in ``Selection
+rules for cavity-enhanced Brillouin light scattering from magnetostatic modes" [Data set], 10.5281/zenodo.1284434 (2018),
+Zenodo."
+
+This is primarily intended for data sets that have a DOI assigned to them.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:doiref}Journal references with only DOIs}
+Some journals have moved to using only a volume and DOI to identify an article and do not assign page numbers or article identifiers. In the \texttt{apsrev.bst} Bib\TeX\ style file used for the \textit{Phys. Rev.} journals, If the \texttt{pages} field is absent from an entry in the \texttt{bib} file, but the \texttt{doi} field is present, the DOI will be explicitly displayed and linked in the formatted reference.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:jhep}Journals that use the year and issue for unique citations}
+The \texttt{apsrev.bst} style used for \textit{Phys. Rev.} journals now includes support for four journals that use the year in place of a volume and require an explicit issue to uniquely cite a paper:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item J. High Energy Phys.
+ \item J. Cosmol. Astropart. Phys.
+ \item J. Instrum.
+ \item J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp.
+ \end{itemize}
+ 
+ The Bib\TeX\ entry must \textbf{exactly} match one of the these four abbreviated journal names or use the corresponding macro, \texttt{jhep}, \texttt{jcap}, \texttt{jinst}, or \texttt{jstat}, resp., to invoke the proper formatting. For example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+@Article{Cotogno2017,
+   author="Cotogno, Sabrina and van Daal, Tom
+                 and Mulders, Piet J.",
+  title="Positivity bounds on gluon {TMDs} 
+           for hadrons of spin $\le$ 1",,
+  journal=jhep,
+  year="2017",
+  month="Nov",
+  day="28",
+  volume="2017",
+  number="11",
+  pages="185",
+  doi="10.1007/JHEP11(2017)185",
+  url="https://doi.org/10.1007/JHEP11(2017)185"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will be formatted as  ``S. Cotogno, T. van Daal, and P. J. Mulders, Positivity bounds on gluon TMDs for hadrons of spin $\le$ 1, J. High Energy Phys. 2017 (11), 185."
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:multiple}Multiple references in a single bibliography entry}
+\revtex~4.2 allows multiple references within a single bibliography entry when using Bib\TeX. This done by using a starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command, and it requires a compatible version of \texttt{natbib} and the \texttt{bst} files that come with \revtex~4.2. To combine multiple references into a single \cmd\bibitem, precede the second, third, etc. citation keys in the \cmd\cite\ command with an asterisk (*). For example \verb+\cite{bethe, *feynman, *bohr}+ will combine the \cmd\bibitem\relax s with keys \texttt{bethe}, \texttt{feynman}, and \texttt{bohr} into a single entry in the bibliography separated by semicolons.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:prepend}Prepending and/or appending text to a citation}
+The expanded syntax for the  \cmd\cite\ command argument can also be used to specify text before and/or after a citation. For instance, a citation such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+[19] A similar expression was derived in
+A. V. Andreev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99, 247204
+(2007) in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.
+\end{verbatim}
+may be created by the following \cmd\cite\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{*[{A similar expression was derived
+in }] [{ in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that
+no integration over ky is present
+there.}] andreev2007}
+\end{verbatim}
+Please note the use of curly braces to enclose the text within the square brackets as well as the spaces next to the brackets.
+
+
+
+\section{Figures and Artwork}\label{sec:figures}
+\subsection{\texttt{figure} environment}
+
+Figures may be included into a \revtex~4.2 manuscript by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ macros. It should be noted that \LaTeXe\ includes
+several powerful packages for including the files in various
+formats. The two main packages are \classname{graphics} and
+\classname{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called
+\cmd\includegraphics\oarg{args}\marg{filename}; 
+they mainly differ in how arguments for
+controlling figure scaling, translation, and orientation
+are specified. For more information on the enhancements of the \classname{graphicx} package, 
+see \cite{CompanG} or the guide \file{grfguide.pdf} available at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/}.
+\revtex~4.2 no longer has the \classoption{epsf} class option, though
+the \classname{epsfig} package provides a similar interface.
+
+
+The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the figure and
+to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they fit best. 
+\LaTeX\  will label and automatically number the captions FIG.~1,
+FIG.~2, etc. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}
+ \includegraphics{fig1.eps}
+ \caption{\label{fig1}Text of first caption.}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note how the \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to cross-reference
+figures in text. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command should be inserted
+inside the figure caption. As usual, the \cmd\ref\marg{key} macro can
+then by used to refer to the label: ``As depicted in
+FIG.\verb+~\ref{fig1}+\dots''.
+
+Figures are normally set to the width of the column in
+which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the figure
+will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide figures, the
+\cmd\figure\verb+*+ environment should be used
+instead. This will place the figure across both columns (the figure
+usually will
+appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page).
+
+
+Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure,
+otherwise they span the width of the figure.
+
+Note that is unnecessary (and undesirable) to use explicit centering
+commands inside the float environments.
+
+\subsection{\texttt{video} environment}
+Papers often refer to multimedia material such as videos. The \texttt{video} environment is identical to the \texttt{figure} environment, but the caption will be labeled as a \textbf{Video} (with its own counter independent of figures). A URL can also be specified so that the caption label can be linked to the online video (if using the \texttt{hyperref} package). The included graphic (using \cmd\includegraphics\ from the \texttt{graphics} or \texttt{graphicx} package) would be a representation frame from the video. A \texttt{\cmd\listofvideos} is also provided.  For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{video}
+\includegraphics{videoframe.jpg}
+\setfloatlink{http://some.video.com/fun.mov}
+\caption{\label{vid:interest}This is a video
+of something fun.}
+\end{video}
+\end{verbatim}
+There is also a corresponding \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+
+\section{Tables}\label{sec:tables}
+
+Tables are very similar to figures. They should be input using the
+\env{table} environment as detailed below, and 
+\LaTeX\ will label and number the captions TABLE~1, TABLE~2, etc.
+(or in whatever format required by the chosen journal
+substyle). Tables without captions won't be numbered.
+
+Each table must begin with \envb{table}, end with \enve{table}. A
+caption can be specified using the \cmd\caption\marg{text} command.
+Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure,
+otherwise they span the width of the figure.
+To refer to the table via cross-referencing, a \cmd\label\marg{key}
+command should appear within the \cmd{\caption}.  Use the
+\cmd\ref\marg{key} command to cite tables in text. The \env{table}
+environment will set the table to the width of the column. Thus, in
+two-column mode, the table will be confined to a single column. To set a
+table to the full width of the page, rather than the column, use the
+\env{table*} environment.
+
+The heart of the table is the
+\env{tabular} environment. This will behave for the most part as in
+standard \LaTeXe\ (please refer to Section~3.6.3 and Appendix~C.10.2 of the
+\LUG{} for more details about the \env{tabular} environment).
+Note that \revtex~4.2 no longer automatically adds double (Scotch) rules
+around tables. Nor does the \env{tabular} environment set various
+table parameters for column spacing as before. Instead, a new
+environment \env{ruledtabular} provides this functionality. This
+environment should surround the \env{tabular} environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{<key>}....}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}
+...
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+A basic table looks as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:ex}Text of table caption.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+  Heading 1 & Heading 2\\
+  Cell 1 & Cell 2\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \env{quasitable} environment is no longer in \revtex~4.2. The
+standard \env{tabular} environment can be used instead because it
+no longer puts in the double rules.
+
+\subsection{Aligning on a decimal point}
+Numerical columns should align on the decimal point (or
+decimal points if more than one is is present). This is accomplished
+by again using a standard \LaTeXe\ package, \classname{dcolumn} which
+must be loaded in the manuscript's preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{dcolumn}
+\end{verbatim}
+Once this package is loaded, the column specifier `\texttt{d}' can be
+used in the table's \env{tabular}\marg{preamble} enviroment preamble.
+The `\texttt{d}' should be used for simple numeric data with a single
+decimal point.
+%
+The entry of a \texttt{d} column is typeset in math mode; do not
+insert any \verb+$+ math delimiters into a `\texttt{d}' column.  Items
+without a decimal point are simply set in math mode, centered.  If
+text is required in the column, use \cmd\text\ or \cmd\mbox\ as
+appropriate.  If multiple decimal points are present then the last is
+used for alignment. To escape from the `\texttt{d}' column use
+\cmd\multicolumn\ as usual. See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes in Tables}\label{sec:tablenote}
+
+Footnotes in a table are labeled \emph{a}, \emph{b}, \emph{c},
+etc. They can be specified by using the \LaTeX\ \cmd\footnote\
+command. Furthermore,
+\cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\footnotetext\ can be used so that multiple entries
+can to refer to the same footnote. The footnotes for a table are typeset
+at the bottom of the table, rather than at the bottom of the page or
+at the end of the references. The arguments for \cmd\footnotemark\ and
+\cmd\footnotetext\ should be numbers 1, 2, \dots. The journal style
+will convert these to letters.  See sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for
+examples and explanations of use.
+
+\subsection{Dealing with Long Tables}
+By default, tables are set in a smaller size than the text body
+(\cmd\small). The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration makes the table font
+smaller still (\cmd\scriptsize).  Thus, putting the
+\cmd\squeezetable\ command before the \envb{table} line in a table
+will reduce the font size. If this isn't sufficient to fit
+the table on a page, the standard \LaTeXe\ \classname{longtable}
+package may be used. The scope of the
+\cmd\squeezetable\ command must be limited by enclosing it with a group:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\squeezetable
+\begin{table}
+[...]
+\end{table}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Tables are normally set to the width of the column in
+which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the table
+will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide tables, the
+\cmd\table\verb+*+ environment should be used
+instead. This will place the table across both columns (the table
+usually will
+appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page).
+
+
+To break tables across pages, \revtex~4.2 requires adding to the
+table a float placement option of [H] (meaning put the table ``here''
+and effectively ``unfloating'' the table) to the \envb{table}
+command. The commands \verb+\\*+ and \cmd{\samepage} can be used to
+control where the page breaks occur (these are the same as for the
+\env{eqnarray} environment).
+
+Long tables are more robustly handled by using the
+\classname{longtable.sty} package included with the standard \LaTeXe\
+distribution (put \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ in the preamble). This
+package gives precise control over the layout of the table.
+The \revtex~4.2 package contains patches that enable the
+\classname{longtable} package to work in two-column mode. Of course, a
+table set in two-column mode needs to be narrow enough to fit within
+the column. Otherwise, the columns may overlap. \revtex~4.2 provides
+an additional environment \env{longtable*} which allows a longtable to
+span the whole page width. Currently, the \env{longtable*} and
+\env{ruledtabular} environments are incompatible. In order to get the
+double (Scotch) rule, it is necessary to add the \verb+\hline\hline+
+manually (or define \verb+\endfirsthead+ and \verb+\endlastfoot+
+appropriately).  For more documentation on the \env{longtable}
+environment and on the package options of the
+\classname{longtable} package, please see the documentation available at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/longtable.dtx} or
+refer to \cite{Compan}.
+
+\section{Placement of Figures, Tables, and Other Floats}
+\label{sec:place}
+
+By default, figures and tables (and any other ``floating'' environments
+defined by other packages) float to the top or bottom of the page
+using the standard \LaTeX\ float placement mechanism.  Initially, each
+\env{figure} or \env{table} environment should be put immediately
+following its first reference in the text; this will usually result in
+satisfactory placement on the page.  An optional argument for either 
+environment adjusts the float placement. For example:
+\begin{quote}
+\envb{figure}\oarg{placement}\\
+\dots\\
+\enve{figure}
+\end{quote}
+where \meta{placement} can be any combination of \verb|htbp!|, signifying
+``here'', ``top'', ``bottom'', ``page'', and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. The same placement argument may be added to a
+\envb{table}. For more details about float placement, 
+see the instructions in the \LUG, Appendix~C.9.1.
+
+In two-column mode, a page may contain both a \env{widetext}
+environment and a float. \revtex~4.2 may not always be able to
+automatically put the float in the optimal place. For instance, a
+float may be placed at the bottom of a column just before the
+\env{widetext} begins. To workaround this, try moving the float
+environment below the \env{widetext} environment. Alternative
+\meta{placements} may also alleviate the problem.
+
+\env{figure} and \env{table} environments should not 
+be enclosed in a \env{widetext} environment to make them span
+the page to accommodate wide figures or tables. Rather, the
+\env{figure*} or \env{table*} environments should be used instead.
+
+Sometimes in \LaTeX\ the float placement mechanism breaks down and a
+float can't be placed. Such a ``stuck'' float may mean that it and all
+floats that follow are moved to the end of the job (and if there are
+too many of floats, the fatal error \texttt{Too many unprocessed floats}
+will occur). \revtex~4.2 provides the class option
+\classoption{floatfix} which attempts to invoke emergency float
+processing to avoid creating a ``stuck'' float. \revtex~4.2 will provide
+a message suggesting the use of
+\classoption{floatfix}. If \classoption{floatfix} doesn't work or if
+the resulting positioning of the float is poor, the float should be
+repositioned by hand.
+
+\revtex~4.2 offers an additional possibility for placing the floats. By
+using the either the \classoption{endfloats} or the
+\classoption{endfloats*} class option all floats may be held
+back (using an external file) and then set elsewhere in the document
+using the the commands \cmd\printtables\ and \cmd\printfigures{},
+placed where the tables and figures are to be printed (usually at the
+end of the document).  (This is similar to the standard
+\cmd\printindex\ command). Using a \texttt{*}-form of the commands
+(\cmd\printfigures\verb+*+ and
+\cmd\printtables\verb+*+) will begin the figures
+or tables on a new page. Alternatively, the option
+\classoption{endfloats*} may be used to change the behavior of the
+non-\texttt{*}-forms so that every float will appear on a separate
+page at the end.
+
+Without one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options, these float
+placement commands are silently ignored, so it is always safe to use
+them.  If one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options is given,
+but the \cmd\printtables\ command is missing, the tables will be
+printed at the end of the document. Likewise, if \cmd\printfigures\ is
+missing, the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
+Therefore it is also safe to omit these commands as long as \revtex's
+default choices for ordering figures and tables are satisfactory.
+
+The \classoption{endfloats} option (or perhaps some journal substyle
+that invokes it), requires explicit \envb{figure}, \enve{figure},
+\envb{table}, and \enve{table} lines. In particular, do \emph{not}
+define typing shortcuts for table and figure environments, such as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\bt{\begin{table}}% Incompatible!
+\def\et{\end{table}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Please note that it is generally undesirable to have all floats moved
+to the end of the manuscript. APS no longer requires this for
+submissions. In fact, the editors and referees will have an easier time
+reading the paper if the floats are set in their normal positions.
+
+\section{Rotating Floats}
+
+Often a figure or table is too wide to be typeset in the standard
+orientation and it is necessary to rotate the float 90
+degrees. \revtex~4.2 provides a new environment \env{turnpage} as an
+easy means to accomplish this. The \env{turnpage} environment depends
+on one of the packages \classname{graphics} or \classname{graphicx}
+being loaded. To use the \env{turnpage} environment, simply enclose
+the \env{figure} or \env{table} environment with the \env{turnpage}
+environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[...]{revtex4-2}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+[...]
+\begin{turnpage}
+\begin{figure} or \begin{table}
+[...]
+\end{figure} or \end{table}
+\end{turnpage}
+\end{verbatim}
+A turnpage float will be typeset on a page by itself. Currently, there
+is no mechanism for breaking such a float across multiple pages.
+
+\section{\revtex~4.2 symbols and the \classname{revsymb4-2} package}
+
+Symbols made available in earlier versions of \revtex\ are
+defined in a separate package, \classname{revsymb4-2},
+so that they may be used with other classes.
+This might be useful if, say, copying text from a \revtex\ document to
+a non-\revtex\ document. \revtex~4.2 automatically includes these
+symbols so it is not necessary to explicitly call them in with a 
+\cmd\usepackage\ statement.
+
+Table~\ref{tab:revsymb} summarizes the symbols defined in this package.
+Note that \cmd{\overcirc}, \cmd{\overdots}, and \cmd{\corresponds} are
+no longer in \revtex~4.2. Use \cmd{\mathring} (standard in \LaTeXe),
+\cmd{\dddot} (with the \classoption{amsmath} package loaded), and 
+\cmd\triangleq\ (with the \classoption{amssymb} class option) respectively.
+\cmd{\succsim}, \cmd{\precsim}, \cmd{\lesssim}, and \cmd{\gtrsim} are
+also defined either in \classname{amsmath} or \classname{amssymb}. The
+AMS versions of these commands will be used if the appropriate AMS
+package is loaded.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:revsymb}Special \revtex~4.2 symbols, accents, and
+boldfaced parentheses defined in \file{revsymb.sty}}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll|ll}
+\cmd\lambdabar & $\lambdabar$ &\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\
+\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ & \cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\
+\cmd\alt & $\alt$ & \cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\
+\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ & \cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\
+\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ & \cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$  \\
+\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ &
+\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb )& $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\
+& & \\
+\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ &
+\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$ \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Other \revtex~4.2 Features}
+%\subsection{Hooks}
+%To be written....
+
+\subsection{Job-specific Override Files}
+\revtex~4.2 allows manuscript-specific macro definitions to be put
+in a file separate from the main \TeX\ file. One merely creates a file
+with the same basename as the \TeX\ file, but with the extension
+`.rty'. Thus, if the \TeX\ file is names man.tex, the macro
+definitions would go in man.rty. Note that the .rty file should be in
+the same directory as the \TeX\ file. APS authors should follow the
+guidelines in the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.2} when
+submitting. Similarly, AIP authors should refer to the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.2}
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{}\label{sec:TeXbooks}
+\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook} D.E. Knuth, \emph{The \TeX book},
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986).
+\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman} L. Lamport, \emph{\LaTeX, a Document
+Preparation System}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996).
+\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide} H. Kopka and P. Daly, \emph{A Guide to
+\LaTeXe}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995).
+\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan} M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and
+A. Samarin, \emph{The \LaTeX\
+Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994).
+\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG} M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and
+F. Mittelbach, \emph{The
+\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997).
+\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW} S. Rahtz, M. Goossens, \emph{et
+al.},\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999).
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/docs.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/docs.sty
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f401506cb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/docs.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+% authguide.rty - macros for processing revguide.tex under \documentclass{revtex4}
+% Text entities
+\DeclareRobustCommand\SNG{\emph{Physical Review Style and Notation Guide}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\LUG{\emph{\LaTeX{} User's Guide \& Reference Manual}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\marglat{\marginpar[\textbf{2e}]{\textbf{2e}}} 
+\DeclareRobustCommand\margrev{\marginpar[\textbf{4}]{\textbf{4}}} 
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmS{%
+ {\protect\the\textfont\tw@ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\BibTeX{{\rm B}{\sc ib}\TeX}
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\m}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\m@th\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\aarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}#1{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+  }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd@to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd@to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd@to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd@to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name@idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\file}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name@idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name@idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name@idx{document class}}%
+\def\name@idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+%
+% Needed for index:
+%
+\def\ttt{\texttt}%
+\def\pfill{\ }%
+\def\efill{\ }%
+\let\scan@allowedfalse\relax
+%\makeindex
+\AtEndDocument{\@input@{\jobname.ind}\null}%
+%
+% Processing options
+%
+%
+% Layout: override revtex4|aps
+\c@secnumdepth2
+\prepdef\@verbatim{\topsep.5\baselineskip}%
+\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
+ \list{}{%
+    \listparindent 10\p@
+    \itemindent\listparindent
+    \leftmargin10\p@
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin
+    \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@
+    \small
+ }%
+ \item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\renewenvironment{quote}{%
+ \list{}{%
+  \leftmargin\z@
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\leftmargini\parindent
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+  \hspace\labelsep\ignorespaces
+  #1\unskip
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\colrule{\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\frstrut{\vrule height2.5ex width\z@ depth\z@\relax}%
+\def\lrstrut{\vrule height\z@ width\z@ depth.5ex\relax}%
+%
+% Klootches
+%
+\let\savenofiles\nofiles
+%
+% Patches:
+%
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/summary4-2.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/summary4-2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4738c9f1ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/summary4-2.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/summary4-2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/summary4-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7ba76a1622
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/auguide/summary4-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,372 @@
+%% ****** Start of file summary4-2.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%%   Version 4.2b of REVTeX, January, 2019
+%%
+%%   Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.
+%%
+%%   See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, amsmath, nofootinbib,tightenlines,
+nobibnotes, aps, 
+prl,
+%outputdebug,
+]{revtex4-2}
+%\usepackage{amsmath}%
+\usepackage{longtable}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage{docs}
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title[Command Option Summary]{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary}%
+
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email{revtex@aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{December 2018}%
+\maketitle
+
+This is the \textit{\revtex~4.2 Command and Options Summary}. It details
+usage for many of the  commands and options that are available in
+\revtex~4.2. Please see the \textit{\revtex~4.2 Author's Guide} for
+complete information on how to use \revtex~4.2.  Class options for the
+\verb+\documentclass+ line are marked with square
+brackets. Environments are indicated by \verb+\begin{<env>}+ and always
+require a matching \verb+\end{<env>}+.
+
+\setlength\LTleft{0pt}
+\setlength\LTright{0pt}
+%
+\begin{longtable*}{@{\extracolsep{0in}}p{3in}p{4in}}
+\caption{\label{tab:summary}\revtex~4.2 Command Summary}\\*
+%
+\noalign{\vspace{3pt}}%
+\toprule\rule{0pt}{12pt}
+\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt]
+\endfirsthead
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{TABLE~\ref{tab:summary} (continued): \revtex~4.2 Command Summary}%
+\rule{0pt}{12pt}\\[3pt]
+\colrule\rule{0pt}{12pt}
+\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt]
+\endhead
+%
+\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}%
+\colrule
+\endfoot
+%
+\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}%
+\botrule
+\endlastfoot
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frequently Used Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+[aps]+ & \textit{American Physical Society} styling. Default.\\
+\verb+[aip]+ & \textit{American Institute of Physics} styling.\\
+\verb+[aapm]+ & \textit{American Association of Physicists in Medicine} styling.\\
+\verb+[sor]+ & \textit{Society of Rheology} styling.\\
+\verb+[prl]+, \verb+[pra]+, \verb+[prb]+, \verb+[prc]+, \verb+[prd]+, \verb+[pre]+, \verb+[prab]+, \verb+[prper]+, \verb+[prx]+, \verb+[prapplied]+,  \verb+[prfluids]+,  \verb+[prmaterials]+, \verb+[physrev]+, \verb+[rmp]+& Further customize \verb+[aps]+ styling for APS journals.\\
+\verb+[apl]+, \verb+[bmf]+, \verb+[cha]+, \verb+[jap]+, \verb+[jcp]+, \verb+[jmp]+, \verb+[rse]+, \verb+[pof]+, \verb+[pop]+, \verb+[rsi]+, \verb+[apm]+, \verb+[adv]+, \verb+[sd]+& Further customize \verb+[aip]+ styling for AIP journals.\\
+\verb+[mph]+& Further customize \verb+[aapm]+ styling for AAPM journals.\\
+\verb+[jor]+& Further customize \verb+[sor]+ styling for SOR journals.\\
+\verb+[twocolumn]+ & Two-column formatting.\\
+\verb+[onecolumn]+ & Single-column formatting.\\
+\verb+[preprint]+ & Single-column formatting with increased interline spacing.\\
+\verb+[reprint]+ & Closely approximate a given journal's style. Can be either single or two-column formatting depending on the journal.\\
+\verb+[10pt]+, \verb+[11pt]+, \verb+[12pt]+ & Set font size. \verb+[preprint]+ gives \verb+[12pt]+, \verb+[twocolumn]+ gives
+\verb+[10pt]+ by default.\\
+\verb+[groupedaddress]+ & Group authors with same affiliations together. Default. \\
+\verb+[superscriptaddress]+ & Associate authors with affiliations via superscript numbers. Appropriate for collaborations or if several authors share some, but not all, affiliations.\\
+\verb+[draft]+ & Mark overfull lines.\\
+\verb+[linenumbers]+ & Number lines (requires lineno.sty).\\
+\verb+[longbibliography]+ & Use alternative Bib\TeX\ style files that show journal article titles in the bibliography. (Unnecessary in 4.2.)\\
+\verb+[amsfonts]+, \verb+[noamsfonts]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amsfonts+ package. Adds AMS font support.\\
+\verb+[amssymb]+, \verb+[noamssymb]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amssymb+ package. Adds additional AMS symbols.\\
+\verb+[amsmath]+, \verb+[noamsmath]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amsmath+ package. Adds AMS-\LaTeX\ features.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Other Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+[preprintnumbers]+, \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ & Control display of preprint numbers given by \verb+\preprint+ command. \verb+[preprintnumbers]+ is default for \verb+[preprint]+; otherwise \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[floatfix]+ & Invoke emergency processing to avoid the \LaTeX\ error \verb+``Too many unprocessed floats''+ or all subsequent floats being moved to the end of the job. \revtex~4 will display a message recommending this option if warranted.\\
+\verb+[bibnotes]+, \verb+[nobibnotes]+ & Control location of author footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\
+\verb+[footinbib]+, \verb+[nofootinbib]+ & Control location of footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\
+\verb+[eprint]+, \verb+[noeprint]+ & Control display of arXiv e-print identifiers in bibliography. Default and behavior vary with journal sty.\\
+\verb+[altaffilletter]+, \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ & Use letters or symbols for
+\verb+\altaffiliation+ superscripts. \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[unsortedaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but doesn't combine authors together who share the same affiliations.\\
+\verb+[runinaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but joins multiple affiliations together into a single sequence separated by commas.\\
+\verb+[showkeys]+, \verb+[noshowkeyws]+ & Control display of Keywords: line.\\
+\verb+[tightenlines]+ & Single space manuscript (for use with \verb+[preprint]+).\\
+\verb+[floats]+ & Position floats near call outs. Default.\\
+\verb+[endfloats]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document.\\
+\verb+[endfloats*]+ &  Move all floats to the end of the document and put each on a separate page.\\
+\verb+[titlepage]+, \verb+[notitlepage]+ & Control appearance of title page.\\
+\verb+[final]+ & Don't mark overfull lines. Default.\\
+\verb+[letterpaper]+, \verb+[a4paper]+, \verb+[a5paper]+ & Select paper size. \verb+[letterpaper]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[oneside]+, \verb+[twoside]+ & Control book syle layout. \verb+[oneside]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[fleqn]+ & Flush displayed equations left. \\
+\verb+[eqsecnum]+ & Number equations by section.\\
+\verb+[balancelastpage]+, \verb+[nobalancelastpage]+ & Control
+\verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing on last page. \verb+[balancelastpage]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[raggedbottom]+, \verb+[flushbottom]+ & Control \verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing. \verb+[flushbottom]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[raggedfooter]+, \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ & Control positioning of footer. \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[byrevtex]+ & Display ``Typeset by \revtex~4''.\\
+\verb+[citeautoscript]+ & Fix up spacing and punctuation when switching from non-superscript style citations to superscript citation styles. \verb+\cite+ commands and associated spacing and punctuation should be as for the non-superscript style.\\
+\verb+[galley]+ & Typeset in a single narrow column.\\
+\verb+[nomerge]+ & Allows processing of legacy documents that use square brackets as part of the key in a \verb+cite+ command.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frontmatter Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\title{<title>}+ & The manuscript title.\\
+\verb+\author{One Author}+ & Specify one author's name.\\
+\verb+\surname{Lloyd Weber}+, \verb+\surname{Mao}+ & Indicate which part of a name within
+\verb+\author+ should be used for alphabetizing and indexing.\\
+\verb+\email[<optional text>]{author@any.edu}+& Specify an e-mail address for an author.\\
+\verb+\homepage[<optional text>]+ \verb+    {http://any.edu/homepage/}+& Specify a URL for an author's web site.\\
+\verb+\altaffiliation[optional text]+ \verb+    {affiliation information}+&Specify an alternate or temporary address for an author.\\
+\verb+\thanks{text}+& Additional information about an author not covered by the more specific macros above.\\
+\verb+\collaboration{<The Collaboration>}+ & Specify a collaboration name for a group of authors. Should be placed after the authors. \\
+\verb+\affiliation{text}+ & Specify a single affiliation. Applies to all previous authors without a specified affiliation.\\
+\verb+\noaffiliation+ & For an author or collaboration without an affiliation.\\
+\verb+\date{<date>}+ &  Show the date on the manuscript. \verb+\date{\today}+ gives the current date.\\
+\verb+\begin{abstract}+ & Start the manuscript's abstract. Must appear before \verb+\maketitle+ command.\\
+\verb+\keywords{<keywords>}+ & Suggested keywords for indexing.\\
+\verb+\preprint{<report number>}+ & Specify an institutional report number to appear in the upper-righthand corner of the first page. Multiple 
+\verb+\preprint+ macros may be supplied, but space may limit how many can appear.\\
+\verb+\maketitle+ & Typeset the title/author/abstract block.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Sectioning Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\section{<heading>}, \subsection{<heading>}+,
+\verb+\subsubsection{<heading>}+ & Start a new section or subsection.\\
+\verb+\section*{<heading>}+ & Start a new section without a number.\\
+\verb+\appendix+ & Makes all following sections appendices.\\
+\verb+\appendix*+ & Signifies there is a single appendix section to follow.\\
+\verb+\begin{acknowledgments}+ & Start an Acknowledgments section. Note spelling.\\
+\verb+\lowercase{<text>}+ & Escape a letter or word from being uppercased in a top-level \verb+\section+ heading.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Citation, Footnote, and Cross-referencing Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\bibliography{<bib file basename>}+ & Specify a list of .bib
+files in which to find references. Read in the resulting .bbl file.  For use with Bib\TeX\ . \\
+\verb+\bibliographystyle{<bst stylefile>}+ & Specify a Bib\TeX\ (.bst) style file to use. APS journal options select the proper default (\texttt{apsrev} or \texttt{apsrmp}).\\
+\verb+\begin{thebibliography}+ & Start the reference section (when not using Bib\TeX). \\
+\verb+\bibitem[<optional text>]{<key>}+ & Specify a single reference.\\
+\verb+\cite{<list of keys>}+ & Cite one or more references. \verb+<key>+ is same as that of \verb+\bibitem+. Prepend a * in front of a key to merge the reference with the previous one in the bibliography.\\
+\verb+\cite{*[{<prepended>}][{<appended>}]{<keys>}+  & Prepend and/or append text to a bibliography entry. Note use of curly braces within the square brackets.\\
+\verb+\onlinecite{<key>}+ & For superscript style citations, place the corresponding number on the baseline rather than as a superscript.\\
+\verb+\bibinfo[<tag>]{<text>}+ & A pure markup macro that adds tagging information to the components of a reference. \revtex~4 Bib\TeX\ style files automatically add them appropriately. Doesn't affect the typesetting.\\
+\verb+\url{<url>}+ & Typeset a URL (\revtex~4 automatically loads \texttt{url.sty}).Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\
+\verb+\eprint{<e-print id>}+ & Typeset an e-print identifier. Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\
+\verb+\footnote{<text>}+ & Create a footnote or endnote in bibliography depending on class options. \verb+\footnote+ within a table will create a footnote attached to the table.\\
+\verb+\footnotemark{<key>}+, \verb+\footnotetext[<key>]{<text>}+ & In a table, allows for multiple items to share the note. \\
+\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an item for cross-referencing. \verb+\label+ should appear within the argument of the cross-referenced item (e.g., \verb+\section{\label{<key>}...}+ or \verb+\caption{\label{<key>}...}+.\\
+\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+.\\
+\verb+\pageref{<key>}+ & Refer to the page on which an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+ appears.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Math and Equation Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+$+ & Inline math delimiter.\\
+\verb+\begin{equation}+ & Display numbered one-line equation.\\
+\verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ & Display unnumbered one-line equation.\\
+\verb+\begin{eqnarray}+ & Display multiple equations together or a
+long equation that requires multiple lines. Use \verb+widetext+
+environment for an equation that must span the page in two-column formatting.\\
+\verb+\nonumber+ & Suppress numbering of an equation with
+\verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+ & Display multiple equations with no equation
+numbering at all.\\
+\verb+&+ & Alignment character for equations within \verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\\+ & End a row in \verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\\*+ & Prevent a page break at this point in an
+\verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an equation or group of equations for
+cross-referencing.\\
+\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an equation by its label (e.g.,
+\verb+Eq~(ref{<key>})+).\\
+\verb+\tag{<key}}+ & Specify an alternative labeling separate from the
+automatic numbering of equations. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\
+\verb+\text{<text>}+ & Non-italicized text within a math
+context. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+. Do not use \verb+\rm+,
+\verb+\textrm+, or \verb+\mbox+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Some} AMS-\LaTeX\ \textsc{Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{split}+ & Split equations with alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{multline}+ & Split equations without alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{align}+ & Equation groups with alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{gather}+ & Equation groups without alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ & Create an equation array in which each
+equation is individually numbered (4a, 4b, 4c, etc.) as part of a
+single group of equations that can be referenced as a whole.\\
+\verb+\intertext+ & Textual interjections within a display equation.\\
+\verb+\usepackage{amscd}+ & Create commutative diagrams.\\
+\verb+\begin{pmatrix}+ & Matrices with parentheses as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{bmatrix}+ & Matrices with square brackets as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{Bmatrix}+ & Matrices with curly braces as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{vmatrix}+ & Matrices with vertical bars as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{Vmatrix}+ & Matrices with double vertical bars as
+delimiters.\\
+\verb+\hdotsfor+ & Row of dots in a matrix.\\
+\verb+\Hat+ & Alternative \verb+\hat+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Check+ & Alternative \verb+\check+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Tilde+ & Alternative \verb+\tilde+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Acute+ & Alternative \verb+\acute+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Grave+ & Alternative \verb+\grave+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Dot+ & Alternative \verb+\dot+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Ddot+ & Alternative \verb+\ddot+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Breve+ & Alternative \verb+\breve+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Vec+ & Alternative \verb+\vec+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\xleftarrow+ & Extensible left arrow.\\
+\verb+\xrightarrow+ & Extensible right arrow.\\
+\verb+\overset+ & Place a symbol over another.\\
+\verb+\underset+ & Place a symbol under another.\\
+\verb+\lvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a left delimiter.\\
+\verb+\rvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a right delimiter.\\
+\verb+\lVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a left delimiter.\\
+\verb+\rVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a right delimiter.\\
+\verb+\DeclareMathOperator+ & Declare a new math operator so that
+spacing and font is correct.\\
+\verb+\text+ & Words and phrases in display math.\\
+\verb+\boldsymbol+ & Make symbol bold. Also available in bm.sty.\\
+\verb+\sideset+ & Sets subscripts and superscripts at the corners of a
+summation or product.\\
+\verb+\substack+ & Create a stack of subexpressions (for example,
+stacked summation limits).\\
+\verb+\begin{subarray}+ & Like \verb+\substack+, but allows finer
+control of subexpression alignment.\\
+\verb+\mathfrak+ & Replaces \verb+\frak+.\\
+\verb+\mathbb+ & Replaces \verb+\Bbb+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Font Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\textbf{<text>}+ & Text boldface font.\\
+\verb+\textit{<text>}+ & Text italicixed font.\\
+\verb+\textrm{<text>}+ & Text Roman font.\\
+\verb+\textsl{<text>}+ & Text Slanted font.\\
+\verb+\textsc{<text>}+ & Text Small Caps font.\\
+\verb+\textsf{<text>}+ & Text Sans Serif font.\\
+\verb+\textmd{<text>}+ & Text Medium Series font.\\
+\verb+\textnormal{<text>}+ & Text Normal Series font.\\
+\verb+\textup{<text>}+ & Text Upright Series font.\\
+\verb+\texttt{<text>}+ & Text Typewriter font.\\
+\verb+\mathit{<text>}+ & Math italics font. \\
+\verb+\mathbf{<text>}+ & Math boldface font.\\
+\verb+\mathtt{<text>}+ & Math typewriter font.\\
+\verb+\mathsf{<text>}+ & Math sans serif font.\\
+\verb+\mathcal{<text>}+ & Math calligraphic font. \\
+\verb+\mathfrak{<text>}+ & Math fraktur font. Requires
+\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\verb+\mathbb{<text>}+ & Math blackboard bold font. Requires
+\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\verb+\bm{<text>}+ & Bold math symbols (Greek and other symbols). Requires \verb+\usepackage{bm}+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Table Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{table}[<placement>]+ & Start a table float environment set to the
+current column width. The
+placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying
+here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break
+across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement
+requests.\\
+\verb+\begin{table*}+ & Start a non-floating table environment set to the
+current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\
+\verb+\begin{ruledtabular}+ & Adds \textit{Physical Review} style double
+(Scotch) rules around a table and adjusts the intercolumn spacing.\\
+\verb+\begin{tabular}[<position>]{<column specs>}+ & The
+\verb+\tabular+ envrionment sets the positions and the  number of
+columns (as well as alignment) in the table.\\
+\verb+\begin{tabular*}{<width>}[<pos>]{<col specs>}+ & Like
+\verb+tabular+, but with a set width.\\
+\verb+\squeezetable+ & Set table in a smaller font smaller. Place this
+macro before the \verb+\begin{table}+ line and sandwich everything
+between \verb+\begingroup+ and \verb+\endgroup+.\\
+\verb+\begin{longtable}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the current column
+width that spans more than one
+page or column. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\
+\verb+\begin{longtable*}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the
+current page width that spans more than one page. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\
+\verb+\caption{<text>}+ & Adds a caption for the table.\\
+\verb+\printtables+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the
+held back tables actually appear.\\
+\verb+\begin{turnpage}+ & Rotate a table or figure by 90 degrees
+(landscape mode). Will put figure or table on a page by
+itself. Requires \verb+\graphics+ package.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Graphics Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{figure}[<placement>]+ & Start a figure float environment
+set to the current column width.
+The placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying
+here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively.  A placement option of H will allow a long table to break
+across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement
+requests.\\
+\verb+\begin{figure*}+ & Start a non-floating figure environment set
+to the current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\
+\verb+\includegraphics[<scale,rotation>]+\verb+{fig file}+& Defined
+by invoking either \verb+\usepackage{graphics}+ or
+\verb+\usepackage{graphicx}+, the standard \LaTeXe\ packages for calling
+in figures. \verb+graphicx+ is the same as \verb+graphics+, but uses
+key-value pairs for optional arguments.\\
+\verb+\usepackage{epsfig}+ & Provides an alternative interface to the
+\verb+graphics+ package similar to the epsf class option in \revtex~3.\\
+\verb+\printfigures+ &  With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the
+held back figures actually appear.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Miscellaneous Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{widetext}+ & Change column width to be the page
+width. Will add guiding rules.\\
+\verb+\twocolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a two column layout.\\
+\verb+\onecolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a single page-wide column layout.\\
+\verb+\protect+ & Protect a fragile command within a macro with a
+``moving'' argument. \verb+\caption+ and \verb+\footnote+ are common
+macros that have moving arguments.\\
+\verb+\frac{numerator}{denominator}+ & Create a fraction. Use in place of \verb+\over+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{\revtex~4 and Miscellaneous Symbols}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\textemdash+ & \textemdash\\
+\verb+\textendash+ & \textendash\\
+\verb+\textexclamdown+ & \textexclamdown\\
+\verb+\textquestiondown+ & \textquestiondown\\
+\verb+\textquotedblleft+ & \textquotedblleft\\
+\verb+\textquotedblright+ & \textquotedblright\\
+\verb+\textquoteleft+ & \textquoteleft\\
+\verb+\textquoteright+ & \textquoteright\\
+\verb+\textbullet+ & \textbullet\\
+\verb+\textperiodcentered+ & \textperiodcentered\\
+\verb+\textvisiblespace+ & \textvisiblespace\\
+\verb+\textcompworkmark+ & Break a ligature.\\ % ``fluffier''
+%vs. ``f\textcompworkmark luf\textcompworkmark fier''.\\
+\verb+\textcircled{<char>}+ & Circle a character. \textcircled{e}.\\
+\verb+\lambdabar+ & $\lambdabar$ \\
+\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\
+\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ \\
+\cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\
+\cmd\alt & $\alt$ \\
+\cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\
+\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ \\
+\cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\
+\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ \\
+\cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$  \\
+\verb+\mathring{x}+ & $\mathring{x}$ (Replaces
+\verb+\overcir+). Standard \LaTeXe\ . \\
+\verb+\dddot{x}+ & $\dddot{x}$ (Replaces \verb+\overdots+). Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\
+\verb+\triangleq+ & $\triangleq$ (Replaces
+\verb+\corresponds+). Requires \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ \\
+\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb ) & $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\
+\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ \\
+\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$ 
+\end{longtable*}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..31728856f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,483 @@
+@PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" 
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" 
+}
+
+@BOOK{Bire82,
+   author       = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+   year         = 1982,
+   title        = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+   publisher    = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{feyn54,
+   author       = "R. P. Feynman",
+   year         = "1954",
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+   volume       = "94",
+   pages        = "262",
+   doi          = "10.1029/2002JD002268",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{epr,
+   author       = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", 
+   year         = "1935", 
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.", 
+   volume       = "47", 
+   pages        = "777",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+   author       = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.",
+   title        = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+   journal      = "Physica D",
+   volume       = "88", 
+   pages        = "445",
+   year         = "1983",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+   author       = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", 
+   title        = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", 
+   journal      = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", 
+   volume       = "51", 
+   pages        = "477--492", 
+   year         = "1988", 
+}
+
+@MISC{witten2001,
+   author       = "Edward Witten",
+   eprint       = "hep-th/0106109",
+   year         = "2001", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   title        = "Williams Hematology", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+
+   edition      = "5", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{inbook-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+   volume = 1,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+   type = "Section",
+   chapter = "1.2",
+   pages = "10--119",
+   note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+   author       = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", 
+   journal      = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", 
+   title        = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+
+   volume       = "777", 
+   pages        = "1395",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+   author       = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+   author       = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+   author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+   title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+   month = nov # ", " # dec,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, 
+
+   author       = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "personal communication", 
+   month        = "1~" # may, 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, 
+   title        = "AIP Conf. Proc.", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   
+   editor       = "J. Smith", 
+   volume       = "841", 
+   number       = "21", 
+   series       = "", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   organization = "", 
+   publisher    = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+   author       = "Y. Burstyn", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", 
+   note         = "(unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "5--8~" # oct, 
+   year         = "2004",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle  Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+   
+   editor       = "B. Quinn", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   publisher    = "Wiley", 
+   note         = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and  the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+   author       = "A. G. Agarwal", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", 
+   journal      = "Semiconductors", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+
+   volume       = "66", 
+   pages        = "1238", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+   author       = "R. Smith",
+   title        = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+   journal      = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+   year         = "",
+   volume       = "",
+   number       = "",
+   pages        = "",
+   month        = "",
+   note         = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, 
+   author       = "J. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "Proc. SPIE", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+
+   volume       = "124", 
+   pages        = "367", 
+   note         = "Required title is missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+   author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+   title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+   institution = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "Wishful Research Result",
+   number = "7",
+   address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+   month = oct,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, 
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   type         = "{TWI Report}", 
+   number       = "666/1999",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = jan # "~1999", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, 
+   author       = "W. K. Fields", 
+   type         = "{ECE Report No.}", 
+   number       = "AL944",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@MISC{Zalkins2008, 
+
+   author       = "Y. M. Zalkins", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", 
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "2008", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@MISC{Nelson2005, 
+
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", 
+   year         = "12~" # dec # "~2005", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+   author       = "J. K. Nelson", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "New York University", 
+   year         = "1999", 
+   
+   type         = "M.{S}. thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+   author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+   title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+   school = "Stanford University",
+   type = "Master's project",
+   address = "English Department",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+   author       = "S. M. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "Massachusetts Institute of  Technology", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+   
+   type         = "{Ph.D.} thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+   author       = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "J. Geophys. Res.", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+
+   volume       = "108", 
+   number       = "D6", 
+   pages        = "4201", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", 
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+   author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+   title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+   school = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+   address = "Department of French",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@BOOK{book-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+   volume = 2,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+   note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+@BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+   author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+   title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+   howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+   address = "Stanford, California",
+   month = feb,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+   author    = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   editor    = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   title     = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   year      = "2000",
+   publisher = "World Scientific",
+   address   = "Singapore",
+   eprint    = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@inBook{Magnetism,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+}
+   year      = "1965",
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+   year      = "1965",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Smith80,
+   author    = "J. M. Smith",
+   title     = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   publisher = "Academic",
+   year      = "1980",
+   address   = "New York",
+   editor    = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+@article{ZS71,
+   author       = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+   year         = "1971",
+   title        = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+   journal      = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+   volume       = "61",
+   pages        = "118--134",
+   translation  = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+   booktitle    = "Williams Hematology", 
+   edition      = "5", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+   author       = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   year         = "2000",
+   title        = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+   booktitle    = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   editor       = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   publisher    = "World Scientific",
+   address      = "Singapore",
+   eprint       = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+   author       = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   year         = "1965",
+   title        = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   booktitle    = "Magnetism",
+   editor       = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   publisher    = "Academic Press",
+   address      = "New York",
+   volume       = "IIa",
+   pages        = "105",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+   author       = "J. M. Smith",
+   year         = "1980",
+   booktitle    = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   editor       = "C. Brown",
+   publisher    = "Academic",
+   address      = "New York",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+   key          = "incol-ful",
+   author       = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+   year         = 1977,
+   title        = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+   booktitle    = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+   edition      = "Third",
+   series       = "Fast Computers",
+   number       = 23,
+   chapter      = 3,
+   type         = "Part",
+   editor       = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+   publisher    = "Academic Press",
+   address      = "New York",
+   month        = sep,
+   pages        = "179--183",
+   note         = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+   author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   pages = "133--139",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@MANUAL{manual-full,
+   author = "Larry Manmaker",
+   title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+   organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+   address = "Silicon Valley",
+   edition = "Silver",
+   month = apr # "-" # may,
+   year = 1986,
+   note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b7c8908051
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e1c5ff96d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmsamp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,616 @@
+% ****** Start of file aapmsamp.tex ******
+%
+%   This file is part of the AAPM files in the AAPM distribution for REVTeX 4-2.
+%   Version 4.2a of REVTeX, January 2015
+%
+%   Copyright (c) 2015 American Association of Physicists in Medicine (AAPM).
+%
+%   See the AAPM README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2
+%
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+%  1)  latex  aapmsamp
+%  2)  bibtex aapmsamp
+%  3)  latex  aapmsamp
+%  4)  latex  aapmsamp
+%
+% Use this file as a source of example code for your aapm document.
+% Use the file aapmtemplate.tex as a template for your document.
+\documentclass[%
+ aapm,
+ mph,%
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+%preprint,%
+ reprint,%
+%author-year,%
+%author-numerical,%
+]{revtex4-2}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+
+\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+\modulolinenumbers[5]% Line numbers with a gap of 5 lines
+\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{AAPM/123-QED}
+
+\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{Footnote to title of article.}
+
+\author{A. Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{B. Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author@institution.edu.}
+\affiliation{ 
+Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\author{C. Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.}
+\affiliation{%
+Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+             %  but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for
+secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes. 
+%
+\end{abstract}
+
+\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+                              %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{quotation}
+The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\ 
+\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading. 
+(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.) 
+Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph.
+%
+The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}.
+\end{quotation}
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and
+\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AAPM
+journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://www.aapm.org} and in the documentation for 
+REV\TeX~4.2 itself.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended. 
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and
+\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to 
+mimic final journal output. In addition, there is another
+option available, \texttt{lengthcheck}, which formats the document as closely
+as possible to an actual journal article, to facilitate the author's
+performance of a length check. Either format may be used for submission
+purposes; however, for peer review and production, AAPM will format the
+article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is
+essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably
+under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AAPM that do not
+format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in
+both the editorial and production processes.
+
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The
+width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn}
+formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen
+instead.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes}
+
+Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography;
+they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+. 
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, 
+its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details.
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys};
+a key may consist of letters and numerals. 
+
+By default, AAPM citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} 
+to give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}). 
+REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate. 
+To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983}, 
+and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}). 
+Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography. 
+
+A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command,
+where the argument is the citation key mentioned above. 
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by using Bib\TeX. 
+The AAPM styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style file
+\verb+aapmrev4-2.bst+, appropriate for
+numbered bibliography. 
+REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for 
+the document's selected class options: the default is numerical.
+
+This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\ 
+via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+aapmsamp.bib+ file.
+Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex
+aapmsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\verb+aapmsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the
+\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead.
+
+\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}%
+Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command. 
+Numerical style citations put footnotes into the 
+bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}.
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you
+must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's
+footnotes}. 
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will flush left by
+default.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind: 
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment.  Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires
+\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the
+\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is
+\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{};
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be
+manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works
+with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should
+only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all
+equations in a paper.
+
+Note the equation number gets reset again:
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. 
+\end{equation}
+
+Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below:
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to
+reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For
+example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans
+across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show the output is in wide format.
+(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and
+this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.)
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure
+captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a
+particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an
+equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed.  Some
+examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a
+text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that
+REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and
+right-aligned columns.  }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcr}
+Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\
+\hline
+1 & 2 & 3\\
+10 & 20 & 30\\
+100 & 200 & 300\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.
+
+\section{Figures and Tables}
+Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their
+final position via placement rules. 
+\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them.
+
+Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which
+imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+).
+The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you
+wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+.
+
+Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the
+\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional
+arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure.
+Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}%
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+is small enough to fit in a single column, while
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide
+figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+is too wide for a single column,
+so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.
+
+The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses
+the same \verb+\caption+ command.
+However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table}, 
+instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}.
+
+The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment,
+which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows,
+each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells. 
+Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character;
+the row terminates with \verb+\\+. 
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns. 
+For instance, a column
+may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+),
+or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+). 
+(Table~\ref{tab:table4}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been
+aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the
+\texttt{dcolumn} package). 
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without
+a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. 
+Use the
+``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+  &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+  & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.)
+
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although
+REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table.
+Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command.
+The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment.
+Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command
+(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. }
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+The tables in this document illustrate various effects.
+Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Lengthy tables may need to break across pages.
+A simple way to allow this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} 
+gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers 
+to be specified for each page of the table.
+An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography).
+The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters.
+However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote.
+In this case,
+create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value.
+Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used, 
+the same mark is produced in the table. 
+The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment. 
+Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and 
+\ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits
+properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same
+footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see
+exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+&  1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+for an illustration. 
+
+All AAPM journals require that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order.
+\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here:
+just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following 
+its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file. 
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix}
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+\nocite{*}
+\bibliography{aapmsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aapmsamp.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmtemplate.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmtemplate.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..113bd825c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/aapmtemplate.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+%% ****** Start of file aapmtemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the files in the distribution of AAPM substyles for REVTeX4.2.
+%%   Version 4.2a of January 28, 2015.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing documents for use with 
+% the REVTEX 4.2 document class and the AAPM substyles.
+% 
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+
+\documentclass[aapm,graphicx]{revtex4-2}
+%\documentclass[aapm,reprint]{revtex4-2}
+
+\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right
+
+\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+\modulolinenumbers[5]% Line numbers with a gap of 5 lines
+\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number 
+% on the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+%\preprint{}
+
+\title{} %Title of paper
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation  etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author.
+% Explanatory text should go in the []'s, 
+% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command. 
+% The \affiliation command should follow the other information.
+
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass). 
+% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract
+
+% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands. 
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+%\label{}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed. 
+% Use only when necessary.
+%\begin{widetext}
+%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% Figures should be put into the text as floats. 
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e).
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples. 
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. 
+% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+%
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}%
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Tables may be be put in the text as floats.
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{} }
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% Put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{your-bib-file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aapmtemplate.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/fig_1.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/fig_1.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8bc5bc8a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/fig_1.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/fig_2.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/fig_2.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cda61493ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aapm/fig_2.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..458a4b7a19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+@PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" 
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" 
+}
+
+@BOOK{Bire82,
+   author       = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+   year         = 1982,
+   title        = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+   publisher    = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{feyn54,
+   author       = "R. P. Feynman",
+   year         = "1954",
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+   volume       = "94",
+   pages        = "262",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{epr,
+   author       = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", 
+   year         = "1935", 
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.", 
+   volume       = "47", 
+   pages        = "777",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+   author       = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.",
+   title        = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+   journal      = "Physica D",
+   volume       = "88", 
+   pages        = "445",
+   year         = "1983",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+   author       = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", 
+   title        = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", 
+   journal      = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", 
+   volume       = "51", 
+   pages        = "477--492", 
+   year         = "1988", 
+}
+
+@MISC{witten2001,
+   author       = "Edward Witten",
+   eprint       = "hep-th/0106109",
+   year         = "2001", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   title        = "Williams Hematology", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+
+   edition      = "5", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{inbook-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+   volume = 1,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+   type = "Section",
+   chapter = "1.2",
+   pages = "10--119",
+   note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+   author       = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", 
+   journal      = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", 
+   title        = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+
+   volume       = "777", 
+   pages        = "1395",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+   author       = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+   author       = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+   author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+   title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+   month = nov # ", " # dec,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, 
+
+   author       = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "personal communication", 
+   month        = "1~" # may, 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, 
+   title        = "AIP Conf. Proc.", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   
+   editor       = "J. Smith", 
+   volume       = "841", 
+   number       = "21", 
+   series       = "", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   organization = "", 
+   publisher    = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+   author       = "Y. Burstyn", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", 
+   note         = "(unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "5--8~" # oct, 
+   year         = "2004",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle  Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+   
+   editor       = "B. Quinn", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   publisher    = "Wiley", 
+   note         = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and  the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+   author       = "A. G. Agarwal", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", 
+   journal      = "Semiconductors", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+
+   volume       = "66", 
+   pages        = "1238", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+   author       = "R. Smith",
+   title        = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+   journal      = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+   year         = "",
+   volume       = "",
+   number       = "",
+   pages        = "",
+   month        = "",
+   note         = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, 
+   author       = "J. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "Proc. SPIE", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+
+   volume       = "124", 
+   pages        = "367", 
+   note         = "Required title is missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+   author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+   title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+   institution = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "Wishful Research Result",
+   number = "7",
+   address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+   month = oct,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, 
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   type         = "{TWI Report}", 
+   number       = "666/1999",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = jan # "~1999", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, 
+   author       = "W. K. Fields", 
+   type         = "{ECE Report No.}", 
+   number       = "AL944",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@MISC{Zalkins2008, 
+
+   author       = "Y. M. Zalkins", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", 
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "2008", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@MISC{Nelson2005, 
+
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", 
+   year         = "12~" # dec # "~2005", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+   author       = "J. K. Nelson", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "New York University", 
+   year         = "1999", 
+   
+   type         = "M.{S}. thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+   author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+   title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+   school = "Stanford University",
+   type = "Master's project",
+   address = "English Department",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+   author       = "S. M. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "Massachusetts Institute of  Technology", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+   
+   type         = "{Ph.D.} thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+   author       = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "J. Geophys. Res.", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+
+   volume       = "108", 
+   number       = "D6", 
+   pages        = "4201", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", 
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+   author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+   title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+   school = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+   address = "Department of French",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@BOOK{book-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+   volume = 2,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+   note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+@BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+   author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+   title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+   howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+   address = "Stanford, California",
+   month = feb,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+   author    = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   editor    = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   title     = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   year      = "2000",
+   publisher = "World Scientific",
+   address   = "Singapore",
+   eprint    = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@inBook{Magnetism,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+}
+   year      = "1965",
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+   year      = "1965",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Smith80,
+   author    = "J. M. Smith",
+   title     = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   publisher = "Academic",
+   year      = "1980",
+   address   = "New York",
+   editor    = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+@article{ZS71,
+   author       = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+   year         = "1971",
+   title        = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+   journal      = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+   volume       = "61",
+   pages        = "118--134",
+   translation  = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+   booktitle    = "Williams Hematology", 
+   edition      = "5", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+   author       = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   year         = "2000",
+   title        = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+   booktitle    = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   editor       = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   publisher    = "World Scientific",
+   address      = "Singapore",
+   eprint       = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+   author       = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   year         = "1965",
+   title        = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   booktitle    = "Magnetism",
+   editor       = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   publisher    = "Academic Press",
+   address      = "New York",
+   volume       = "IIa",
+   pages        = "105",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+   author       = "J. M. Smith",
+   year         = "1980",
+   booktitle    = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   editor       = "C. Brown",
+   publisher    = "Academic",
+   address      = "New York",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+   key          = "incol-ful",
+   author       = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+   year         = 1977,
+   title        = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+   booktitle    = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+   edition      = "Third",
+   series       = "Fast Computers",
+   number       = 23,
+   chapter      = 3,
+   type         = "Part",
+   editor       = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+   publisher    = "Academic Press",
+   address      = "New York",
+   month        = sep,
+   pages        = "179--183",
+   note         = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+   author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   pages = "133--139",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@MANUAL{manual-full,
+   author = "Larry Manmaker",
+   title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+   organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+   address = "Silicon Valley",
+   edition = "Silver",
+   month = apr # "-" # may,
+   year = 1986,
+   note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..185f5c7fa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c2416f9dae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,610 @@
+% ****** Start of file aipsamp.tex ******
+%
+%   This file is part of the AIP files in the AIP distribution for REVTeX 4.
+%   Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014
+%
+%   Copyright (c) 2014 American Institute of Physics.
+%
+%   See the AIP README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2
+%
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+%  1)  latex  aipsamp
+%  2)  bibtex aipsamp
+%  3)  latex  aipsamp
+%  4)  latex  aipsamp
+%
+% Use this file as a source of example code for your aip document.
+% Use the file aiptemplate.tex as a template for your document.
+\documentclass[%
+ aip,
+ jmp,%
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+%preprint,%
+ reprint,%
+%author-year,%
+%author-numerical,%
+]{revtex4-2}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{AIP/123-QED}
+
+\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{Footnote to title of article.}
+
+\author{A. Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{B. Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author@institution.edu.}
+\affiliation{ 
+Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\author{C. Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.}
+\affiliation{%
+Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+             %  but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for
+secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes. 
+%
+\end{abstract}
+
+\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+                              %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{quotation}
+The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\ 
+\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading. 
+(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.) 
+Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph.
+%
+The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}.
+\end{quotation}
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and
+\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AIP
+journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://authors.aip.org} and in the documentation for 
+REV\TeX~4.2 itself.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended. 
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and
+\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to 
+mimic final journal output. Either format may be used for submission
+purposes; however, for peer review and production, AIP will format the
+article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is
+essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably
+under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AIP that do not
+format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in
+both the editorial and production processes.
+
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The
+width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn}
+formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen
+instead.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes}
+
+Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography;
+they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+. 
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, 
+its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details.
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys};
+a key may consist of letters and numerals. 
+
+By default, citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} author-year citations are an option. 
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}). 
+REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate. 
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to properly punctuate textual citations in author-year style;
+this facility works correctly with numerical citations only with \texttt{natbib}'s compress option turned off. 
+To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983}, 
+and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}). 
+Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography. 
+
+A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command,
+where the argument is the citation key mentioned above. 
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by using Bib\TeX. 
+The AIP styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+aipnum.bst+ and \verb+aipauth.bst+, appropriate for
+numbered and author-year bibliographies,
+respectively. 
+REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for 
+the document's selected class options: the default is numerical, and
+you obtain the author-year style by specifying a class option of \verb+author-year+.
+
+This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\ 
+via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+aipsamp.bib+ file.
+Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex
+aipsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\verb+aipsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the
+\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead.
+
+\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}%
+Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command. 
+Numerical style citations put footnotes into the 
+bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}.
+Author-year and numerical author-year citation styles (each for its own reason) cannot use this method. 
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you
+must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's
+footnotes}. 
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind: 
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment.  Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires
+\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the
+\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is
+\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{};
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be
+manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works
+with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should
+only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all
+equations in a paper.
+
+Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below:
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to
+reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For
+example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans
+across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show the output is in wide format.
+(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and
+this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.)
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure
+captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a
+particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an
+equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed.  Some
+examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a
+text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that
+REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and
+right-aligned columns.  }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcr}
+Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\
+\hline
+1 & 2 & 3\\
+10 & 20 & 30\\
+100 & 200 & 300\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.
+
+\section{Figures and Tables}
+Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their
+final position via placement rules. 
+\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them.
+
+Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which
+imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+).
+The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you
+wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+.
+
+Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the
+\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional
+arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure.
+Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}%
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+is small enough to fit in a single column, while
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide
+figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+is too wide for a single column,
+so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.
+
+The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses
+the same \verb+\caption+ command.
+However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table}, 
+instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}.
+
+The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment,
+which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows,
+each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells. 
+Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character;
+the row terminates with \verb+\\+. 
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns. 
+For instance, a column
+may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+),
+or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+). 
+(Table~\ref{tab:table4}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been
+aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the
+\texttt{dcolumn} package). 
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without
+a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. 
+Use the
+``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+  &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+  & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.)
+
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although
+REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table.
+Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command.
+The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment.
+Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command
+(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. }
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+The tables in this document illustrate various effects.
+Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Lengthy tables may need to break across pages.
+A simple way to allow this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} 
+gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers 
+to be specified for each page of the table.
+An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography).
+The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters.
+However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote.
+In this case,
+create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value.
+Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used, 
+the same mark is produced in the table. 
+The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment. 
+Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and 
+\ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits
+properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same
+footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see
+exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+&  1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+for an illustration. 
+
+All AIP journals require that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order.
+\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here:
+just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following 
+its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file. 
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix}
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+\nocite{*}
+\bibliography{aipsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aipsamp.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c1d22b5863
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+%% ****** Start of file aiptemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the files in the distribution of AIP substyles for REVTeX4.
+%%   Version 4.2 of December 2014.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing documents for use with 
+% the REVTEX 4.2 document class and the AIP substyles.
+% 
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+
+\documentclass[aip,graphicx]{revtex4-2}
+%\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-2}
+
+\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number 
+% on the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+%\preprint{}
+
+\title{} %Title of paper
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation  etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author.
+% Explanatory text should go in the []'s, 
+% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command. 
+% The \affiliation command should follow the other information.
+
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass). 
+% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract
+
+% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands. 
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+%\label{}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed. 
+% Use only when necessary.
+%\begin{widetext}
+%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% Figures should be put into the text as floats. 
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e).
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples. 
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. 
+% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+%
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}%
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Tables may be be put in the text as floats.
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{} }
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% Put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{your-bib-file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aiptemplate.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/fig_1.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/fig_1.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8bc5bc8a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/fig_1.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/fig_2.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/fig_2.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cda61493ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aip/fig_2.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ff2eace3e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,484 @@
+@PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" 
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" 
+}
+
+@BOOK{Bire82,
+   author       = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+   year         = 1982,
+   title        = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+   publisher    = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{feyn54,
+   author       = "R. P. Feynman",
+   year         = "1954",
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+   volume       = "94",
+   pages        = "262",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{epr,
+   author       = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", 
+   collaboration = "EPR",
+   year         = "1935", 
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.", 
+   volume       = "47", 
+   pages        = "777",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+   author       = "G. P. Berman, Jr. and F. M. Izrailev, Jr.",
+   title        = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+   journal      = "Physica D",
+   volume       = "88", 
+   pages        = "445",
+   year         = "1983",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+   author       = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", 
+   title        = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", 
+   journal      = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", 
+   volume       = "51", 
+   pages        = "477--492", 
+   year         = "1988", 
+}
+
+@MISC{witten2001,
+   author       = "Edward Witten",
+   eprint       = "hep-th/0106109",
+   year         = "2001",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   booktitle    = "Williams Hematology", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+
+   edition      = "5", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   booktitle    = "Williams Hematology", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+
+   edition      = "5", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{inbook-full,
+   author    = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   booktitle = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+   volume    = 1,
+   series    = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address   = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition   = "Second",
+   month     = "10~" # jan,
+   year      = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+   type      = "Section",
+   chapter   = "1.2",
+   pages     = "10--119",
+   note      = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+   author       = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", 
+   journal      = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", 
+   title        = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+
+   volume       = "777", 
+   pages        = "1395",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+   author       = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "2010",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+   author       = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "2010",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+   author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+   title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+   month = nov # ", " # dec,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, 
+
+   author       = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "personal communication", 
+   month        = "1~" # may, 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, 
+   title        = "AIP Conf. Proc.", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   
+   editor       = "J. Smith", 
+   volume       = "841", 
+   number       = "21", 
+   series       = "", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   organization = "", 
+   publisher    = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+   author       = "Y. Burstyn", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", 
+   note         = "(unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "5--8~" # oct, 
+   year         = "2004",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle  Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+   
+   editor       = "B. Quinn", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   publisher    = "Wiley", 
+   note         = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and  the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+   author       = "A. G. Agarwal", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", 
+   journal      = "Semiconductors", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+
+   volume       = "66", 
+   pages        = "1238", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+   author       = "R. Smith",
+   title        = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+   journal      = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+   year         = "2001",
+   volume       = "",
+   number       = "",
+   pages        = "",
+   month        = "",
+   note         = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, 
+   author       = "J. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "Proc. SPIE", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+
+   volume       = "124", 
+   pages        = "367", 
+   note         = "Required title is missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+   author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+   title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+   institution = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "Wishful Research Result",
+   number = "7",
+   address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+   month = oct,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, 
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   type         = "{TWI Report}", 
+   number       = "666/1999",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = jan # "~1999", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, 
+   author       = "W. K. Fields", 
+   type         = "{ECE Report No.}", 
+   number       = "AL944",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@MISC{Zalkins2008, 
+
+   author       = "Y. M. Zalkins", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", 
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "2008", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@MISC{Nelson2005, 
+
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", 
+   year         = "12~" # dec # "~2005", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+   author       = "J. K. Nelson", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "New York University", 
+   year         = "1999", 
+   
+   type         = "M.{S}. thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+   author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+   title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+   school = "Stanford University",
+   type = "Master's project",
+   address = "English Department",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+   author       = "S. M. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "Massachusetts Institute of  Technology", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+   
+   type         = "{Ph.D.} thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+   author       = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "J. Geophys. Res.", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+
+   volume       = "108", 
+   number       = "D6", 
+   pages        = "4201", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", 
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+   author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+   title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+   school = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+   address = "Department of French",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@BOOK{book-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+   volume = 2,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+   note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+@BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+   author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+   title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+   howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+   address = "Stanford, California",
+   month = feb,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+   author    = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   editor    = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   title     = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   year      = "2000",
+   publisher = "World Scientific",
+   address   = "Singapore",
+   eprint    = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+   author    = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   title     = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+   editor    = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   year      = "2000",
+   publisher = "World Scientific",
+   address   = "Singapore",
+   eprint    = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@inBook{Magnetism,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+   year      = "1965",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+   year      = "1965",
+}
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+   year      = "1965",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Smith80,
+   author    = "J. M. Smith",
+   title     = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   publisher = "Academic",
+   year      = "1980",
+   address   = "New York",
+   editor    = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+@article{ZS71,
+   author    = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+   title     = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+   journal   = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+   volume    = "61",
+   year      = "1971",
+   pages     = "118--134",
+   translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+   author    = "J. M. Smith",
+   booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   editor    = "C. Brown",
+   publisher = "Academic",
+   year      = "1980",
+   address   = "New York",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+   author = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+   title = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+   editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+   booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+   number = 23,
+   series = "Fast Computers",
+   chapter = 3,
+   type = "Part",
+   pages = "179--183",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address = "New York",
+   edition = "Third",
+   month = sep,
+   year = 1977,
+   note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+   author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+   bookaddress = "Boston, 1982", 
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   pages = "133--139",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "New York",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@MANUAL{manual-full,
+   author = "Larry Manmaker",
+   title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+   organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+   address = "Silicon Valley",
+   edition = "Silver",
+   month = apr # "-" # may,
+   year = 1986,
+   note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3e11f390bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ae2eb529ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,753 @@
+% ****** Start of file apssamp.tex ******
+%
+%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution.
+%   Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014
+%
+%   Copyright (c) 2014 The American Physical Society.
+%
+%   See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2
+%
+% See the REVTeX 4 README file
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+%  1)  latex apssamp.tex
+%  2)  bibtex apssamp
+%  3)  latex apssamp.tex
+%  4)  latex apssamp.tex
+%
+\documentclass[%
+ reprint,
+%superscriptaddress,
+%groupedaddress,
+%unsortedaddress,
+%runinaddress,
+%frontmatterverbose, 
+%preprint,
+%preprintnumbers,
+%nofootinbib,
+%nobibnotes,
+%bibnotes,
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+ aps,
+%pra,
+%prb,
+%rmp,
+%prstab,
+%prstper,
+%floatfix,
+]{revtex4-2}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage{hyperref}% add hypertext capabilities
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+%\usepackage[showframe,%Uncomment any one of the following lines to test 
+%%scale=0.7, marginratio={1:1, 2:3}, ignoreall,% default settings
+%%text={7in,10in},centering,
+%%margin=1.5in,
+%%total={6.5in,8.75in}, top=1.2in, left=0.9in, includefoot,
+%%height=10in,a5paper,hmargin={3cm,0.8in},
+%]{geometry}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{APS/123-QED}
+
+\title{Manuscript Title:\\with Forced Linebreak}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{A footnote to the article title}%
+
+\author{Ann Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{Second Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author@institution.edu}
+\affiliation{%
+ Authors' institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\collaboration{MUSO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation
+
+\author{Charlie Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author}
+\affiliation{
+ Second institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+\affiliation{
+ Third institution, the second for Charlie Author
+}%
+\author{Delta Author}
+\affiliation{%
+ Authors' institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\collaboration{CLEO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+             %  but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article. 
+\begin{description}
+\item[Usage]
+Secondary publications and information retrieval purposes.
+\item[Structure]
+You may use the \texttt{description} environment to structure your abstract;
+use the optional argument of the \verb+\item+ command to give the category of each item. 
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+
+%\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+                              %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+%\tableofcontents
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and
+\LaTeXe) in mansucripts prepared for submission to APS
+journals. Further information can be found in the REV\TeX~4.2
+documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://journals.aps.org/revtex/}.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended. Note that top-level section headings are
+automatically uppercased. If a specific letter or word should appear in
+lowercase instead, you must escape it using \verb+\lowercase{#1}+ as
+in the word ``via'' above.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in either the \texttt{preprint} or
+\texttt{reprint} style. \texttt{reprint} format mimics final journal output. 
+Either format may be used for submission purposes. \texttt{letter} sized paper should
+be used when submitting to APS journals.
+
+\subsubsection{Wide text (A level-3 head)}
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ command to refer to the page number.) 
+\paragraph{Note (Fourth-level head is run in)}
+The width-changing commands only take effect in two-column formatting. 
+There is no effect if text is in a single column.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:citeref}Citations and References}
+A citation in text uses the command \verb+\cite{#1}+ or
+\verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ and refers to an entry in the bibliography. 
+An entry in the bibliography is a reference to another document.
+
+\subsubsection{Citations}
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, 
+the entire repertoire of commands in that package are available for your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. Please note that
+REV\TeX\ requires version 8.31a or later of \verb+natbib+.
+
+\paragraph{Syntax}
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ may be a single \emph{key}, 
+or may consist of a comma-separated list of keys.
+The citation \emph{key} may contain 
+letters, numbers, the dash (-) character, or the period (.) character. 
+New with natbib 8.3 is an extension to the syntax that allows for 
+a star (*) form and two optional arguments on the citation key itself.
+The syntax of the \verb+\cite+ command is thus (informally stated)
+\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{key} \verb+}+, or\\
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+}+, or\\
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+,+ \emph{optarg+key}\ldots \verb+}+,
+\end{quotation}\noindent
+where \emph{optarg+key} signifies 
+\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em
+\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{*}\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or even\\
+\texttt{*}\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}.
+\end{quotation}\noindent
+where \emph{pre} and \emph{post} is whatever text you wish to place 
+at the beginning and end, respectively, of the bibliographic reference
+(see Ref.~[\onlinecite{witten2001}] and the two under Ref.~[\onlinecite{feyn54}]).
+(Keep in mind that no automatic space or punctuation is applied.)
+It is highly recommended that you put the entire \emph{pre} or \emph{post} portion 
+within its own set of braces, for example: 
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \texttt{[} \verb+{+\emph{text}\verb+}+\texttt{]}\emph{key}\verb+}+.
+The extra set of braces will keep \LaTeX\ out of trouble if your \emph{text} contains the comma (,) character.
+
+The star (*) modifier to the \emph{key} signifies that the reference is to be 
+merged with the previous reference into a single bibliographic entry, 
+a common idiom in APS and AIP articles (see below, Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}]). 
+When references are merged in this way, they are separated by a semicolon instead of 
+the period (full stop) that would otherwise appear.
+
+\paragraph{Eliding repeated information}
+When a reference is merged, some of its fields may be elided: for example, 
+when the author matches that of the previous reference, it is omitted. 
+If both author and journal match, both are omitted.
+If the journal matches, but the author does not, the journal is replaced by \emph{ibid.},
+as exemplified by Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}]. 
+These rules embody common editorial practice in APS and AIP journals and will only
+be in effect if the markup features of the APS and AIP Bib\TeX\ styles is employed.
+
+\paragraph{The options of the cite command itself}
+Please note that optional arguments to the \emph{key} change the reference in the bibliography, 
+not the citation in the body of the document. 
+For the latter, use the optional arguments of the \verb+\cite+ command itself:
+\verb+\cite+ \texttt{*}\allowbreak
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak
+\texttt{[}\emph{post-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak
+\verb+{+\emph{key-list}\verb+}+.
+
+\subsubsection{Example citations}
+By default, citations are numerical\cite{Beutler1994}.
+Author-year citations are used when the journal is RMP. 
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: 
+Refs.~\onlinecite{[][{, and references therein}]witten2001,Bire82}. 
+By default, the \texttt{natbib} package automatically sorts your citations into numerical order and ``compresses'' runs of three or more consecutive numerical citations.
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to automatically change the punctuation when switching between journal styles that provide citations in square brackets and those that use a superscript style instead. This is done through the \texttt{citeautoscript} option. For instance, the journal style \texttt{prb} automatically invokes this option because \textit{Physical 
+Review B} uses superscript-style citations. The effect is to move the punctuation, which normally comes after a citation in square brackets, to its proper position before the superscript. 
+To illustrate, we cite several together 
+\cite{[See the explanation of time travel in ]feyn54,*[The classical relativistic treatment of ][ is a relative classic]epr,witten2001,Berman1983,Davies1998,Bire82}, 
+and once again in different order (Refs.~\cite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983,witten2001,Davies1998}). 
+Note that the citations were both compressed and sorted. Futhermore, running this sample file under the \texttt{prb} option will move the punctuation to the correct place.
+
+When the \verb+prb+ class option is used, the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command
+displays the reference's number as a superscript rather than in
+square brackets. Note that the location of the \verb+\cite{#1}+
+command should be adjusted for the reference style: the superscript
+references in \verb+prb+ style must appear after punctuation;
+otherwise the reference must appear before any punctuation. This
+sample was written for the regular (non-\texttt{prb}) citation style.
+The command \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ in the \texttt{prb} style also
+displays the reference on the baseline.
+
+\subsubsection{References}
+A reference in the bibliography is specified by a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command
+with the same argument as the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command.
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by Bib\TeX. 
+REV\TeX~4.2 includes Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+apsrev4-2.bst+, \verb+apsrmp4-2.bst+ appropriate for
+\textit{Physical Review} and \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics},
+respectively.
+
+\subsubsection{Example references}
+This sample file employs the \verb+\bibliography+ command, 
+which formats the \texttt{\jobname .bbl} file
+and specifies which bibliographic databases are to be used by Bib\TeX\ 
+(one of these should be by arXiv convention \texttt{\jobname .bib}).
+Running Bib\TeX\ (via \texttt{bibtex \jobname}) 
+after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\texttt{\jobname .bbl} which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ and \verb+\bibfield+ commands). 
+If not using Bib\TeX, you will have to create the \verb+thebibiliography+ environment 
+and its \verb+\bibitem+ commands by hand.
+
+Numerous examples of the use of the APS bibliographic entry types appear in the bibliography of this sample document.
+You can refer to the \texttt{\jobname .bib} file, 
+and compare its information to the formatted bibliography itself.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}%
+Footnotes, produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command, 
+usually integrated into the bibliography alongside the other entries.
+Numerical citation styles do this%
+\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.};
+author-year citation styles place the footnote at the bottom of the text column.
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, 
+\emph{you must re-run Bib\TeX\ every time you change any of your document's footnotes}. 
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations; this is the most common
+type of equation in \textit{Physical Review}:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment.  Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+\paragraph{A few notes on \texttt{tag}s} 
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ requires the \texttt{amsmath} package. 
+Place the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command before the \verb+\label{#1}+, if any. 
+The numbering produced by \verb+\tag{#1}+ \textit{does not affect} 
+the automatic numbering in REV\TeX; 
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, 
+and it must be manually adjusted if other equations are added. 
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ works with both single-line and multiline equations. 
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ should only be used in exceptional cases---%
+do not use it to number many equations in your paper. 
+Please note that this feature of the \texttt{amsmath} package
+is \emph{not} compatible with the \texttt{hyperref} (6.77u) package.
+
+Enclosing display math within
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are labeled with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below.
+You may include any number of single-line and multiline equations,
+although it is probably not a good idea to follow one display math
+directly after another.
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\end{subequations}
+Giving a \verb+\label{#1}+ command directly after the \verb+\begin{subequations}+, 
+allows you to reference all the equations in the \texttt{subequations} environment. 
+For example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans the full page. 
+The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot easily be set in a single column:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;. 
+ \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show how the output appears in wide format.
+(Incidentally, since there is no blank line between the \texttt{equation} environment above 
+and the start of this paragraph, this paragraph is not indented.)
+
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number such things as
+sections, footnotes, equations, figure captions, and table captions. 
+In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. 
+To reference a particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear 
+within the section heading, 
+within the footnote text, 
+within the equation, or 
+within the table or figure caption. 
+The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in text at the point where the reference is to be displayed.  
+Some examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}[b]%The best place to locate the table environment is directly after its first reference in text
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}%
+A table that fits into a single column of a two-column layout. 
+Note that REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically. 
+This table illustrates left-, center-, decimal- and right-aligned columns,
+along with the use of the \texttt{ruledtabular} environment which sets the 
+Scotch (double) rules above and below the alignment, per APS style.
+}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcdr}
+\textrm{Left\footnote{Note a.}}&
+\textrm{Centered\footnote{Note b.}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Decimal}}&
+\textrm{Right}\\
+\colrule
+1 & 2 & 3.001 & 4\\
+10 & 20 & 30 & 40\\
+100 & 200 & 300.0 & 400\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.%
+\begin{figure}[b]
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+
+\section{Floats: Figures, Tables, Videos, etc.}
+Figures and tables are usually allowed to ``float'', which means that their
+placement is determined by \LaTeX, while the document is being typeset. 
+
+Use the \texttt{figure} environment for a figure, the \texttt{table} environment for a table.
+In each case, use the \verb+\caption+ command within to give the text of the
+figure or table caption along with the \verb+\label+ command to provide
+a key for referring to this figure or table.
+The typical content of a figure is an image of some kind; 
+that of a table is an alignment.%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the figure* environment to get a wide
+figure that spans the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the full page
+width in a two-column layout. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnotemark[1]
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+Insert an image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages, which define the \verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command.
+(The two packages differ in respect of the optional arguments 
+used to specify the orientation, scaling, and translation of the image.) 
+To create an alignment, use the \texttt{tabular} environment. 
+
+The best place to locate the \texttt{figure} or \texttt{table} environment
+is immediately following its first reference in text; this sample document
+illustrates this practice for Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}, which
+shows a figure that is small enough to fit in a single column. 
+
+In exceptional cases, you will need to move the float earlier in the document, as was done
+with Table~\ref{tab:table3}: \LaTeX's float placement algorithms need to know
+about a full-page-width float earlier. 
+
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}
+has content that is too wide for a single column,
+so the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.%
+\begin{table}[b]
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}%
+Numbers in columns Three--Five are aligned with the ``d'' column specifier 
+(requires the \texttt{dcolumn} package). 
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. 
+Use the ``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Three}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Four}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Five}}\\
+%\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+  &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+  & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+The content of a table is typically a \texttt{tabular} environment, 
+giving rows of type in aligned columns. 
+Column entries separated by \verb+&+'s, and 
+each row ends with \textbackslash\textbackslash. 
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are aligned in the columns. 
+For instance, entries may be centered, left-justified, right-justified, aligned on a decimal
+point. 
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, 
+although REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table. Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command. The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. Rows whose
+columns span multiple columns can be typeset using the
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command (for example, see the first
+row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+
+Tables~\ref{tab:table1}, \ref{tab:table3}, \ref{tab:table4}, and \ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}[b]
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}
+A table with numerous columns that still fits into a single column. 
+Here, several entries share the same footnote. 
+Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+&  1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+show various effects.
+A table that fits in a single column employs the \texttt{table}
+environment. 
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, set with the \texttt{table*} environment. 
+Long tables may need to break across pages. 
+The most straightforward way to accomplish this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment. 
+However, the \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} allows headers and footers to be specified for each page of the table. 
+A simple example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters. However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. In this case,
+there is no choice but to manually create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. Each time the same value for
+\texttt{\#1} is used, the same mark is produced in the table. The
+\verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment. Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for
+Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and \ref{tab:table2}
+for examples.
+
+Video~\ref{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101} 
+illustrates several features new with REV\TeX4.2,
+starting with the \texttt{video} environment, which is in the same category with
+\texttt{figure} and \texttt{table}.%
+\begin{video}
+\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1a.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1a}}%
+ \quad
+\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1b.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1b}}
+ \setfloatlink{http://link.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101}%
+ \caption{\label{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101}%
+  Students explain their initial idea about Newton's third law to a teaching assistant. 
+  Clip (a): same force.
+  Clip (b): move backwards.
+ }%
+\end{video}
+The \verb+\setfloatlink+ command causes the title of the video to be a hyperlink to the
+indicated URL; it may be used with any environment that takes the \verb+\caption+
+command.
+The \verb+\href+ command has the same significance as it does in the context of
+the \texttt{hyperref} package: the second argument is a piece of text to be 
+typeset in your document; the first is its hyperlink, a URL.
+
+\textit{Physical Review} style requires that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order in text, so don't cite
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide} until Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart} has been cited.
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to setup the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+% The \nocite command causes all entries in a bibliography to be printed out
+% whether or not they are actually referenced in the text. This is appropriate
+% for the sample file to show the different styles of references, but authors
+% most likely will not want to use it.
+\nocite{*}
+
+\bibliography{apssamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file apssamp.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..84d3435306
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+%% ****** Start of file apstemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution.
+%%   Version 4.2a of REVTeX, January, 2015
+%%
+%%
+%%   Copyright (c) 2015 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%%   See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing manuscripts for use with REVTEX 4.2
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+%
+% Group addresses by affiliation; use superscriptaddress for long
+% author lists, or if there are many overlapping affiliations.
+% For Phys. Rev. appearance, change preprint to twocolumn.
+% Choose pra, prb, prc, prd, pre, prl, prstab, prstper, or rmp for journal
+%  Add 'draft' option to mark overfull boxes with black boxes
+%  Add 'showkeys' option to make keywords appear
+\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-2}
+%\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,superscriptaddress]{revtex4-2}
+%\documentclass[aps,prl,reprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-2}
+
+% You should use BibTeX and apsrev.bst for references
+% Choosing a journal automatically selects the correct APS
+% BibTeX style file (bst file), so only uncomment the line
+% below if necessary.
+%\bibliographystyle{apsrev4-2}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report
+% number in the upper righthand corner of the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+% Use the 'preprintnumbers' class option to override journal defaults
+% to display numbers if necessary
+%\preprint{}
+
+%Title of paper
+\title{}
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation  etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current
+% author. Explanatory text should go in the []'s, actual e-mail
+% address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro foreach each type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last
+% \affiliation command. The \affiliation command should follow the
+% other information
+% \affiliation can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well.
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+%Collaboration name if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress
+%option in \documentclass). \noaffiliation is required (may also be
+%used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well.
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+% insert suggested keywords - APS authors don't need to do this
+%\keywords{}
+
+%\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract, and keywords
+\maketitle
+
+% body of paper here - Use proper section commands
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+% Put \label in argument of \section for cross-referencing
+%\section{\label{}}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column
+% format so that long equations can be displayed. Use
+% sparingly.
+%\begin{widetext}
+% put long equation here
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% figures should be put into the text as floats.
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e)
+% and the \includegraphics macro defined in those packages.
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz,
+% and Frank Mittelbach for instance.
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Use the figure* environment if the figure should span across the
+% entire page. There is no need to do explicit centering.
+
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Surround figure environment with turnpage environment for landscape
+% figure
+% \begin{turnpage}
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \end{figure}
+% \end{turnpage}
+
+% tables should appear as floats within the text
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+% The ruledtabular enviroment adds doubled rules to table and sets a
+% reasonable default table settings.
+% Use the table* environment to get a full-width table in two-column
+% Add \usepackage{longtable} and the longtable (or longtable*}
+% environment for nicely formatted long tables. Or use the the [H]
+% placement option to break a long table (with less control than 
+% in longtable).
+% \begin{table}%[H] add [H] placement to break table across pages
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \begin{ruledtabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% Lines of table here ending with \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{ruledtabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% Surround table environment with turnpage environment for landscape
+% table
+% \begin{turnpage}
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \begin{ruledtabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{ruledtabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \end{turnpage}
+
+% Specify following sections are appendices. Use \appendix* if there
+% only one appendix.
+%\appendix
+%\section{}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{basename of .bib file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file apstemplate.tex ******
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/fig_1.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/fig_1.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2cd607454d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/fig_1.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/fig_2.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/fig_2.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eb637e2429
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/fig_2.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2388bd4104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip A Frame) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a64a6dc4f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip B Frame) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/fig_1.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/fig_1.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8bc5bc8a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/fig_1.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/fig_2.eps b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/fig_2.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cda61493ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/fig_2.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..458a4b7a19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+@PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}" 
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%" 
+}
+
+@BOOK{Bire82,
+   author       = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+   year         = 1982,
+   title        = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+   publisher    = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{feyn54,
+   author       = "R. P. Feynman",
+   year         = "1954",
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+   volume       = "94",
+   pages        = "262",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{epr,
+   author       = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen", 
+   year         = "1935", 
+   journal      = "Phys.\ Rev.", 
+   volume       = "47", 
+   pages        = "777",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+   author       = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.",
+   title        = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+   journal      = "Physica D",
+   volume       = "88", 
+   pages        = "445",
+   year         = "1983",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+   author       = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns", 
+   title        = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides", 
+   journal      = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.", 
+   volume       = "51", 
+   pages        = "477--492", 
+   year         = "1988", 
+}
+
+@MISC{witten2001,
+   author       = "Edward Witten",
+   eprint       = "hep-th/0106109",
+   year         = "2001", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   title        = "Williams Hematology", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+
+   edition      = "5", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+}
+
+@INBOOK{inbook-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+   volume = 1,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+   type = "Section",
+   chapter = "1.2",
+   pages = "10--119",
+   note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+   author       = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson", 
+   journal      = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B", 
+   title        = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+
+   volume       = "777", 
+   pages        = "1395",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+   author       = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+   author       = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein", 
+   title        = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface", 
+   note         = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)", 
+   
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+   author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+   title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+   month = nov # ", " # dec,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+@MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007, 
+
+   author       = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "personal communication", 
+   month        = "1~" # may, 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007, 
+   title        = "AIP Conf. Proc.", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+   
+   editor       = "J. Smith", 
+   volume       = "841", 
+   number       = "21", 
+   series       = "", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   organization = "", 
+   publisher    = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+   author       = "Y. Burstyn", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}", 
+   note         = "(unpublished)", 
+   
+   month        = "5--8~" # oct, 
+   year         = "2004",
+}
+
+@PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001, 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle  Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+   
+   editor       = "B. Quinn", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   publisher    = "Wiley", 
+   note         = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and  the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+   author       = "A. G. Agarwal", 
+   title        = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}", 
+   journal      = "Semiconductors", 
+   year         = "2001", 
+
+   volume       = "66", 
+   pages        = "1238", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+   author       = "R. Smith",
+   title        = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+   journal      = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+   year         = "",
+   volume       = "",
+   number       = "",
+   pages        = "",
+   month        = "",
+   note         = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Smith2007a, 
+   author       = "J. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "Proc. SPIE", 
+   year         = "2007", 
+
+   volume       = "124", 
+   pages        = "367", 
+   note         = "Required title is missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+   author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+   title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+   institution = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "Wishful Research Result",
+   number = "7",
+   address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+   month = oct,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Nelson1999, 
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   type         = "{TWI Report}", 
+   number       = "666/1999",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = jan # "~1999", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@TECHREPORT{Fields2005, 
+   author       = "W. K. Fields", 
+   type         = "{ECE Report No.}", 
+   number       = "AL944",
+   institution  = "", 
+   year         = "2005", 
+   
+   note         = "Required institution missing", 
+}
+
+@MISC{Zalkins2008, 
+
+   author       = "Y. M. Zalkins", 
+   title        = "", 
+   howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426", 
+   month        = "", 
+   year         = "2008", 
+   note         = "",
+}
+
+@MISC{Nelson2005, 
+
+   author       = "J. Nelson", 
+   howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000", 
+   year         = "12~" # dec # "~2005", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+   author       = "J. K. Nelson", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "New York University", 
+   year         = "1999", 
+   
+   type         = "M.{S}. thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+   author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+   title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+   school = "Stanford University",
+   type = "Master's project",
+   address = "English Department",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+   author       = "S. M. Smith", 
+   title        = "", 
+   school       = "Massachusetts Institute of  Technology", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+   
+   type         = "{Ph.D.} thesis", 
+   address      = "", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "", 
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+   author       = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin", 
+   title        = "", 
+   journal      = "J. Geophys. Res.", 
+   year         = "2003", 
+
+   volume       = "108", 
+   number       = "D6", 
+   pages        = "4201", 
+   month        = "", 
+   note         = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}", 
+}
+
+@PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+   author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+   title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+   school = "Fanstord University",
+   type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+   address = "Department of French",
+   month = jun # "-" # aug,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+@BOOK{book-full,
+   author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+   title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+   volume = 2,
+   series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+   publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+   address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+   edition = "Second",
+   month = "10~" # jan,
+   year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+   note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+@BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+   author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+   title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+   howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+   address = "Stanford, California",
+   month = feb,
+   year = 1988,
+   note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+   author    = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   editor    = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   title     = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   year      = "2000",
+   publisher = "World Scientific",
+   address   = "Singapore",
+   eprint    = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@inBook{Magnetism,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+}
+   year      = "1965",
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+   author    = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   title     = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   editor    = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   booktitle = "Magnetism",
+   volume    = "IIa",
+   pages     = "105",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   address   = "New York",
+   year      = "1965",
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Smith80,
+   author    = "J. M. Smith",
+   title     = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   publisher = "Academic",
+   year      = "1980",
+   address   = "New York",
+   editor    = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+@article{ZS71,
+   author       = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+   year         = "1971",
+   title        = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+   journal      = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+   volume       = "61",
+   pages        = "118--134",
+   translation  = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+   author       = "E. Beutler", 
+   year         = "1994", 
+   booktitle    = "Williams Hematology", 
+   edition      = "5", 
+   chapter      = "7", 
+   editor       = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps", 
+   publisher    = "McGraw-Hill", 
+   address      = "New York", 
+   volume       = "2", 
+   pages        = "654--662",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+   author       = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+   year         = "2000",
+   title        = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+   booktitle    = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+   editor       = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+   publisher    = "World Scientific",
+   address      = "Singapore",
+   eprint       = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+   author       = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+   year         = "1965",
+   title        = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+   booktitle    = "Magnetism",
+   editor       = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+   publisher    = "Academic Press",
+   address      = "New York",
+   volume       = "IIa",
+   pages        = "105",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+   author       = "J. M. Smith",
+   year         = "1980",
+   booktitle    = "Molecular Dynamics",
+   editor       = "C. Brown",
+   publisher    = "Academic",
+   address      = "New York",
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+   key          = "incol-ful",
+   author       = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+   year         = 1977,
+   title        = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+   booktitle    = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+   edition      = "Third",
+   series       = "Fast Computers",
+   number       = 23,
+   chapter      = 3,
+   type         = "Part",
+   editor       = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+   publisher    = "Academic Press",
+   address      = "New York",
+   month        = sep,
+   pages        = "179--183",
+   note         = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+@INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+   author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+   editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+   booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+   number = 17,
+   series = "All ACM Conferences",
+   pages = "133--139",
+   month = mar,
+   year = 1983,
+   address = "Boston",
+   organization = "ACM",
+   publisher = "Academic Press",
+   note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+@MANUAL{manual-full,
+   author = "Larry Manmaker",
+   title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+   organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+   address = "Silicon Valley",
+   edition = "Silver",
+   month = apr # "-" # may,
+   year = 1986,
+   note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9df32f8ec1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.pdf
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e44460ee81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sorsamp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,614 @@
+% ****** Start of file sorsamp.tex ******
+%
+%   This file is part of the AIP files in the AIP distribution for REVTeX 4.
+%   Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December 2014
+%
+%   Copyright (c) 2014 American Institute of Physics.
+%
+%   See the AIP README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.2
+%
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+%  1)  latex  sorsamp
+%  2)  bibtex sorsamp
+%  3)  latex  sorsamp
+%  4)  latex  sorsamp
+%
+% Use this file as a source of example code for your aip document.
+% Use the file aiptemplate.tex as a template for your document.
+\documentclass[%
+ sor,
+%aip,
+%twoside,
+%groupedaddress,
+%jmp,
+ jor,
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+%preprint,%
+ reprint,%
+%author-year,%
+%author-numerical,%
+]{revtex4-2}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{AIP/123-QED}
+
+\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{Footnote to title of article.}
+
+\author{A. Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{B. Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author@institution.edu.}
+\affiliation{ 
+Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\author{C. Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.}
+\affiliation{%
+Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+             %  but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for
+secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes. 
+%
+\end{abstract}
+
+\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+                              %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{quotation}
+The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\ 
+\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading. 
+(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.) 
+Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph.
+%
+The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}.
+\end{quotation}
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.2 (and
+\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AIP
+journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://authors.aip.org} and in the documentation for 
+REV\TeX~4.2 itself.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended. 
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and
+\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to 
+mimic final journal output. Either format may be used for submission
+purposes; however, for peer review and production, AIP will format the
+article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is
+essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably
+under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AIP that do not
+format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in
+both the editorial and production processes.
+
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The
+width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn}
+formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen
+instead.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes}
+
+Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography;
+they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+. 
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly, 
+its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details.
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys};
+a key may consist of letters and numerals. 
+
+By default, citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} author-year citations are an option. 
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}). 
+REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate. 
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to properly punctuate textual citations in author-year style;
+this facility works correctly with numerical citations only with \texttt{natbib}'s compress option turned off. 
+To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983}, 
+and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}). 
+Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography. 
+
+A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command,
+where the argument is the citation key mentioned above. 
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by using Bib\TeX. 
+The AIP styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+aipnum.bst+ and \verb+aipauth.bst+, appropriate for
+numbered and author-year bibliographies,
+respectively. 
+REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for 
+the document's selected class options: the default is numerical, and
+you obtain the author-year style by specifying a class option of \verb+author-year+.
+
+This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\ 
+via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+sorsamp.bib+ file.
+Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex
+sorsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\verb+sorsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the
+\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead.
+
+\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}%
+Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command. 
+Numerical style citations put footnotes into the 
+bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}.
+Author-year and numerical author-year citation styles (each for its own reason) cannot use this method. 
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you
+must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's
+footnotes}. 
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind: 
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment.  Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+        (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+  \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires
+\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the
+\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is
+\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{};
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be
+manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works
+with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should
+only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all
+equations in a paper.
+
+Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below:
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to
+reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For
+example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans
+across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+   \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+  +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show the output is in wide format.
+(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and
+this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.)
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure
+captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a
+particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an
+equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed.  Some
+examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a
+text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that
+REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and
+right-aligned columns.  }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcr}
+Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\
+\hline
+1 & 2 & 3\\
+10 & 20 & 30\\
+100 & 200 & 300\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.
+
+\section{Figures and Tables}
+Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their
+final position via placement rules. 
+\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them.
+
+Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which
+imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+).
+The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you
+wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+.
+
+Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the
+\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional
+arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure.
+Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}%
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+is small enough to fit in a single column, while
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide
+figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+is too wide for a single column,
+so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.
+
+The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses
+the same \verb+\caption+ command.
+However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table}, 
+instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}.
+
+The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment,
+which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows,
+each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells. 
+Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character;
+the row terminates with \verb+\\+. 
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns. 
+For instance, a column
+may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+),
+or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+). 
+(Table~\ref{tab:table4}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been
+aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the
+\texttt{dcolumn} package). 
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without
+a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point. 
+Use the
+``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+  &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+  & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.)
+
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although
+REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table.
+Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command.
+The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment.
+Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command
+(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. }
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+The tables in this document illustrate various effects.
+Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Lengthy tables may need to break across pages.
+A simple way to allow this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} 
+gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers 
+to be specified for each page of the table.
+An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography).
+The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters.
+However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote.
+In this case,
+create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value.
+Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used, 
+the same mark is produced in the table. 
+The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment. 
+Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and 
+\ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits
+properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same
+footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see
+exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+&  1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+for an illustration. 
+
+All AIP journals require that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order.
+\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here:
+just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following 
+its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file. 
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix}
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+\nocite{*}
+\bibliography{sorsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file sorsamp.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sortemplate.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sortemplate.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8bacf8024b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/doc/sample/sor/sortemplate.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+%% ****** Start of file sortemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%   This file is part of the files in the distribution of AIP substyles for REVTeX4.
+%%   Version 4.2 of December 2014.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing documents for use with 
+% the REVTEX 4.2 document class and the AIP substyles.
+% 
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+
+\documentclass[sor,graphicx]{revtex4-2}
+%\documentclass[sor,reprint]{revtex4-2}
+
+\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number 
+% on the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+%\preprint{}
+
+\title{} %Title of paper
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation  etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author.
+% Explanatory text should go in the []'s, 
+% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command. 
+% The \affiliation command should follow the other information.
+
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass). 
+% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract
+
+% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands. 
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+%\label{}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed. 
+% Use only when necessary.
+%\begin{widetext}
+%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% Figures should be put into the text as floats. 
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e).
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples. 
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. 
+% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+%
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}%
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Tables may be be put in the text as floats.
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{} }
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% Put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{your-bib-file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file sortemplate.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/aip.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/aip.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..13c711fc82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/aip.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,2062 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% aip.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2008 American Institute of Physics
+% mailto:tex@aip.org
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file aip.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    aip.rtx, aip.pdf, aip.ins, aip.drv.
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/aip/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex aip.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex aip.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex aip.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+%       pdflatex aip.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+%       pdflatex aip.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:bibtex/bst/aip/
+%    TDS:doc/latex/aip/
+%    TDS:source/latex/aip/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/aip/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from aip.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+%% This file requires docstrip version 2.4 or higher available from
+%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked/docstrip.tex
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README.
+
+Copyright (c) 2008 American Institute of Physics.
+mailto:tex@aip.org
+
+Maintained by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)
+under contract to American Institute of Physics.
+
+License
+   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later 
+   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+   
+   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
+   without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY 
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+  %{ignore}
+% \file{aip.ins}{\from{aip.dtx}{install}}%
+% \file{aip.drv}{\from{aip.dtx}{driver}}%
+% \usedir{tex/latex/aip}%
+  \file{aip4-1.rtx}{\from{aip.dtx}{package}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    aip.rtx}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/aip/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run aip.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{aip.dtx}\CheckSum{1163}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "aip.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.1r",
+%%%     date            = "2010/07/25",
+%%%     time            = "20:32:00 GMT-8",
+%%%     checksum        = "1163",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Institute of Physics.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 2008 American Institute of Physics,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "AIP Journal Program
+%%%                        American Institute of Physics, 
+%%%                        Suite 1NO1, 2 Huntington Quadrangle, 
+%%%                        Melville, NY 11747 USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon tex at aip.org",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "aip substyle for REVTeX",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aip.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the installer.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README   aip.ins
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aip.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.rtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.aux aip.idx aip.ind aip.log aip.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
+%</driver|package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{aip4-1.rtx}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25 4.1r AIP substyle for REVTeX]% \fileversion
+%</driver|package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{.ins} installer and \file{README} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\gdef\lquote{`}\gdef\rquote{'}%
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/06}{Beta candidate b}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README}
+\title{%
+ The \classname{aip} substyle for REV\TeX%
+ \protect\thanks{%
+  \fileversion\ \copyright 2009 American Institute of Physics
+  % For version number and date,
+  % search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+  % or see the end of the README file.
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa\thanks{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the 
+AIP journal substyles for APS's \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to AIP journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://authors.aip.org/REVTEX}.
+The archive contains ready-to-Install files, documentation, and full source.
+
+This package is also distributed via CTAN:
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/aip}, and as a ready-to-install image as
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/install/macros/latex/contrib/aip.tds.zip}.
+
+The \classname{aip} package was commissioned by the American Institute of Physics
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\ 
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{aip.rtx}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{auguide.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Overview}%
+\revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of 
+the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
+
+This document class implements the AIP society and journal substyles: 
+the journals represent a set of mutually exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the 
+document class to address multiple journals within the AIP family.
+This society is obtained with class option \classoption{aip}.
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{aip.rtx}
+is generated from this file, \file{aip.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex aip.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex aip.dtx| or |pdflatex aip.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{aip.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{aip.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the installer \file{aip.ins},
+and the file \file{README}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX\ twice, then \file{makeindex}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{aip.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{aip.rtx}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.rtx}
+by moving it to a location
+in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX,
+like \file{tex/latex/aip}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.pdf}
+by moving it to 
+\file{doc/latex/aip}.
+\item 
+Using the \file{.dbj} information herein, 
+generate the needed \file{.bst} files and install them in
+\file{bibtex/bst/aip}.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{AIP: A set of journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
+%
+% To create a journal substyle, you create 
+% a \file{.rtx} file, in our case \file{aip.rtx}.
+% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
+% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
+% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
+% Also within that file, you include a 
+% section of code for each journal, that for JMP looks like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@jmp}{%
+% <code specific to the JMP>
+% }{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% \section{The \classoption{aip} class option: the \texttt{aip} module}
+% The file \file{aip.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aip}.
+%
+% Here, code specific to AIP journals appears.
+%
+% We first give some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
+% then some AIP-specific initialisations,
+% then code for particular AIP journals.
+% In the latter case, the choice is 
+% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AtEndOfClass:
+% this file, like all journal substyles, is read in at \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ time,
+% so you should not use this command in this file. 
+% Note for \LaTeX\ developers: It would be an improvement in \LaTeX\ to 
+% \cmd\let\cmd\AtEndOfClass\ to something like \cmd\@firstofone.
+% This change would be effected in \cmd\@onefilewithoptions.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX society AIP selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Substyle Options}%
+%
+% Here are the class options relating to the AIP:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{jcp}{\change@journal{jcp}}%
+\DeclareOption{pop}{\change@journal{pop}}%
+\DeclareOption{rsi}{\change@journal{rsi}}%
+\DeclareOption{jap}{\change@journal{jap}}%
+\DeclareOption{apl}{\change@journal{apl}}%
+\DeclareOption{cha}{\change@journal{cha}}%
+\DeclareOption{pof}{\change@journal{pof}}%
+\DeclareOption{bmf}{\change@journal{bmf}}%
+\DeclareOption{rse}{\change@journal{rse}}%
+\DeclareOption{jmp}{\change@journal{jmp}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Option allowing for ``numerical author-year'' bibliography. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{author-numerical}{%
+  \@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
+  \@booleantrue\authornum@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Optionally allow article title in bibliography entries. 
+% A new switch is defined here: \cmd\aip@jtitx@sw\ signifies that 
+% the numbered style bibliography is to be prepared without article titles in @ARTICLE entries.
+% Otherwise, such titles are incorporated if present in the \file{.bib} entry. 
+% By default, exclude the article titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{article-title}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue \aip@jtitx@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Establish default options for this society.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+\@booleanfalse\authornum@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aip}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aip\ has the job of writing the control record into the
+% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. 
+% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning 
+% is set by the society (AIP) and journal. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aip}%
+\def\@bibdataout@aip{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   aip41Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \longbibliography@sw{\true@sw}{\aip@jtitx@sw{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
+   {%
+    ,pages="1",title="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,pages="0",title=""%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{aip41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For AIP, the preprint style \classoption{preprint} is the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw}
+% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
+% otherwise not.
+% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+\@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+% 
+% In reprint style only, we eliminate the head above the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{AIP Setup}%
+% Here we define the default procedures for AIP journals.
+% Individual AIP journals may override these definitions.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Running header and footer}%
+%
+% Page style for all AIP journals.
+% We assert our own page style only if nobody else has done so.
+% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
+% command anywhere in the preamble.
+%FIXME: \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ is defined?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \ps@preprint
+ }{%
+  \ps@article
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The spc says: ``Running title must be provided on title page'',
+% and that journal classes 1b and 2 have no running title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@preprint{%
+  \def\@oddhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps@article{%
+  \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@runningtitle{\@shorttitle}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title block}%
+%
+% The specifics of the title block.
+% Apply to all AIP journals; individual journals may override these settings.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+  \c@page\z@% article sets this to one not zero???
+}{%
+  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% On the title page, footnotes are lettered with right parenthesis: ``a)''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@fnsymbol@latex\@fnsymbol
+\let\@fnsymbol\@alph
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adjust@abstractwidth}
+% This procedure is used by many titlepage elements to indent on the left by a particular 
+% amount. The author list uses \cmd\frontmatter@authorformat\ to accomplish the same.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% AIP Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% All AIP journals set the abstract body the same way.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+%\small
+ \adjust@abstractwidth
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All AIP journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \@booleantrue\titlepage@sw
+% \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}%
+  \let\section\section@preprintsty
+% \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty
+  \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
+  \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% All AIP journals set the author list the same.
+% The leading is 11.5 points, and
+% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
+% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
+% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \sffamily
+%\advance\baselineskip\p@
+%\parskip11.5\p@\relax
+}%
+\renewcommand*\email[1][Electronic mail: ]{\begingroup\sanitize@url\@email{#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+%\addvspace{3.5\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% All AIP journals set the affiliation the same.
+% Like the author, but in italic. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\small}%
+ \it
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the default AIP style for title block authors and affiliations.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% All AIP journals set the title page using the same font and size.
+% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
+% we assert none here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% All AIP journals set the article title 12 point Times Roman, bold, flush left.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ \parskip\z@skip
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{3\p@}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
+% All AIP journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text:
+% superior lowercase letter, with right parenthesis.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
+\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark%(
+  )%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
+	\addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil@cutoff}
+% We override \cmd\affil@cutoff\ to enforce the rule that,
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page, then
+% no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\affil@cutoff\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% De awa. 
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% All AIP journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+%
+% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{5\p@}%
+  \small
+  \raggedright
+  \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+%  \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+%  \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
+% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
+% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
+% stacked flush right at the right margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@titlepage{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+   \@runningtitle
+   \hfill
+   \produce@preprints\@preprint
+  }%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+   \hfil
+   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
+   \quad\checkindate
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX and AIP}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce@preprints#1{%
+ \preprint@sw{%
+  \vtop to \z@{%
+   \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+   \small
+   \let\preprint\preprint@count
+   \count@\z@#1\@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+    \hbox{%
+     \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
+     #1\setbox\z@\lastbox
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \let\preprint\preprint@cr
+    \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+    \par
+    \vss
+   }%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Lead-in paragraph}%
+%
+% The \env{Lead-in paragraph} environment formats the AIP ``lead paragraph''.
+% To avoid introducing new syntax, we take over the \env{quotation} environment
+% until the first \cmd\section\ (or other sectioning command) appears.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{Lead@inParagraph}{%
+ \par
+ \bfseries
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}{%
+ \par
+ \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\hfil}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At the beginning of the document temporarily change the meaning of 
+% the \env{quotation} environment, restoring it once the first sectioning
+% command is given. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let@environment{quotation@ltx}{quotation}%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{Lead@inParagraph}%
+}%
+\appdef\@startsection@hook{%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{quotation@ltx}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% All AIP journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
+% Also, no hanging section number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument. 
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
+% purpose.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044101\_1 (1) or BMF\_044103\_1 (1)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044104\_1 (1), JMP\_123520\_1 (48), 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \itshape
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty}
+% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
+% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+%    \small
+     \itshape\bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For examples of 
+% \env{theorem}, \env{proposition}, \env{lemma}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{example},
+% and \env{proof} (with optional title), 
+% using independent numbering for each class,
+% and with numbered and roman lists therein, 
+% see JMP\_122901\_1 (48). 
+%
+% For theorems, etc, numbered by section, (and with theorems in the appendix)
+% but equations numbered throughout, 
+% see JMP\_123301\_1 (48). 
+%
+% For a (roman) list in text, theorem, and proof,
+% see JMP\_123514\_1 (48).
+%
+% For numbered list in text, 
+% and equations numbered by section, 
+% see JMP\_123518\_1 (48).
+%
+% All AIP journals use frontmatter footnotes by default. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
+% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, 
+% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
+ \print@toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@munge{%
+  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
+  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@restore{%
+  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum{#2}%
+% \@tempdima 3em %
+  \parindent \z@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+  \large \bf %
+  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\z@}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+  \par
+  \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ \bf
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the auto TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
+% All AIP journal styles have flush bottoms.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float}
+% All AIP publications have the same table specification:
+% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
+% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all AIP journals.
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+%
+% Customize the \revtex\ for the AIP society.
+% this task requires three components:
+% the \BibTeX\ \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst} style files, 
+% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command.
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+% The default bibliography style for the AIP journal substyles are \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst}. 
+%  To generate them, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
+%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
+%  accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  ORDERING OF REFERENCES: c: seq-no (references in order of Citation);
+% \item
+%  AUTHOR NAMES: i: nm-init,ed-au (Initials + surname);
+% \item
+%  NUMBER OF AUTHORS: l: max 12, min 12 (there will be three prompts total);
+% \item
+%  TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES: u: nmft,nmft-def (User defined author font);
+% \item
+%  FONT FOR FIRST NAMES: u: fnm-def (First names in user defined font);
+% \item
+%  EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC: a: nmfted (Editors incollection like authors);
+% \item
+%  DATE FORMAT: p: yr-par (Date in parentheses);
+% \item
+%  SUPPRESS MONTH: x: xmth (Date is year only);
+% \item
+%  TITLE OF ARTICLE: i: tit-it (Title italic)
+% \item
+%  ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT: x: jtit-x (No article title);
+% \item
+%  JOURNAL NAME FONT: r: jttl-rm (Journal title normal);
+% \item
+%  TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE: b: trtit-b (Tech. report title like books);
+% \item
+%  JOURNAL VOLUME: b: vol-bf (Volume bold);
+% \item
+%  VOLUME PUNCTUATION: c: volp-com (Volume with comma);
+% \item
+%  PAGE NUMBERS: f: jpg-1 (Only start page number);
+% \item
+%  JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION: x: jnm-x (Space after journal);
+% \item
+%  PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES: d: pub-date (Publisher and date in parentheses);
+% \item
+%  PUBLISHER POSITION: p: pre-pub (Publisher before chapter, pages);
+% \item
+% ISBN NUMBER: isbn: (Include ISBN for books, booklets)
+% \item
+% ISSN NUMBER: issn: (Include ISSN for periodicals)
+% \item
+%  EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS: b: edby (Booktitle, edited by \dots);
+% \item
+%  PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS): c: blk-com (Comma between blocks);
+% \item
+%  ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES': a: pp (`Page' abbreviated);
+% \item
+%  ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': a: ed (`Editor' abbreviated);
+% \item
+%  OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: a: abr (Abbreviations);
+% \item
+%  ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION': a: ednx (`Edition' abbreviated as `ed');
+% \item
+%  EDITION NUMBERS: n: ord (Numerical editions);
+% \item
+%  STORED JOURNAL NAMES: a: jabr (Abbreviated journal names);
+% \item
+%  FONT OF `ET AL': i: etal-it (Italic et al);
+% \item
+%  ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: r: revdata, eprint, url, url-blk (Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, url)
+% \item
+%  NEW FONT SELECTION SCHEME: n: nfss (NFSS);
+% \item
+%  ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: y: revdata (additional data fields);
+% \item
+%  REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS: y: reference component tags;
+% \item
+%  URL ADDRESS: n: URL as note;
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{aipnum.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2009-10-08 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+%  head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
+%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
+%  yr-par,%: Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
+%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
+%  article-series,%: article can has series
+%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+%  vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
+%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
+%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+%  pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+%  pre-pub,%: Publisher before volume, chapter, pages 
+%  pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
+%  pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
+%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
+%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
+%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
+%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
+%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+%  }}
+%\generate{\file{aipnum4-1.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Between the two files \file{aipnum.dbj} and \file{aipauth.dbj}, 
+% the differences are limited:
+% \file{aipnum.dbj} has two lines lacking in \file{aipauth.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% thus, the ``numbered citation'' bibliography is sorted by citation order, and
+% the names are give first inital, then last name.
+%
+% Likewise, \file{aipauth.dbj} has one line lacking in \file{aipnum.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  nm-rev,%: Surname + comma + initials (Smith, J. F.)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Thus, the ``author-year'' bibliography is sorted by author name, and
+% names are given last name first, followed by initials.
+%
+% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
+% in the matter by installing the (default) AIP code 
+% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aip-defaults}).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
+% 
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
+% (we use \cmd\refname). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}%
+\def\rtx@bibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line has been commented out:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+}%
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
+% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{\footnotesize}%
+  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+  \labelsep\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Index}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}{%
+}%
+%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+%
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+%
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+%
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Typesize Processing}%
+% The formatting specification for the preprint option is:
+% Times Roman 12 pt, double spacing, with 1-inch margins on letter paper.
+% Paragraphs indented ``five spaces''.
+% Display math on standard indent, with equation number flush right in parenthesis, with subequations roman.
+%
+% That for reprint option is to format similar to the printed journal; with most journals
+% set (approximately analyzed) 10-point, 2-column grid, letter paper.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aip10pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps10pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 10pt}%
+ \aipreprint
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aip11pt\endcsname{\csname rtx@aip12pt\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aip12pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps12pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 12pt}%
+ \aippreprint
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in 
+% this document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+   \or January\or February\or March\or     April\or   May\or      June%
+   \or July\or    August\or   September\or October\or November\or December%
+  \fi\space
+  \number\year
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% 
+% \subsection{A. Running Title}
+% User-provided running title \cmd\@shorttitle\ to be set.
+%
+% \subsection{B. Equation numbering, figure and table numbering}
+% Equations can be numbered throughout, or by section, with appendix equations prepended by the appendix label.
+% Figures and tables are numbered throughout.
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{C. Title}
+% Title page may break above abstract, within author list.
+% Title notes are signified by superior letter followed by right parenthesis.
+%
+% \subsection{D. Author footnote}
+% Set short line above these footnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{E. Author}
+% Class option \classoption{superscriptaddress} is standard.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \clo@superscriptaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{F. Affiliations}
+% Set italic.
+%
+% \subsection{G. Received date}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{H. Abstract}
+% Single paragraph, no indent.
+%
+% \subsection{J. Lead Paragraph}
+% Set boldface, flush left before main text, single paragraph.
+% Separated from text by a short centered rule.
+%
+% \subsection{K. Headings}
+% Use labels: ROMAN, LETTER, arabic, letter.
+% Set ALLCAPS, boldface; Initial cap, boldface; Initial cap, bold-italic; Initial cap, italic.
+%
+% Theorem, proof title followed by colon. Follow author.
+%
+% \subsection{L. Text Footnotes}
+% Not permitted; use endnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{M. Citations and Bibliography}
+% Numerical \filename{aipnum.bst}, author-year \filename{aipauth.bst}, and numbered author-year \filename{aipnumauth.bst} are the available choices. 
+% Numerical is standard, with all styles permitted in journal classes 3a and 4b.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{N. References}
+% 
+% Article Title usage:
+%
+%			 Article title required in all journals with "unpublished", "to be published", "in press" and "submitted" refs.
+% 
+% Exceptions:
+%
+% Journal classes 1a,1b,2,4a:
+%
+%       Article title not allowed in published references, except in the case of  "in press" or submitted" (see sample references below). 
+%
+% Journal class 3a:
+%
+%       Article title allowed but not required in author-year references (use must be consistent within a single manuscript).
+%
+% Journal class 3b:
+%
+%       Article title required in all journal references and report references.
+%
+% Journal class 4b:
+%
+%       Article title allowed in journal references in author-year mode. 
+%
+% \subsection{O. Examples of Numerical References}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{P. References in Author-year mode}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Q. Numbered Author-year References}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{R. Tables}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with Roman numeral. 
+%
+% Table caption placed above table, followed by space, 
+% two double lines, space, table column headings, space, 
+% single line, table contents, two double lines.
+%
+% Footnotes labeled with superior lower-case letter, set below table contents. 
+%
+% \subsection{S. Figures}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with arabic numbers.
+% 
+% Caption set below figure. A citation to be set inline, not superscripted.
+%
+% \subsection{Society defaults}%
+%
+% After this society file is read in, we will process the 
+% \cmd\@journal- and \cmd\@pointsize-specific code. 
+% Here we define the defaults. 
+%
+% We select \textbf{Chaos} as the default journal substyle, because it is 
+% the most permissive in terms of bibliography and citation style,
+% and it is formatted in two column in the reprint style. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journal@default{cha}%
+\def\@pointsize@default{12}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Journal-Specific Code}%
+%
+% For AIP journals, we supply code specific to JCP, POP, RSI, JAP, APL, CHA, POF, BMF, RSE, JMP.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jcp}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjcp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jcp} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pop}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aippop{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pop} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rsi}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aiprsi{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rsi} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jap}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 1b.
+%
+% No running title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjap{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jap} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{apl}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 2.
+%
+% No running title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipapl{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 2 uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{apl} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{cha}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipcha{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{cha} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pof}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aippof{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 3b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Article titles are required, so we include them if available, 
+% but if absent, we can do no more than make a warning in the \file{.blg}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pof} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{bmf}}%
+% A member of the journal class 4a, 
+% the Biomicrofluidics journal is single column. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipbmf{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{bmf} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rse}}%
+%A member of the journal class 4a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aiprse{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rse} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jmp}}%
+% Sole member of the journal class 4b, Journal of Mathematical Physics is single column.
+% For an example of \env{itemize}, see JMP\_122901\_1 (48).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjmp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jmp} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Establish AIP Defaults\label{sec:aip-defaults}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% All AIP journals invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% We install code that will 
+% govern the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted, 
+% select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
+% and control the \BibTeX\ processing.
+%
+% Note that a journal substyle may override these settings.
+% Likewise, document preamble may itself invoke \cmd\bibpunct\ or \cmd\bibliographystyle,
+% thereby overriding these settings and those of the journal substyle. 
+%
+% The numbered citations of \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum}
+% are compatible with \classoption{footinbib} and 
+% the compression and coalescing features of \classname{natbib}, 
+% while \file{aipauth}'s author-year citations are not.
+% Therefore, we de-select such options if we are selecting author-year citations. 
+%
+% Note on \classname{natbib} presets:
+% \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum} uses the Chicago \cmd\bibpunct\ style;
+% while \file{aipauth} uses that of Nature. 
+%
+% Note on \cmd\NAT@mcite: if not using numerical citations, we set \cmd\NAT@mcite\ 
+% to a lower value, to turn off the mcite semantics of \classname{natbib}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \authoryear@sw{%
+  \aip@jtitx@sw{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle@post}%
+  }{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle@post}%
+  }%
+  \authornum@sw{%
+   \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+   \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+  }{%
+   \bibhang10\p@
+   \bibpunct{(%)
+              }{%(
+                )}{; }{a}{,}{,}%
+   \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+   \let\NAT@mcite\@ne
+   \let\NAT@sort\z@
+   \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
+   \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
+   \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \aip@jtitx@sw{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle@post}%
+  }{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle@post}%
+  }%
+  \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+  \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+ }%
+}%
+\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \authoryear@sw{\authornum@sw{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}{\false@sw}%
+  {}{%
+   \ltx@footnote@push
+   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
+   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
+   \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+   \let\printendnotes\relax
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aipreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps10pt.rtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aipreprint{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aippreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps12pt.rtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aippreprint{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/aip4-2.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/aip4-2.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9f949a976c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/aip4-2.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4980 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% aip4-2.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2019 American Institute of Physics
+% mailto:tex@aip.org
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% Version (4.2c)
+% Modified by Aptara
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file aip4-2.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    aip.rtx, aip.pdf, aip.ins, aip.drv.
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/aip/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex aip4-2.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex aip4-2.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex aip4-2.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+%       pdflatex aip4-2.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+%       pdflatex aip4-2.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:bibtex/bst/aip/
+%    TDS:doc/latex/aip/
+%    TDS:source/latex/aip/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/aip/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from aip4-2.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+%% This file requires docstrip version 2.4 or higher available from
+%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked/docstrip.tex
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README-AIP.
+
+Copyright (c) 2019 American Institute of Physics.
+mailto:tex@aip.org
+
+Maintained by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)
+under contract to American Institute of Physics
+
+Version (4.2c)
+Modified by Aptara
+under contract to American Institute of Physics
+
+License
+   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+   
+   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
+   without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY 
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+  %{ignore}
+% \file{aip.ins}{\from{aip4-2.dtx}{install}}%
+% \file{aip.drv}{\from{aip4-2.dtx}{driver}}%
+% \usedir{tex/latex/aip}%
+  \file{aip4-2.rtx}{\from{aip4-2.dtx}{package}}%
+  \file{aapm4-2.rtx}{\from{aip4-2.dtx}{aapm}}%
+  \file{sor4-2.rtx}{\from{aip4-2.dtx}{sor}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    aip.rtx}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/aip/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run aip4-2.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{aip4-2.dtx}
+% \CheckSum{6707}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "aip4-2.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.2c",
+%%%     date            = "2019/01/18",
+%%%     time            = "14:29:48 GMT-5",
+%%%     checksum        = "6737",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Institute of Physics.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 2019 American Institute of Physics,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "AIP Journal Program
+%%%                        American Institute of Physics, 
+%%%                        Suite 1NO1, 2 Huntington Quadrangle, 
+%%%                        Melville, NY 11747 USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon tex at aip.org",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "aip substyle for REVTeX",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README-AIP} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-AIP}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README-AIP}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip4-2.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aip4-2.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the installer.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README   aip.ins
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aip4-2.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.rtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.aux aip.idx aip.ind aip.log aip.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package|aapm|sor>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
+%</driver|package|aapm|sor>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{aip4-2.rtx}%
+%<aapm>\ProvidesFile{aapm4-2.rtx}%
+%<sor>\ProvidesFile{sor4-2.rtx}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+%<version>
+ [2019/01/18/14:29:48 4.2c AIP substyle for REVTeX]% \fileversion
+%</driver|package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{.ins} installer and \file{README-AIP} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\gdef\lquote{`}\gdef\rquote{'}%
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/06}{Beta candidate b}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README-AIP}
+\title{%
+ The \classname{aip} substyle for REV\TeX%
+ \protect\thanks{%
+  \fileversion\ \copyright 2009 American Institute of Physics
+  % For version number and date,
+  % search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+  % or see the end of the README file.
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa\thanks{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the 
+AIP journal substyles for APS's \revtex\ 4.2 document class
+for electronic submissions to AIP journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publishing.aip.org/authors/preparing-your-manuscript}.
+The archive contains ready-to-Install files, documentation, and full source.
+
+This package is also distributed via CTAN:
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/aip}, and as a ready-to-install image as
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/install/macros/latex/contrib/aip.tds.zip}.
+
+The \classname{aip} package was commissioned by the American Institute of Physics
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\ 
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{aip.rtx}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{auguide.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Overview}%
+\revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of 
+the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
+
+This document class implements the AIP society and journal substyles: 
+the journals represent a set of mutually exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the 
+document class to address multiple journals within the AIP family.
+This society is obtained with class option \classoption{aip}.
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{aip.rtx}
+is generated from this file, \file{aip4-2.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex aip4-2.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex aip4-2.dtx| or |pdflatex aip4-2.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{aip4-2.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{aip4-2.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the installer \file{aip.ins},
+and the file \file{README-AIP}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX\ twice, then \file{makeindex}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{aip4-2.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{aip.rtx}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.rtx}
+by moving it to a location
+in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX,
+like \file{tex/latex/aip}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.pdf}
+by moving it to 
+\file{doc/latex/aip}.
+\item 
+Using the \file{.dbj} information herein, 
+generate the needed \file{.bst} files and install them in
+\file{bibtex/bst/aip}.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{AIP: A set of journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
+%
+% To create a journal substyle, you create 
+% a \file{.rtx} file, in our case \file{aip.rtx}.
+% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
+% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
+% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
+% Also within that file, you include a 
+% section of code for each journal, that for JMP looks like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@jmp}{%
+% <code specific to the JMP>
+% }{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% \section{The \classoption{aip} class option: the \texttt{aip} module}
+% The file \file{aip.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aip}.
+%
+% Here, code specific to AIP journals appears.
+%
+% We first give some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
+% then some AIP-specific initialisations,
+% then code for particular AIP journals.
+% In the latter case, the choice is 
+% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AtEndOfClass:
+% this file, like all journal substyles, is read in at \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ time,
+% so you should not use this command in this file. 
+% Note for \LaTeX\ developers: It would be an improvement in \LaTeX\ to 
+% \cmd\let\cmd\AtEndOfClass\ to something like \cmd\@firstofone.
+% This change would be effected in \cmd\@onefilewithoptions.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX society AIP selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Substyle Options}%
+%
+% Here are the class options relating to the AIP:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{jcp}{\change@journal{jcp}}%
+\DeclareOption{pop}{\change@journal{pop}}%
+\DeclareOption{rsi}{\change@journal{rsi}}%
+\DeclareOption{jap}{\change@journal{jap}}%
+\DeclareOption{apl}{\change@journal{apl}}%
+\DeclareOption{apm}{\change@journal{apm}}%
+\DeclareOption{cha}{\change@journal{cha}}%
+\DeclareOption{pof}{\change@journal{pof}}%
+\DeclareOption{bmf}{\change@journal{bmf}}%
+\DeclareOption{rse}{\change@journal{rse}}%
+\DeclareOption{jmp}{\change@journal{jmp}}%
+\DeclareOption{adv}{\change@journal{adv}}%
+\DeclareOption{sd}{\change@journal{sd}}%
+\DeclareOption{jor}{\change@journal{jor}}%
+\DeclareOption{cp}{\change@journal{cp}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Abbreviations}%
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
+% The following macros constitute typing shortcuts for
+% certain journal names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adv{AIP Advances}%
+\def\ao{Appl.\ Opt.}%
+\def\ap{Appl.\ Phys.}%
+\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\apm{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.\ Mater.}%
+\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}%
+\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}%
+\def\bmf{Biomicrofluidics}%
+\def\cha{Chaos}%
+\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}%
+\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}%
+\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}%
+\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}%
+\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jap{J.\ Appl.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jmp{J.\ Math.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}%
+\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}%
+\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}%
+\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}%
+\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}%
+\def\jpr{J.\ Phys.\ Chem.\ Ref.\ Data}%
+\def\ltp{Low.\ Temp.\ Phys.}%
+\def\nat{Nature (London)}%
+\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}%
+\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pop{Phys.\ Plasmas}%
+\def\pof{Phys.\ Fluids}%
+\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}%
+\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}%
+\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}%
+\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}%
+\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}%
+\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}%
+\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}%
+\def\rsi{Rev.\ Sci.\ Instrum.}%
+\def\rse{J.\ Renewable Sustainable Energy}%
+\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}%
+\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\vr{Vision Res.}%
+\def\sd{Structural\ Dynamics}%
+\def\jor{J.\ Rheol.}%
+\def\cp{AIP\ Conference\ Proceedings}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Option allowing for ``numerical author-year'' bibliography. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{author-numerical}{%
+  \@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
+  \@booleantrue\authornum@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Optionally allow article title in bibliography entries. 
+% A new switch is defined here: \cmd\aip@jtitx@sw\ signifies that 
+% the numbered style bibliography is to be prepared without article titles in @ARTICLE entries.
+% Otherwise, such titles are incorporated if present in the \file{.bib} entry. 
+% By default, exclude the article titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{article-title}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue \aip@jtitx@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Establish default options for this society.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+\@booleanfalse\authornum@sw
+\@booleanfalse\onecolumn@sw
+\@booleanfalse\newonecolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aip}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aip\ has the job of writing the control record into the
+% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. 
+% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning 
+% is set by the society (AIP) and journal. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aip}%
+\def\@bibdataout@aip{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   aip41Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \longbibliography@sw{\true@sw}{\aip@jtitx@sw{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
+   {%
+    ,pages="1",title="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,pages="0",title=""%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{aip41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For AIP, the preprint style \classoption{preprint} is the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw}
+% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
+% otherwise not.
+% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+\@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+% 
+% In reprint style only, we eliminate the head above the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% TeXSupport
+\let\old@refname\refname
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{AIP Setup}%
+% Here we define the default procedures for AIP journals.
+% Individual AIP journals may override these definitions.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Running header and footer}%
+%
+% Page style for all AIP journals.
+% We assert our own page style only if nobody else has done so.
+% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
+% command anywhere in the preamble.
+%FIXME: \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ is defined?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \ps@preprint
+ }{%
+  \ps@article
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The spc says: ``Running title must be provided on title page'',
+% and that journal classes 1b and 2 have no running title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@preprint{%
+  \def\@oddhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps@article{%
+  \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@runningtitle{\@shorttitle}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title block}%
+%
+% The specifics of the title block.
+% Apply to all AIP journals; individual journals may override these settings.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+  \c@page\z@% article sets this to one not zero???
+}{%
+  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% On the title page, footnotes are lettered with right parenthesis: ``a)''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@fnsymbol@latex\@fnsymbol
+\let\@fnsymbol\@alph
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adjust@abstractwidth}
+% This procedure is used by many titlepage elements to indent on the left by a particular 
+% amount. The author list uses \cmd\frontmatter@authorformat\ to accomplish the same.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% AIP Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% All AIP journals set the abstract body the same way.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+%\small
+ \adjust@abstractwidth
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All AIP journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \@booleantrue\titlepage@sw
+% \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}%
+  \let\section\section@preprintsty
+% \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty
+  \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
+  \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% All AIP journals set the author list the same.
+% The leading is 11.5 points, and
+% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
+% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
+% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \sffamily
+%\advance\baselineskip\p@
+%\parskip11.5\p@\relax
+}%
+\renewcommand*\email[1][Electronic mail: ]{\begingroup\sanitize@url\@email{#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+%\addvspace{3.5\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% All AIP journals set the affiliation the same.
+% Like the author, but in italic. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\small}%
+ \it
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the default AIP style for title block authors and affiliations.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% All AIP journals set the title page using the same font and size.
+% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
+% we assert none here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% All AIP journals set the article title 12 point Times Roman, bold, flush left.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ \parskip\z@skip
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{3\p@}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
+% All AIP journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text:
+% superior lowercase letter, with right parenthesis.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
+\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark%(
+  )%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
+	\addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil@cutoff}
+% We override \cmd\affil@cutoff\ to enforce the rule that,
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page, then
+% no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\affil@cutoff\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% De awa. 
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% All AIP journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+%
+% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{5\p@}%
+  \small
+  \raggedright
+  \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+%  \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+%  \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
+% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
+% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
+% stacked flush right at the right margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@titlepage{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+   \@runningtitle
+   \hfill
+   \produce@preprints\@preprint
+  }%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+   \hfil
+   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
+   \quad\checkindate
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX and AIP}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce@preprints#1{%
+ \preprint@sw{%
+  \vtop to \z@{%
+   \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+   \small
+   \let\preprint\preprint@count
+   \count@\z@#1\@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+    \hbox{%
+     \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
+     #1\setbox\z@\lastbox
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \let\preprint\preprint@cr
+    \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+    \par
+    \vss
+   }%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Lead-in paragraph}%
+%
+% The \env{Lead-in paragraph} environment formats the AIP ``lead paragraph''.
+% To avoid introducing new syntax, we take over the \env{quotation} environment
+% until the first \cmd\section\ (or other sectioning command) appears.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{Lead@inParagraph}{%
+ \par
+ \bfseries
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}{%
+ \par
+ \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\hfil}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At the beginning of the document temporarily change the meaning of 
+% the \env{quotation} environment, restoring it once the first sectioning
+% command is given. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let@environment{quotation@ltx}{quotation}%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{Lead@inParagraph}%
+}%
+\appdef\@startsection@hook{%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{quotation@ltx}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% All AIP journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
+% Also, no hanging section number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument. 
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
+% purpose.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044101\_1 (1) or BMF\_044103\_1 (1)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044104\_1 (1), JMP\_123520\_1 (48), 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \itshape
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty}
+% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
+% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+%    \small
+     \itshape\bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For examples of 
+% \env{theorem}, \env{proposition}, \env{lemma}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{example},
+% and \env{proof} (with optional title), 
+% using independent numbering for each class,
+% and with numbered and roman lists therein, 
+% see JMP\_122901\_1 (48). 
+%
+% For theorems, etc, numbered by section, (and with theorems in the appendix)
+% but equations numbered throughout, 
+% see JMP\_123301\_1 (48). 
+%
+% For a (roman) list in text, theorem, and proof,
+% see JMP\_123514\_1 (48).
+%
+% For numbered list in text, 
+% and equations numbered by section, 
+% see JMP\_123518\_1 (48).
+%
+% All AIP journals use frontmatter footnotes by default. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
+% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, 
+% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
+ \print@toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@munge{%
+  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
+  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@restore{%
+  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum{#2}%
+% \@tempdima 3em %
+  \parindent \z@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+  \large \bf %
+  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\z@}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+  \par
+  \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ \bf
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the auto TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
+% All AIP journal styles have flush bottoms.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float}
+% All AIP publications have the same table specification:
+% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
+% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all AIP journals.
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+%
+% Customize the \revtex\ for the AIP society.
+% this task requires three components:
+% the \BibTeX\ \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst} style files, 
+% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command.
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+% The default bibliography style for the AIP journal substyles are \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst}. 
+%  To generate them, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
+%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
+%  accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  ORDERING OF REFERENCES: c: seq-no (references in order of Citation);
+% \item
+%  AUTHOR NAMES: i: nm-init,ed-au (Initials + surname);
+% \item
+%  NUMBER OF AUTHORS: l: max 12, min 12 (there will be three prompts total);
+% \item
+%  TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES: u: nmft,nmft-def (User defined author font);
+% \item
+%  FONT FOR FIRST NAMES: u: fnm-def (First names in user defined font);
+% \item
+%  EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC: a: nmfted (Editors incollection like authors);
+% \item
+%  DATE FORMAT: p: yr-par (Date in parentheses);
+% \item
+%  SUPPRESS MONTH: x: xmth (Date is year only);
+% \item
+%  TITLE OF ARTICLE: i: tit-it (Title italic)
+% \item
+%  ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT: x: jtit-x (No article title);
+% \item
+%  JOURNAL NAME FONT: r: jttl-rm (Journal title normal);
+% \item
+%  TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE: b: trtit-b (Tech. report title like books);
+% \item
+%  JOURNAL VOLUME: b: vol-bf (Volume bold);
+% \item
+%  VOLUME PUNCTUATION: c: volp-com (Volume with comma);
+% \item
+%  PAGE NUMBERS: f: jpg-1 (Only start page number);
+% \item
+%  JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION: x: jnm-x (Space after journal);
+% \item
+%  PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES: d: pub-date (Publisher and date in parentheses);
+% \item
+%  PUBLISHER POSITION: p: pre-pub (Publisher before chapter, pages);
+% \item
+% ISBN NUMBER: isbn: (Include ISBN for books, booklets)
+% \item
+% ISSN NUMBER: issn: (Include ISSN for periodicals)
+% \item
+%  EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS: b: edby (Booktitle, edited by \dots);
+% \item
+%  PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS): c: blk-com (Comma between blocks);
+% \item
+%  ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES': a: pp (`Page' abbreviated);
+% \item
+%  ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': a: ed (`Editor' abbreviated);
+% \item
+%  OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: a: abr (Abbreviations);
+% \item
+%  ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION': a: ednx (`Edition' abbreviated as `ed');
+% \item
+%  EDITION NUMBERS: n: ord (Numerical editions);
+% \item
+%  STORED JOURNAL NAMES: a: jabr (Abbreviated journal names);
+% \item
+%  FONT OF `ET AL': i: etal-it (Italic et al);
+% \item
+%  ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: r: revdata, eprint, url, url-blk (Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, url)
+% \item
+%  NEW FONT SELECTION SCHEME: n: nfss (NFSS);
+% \item
+%  ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: y: revdata (additional data fields);
+% \item
+%  REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS: y: reference component tags;
+% \item
+%  URL ADDRESS: n: URL as note;
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{aipnum.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2009-10-08 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+%  head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
+%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
+%  yr-par,%: Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
+%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
+%  article-series,%: article can has series
+%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+%  vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
+%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
+%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+%  pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+%  pre-pub,%: Publisher before volume, chapter, pages 
+%  pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
+%  pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
+%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
+%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
+%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
+%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
+%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+%  }}
+%\generate{\file{aipnum4-1.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Between the two files \file{aipnum.dbj} and \file{aipauth.dbj}, 
+% the differences are limited:
+% \file{aipnum.dbj} has two lines lacking in \file{aipauth.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% thus, the ``numbered citation'' bibliography is sorted by citation order, and
+% the names are give first inital, then last name.
+%
+% Likewise, \file{aipauth.dbj} has one line lacking in \file{aipnum.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  nm-rev,%: Surname + comma + initials (Smith, J. F.)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Thus, the ``author-year'' bibliography is sorted by author name, and
+% names are given last name first, followed by initials.
+%
+% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
+% in the matter by installing the (default) AIP code 
+% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aip-defaults}).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
+% 
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
+% (we use \cmd\refname). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}%
+\def\rtx@bibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line has been commented out:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+}%
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
+% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{\footnotesize}%
+  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+  \labelsep\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Index}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}{%
+}%
+%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+%
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+%
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+%
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Typesize Processing}%
+% The formatting specification for the preprint option is:
+% Times Roman 12 pt, double spacing, with 1-inch margins on letter paper.
+% Paragraphs indented ``five spaces''.
+% Display math on standard indent, with equation number flush right in parenthesis, with subequations roman.
+%
+% That for reprint option is to format similar to the printed journal; with most journals
+% set (approximately analyzed) 10-point, 2-column grid, letter paper.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aip10pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps10pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 10pt}%
+ \aipreprint
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aip11pt\endcsname{\csname rtx@aip12pt\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aip12pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps12pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 12pt}%
+ \aippreprint
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in 
+% this document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+   \or January\or February\or March\or     April\or   May\or      June%
+   \or July\or    August\or   September\or October\or November\or December%
+  \fi\space
+  \number\year
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% 
+% \subsection{A. Running Title}
+% User-provided running title \cmd\@shorttitle\ to be set.
+%
+% \subsection{B. Equation numbering, figure and table numbering}
+% Equations can be numbered throughout, or by section, with appendix equations prepended by the appendix label.
+% Figures and tables are numbered throughout.
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{C. Title}
+% Title page may break above abstract, within author list.
+% Title notes are signified by superior letter followed by right parenthesis.
+%
+% \subsection{D. Author footnote}
+% Set short line above these footnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{E. Author}
+% Class option \classoption{superscriptaddress} is standard.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \clo@superscriptaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{F. Affiliations}
+% Set italic.
+%
+% \subsection{G. Received date}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{H. Abstract}
+% Single paragraph, no indent.
+%
+% \subsection{J. Lead Paragraph}
+% Set boldface, flush left before main text, single paragraph.
+% Separated from text by a short centered rule.
+%
+% \subsection{K. Headings}
+% Use labels: ROMAN, LETTER, arabic, letter.
+% Set ALLCAPS, boldface; Initial cap, boldface; Initial cap, bold-italic; Initial cap, italic.
+%
+% Theorem, proof title followed by colon. Follow author.
+%
+% \subsection{L. Text Footnotes}
+% Not permitted; use endnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{M. Citations and Bibliography}
+% Numerical \filename{aipnum.bst}, author-year \filename{aipauth.bst}, and numbered author-year \filename{aipnumauth.bst} are the available choices. 
+% Numerical is standard, with all styles permitted in journal classes 3a and 4b.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{N. References}
+% 
+% Article Title usage:
+%
+%			 Article title required in all journals with "unpublished", "to be published", "in press" and "submitted" refs.
+% 
+% Exceptions:
+%
+% Journal classes 1a,1b,2,4a:
+%
+%       Article title not allowed in published references, except in the case of  "in press" or submitted" (see sample references below). 
+%
+% Journal class 3a:
+%
+%       Article title allowed but not required in author-year references (use must be consistent within a single manuscript).
+%
+% Journal class 3b:
+%
+%       Article title required in all journal references and report references.
+%
+% Journal class 4b:
+%
+%       Article title allowed in journal references in author-year mode. 
+%
+% \subsection{O. Examples of Numerical References}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{P. References in Author-year mode}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Q. Numbered Author-year References}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{R. Tables}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with Roman numeral. 
+%
+% Table caption placed above table, followed by space, 
+% two double lines, space, table column headings, space, 
+% single line, table contents, two double lines.
+%
+% Footnotes labeled with superior lower-case letter, set below table contents. 
+%
+% \subsection{S. Figures}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with arabic numbers.
+% 
+% Caption set below figure. A citation to be set inline, not superscripted.
+%
+% \subsection{Society defaults}%
+%
+% After this society file is read in, we will process the 
+% \cmd\@journal- and \cmd\@pointsize-specific code. 
+% Here we define the defaults. 
+%
+% We select \textbf{Chaos} as the default journal substyle, because it is 
+% the most permissive in terms of bibliography and citation style,
+% and it is formatted in two column in the reprint style. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journal@default{cha}%
+\def\@pointsize@default{12}%
+\@booleanfalse\pagerestrict@sw%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Journal-Specific Code}%
+%
+% For AIP journals, we supply code specific to JCP, POP, RSI, JAP, APL, CHA, POF, BMF, RSE, JMP.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jcp}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjcp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jcp} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pop}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aippop{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pop} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rsi}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aiprsi{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rsi} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jap}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 1b.
+%
+% No running title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjap{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jap} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{apl}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 2.
+%
+% No running title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipapl{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 2 uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{apl} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{apm}}%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipapm{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{cha}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipcha{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{cha} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pof}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aippof{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 3b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Article titles are required, so we include them if available, 
+% but if absent, we can do no more than make a warning in the \file{.blg}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pof} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{bmf}}%
+% A member of the journal class 4a, 
+% the Biomicrofluidics journal is single column. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipbmf{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{bmf} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{sd}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipsd{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{cp}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipcp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw%
+% \@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+% \@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw%
+% \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jor}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjor{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleantrue\authoryear@sw%
+ \@booleantrue\twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rse}}%
+%A member of the journal class 4a.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aiprse{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rse} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jmp}}%
+% Sole member of the journal class 4b, Journal of Mathematical Physics is single column.
+% For an example of \env{itemize}, see JMP\_122901\_1 (48).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipjmp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip@jtitx@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
+ \@booleantrue\onecolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jmp} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{adv}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@aipadv{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Establish AIP Defaults\label{sec:aip-defaults}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% All AIP journals invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% We install code that will 
+% govern the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted, 
+% select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
+% and control the \BibTeX\ processing.
+%
+% Note that a journal substyle may override these settings.
+% Likewise, document preamble may itself invoke \cmd\bibpunct\ or \cmd\bibliographystyle,
+% thereby overriding these settings and those of the journal substyle. 
+%
+% The numbered citations of \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum}
+% are compatible with \classoption{footinbib} and 
+% the compression and coalescing features of \classname{natbib}, 
+% while \file{aipauth}'s author-year citations are not.
+% Therefore, we de-select such options if we are selecting author-year citations. 
+%
+% Note on \classname{natbib} presets:
+% \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum} uses the Chicago \cmd\bibpunct\ style;
+% while \file{aipauth} uses that of Nature. 
+%
+% Note on \cmd\NAT@mcite: if not using numerical citations, we set \cmd\NAT@mcite\ 
+% to a lower value, to turn off the mcite semantics of \classname{natbib}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\old@place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \authoryear@sw{%
+  \aip@jtitx@sw{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle@post}%
+  }{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle@post}%
+  }%
+  \authornum@sw{%
+   \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+   \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+  }{%
+   \bibhang10\p@
+   \bibpunct{(%)
+              }{%(
+                )}{; }{a}{,}{,}%
+   \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+   \let\NAT@mcite\@ne
+   \let\NAT@sort\z@
+   \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
+   \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
+   \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \aip@jtitx@sw{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle@post}%
+  }{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle@post}%
+  }%
+  \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+  \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+ }%
+}%
+\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \authoryear@sw{\authornum@sw{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}{\false@sw}%
+  {}{%
+   \ltx@footnote@push
+   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
+   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
+   \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+   \let\printendnotes\relax
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aipreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps10pt.rtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aipreprint{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aippreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps12pt.rtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aippreprint{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Fixing the bug for single author/affiliation}%
+% In case of single author/affiliation no need to produce the affiliation number after the author name. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%
+\xdef\t@talAU{0}% TeXSupport
+\def\frontmatter@author@produce@script{%
+  \begingroup
+    \let\@author@present\@author@present@script
+    \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter@author@produce@script:}\say\@AAC@list\say\@AFF@list\say\@AFG@list}{}%
+    \let\AU@temp\@empty
+    \@tempcnta\z@
+    \let\AF@opr \@gobble
+    \def\AU@opr{\@author@count\@tempcnta}%
+    \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@count\AU@temp\@tempcnta}%
+    \@AAC@list%
+    \xdef\t@talAU{\the\@tempcnta}% TeXSupport
+    \expandafter\CO@opr\@author@cleared
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@authorformat
+     \let\AF@opr \@affilID@def
+     \let\AU@opr \@author@present
+     \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@present\AU@temp}%
+     \set@listcomma@list\AU@temp
+     \@AAC@list
+     \unskip\unskip
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@above@affiliation@script
+     \let\AFF@opr \@affil@script
+     \@AFF@list
+     \frontmatter@footnote@produce
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+  \endgroup
+}%
+\def\doauthor#1#2#3{% TeXSupport
+  \ignorespaces#1\unskip\@listcomma
+  \begingroup
+  \ifnum\t@talAU=1\else\ifnum\c@affil=\@ne\relax\else#3\fi\fi% TeXSupport
+  \@if@empty{#2}{\endgroup{}{}}{\endgroup{\ifnum\t@talAU=1\else\ifnum\c@affil=\@ne\relax\else\comma@space\fi\fi}{}\frontmatter@footnote{#2}}% TeXSupport
+  \space \@listand
+}%
+%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{Page restriction for APL (currently deactivated)}}%
+% This macro was installed to calculate page-lenght for APL articles. Currently this option is deactivated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CURRENTLY DEACTIVATED XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
+%% To activate, please add "\@booleantrue\pagerestrict@sw" in the
+%% respective journal option
+%% XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
+%% Appended by Ms. Sehar Tahir (Aptara) for American Institute of Physics.
+%% To impose page restrictions for APL journal at MSP stage.
+%%
+%% HISTORY
+%% Revised page restriction to 4 pages: 05/10/2011
+%% Tweaked the page over length message: 31/10/2011 
+\begingroup%
+  \catcode`P=12%
+  \catcode`T=12%
+  \lowercase{%
+    \def\x{\def\local@rem@pt##1.##2PT{##1.##2}}}%
+  \expandafter\endgroup\x%
+\def\local@strip@pt{\expandafter\local@rem@pt\the}%
+%%
+\DeclareOption{no-pagerestrict}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\pagerestrict@sw
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+\pagerestrict@sw{% For imposing page restrictions
+  \typeout{AIP Info: Appending Manuscript Pages caculations, 2011/05/30}%
+  % Default values
+  \def\page@allowed{4}% APL Article size limit
+  \def\text@ht@allowed{5324pt}% APL Total text height for allowed 4 pages
+  \def\page@calc@count{0}% APL Article size limit
+  % Message to authors
+  \def\msg@text{According to our initial programmatic calculations, your article may exceed APL page length restrictions. The estimated overlength is denoted by the red side bar. In order to avoid production delays, please adjust your text accordingly and replace your manuscript. To assist you with this process, please ensure that your figures, if any, are placed within the text and are the same size that you wish them to appear in the published article.}% Message to be displayed on the top of last page
+  \def\msg@runningtitle{% Message definition
+	\preprintsty@sw{%
+	  \@tempdimc\textwidth\advance\@tempdimc-11pt%
+	  \vtop{\vspace*{-3pc}\fboxsep0pt\fboxrule.5pt\fbox{\fboxsep5pt\colorbox{grayten}{%
+	  \vtop{\hsize\@tempdimc{{\reset@font\fontsize{9}{11}\def\baselinestretch{1}\leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parfillskip0pt plus1fill\selectfont\msg@text\endgraf}}}}}}% 
+    }{%
+	  \@tempdimc\textwidth\advance\@tempdimc-7pt%
+	  \vtop{\vspace*{-2.5pc}\fboxsep0pt\fboxrule.5pt\fbox{\fboxsep3pt\colorbox{grayten}{%
+	  \vtop{\hsize\@tempdimc{{\reset@font\fontsize{8}{10}\def\baselinestretch{1}\leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parfillskip0pt plus1fill\selectfont\msg@text\endgraf}}}}}}}%
+  }%
+  %
+  \RequirePackage{graphicx}% 
+  \RequirePackage{color}%
+  \definecolor{grayten}{gray}{.80}%
+  %
+  % Taken from refcount.sty
+  \def\setrefcountdefault#1{\def\rc@default{#1}}%
+  \setrefcountdefault{0}%
+  %
+  \def\rc@cartwo#1#2#3\@nil{#2}%
+        \newcommand*{\rev@getpagerefnumber}[1]{%
+        \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\relax
+         \rc@default
+        \else
+         \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\rc@cartwo
+         \csname r@#1\endcsname\rc@default\rc@default\@nil
+        \fi
+  }
+  \newcommand*{\rev@getrefnumber}[1]{%
+          \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\relax
+                \rc@default
+          \else
+                \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@car
+                \csname r@#1\endcsname\@nil
+          \fi
+  }
+  % Count determined from \label{...}
+  \newcommand\calc@run@count[2][0]{%
+	  \@ifundefined{r@#2}{\ifnum#1=\z@\@tempcnta\c@page\advance\@tempcnta\m@ne\else\@tempcnta\z@\fi}%
+						 {\@tempcnta\rev@getpagerefnumber{#2}\relax}}%
+  %
+  % Taken from everypage.sty
+  \newif\iffloats@end\global\floats@endfalse
+  \newif\ifextra@rule\global\extra@rulefalse
+  %
+  \newcommand{\sc@everypage@hook}{}
+  \newcommand{\sc@thispage@hook}{}
+  \newcommand*{\AddEverypageHook}[1]{%
+	  \g@addto@macro\sc@everypage@hook{#1}}
+  \newcommand*{\AddThispageHook}[1]{%
+	  \g@addto@macro\sc@thispage@hook{#1}}
+  \newcommand*{\sc@ep@init}{%
+	  \let\sc@op@saved\@outputpage
+	  \def\@outputpage{%
+		\sc@op@preamble
+		\sc@op@saved
+		\sc@op@postamble}}
+  \newcommand*{\sc@op@preamble}{%
+	  \let\sc@begindvi\@begindvi
+	  \def\@begindvi{%
+		\sc@everypage@hook
+		\sc@thispage@hook
+		\gdef\sc@thispage@hook{}
+		\sc@begindvi}}
+  \newcommand*{\sc@op@postamble}{%
+	  \let\@begindvi\sc@begindvi}
+  \AtBeginDocument{\sc@ep@init}
+  % Taken from draftwatermark.sty
+  \newcommand\sc@colortext[1]{%
+	  \setlength{\@tempdimb}{0pt}%
+	  \setlength{\@tempdimc}{-\paperheight}%
+	  \put(\strip@pt\@tempdimb,\strip@pt\@tempdimc){%
+		  \textcolor{red}{\rule{30pt}{#1}}
+		}}
+  % Calculating shift in red side-bar according to pages
+  \def\page@mark@shift{%
+  \@ifundefined{page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page}{}{%
+	  \@tempdimc\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\relax%
+	  \ifdim\@tempdimc>\csname page@mark\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\relax%
+		 \@tempdimb\textheight\advance\@tempdimb-\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\relax%
+	  \else%
+		 \@tempdimb\textheight\advance\@tempdimb-\csname page@mark\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\relax%
+	  \fi%
+	 \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimb}}%
+  \newcommand\sc@wm@print[1]{\preprintsty@sw{%
+							 \@tempdima\paperheight\advance\@tempdima-\textheight%
+							 \divide\@tempdima by 2\advance\@tempdima-7pt\advance\@tempdima1in%
+							 \floats@sw%
+								{\iffloats@end%
+								 \@ifundefined{r@LastBibItem}{}%
+									{\ifnum\c@page<\rev@getpagerefnumber{LastBibItem}\relax%
+									 \else%
+									   \page@mark@shift
+									 \fi}%
+								 \else%
+								 \@ifundefined{r@LastPage}{}%
+									{\ifnum\c@page=\rev@getpagerefnumber{LastPage}\relax%
+									   \page@mark@shift
+									 \fi}%
+								\fi}%
+								{\@ifundefined{r@EndText}{}%
+									{\ifnum\c@page<\rev@getpagerefnumber{EndText}\relax%
+									 \else%
+									   \page@mark@shift
+									 \fi}}}%
+							 {\@tempdima\paperheight\advance\@tempdima-\textheight%
+							  \divide\@tempdima by 2\advance\@tempdima9pt\advance\@tempdima1in}%
+	  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox to \z@{%
+		\vskip-\@tempdima \moveleft 1in \vbox{%
+		  \hbox to \z@{%
+			#1\hss}}\vss}
+	  \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+	  \box\@tempboxa}%
+  % Printing the red side-bar
+  \AddEverypageHook{\def\special@paper{\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}\special{papersize=\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}%
+  \preprintsty@sw{% Preprint
+				  \@ifundefined{page@mark\romannumeral\the\c@page}{}{%
+					\def\tempa{\csname page@mark\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname}%
+						  \sc@wm@print{\sc@colortext{\tempa\relax}}%
+				    %
+					\floats@sw{%
+					    \iffloats@end\calc@run@count[1]{LastBibItem}\else\calc@run@count[1]{LastPage}\fi%
+					  }{\ifextra@rule\calc@run@count[1]{LastPage}\else\calc@run@count[1]{EndText}\fi}%
+				    \ifnum\c@page=\@tempcnta%
+						\ifdim\page@calc@count pt>\page@allowed pt\relax%
+						  \def\@oddhead{\msg@runningtitle}%
+						  \def\@evenhead{\msg@runningtitle}%
+						\fi%
+				    \fi}}{% Reprint
+					\ifnum\c@page>\page@allowed%
+						\sc@wm@print{\sc@colortext{\textheight}}%
+						\calc@run@count[1]{LastPage}%
+				        \ifnum\c@page=\@tempcnta%
+						  \def\@oddhead{\msg@runningtitle}%
+						  \def\@evenhead{\msg@runningtitle}%
+						\fi%
+					\fi%
+				 }}%
+  %
+  % Print pages = 2*[(MSP Title portion height)/1.98] + (MSP Text height)/1.32 + (MSP Float height)/1.11
+  %
+  %
+  \@booleantrue\tally@box@size@sw % Activated to get hold of various dimensions
+  %
+  \newif\ifwrite@title\global\write@titletrue%
+  %
+  \newdimen\val@calc@dim% dimen used to translate MSP height to TSP height
+  \newdimen\make@title@dim% dimen storing height of maketitle portion
+  \newdimen\tsp@floatheight% dimen storing extra height for large floats
+  \newdimen\curr@figbox@ht% dimen storing current figure box height
+  \newdimen\curr@floatht% 
+  \newdimen\curr@floatwidth%
+  \newdimen\curr@tot@float@ht%
+  \newdimen\curr@page@ht% dimen storing current page height
+  %
+  \newsavebox{\figbox}%
+  %
+  \def\name@fig{figure}%
+  \def\same@fig{none}%
+  \def\in@flt{none}%
+  \def\max@pg@ht{0}%
+  \def\ptm{ptm}%
+  %
+  \gdef\@restrict@error#1#2{%
+	   \GenericError{%
+		  \space\space\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+	   }{%
+		  LaTeX Error: #1%
+	   }{%
+		  A red side-bar will appear along the extra text on the PDF pages. Press `Enter' to continue.%
+	   }{#2}%
+  }%
+  \preprintsty@sw{% For Preprint
+  % Adding Float height to the height of each page
+  \def\add@flt@pght{%
+		\@ifundefined{flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\c@page}{}%
+			{\@tempdimc\curr@page@ht\advance\@tempdimc\csname flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\relax%
+			 \ifdim\@tempdimc>\textheight%
+			   \global\curr@page@ht\textheight%
+			 \else%
+			   \global\advance\curr@page@ht\csname flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\relax%
+			 \fi}%
+		     \expandafter\xdef\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\the\curr@page@ht}}%
+  % Storing height of each page
+  \appdef\@outputpage@head{%
+	\floats@sw{%
+		\iffloats@end%
+	      \@ifundefined{r@LastBibHt}%
+		      {\add@flt@pght}
+		      {\ifnum\c@page=\rev@getpagerefnumber{LastBibHt}\relax%
+		          \@tempdima\rev@getrefnumber{LastBibHt}\relax%
+	              \expandafter\xdef\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}%
+		       \else%
+				  \add@flt@pght%
+		       \fi}%
+	    \else%
+		  \add@flt@pght%
+		\fi%
+	}{%
+	\@ifundefined{r@EndText}%
+		{\expandafter\xdef\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\the\curr@page@ht}
+		}{\ifnum\c@page=\rev@getpagerefnumber{EndText}\relax%
+		     \@tempdima\rev@getrefnumber{EndText}\relax%
+	         \expandafter\xdef\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}%
+		 \else%
+	         \expandafter\xdef\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\the\curr@page@ht}%
+		 \fi}%
+    }%
+	\global\curr@page@ht\z@%
+  }%
+  % Calculating and adding Maketitle portion size (ratio=1.98)
+  % Redefined
+  \def\show@box@size#1#2{%
+ %   \show@box@size@sw{%
+    \begingroup
+     \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy#2\hrule}%
+     \show@box@size@sw{%
+       \class@info{Show box size: #1^^J%
+        (\the\ht\z@\space X \the\wd\z@)
+        \the\c@page\space\space\the\pagegrid@cur\space\the\pagegrid@col
+       }}{}% 
+	 \global\advance\curr@page@ht\ht\z@%
+    \ifwrite@title%
+	  \@ifundefined{r@FirstPage}{\@tempcnta\the\c@page}%
+								{\@tempcnta\rev@getpagerefnumber{FirstPage}\relax}%
+	  \ifnum\c@page=\@tempcnta
+	    \global\make@title@dim\ht\z@
+	    \@tempdima\make@title@dim
+	    \divide\@tempdima by 198\relax 
+	    \multiply\@tempdima by 100\relax
+	    \global\advance\val@calc@dim\@tempdima%
+	    \global\advance\val@calc@dim\@tempdima%
+	    \global\write@titlefalse%
+	  \fi%
+    \fi%
+    \endgroup
+ %   }{}%
+  }%
+  % Calculating and adding Float portion size
+  % Redefined
+  \let\oldincludegraphics\includegraphics%
+  \def\includegraphics{%
+  \@ifnextchar[%]
+  {\two@includegraphics}{\one@includegraphics}}%
+  \def\one@includegraphics#1{\savebox{\figbox}{\oldincludegraphics{#1}}\oldincludegraphics{#1}%
+  \ifx\in@flt\name@fig%
+	\ifx\same@fig\name@fig%
+		\@tempdimc\curr@floatwidth\advance\@tempdimc\wd\figbox%
+		\ifdim\@tempdimc>\textwidth%
+		    \ifdim\wd\figbox>\curr@floatwidth%
+			   \global\curr@floatwidth\wd\figbox%
+		    \fi%
+		    \global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\ht\figbox%
+		    \global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\dp\figbox%
+		\else%
+		    \ifdim\ht\figbox>\curr@figbox@ht%
+		       \global\curr@figbox@ht\ht\figbox%
+		       \global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\dp\figbox%
+		    \fi%
+			\global\advance\curr@floatwidth\wd\figbox%
+		\fi%
+	\else%
+		\global\curr@floatwidth\wd\figbox%
+		\global\curr@figbox@ht\ht\figbox%
+		\global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\dp\figbox%
+		\gdef\same@fig{figure}%
+	\fi%
+  \fi}%
+  \def\two@includegraphics[#1]#2{\savebox{\figbox}{\oldincludegraphics[#1]{#2}}\oldincludegraphics[#1]{#2}%
+  \ifx\in@flt\name@fig%
+	\ifx\same@fig\name@fig%
+		\@tempdimc\curr@floatwidth\advance\@tempdimc\wd\figbox%
+		\ifdim\@tempdimc>\textwidth%
+		    \ifdim\wd\figbox>\curr@floatwidth%
+			   \global\curr@floatwidth\wd\figbox%
+		    \fi%
+		    \global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\ht\figbox%
+		    \global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\dp\figbox%
+		\else%
+		    \ifdim\ht\figbox>\curr@figbox@ht%
+		       \global\curr@figbox@ht\ht\figbox%
+		       \global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\dp\figbox%
+		    \fi%
+			\global\advance\curr@floatwidth\wd\figbox%
+		\fi%
+	\else%
+		\global\curr@floatwidth\wd\figbox%
+		\global\curr@figbox@ht\ht\figbox%
+		\global\advance\curr@figbox@ht\dp\figbox%
+		\gdef\same@fig{figure}%
+	\fi%
+  \fi}%
+  % Redefined
+  \def\@xfloat#1[#2]{\def\temp{#1}\ifx\temp\name@fig\gdef\in@flt{figure}\fi%
+	\@xfloat@prep
+	\@nameuse{fp@proc@#2}%
+	\floats@sw{\@xfloat@LaTeX{#1}[#2]}{\@xfloat@anchored{#1}[]}%
+	}%
+  % Autolabelling of floats to get their exact page placement
+  \appdef\@floatboxreset{%
+      \@ifundefined{float\romannumeral\the\c@page}%
+	      {\expandafter\xdef\csname float\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\@ne}%	
+	       \xdef\flt@pg@label{float\romannumeral\the\c@page-\romannumeral\@ne}}%
+	      {\@tempcnta=\csname float\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname\advance\@tempcnta\@ne%
+	       \expandafter\xdef\csname float\romannumeral\the\c@page\endcsname{\the\@tempcnta}%
+	       \xdef\flt@pg@label{float\romannumeral\the\c@page-\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}}%
+  \label{\flt@pg@label}}%
+  % Defining a pagewise fix for TSP height whereever a float occurs
+  \def\tsp@float@fix{%
+      \@ifundefined{r@\flt@pg@label}{}%
+	     {\@tempcnta=\rev@getpagerefnumber{\flt@pg@label}\relax%
+		  \@ifundefined{flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}%
+		     {\expandafter\xdef\csname flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{\the\@tempdimc}}%
+	         {\advance\@tempdimc\csname flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax%
+		      \expandafter\xdef\csname flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{\the\@tempdimc}}}}%
+  %
+  \floats@sw{%
+  % Normal Floats
+  \appdef\check@currbox@count{%
+	\@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\z@}{%
+		% Float height calculation to be added in page height
+		\@tempdimb\ht\@currbox\advance\@tempdimb\dp\@currbox%
+		\@tempcnta=\rev@getpagerefnumber{\flt@pg@label}\relax%
+		\@ifundefined{flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}%
+			{\expandafter\xdef\csname flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{\the\@tempdimb}}%
+			{\advance\@tempdimb\csname flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax% 
+			 \expandafter\xdef\csname flt@on@page\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{\the\@tempdimb}}%
+		%
+		\ifx\@captype\name@fig%
+			\ifdim\curr@floatwidth>20.5pc%
+			    \ifdim\curr@floatwidth>30pc% Everything added 2 times for calculating column width
+				   \@tempdimc\ht\@currbox\advance\@tempdimc\dp\@currbox
+				   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\@tempdimc%
+				   % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+				   \tsp@float@fix
+				\else%
+				   \@tempdima\ht\@currbox\advance\@tempdima\dp\@currbox%
+				   \advance\@tempdima-\curr@figbox@ht%
+				   \global\advance\curr@tot@float@ht-\@tempdima%
+				   %
+				   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\ht\@currbox%
+				   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\dp\@currbox%
+				   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight-\@tempdima%
+				   % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+				   \@tempdimc\curr@figbox@ht%
+				   \tsp@float@fix
+				\fi%
+			\fi%
+	   \else%
+		 \@tempdimc\ht\@currbox\advance\@tempdimc\dp\@currbox
+		 \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\@tempdimc%
+		 % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+		 \tsp@float@fix
+	   \fi%
+	 \gdef\in@flt{none}\gdef\same@fig{none}%
+    }{}}%
+  \def\total@float#1{%
+   \expandafter\let
+   \expandafter\@tempa
+             \csname fbox@\csname ftype@#1\endcsname\endcsname
+   \@ifnotrelax\@tempa{%
+    \@ifhbox\@tempa{%
+     \@tempdima\the\ht\@tempa\divide\@tempdima\@twopowertwo\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+     \@tempdimb\the\dp\@tempa\divide\@tempdimb\@twopowertwo\@tempcntb\@tempdimb
+     \class@info{Total #1: Column(\the\@tempcnta pt), Page(\the\@tempcntb pt)}%
+     \global\advance\curr@tot@float@ht\@tempcnta pt\global\advance\curr@tot@float@ht\@tempcntb pt
+    }{}%
+   }{}%
+  }%
+  }{
+  % End of document Floats
+  \def\strt@flt#1#2#3{\edef\flt@page{#1}\edef\flt@pgtot{#2}\edef\flt@pggoal{#3}}
+  % Redefined
+  \let\old@xfloat@anchored\@xfloat@anchored
+  \def\@xfloat@anchored#1[#2]{\old@xfloat@anchored#1[#2]%
+  \floatp@sw{}{\strt@flt{\the\c@page}{\the\pagetotal}{\the\pagegoal}\curr@floatht\pagetotal}}%
+  \appdef\end@float@anchored{%
+  \floatp@sw{%
+	\curr@floatht\pagetotal%
+	\ifx\@captype\name@fig%
+	   \ifdim\curr@floatwidth>20.5pc%
+	     \ifdim\curr@floatwidth>30pc%
+		    \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+		    % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+			\@tempdimc\curr@floatht%
+			\tsp@float@fix
+		 \else%
+			\@tempdima\curr@floatht\advance\@tempdima-\curr@figbox@ht%
+		    \global\advance\curr@tot@float@ht-\@tempdima%
+		    %
+			\global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+			\global\advance\tsp@floatheight-\@tempdima%
+			% Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+			\@tempdimc\curr@figbox@ht%
+		    \tsp@float@fix
+		 \fi%
+	   \fi%
+	\else%
+		 \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+		 % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+		 \@tempdimc\curr@floatht%
+		 \tsp@float@fix
+	\fi%
+  }{%
+	\ifnum\c@page=\flt@page%
+	   \@tempdima\pagetotal\advance\@tempdima-\curr@floatht%
+	   \global\curr@floatht\@tempdima%
+	   \ifx\@captype\name@fig%
+		   \ifdim\curr@floatwidth>20.5pc%
+	         \ifdim\curr@floatwidth>30pc%
+			   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+		       % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+			   \@tempdimc\curr@floatht%
+			   \tsp@float@fix
+			 \else%
+			   \@tempdimb\curr@floatht\advance\@tempdimb-\curr@figbox@ht%
+		       \global\advance\curr@tot@float@ht-\@tempdimb%
+		       %
+			   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+			   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight-\@tempdimb%
+			   % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+			   \@tempdimc\curr@figbox@ht%
+		       \tsp@float@fix
+			 \fi%
+		   \fi%
+	   \else%
+		   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+		   % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+		   \@tempdimc\curr@floatht%
+		   \tsp@float@fix
+	   \fi%
+	\else%
+	   \ifx\@captype\name@fig%
+		  \@tempdima\flt@pggoal\relax\advance\@tempdima-\flt@pgtot\relax
+		  \ifdim\pagetotal>\@tempdima
+			 \global\curr@floatht\@tempdima%
+		  \else%
+			 \global\curr@floatht\pagetotal%
+		  \fi%
+	   \else%
+		  \@tempdima\flt@pggoal\relax\advance\@tempdima-\flt@pgtot\relax
+		  \advance\@tempdima\pagetotal%
+		  \global\curr@floatht\@tempdima%
+	   \fi%
+	   \@tempcnta\c@page\advance\@tempcnta-\flt@page\relax%
+	   \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@%
+		  \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne%
+		  \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@\do
+			{\global\advance\curr@floatht\pagegoal%
+			\advance\@tempcnta\m@ne}
+	   \fi%
+	   \ifx\@captype\name@fig%
+	     \ifdim\curr@floatwidth>20.5pc%
+		   \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+		   % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+		   \@tempdimc\curr@floatht%
+		   \tsp@float@fix%
+	     \fi%
+	   \else%
+	     \global\advance\tsp@floatheight\curr@floatht%
+		 % Calculating equivalent TSP height of each figure
+		 \@tempdimc\curr@floatht%
+		 \tsp@float@fix%
+	   \fi%
+	\fi%
+  }%
+  \global\advance\curr@tot@float@ht\curr@floatht%
+  \gdef\in@flt{none}\gdef\same@fig{none}}%
+  }% floats
+  % Calculating and adding Text portion size
+  \def\no@dim@exceed{% TSP dimen should not exceed maxdimen
+	  \ifx\f@family\ptm%
+		 \@tempdimc13002.380952pt\relax % 16383pt represented in terms of TSP
+	  \else%
+		 \@tempdimc12411.36322pt\relax % 16383pt represented in terms of TSP
+	  \fi%
+	  \advance\@tempdimc-\val@calc@dim%
+	  \ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimc%
+		 \@tempcnta=\max@pg@ht\relax%
+		 \advance\@tempcnta\@ne%
+		 \xdef\max@pg@ht{\the\@tempcnta}% Number of batches eq to maxdimen
+	     \ifx\f@family\ptm%
+		   \global\advance\val@calc@dim-13002.380952pt\relax % 16383pt represented in terms of TSP
+	     \else%
+		   \global\advance\val@calc@dim-12411.36322pt\relax % 16383pt represented in terms of TSP
+	     \fi%
+		 \global\advance\val@calc@dim\@tempdima%
+	  \else%
+		 \global\advance\val@calc@dim\@tempdima%
+	  \fi}%
+  \appdef\total@text{%
+	   % Avoiding the \maxdimen error
+	   % Divided the text height in batches of 16383pt (less than maxdimen)
+	   \@tempcnta=\z@%
+	   \@whilenum\@tempcntb>16383\relax%
+	   \do{%
+		   \advance\@tempcntb-16383\relax%
+		   \advance\@tempcnta\@ne%
+	   }%
+	   \xdef\max@pg@ht{\the\@tempcnta}% Number of batches eq to maxdimen
+	   % Text height calculation
+	   \@tempdima\the\@tempcntb pt 
+	   \advance\@tempdima-\make@title@dim%
+	   % Main macro
+       \floats@sw{}{%
+		 % Text height calculation for end of doc floats
+		 \advance\@tempdima-\curr@tot@float@ht}%
+	   % Storing value of available MSP text height for future reference
+	   \@tempdimb\@tempdima%
+	   % Text TSP ratio
+	   \ifx\f@family\ptm% ratio=1.26
+	       \divide\@tempdima by 126\relax 
+	       \multiply\@tempdima by 100\relax
+	   \else% ratio=1.32
+	       \divide\@tempdima by 132\relax 
+	       \multiply\@tempdima by 100\relax
+	   \fi%
+	   \global\advance\val@calc@dim\@tempdima%
+	   % Floats height and TSP ratio (ratio=1.11)
+	   \@tempdima\curr@tot@float@ht%
+	   \divide\@tempdima by 111\relax 
+	   \multiply\@tempdima by 100\relax
+	   % Checking and adding the Float height dimen
+	   \no@dim@exceed
+	   %
+	   \ifdim\tsp@floatheight>\z@
+		  \@tempdima\tsp@floatheight%
+		  \divide\@tempdima by 111\relax 
+		  \multiply\@tempdima by 100\relax
+	      % Checking and adding the TSP Float height dimen
+	      \no@dim@exceed
+	      %
+	   \fi%
+	   % Extra Text height calculation
+	   \@tempdima\val@calc@dim\advance\@tempdima-\text@ht@allowed\relax
+	   \ifx\f@family\ptm% ratio=1.26
+	      \divide\@tempdima by 100\relax 
+	      \multiply\@tempdima by 126\relax
+	   \else% ratio=1.32
+	      \divide\@tempdima by 100\relax 
+	      \multiply\@tempdima by 132\relax
+	   \fi%
+	   % Adding extra batches of text (if required)
+	   \@tempcntb=\max@pg@ht\relax
+	   \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@%
+		  \@tempcnta16383\relax
+		  \multiply\@tempcnta\@tempcntb\relax
+	      \typeout{AIP Info: Extra Typeset Text: \the\@tempdima+\the\@tempcnta pt}%
+		  %
+		  \@tempdimc\@tempdima%
+		  \advance\@tempdimc-\@tempdimb%
+		  \ifdim\@tempdimc>\z@%
+			 \global\extra@ruletrue\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\global\string\extra@ruletrue}%
+		  \else%
+		     \advance\@tempdimc16383pt\relax
+		     \ifdim\@tempdimc>\z@%
+			   \global\extra@ruletrue\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\global\string\extra@ruletrue}%
+			 \fi%
+		  \fi%
+	   \else%
+	      \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@\typeout{AIP Info: Extra Typeset Text: \the\@tempdima}\fi%
+		     \@tempdimc\@tempdima
+		     \advance\@tempdimc-\@tempdimb%
+		     \ifdim\@tempdimc>\z@%
+			   \global\extra@ruletrue%
+		     \fi%
+	   \fi%
+	   % Rule calculation loop
+	   % Modifying the rule height
+	   \@tempcntb=\max@pg@ht\relax
+	   \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@
+	     \loop\ifdim\@tempdima>\z@\else\do
+			\advance\@tempdima16383pt\relax
+			\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne
+		 \repeat
+	   \fi%
+	   % Rule generation
+	   % Set the count for loop
+	   \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@
+		  % Resetting the value of loop count (\@tempcnta)
+		  \ifextra@rule%
+			\calc@run@count{LastPage}%
+		  \else%
+            \floats@sw{%
+			    \iffloats@end\calc@run@count{LastBibItem}\else\calc@run@count{LastPage}\fi%
+			  }{\calc@run@count{EndText}}%
+		  \fi%
+		  % Storing the value of Start of Loop run count
+		  \ifextra@rule\xdef\loop@count{\rev@getpagerefnumber{LastBibItem}}\else\xdef\loop@count{\the\@tempcnta}\fi%
+		  % Count of last page of rule
+		  \def\rule@display{% Total rule dim(\@tempdima) > current page height (already known till here)
+			  \ifnum\@tempcnta<\loop@count\relax%
+				 \@tempdimb\textheight%
+			  \else%
+				 \@tempdimb\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax%
+			  \fi%
+			}%
+		  % Loop
+		  \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@%
+		  \do{%
+			  \@ifundefined{page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}{}%
+				  {\global\advance\@tempdima-\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax}%
+			  \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@ % Rule spans complete page
+			     % Fixing rule height w.r.t Float on the page 
+			     \@ifundefined{flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}{}%
+				      {\global\advance\@tempdima-\csname flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax}% 
+				 \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@%
+				     \@ifundefined{page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}%
+					    {\@tempdimb\z@}%
+					    {\rule@display}%
+				 \else% Rule dimen less than 0 after float fix
+					 % Including maxdimens
+					 \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@% 
+						\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne%
+						\advance\@tempdima16383pt\relax%
+						\@ifundefined{page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}%
+							{\@tempdimb\z@}%
+							{\ifdim\@tempdima>\z@%
+							   \rule@display%
+							 \else%
+							   \divide\@tempdima by \tw@%
+						       \@tempdimb\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax%
+							   \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima%
+						       \@tempdima=\z@% Exiting the loop
+                             \fi}%
+					 \else%
+						\divide\@tempdima by \tw@%
+						\@tempdimb\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax%
+						\advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima%
+						\@tempdima=\z@% Exiting the loop
+					 \fi%
+				 \fi%
+				 \if@filesw
+					 \immediate\write\@mainaux{\expandafter\string\xdef\expandafter\string\csname page@mark\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{\the\@tempdimb}}%
+				 \fi%
+			  \else% Rule length is less than page height
+				 % Including maxdimens
+				 \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@%
+					\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne%
+					\advance\@tempdima16383pt\relax%
+			        % Fixing rule height w.r.t Float on the page 
+			        \@ifundefined{flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}{}%
+				        {\global\advance\@tempdima-\csname flt@ht@fix\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax}% 
+				    \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@%
+				       \@ifundefined{page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}%
+					      {\@tempdimb\z@}%
+					      {\rule@display}%
+				    \else%
+						\divide\@tempdima by \tw@%
+						\@tempdimb\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax%
+						\advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima%
+						\@tempdima=\z@% Exiting the loop
+					\fi%
+				 \else%
+					\@ifundefined{page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta}%
+					    {\@tempdimb\z@}%
+						{\@tempdimb\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname\relax}%
+						 \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima%
+				 \fi%
+				 \ifdim\@tempdimb>\z@%
+					\if@filesw
+					   \immediate\write\@mainaux{\expandafter\string\xdef\expandafter\string\csname page@mark\romannumeral\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{\the\@tempdimb}}%
+					\fi%
+				 \fi%
+			  \fi% 
+			  \ifdim\@tempdimb>\z@\advance\@tempcnta\m@ne\else\@tempcnta=\z@\fi%
+			  \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@\@tempdima=\z@\fi%
+		  }%
+	   \fi
+	   % Representing MSP text height in terms of TSP pages
+       \@tempdima\val@calc@dim
+	   \divide\@tempdima by 6655\relax % in terms of textheight of TSP 
+	   \multiply\@tempdima by 10\relax
+	   \divide\@tempdima by 2\relax 
+	   \global\val@calc@dim\@tempdima%
+	   % If maxdimens
+	   \@tempcnta=\max@pg@ht\relax
+	   \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@
+	   \do{%
+		  \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+		  \ifx\f@family\ptm%
+		    \@tempdima13002.380952pt\relax % 16383pt represented in terms of TSP
+		  \else%
+		    \@tempdima12411.36322pt\relax % 16383pt represented in terms of TSP
+		  \fi%
+		  \divide\@tempdima by 6655\relax 
+	      \multiply\@tempdima by 10\relax
+	      \divide\@tempdima by 2\relax 
+		  \global\advance\val@calc@dim\@tempdima
+	   }%
+	   \xdef\page@calc@count{\local@strip@pt\val@calc@dim}%
+	   \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\xdef\string\page@calc@count{\page@calc@count}}
+       \if@filesw%
+	     \typeout{AIP Info: Typeset pages: \page@calc@count}%
+	     \ifdim\val@calc@dim>\page@allowed pt\relax
+	       \@restrict@error{Your text appears to exceed the APL page limit.^^JPlease reduce the length of your article to avoid publication delays}{AIP recommendation: Please reduce your article length.}
+	     \fi%
+	   \fi%
+   }% end \total@text
+   %
+   \prepdef\printfigures{\@booleantrue\lengthcheck@sw%
+						 \floats@sw{}%
+							{\ifdim\pagetotal=\z@%
+								\@tempcntb=\the\c@page%
+								\loop%
+								 \advance\@tempcntb\m@ne%
+								 \ifdim\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcntb\endcsname>\z@\else\do%
+								\repeat%
+								\@bsphack%
+									\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\newlabel{EndText}{{\csname page@height\romannumeral\the\@tempcntb\endcsname}{\the\@tempcntb}}}%
+								\@esphack%								
+							 \else%
+								\def\@currentlabel{\the\pagetotal}\label{EndText}%
+							 \fi}}%
+   %
+   \floats@sw{\appdef\endNAT@thebibliography{%
+		\ifnum\c@figure=\z@%
+		  \ifnum\c@table=\z@%
+			\global\floats@endtrue\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\global\string\floats@endtrue}%
+			\def\@currentlabel{\the\pagetotal}\label{LastBibHt}%
+		\fi\fi}}{}
+   % end preprint
+  }{% For Reprint
+	\gappdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+	   \calc@run@count[1]{LastPage}%
+	   \ifnum\@tempcnta>\page@allowed\relax
+	       \@restrict@error{Your text appears to exceed the APL page limit.^^JPlease reduce the length of your article to avoid publication delays}{AIP recommendation: Please reduce your article length.}
+	   \fi}%
+   }% reprint
+  }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of \classoption{apl} pagerestriction code.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Style updates for \texttt{jmp} and \texttt{rse}}%
+%
+% JMP, BMF and RSE journal's to be as one column at Reprint stage
+%
+%\begin{macrocode}
+%%
+%% JMP, BMF and RSE journal's to be as one column at Reprint stage
+%%
+\def\jnl@rse{rse}%
+\def\jnl@jmp{jmp}%
+\preprintsty@sw{}%
+ {%\ifx\@journal\jnl@jmp%
+  \onecolumn@sw{%
+    \typeout{AIP Info: \@journal\space journal style Single column, 2013/07/30}%
+	\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+	\appdef\setup@hook{%
+	 \twoside@sw{%
+	  \oddsidemargin   28pt
+	  \evensidemargin  0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 60pt
+	 }{%
+	  \oddsidemargin 28pt
+	  \evensidemargin 0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 44pt
+	 }%
+	}%
+	\marginparsep 10pt
+	\topmargin -17pt
+	\headheight 12pt
+	\headsep 25pt
+	\topskip 10pt
+	\splittopskip\topskip
+	\footskip 30pt
+	\textheight=53.5pc
+	\textwidth 33pc
+	\columnsep 10pt
+ \def\title@column#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@foot
+ }%
+}{}%
+% \fi% Curly brace
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Style updates for \texttt{bmf} and addition of new substyle \texttt{sd}}%
+%
+% BMF journal to match with final layout (textheight and other page setup dimensions).
+% Addition of new journal SD: Structural Dynamics.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% BMF journal to match with final layout (textheight)
+%% Addition of new journals SD: Structural Dynamics
+%
+\def\jnl@bmf{bmf}%
+\def\jnl@sd{sd}%
+\preprintsty@sw{}%
+ {%\ifx\@journal\jnl@bmf%
+  \newonecolumn@sw{%
+    \typeout{AIP Info: \@journal\space journal style Single column, 2011/08/11}%
+	\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+	\appdef\setup@hook{%
+	 \twoside@sw{%
+	  \oddsidemargin   28pt
+	  \evensidemargin  0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 60pt
+	 }{%
+	  \oddsidemargin 28pt
+	  \evensidemargin 0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 44pt
+	 }%
+	}%
+	\marginparsep 10pt
+	\topmargin -17pt
+	\headheight 12pt
+	\headsep 25pt% 25pt
+	\topskip 10pt
+	\splittopskip\topskip
+	\footskip 30pt
+%	\textheight=53.5pc
+	\textheight=54.5pc%
+	\textwidth 33pc
+	\columnsep 10pt
+ \def\title@column#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@foot
+ }%
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+% \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \advance\leftskip2.5pc\relax
+ \advance\rightskip2.5pc\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+% \fi
+}{}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Addition of new substyle \texttt{jor}}%
+%
+% Addition of new journal JOR: Journal of Rheology.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%
+%% Journal of Rheology (jor)
+%%
+\def\jnl@jor{jor}%
+\preprintsty@sw{}%
+ {\ifx\@journal\jnl@jor%
+    \typeout{AIP Info: \@journal\space journal style Single column, 2013/10/24}%
+	\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+	\appdef\setup@hook{%
+	 \twoside@sw{%
+	  \oddsidemargin   28pt
+	  \evensidemargin  0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 60pt
+	 }{%
+	  \oddsidemargin 28pt
+	  \evensidemargin 0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 44pt
+	 }%
+	}%
+	\marginparsep 10pt
+	\topmargin -17pt
+	\headheight 12pt
+	\headsep 25pt
+	\topskip 10pt
+	\splittopskip\topskip
+	\footskip 30pt
+	\textheight=53.5pc
+	\textwidth 33pc
+	\columnsep 10pt
+ \def\title@column#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@foot
+ }%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily%
+ \bfseries%
+ \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \parindent\z@%
+%\raggedright%
+ \parskip\z@skip%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \parindent\z@%
+%\raggedright
+%\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+%\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+% \frontmatter@@indent
+% \sffamily
+%}%
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{5\p@}%
+  \small
+  \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+  \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+  \parindent\z@%
+%%\raggedright
+%%\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}
+\def\abstractname{Synopsis}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \begingroup
+  \centering\large
+  {\bfseries\abstractname}
+  \par\vskip.25\baselineskip
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\old@refname%\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+%
+\def\ps@article{%
+  \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\sffamily\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr\hfil\sffamily\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
+ \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
+  {{\bfseries#1}}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{{\bfseries.} }%
+ \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Addition of new substyle \texttt{cp}}%
+%
+% Addition of new journal AIP-CP: AIP Conference Proceedings.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%
+%% AIP Conference Proceedings
+%%
+\def\jnl@cp{cp}%
+\preprintsty@sw{}%
+ {\ifx\@journal\jnl@cp%
+    \typeout{AIP Info: \@journal\space journal style Single column, 2013/10/30}%
+	\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+	\appdef\setup@hook{%
+	 \twoside@sw{%
+	  \oddsidemargin   0pt
+	  \evensidemargin  0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 60pt
+	 }{%
+	  \oddsidemargin 0pt
+	  \evensidemargin 0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 44pt
+	 }%
+	}%
+	\marginparsep 10pt
+	\topmargin -29.5pt
+	\headheight 12pt
+	\headsep 25pt
+	\topskip 10pt
+	\splittopskip\topskip
+	\footskip 30pt
+	\textheight=53.5pc
+	\textwidth 39pc
+	\columnsep 10pt
+%%
+ \def\title@column#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@foot
+ }%
+%%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\LARGE}% \Large
+%\sffamily%
+ \bfseries%
+ \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \parindent\z@%
+%\raggedright%
+ \parskip\z@skip%
+}%
+%%
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \parindent\z@%
+%\raggedright
+%\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+%%
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{5\p@}%
+  \small
+  \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+  \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+  \parindent\z@%
+%%\raggedright
+%%\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{\small}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}
+\def\@keys@name{{\small\bfseries Keywords:} }%
+\def\@pacs@name{{\small\bfseries PACS:} }%
+\def\abstractname{Abstract.}
+%%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \begingroup
+%  \centering\large
+ \small%
+  {\bfseries\abstractname}
+%  \par\vskip.25\baselineskip
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%%
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+% \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+ \small%
+}%
+%%
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+%   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+%   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+%%
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \Large%
+% \sffamily
+ \vskip.5\baselineskip%
+}%
+%%
+%%
+\def\titleblock@produce{%
+ \begingroup
+  \ltx@footnote@pop
+  \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+  \def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+  \c@mpfootnote\z@
+  \let\@makefnmark\frontmatter@makefnmark
+  \frontmatter@setup
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}\label{FirstPage}%
+  \frontmatter@title@produce
+  \groupauthors@sw{%
+   \frontmatter@author@produce@group
+  }{%
+   \frontmatter@author@produce@script
+  }%
+  \frontmatter@RRAPformat{%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@date}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@received}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@revised}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@accepted}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@published}%
+  }%
+  \frontmatter@abstract@produce
+  \@ifx@empty\@keywords{}{%
+   \@keywords@produce\@keywords
+  }%
+  \@ifx@empty\@pacs{}{%
+   \@pacs@produce\@pacs
+  }%
+  \par
+  \frontmatter@finalspace
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\old@refname%\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+%%
+\def\ps@article{%
+%    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
+%    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+    \def\@evenhead{}%
+    \def\@oddhead{}%
+    \def\@oddfoot{}%
+    \def\@evenfoot{}%
+    \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+%%
+\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
+ \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
+  {{\bfseries#1}}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{{\bfseries.} }%
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-0.8cm \@plus-1ex \@minus -.2ex}{0.5cm}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}}% \sffamily\small
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-.8cm \@plus-1ex \@minus -.2ex}{.5cm}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}}% \sffamily\small 
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-.8cm \@plus-1ex \@minus -.2ex}{.5cm}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\itshape\centering}}% \sffamily\small
+%
+\def\BIBsection{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-0.8cm \@plus-1ex \@minus -.2ex}{0.5cm}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}}% \sffamily\small
+\def\figurename{FIGURE}
+%%
+\newcommand\rtx@myciteonline[3]{%
+ \ifNAT@swa
+  \leavevmode
+  \unskip
+%  \textsuperscript{\normalfont#1}% TeXSupport
+  \space[{\normalfont#1}]%
+  \if*#3*\else\ (#3)\fi
+ \else
+  #1%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \authoryear@sw{}{%
+  \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}
+%  \let\rtx@citesuper\rtx@mycitesuper%
+  \let\NAT@citesuper\rtx@myciteonline%\rtx@citesuper
+  \let\place@bibnumber\old@place@bibnumber
+  \gdef\place@bibnumber@online#1{{#1}.\hskip5pt}%
+  \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@online
+  \def\NAT@spacechar{}%
+  \def\NAT@conj{and\ }%
+  \bibpunct{}{}{, }{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}% TeXSupport
+ }%
+}%
+%%
+ \def\rtx@mybibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+  \expandafter\BIBsection\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+\let\bibsection\rtx@mybibsection%
+ \fi}
+%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pof}}%
+% This macro modifies the reprint output of POF journal to single column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% POF journal to be one column at Reprint stage
+%%
+%% HISTORY
+%% Further corrected the text area and margins to closely match Print output: 23/04/2012 
+\def\jnl@pof{pof}%
+\preprintsty@sw{}%
+ {\ifx\@journal\jnl@pof%
+    \typeout{AIP Info: \@journal\space journal style Single column, 2011/08/11}%
+	\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+	\appdef\setup@hook{%
+	 \twoside@sw{%
+	  \oddsidemargin   28pt
+	  \evensidemargin  0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 60pt
+	 }{%
+	  \oddsidemargin 28pt
+	  \evensidemargin 0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 44pt
+	 }%
+	}%
+	\marginparsep 10pt
+	\topmargin -17pt
+	\headheight 12pt
+	\headsep 25pt
+	\topskip 10pt
+	\splittopskip\topskip
+	\footskip 30pt
+	\textheight=53.5pc
+	\textwidth 33pc
+	\columnsep 10pt
+ \def\title@column#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@foot
+ }%
+ \fi}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of \classoption{pof} code.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{AAPM: The Socity Journals Style (\texttt{mph} substyle)}
+%
+% The file \file{aapm.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% for applying the journal specific changes. User should use \texttt{[aapm,mph]}
+% for applying the required updates.
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*aapm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX society AAPM selected}%
+\DeclareOption{mph}{\change@journal{mph}}%
+%%
+\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+\def\@bibstyle{aapmrev\substyle@post}%
+\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aapm}%
+\def\@bibdataout@aapm{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+  @CONTROL{%
+   aapm41Control%
+   \longbibliography@sw{%
+    ,pages="1",title="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,pages="0",title=""%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{aapm41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \lengthcheck@sw{%
+    \RequirePackage{times}%
+	\frenchspacing%
+   }{}%
+}
+\@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+\@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+\@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \ps@preprint
+ }{%
+  \ps@article
+ }%
+}%
+\def\ps@preprint{%
+  \def\@oddhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps@article{%
+  \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@runningtitle{\@shorttitle}%
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+  \c@page\z@% article sets this to one not zero???
+}{%
+  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+\let\@fnsymbol@latex\@fnsymbol
+\let\@fnsymbol\@alph
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\rightskip.14\hsize\relax}
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+ \adjust@abstractwidth
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{1\baselineskip}
+\def\frontmatter@finalspace{\addvspace{28\p@}}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \@booleantrue\titlepage@sw
+  \let\section\section@preprintsty
+  \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
+  \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \preprintsty@sw{\@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax}%
+	{\@flushglue.14\hsize\relax}
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \sffamily
+}%
+\renewcommand*\email[1][Electronic mail: ]{\begingroup\sanitize@url\@email{#1}}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{\par\addvspace{6\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\small}%
+ \it
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ \parskip\z@skip
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{7.5\p@}}%
+\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
+\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark%(
+  )%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
+\addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+\let\affil@cutoff\tw@
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{2\p@}%
+  \raggedright
+  \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+  \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{\advance\rightskip.14\hsize\relax}
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \samepage
+}%
+\def\ps@titlepage{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+   \@runningtitle
+   \hfill
+   \produce@preprints\@preprint
+  }%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+   \hfil
+   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
+   \quad\checkindate
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX and AAPM}{}}%
+\def\produce@preprints#1{%
+ \preprint@sw{%
+  \vtop to \z@{%
+   \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+   \small
+   \let\preprint\preprint@count
+   \count@\z@#1\@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+    \hbox{%
+     \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
+     #1\setbox\z@\lastbox
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \let\preprint\preprint@cr
+    \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+    \par
+    \vss
+   }%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+\newenvironment{Lead@inParagraph}{%
+ \par
+ \bfseries
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}{%
+ \par
+ \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\hfil}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let@environment{quotation@ltx}{quotation}%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{Lead@inParagraph}%
+}%
+\appdef\@startsection@hook{%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{quotation@ltx}%
+}%
+\def\secnums@rtx{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\Alph{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\alph{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\hskip0.5em\relax}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {1.5\baselineskip \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5\baselineskip}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {1.5\baselineskip \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5\baselineskip}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \fontsize{9.5}{12}
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+	 }%
+}%
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {1.5\baselineskip \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5\baselineskip}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \fontsize{9.5}{12}
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \itshape
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+\def\section@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \itshape\bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
+ \print@toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
+}%
+\def\tocdepth@munge{%
+  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
+  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
+\def\tocdepth@restore{%
+  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
+}%
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum{#2}%
+  \parindent \z@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+  \large \bf %
+  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\z@}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+  \par
+  \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ \bf
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+\def\figurename{\textsc{Fig.}}
+\def\tablename{\textsc{Table}}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \par
+  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \begingroup
+   \preprintsty@sw{\small}{\footnotesize}\rmfamily
+   \sbox\@tempboxa{%
+    \let\\\heading@cr
+    \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}%
+   }%
+   \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\hsize}{%
+    \begingroup
+     \samepage
+     \flushing
+     \let\footnote\@footnotemark@gobble
+     \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}\par
+    \endgroup
+   }{%
+     \global \@minipagefalse
+     \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+   }%
+  \endgroup
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{\nobreak\hskip.5em plus.2em\ignorespaces}%
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+\def\table@hook{\preprintsty@sw{\small}{\footnotesize}}%
+\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+\def\refname{References}%
+\def\rtx@bibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+}%
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{\footnotesize}%
+  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+  \labelsep\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}{%
+}%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aapm10pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps10pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 10pt}%
+ \aapmreprint
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aapm11pt\endcsname{\csname rtx@aapm12pt\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@aapm12pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps12pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 12pt}%
+ \aapmpreprint
+}%
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+   \or January\or February\or March\or     April\or   May\or      June%
+   \or July\or    August\or   September\or October\or November\or December%
+  \fi\space
+  \number\year
+}%
+\@booleantrue\groupauthors@sw
+\@booleanfalse\@affils@sw
+\@booleantrue\runinaddress@sw
+\def\@journal@default{mph}%
+\def\@pointsize@default{12}%
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+   \def\normalsize{%
+    \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{12}%
+    \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ plus2\p@ minus5\p@
+    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \let\@listi\@listI
+   }%
+   \def\small{%
+    \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
+	\abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
+	\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+	\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
+	\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+	\def\@listi{%
+	   \leftmargin\leftmargini
+	   \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+	   \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+	   \itemsep \parsep
+	  }%
+   }%
+   \def\Large{%
+     \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{16pt}%
+   }%
+   \def\@listI{%
+	  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+	  \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+	  \topsep 8\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@
+	  \itemsep\z@
+   }%
+   \textheight = 694.0\p@
+  }%
+ }%
+\def\rtx@aapmmph{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw%
+ \input{fleqn.clo}%
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{fleqn}{amsmath}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\mathindent12pt\relax}%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+  \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+}%
+\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \footinbib@sw{}{%
+  \class@warn{Citations are superscript numbers: footnotes must be endnotes; changing to that configuration}%
+  \@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+ }%
+}%
+\def\present@bibnote#1#2{%
+ \item[%
+  \textsuperscript{%
+   \normalfont%
+   \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.#1}\hyper@anchorend}%
+   \begingroup%
+    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax%
+    \frontmatter@thefootnote%
+   )\endgroup%
+  }%
+ ]#2\par%
+}%
+\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+   \ltx@footnote@push
+   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
+   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
+   \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+   \let\printendnotes\relax
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\aapmreprint{%
+}%
+\def\aapmpreprint{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</aapm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{SOR: The Socity Journals Style (\texttt{jor} substyle)}
+%
+% The file \file{sor.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% for applying the journal specific changes. User should use \texttt{[sor,jor]}
+% for applying the required updates.
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*sor>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX society AIP selected}%
+%%
+\DeclareOption{jor}{\change@journal{jor}}%
+\def\adv{AIP Advances}%
+\def\ao{Appl.\  Opt.}%
+\def\ap{Appl.\  Phys.}%
+\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\apm{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.\ Mater.}%
+\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}%
+\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}%
+\def\bmf{Biomicrofluidics}%
+\def\cha{Chaos}%
+\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}%
+\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}%
+\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}%
+\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}%
+\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jap{J.\Appl.\Phys.}%
+\def\jmp{j.\Math.\Phys.}%
+\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}%
+\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}%
+\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}%
+\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}%
+\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}%
+\def\jpr{j.\Phys.\Chem.\Ref.\Data}%
+\def\ltp{Low.\Temp.\Phys.}%
+\def\nat{Nature (London)}%
+\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}%
+\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pop{Phys.\Plasmas}%
+\def\pof{Phys.\Fluids}%
+\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}%
+\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}%
+\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}%
+\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}%
+\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}%
+\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}%
+\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}%
+\def\rsi{Rev.\Sci.\Instrum.}%
+\def\rse{J. \Renewable Sustainable Energy}%
+\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}%
+\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\vr{Vision Res.}%
+\def\sd{Structural Dynamics}%
+\def\jor{J.\ Rheol.}%
+\def\cp{AIP\ Conference\ Proceedings}%
+%%
+\DeclareOption{author-numerical}{%
+  \@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
+  \@booleantrue\authornum@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{article-title}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\sor@jtitx@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue \sor@jtitx@sw
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+\@booleanfalse\authornum@sw
+\@booleanfalse\onecolumn@sw
+\@booleanfalse\newonecolumn@sw
+\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@sor}%
+\def\@bibdataout@sor{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+  @CONTROL{%
+   sor41Control%% TeXSupport: aip
+   \longbibliography@sw{\true@sw}{\sor@jtitx@sw{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
+   {%
+    ,pages="1",title="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,pages="0",title=""%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{sor41Control}}%% TeXSupport: aip
+ \fi
+}%
+\@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+\@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+\@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+%% TeXSupport
+\let\old@refname\refname
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \ps@preprint
+ }{%
+  \ps@article
+ }%
+}%
+\def\ps@preprint{%
+  \def\@oddhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps@article{%
+  \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@runningtitle{\@shorttitle}%
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+  \c@page\z@% article sets this to one not zero???
+}{%
+  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+\let\@fnsymbol@latex\@fnsymbol
+\let\@fnsymbol\@alph
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+ \adjust@abstractwidth
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \@booleantrue\titlepage@sw
+  \let\section\section@preprintsty
+  \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
+  \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \sffamily
+}%
+\renewcommand*\email[1][Electronic mail: ]{\begingroup\sanitize@url\@email{#1}}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\small}%
+ \it
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ \parskip\z@skip
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{3\p@}}%
+\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
+\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark%(
+  )%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
+\addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+\let\affil@cutoff\tw@
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{5\p@}%
+  \small
+  \raggedright
+  \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \samepage
+}%
+\def\ps@titlepage{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+   \@runningtitle
+   \hfill
+   \produce@preprints\@preprint
+  }%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+   \hfil
+   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
+   \quad\checkindate
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX and AIP}{}}%
+\def\produce@preprints#1{%
+ \preprint@sw{%
+  \vtop to \z@{%
+   \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+   \small
+   \let\preprint\preprint@count
+   \count@\z@#1\@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+    \hbox{%
+     \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
+     #1\setbox\z@\lastbox
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \let\preprint\preprint@cr
+    \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+    \par
+    \vss
+   }%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+\newenvironment{Lead@inParagraph}{%
+ \par
+ \bfseries
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}{%
+ \par
+ \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\hfil}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let@environment{quotation@ltx}{quotation}%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{Lead@inParagraph}%
+}%
+\appdef\@startsection@hook{%
+ \let@environment{quotation}{quotation@ltx}%
+}%
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \small
+     \sffamily
+     \bfseries
+     \itshape
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+\def\section@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont
+     \itshape\bfseries
+     \raggedright
+    }%
+}%
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
+ \print@toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
+}%
+\def\tocdepth@munge{%
+  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
+  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
+\def\tocdepth@restore{%
+  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
+}%
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum{#2}%
+  \parindent \z@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+  \large \bf %
+  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\z@}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+  \par
+  \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ \bf
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+\def\refname{References}%
+\def\rtx@bibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+}%
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{\footnotesize}%
+  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+  \labelsep\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}{%
+}%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@sor10pt\endcsname{%% TeXSupport: aip
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps10pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 10pt}%
+ \sorreprint
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@sor11pt\endcsname{\csname rtx@sor12pt\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx@sor12pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname@class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps12pt\substyle@post}%
+ \class@info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle@ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname@class
+ \class@info{Overriding 12pt}%
+ \sorpreprint
+}%
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+   \or January\or February\or March\or     April\or   May\or      June%
+   \or July\or    August\or   September\or October\or November\or December%
+  \fi\space
+  \number\year
+}%
+ \clo@superscriptaddress
+\def\@journal@default{cha}%
+\def\@pointsize@default{12}%
+\@booleanfalse\pagerestrict@sw%
+%%
+\def\rtx@sorjor{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+ \@booleantrue\authoryear@sw%
+ \@booleantrue\twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse%
+}%
+%%
+\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+\let\old@place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \authoryear@sw{%
+  \sor@jtitx@sw{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle@post}%
+  }{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle@post}%
+  }%
+  \authornum@sw{%
+   \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+   \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+  }{%
+   \bibhang10\p@
+   \bibpunct{(%)
+              }{%(
+                )}{; }{a}{,}{,}%
+   \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+   \let\NAT@mcite\@ne
+   \let\NAT@sort\z@
+   \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
+   \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
+   \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \sor@jtitx@sw{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{sornum\substyle@post}%
+  }{%
+   \def\@bibstyle{sornum\substyle@post}%
+  }%
+  \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+  \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+ }%
+}%
+\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \authoryear@sw{\authornum@sw{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}{\false@sw}%
+  {}{%
+   \ltx@footnote@push
+   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
+   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
+   \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+   \let\printendnotes\relax
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\sorreprint{%
+}%
+\def\sorpreprint{%
+}%
+%%
+\xdef\t@talAU{0}% TeXSupport
+\def\frontmatter@author@produce@script{%
+  \begingroup
+    \let\@author@present\@author@present@script
+    \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter@author@produce@script:}\say\@AAC@list\say\@AFF@list\say\@AFG@list}{}%
+    \let\AU@temp\@empty
+    \@tempcnta\z@
+    \let\AF@opr \@gobble
+    \def\AU@opr{\@author@count\@tempcnta}%
+    \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@count\AU@temp\@tempcnta}%
+    \@AAC@list%
+    \xdef\t@talAU{\the\@tempcnta}% TeXSupport
+    \expandafter\CO@opr\@author@cleared
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@authorformat
+     \let\AF@opr \@affilID@def
+     \let\AU@opr \@author@present
+     \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@present\AU@temp}%
+     \set@listcomma@list\AU@temp
+     \@AAC@list
+     \unskip\unskip
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@above@affiliation@script
+     \let\AFF@opr \@affil@script
+     \@AFF@list
+     \frontmatter@footnote@produce
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+  \endgroup
+}%
+\def\doauthor#1#2#3{% TeXSupport
+  \ignorespaces#1\unskip\@listcomma
+  \begingroup
+  \ifnum\t@talAU=1\else\ifnum\c@affil=\@ne\relax\else#3\fi\fi% TeXSupport
+  \@if@empty{#2}{\endgroup{}{}}{\endgroup{\ifnum\t@talAU=1\else\ifnum\c@affil=\@ne\relax\else\comma@space\fi\fi}{}\frontmatter@footnote{#2}}% TeXSupport
+  \space \@listand
+}%
+%%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+%%
+%%
+%% Journal of Rheology (jor)
+%%
+\def\jnl@jor{jor}%
+\preprintsty@sw{}%
+ {\ifx\@journal\jnl@jor%
+    \typeout{SOR Info: \@journal\space journal style Single column, 2013/10/24}%
+	\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw%
+	\appdef\setup@hook{%
+	 \twoside@sw{%
+      \oddsidemargin  28pt%
+      \evensidemargin 28pt%
+      \marginparwidth 30pt%
+	 }{%
+	  \oddsidemargin 28pt
+	  \evensidemargin 0pt
+	  \marginparwidth 44pt
+	 }%
+	}%
+	\marginparsep 10pt
+	\topmargin -17pt
+	\headheight 12pt
+	\headsep 25pt
+	\topskip 10pt
+	\splittopskip\topskip
+	\footskip 30pt
+	\textheight=53.5pc
+	\textwidth 33pc
+	\columnsep 10pt
+ \def\title@column#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@foot
+ }%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily%
+ \bfseries%
+ \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \parindent\z@%
+%% \raggedright%
+ \parskip\z@skip%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+ \parindent\z@%
+%% \raggedright
+%% \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+%% \def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+%%  \frontmatter@@indent
+%%  \sffamily
+%% }%
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{5\p@}%
+  \small
+  \leftskip0pt plus1fill%
+  \rightskip0pt plus1fill%
+  \parindent\z@%
+%%\raggedright
+%%\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+  \everypar{%
+   \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase%)
+  }%
+  \def\par{%
+   \@ifvmode{}{%(
+    \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+   }%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{}%
+\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}
+\def\abstractname{Synopsis}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \begingroup
+  \centering\large
+  {\bfseries\abstractname}
+  \par\vskip.25\baselineskip
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+  \let\refname\old@refname%\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+%
+\def\ps@article{%
+  \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\sffamily\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr\hfil\sffamily\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+  \def\@oddfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
+ \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
+  {{\bfseries#1}}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{{\bfseries.} }%
+%%
+ \fi%
+}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</sor>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxdocext.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxdocext.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bb045ed3cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxdocext.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1262 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 108
+% ltxdocext.dtx: package to extend the ltxdoc class of standard LaTeX
+% Copyright (c) 2008 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxdocext.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    ltxdocext.sty, ltxdocext.pdf, ltxdocext.ins, ltxdocext.drv.
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex ltxdocext.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex ltxdocext.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Program calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo
+%       pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx
+%       pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README.
+
+License
+   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+   
+   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
+   without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY 
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+  %{ignore}
+%\usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+  \file{ltxdocext.sty}{%
+   \from{ltxdocext.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+  }%
+  \file{acrofont.sty}{\from{ltxdocext.dtx}{fonts}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    ltxdocext.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run ltxdocext.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxdocext.dtx}\CheckSum{955}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*ltxdocext>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "ltxdocext.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.0a",
+%%%     date            = "2018/12/26",
+%%%     time            = "17:10:03 GMT-5",
+%%%     checksum        = "955",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2008 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, ltxdoc",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "extensions to the ltxdoc class",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</ltxdocext>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README-LTXDOCEXT} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-LTXDOCEXT}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README-LTXDOCEXT}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxdocext.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under pdflatex
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README ltxdocext.pdf
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxdocext.ins}}%
+% Typesetting this file with \TeX\ generates
+% the package file.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.sty    acrofont.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.aux ltxdocext.idx ltxdocext.ind ltxdocext.log ltxdocext.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package|fonts>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</driver|package|fonts>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{ltxdocext.sty}%
+%<fonts>\ProvidesFile{acrofont.sty}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<version>
+ [2018/12/26/17:10:03 1.0a ltxdoc extensions package]% \fileversion
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{README-LTXDOCEXT} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} document class, with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+% \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+%\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README-LTXDOCEXT}
+\title{%
+ Extensions to the \classname{ltxdoc} class%
+ \thanks{%
+  This file has version number \fileversion,
+  last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+  Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the README file.
+%\fi
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxdocext} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{journals.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains prebuilt runtime files, documentation, and full source, 
+ready to add to a TDS-compliant \TeX\ installation.
+
+The \classname{ltxdocext} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself are distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\ 
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the files \file{ltxdocext.sty} and \file{acrofont.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where they will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+If you will be using the \classname{acrofont} package, you must
+also install the virtual fonts
+\file{zpsynocmrv}, \file{zptmnocmr},
+\file{zptmnocmrm}, and \file{zpzcnocmry}.
+The corresponding \file{.tfm}, \file{.vf}, and \file{.vpl}
+files are part of this distribution.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxdocext.pdf}.
+The \file{.dtx} file, \file{ltxdocext.dtx}, constitutes
+in itself an instance of use of the \classname{ltxdocext}
+package and the \classname{acrofont} package.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package files \file{ltxdocext.sty} and \file{acrofont.sty}
+are generated from this file, \file{ltxdocext.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxdocext.dtx| (Note: do \emph{not} use \LaTeX\ for this step).
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxdocext.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxdocext.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxdocext.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex;
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxdocext.sty},
+and the package file \file{acrofont.sty}.
+Make sure that {\sc docstrip} receives permission
+to overwrite existing versions of these packages.
+\item
+Now
+typeset \file{ltxdocext.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the file \file{README}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then 
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your 
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.sty} and
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{acrofont.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete; 
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxutil\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{1.0a}{2018/12/12}{(MD) Updated name of README file and use standard fonts when typesetting}%
+
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using the \classname{ltxdoc} and \classname{acrofont} packages}%
+% These packages are an adjunct to the 
+% standard \LaTeX\ \classname{ltxdoc} class and may be 
+% simply invoked as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+%\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+%\RequirePackage{acrofont}%
+%\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Your document should simply cleave to the standards of the
+% \classname{ltxdoc} class, with extensions and alterations as noted.
+%
+% \subsection{Extensions to the \classname{ltxdoc} class}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Extensions to the \env{verbatim} environment and \cs{verb} command}%
+%
+% The delimiters \verb$<<$ and \verb$>>$ within the scope of the verbatim environment
+% or within the argument of the \cmd\verb\ command produce
+% italics surrounded by angle brackets.
+% This typographic convention usually indicates 
+% \emph{metalanguage}, i.e., a placeholder.
+%
+% To obtain the angle bracket character per se, 
+% double the character, viz., ``\verb$the delimiter \verb+<<<<+$''.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The -\texttt{matter} Commands Work}
+% The sectioning commands \cmd\frontmatter, \cmd\mainmatter, and \cmd\backmatter
+% of the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} class are operative in the
+% \classname{ltxdoc} class.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \cs{GetFileInfo} command}\label{sec:GetFileInfo}
+% You can use the \cmd\GetFileInfo\ command to extract 
+% the date, version, and file info of a file which has registered itself
+% via the \cmd\ProvidesFile\ or \cmd\ProvidesClass\ command 
+% (employing the optional argument thereto).
+% 
+% For instance, if your document contains the following:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+%\GetFileInfo{ltxdocext.sty}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then the following control sequence names will have 
+% a value corresponding to that package's \cmd\ProvidesFile\
+% command: 
+% \cmd\filedate: the file's date,
+% \cmd\fileversion: the file's version, and
+% \cmd\fileinfo: the file's info.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Self-Indexing Commands}%
+% Certain commands automatically produce an index entry
+% (or several related entries) according to the meaning.
+%
+% \begin{unnumtable}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% meta-text         &\cmd\marg\arg{text}\\
+% command           &\cmd\cmd\cmd\csname\\
+% environment name  &\cmd\env\arg{name}\\
+% \cmd\begin\verb`{foo}`&\cmd\envb\arg{foo}\\
+% \cmd\end\verb`{foo}`  &\cmd\enve\arg{foo}\\
+% argument          &\cmd\arg\arg{name}\\
+% optional          &\cmd\oarg\arg{name}\\
+% filename          &\cmd\file\arg{name}\\
+% url               &\cmd\url\arg{name}\\
+% document class    &\cmd\classname\arg{name}\\
+% document substyle &\cmd\substyle\arg{name}\\
+% class option      &\cmd\classoption\arg{name}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{unnumtable}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Unnumbered Tables}%
+%
+% When your documentation requires the use of an unnumbered table,
+% use the \env{unnumtable} environment:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{unnumtable}
+%\begin{tabular}{ll}
+%<table rows>
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{unnumtable}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Structuring Tables}%
+% The commands \cmd\toprule, \cmd\colrule, and \cmd\botrule
+% allow you to mark the beginning of the column heads
+% the beginning of the table body, and the end of
+% the table body, respectively.
+% In context, 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{tabular}{ll}
+%\toprule
+%<table head rows>
+%\colrule
+%<table rows>
+%\botrule
+%\end{tabular}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{A Sectioning Command Below \cs{subsection}}%
+% The \cmd\subsubsection\ command is defined.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Alterations to the \classname{ltxdoc} class}%
+% The following involve no new markup, but they 
+% do change the appearance of your formatted documentation:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Using the \classname{acrofont} package causes your 
+% document to be formatted using the standard 
+% Acrobat fonts to the greatest extent possible.
+% This means that for most documents, Computer Modern
+% is not used at all.
+% Math that unavoidable must use CM still exists, however.
+% \item
+% An index will be produced at the end of the document
+% without your needing to explicitly mark it up, and
+% it will have an entry in the TOC.
+% \item
+% The \env{quote} environment has a slightly smaller left margin.
+% \item
+% Array columns are set tight by default.
+% \item
+% A host of \cmd\DoNotIndex\ directives are invoked.
+% I intend this list to grow to encompass 
+% even more commands. Send me your suggestions.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Extensions to the ltxdoc class}
+% The \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module comprises the 
+% package \classname{ltxdocext.sty}, which provides extensions
+% to the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{ltxdoc} class.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%  This portion of code is only present in the \LaTeX\ package (\texttt{.sty} file),
+% not in the kernel portion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\class@name{ltxdocext}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\class@name}{%
+ An extension to the \protect\LaTeXe\space ltxdoc class
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur\_ogawa sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%
+% The bulk of the code is the kernel portion; a brief tail of \file{package} code then follows.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Incorporate \classname{ltxguide.cls} extensions}
+%
+% Code extracted from \classname{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey.
+% ``This code stolen from \classname{ltxguide.cls}:
+% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
+% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any \LaTeX
+% installation.''
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{verbatim}%
+\let\o@verbatim\verbatim
+\def\verbatim{%
+  \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
+% \nopagebreak              % Overridden by list penalty
+  \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
+     \small
+  \fi
+  \o@verbatim
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making \texttt{<>} active
+% (i.e., adjusting the input encoding).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand \verbatim@font {%
+  \normalfont \ttfamily
+  \catcode`\<=\active
+  \catcode`\>=\active
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make \verb$|...|$ a synonym for \cmd\verb\verb$|...|$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \MakeShortVerb{\|}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make active bracket characters produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
+% (used in \env{verbatim} and \cmd\verb).
+% \verb|<<| produces a less-than, and \verb|>>| produces a greater-than.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\<=\active
+  \catcode`\>=\active
+  \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
+  \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err}
+  \gdef\@meta#1>{\marg{#1}}
+  \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
+  \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
+\endgroup
+\def\@gtr@err{%
+   \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
+      Isolated \protect>%
+   }{%
+      In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
+      is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
+      I've just found a \protect> on its own.
+      Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
+   }%
+}
+\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of code stolen from \file{ltxguide.cls}. Thanks, Alan.
+%
+% Add functionality from doc.dtx:
+% (code stolen from doc.dtx):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GetFileInfo#1{%
+  \def\filename{#1}%
+  \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{%
+    \def\filedate{##1}%
+    \def\fileversion{##2}%
+    \def\fileinfo{##3}}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi.)
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\arg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+  }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd@to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd@to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd@to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd@to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name@idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\file}{\begingroup\@sanitize\@file}%
+\long\def\@file#1{\endgroup
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name@idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name@idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name@idx{document class}}%
+\def\name@idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\url@ltxdocext{\begingroup\catcode`\/\active\catcode`\.\active\catcode`\:\active\@url}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifx\url\undefined\let\url\url@ltxdocext\fi
+}%
+\def\@url#1{%
+ \url@break{\ttfamily#1}%
+ \url@char\edef\@tempa{#1=\string\url{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\index\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ \expandafter\index\expandafter{\expandafter u\expandafter r\expandafter l\expandafter >\@tempa}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+{\catcode`\:\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup:}{\active@colon}%
+\def\colon@break{\colon@char\allowbreak}%
+\def\colon@char{:}%
+{\catcode`\/\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup/}{\active@slash}%
+\def\slash@break{\slash@char\allowbreak}%
+\def\slash@char{/}%
+{\catcode`\.\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup.}{\active@dot}%
+\def\dot@break{\dot@char\allowbreak}%
+\def\dot@char{.}%
+\def\url@break{\let\active@slash\slash@break\let\active@dot\dot@break\let\active@colon\colon@break}%
+\def\url@char{\let\active@slash\slash@char\let\active@dot\dot@char\let\active@colon\colon@char}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Changes to the base class of the ltxdoc class}
+% Modify \env{theindex} environment so that it produces a TOC entry
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+               {\if@twocolumn
+                  \@restonecolfalse
+                \else
+                  \@restonecoltrue
+                \fi
+                \columnseprule \z@
+                \columnsep 35\p@
+\def\see##1##2{\textit{See} ##1}%
+\def\seealso##1##2{\textit{See also} ##1}%
+\long\def\cmd##1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string##1}}%
+\def\@url##1{\url@break\ttt{##1}\endgroup}%
+\def\ttt{\begingroup\@sanitize\ttfamily\@ttt}%
+\def\@ttt##1{##1\endgroup}%
+\mathchardef\save@secnumdepth\c@secnumdepth
+\c@secnumdepth\m@ne
+                \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
+%               \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+%                       {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+\c@secnumdepth\save@secnumdepth
+                \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+                \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+                \let\item\@idxitem}
+               {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\renewenvironment{quote}
+               {\list{}{%
+                \leftmargin1em\relax
+                \rightmargin\leftmargin
+                }%
+                \item\relax}
+               {\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Extensions to the base class of \classname{ltxdoc.cls}}
+%
+% Matter commands from \classname{book.cls}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mainmatter
+\newif\if@openright
+\@openrighttrue
+\DeclareRobustCommand\frontmatter{%
+  \cleartorecto
+  \@mainmatterfalse
+  \pagenumbering{roman}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mainmatter{%
+  \cleartorecto
+  \@mainmattertrue
+  \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\backmatter{%
+  \if@openright
+    \cleartorecto
+  \else
+    \clearpage
+  \fi
+  \@mainmatterfalse
+}%
+\ifx\undefined\cleartorecto
+ \def\cleartorecto{\cleardoublepage}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Unnumbered tables
+%
+% \begin{environment}{unnumtable}
+% An unnumbered table does not float.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@to{to}%
+\newenvironment{unnumtable}{%
+ \par
+ \addpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+ \addvspace\abovedisplayskip
+ \hbox\@to\hsize\bgroup\hfil\ignorespaces
+  \let\@Hline\@empty
+}{%
+ \unskip\hfil\egroup
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty
+ \vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \aftergroup\ignorespaces
+ \@endpetrue
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% Emulate \cmd\toprule\ and friends
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\toprule{\hline\hline}%
+\providecommand\colrule{\\\hline}%
+\providecommand\botrule{\\\hline\hline}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Define sectioning command below \cmd\subsubsection.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\subsubsubsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
+  {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}%
+  {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{In lieu of \file{ltxdoc.cfg}}
+%    We don't want everything to appear in the index
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic}
+\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set@topoint}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
+\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
+\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\input}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
+\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark,\markboth,\markright}
+\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
+\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
+\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily}
+\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
+\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
+\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
+\DoNotIndex{\next}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Direct \classname{ltxdoc} to produce an index.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Extension to \LaTeX's \env{filecontents} Environment}
+% We want to
+% coax the version number into \env{filecontents}-generated files.
+% Note that we expect \cmd\fileversion\ and \cmd\filedate\ to
+% hold the needed information. For this to be the case,
+% your document should execute the \cmd\GetFileInfo\ command
+% (as documented in section~\ref{sec:GetFileInfo}) before
+% any instances of \env{filecontents}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+\def\endfilecontents{%
+ \immediate\write\reserved@c{%
+  \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J%
+  \ifx\undefined\fileversion\else
+  \ifx\undefined\filedate\else
+  This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
+  \fi\fi
+  \string\fi
+ }%
+ \immediate\closeout\reserved@c
+ \def\T##1##2##3{%
+  \ifx##1\@undefined\else
+    \@latex@warning@no@line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}%
+  \fi
+ }%
+ \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}%
+ \T\I{Tab}{Spac}%
+ \immediate\write\@unused{}%
+}%
+\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents
+\makeatother
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Alter formatting in arrays; set them tight.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Tail of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here is the remainder of the package code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Currently, there is little. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Font Package for Acrobat Compatability}%
+% The package \classname{acrofont}
+% substitutes Acrobat-standard fonts for Computer Modern where possible,
+% even in math mode.
+% Documents typeset with this package in effect will require as little
+% downloaded font data as possible, but will not be exemplars of
+% fine math typesetting.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{fonts} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% The document class module comprises this and the next
+% four sections.
+% \begin{macro}{\class@base}
+% We define in exactly one spot the base class.
+% Typically that class will be one of \classname{book},
+% \classname{article}, or \classname{report}.
+% The base class effectively defines the use and the markup scheme
+% of the class of documents to be handled by this class.
+%
+% This class is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ book class:
+% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fonts>
+\def\class@name{ltxdocext}%
+\expandafter\ClassInfo\expandafter{\class@name}{%
+ Written for \protect\LaTeXe\space
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Variants on psfonts packages}%
+% The following uses \file{times.sty} from \url{/packages/psnfss/psfonts.dtx}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{times}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following uses \file{mathptm.sty} from \url{/packages/psnfss/psfonts.dtx}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{mathptm}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{ot1ptmcm.fd}.
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zptmnocmr} is 
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zptmcmr}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{ptmcm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ptmcm}{m}{n}{
+   <-> zptmnocmr
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ptmcm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * ptmnocm/m/n}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omlptmcm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zptmnocmrm} is 
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zptmcmrm}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{ptmcm}{\skewchar \font =127}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{m}{it}{
+   <-> zptmnocmrm
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{l}{it}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{l}{sl}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/sl}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omspzccm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zpzcnocmry} is 
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zpzccmry}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{pzccm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{pzccm}{m}{n}{
+   <-> zpzcnocmry
+}{}% cmsy10 Symbol Zapf Chancery Medium-Italic Times-Roman
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{pzccm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * pzccm/m/n}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omxpsycm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zpsynocmrv} is 
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zpsycmrv}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{psycm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{psycm}{m}{n}{
+   <-> zpsynocmrv
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{psycm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * psycm/m/n}{}
+%
+\DeclareFontEncoding{8r}{}{}% from file: 8renc.def
+\DeclareFontFamily{8r}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }% from file: 8rcmr.fd
+\DeclareFontShape{8r}{cmr}{m}{n}{
+ <-> cmr10
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Font definition files}%
+%
+% The following forces \LaTeX\ to do now what it would do anyway:
+% load the `font definition' information for the fonts that we
+% use. In this way, we prepare for faster processing through
+% the \cmd\dump\ of a preformatted macro package that will not
+% need to read in any packages or font definitions from disk.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\input{8rphv.fd}%
+\input{8rptm.fd}%
+\input{ot1phv.fd}%
+\input{ot1ptm.fd}%
+\input{t1ptm.fd}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{More math substitutions}%
+%
+% The following definitions arrange to get certain glyphs from the
+% text font instead of out of math pi fonts.
+% In particular, the copyright and registered symbols
+% are single glyphs instead of composites involving
+% the big circle from the \file{cmsy} font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\eightRChar#1{{\def\encodingdefault{8r}\fontencoding\encodingdefault\selectfont\char"#1}}%
+ \def\LANGLE{$<$}%{\eightRChar{8B}}%
+ \def\RANGLE{$>$}%{\eightRChar{9B}}%
+%\def\ASTER{\eightRChar{2A}}%
+%\def\DAGGER{\eightRChar{86}}%
+%\def\DDAGGER{\eightRChar{87}}%
+ \def\BULLET{\eightRChar{95}}%
+%\def\SECTION{\eightRChar{A7}}%
+%\def\PARAGRAPH{\eightRChar{B6}}%
+ \def\VERTBAR{\eightRChar{7C}}%
+ \def\COPYRIGHT{\eightRChar{A9}}%
+ \def\REGISTERED{\eightRChar{AE}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\textbar{\VERTBAR}%
+ \def\textbullet{\BULLET}%
+ \def\textcopyright{\COPYRIGHT}%
+ \def\textregistered{\REGISTERED}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% I have removed \cmd\ensuremath\ from the following definition, and
+% all commands like \cmd\mathsection have been converted to
+% e.g., \cmd\textsection.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{\@thefnmark}%
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
+   \textsection\or \textparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
+   \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{fonts} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here ends the module.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</fonts>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Programming Conventions}%
+% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted
+% here.
+% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this
+% body of code to consider following them as well.
+% The benefits are twofold:
+% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls;
+% following them reduces maintenance costs.
+% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the
+% process of understanding how the code works.
+%
+% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type.
+%
+% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}%
+% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional
+% whitespace is inserted is explained here.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line.
+% Therefore, \cmd\def, \cmd\newcommand, and their ilk will start in column~1.
+% \item
+% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces
+% \verb|{}|.
+% \item
+% Likewise, if possible, for \cmd\if\dots and matching \cmd\fi.
+% \item
+% However, the closing brace or \cmd\fi\ is outdented by one so that it
+% falls
+% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or \cmd\if,
+% and it appears alone on its line.
+% \item
+% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated
+% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating
+% systems).
+% \item
+% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters.
+% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files
+% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with
+% small monitors.
+% But \classname{ltxdoc} output looks better with the shorter lines, too.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace in the replacement part of a macro definition 
+% is avoided by using the comment character |%|. 
+% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code,
+% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character,
+% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence,
+% like |\\|.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace in the package file is also avoided.
+% When \TeX\ reads in the .sty file, it will process \cmd\def s, and other commands,
+% but will not process blank spaces. 
+% This practice is simply a discipline. You don't need to do this.
+% But sometimes \TeX\ has to read in a file while it is in horizontal mode,
+% at which point this practice is essential.
+% \end{itemize}
+% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+% \toks@ii{#2}%
+% \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% In the above, the definition of \cmd\prepdef\ would not fit on a single
+% line,
+% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces,
+% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing
+% a single brace.
+%
+% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is
+% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single
+% brace character is terminated by a comment character.
+%
+% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's
+% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op.
+% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional.
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}%
+% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the
+% pattern part is non-nil.
+% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this,
+% right?
+% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though.
+% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines
+% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this.
+%
+% \item
+% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider
+% layering.
+%
+% \item
+% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may
+% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions
+% in a single macro.
+%
+% \item
+% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a
+% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \vskip10pt
+% \parindent=0pt
+% \leavevmode
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \item
+% The Boolean calculus (cf. \cmd\@ifx)
+% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely.
+% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where
+% \cmd\if\dots\ and \cmd\fi\ are not properly balanced
+% (a nightmare, in case you have not already experienced it).
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}%
+% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}.
+% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% For the sake of ``color safety'',
+% use \cmd\sbox\ rather than \cmd\setbox, \cmd\mbox\ rather than \cmd\hbox, and
+% \cmd\parbox\ or \env{minipage} rather than \cmd\vbox.
+%
+% \item
+% Use \cmd\newcommand\ and \cmd\newenvironment\ to declare user-level commands
+% and environments. Avoid the idiom \cmd\def\cmd\foo, \cmd\def\cmd\endfoo\ to define
+% an environment.
+% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the
+% document class by grepping on \cmd\newcommand\ and \cmd\newenvironment.
+%
+% \item
+% Prefer to use \cmd\setlength\ to assign registers.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails
+% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX.
+%
+% \Finale
+% \iffalse Here ends the programmer's documentation.\fi
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxfront.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxfront.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1eefb7c72c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxfront.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3766 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 108
+% ltxfront.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxfront.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    ltxfront.sty, ltxfront.pdf
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex ltxfront.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex ltxfront.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront.idx
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo
+%       pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront.idx
+%       pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from ltxfront.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README-LTXFRONT.tex.
+
+License
+   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+   
+   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
+   without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY 
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+  %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+  \file{ltxfront.sty}{%
+   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{package,options,kernel}%
+  }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    ltxfront.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run ltxfront.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxfront.dtx}\CheckSum{2094}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "ltxfront.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.2c",
+%%%     date            = "2019/01/18",
+%%%     time            = "14:29:48 UT-5",
+%%%     checksum        = "2012",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "package to change page grid, MVL",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README-LTXFRONT} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-LTXFRONT.tex}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README-LTXFRONT}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}ltxfront.dtx\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxfront.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}README-LTXFRONT\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxfront.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}ltxfront.sty\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}ltxfront.pdf\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}ltxfront.aux ltxfront.idx ltxfront.ind ltxfront.log ltxfront.toc\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</doc|package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxfront%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2019/01/18/14:29:48 4.2c frontmatter package (AO,DPC,MD)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The doc module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{README-LTXFRONT} and sample document as needed.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+% \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+%\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README-LTXFRONT.tex}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package for\\the frontmatter and title page%
+ \thanks{%
+  This file has version number \fileversion,
+  last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+  Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date, 
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the README-LTXFRONT file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxfront} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{https://journals.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+The \classname{ltxfront} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License 1.3c,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\ 
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{ltxfront.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxfront.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxfront.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxfront.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxfront.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxfront.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxfront.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex,
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxfront.sty}.
+
+\item
+Next typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the sample document \file{ltxfront-test.tex}
+and the file \file{README-LTXFRONT}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then 
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxfront.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxfront.sty}.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your 
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete; 
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxfront\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Change handling of \cs{@author} to prevent parsing problems. (Helps in error recovery when syntax errors exist)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Gathered all code for the abstract environment together and abstracted out the formatting details for journals to override.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Separate option now controls production}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Set \cs{footnote} to \LaTeX\ standard version for this scope.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{\cs{comma@space}}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{change name from \cs{tempaffiliation}}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{If empty \cs{abstractname} omit spacing}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{PACS boxed to width of abstract}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Keywords on same footing as PACS}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Warn if no production}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Actually append \cs{AU@grp} to \cs{@AAClist}.}
+\changes{4.0g}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+\changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{new hook}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{add optional argument handling back}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{Changes to add collaboration processing, which now means doing comma/and processing on each sublist}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{macro added}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-06-30}{(AO, 443) create an entry in the PDF bookmarks for the abstract via the toc}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{email}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{homepage}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) provide a \texttt{description} environment for the abstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Change csname \cs{AFS@opr} to \cs{AFG@opr}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil@def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter@init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 443) PDF Bookmark for title page}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Provide facility \cs{affil@cutoff}: if there is only one affiliation on the title page, no superscript}%
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Hyperref compatibility: take \cs{maketitle} back.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Parametrize the production after the address}%
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Produce PACS, keywords only if specified}%
+\changes{4.1d}{2008/10/17}{(AO, 410) compare \cs{@tempa} to \cs{blankaffiliation}.}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Use \cs{set@footnotefont}, which is defined in ltxutil}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 535) Robustify \cs{footnote} while \cs{class@warn} is expanding its argument}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 539) Robustify \cs{class@warn} against TOC processing}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF@grp}}
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Optimize boolean logic }
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 544) Class options runinaddress and unsortedaddress stopped working}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) Let \cs{@collaboration@gobble} parse all three arguments of \cs{CO@opr}}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/03}{(AO) remove http:// from \cs{href} call}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2018/12/12}{(MD) Updated name of README file and use standard fonts when typesetting}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{A Gnuly Created Sample Document}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{ltxfront-test.tex}
+\documentclass{article}% use any combination of titlepage, twocolumn
+\usepackage[]{ltxfront}% use inactive to turn off features
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Gnu Veldt Cuisine}
+
+\author{G. Picking}
+\thanks{Supported by a grant from the GSF.}
+\affiliation{Acme Kitchen Products}
+
+\author{R. Dillo}
+\thanks{On leave during 1985.}
+\affiliation{Cordon Puce School}
+
+\date{24 July 1984}%
+\revised{5 January 1985}%
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}%
+We reproduce most features of \LaTeX\ manual, Figure C.4, p. 183.
+\end{document}
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxfront}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}\end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxfront}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment. 
+%
+% \section{Frontmatter commands}
+%
+% A document using this package will use commands like \cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\thanks, 
+% the \texttt{abstract} environment
+% and \cmd\maketitle. 
+% These are part of \LaTeX's standard document classes. 
+% But this package supplements \LaTeX\ syntax with additional commands, such as
+% \cmd\affiliation, \cmd\collaboration, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, and others.
+%
+% Furthermore, you can have multiple \cmd\author, \cmd\affiliation, and \cmd\collaboration\ commands,
+% each with their own set of \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, etc. commands.
+% 
+% \section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+% 
+% This section describes the macros
+% this package provides for formatting the front matter of an
+% article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite
+% different from those provided in \LaTeXe. 
+% 
+% \subsection{Setting the title}
+% 
+% The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the
+% \cmd\title\arg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line
+% break in a long title. 
+% The \cmd\title\ commnd takes an optional argument, which you will use to
+% give an abbreviated title for use in the running header.
+% 
+% \subsection{Specifying a date}%
+% 
+% The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the manuscript.  
+% Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the
+% current date whenever the file is run:
+% \begin{verbatim}\date{\today}\end{verbatim}
+% 
+% \subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations}
+% 
+% Commands specifying author and affilliation have been improved to save
+% labor for authors and in production. Authors and affiliations are
+% arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author
+% groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set
+% of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\
+% macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of
+% \cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified
+% \cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied.
+% 
+% For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune
+% Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}\end{verbatim}
+% The default is to display this as 
+% \begin{center}
+% Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\
+% \emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\
+% Mickey Mouse\\
+% \emph{Disney World}\\
+% \end{center}
+% This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is
+% chosen by selecting the class option
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}. This option is the default for all APS
+% journal styles, so it does not need to be specified explicitly.
+% The other major way of displaying this
+% information is to use superscripts on the authors and
+% affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display
+% \begin{center}
+% Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\
+% \emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\
+% \emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\
+% \end{center}
+% one would use the markup
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}\end{verbatim}
+% 
+% Note that this package takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join
+% the author names together and font selection, as well as any
+% superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should
+% be given within their respective macros.
+% 
+% There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for
+% controlling author/affiliation display. The default
+% \classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the
+% approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for
+% each author. The markup:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}\end{verbatim}
+% will result in the same display as for the first case given
+% above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To
+% avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs
+% Bunny, use the
+% \classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest
+% to list authors in the order they should appear and specify
+% affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will
+% afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally,
+% it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered 
+% in the order that they are encountered. This means that the order
+% will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering
+% can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before
+% the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same
+% text for each affilation when specifying them for each author.
+% 
+% If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\
+% macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro.
+% 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Collaborations}
+% 
+% A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\
+% command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command. 
+% It should appear at the end of an author group. 
+% The collaboration name will appear centered in parentheses.
+% You may have multiple author groups, each with its own \cmd\collaboration.
+% Because collaborations don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the
+% \cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation.
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau}
+% 
+% Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an
+% author, collaboration, or affiliation such an e-mail address, an
+% alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information. 
+% This package introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They
+% are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\arg{e-mail address}
+% \item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\arg{URL}
+% \item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\arg{affiliation}
+% \item\cmd\thanks\arg{miscellaneous text}
+% \end{itemize}
+% In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the
+% actual information specified in the required argument. \cmd\email\ and
+% \cmd\homepage\ each have a default text for their optional arguments
+% (`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\
+% macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any
+% author name can have multiple instances of these four commands. 
+% Note that unlike the
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\
+% that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow
+% the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs@looney.com}
+% \homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/}
+% \altaffiliation[Permanent address: ]
+%                      {Warner Brothers}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tunes}\end{verbatim}
+% This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs@looney.com},
+% Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner
+% Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the
+% required argument in the curly braces.
+% \item The font is automatically taken care of.
+% \item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is
+% desired in the output.
+% \item Use the optional arguments to provide customized
+% text only if there is a good reason to.
+% \end{itemize}
+% 
+% The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation, or even \cmd\title\ can
+% also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data
+% (\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or
+% \cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any
+% \cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\
+% command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and
+% the command is ignored.
+% 
+% Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single
+% shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are
+% identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be
+% identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote
+% indicating a group e-mail address.
+% 
+% Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the
+% front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations
+% on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for
+% only the first instance of any particular institution's
+% \cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary
+% data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log.
+% 
+% It is preferable to arrange authors into
+% sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of
+% affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate
+% ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group
+% of \cmd\affiliation\ commands.
+% 
+% If affiliations have been listed before the first
+% \cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure
+% that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is
+% an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is
+% given in these later instances.
+% 
+% 
+% A journal may determine the placement of these
+% ancillary information footnotes. One journal may put all
+% such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while another
+% journal may display them on the first page, as a footnote. One can override a
+% journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class
+% option
+% \classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the
+% bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page).
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames}
+% 
+% Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first
+% or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure
+% that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other
+% purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion
+% of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro
+% as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an
+% author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not
+% necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate
+% how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples;
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}}
+% \author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung}\end{verbatim}
+% 
+% \subsection{The abstract}
+% An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract}
+% environment:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{abstract}
+% Text of abstract
+% \end{abstract}\end{verbatim}
+% Note that with this package, the abstract must be specified before the
+% \cmd\maketitle\ command, and there is no need to embed it in an explicit
+% minipage environment.
+% 
+% \subsection{PACS codes}
+% Some authors are asked to supply suggested PACS codes with their
+% submissions. The \cmd\pacs\ macro is provided as a way to do this:
+% \begin{verbatim}\pacs{23.23.+x, 56.65.Dy}\end{verbatim}
+% The actual display of the PACS numbers below the abstract is
+% controlled by two class options: \classoption{showpacs} and
+% \classoption{noshowpacs}. In particular, this is now independent of
+% the \classoption{preprint} option. \classoption{showpacs} must be
+% explicitly included in the class options to display the PACS codes.
+% 
+% \subsection{Keywords}
+% A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the
+% article. 
+% \begin{verbatim}\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level}\end{verbatim}
+% This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like
+% PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by
+% two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and
+% \classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be
+% included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords.
+% 
+% \subsection{Institutional report numbers}
+% Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\
+% macro. These will be displayed in the upper lefthand corner of the
+% first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros may be supplied (space is
+% limited though, so only three or less may actually fit). 
+% 
+% \subsection{maketitle}
+% After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS
+% codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front
+% matter of the manuscript is to issue the \cmd\maketitle\ command:
+% \begin{verbatim}\maketitle\end{verbatim}
+% This command must follow all of the macros listed above. 
+% The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various
+% class options that were specified in the
+% \cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or
+% explicitly).
+% 
+%
+% \section{Compatability with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the 
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% The \classname{ltxfront} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxfront} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxfront}. 
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package@name{ltxfront}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package@name}{%
+ Title page macros for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Prerequisites}%
+%
+% This package requires the use of the \classname{ltxutil} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\class@name\package@name
+\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of the preliminary portion of the package code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Options}%
+% Package options are treated in this portion of the dtx file.
+% This portion is guarded by the \texttt{options} \classname{docstrip} code so that it can be
+% merged into a larger package gracefully.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package option turns on diagnostics that trace its operation.
+% \cmd\frontmatterverbose@sw\ is set false by default: we do not elect to monitor
+% the workings of these procedures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package option inactivates its syntax, for testing purposes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{inactive}{\@booleanfalse\frontmatter@syntax@sw}%
+\@booleantrue\frontmatter@syntax@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\runinaddress@sw}
+% The flag \cmd\runinaddress@sw\ signifies that author addresses are to be set on the same
+% line with the author. 
+%
+% The \classoption{runinaddress}    option is the only one that sets \cmd\runinaddress@sw\ to true.
+% 
+% FIXME: this option pertains to cases where \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ is true, but is independant of \cmd\@affils@sw. 
+% So, it should be possible to assert both \classoption{runinaddress} and \classoption{unsortedaddress} as well as
+% each separately. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\runinaddress@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affils@sw}
+% If \cmd\@affils@sw\ is false, an address is never recognised as ``new''
+% and is therefore always entered into the affiliation list,
+% stopping groups of authors at the same address being consolidated
+% into the same list:
+% the address will be printed the same number of times it is entered.
+%
+% The \classoption{unsortedaddress} option is the only one that sets \cmd\@affils@sw\ to false.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\@affils@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\groupauthors@sw}
+% The flag \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ signifies that authors are to be grouped,
+% affecting the meaning of \cmd\@author@present.
+%
+% Clients will want to set \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ true if they want grouped addresses
+% or either of the following variants:
+% for unsorted addresses: set \cmd\@affils@sw\ false;
+% for run-in addresses, set \cmd\runinaddress@sw\ true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\groupauthors@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{groupedaddress}
+% If we take the \classoption{groupedaddress} option as the default, then we can look upon
+% the \classoption{superscriptaddress} option as simply turning \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ to \cmd\false@sw.
+%
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}, the default in APS journals, groups authors above a common address. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{groupedaddress}{\clo@groupedaddress}%
+\def\clo@groupedaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors@sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{unsortedaddress}
+% \classoption{unsortedaddress} is similar to \classoption{groupedaddress},
+% but turns off \cmd\@affils@sw,
+% with the result that each address that is entered will be printed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{unsortedaddress}{\clo@unsortedaddress}%
+\def\clo@unsortedaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\@affils@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{runinaddress}
+%
+% \classoption{runinaddress} is similar to \classoption{groupedaddress},
+% with the addition of the Boolean \cmd\runinaddress@sw,
+% which causes the authors associated with a particular address group
+% to be formatted in a paragraph instead of on separate lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{runinaddress}{\clo@runinaddress}%
+\def\clo@runinaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors@sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils@sw
+ \@booleantrue\runinaddress@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{superscriptaddress}
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress} presents author affiliations 
+% as superscripts. Authors with like affiliations share the same
+% superscript.
+%
+% FIXME: if \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ is false, would not \cmd\@affils@sw\ be a don't care?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{superscriptaddress}{\clo@superscriptaddress}%
+\def\clo@superscriptaddress{%
+ \@booleanfalse\groupauthors@sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Process package options}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
+\ProcessOptions*
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Kernel of Front Matter}
+% Here begins  the kernel of the \classname{frontmatter} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This package implements a new syntax for the title page of an article.
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission. 
+%
+% These macros were first coded by David P. Carlisle for the American Physical 
+% society in the late 1990s as part of the development of REV\TeX4.
+% That development work was taken over by Arthur Ogawa, who is the author of
+% this package.
+%
+% \subsection{Initialization}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@init}
+% The \cmd\frontmatter@init\ procedure sets up all the registers for
+% processing the title page. 
+% At present, this is done once, at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+% If multiple title pages are to be processed within a job, 
+% the initialization must be done for each.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{\frontmatter@init}%
+\let\frontmatter@init\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The title command}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@title}
+% The author uses \cmd\title\ to specify the title. As in the AMS
+% classes, \cmd\title\ has an optional argument specifying a short form
+% for use in running heads.
+%
+% Once the \cmd\title\ is given, you can specify any combination of
+% \cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, and \cmd\altaffiliation\ commands,
+% applying to the title of the document.
+%
+% Compatibility note: as with all of the standard \LaTeX\ commands that we override, 
+% we make here a private definition and later switch it in if so required.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter@title[2][]{%
+ \def\@title{#2}%
+ \def\@shorttitle{#1}%
+ \let\@AF@join\@title@join
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@title}
+% \begin{macro}{\@shorttitle}
+% The arguments to \cmd\title\ are saved in these internal
+% macros, which are set up to produce a warning if \cmd\title\ has not
+% been used before \cmd\maketitle.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter@init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+%
+% Extensibility note: by using \cmd\frontmatter@init\ as the initialization procedure, 
+% we open the possibility of more than one title page per document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \def\@title{\class@warn{No title}}%
+ \let\@shorttitle\@empty
+ \let\@title@aux\@title@aux@cleared
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@title@join}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title@join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title@aux@cleared}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@title@join{\expandafter\@title@join@\@title@aux}%
+\def\@title@join@#1#2{%
+ \def\@title@aux{{\@join{\@separator}{#1}{#2}}}%
+}%
+\def\@title@aux@cleared{{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The author, affiliation, and related commands}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@affil}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@collab}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+%
+% \cmd\c@affil\ stores the affiliation numbers used for the superscript marks. 
+% The \cmd\newcounter\ command defines \cmd\theaffil, which we never use: 
+% this counter is evaluated solely via \cmd\the.
+%
+% \cmd\c@collab\ stores the collaboration numbers. 
+% The \cmd\newcounter\ command defines \cmd\thecollab.
+% As with \cmd\c@affil, we never use \cmd\thecollab; only \cmd\the\ \cmd\c@collab.
+%
+% Each counter must be cleared before frontmatter can be processed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{affil}%
+\newcounter{collab}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \c@affil\z@
+ \c@collab\z@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for author or collaboration}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\author}
+% Each author is given in a \emph{separate} \cmd\author\ command.
+% This is similar to the AMS classes, but the AMS also try to support
+% the \classname{article} class's \cmd\and\ command for putting multiple
+% authors in one \cmd\author\ command.
+% This package, however, does not support the \cmd\and\ command.
+%
+% When the \cmd\author\ command is encountered, 
+% the previous author, author group, affiliation, and affiliation group are at an end.
+% This procedure moves the previous author to the author group (\cmd\move@AU),
+% moves the previous affiliation to the affiliation group (\cmd\move@AF),
+% and terminates the previous author/affiliation group (\cmd\move@AUAF) as the case may require.
+%
+% Compatibility note: as with all of the standard \LaTeX\ commands that we override, 
+% we make here a private definition and later switch it in if so required.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter@author{% implicit #1
+ \@author@def{}% implicit #2
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\collaboration}
+% Specify the collaboration (given after a group of authors).
+%
+% This procedure does exactly what \cmd\author\ does, and sets
+% a flag signifying that the \cmd\collaboration\ command was given.
+% 
+% Note: earlier versions attempted to ignore the collaboration command if it was considered inappropriate.
+% We must not do this, however, because it throws the state machine out of kilter.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\collaboration{% implicit #1
+ \@author@def{\@booleantrue\collaboration@sw}% implicit #2
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \@booleanfalse\collaboration@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@cleared}
+% \begin{macro}{\@authorclear@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@def}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@join}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Change handling of \cs{@author} to prevent parsing problems. (Helps in error recovery when syntax errors exist)}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter@init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+%
+% Here are all the access procedures for the author data structure.
+% 
+% We define a flag value for \cmd\@author (private),
+% a procedure \cmd\@author@gobble\ to read author data without any effect,
+% a procedure for setting \cmd\@author\ to the flag value (\cmd\@author@init),
+% a Boolean to test against the flag value (\cmd\@authorclear@sw),
+% and a procedure to add new ancillary data to the author.
+%
+% Note that expanding the functionality of the \cmd\collaboration\ command entailed changing 
+% the data structures, because now all authors must remember the collaboration they belong to.
+% This change affects procedures \cmd\@author@cleared\ and \cmd\@author@gobble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@cleared{{}{}{}}%
+\def\@author@gobble#1#2#3{}%
+\def\@author@init{%
+ \let\@author\@author@cleared
+ \@booleanfalse\collaboration@sw
+}%
+\def\@authorclear@sw{\@ifx{\@author\@author@cleared}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \@author@init
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@def#1#2{%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\author\space\string\collaboration}}{}%
+ \move@AU\move@AF\move@AUAF
+ \let\@AF@join\@author@join
+ #1%
+ \def\@author{{#2}{}}%
+}%
+\def\@author@join@#1#2#3{%
+  \def\@author{{#1}{\@join{\@separator}{#2}{#3}}}%
+}%
+\def\@author@join{\expandafter\@author@join@\@author}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move@AU}
+% \begin{macro}{\add@AUCO@grp}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% The \cmd\move@AU\ procedure moves the most recent author to the current author group \cmd\AU@grp,
+% or the most recent collaboration to the collaboration group \cmd\CO@grp.
+% If we recently did a \cmd\@author@init, this is a no-op.
+%
+% To accommodate the expanded syntax of \cmd\collaboration, we add a new field to
+% those associated with an author (collaborator), namely the value of the 
+% collaboration counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move@AU{%
+ \@authorclear@sw{}{%
+  \collaboration@sw{%
+   \advance\c@collab\@ne
+   \@argswap{\CO@grp\CO@opr}%
+  }{%
+   \@argswap{\AU@grp\AU@opr}%
+  }%
+   {%
+    \expandafter\@argswap@val
+    \expandafter{\@author}%
+     {\expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\the\c@collab}{\add@AUCO@grp}}%
+   }%
+ }%
+ \@author@init
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% The procedure \cmd\add@AUCO@grp\ adds to the specified group \#3 using the 
+% given intercollated operator \#4, with arguments \{\#1\} and \#2,
+% where the first argument is the collaboration number, 
+% the second is the author name, and the third the joined attributes of the author.
+% For example, \cmd\move@AU\ could finally execute:
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\AU@grp\ \{\cmd\AU@opr\{1\}\{A. Author\}\{\}\}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add@AUCO@grp#1#2#3#4{%
+ \appdef#3{#4{#1}#2}%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say#3}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@finish}
+% We define a procedure to terminate author/affiliation parsing just before the title block is formatted.
+% We detect the case where an author group is not followed by an affiliation group.
+% \changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Actually append \cs{AU@grp} to \cs{@AAClist}.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil@def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 535) Robustify \cs{footnote} while \cs{class@warn} is expanding its argument}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+%
+% We first finish off any author- or affiliation groups in progress. 
+% Next, we detect the case where there is an author group or a collaboration group in progress, but no affiliation group.
+% If so, we emit a diagnositic message and act as if a \cmd\noaffiliation\ command had been given.
+% In any case, we finish off any author/affiliation pair that may remain.
+% Formatting of the title block may now proceed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@finish{%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\@author@finish}}{}%
+ \move@AU\move@AF
+ \@ifx{\AU@grp\@empty}{%
+  \@ifx{\CO@grp\@empty}%
+ }{%
+  \false@sw
+ }%
+ {}{%
+  \@ifx{\AF@grp\@empty}{%
+   \begingroup
+    \let\href\@secondoftwo
+    \let\AU@opr\@secondofthree
+    \let\CO@opr\@secondofthree
+    \let\footnote\@gobble
+    \@ifx{\CO@grp\@empty}{%
+     \class@warn{Assuming \string\noaffiliation\space for authors}%
+     \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say\AU@grp}%
+    }{%
+     \class@warn{Assuming \string\noaffiliation\space for collaboration}%
+     \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say\CO@grp}{}%
+    }%
+   \endgroup
+   \@affil@none\move@AF
+  }{}%
+ }%
+ \move@AUAF
+}%
+\def\@secondofthree#1#2#3{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@join}
+% The procedure \cmd\@join\ inserts 
+% a separator between two tokens, or, if the first token is 
+% nil, elides both that token and the separator.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@join#1#2#3{%
+  \@if@empty{#2}{#3}{#2#1#3}%
+}%
+\def\@separator{;\space}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\surname}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstname}
+% No-op to allow better post-processing of the file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\surname\@firstofone
+\let\firstname\@firstofone
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\and}
+% The original \LaTeX\ idea of using one \cmd\author\ command to capture
+% all authors and their address just doesn't work with multiple authors
+% possibly sharing addresses, so in this class disable \cmd\and.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter@and{\class@err{\protect\and\space is not supported}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for affiliation}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affiliation}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil@def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% After each group of authors with the same address,
+% give that address in \cmd\affiliation.
+% If later in the list you have an author
+% with the address of an earlier author, repeat the \cmd\affiliation\
+% command: the system will detect the equivalence and (if using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} option) 
+% only print the affiliation once, reusing the superscript marker.
+%
+% When the \cmd\affiliation\ command is encountered, the current author and author group (if any) are at an end.
+% Also, the current affiliation is at an end.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% FIXME: changes to catcode required elsewhere now?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cat@comma@active{\catcode`\,\active}%
+{\cat@comma@active\gdef,{\active@comma}}%
+\def\active@comma{,\penalty-300\relax}%
+\newcommand\affiliation{%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\affiliation}}{}%
+ \move@AU\move@AF
+ \begingroup
+  \cat@comma@active
+  \@affiliation
+}%
+\def\@affiliation#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\@AF@join\@affil@join
+ \@affil@def{#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noaffiliation}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil@def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% User-level command \cmd\noaffiliation\ signifies that the current group of authors, or the current collaboration, has \emph{no} affiliation. 
+%
+% This is implemented by acting as if the \cmd\affiliation\ command has been given, and using a
+% flag value of \{\cmd\relax\}, which adds an element to the affiliation group of this author,
+% albeit a nil one (\cmd\AFF@opr\ \{\cmd\relax\} \{\}). 
+%
+% Note that this procedure does substantially the same as \cmd\@author@finish. (the latter, If it does not bail out altogether, differs chiefly in providing diagnostics).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter@noaffiliation{%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\noaffiliation}}{}%
+ \move@AU\move@AF
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In \cmd\@author@finish, there is code testing if an effective
+% \cmd\noaffiliation\ should be executed now. Here, we do so in any case. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@affil@none\move@AF
+ \move@AUAF
+}%
+\def\blankaffiliation{{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@cleared}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@nil}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@none}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilclear@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@def}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@join}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil@def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+%
+% Here are all the access procedures for the affiliation data structure.
+% Note the similarity to those of the \cmd\@author\ data structure.
+% 
+% We define a flag value for \cmd\@affil\ (private),
+% a procedure for setting \cmd\@affil\ to the flag value (\cmd\@affil@init),
+% a Boolean to test against the flag value (\cmd\@affilclear@sw),
+% a procedure \cmd\@affil@def\ to load a value into the structure,
+% and a procedure to add new ancillary data to the affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil@cleared{{{}}{}}%
+\def\@affil@nil{{\relax}{}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \@affil@init
+}%
+\def\@affil@none{%
+ \let\@affil\@affil@nil
+}%
+\def\@affil@init{%
+ \let\@affil\@affil@cleared
+}%
+\def\@affilclear@sw{\@ifx{\@affil\@affil@cleared}}%
+\def\@affil@def#1{%
+ \def\@affil{{#1}{}}%
+}%
+\def\@affil@join@#1#2#3{%
+  \def\@affil{{#1}{\@join{\@separator}{#2}{#3}}}%
+}%
+\def\@affil@join{\expandafter\@affil@join@\@affil}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move@AF}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF@grp}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% Move the most recent affiliation to the affiliation group.
+% If we recently did a \cmd\@affil@init, this is a no-op.
+%
+% Set the \cmd\temp@sw\ to false, then execute the affiliation list (\cmd\@AFF@list)
+% with the intercollated operator set to \cmd\@affil@match\
+% and with \cmd\@tempa\ holding the first component of \cmd\@affil, the current affiliation, which is to be matched.
+%
+% If the current affiliation has been seen before, then by side effect 
+% \cmd\temp@sw\ will be set to true,
+% \cmd\@tempc\ will be set to the matching affiliation number,
+% and \cmd\@tempd\ will be set to the affiliation's ancillary data.
+% The Boolean \cmd\@affils@sw\ being false prevents this test from ever returning a ``true'' result. 
+%
+% This procedure uses \cmd\@tempa\ and sets \cmd\@tempc, \cmd\@tempd, and \cmd\temp@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move@AF{%
+ \@affilclear@sw{}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\temp@sw
+  \let\@tempd\@empty
+  \@affils@sw{%
+    \expandafter\@affil@addr@def\expandafter\@tempa\@affil
+    \def\AFF@opr{\@affil@match\@tempa}%
+    \@AFF@list
+  }{}\temp@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% True clause: This affiliation has been seen before.
+% If ancillary data for the affiliation have been given, but are not identical to those seen before, give a warning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {%
+   \expandafter\@affil@aux@def\expandafter\@tempb\@affil
+   \@ifx{\@tempb\@empty}{}{%
+    \@ifx{\@tempb\@tempd}{}{%
+     \class@warn{%
+      Ancillary information for \@tempa\space must not be different!
+      Please put all of it on the first instance%
+     }%
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% False clause: This affiliation is a new one:
+% increment the affiliation counter to get a unique affiliation ID
+% and append the new ID, collaboration number, address, and auxiliary information 
+% to the list \cmd\@AFF@list.
+%
+% Note that, with the expanded syntax of \cmd\collaboration, we need to label each address with 
+% its associated collaboration.
+%
+% Note also that the \cmd\noaffiliation\ case is handled by recognizing the flag value \cmd\@affil@nil.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {%
+   \@ifx{\@affil\@affil@nil}{%
+    \def\@tempc{0}%
+    \@argswap@val{0}%
+   }{%
+    \advance\c@affil\@ne
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter{\the\c@affil}%
+    \expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\the\c@affil}%
+   }%
+   {%
+    \expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\the\c@collab}{%
+     \expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\@affil}{%
+      \add@list@val@val@val\@AFF@list\AFF@opr
+     }%
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In either case, append this affiliation number to the \cmd\AF@grp, the affiliation group of the current author group. 
+% (It will later be considered for the \cmd\@AFG@list.)
+% Then assign the flag value to \cmd\@affil\ that signifies it has been cleared. 
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF@grp}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \appdef@eval\AF@grp\@tempc
+  \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say\AF@grp}{}%
+  \@affil@init
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@affil@addr@def#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#2}%
+}%
+\def\@affil@aux@def#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#3}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% Procedure \cmd\add@list@val@val@val\ appends to the given list \#1 using the given intercollated operator \#2,
+% with arguments \#5 (affiliation ID) and \#4 (collaboration ID) delimited by braces, and \#3 bare.
+% In the end, \cmd\move@AF\ may execute something like 
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\@AFF@list\ \cmd\AFF@opr\ \{1\} \{3\} \{My Institution\} \{thanks\}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add@list@val@val@val#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \appdef#1{#2{#5}{#4}#3}%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say#1}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@match}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% The procedure \cmd\@affil@match\ is the definition for \cmd\AFF@opr, 
+% the intercollated operator for \cmd\@AFF@list,
+% when adding a new affiliation: it seeks a match with any earlier affiliation.
+% When the affiliation list is executed, this procedure tests each entry against
+% the `new' affiliation (which has been stored in \cmd\@tempa) and its associated
+% collaboration number (in \cmd\@tempb).
+%
+% If \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ is true, then we require the collaboration ID to match,
+% otherwise there is no such requirement, 
+% as is appropriate for the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option. 
+%
+% Uses \cmd\temp@sw, \cmd\@tempc, and \cmd\@tempd\ to communicate back:
+% if it returns \cmd\temp@sw\ true, a match was found.
+% Then 
+% \cmd\@tempc\ will be the affiliation ID of the matching entry 
+% and  \cmd\@tempd\ will be the auxiliary information of the matching entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil@match#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \temp@sw{}{%
+  \def\@tempifx{#4}%
+  \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+   \groupauthors@sw{%
+    \@ifnum{#3=\c@collab}{%
+     \true@sw
+    }{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \true@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+  {%
+   \@booleantrue\temp@sw
+   \def\@tempc{#2}%
+   \def\@tempd{#5}%
+  }{%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move@AUAF}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Change csname \cs{AFS@opr} to \cs{AFG@opr}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% Append \cmd\AF@grp, \cmd\AU@grp, and \cmd\CO@grp\ to \cmd\@AAC@list,
+% append \cmd\CO@grp\ to \cmd\@AFG@list,
+% and merge any new \cmd\AF@grp\ to \cmd\@AFG@list.
+%
+% The entire procedure is predicated on something non-trivial to move.
+%
+% If both author group \cmd\AU@grp\ and affiliation group \cmd\AF@grp\ are nil, bail out.
+%
+% No, try that again:
+%
+% If we have seen any affiliations (\cmd\AF@grp\ is not nil), 
+% then it is time to move the current affiliation group and author group to \cmd\@AAC@list.
+% If not, we are picking up authors into an author group, and we should bail out. 
+%
+% To extend this scheme to the new \cmd\collaboration\ abilities, we must append an affiliation \cmd\AF@opr\ to \cmd\@AAC@list\ 
+% also in the case where there was no affiliation specified (e.g., \cmd\noaffiliation). This affiliation will be a nil affiliation:
+% \cmd\AF@opr\verb+{{0}}+.
+% 
+%FIXME: only one of \cmd\CO@grp\ or \cmd\AU@grp\ is non-empty at this point,
+% but this code does not appear to recognize this fact!
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move@AUAF{%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say\AU@grp\say\AF@grp\say\CO@grp}{}%
+ \@ifx{\AF@grp\@empty}{%
+    \@ifx{\@empty\CO@grp}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Both \cmd\AF@grp\ and \cmd\CO@grp\ are empty: nothing to do. But what if \cmd\AU@grp\ is not empty?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Append the nil \cmd\AF@opr\ to \cmd\@AAC@list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \appdef     \@AAC@list{\AF@opr{{0}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Append the collaboration group to the \cmd\@AAC@list; no intercollated operator need be added, 
+% because we already have \cmd\CO@opr.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \appdef@e   \@AAC@list{\CO@grp}%
+     \appdef@e   \@AFG@list{\CO@grp}%
+     \let\CO@grp\@empty
+    }%
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Append current affiliation group (expansion of \cmd\AF@grp)
+% to the author/affiliation list (\cmd\@AAC@list),
+% using \cmd\AF@opr\ as the intercollated operator;
+% also append the current authors (\cmd\AU@grp).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \appdef     \@AAC@list{\AF@opr}%
+      \appdef@eval\@AAC@list{\AF@grp}%
+      \appdef@e   \@AAC@list{\AU@grp}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine if either \cmd\AU@grp\ or \cmd\CO@grp\ is non-empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifx{\@empty\AU@grp}{%
+     \@ifx{\@empty\CO@grp}%
+    }{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, there is a Boolean in \TeX's scanner; 
+% it will parse the following two brace-delimited sequences and select one of them. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This branch is executed if and only if both \cmd\AU@grp\ and \cmd\CO@grp\ are empty. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% There was either a \cmd\author\ or a \cmd\collaboration\ command.
+% Append the current affiliation group to \cmd\@AFG@list,
+% (only if it is not already there)
+% using \cmd\AFG@opr\ as the intercollated operator.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\@AFG@list\ is a list of \emph{unique} affiliation \emph{groups},
+% and building it entails an \(N^2\) computation. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@booleanfalse\temp@sw
+      \def\AFG@opr{\x@match\AF@grp}%
+      \let\CO@opr\@author@gobble
+      \@AFG@list
+      \temp@sw{}{%
+        \appdef     \@AFG@list{\AFG@opr}%
+        \appdef@eval\@AFG@list{\AF@grp}%
+      }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the collaboration \cmd\CO@grp\ is not empty, we append it to the \cmd\@AFG@list\ and to the \cmd\@AAC@list. 
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \@ifx{\@empty\CO@grp}{}{%
+       \appdef@e   \@AAC@list{\CO@grp}%
+       \appdef@e   \@AFG@list{\CO@grp}%
+       \let\CO@grp\@empty
+     }%
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, null out the macros holding the author group \cmd\AU@grp, affiliation group \cmd\AF@grp, and collaboration group \cmd\CO@grp.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\CO@grp\@empty
+    \let\AU@grp\@empty
+    \let\AF@grp\@empty
+ }%
+ \frontmatterverbose@sw{\say\@AAC@list\say\@AFG@list}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AU@grp}
+% \begin{macro}{\AF@grp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AAC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AFG@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AFF@list}
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AU@grp\ accumulates
+% consecutive \cmd\author\ entries (with \cmd\AU@opr\ as the intercollated operator)
+% and \cmd\collaboration\ entries  (with \cmd\CO@opr\ as the intercollated operator).
+% Ultimately, its contents are appended to the author/affiliation list \cmd\@AAC@list\ 
+% and to the list of affiliation groups, \cmd\@AFG@list. 
+% It must be initialized to \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AU@opr\ and \cmd\CO@opr: it is essential to treat these two operators to the greatest extent possible on an equal footing.
+% Therefore we invariably assign values to the pair of them within the same procedure.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\AF@grp\ accumulates affiliation IDs into an affiliation group.
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+% 
+% The \cmd\@AAC@list\ macro accumulates
+% authors        (using \cmd\AU@opr\ as the intercollated operator),
+% collaborations (using \cmd\CO@opr\ as the intercollated operator),
+% and 
+% affiliations   (using \cmd\AF@opr\ as the intercollated operator).
+%
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@AFG@list\ accumulates 
+% affiliation groups, with \cmd\AFG@opr\ as the intercollated operator,
+% and collaborations, with no intercollated operator. 
+% This token list is employed when and only when \classoption{groupedaddress} is in effect.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@AFF@list\ accumulates the list of affiliations
+% with \cmd\AFF@opr\ as the intercollated operator.
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% Each \cmd\affiliation\ command in the document contributes
+% to this list, as long as the argument of that instance of the command
+% is ``new''.
+%
+% Each entry in this list consists of the \cmd\AFF@opr\ intercollated operator
+% followed by three brace-delimited tokens, representing, in order:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%    the affiliation's unique ID, a number increasing monotonically for
+%    each new entry,
+% \item
+%    the optional argument of the \cmd\affiliation\ command, 
+%    the footnote to the affiliation, and
+% \item
+%    the text of the affiliation.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% At various junctures in the code, the control sequence name
+% \cmd\AFF@opr\ assumes the meaning of 
+% \cmd\@affil@group, \cmd\affil@script,
+% or is defined to expand to \cmd\@affil@match\cmd\@tempa,
+% and the list \cmd\@AFF@list\ is expanded.
+%
+% For each of these lists, here is the syntax of an element and the usage of the associated operator:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\@AFF@list \AFF@opr{<affiliation ID>}{<collaboration ID>}{<address>}{<auxiliary info>} \frontmatter@author@produce@script \affils@present@group
+%\@AFG@list \AFG@opr{{<affiliation ID>}..{<affiliation ID>}} \frontmatter@author@produce@group
+%\@AAC@list \AF@opr{{<affiliation ID>}..{<affiliation ID>}} (\AU@opr|\CO@opr){<collaboration ID>}{<author>}{<auxilliary info>} \frontmatter@author@produce@script \frontmatter@author@produce@group \affils@present@group
+%
+%\AFF@opr \@affil@match\@tempa \@affil@script \@affil@group
+%\AFG@opr \affils@present@group \x@match\AF@grp
+%\AF@opr \@gobble \@affilID@def \@affilID@count\AF@temp\@tempcnta \@affilID@match\AF@temp 
+%\AU@opr \@secondofthree \@author@count\@tempcnta \@author@present \@author@gobble \@author@count#2 \@author@present
+%\CO@opr \@secondofthree \@collaboration@count\AU@temp\@tempcnta \@collaboration@present\AU@temp \@collaboration@present\AU@temp \@collaboration@gobble 
+%
+%\CO@opr\@author@cleared
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let\AU@grp\@empty
+ \let\CO@grp\@empty
+ \let\AF@grp\@empty
+ \let\@AAC@list\@empty
+ \let\@AFG@list\@empty
+ \let\@AFF@list\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@AF@join}
+% The \cmd\csname\ \cmd\@AF@join\ is a procedure used within
+% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\thanks, and \cmd\altaffiliation.
+% When such a command appears after an \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation
+% command, the \cmd\@AF@join\ procedure appends the argument given to the appropriate 
+% macro.
+% Its default is to give an error message, since these commands are legal only within
+% the particular context mentioned.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let\@AF@join\@AF@join@error
+}%
+\def\@AF@join@error#1{%
+ \class@warn{%
+  \string\email, \string\homepage, \string\thanks, or \string\altaffiliation\space
+  appears in wrong context. 
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for auxiliary information}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\email}
+% Just tacks the email address on to the current author or affiliation.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{email}.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sanitize@url{%
+ \@makeother\%%
+ \@makeother\~%
+ \@makeother\_%
+}%
+\newcommand*\email[1][]{\begingroup\sanitize@url\@email{#1}}%
+\def\@email#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@AF@join{#1\href{mailto:#2}{#2}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\homepage}
+% Just tacks the URL on to the current author or affiliation.
+% Note: group opened in \cmd\homepage\ is closed in \cmd\@homepage.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{homepage}.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/03}{(AO) remove http:// from \cs{href} call}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\homepage[1][]{\begingroup\sanitize@url\@homepage{#1}}%
+\def\@homepage#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@AF@join{#1\href{#2}{#2}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\href}
+% The document may load a package that defines either of these commands;
+% if not, we give a default meaning. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \providecommand\href[1]{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%
+% The operative version of \cmd\thanks\ appends an item to \cmd\@author, or \cmd\@affil's auxiliary data.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@thanks{% implicit #1
+  \@AF@join
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffiliation}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{change name from \cs{tempaffiliation}}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{add optional argument handling back}
+% Implemented more or less like \cmd\thanks\ but shares the affiliation
+% counter.
+% Optional argument may be used to give explanatory text eg
+% `currently staying at'
+% This will be placed before the address, if used in a footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\altaffiliation[2][]{%
+  \@AF@join{#1#2}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures for author, collaboration, and affiliation}%
+%
+% Macros that list off, say, authors, and which require punctuation, like ``A, B, and C'', will use 
+% \cmd\set@listcomma@list, \cmd\set@listcomma@count, \cmd\@listand, and \cmd\@listcomma.
+% These macros use the \cmd\@tempcnta\ register to keep track of how many items remain to be listed off.
+%
+% At present, \cmd\@author@present\ will decrement that counter.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@listcomma@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@listcomma@count}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{macro added}
+% Pop the author count for this collaboration.
+%
+% Note: by side effect, it assigns \cmd\@listcomma:
+% for a list of length two, suppress comma addition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@listcomma@list#1{%
+  \expandafter\@reset@ac\expandafter#1#1{0}\@reset@ac{%
+   \let\@listcomma\relax
+  }{%
+   \let\@listcomma\@listcomma@comma
+  }%
+}%
+\def\set@listcomma@count#1{%
+  \@ifnum{#1=\tw@}{%
+    \let\@listcomma\relax
+  }{%
+    \let\@listcomma\@listcomma@comma
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Does the actual pop operation, then generates a Boolean which selects one of the two assignments for \cmd\@listcomma.
+%
+% Note: this procedure sets \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the number of items to list off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@reset@ac#1#2#3\@reset@ac{%
+  \def#1{#3}%
+  \@tempcnta#2\relax
+  \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listand}
+% Might need extending with penalties etc.
+%
+% Note: this procedure expects \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the current number of items remaining to list off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listand{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\tw@}{\andname\space}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listcomma}
+% This definition, with \cmd\@ne\ puts a comma before and.
+%
+% David Carlisle says: In UK English (at least) would have \cmd\tw@\ here,
+% which would then implement the convention of indicating conjunction with comma or ``and'', but not both.
+%
+% Note: this procedure expects \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the current number of items remaining to list off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listcomma@comma{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta>\@ne}{,}{}}%
+\def\@listcomma@comma@UK{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta>\tw@}{,}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration@gobble}
+% This command will be the synonym of \cmd\CO@grp\ during the expansion of \cmd\@AAC@list, 
+% within \cmd\affils@present@group execution (in a \classoption{groupedaddress} situation). 
+% 
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) Let \cs{@collaboration@gobble} parse all three arguments of \cs{CO@opr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration@gobble#1#2#3{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doauthor}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Provide facility \cs{affil@cutoff}: if there is only one affiliation on the title page, no superscript}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+% Main control over how authors are typeset.
+%
+% |#1| is loaded by \cmd\author
+%
+% |#2| is loaded by \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, or \cmd\thanks
+%
+% |#3| is the superscript affiliation, if at all used.
+%
+% First, the author name is formatted, followed by a comma,
+% then come any marks relating to affiliation (if present),
+% then come the homepage URL and email address, if any, with
+% appropriate punctuation.
+%
+% Here, as in \cmd\@affil@script, the parameter \cmd\affil@cutoff\
+% controls whether the argument \#3 is produced as a superscript label
+% connecting this author with its affiliation. (If there is only one
+% affiliation on the title page, it makes sense to remove the superscript.) 
+% 
+% Note that argument \#3 must effectively execute either 
+% \cmd\aftergroup\cmd\true@sw\ or \cmd\aftergroup\cmd\false@sw\ (exactly once!). 
+% In the case of \classoption{superscriptaddress}, this is done when 
+% \cmd\@author@present@script\ invokes \cmd\doauthor\ with its third argument containing 
+% \cmd\@affil@present@script. 
+% Otherwise (e.g., \classoption{groupedaddress}), \cmd\doauthor\ is invoked by
+% \cmd\@author@present@group\ with its third argument containing \cmd\@affil@present@group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doauthor#1#2#3{%
+  \ignorespaces#1\unskip\@listcomma
+  \begingroup
+   #3%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, we must have queued up a Boolean (either \cmd\true@sw\ or \cmd\false@sw).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@if@empty{#2}{\endgroup{}{}}{\endgroup{\comma@space}{}\frontmatter@footnote{#2}}%
+  \space \@listand 
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x@match}
+% Procedure \cmd\x@match\ is used as an alias \cmd\AFG@opr,
+% probing the list of affiliation groups
+% and setting a Boolean if a match is found to \#1 (usually the current affiliation group).
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\y@match\ is used as an alias to \cmd\@TBN@opr,
+% probing the list of unique title block footnotes for a match to the footnote text:
+% when the first match is found it sets a Boolean,
+% defining \cmd\@tempb\ to the number of that footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\x@match#1#2{%
+ \temp@sw{}{%
+  \def\@tempifx{#2}%
+  \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+    \@booleantrue\temp@sw
+  }{%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\y@match#1#2#3{%
+ \temp@sw{}{%
+  \def\@tempifx{#3}%
+  \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+    \@booleantrue\temp@sw
+    \def\@tempb{#2}%
+  }{%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote}
+% Used when typesetting a title block footnote.
+% (Item 290: merge duplicates.)
+%
+% Maintains a list of frontmatter footnotes along with associated device.
+% Uniquifies each footnote by traversing the list and looking for a match to the footnote text.
+% If found, define \cmd\@tempb\ to the corresponding footnote device, and typeset it with \cmd\@footnotemark.
+% If never found, manually increment footnote counter, 
+% determine the corresponding footnote device, and
+% add footnote text and device to the list of frontmatter footnotes.
+%
+% The list \cmd\@FMN@list\ is processed later in the title block production.
+%
+% Note that this method of making footnotes runs afoul of \classname{hyperref}'s patches of the \LaTeX\ kernel.
+% Therefore, we avoid trouble by refraining from using \cmd\@footnotemark\ and by creating our own hypertext links.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@footnote#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \@booleanfalse\temp@sw
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \let\@tempb\@empty
+  \def\@TBN@opr{\y@match\@tempa}%
+  \@FMN@list
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% By side effect, \cmd\@tempb\ holds the value of the footnote counter if
+% This note has been seen before. Otherwise \cmd\temp@sw\ is false. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \temp@sw{%
+   \expandafter\frontmatter@footnotemark
+   \expandafter{\@tempb}%
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Execute \cmd\frontmatter@foot@mark, feeding it the value of the current footnote counter. 
+% This call requires two levels of pre-expansion to accomplish, the first to expand \cmd\csname, the second to evaluate \cmd\the.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \stepcounter\@mpfn
+   \expandafter\expandafter
+   \expandafter\frontmatter@foot@mark
+   \expandafter\expandafter
+   \expandafter{%
+   \expandafter \the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname
+               }{#1}%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\frontmatter@foot@mark\ lays down the footnote device (mark) and takes care of the footnote text.
+% The latter merely involves queueing that text (along with its associated device) into \cmd\@FMN@list. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@foot@mark#1#2{%
+ \frontmatter@footnotemark{#1}%
+ \g@addto@macro\@FMN@list{\@TBN@opr{#1}{#2}}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \global\let\@FMN@list\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@footnotemark#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+  \begingroup
+   \hyper@linkstart {link}{frontmatter.#1}%
+    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+    \def\@thefnmark{\frontmatter@thefootnote}%
+    \@makefnmark
+   \hyper@linkend
+  \endgroup
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+ \relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The keywords command}%
+% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
+%    \begin{macro}{\@keywords}
+% Usual game, save text in a macro for processing by \cmd\maketitle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\keywords#1{%
+  \aftermaketitle@chk{\keywords}%
+  \gdef\@keywords{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let\@keywords\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \cs{date} command and related commands}%
+% \begin{macro}{\date}
+% \begin{macro}{\received}
+% \begin{macro}{\revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\published}
+% \begin{macro}{\@date}
+% \begin{macro}{\@received}
+% \begin{macro}{\@revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\@accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\@published}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% Use the \cmd\date\ command to specify the document date,
+% the \cmd\received\ command to specify the date received,
+% \cmd\revised\   for date revised,
+% \cmd\accepted\  for date accepted, and
+% \cmd\published\ for date published.
+% Normally only \cmd\date\ to be used by author, 
+% the remainder used only by editors.
+%
+% DPC: As for \cmd\keywords, but this time don't flag a warning if there is no
+% revision date specified.
+%
+% In each case the user-level command defines the value of a 
+% macro which buffers the data entered by the user.
+% For instance, \cmd\received\ causes \cmd\@received\ to
+% acquire a value.
+% The optional argument allows the user to override the 
+% text that will be typeset along with the date;
+% the default value of that text is itself 
+% a localized macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\frontmatter@date[2][\Dated@name]{\def\@date{#1#2}}%
+\def\@date{}%
+\newcommand*\received[2][\Received@name]{\def\@received{#1#2}}%
+\def\@received{}%
+\newcommand*\revised[2][\Revised@name]{\def\@revised{#1#2}}%
+\def\@revised{}%
+\newcommand*\accepted[2][\Accepted@name]{\def\@accepted{#1#2}}%
+\def\@accepted{}%
+\newcommand*\published[2][\Published@name]{\def\@published{#1#2}}%
+\def\@published{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The pacs command}%
+% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy Classification Scheme.
+% \begin{macro}{\pacs}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs}
+% As for \cmd\keywords\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pacs#1{%
+  \aftermaketitle@chk{\pacs}%
+  \gdef\@pacs{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let\@pacs\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \cs{preprint} command}
+%
+% \changes{4.0g}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\preprint#1{\gappdef\@preprint{\preprint{#1}}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \let\@preprint\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{abstract} environment}%
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Gathered all code for the abstract environment together and abstracted out the formatting details for journals to override.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\absbox}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\absbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% Abstract, as in AMS classes, must be specified \emph{before}
+% \cmd\maketitle. It just saves everything up in \cmd\absbox.
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{If empty \cs{abstractname} omit spacing}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+% Note that the specifics of how the abstract is to be 
+% formatted are set by \cmd\frontmatter@abstractwidth,
+% \cmd\frontmatter@abstractheading, and \cmd\frontmatter@abstractfont.
+%
+% Here we wish to set the abstract into type but save it away in a box, much like
+% the \cmd\minipage\ command does. 
+%
+% Note that the \cmd\endabstract\ portion of the environment
+% begins with code that mostly duplicates \cmd\endminipage, but without the \cmd\@iiiparbox.
+% At the end, we simply transfer the contents of the \cmd\minipage\ 
+% into a box of our own.
+% 
+% However, we also have to end the gratuitous 
+% paragraph begun by \cmd\minipage.
+% We ensure that no trace of that paragraph is left,
+% by absorbing the \cmd\parindent\ box.
+% Doing so destroys the paragraph entirely, except
+% for the \cmd\parskip\ glue, and that morsel is pruned, because we are at the top
+% of a page.
+%
+% This mechanism is vulnerable, however, because anything placed into the horizontal list
+% after the \cmd\parindent\ box will confound it. 
+% And that is exactly what happens under Mik\TeX:
+% There seems to be an extension to the \TeX\ standard operating here which inserts a \cmd\special \ at the beginning of every paragraph.
+% (The mechnism is \emph{not} based on \cmd\everypar.)
+%
+% To accomodate this state of affairs, 
+% we have a new mechanism that offers an even more complete rewrite of \env{minipage}.
+% 
+% Note that an entry is made in the toc for the abstract; this has the side effect
+% of creating a PDF bookmark for this element if the \classname{hyperref} package is in effect. 
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-06-30}{(AO, 443) create an entry in the PDF bookmarks for the abstract via the toc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel@abstract{1}%
+\def\addcontents@abstract{%
+ \phantomsection
+ \expandafter\def\csname Parent0\endcsname{section*.2}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\abstractname}{\addcontentsline{toc}{abstract}}%
+}%
+\newenvironment{frontmatter@abstract}{%
+  \aftermaketitle@chk{\begin{abstract}}%
+  \global\setbox\absbox\vbox\bgroup
+   \color@begingroup
+   \columnwidth\textwidth
+   \hsize\columnwidth
+   \@parboxrestore
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line switches footnotes to the \texttt{mpfoootnote} series.
+% This action should rather be taken by \cmd\frontmatter@abstractfont, which can be customized. 
+% There is also an interaction with \cmd\mini@note. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+   \minipagefootnote@init
+   \let\set@listindent\set@listindent@
+   \let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth \@mplistdepth\z@
+   \let@environment{description}{frontmatter@description}%
+   \@minipagerestore
+   \@setminipage
+    \frontmatter@abstractheading
+    \frontmatter@abstractfont
+    \let\footnote\mini@note
+    \expandafter\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypar\addcontents@abstract\everypar{}}%
+}{%
+    \par
+    \unskip
+    \minipagefootnote@here
+    \@minipagefalse   %% added 24 May 89
+    \color@endgroup
+  \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnotetext}
+% We reimplement \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ under a new name (so as not to be overridden by the \classname{hyperref} package) 
+% and extend it to accomodate hyperrefs.
+%
+% Note that this procedure is very like \classname{ltxutil}'s \cmd\mp@footnotetext, except that it
+% uses \cmd\frontmatter@makefntext\ instead of \cmd\@makefntext.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Use \cs{set@footnotefont}, which is defined in ltxutil}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter@footnotetext#1{%
+  \minipagefootnote@pick
+    \set@footnotefont
+    \set@footnotewidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@\@mpfn\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \color@begingroup
+      \frontmatter@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox\vadjust{\vskip\z@skip}%
+      }%
+    \color@endgroup
+  \minipagefootnote@drop
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@no@footwarn}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@no@footnote{%
+ \let\ltx@xfootnote\ltx@no@xfootnote\let\ltx@yfootnote\ltx@no@yfootnote
+ \let\ltx@xfootmark\ltx@no@xfootmark\let\ltx@yfootmark\ltx@no@yfootmark
+ \let\ltx@xfoottext\ltx@no@xfoottext\let\ltx@yfoottext\ltx@no@yfoottext
+}%
+\def\ltx@no@xfootnote[#1]#2{\ltx@no@footwarn\footnote}%
+\def\ltx@no@yfootnote#1{\ltx@no@footwarn\footnote}%
+\def\ltx@no@xfootmark[#1]{\ltx@no@footwarn\footnotemark}%
+\def\ltx@no@yfootmark{\ltx@no@footwarn\footnotemark}%
+\def\ltx@no@xfoottext[#1]#2{\ltx@no@footwarn\footnotetext}%
+\def\ltx@no@yfoottext#1{\ltx@no@footwarn\footnotetext}%
+\def\ltx@no@footwarn#1{%
+ \class@warn{%
+  The \string#1\space command is not legal on the title page; 
+  using \string\thanks\space instead might suit you: consult the manual for details%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% The default abstract head; journals will override this procedure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \begingroup
+  \centering\large
+  \abstractname
+  \par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% The default type specification for the body of the abstract.
+% Journals will override this setting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{frontmatter@description}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) provide a \texttt{description} environment for the abstract}
+% Within the abstract, the description environment is defined as follows:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{frontmatter@description}{%
+ \list{}{%
+  \leftmargin\z@
+  \labelwidth\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \itemindent-\leftmargin
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \itemindent\z@
+  \let\makelabel\frontmatter@descriptionlabel
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont\bfseries
+ #1:%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractwidth}
+% The default setting is the full text width;
+% journals can override this setting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstract@produce}
+% This procedure determines how the abstract is incorporated
+% into the title block. We split this out in anticipation
+% of the need to lift the limitation that the abstract not break over pages.
+%
+% If we are in preprint style, we provide an easy pagebreak point immediately above the abstract.
+% This means that the abstract will either fit entirely on the same page as the title block, 
+% or it will start a page of its own (which may itself break onto a subsequent page if necessary).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstract@produce{%
+  \par
+  \preprintsty@sw{%
+   \do@output@MVL{%
+    \vskip\frontmatter@preabstractspace
+    \vskip200\p@\@plus1fil
+    \penalty-200\relax
+    \vskip-200\p@\@plus-1fil
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \addvspace{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}%
+  }%
+   \begingroup
+    \dimen@\baselineskip
+    \setbox\z@\vtop{\unvcopy\absbox}%
+    \advance\dimen@-\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-\prevdepth
+    \@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{\vskip\dimen@}{}%
+   \endgroup
+   \begingroup
+    \prep@absbox
+    \unvbox\absbox
+    \post@absbox
+   \endgroup
+  \@ifx{\@empty\mini@notes}{}{\mini@notes\par}%
+  \addvspace\frontmatter@postabstractspace
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{\let\mini@notes\@empty}%
+\let\prep@absbox\@empty
+\let\post@absbox\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{.5\baselineskip}
+\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{.5\baselineskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting the title block}%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
+% This is \LaTeXe's \classname{article} class version,
+% with modifications.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{frontmatter@titlepage}{%
+      \twocolumn@sw{\onecolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+      \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+      \setcounter{page}\@ne
+}{%
+     \twocolumn@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+     \twoside@sw{}{%
+        \setcounter{page}\@ne
+     }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+% Put it all together to format the title block.
+%
+% Gotcha!
+% If you expand \cmd\csname undefined\cmd\endcsname, you change the meaning of \cmd\undefined\ from
+% ``Undefined'' to \cmd\relax.
+% Watchout!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@maketitle{%
+  \@author@finish
+  \title@column\titleblock@produce
+  \suppressfloats[t]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now save some memory.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\and\relax
+  \let\affiliation\@gobble
+  \let\author\@gobble
+  \let\@AAC@list\@empty
+  \let\@AFF@list\@empty
+  \let\@AFG@list\@empty
+  \let\@AF@join\@AF@join@error
+  \let\email\@gobble
+  \let\@address\@empty
+  \let\maketitle\relax
+  \let\thanks\@gobble
+  \let\abstract\@undefined\let\endabstract\@undefined
+  \titlepage@sw{%
+   \vfil
+   \clearpage
+  }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@Hy}
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Hyperref compatibility: take \cs{maketitle} back.}
+% We provide the means to take back the definition of \cmd\maketitle\ from \classname{hyperref}: 
+% we do not need its help in providing hypertext services in the title page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketitle@Hy{%
+  \let\Hy@saved@footnotemark\@footnotemark
+  \let\Hy@saved@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+  \let\@footnotemark\H@@footnotemark
+  \let\@footnotetext\H@@footnotetext
+  \@ifnextchar[%]
+   \Hy@maketitle@optarg
+   {%
+    \HyOrg@maketitle
+    \Hy@maketitle@end
+   }%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+  \@ifx{\maketitle\maketitle@Hy}{%
+   \class@info{Taking \string\maketitle\space back from hyperref}%
+   \let\maketitle\frontmatter@maketitle
+  }{%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titleblock@produce}
+% This procedure produces the title block.
+%
+% It effectively executes inside a group
+% and always returns us to vertical mode.
+%
+% Note: we assume that it is OK to set the footnote counter to zero at this point.
+% Is this a safe assumption?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\titleblock@produce{%
+ \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Set \cs{footnote} to \LaTeX\ standard version for this scope.}
+% First, we restore the footnote mechanism to its default state,
+% then we customize the way the footnote mark is produced and how it is formatted.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ltx@footnote@pop
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following three lines establish an independent footnote counter for use in the title block. 
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+  \def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+  \c@mpfootnote\z@
+  \let\@makefnmark\frontmatter@makefnmark
+  \frontmatter@setup
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}\label{FirstPage}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the title:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \frontmatter@title@produce
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the author list:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \groupauthors@sw{%
+   \frontmatter@author@produce@group
+  }{%
+   \frontmatter@author@produce@script
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the dates:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \frontmatter@RRAPformat{%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@date}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@received}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@revised}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@accepted}%
+   \expandafter\produce@RRAP\expandafter{\@published}%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the abstract, PACS, and keywords, and end any paragraph.
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Produce PACS, keywords only if specified}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \frontmatter@abstract@produce
+  \@ifx@empty\@pacs{}{%
+   \@pacs@produce\@pacs
+  }%
+  \@ifx@empty\@keywords{}{%
+   \@keywords@produce\@keywords
+  }%
+  \par
+  \frontmatter@finalspace
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@produce}
+% The default formatting procedure for the article title.
+% This procedure should take care of the vertical space below the title.
+%
+% Clients may override this procedure, but it is more likely that they will
+% use the hooks \cmd\frontmatter@title@above, \cmd\frontmatter@title@format, and \cmd\frontmatter@title@below.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 443) PDF Bookmark for title page}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel@title{0}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@produce{%
+ \begingroup
+  \frontmatter@title@above
+  \frontmatter@title@format
+  \@title
+  \unskip
+  \phantomsection\expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\@title}{\addcontentsline{toc}{title}}%
+  \@ifx{\@title@aux\@title@aux@cleared}{}{%
+   \expandafter\frontmatter@footnote\expandafter{\@title@aux}%
+  }%
+  \par
+  \frontmatter@title@below
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\appdef\let@mark{\let\\\relax}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% The default values for formatting specifications for the article title.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter@title@above\ should take care of the vertical space above the title;
+% \cmd\frontmatter@title@below\ below.
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter@title@format\ should invoke any font switches, etc.
+% that may apply to the title.
+%
+% Journals will override this procedure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{\baselineskip}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Authors and affiliations in superscriptaddress style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@author@produce@script}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% \cmd\frontmatter@author@produce@script\ is an alias for \cmd\frontmatter@author@produce, 
+% the procedure that formats the author/affiliation list.
+%
+% In this case, the authors affiliations are being superscripted
+% (class option \classoption{superscriptaddress}).
+%
+% This procedure must ensure that any paragraph that it starts gets ended finally.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@author@produce@script{%
+  \begingroup
+    \let\@author@present\@author@present@script
+    \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter@author@produce@script:}\say\@AAC@list\say\@AFF@list\say\@AFG@list}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{Changes to add collaboration processing, which now means doing comma/and processing on each sublist}
+% When the author/affiliation list \cmd\@AAC@list\ is executed, 
+% \cmd\@tempcnt\ counts each author,
+% and
+% \cmd\@tempa\ stores a list of author indices for the current collaboration.
+% 
+% Note: this procedure uses \cmd\AU@temp\ to hold a list of author counts for each collaboration.
+% Note: also uses \cmd\@tempcnta\ to communicate between procedures.
+% This usage ot \cmd\@tempcnta\ is OK, because the expansion of \cmd\@AAC@list\ will trigger only the execution of 
+% our own procedures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\AU@temp\@empty
+    \@tempcnta\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We wish to know how many authors are in each collaboration, for the purposes of \cmd\listcomma\ and \cmd\listand.
+%
+% Here we assign values for the intercollated operators appearing within \cmd\@AAC@list,
+% then execute that macro, registering the authors in each collaboration.
+% Afterwards, clean up by emulating an empty collaboration.
+%
+% The result, stored in \cmd\AU@temp, is a list of brace-delmited tokens, each a number
+% representing the number of authors in that collaboration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\AF@opr \@gobble
+    \def\AU@opr{\@author@count\@tempcnta}%
+    \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@count\AU@temp\@tempcnta}%
+    \@AAC@list
+    \expandafter\CO@opr\@author@cleared
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Next, present the authors and their affiliations, with the collaborations interleaved.
+%
+% We assign values for the intercollated operators appearing within \cmd\@AAC@list.
+% Next, assign \cmd\@listcomma\ based on the number of authors in the first collaboration.
+% Then expand \cmd\@AAC@list.
+%
+% Upon completion, there will be two space tokens following the last author because of \cmd\listand\ processing;
+% remove them, then end the last paragraph.
+%
+% FIXME: this juncture would be a good time to effectively eliminate 
+% the unused affiliations in \cmd\@AFF@list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@authorformat
+     \let\AF@opr \@affilID@def
+     \let\AU@opr \@author@present
+     \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@present\AU@temp}%
+     \set@listcomma@list\AU@temp
+     \@AAC@list
+     \unskip\unskip
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We now list out the affiliations in the order they appeared.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@above@affiliation@script
+     \let\AFF@opr \@affil@script
+     \@AFF@list
+     \frontmatter@footnote@produce
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+  \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@count}
+% This version of \cmd\AU@opr\ counts the number of authors it processes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@count#1{%
+ \advance#1\@ne
+ \@author@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration@present}
+% Format a collaboration.
+% Note that we immediately end the paragraph thus begun, because we only support
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress}-style processing.
+%
+% Note also that the execution of the production procedures takes place inside of a group;
+% for reasons of protective programming.
+%
+% Bug note: originally, the number of authors in each collaboration was stored in \cmd\@tempa,
+% but this exposed us to procedures in our production that modified the meaning of \cmd\@tempa.
+%
+% The last action done in this procedure is to assign \cmd\@listcomma\ based on the number of authors in the next collaboration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration@present#1#2#3#4{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+  \frontmatter@collaboration@above
+  \@affilID@def{}%
+  \@tempcnta\z@
+  \@author@present{}{(\ignorespaces#3\unskip)}{#4}%
+  \par
+ \endgroup
+ \set@listcomma@list#1%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration@count}
+% Simply register each author in this collaboration.
+% Note: \#1 is a \cmd\csname\ to hold the value, \#2 is the \cmd\count\ register holding the count of interest.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration@count#1#2{%
+ \appdef@eval#1{\the#2}#2\z@
+ \@author@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID@def}
+%
+% The \cmd\@affilID@def\ procedure, an alias of \cmd\AF@opr\ used during \cmd\frontmatter@author@produce@script\ processing,
+% memorizes the affiliation in \cmd\@affilID@temp.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affilID@def{\def\@affilID@temp}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID@temp}
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@affilID@temp\ is used to communicate between
+% \cmd\doauthor\ and instances of \cmd\AF@opr\ within the author list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@affilID@temp\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affils@present@script}
+% An alias of \cmd\AFG@opr, this procedure is applied to elements in \cmd\@AFG@list.
+% It builds \cmd\@AFU@list, a list of unique affiliations found within affiliation groups.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\affils@present@script#1{%
+% \get@affil#1{}%
+%}%
+%\def\get@affil#1{%
+% \def\@tempa{#1}%
+% \@ifx{\@empty\@tempa}{}{%
+%  \@booleanfalse\temp@sw
+%  \def\AF@opr{\x@match\@tempa}%
+%  \@AFU@list
+%  \temp@sw{}{%
+%   \appdef\@AFU@list{\AF@opr{#1}}%
+%  }%
+%  \get@affil
+% }%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil@present@script}
+% An alias of \cmd\AF@opr, this procedure is applied to \cmd\@AFU@list\ when formatting the affiliations
+% under \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% It in turn applies \cmd\affil@script\ to \cmd\@AFF@list, thereby formatting the affiliation
+% associated with this affiliation index.
+% 
+% Note: it traverses the \cmd\@AFF@list\ for each entry in the \cmd\@AFU@list, thereby making this
+% portion of code execute in $N^{2}$ time.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\affil@present@script#1{%
+% \def\@tempa{#1}%
+% \begingroup
+%  \frontmatter@affiliationfont
+%  \let\AFF@opr \affil@script
+%  \@AFF@list
+% \endgroup
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil@script}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFF@opr, this procedure is applied to \cmd\@AFF@list\ when formatting the affiliations
+% under \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% It rejects all entries not matching the affiliation index held in \cmd\@tempa.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\affil@script#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#1}\@ifx{\@tempifx\@tempa}{%
+  \@if@empty{#2}{}{%
+   \par
+   \begingroup
+    \def\@thefnmark{#1}\@makefnmark\ignorespaces
+    #2%
+    \@if@empty{#3}{}{\frontmatter@footnote{#3}}%
+    \par
+   \endgroup
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@script}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFF@opr:
+% The affiliations are being formatted in the case
+% where affiliations are being superscripted:
+% make a list out of the affiliations with the numbers printed.
+% Society-specific code can change the formatting
+% by overriding the definition of \cmd\frontmatter@affiliationfont.
+%
+% A client may choose to set \cmd\affil@cutoff\ to either \cmd\@ne\ (the default)
+% or \cmd\tw@. The latter setting will enforce a rule to the effect that
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page, 
+% then no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+%
+% |#1|---Affiliation ID: a number; zero signifies a \cmd\noaffiliation.
+%
+% |#2|---Collaboration ID
+%
+% |#3|---Affiliation address
+%
+% |#4|---Auxiliary info
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil@script#1#2#3#4{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the affiliation is the \cmd\noaffiliation, then we do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{#1=\z@}{}{%
+  \par
+  \begingroup
+   \frontmatter@affiliationfont
+   \@ifnum{\c@affil<\affil@cutoff}{}{%
+    \def\@thefnmark{#1}\@makefnmark
+   }%
+   \ignorespaces#3%
+   \@if@empty{#4}{}{\frontmatter@footnote{#4}}%
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+ }%
+}%
+\let\affil@cutoff\@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@present@script}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% This version of \cmd\AU@opr\ applies to the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option.
+% Need to add commas between groups
+% of address numbers, which are passed in the macro \cmd\@affilID@temp\ in the form
+% |{3}{4}{7}| if this set of authors is related to addresses, 3, 4 and 7.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@present@script#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+  \gdef\comma@space{\textsuperscript{,\,}}%
+  \doauthor{#2}{#3}{\@affil@present@script}%
+ \endgroup
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+}%
+\def\@affilcomma#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{\z@#1}{%
+  \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+   \@affilcomma{#2}%
+  }%
+ }{%
+  #1%
+  \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+   \@ifx{\z@#2}{%
+    \@affilcomma
+   }{%
+    ,\,\@affilcomma{#2}%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@present@script}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@present@script@}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+% The \cmd\@affil@present@script\ procedure presents the reference to the affiliations in the case of superscript addresses.
+%
+% The affiliations are presented to \cmd\@affil@present@script@ as a list of brace-delimited tokens, each containing the affiliation ID (a number).
+% The list is terminated by the token \cmd\relax. 
+% The macro recurses (via tail recursion) until the terminating token is encountered.
+% Note that an affiliation ID of zero signifies a \cmd\noaffiliation:
+% references to the \cmd\noaffiliation\ are passed over.
+%
+% Upon termination, the affiliations, if any, are produced via \cmd\textsuperscript\ and the appropriate boolean is queued via \cmd\aftergroup.
+% The boolean signifies that a non-trivial affiliation was produced, so that the proper punctuation can be produced. 
+% The group in question is that opened and closed by the \cmd\doauthor\ procedure. 
+%
+% This procedure uses \cmd\@tempa\ as a scratch register. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil@present@script{%
+ \let\@tempa\@empty
+ \expandafter\@affil@present@script@\@affilID@temp\relax
+}%
+\def\@affil@present@script@#1{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#1}{%
+  \@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{%
+   \aftergroup\false@sw
+  }{%
+   \textsuperscript{\expandafter\@affilcomma\@tempa\relax\relax}%
+   \aftergroup\true@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \@ifnum{#1=\z@}{}{\appdef\@tempa{{#1}}}%
+  \@affil@present@script@
+ }%
+}%
+\@provide\@author@parskip{\z@skip}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Authors and affiliations in groupedaddress style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@author@produce@group}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% Alias for \cmd\frontmatter@author@produce when \classoption{groupedaddress} is in effect, 
+% the procedure that formats the author/affiliation list. 
+%
+% In this case, the authors are being grouped above their shared addresses.
+% How it works: the \cmd\@AFG@list, a list of all unique affiliation groups, is expanded.
+% For each such group, all authors belonging to that group are formatted above the affiliation group.
+% Collaborations are silently passed over.
+%
+% This procedure must ensure that any paragraph that it starts gets ended finally.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@author@produce@group{%
+  \begingroup
+    \let\@author@present\@author@present@group
+    \frontmatter@authorformat
+    \frontmatterverbose@sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter@author@produce@group:}\say\@AAC@list\say\@AFF@list\say\@AFG@list}{}%
+    \let\AU@temp\@empty
+    \set@listcomma@list\AU@temp
+    \def\CO@opr{\@collaboration@present\AU@temp}%
+    \let\AFG@opr \affils@present@group
+    \let\@listcomma\relax
+    \@AFG@list
+    \frontmatter@footnote@produce
+    \par
+  \endgroup
+  \frontmatter@authorbelow
+}%
+\@provide\frontmatter@authorbelow{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affils@present@group}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose@sw}}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFG@opr, this procedure is used on every element of
+% \cmd\@AFG@list, the list of unique affiliation groups,
+% when formatting the author/affiliation block:
+% It presents all authors sharing this affiliation group.
+%
+% This procedure is called via the procedure
+% \cmd\frontmatter@author@produce@group, an alias for \cmd\frontmatter@author@produce,
+%
+% Its use pertains to the class options
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, and \classoption{runinaddress}
+% (that is, \cmd\groupauthors@sw\ is true).
+%
+% For each invocation, the entire \cmd\@AAC@list\ is run through (twice),
+% making this process execute in $N^{2}$ time. (Is this really true?)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\affils@present@group#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Count (using \cmd\@tempcnta) the authors in the author list whose affiliation group 
+% matches the argument |#1|.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\AF@temp\ is used as a storage register for the argument 
+% of the procedure, for purposes of comparison using \cmd\ifx.
+%
+% Note: here we use \cmd\@tempcnta\ to accumulate the number of authors in the current affiliation set.
+%
+% QUERY: do the value of \cmd\AF@temp\ and \cmd\AF@opr\ need to persist?
+%
+% QUERY: what value does \cmd\AU@opr\ have at this point?
+% ANSWER: the \cmd\@affilID@count\ and \cmd\@affilID@match\ procedures
+% assign meanings to \cmd\AU@opr\ and \cmd\CO@opr\ dynamically.
+% We initialize the two operators to \cmd\@undefined\ so as to catch the
+% pathological cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+   \def\AF@temp{#1}%
+   \@tempcnta\z@
+   \let\AU@opr \@undefined
+   \let\CO@opr \@undefined
+   \def\AF@opr{\@affilID@count\AF@temp\@tempcnta}%
+   \@AAC@list
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If there are no authors using this affiliation group, skip it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% DPC: If we have a list of length two, need to locally zap a comma.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup
+     \frontmatter@above@affilgroup
+     \set@listcomma@count\@tempcnta
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Run through the author list, presenting (with \cmd\@author@present)
+% those authors whose affiliation matched the given one.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \let\AU@opr \@undefined
+     \let\CO@opr \@undefined
+     \def\AF@opr{\@affilID@match\AF@temp}%
+     \@AAC@list
+    \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now that the authors have all been presented, present the affiliations, grouped.
+%
+% Note: \cmd\@tempcnta\ is the number of affiliations for this set of authors.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup
+     \par
+     \frontmatter@above@affiliation
+     \frontmatter@affiliationfont
+     \let\\\frontmatter@addressnewline
+     \@tempcnta\z@
+     \@tfor\AF@temp:=#1\do{%
+      \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\expandafter\z@\AF@temp}{}{%
+       \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+      }%
+     }%
+     \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\tw@}{%
+      \let\@listcomma\relax
+     }{}%
+     \def@after@address
+     \runinaddress@sw{%
+     }{%
+      \tightenlines@sw{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line determines the space between affilations in grouped mode
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \parskip\z@
+      }%
+      \appdef\after@address\par
+     }%
+     \let\AFF@opr \@affil@group
+     \do@affil@fromgroup\@AFF@list#1\relax
+    \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of branch handling authors.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%   \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\def@after@address}
+% \begin{macro}{\def@after@address@empty}
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Parametrize the production after the address}%
+%
+% Each of these procedures assigns a meaning to \cmd\after@address, the first 
+% a useful default, the second a nil. 
+% A society or journal substyle may define it according to its own requirements.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def@after@address{\def\after@address{\@listcomma\ \@listand}}%
+\def\def@after@address@empty{\let\after@address\@empty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%   \end{macro}
+%   \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID@count}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID@match}
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AF@opr\ is placed in the
+% author/affiliation list (\cmd\@AAC@list) for each (new) affiliation, with that affiliation as its argument.
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AF@opr\ is an alias of a procedure
+% to count the number of authors at a given affiliation (\cmd\@affilID@count)
+% or to present the given authors (\cmd\@affilID@match).
+% These two procedures are executed when formatting under the \classoption{groupedaddress} class option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affilID@count#1#2#3{%
+  \def\@tempifx{#3}%
+  \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+    \def\AU@opr{\@author@count#2}%
+  }{%
+    \let\AU@opr \@author@gobble
+  }%
+  \let\CO@opr \@collaboration@gobble
+}%
+\def\@affilID@match#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#2}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+   \let\AU@opr \@author@present
+ }{%
+   \let\AU@opr \@author@gobble
+ }%
+  \let\CO@opr \@collaboration@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@affil@fromgroup}
+% Executes iteratively:
+% selects the next address ID to print,
+% and then re-execute the list of addresses to print the text of that address.
+%
+% Note: an argument of \cmd\relax\ breaks out of this iteration,
+% while an argument of \cmd\z@\ (\cmd\noaffiliation) is a no-op.
+%
+% Note: we have created an $N^{2}$ computing process.
+% FIXME: can use hashing instead, you know.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@affil@fromgroup#1#2{%
+  \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+    \count@#2\relax
+    \@ifnum{\z@=\count@}{}{#1}%
+    \do@affil@fromgroup#1%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@group}
+% The alias of \cmd\AFF@opr\ when the list \cmd\@AFF@list\
+% is executed by \cmd\do@affil@fromgroup\ (\classoption{groupedaddress}):
+% Print the address if its number matches \cmd\count@\ (value set by \cmd\do@affil@fromgroup).
+%
+% Note that we detect a \cmd\noaffiliation\ here by the affiliation address being
+% the same as the expansion of \cmd\blankaffiliation.
+%
+% \changes{4.1d}{2008/10/17}{(AO, 410) compare \cs{@tempa} to \cs{blankaffiliation}.}%
+%
+% I made a mistake when coding the comparison to \cmd\blankaffiliation: 
+% it originally read \cmd\@ifx\{\#3\cmd\blankaffiliation\}.
+% This is obviously wrong once you think twice. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil@group#1#2#3#4{%
+  \@ifnum{#1=\count@}{%
+   \def\@tempa{#3}%
+   \@ifx{\@tempa\blankaffiliation}{}{%
+    #3%
+    \@if@empty{#4}{}{%
+     \frontmatter@footnote{#4}%
+    }%
+    \after@address
+   }%
+   \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+  }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author@present@group}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil@present@group}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{\cs{comma@space}}
+% This version of \cmd\AU@opr\ applies to the \classoption{groupedaddress} class option and its ilk.
+% Traverse the list calling the \cmd\doauthor\ hook on each author.
+%
+% The third argument of \cmd\doauthor\ fulfills the requirement that it 
+% queue up a boolean via \cmd\aftergroup. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@present@group#1#2#3{%
+  \gdef\comma@space{\gdef\comma@space{\textsuperscript{,\,}}}%
+  \doauthor{#2}{#3}{\@affil@present@group}%
+  \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+}%
+\def\@affil@present@group{%
+ \aftergroup\false@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs@produce}
+%  PACS, keywords and dates.
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{PACS boxed to width of abstract}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Separate option now controls production}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Warn if no production}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pacs@produce#1{%
+ \showPACS@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \frontmatter@PACS@format
+   \@pacs@name#1\par
+  \endgroup
+ }{%
+  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+   \class@warn{\PACS@warn}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\PACS@warn{If you want your PACS to appear in your output, use document class option showpacs}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywords@produce}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Keywords on same footing as PACS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@keywords@produce#1{%
+ \showKEYS@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \frontmatter@keys@format
+   \@keys@name#1\par
+  \endgroup
+ }{%
+  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+   \class@warn{If you want your keywords to appear in your output, use document class option showkeys}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote}
+% Produce any footnotes to appear at the bottom of the title page.
+% 
+% If frontmatter footnotes have been redirected to the bibliography, this will be a no-op.
+% ref.: \cmd\present@bibnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote{%
+ \let\@TBN@opr\present@FM@footnote
+ \@FMN@list
+ \global\let\@FMN@list\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\present@FM@footnote#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+  \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+  \def\@thefnmark{\frontmatter@thefootnote}%
+  \frontmatter@footnotetext{#2}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \section{Package defaults} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title@column}
+% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\collaboration@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@output@MVL}
+% \begin{macro}{\comma@space}
+% We give meanings to the Booleans and other macros that a client document class would 
+% set on our behalf. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter@init{%
+ \@ifxundefined\title@column         {\let\title@column\@empty}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\preprintsty@sw       {\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\frontmatter@footnote@produce{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\do@output@MVL        {\let\do@output@MVL\@firstofone}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\comma@space          {\let\comma@space\@empty}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@thefootnote}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% In the title block, the footnote symbol (used for alternate affiliation and sundry)
+% is a \cmd\@fnsymbol\ or a lowercase letter, as selected by a boolean.
+% The society or journal may override this definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@thefootnote{%
+ \altaffilletter@sw{\@alph}{\@fnsymbol}{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+\@ifx{\altaffilletter@sw\@undefined}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
+% The default procedure for setting the footnote mark within the frontmatter.
+% A client may override this procedure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefntext}
+% This procedure is used when setting footnotes within the title block.
+%
+% Note that we are \classname{hyperref} friendly: we invoke \cmd\Hy@raisedlink\ 
+% so that this footnote becomes a hypertext anchor. If \classname{hyperref} is
+% not loaded, then \classname{ltxutil} has our act covered via some stubs.
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter@makefntext#1{%
+ \parindent 1em
+ \noindent
+ \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper@anchorend}%
+ \@makefnmark
+ #1%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% The default type specification for the title page.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAPformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\punct@RRAP}
+% \begin{macro}{\produce@RRAP}
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter@RRAPformat\ is the formatting procedure
+% for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+% The macro \cmd\punct@RRAP\ produces the punctuation between the entries.
+% Clients will override these two definitions.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\produce@RRAP\ is fairly general, and should be used by most
+% journal substyles.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter@RRAP@format\ will be overridden by the journal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAPformat#1{%
+ \removelastskip
+ \begingroup
+  \frontmatter@RRAP@format
+  #1\par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{; }%
+\def\produce@RRAP#1{%
+  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+   \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{\unskip\punct@RRAP\ignorespaces}%
+   #1%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% The default type specification for the author list.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% For one alternative, see the \classname{revtex4} document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above an affiliation group
+% (in a \cmd\affils@present@group\ production).
+% Clients will override this definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
+% The \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress}
+% style, and \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% For one alternative, see the \classname{revtex4} document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% The default type specification for the affiliation.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% For one alternative, see the \classname{revtex4} document class, where
+% several alternative definitions are made.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\itshape\selectfont}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% The default type specification for the dates.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
+% Specify the formatting of the title page PACS statement.
+%
+% Journals will override.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
+% Specify the formatting of the title page keywords statement.
+%
+% Journals will override.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@finalspace}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@finalspace{\addvspace{18\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@addressnewline}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{new hook}
+% The definition of \cmd\\\ for address handling. Default puts all the `lines'
+% on a run-in line, separated by comma and space.
+% DPC:  was \newline space between lines of addresss.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@addressnewline{%
+  \@ifhmode{\skip@\lastskip\unskip\unpenalty\break\hskip\skip@}{}%
+  % was: \vskip-.5ex
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{5.5\p@}
+\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{6.5\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aftermaketitle@chk}
+% Error-checking code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aftermaketitle@chk#1{%
+  \@ifx{\maketitle\relax}{%
+    \class@err{\protect#1 must be used before \protect\maketitle}%
+  }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
+% Default page style for title page.
+% Journals will override this procedure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@titlepage{\ps@empty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%FIXME: there is a limitation to the default meaning of 
+% \cmd\@startpage: the label ``FirstPage'' is only
+% defined if the document has a \cmd\maketitle\ command.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\volumeyear#1{\gdef\@volumeyear{#1}}%
+\def\@volumeyear{}%
+\def\volumenumber#1{\gdef\@volumenumber{#1}}%
+\def\@volumenumber{}%
+\def\issuenumber#1{\gdef\@issuenumber{#1}}%
+\def\@issuenumber{}%
+\def\eid#1{\gdef\@eid{#1}}%
+\def\@eid{}%
+%
+\def\startpage#1{\gdef\@startpage{#1}\c@page#1\relax}%
+\def\@startpage{\pageref{FirstPage}}%
+\def\endpage#1{\gdef\@endpage{#1}}%
+\def\@endpage{\pageref{LastPage}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Printing out the ``list-of'' elements}%
+%
+% FIXME: The \cmd\appendix@toc\ procedure should change the meaning
+% of \cmd\l@section\ so that the \cmd\section s can be appropriately formatted,
+% reflecting their status as appendices.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\print@toc#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \expandafter\section
+  \expandafter*%
+  \expandafter{%
+              \csname#1name\endcsname
+              }%
+  \let\appendix\appendix@toc
+  \@starttoc{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\appendix@toc{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Dated@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Received@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Revised@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Accepted@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Published@name}
+% These strings are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Dated@name{Dated }%
+\def\Received@name{Received }%
+\def\Revised@name{Revised }%
+\def\Accepted@name{Accepted }%
+\def\Published@name{Published }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 539) Robustify \cs{class@warn} against TOC processing}%
+% Two commands require robustifying against harsh treatment when TOC entries are written out.
+% Note that \cmd\class@warn\ is not user-level markup, but crops up when 
+% the \cmd\title\ command is missing from the document. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\robustify@contents{%
+ \let\thanks\@gobble\let\class@warn\@gobble
+ \def\begin{\string\begin}\def\end{\string\end}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Syntax switch}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%
+% Shall we take over the syntax of \LaTeX? 
+% By default, Yes, unless the Boolean below has already been defined. 
+% In the package version, this is controlled by an option;
+% in the kernel version, the Boolean remains undefined.
+%
+% \cmd\maketitle\ presents a complication. If this code will execute under 
+% \classname{ltxgrid}, then its version of the procedure will do fine.
+%
+% As a package, under \classname{article}, things are different.
+% In this case, what should be done depends upon \cmd\if@titlepage.
+% If true, then just execute \cmd\maketitle\ as it stands.
+% If false, then the \classname{article} class has defined its wrapper
+% procedure, and we should take over the meaning of \cmd\@maketitle\ instead.
+%
+% Here is a list of the commands defined by this package that potentially override
+% those of standard \LaTeX:
+% \cmd\frontmatter@title,
+% \cmd\frontmatter@author,
+% \cmd\frontmatter@and,
+% \cmd\frontmatter@thanks,
+% \cmd\frontmatter@date,
+% \env{frontmatter@abstract},
+% \env{frontmatter@titlepage},
+% \cmd\frontmatter@maketitle.
+%
+% The following code will perform that override, given the appropriate state of the Boolean.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifxundefined\frontmatter@syntax@sw{\@booleantrue\frontmatter@syntax@sw}{}%
+\frontmatter@syntax@sw{%
+ \let\title         \frontmatter@title
+ \let\author        \frontmatter@author
+ \let\date          \frontmatter@date
+ \@ifxundefined\@maketitle{%
+  \let\maketitle    \frontmatter@maketitle
+  \@booleantrue     \titlepage@sw
+ }{%
+  \let\@maketitle   \frontmatter@maketitle
+  \prepdef\maketitle\@author@finish
+ }%
+ \let\noaffiliation \frontmatter@noaffiliation
+ \let\thanks@latex  \thanks
+ \let\thanks        \frontmatter@thanks
+ \let\and@latex     \and
+ \let\and           \frontmatter@and
+ \let@environment{titlepage}{frontmatter@titlepage}%
+ \let@environment{abstract}{frontmatter@abstract}%
+}{%
+ \let\noaffiliation\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{ltxfront} kernel}
+% The kernel portion of the \classname{ltxfront} package is complete.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Remainder of the \classname{ltxfront} package}
+%
+% Include any code here that ought to be incorporated into the package,
+% but should not be part of the kernel.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define formatting as like as possible to the article class.
+% Comands that prepare for \cmd\maketitle: \cmd\author, \cmd\title, \cmd\date.
+%
+% Argument of the above three may contain \cmd\\ and \cmd\thanks; argument of \cmd\author may contain \cmd\and.
+% The \cmd\\ may still work fine; \cmd\and\ will be ignored (warning); 
+% \cmd\thanks\ even though it should not reside in the argument, will work.
+%
+% An explicit \cmd\footnote should be treated as if it were \cmd\thanks.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@maketitle: \frontmatter@footnote@produce
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thanks@latex#1{%
+ \footnotemark
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\gappdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\@thanks
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\footnotetext
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter[%
+ \expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]{#1}}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw
+\@if@sw\if@titlepage\fi{\@booleantrue}{\@booleanfalse}\titlepage@sw
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\newpage\null\vskip2em\relax}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{\centering\LARGE\let\thanks\thanks@latex}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\vskip1.5em\relax}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{\centering\large\advance\baselineskip\p@\parskip11.5\p@\let\thanks\thanks@latex\let\and\and@space}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{\vskip 1em\relax}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}%
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\centering\itshape}%
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{\centering\large}%
+\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{1.5em}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter@footnotetext{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\footnotetext
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter[%
+ \expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]%
+}%
+\def\and@space{\\}%
+\def\andname{and}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Implement the feature of the article class whereby there is a default \cmd\@date, left over 
+% from the \LaTeX\ kernel.
+% This package does not have a default date. The user must put in an explicit command, like
+% \cmd\date\arg{\cmd\today}, which will retore \LaTeX's default behavior.
+%
+% What if the abstract environment falls after the \cmd\maketitle\ command?
+% The environment will be undefined; the user will have to deal with this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of the package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxgrid.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxgrid.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e391f9f2eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxgrid.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,6802 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 109
+% ltxgrid.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxgrid.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    ltxgrid.sty, ltxgrid.pdf
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex ltxgrid.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex ltxgrid.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxgrid
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxgrid.gls ltxgrid.glo
+%       pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxgrid.idx
+%       pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from ltxgrid.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README-LTXGRID.tex.
+
+License
+   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+   
+   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
+   without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY 
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+  %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+  \file{ltxgrid.sty}{%
+   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+  }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    ltxgrid.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run ltxgrid.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxgrid.dtx}\CheckSum{5898}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "ltxgrid.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.2c",
+%%%     date            = "2019/01/18",
+%%%     time            = "14:29:48 UT-5",
+%%%     checksum        = "5462",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "package to change page grid, MVL",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README-LTXGRID} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-LTXGRID}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README-LTXGRID}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxgrid.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the installer.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README-LTXGRID   ltxgrid.ins
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxgrid.ins}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.aux ltxgrid.idx ltxgrid.ind ltxgrid.log ltxgrid.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</driver|package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxgrid%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% Give credit where due. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2019/01/18/14:29:48 4.2c page grid package (portions licensed from W. E. Baxter web at superscript.com)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{.ins} installer and \file{README-LTXGRID} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\ifx\package@font\@undefined\else
+% \expandafter\expandafter
+% \expandafter\RequirePackage
+% \expandafter\expandafter
+% \expandafter{%
+%              \csname package@font\endcsname
+%             }%
+%\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxgrid
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxgrid.gls ltxgrid.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README-LTXGRID}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package for changing the page grid and MVL%
+ \thanks{%
+  This file has version number \fileversion,
+  last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+  Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+  \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the README-LTXGRID file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxgrid} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{journals.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains the REV\TeX\ package, and includes source and documentation for this package.
+
+The \classname{ltxgrid} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License 1.3c,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\ 
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX;
+in a TDS-compliant installation this would be:
+\file{texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{src/ltxgrid.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxgrid.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxgrid.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxgrid.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+this same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxgrid.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxgrid.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxgrid.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex;
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxgrid.sty}.
+
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxgrid.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with the file \file{README-LTXGRID}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX\ twice, then \file{makeindex}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your 
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxgrid.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxgrid.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxgrid.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on directory \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete; 
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxgrid\}} in your document preamble!
+(Note: \texttt{ltxgrid} requires package \texttt{ltxutil}.)
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{marry@height} }
+\changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{set@marry@height} }
+\changes{4.0a}{2008/06/26 }{\cs{@yfloat}: de-fang \cs{set@footnotewidth} (see ltxutil.dtx): we have already done its job. }
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT@array@new}: restore \cs{@tabularcr} and \cs{@xtabularcr}}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT@array@new}: set \cs{LT@LL@FM@cr} to \cs{@arraycr@array} instead of \cs{@arraycr}}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Repair error in \cs{endlongtable@new} involving \cs{@ifx}: argument not delimited.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Get rid of the \cs{reserved@a} idiom}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Turn off the \cs{set@footnotewidth} mechanism; a float `knows' its proper typesetting context}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 452) Support length checking: show size of shipped out text.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 456) Compatibility with other packages that override the output routine, following suggestion by David Kastrup.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Box \cs{footbox} changed to box \cs{footsofar}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@iffpsbit} replaces \cs{@getfpsbit}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output@combined@page}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace@box}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@head} headpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{balance@2} defined more transparently}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Tally the height of the float}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{document@inithook} instead of \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{trace@box} instead of \cs{showbox}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Prevent line numbering within a footnote}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/14}{(AO, 519) \cs{footins} content must be preserved and reintegrated}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 519) Preserve footnotes that are in \cs{footsofar} across a page grid change}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 531) Fix package \classname{float} }
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{Restore the \cs{lastbox} if it is not a footnote}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/18}{(AO, 571) Deconstruct balanced footnotes when needed}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Footnotes, when columns are balanced or when they are composed with their column}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Abandon \cs{recover@footins} in favor of \cs{recover@column}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Use procedures \cs{output@do@prep} and \cs{output@column@do} as dispatchers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) footnote rule is leaders, so that it may be removed by \cs{vsplit}; mechanism of \cs{kern} signals to indicate footnote height}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 576) Allow \classname{lscape} to act on \cs{@outputbox} at the right time}%
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide setup code also for footnotes in a one-column document}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2018/12/12}{(MD) Updated name of README file and use standard fonts when typesetting}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\def\revtex{REV\TeX}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxgrid}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxgrid}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Note that this package requires the features of the \classname{ltxutil} package,
+% available at
+% \url{publish.aps.org/revtex}.
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment, but not at the document level.
+% 
+% \subsection{Changing the page grid}%
+% This package provides two procedures, \cmd\onecolumngrid, \cmd\twocolumngrid,
+% that change the page grid (it can be extended to more columns and to other page grids).
+%
+% They differ from standard \LaTeX's \cmd\onecolumn\ and \cmd\twocolumn\ commands in that
+% they do not force a page break. Also, upon leaving a multiple-column grid, the columns are balanced.
+% In other respects they work same.
+%
+% They differ from the grid-changing commands of Frank Mittelbach's \classname{multicol} package
+% in that they allow floats of all types (single- and double column floats, that is) and
+% preserve compatability with the \classname{longtable} package.
+% 
+% These commands must be issued in vertical mode (conceivably via a \cmd\vadjust) such that
+% they are ultimately present in the MVL, where they can do their work.
+% Because they do not work in \LaTeX's left-right mode, they are unsuitable at the 
+% document level.
+% Furthermore, packaging a grid command in a \cmd\vadjust, although possible, will probably 
+% not acheive satisfactory page layout.
+%
+% Page grid commands are not intended to be issued unnecessarily: only the first of
+% two successive \cmd\onecolumngrid\ commands is effective; the second will be silently ignored.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\onecolumngrid
+% You command \LaTeX\ to return to the one-column grid with the
+% \cmd\onecolumngrid\ command. If you are already in the one-column grid, this
+% is a no-op. The one-column grid is considered special of all page grids, in that
+% no portion of the page is held back (in \cmd\pagesofar); all items that might go
+% on the current page (with the exception of floats and footnotes) are on the MVL.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\twocolumngrid
+% You command \LaTeX\ to return to the two-column grid with the
+% \cmd\twocolumngrid\ command. If you are already in the two-column grid, this
+% is a no-op.
+% 
+% These two commands should be issued by a macro procedure that can ensure that 
+% \TeX\ is in outer vertical mode. 
+% 
+% \subsection{Changing the MVL}%
+%
+% This package also provides commands to modify the main vertical list (MVL) in a safe way.
+% The scheme here is to structure, insofar possible, \TeX's MVL as follows:
+%\begin{quotation}
+%box or boxes\\
+%penalty\\
+%glue
+%\end{quotation}
+% This should be a familiar sequence. It is the prototype sequence for a vertical list,
+% and is followed when \TeX\ breaks paragraphs into lines, and when \TeX\ generates 
+% a display math equation.
+%
+% If you (as a macro programmer) wish to modify the value of the penalty or glue item, 
+% you can use one of the MVL-altering commands to do so. Certain operations are implemented
+% here; you can make up your own.
+% 
+% Note that these commands must be issued in vertical mode, perhaps via a \cmd\vadjust\ or a \cmd\noalign.
+% They can work directly if you are in inner mode (say within a parbox or a minipage).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\removestuff
+% You instruct \LaTeX\ to remove both the penalty and the glue item with this command.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\addstuff
+% You issue the \cmd\addstuff\arg{penalty}\arg{glue} command to add a penalty, glue, or both.
+% If you do not wish to add one or the other, the corresponding argument should be nil.
+% Note that the effect of \cmd\addstuff\ is to stack the penalties and glue items.
+% Therefore, the lesser of the two penalties takes effect,
+% and the two glue items add together. 
+%
+% \cmd\addstuff\ is limited because once applied, it cannot be applied again with correct results.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\replacestuff
+% The \cmd\replacestuff\ command is syntactically the same as \cmd\addstuff, but works
+% differently: the existing penalty and glue are replaced or modified.
+%
+% The specified penalty is not inserted if the existing penalty is greater than 10000
+% (that is, in case of a \cmd\nobreak), otherwise, the lower (non-zero) of the two penalties is inserted.
+% 
+% If the specified glue has a larger natural component than the existing glue, we replace the glue.
+% However, if the specified glue's natural component is negative, then the existing glue's natural component is 
+% changed by that amount.
+%
+% \cmd\replacestuff\ can be applied mutiple times bceause it retains the list structure in the canonical form.
+%
+% Note that we treat two penalties specially (as does \TeX): a penalty of 10000 is considered 
+% a garbage value, to be replaced if found. This is the signal value that \TeX\ inserts on
+% the MVL replacing the penalty that caused the page break (if the page break occurred at a penalty).
+% Also, a penalty of zero is indistinguishable from no penalty at all, so it will always 
+% be replaced by the given value.
+%
+% Therefore, it is highly recommended to never set any of \TeX's penalty parameters to 
+% zero (a value of, say, 1, is practically the same), nor should a skip parameter be set to zero
+% (instead, use, say, 1sp). Also, to prevent a pagebreak, do not use a penalty of 10000, use, say
+% 10001 instead.
+%
+% You can define your own construct that modifies the MVL:
+% Define a command, say, \cmd\myadjust, as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\myadjust#1{\noexpand\do@main@vlist{\noexpand\@myadjust{#1}}\@tempa}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% that is, \cmd\myadjust\ invokes \cmd\do@main@vlist, passing it the procedure name
+% \cmd\@myadjust\ along with the arguments thereof pre-expanded.
+% Next,  define the procedure \cmd\@myadjust:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@myadjust#1{<meddle with the MVL>}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% when \cmd\@myadjust\ executes, you will be in the output routine (in inner vertical mode)
+% and the MVL will be that very vertical list.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatability with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the 
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% Compatability between \classname{ltxgrid} and these packages is complicated
+% by a number of factors. First is that \classname{ltxgrid} alters the meaning of some of the same
+% kernel macros as certain of the ``required'' packages.
+% Second is that fact that certain of the ``required'' packages of \LaTeX\ are incompatible with 
+% each other.
+%
+% Examples of the first kind are the \classname{ftnright}, \classname{multicol}, and \classname{longtable} 
+% packages.
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package is not compatible with \classname{multicol},
+% but if you are using \classname{ltxgrid}, you do not need to use \classname{ftnright} or \classname{multicol}
+% anyway. The \classname{ltxgrid} package does however attempt to be compatible with \classname{longtable}.
+%
+% Among the ``required'' packages that are mutually incompatible are \classname{multicol} and \classname{longtable},
+% the incompatibility arising because both packages replace \LaTeX's output routine:
+% if one package is active, the other must not be so.
+% This state of affairs has remained essentially unchanged since the introduction of the two as \LaTeX2.09 packages in the late 1980s.
+%
+% The reason that \classname{ltxgrid} can remain compatible with \classname{longtable} is due to the
+% introduction of a more modern architecture, the ``output routine dispatcher'', which allows all macro packages access to the
+% safe processing environment of the output routine, on an equal footing.
+% The relevant portions of the \classname{longtable} package are reimplemented in \classname{ltxgrid}
+% to take advantage of this mechanism.
+%
+% Timing is critical:
+% the \classname{ltxgrid} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxgrid} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+% \subsection{ftnright}
+% Frank Mittelbach's \classname{ftnright} package effects a change to \LaTeX's
+% \cmd\twocolumn\ mode such that footnotes are set at the bottom of the right-hand
+% column instead of at the foot of each of the two columns.
+%
+% Note that it overwrites three \LaTeX\ kernel macros: \cmd\@outputdblcol, \cmd\@startcolumn, and \cmd\@makecolumn.
+% Fortunately none of the three are patched by \classname{ltxgrid}, so that compatability
+% is not excluded on this basis.
+%
+% At the same time, it changes the meaning of \cmd\footnotesize, the macro that is automatically 
+% invoked when setting a document's footnote into type.
+% One might well argue that it is an error for the meaning of \cmd\footnotesize\ to be determined by 
+% a package such as \classname{ftnright}, that indeed such a choice should be made in the 
+% document class, or in a file such as \file{bk10.clo}.
+%
+% To avoid being tripped up by this misfeature in \classname{ftnright}, it is only necessary to 
+% reassert our meaning for \cmd\footnotesize\ later on, after \classname{ftnright} has been loaded.
+%
+% Note that \classname{ftnright} inserts code that demands that \LaTeX's flag \cmd\if@twocolumn\
+% is true, that is, it will complain if deployed in a \cmd\onecolumn\ document.
+% It is therefore necessary for any other multicolumn package to assert that flag in order to
+% avoid this package's complaint. It is an interesting question exactly why this package has
+% this limitation. After all, a one-column page grid is just a degenerate case of the
+% two column.
+%
+% \subsection{longtable}
+% David Carlisle's \classname{longtable} package sets tables that can be so long as to break over pages.
+% According to its author, it uses the same override of \LaTeX's output routine as
+% Frank Mittelbach's \classname{multicol} package. By implication, then, it has a hard
+% incompatability with the latter.
+% 
+% The \classname{longtable} package also performs a check of whether the document is in 
+% \cmd\twocolumn\ mode, and declines to work if this is the case. It is not clear, however,
+% that there is any true incompatability present if so. It's just that David did not see any reason
+% anyone would want to set such long tables in a multicolumn document, hence the check.
+%
+% There does not appear to be any indication that \classname{longtable} would work less 
+% well under \classname{ltxgrid} than under standard \LaTeX's \cmd\twocolumn\ mode.
+% Therefore, this \classname{ltxgrid} patches \classname{longtable} (if loaded) so as to provide
+% compatability. In the course of which, \classname{longtable} becomes more robust
+% (\classname{longtable} has mumerous bugs and incompatabilities of long standing,
+% some of which are repaired by \classname{ltxgrid}).
+%
+% One problem remains, namely that, if a \env{longtable} environment breaks over columns
+% and thereby inserts its special headers and footers at that break, and those columms are then
+% balanced (due to a return to the one-column page grid), then those inserted rows
+% will remain, and may no longer fall at the column break. This will, of course look
+% wrong.
+%
+% The only way to fix this problem is to avoid doing column balancing in the way 
+% I have implemented here; such an enhancement to this package is possible.
+%
+% \subsection{multicol}
+% Frank Mittelbach's \classname{multicol} package provides a page grid with many columns,
+% albeit denies the placement of floats in individual columns.
+%
+% It establishes its own \cmd\output\ routine, which is the reason it runs afoul of 
+% the \classname{longtable} package. On the other hand, \classname{ltxgrid} specifically
+% allows for the case where a package installs its own \cmd\output\ routine, so 
+% there is no incompatability on that basis.
+%
+% Still, it is pointless to use \classname{multicol} if you are using \classname{ltxgrid},
+% since both packages provide multicolumn page layouts.
+% Therefore, \classname{multicol} is not supported by \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+% \subsection{ltxgrid}
+% It has been pointed out that one of the disadvantages of adopting the \classname{ltxgrid} package is that 
+% it does alter the \LaTeX\ kernel. 
+% Any package that itself alters the \LaTeX\ kernel may be incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, and new packages
+% (destined perhaps to become part of the successor to \LaTeXe) may break \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+% The consequence is that packages introduced in future, and future changes to \LaTeX\ may be incompatible 
+% with \classname{ltxgrid}. 
+% This is, of course, true.
+% The development plan for \classname{ltxgrid} is that when such packages and \LaTeX\ kernel changes come about,
+% the burden will be on \classname{ltxgrid} to change in a way that provides for continued compatability with
+% those packages and \LaTeX\ kernel changes.
+% 
+%
+% \section{How \classname{ltxgrid} places footnotes}
+%
+% In conventional multicolumn layouts, a footnote will appear at the bottom of the column in which it is called out. 
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package implements this conventional layout choice by default.
+% However, other choices are possible (a la \classname{ftnright}, whose compatability with \classname{ltxgrid} has not been tested).
+%
+% One unusual feature of \classname{ltxgrid}'s default implementation must be mentioned, though,
+% namely the case in a two-column page grid, where a footnote is followed by a temporary change to the one-column page grid
+% (e.g., for a wide equation).
+% In such a case, the material above the wide material is split into two columns, and a footnote whose callout 
+% appears in the right-hand column will nonetheless be set at the base of the left column.
+%
+% This arrangement was chosen because it ensures that the footnotes at the bottom of any page will appear in 
+% numerical order. It can be argued that this choice is ``incorrect'', but be that as it may,
+% the \classname{ltxgrid} package does not foreclose on other arrangements for the footnotes.
+% The package can be adapted to accomodate any page design desired.
+%
+% \section{Limitations in \classname{ltxgrid}'s default column balancing method}%
+%
+% In a multicolumn page grid, when encountering a page that is not completely full,
+% it is customary to set the material in balanced columns (typically with the last column no longer than any of the others).
+% Such a case also crops up when temporarily interrupting the multicolumn grid to set material on the full width of the page:
+% the material on the page above the break is customarily set in balanced columns.
+%
+% An awkward case arises when we have already set one or more complete columns of type before encountering the need to 
+% balance columns. In this subset of cases, the default in \classname{ltxgrid} is to 
+% do an operation I call ``re-balancing'':
+% the material on the page so far is pasted back together into a single column, and new, balanced column breaks are
+% calculated.
+%
+% This scheme typically works fine, but it has a significant vulnerability:
+% any discardable items trimmed at the original column break are lost, never to be retrieved.
+% Consequently, after re-balancing, an element like, say, a section head can fail to have the correct amount of whitespace above.
+%
+% This problem is due to an unfortunate optimization in \TeX, wherein a certain class of nodes is trimmed from the 
+% top of main vertical list upon returning from the output routine:
+% any penalty, glue, or leader node falls in to this class of discardable nodes,
+% and trimming proceeds until a non-discardable node (such as a box, or rule) is encountered.
+% It gets better: a third class of nodes is transparent to this trimming process;
+% they are neither discarded nor do they halt the process of trimming:
+% mark nodes and all whatsits fall into this class of transparent nodes;
+% they are quietly passed over during trimming.
+%
+% An alternative approach for \TeX\ to take would have been, 
+% rather than discarding the node entirely, to simply \emph{mark} it as discarded.
+% (Implementors of extended \TeX, please note!)
+% Then, upon shipping out, such nodes would not make it into the DVI.
+% \TeX's optimization, driven by the small computer architectures current when it was developed,
+% does save mem, but at the cost of revisiting page breaks in a reliable way.
+%
+% FIXME: how to fix a column break in the above case? Widetext?
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission. His thorough understanding
+% of \TeX's output routine underpins the entire \classname{ltxgrid}
+% package.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{ltxgrid} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Requires the underpinnings of the \classname{ltxkrnext} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package@name{ltxgrid}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package@name}{%
+ Page grid for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Banner}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Sundry}%
+% Here are assorted macro definitions.
+% \begin{macro}{\lineloop}
+% \begin{macro}{\linefoot}
+% The (document-level) command \cmd\lineloop\ sets numbered lines until the 
+% specified count is reached. 
+% The command \cmd\linefoot\ sets a single, automatically numbered line, but with a footnote (with the specified label);
+% it automatically increments the line counter.
+% These commands are typically used to construct test documents. 
+%
+% Because the counter is globally advanced and never reset, successive 
+% calls to \cmd\lineloop\ should have an argument ever larger.
+% The formatted output will have each line labeled with its ordinal number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{linecount}
+\def\loop@line#1#2{%
+ \par
+ \hb@xt@\hsize{%
+  \global\advance#1\@ne
+  \edef\@tempa{\@ifnum{100>#1}{0}{}\@ifnum{10>#1}{0}{}\number#1}%
+  \@tempa\edef\@tempa{\special{line:\@tempa}}\@tempa
+  \vrule depth2.5\p@#2\leaders\hrule\hfil
+ }%
+}%
+\def\lineloop#1{%
+ \loopwhile{\loop@line\c@linecount{}\@ifnum{#1>\c@linecount}}%
+}%
+\def\linefoot#1{%
+ \loop@line\c@linecount{%
+  \footnote{%
+   #1\special{foot:#1}\vrule depth2.5\p@\leaders\hrule\hfill
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mark Components}%
+%
+% Override LaTeX's mark macros to allow more components.
+%
+% We remain bound by the weakness of LaTeX's scheme in that
+% one cannot emulate the action of \TeX\ whereby
+% material with marks can be inserted in the middle of
+% a vertical list such that the marks are reliably calculated.
+% If we did that, \cmd\@themark\ would no longer be utilized.
+%
+% A more robust scheme involves placing all marks (component and value)
+% into a list (using global scoping, i.e., \cmd\gdef),
+% and using \cmd\@@mark to place an index on that list into the MVL.
+% Then, e.g., \cmd\@@botmark signifies the place where that list is to be cut,
+% and the \cmd\botmark\ of any component is
+% the value of the last element of the cut
+% list having the given component. The \cmd\firstmark\ and \cmd\topmark\
+% can likewise be defined relative to \cmd\@@firstmark\ and \cmd\@@topmark,
+% except in the latter case, we want the first following the cut instead of the last
+% preceding the cut.
+%
+% The limitation of this scheme is its demands upon \TeX's mem.
+% The list of marks would need to be trimmed back to, effectively,
+% \cmd\topmark\ at the beginning of every page.
+% 
+% This approach is not yet part of the extended LaTeX kernel.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@mark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@topmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@firstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@botmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@splitfirstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@splitbotmark}
+% Remember primitives under a new set of names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@mark\mark
+\let\@@topmark\topmark
+\let\@@firstmark\firstmark
+\let\@@botmark\botmark
+\let\@@splitfirstmark\splitfirstmark
+\let\@@splitbotmark\splitbotmark
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures that expose the component data structure}%
+% This portion of the code exposes the internal representation of 
+% the mark components. If we wish to add more components, we will have to revise
+% these macro definitions:
+% \cmd\@themark,
+% \cmd\nul@mark,
+% \cmd\set@mark@netw@,
+% \cmd\set@marktw@,
+% \cmd\set@markthr@@,
+% \cmd\get@mark@@ne,
+% \cmd\get@mark@tw@,
+% \cmd\get@mark@thr@@,
+% \cmd\get@mark@f@ur.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@themark}
+%FIXME: is it safer to eliminate \cmd\@themark\ in favor of a message that evaluates \cmd\@@botmark?
+%
+% Note: these definitions expose the data structure of mark components.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@themark{{}{}{}{}}%
+\def\nul@mark{{}{}{}{}\@@nul}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@mark@netw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@marktw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@markthr@@}
+% These procedures insert the new value of a particular mark component into the given argument.
+% They expose the data structure of mark components.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@mark@netw@#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{\gdef#1{{#6}{#7}{#4}{#5}}\do@mark}%
+\def\set@marktw@#1#2#3#4#5#6{\gdef#1{{#2}{#6}{#4}{#5}}\do@mark}%
+\def\set@markthr@@#1#2#3#4#5#6{\gdef#1{{#2}{#3}{#6}{#5}}\do@mark}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\get@mark@@ne}
+% \begin{macro}{\get@mark@tw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\get@mark@thr@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\get@mark@f@ur}
+% These procedures retreive the value of a particular mark component.
+% They expose the data structure of mark components.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\get@mark@@ne#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#1}%
+\def\get@mark@tw@#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#2}%
+\def\get@mark@thr@@#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#3}%
+\def\get@mark@f@ur#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#4}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures that do not expose the component data structure}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mark@netw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\marktw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\markthr@@}
+% These procedures insert the new value of a particular mark component into \cmd\@themark,
+% then execute \cmd\do@mark. 
+% They constitute the implementation layer for mark components one, two, and three.
+% An analogous procedure for component four could be defined; call it \cmd\markf@ur.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mark@netw@{\expandafter\set@mark@netw@\expandafter\@themark\@themark}%
+\def\marktw@{\expandafter\set@marktw@\expandafter\@themark\@themark}%
+\def\markthr@@{\expandafter\set@markthr@@\expandafter\@themark\@themark}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mark}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@@mark}
+% Access procedures \cmd\mark (AKA \cmd\@@mark).
+% The \cmd\do@mark\ procedure is used when a mark is being put down into the MVL;
+% \cmd\do@@mark\ when this happens in the output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@mark{\do@@mark\@themark\nobreak@mark}%
+\def\do@@mark#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \let@mark
+  \@@mark{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\let@mark}
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreak@mark}%
+% The procedure that makes \cmd\csname s robust within a mark.
+% Use \cmd\appdef\ and \cmd\robust@\ to extend the list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\let@mark{%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \let\label\relax
+ \let\index\relax
+ \let\glossary\relax
+}%
+\def\nobreak@mark{%
+ \@if@sw\if@nobreak\fi{\@ifvmode{\nobreak}{}}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Using mark components}%
+%
+% These procedures use the component mark mechanism to implement
+% a mark component that remembers the current environment (used in page makeup)
+% and the the two mark components left over from the original \LaTeX.
+% The fourth component is presently unused.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mark@envir}
+% The third mark component's access procedures.
+% The \cmd\mark@envir\ and \cmd\bot@envir\ commands are a good model of how to write 
+% access procedures for a new mark component.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mark@envir{\markthr@@}%
+\def\bot@envir{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\get@mark@thr@@
+ \expandafter\@@botmark
+             \nul@mark
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\markright}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightmark}
+% Set procedures for legacy components.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\markboth{\mark@netw@}%
+\def\markright{\marktw@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Retrieval procedures for legacy mark components.
+% The procedure for retrieving the first component from \cmd\botmark\ 
+% and the second component from \cmd\firstmark have names in \LaTeX;
+% they are called, respectively, \cmd\leftmark\ and \cmd\rightmark.
+%
+% It is possible to retrieve the components of \cmd\topmark\
+% as well: use \cmd\saved@@topmark.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftmark{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\get@mark@@ne
+ \expandafter\saved@@botmark
+             \nul@mark
+}%
+\def\rightmark{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\get@mark@tw@
+ \expandafter\saved@@firstmark
+             \nul@mark
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Output Super-routine}%
+%
+% We want to change \LaTeX's output routine, but do not wish to remain vulnerable
+% to interference from such ``required'' packages as
+% \classname{multicol} (authored by Frank Mittelbach)
+% and \classname{longtable} (authored by David P. Carlisle), which 
+% swap in their own output routines when the respective package is active.
+%
+% The better mechanism, used here, is due to William Baxter (web at superscript.com),
+% who has allowed his several ideas to be used in this package.
+%
+% In what follows, we effectively wrap up the old \LaTeX\ output routine inside
+% a new, more flexible ``super routine''. When the output routine is called,
+% the ``super routine'' acts as a dispatcher. If the old routine is needed, it is called.
+%
+% If a package attempts to substitute in their own output routine, they will effectively
+% be modifying a token register by the name of \cmd\output.
+% The primitive \cmd\output\ is now known by a different name, which should no longer be
+% necessary to use.
+%
+% Usage note: to make a visit to the output routine employing the dispatcher, enter
+% with a value of \cmd\outputpenalty\ that corresponds to a macro. Defining as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\@namedef{output@10000}{<your code here>}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% by convention, your output routine should void out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% In rewriting \LaTeX's output dispatcher
+% in a much simpler form, we also avoid the sin of multiple \cmd\shipout s
+% within a single visit to the output routine.
+%
+% Conceptually, we divide visits to the output routine into two classes.
+% The first involves natural page breaks
+% (at a \cmd\newpage\ or when \cmd\pagetotal $>$ \cmd\pagegoal)
+% and usually resulting in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ either being shipped out or
+% salted away (e.g., each column in a multicolumn layout).
+% We might call this class the ``natural output routines''; the \cmd\outputpenalty\
+% will never be less than $-10000$.
+% Furthermore, we ensure that \cmd\holdinginserts\ is cleared when 
+% calling such routines.
+%
+% The other class involves a forced visit to the output routine
+% via a large negative penalty ($< -10000$). They do not generally
+% result in a \cmd\shipout\ of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv: they may be dead cycles.
+% We provide a mechanism (call it a ``one-off'' output routine) that allows
+% us to specify certain processing to be done when \TeX\ reaches
+% the current position on the page.
+%
+% One-off output routines themselves fall into two divisions, ones
+% that process \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and ones that work on the main vertical list (MVL).
+% The former are typified by changes to the page grid, perhaps
+% even column balancing.
+% The latter involve the insertion of penalties or glue and the processing of floats.
+% 
+% The natural output routine is a single procedure. We have not introduced multiple
+% natural output routines based on the \cmd\outputpenalty\ because \TeX\ does not
+% support such a thing: \TeX\ sometimes lays down a penalty whose value is the sum 
+% of other penalties. Because of this, we cannot depend on the value of \cmd\outputpenalty\
+% in such areas.
+%
+% We do introduce flexibility in the form of a mechanism for patching into the
+% natural output routine. Three hooks are offered, allowing a procedure
+% to prepare for the upcoming visit to the output routine,
+% access to \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and after doing \cmd\shipout\ (or otherwise 
+% committing the material to the page).
+%
+% Environments, commands, and even packages can install their
+% own procedures into these hooks.
+% For instance, if the longtable package is loaded, it will install
+% its procedures, but those procedures will punt if the page break 
+% being processed does not actually fall within a longtable environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\primitive@output}
+% Here we remember the \TeX\ primitive \cmd\output\ and its value,
+% and then proceed to take over the \cmd\csname\ of \cmd\output,
+% making it a \cmd\toks\ register and installing the old value of
+% the output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\primitive@output\output
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output@latex}
+% \begin{macro}{\output}
+% Grab the tokens in \cmd\the\cmd\output\ (but without the extra set of braces).
+% The value of \cmd\toks@\ must remain untouched until loaded into the appropriate token 
+% register; this is done a few lines below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@tempa#1\@@nil{#1}%
+            \toks@
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter{%
+\expandafter \@tempa
+             \the\primitive@output
+             \@@nil
+             }%
+\newtoks\output@latex
+\output@latex\expandafter{\the\toks@}%
+\let\output\output@latex
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% A comment on compatibility with other packages that co-opt the output routine.
+%
+% Somewhere on the LaTeX-L list, David Kastrup has urged macro  writers to take over 
+% the output routine in such a way that others can do likewise. How is this to be 
+% accomplished?
+%
+% Consider what the \classname{lineno} package does when it loads.
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  It does \cmd\let\ cmd\@tempa\ \cmd\output. 
+%  This has the effect of identifying \cmd\@tempa\ with the 
+%  \cmd\toks\ register we created above to hold the old output routine of \LaTeX.
+%  Let us say that was \cmd\toks14. 
+% \item
+%  \classname{lineno} itself effectively does \cmd\newtoks\ \cmd\@LN@output, 
+%  which assigns that \cmd\csname\ to \cmd\toks 15.
+% \item
+%  It loads \cmd\@LN@output\ with the contents of \cmd\@tempa 
+%  (that is, \cmd\toks14, our copy of \LaTeX's output routine).
+% \item
+%  Then it loads \cmd\@tempa\ with its own desired procedure, 
+%  to be executed at \cmd\output\ time, thereby taking over what it thinks is the output routine,
+%  but which is in reality the procedure \revtex\ executes when it wants to pass control
+%  to \LaTeX's original output routine.
+% \item
+%  It then does \cmd\let\ \cmd\output\ \cmd\@LN@output, 
+%  which now identifies \cmd\output\ with \cmd\toks15, the output routine of \classname{lineno}.
+% \item
+%  When the \cmd\output\ routine is triggered, 
+%  the primitive output routine \cmd\primitive@output\ is executed, and if 
+%  appropriate, control is passed to \cmd\output@latex, which \revtex\ had loaded with the old
+%  \LaTeX\ output routine, but which is presently loaded with that of \classname{lineno}.
+% \item
+%  The output routine of \classname{lineno} is executed, and if appropriate control is passed
+%  to \cmd\@LN@output, the old output routine of \LaTeX.
+% \item
+%  Furthermore, the \cmd\csname\ \cmd\output\ now points to \cmd\@LN@output\ (\cmd\toks15).
+%  This means that someone coming in after \classname{lineno} to take over the output routine
+%  will actually get executed after that of \classname{lineno}, but before \LaTeX.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% As you can see, the process of taking over the output routine may continue until all of the 
+% \cmd\toks\ registers have been allocated. 
+% If, say, \classname{newpackage} would itself like to take over the output routine,
+% and if it uses the above set of steps, then when the output routine is triggered, the order
+% of execution is \revtex, then \classname{lineno}, then \classname{newpackage}, then \LaTeX.
+% Each new package inserts itself on front of \LaTeX.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dispatch@output}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 456) Compatibility with other packages that override the output routine, following suggestion by David Kastrup.}
+% We now install our own output routine in place of the original 
+% output routine of \LaTeX, which is still available as \cmd\the\ \cmd\output.
+%
+% The output routine is simply the procedure \cmd\dispatch@output.
+% It either dispatches to a procedure based on a particular value of
+% \cmd\outputpenalty\ or it executes \cmd\the\cmd\output@latex\ tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\primitive@output{\dispatch@output}%
+\def\dispatch@output{%
+ \let\par\@@par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Try to interpret \cmd\outputpenalty\ as a dispatcher to a message handler, 
+% its value is, e.g., \cmd\do@startpage@pen.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\output@procedure\csname output@\the\outputpenalty\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we have failed to find a dispatcher, then settle for \cmd\output@latex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnotrelax\output@procedure{}{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\output@procedure\expandafter{\the\output@latex}%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now test if the dispatcher is the special case of \cmd\execute@message@pen, in which case execute the \cmd\@message@saved.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname output@-\the\execute@message@pen\endcsname\output@procedure}{%
+  \let\output@procedure\@message@saved
+ }{}%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\dispatch@output}\say\output@procedure\saythe\holdinginserts}{}%
+ \outputdebug@sw{\output@debug}{}%
+ \output@procedure
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@output@procedure#1#2{%
+ \count@\outputpenalty\advance\count@-#2%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname output@\the\count@\endcsname
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% The following procedure is executed at the beginning of each visit to the output routine, 
+% contingent on the level of diagnostics specified. 
+% However, it bails out when the visit is part of a tight sequence of visits to the output routine. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@debug{%
+ \def\@tempa{\save@message}%
+ \@ifx{\output@procedure\@tempa}{%
+  \true@sw
+ }{%
+  \@ifnum{\outputpenalty=-\save@column@insert@pen}{%
+   \@ifnum{\holdinginserts>\z@}%
+  }{%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+ }%
+ {}{\output@debug@}%
+}%
+\def\output@debug@{%
+%<ignore> 	\saythe\inputlineno
+ 	\saythe\outputpenalty
+ 	\saythe\interlinepenalty
+ 	\saythe\brokenpenalty
+ 	\saythe\clubpenalty
+ 	\saythe\widowpenalty
+ 	\saythe\displaywidowpenalty
+ 	\saythe\predisplaypenalty
+ 	\saythe\interdisplaylinepenalty
+ 	\saythe\postdisplaypenalty
+ 	\saythe\badness
+ 	\say\thepagegrid
+ 	\saythe\pagegrid@col
+ 	\saythe\pagegrid@cur
+%<ignore>  \say\bot@envir
+ 	\saythe\insertpenalties
+%<ignore>  \say\@@topmark
+%<ignore>  \say\saved@@topmark
+%<ignore>  \say\@@firstmark
+%<ignore>  \say\saved@@firstmark
+ 	\say\@@botmark
+%<ignore>  \say\saved@@botmark
+ 	\saythe\pagegoal
+ 	\saythe\pagetotal
+ 	\saythe{\badness\@cclv}%
+ 	\say\@toplist
+ 	\say\@botlist
+ 	\say\@dbltoplist
+ 	\say\@deferlist
+ 	\trace@scroll{%
+ 		\showbox\@cclv
+ 		\showbox\@cclv@saved
+ 		\showbox\pagesofar
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Klootch! The following line provides only for two-column page grid; if debugging more columns, you must
+% add more statements here. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ 		\showbox\csname col@1\endcsname
+ 		\showbox\footsofar
+ 		\showbox\footins
+ 		\showbox\footins@saved
+ 		\showlists
+ 	}%
+}%
+\@ifxundefined{\outputdebug@sw}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\outputdebug@sw
+}{}%
+\def\trace@scroll#1{\begingroup\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen\scrollmode#1\endgroup}%
+\def\trace@box#1{\trace@scroll{\showbox#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@head}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@tail}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@head} headpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% The procedure \cmd\@outputpage\ of standard \LaTeX\ is the sole place where a \cmd\shipout\ is carried out.
+% The procedures that build \cmd\@outputbox\ just before a page is shipped out by \cmd\@outputpage\ are:
+% \cmd\@makecolumn,
+% \cmd\@combinepage, and
+% \cmd\@combinedblfloats.
+%
+% We need to head- and tailpatch this procedure, so we perform here
+% the only modifications to that procedure that are essential.
+% Elsewhere, we will build up the meanings of \cmd\@outputpage@head\ and \cmd\@outputpage@tail.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\@outputpage{\@outputpage@head}%
+\let\@outputpage@head\@empty
+\appdef\@outputpage{\@outputpage@tail}%
+\let\@outputpage@tail\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\show@box@size}
+% \begin{macro}{\show@text@box@size}
+% \begin{macro}{\show@pagesofar@size}
+% \begin{macro}{\show@box@size@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\total@text}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 452) Support length checking: show size of shipped out text.}
+% Procedure \cmd\show@box@size\ is a diagnostic for the sizes of boxes;
+% the boolean \cmd\show@box@size@sw\ turns it on and off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\show@box@size#1#2{%
+ \show@box@size@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy#2\hrule}%
+   \class@info{Show box size: #1^^J%
+    (\the\ht\z@\space X \the\wd\z@) 
+    \the\c@page\space\space\the\pagegrid@cur\space\the\pagegrid@col
+   }%
+  \endgroup
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\show@text@box@size\ tallies the size of the indicated column.
+% If \cmd\box\ \cmd\pagesofar\ is a factor, then its height has been memorized
+% in the depth of the tally box.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\show@text@box@size{%
+ \show@box@size{Text column}\@outputbox
+ \tally@box@size@sw{%
+  \@ifdim{\wd\@outputbox>\z@}{%
+   \dimen@\ht\@outputbox\divide\dimen@\@twopowerfourteen
+   \advance\dimen@-\dp\csname box@size@\the\pagegrid@col\endcsname
+   \@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{%
+    \advance\dimen@ \ht\csname box@size@\the\pagegrid@col\endcsname
+    \global\ht\csname box@size@\the\pagegrid@col\endcsname\dimen@
+    \show@box@size@sw{%
+     \class@info{Column: \the\dimen@}%
+    }{}%
+   }{}%
+  }{}%
+  \global\dp\csname box@size@\the\pagegrid@col\endcsname\z@
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Take the height of \cmd\box\ \cmd\pagesofar\ into account.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\show@pagesofar@size{%
+ \show@box@size{Page so far}\pagesofar
+ \dimen@\ht\pagesofar\divide\dimen@\@twopowerfourteen
+ \global\dp\csname box@size@1\endcsname\dimen@
+ \show@box@size@sw{%
+  \class@info{Pagesofar: \the\dimen@}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\tally@box@size@sw
+\@booleanfalse\show@box@size@sw
+\expandafter\newbox\csname box@size@1\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname box@size@1\endcsname\hbox{}%
+\expandafter\newbox\csname box@size@2\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname box@size@2\endcsname\hbox{}%
+\def\total@text{%
+ \@tempdima\the\ht\csname box@size@2\endcsname\divide\@tempdima\@twopowertwo\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+ \@tempdimb\the\ht\csname box@size@1\endcsname\divide\@tempdimb\@twopowertwo\@tempcntb\@tempdimb
+ \class@info{Total text: Column(\the\@tempcnta pt), Page(\the\@tempcntb pt)}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Further thoughts about inserts}
+%
+% The only safe way to deal with inserts is to either set \cmd\holdininserts\ or
+% to commit to using whatever insert comes your way: you cannot change your mind
+% once you see a non-void \cmd\box\cmd\footins, say.
+%
+% Therefore all output routine processing must proceed with \cmd\holdinginserts\ set
+% until you are sure of the material to be committed to the page. At that point, you
+% can clear \cmd\holdinginserts, spew \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, put down the appropriate penalty, 
+% and exit, with the knowledge that \TeX\ will re-find the same pagebreak, this time 
+% visiting the output routine with everything, including inserts, in their proper 
+% place.
+% This technique applies to split elements (screens, longtable, index) as well as to 
+% manufactured pages (float pages and clearpage pages). 
+%
+% Therefore, the output routine must not make assumptions about whether \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% should be cleared; instead this must be left to the one-off output routines or the natural output routine.
+%
+% If we are manufacturing pages (``float page processing''), and if \cmd\pagegoal\ is not equal to
+% \cmd\vsize, then inserts are at hand, and our criterion should take into account the insert
+% material, even though we cannot measure its height based on the size of \cmd\box\cmd\footins\
+% (because \cmd\holdinginserts\ is set, you see).
+%
+% It would be better to take the complement of \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and use that
+% as a standard for the looseness of the page. Since \cmd\pagegoal\ reflects the inserted material,
+% the criterion becomes the difference of the aggregate height of the floats and the \cmd\pagegoal\
+% versus this "page looseness" standard.
+%
+% As a check, consider what happens if we bail out: \cmd\@deferlist\ has never been touched, so it 
+% requires no attention. Also, \cmd\holdinginserts\ has never been cleared, so inserts require
+% no attention. So we only have to ensure that marks are preserved, which is already taken
+% care of by the message handler mechanism.
+%
+% If we are doing ordinary page cutting, then the scheme would be to detect whether we are within
+% a screen (or longtable as may be), do the adjustment to the page height, and return, but this time
+% with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared. Upon reentering the output routine, we may or may not be within
+% the screen environment, but we are now sure to have a final page break, and we can commit this
+% material (by shipping out or by saving it out as a full column).
+%
+% In the above, the first of the two visits to the output routine is a dead cycle and requires
+% propagation of marks, but nothing else.
+%
+% \subsection{The difference between inserts and floats}
+%
+% While revisiting this package in 2008, I needed to clarify under what circumstances inserts
+% would be added to the \cmd\pagesofar. My conclusion is that I had been treating them
+% exactly the same as floats, but that was a mistake. 
+%
+% Floats can be committed at the top of a column, in the middle, or at the bottom. 
+% Footnotes (the only \cmd\insert\ that is used in \LaTeX) may only be committed at the bottom
+% of a column. So, it was necessary to provide two versions of \cmd\@combinepage, one 
+% that committed \cmd\insert s, and the other that did not, the former used only when 
+% a column of text was committed. Note that even after a column is committed, we could change our minds:
+% for instance if in multicolumn grid and we decide to balance the columns. 
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The natural output routine}
+%
+% Here is the portion of the output routine that fields cases not handled by
+% the dispatcher. 
+%
+% The default is to ship out a page and then look around for more material
+% that might constitute a ``float page''. However, because \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% is normally set, this output routine must first have a dead cycle and
+% come back again with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared.
+% Then, after shipping out, it puts down a message that 
+% will manufacture zero or more float pages, finally terminating
+% with a procedure that commits floats to a new unfinished page.
+%
+% To accomodate special processing, we execute hooks whose name is based
+% on the value of the "envir" mark component. The default is "document",
+% ensured by an initial mark of that value; the associated procedures
+% are all nil. Any unknown envir value will "\cmd\relax\ out".
+%
+% The test made by \cmd\toggle@insert\ tells whether we are on our first visit to
+% the output routine (with \cmd\holdinginserts\ still positive), or our second
+% (with \cmd\holdinginserts\ zeroed). The output routine will toggle the setting. 
+%
+% The commands \cmd\hold@insertions\ and \cmd\move@insertions\ respectively
+% clear and set \cmd\holdinginserts, so this procedure effectively
+% clears \cmd\holdinginserts\ just long enough to pick up the insertions.
+% Important: any output routine that clears \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% must guarentee that it is restored on the subsequent visit to the output routine.
+% Or, to put it another way, if an output routine detects that \cmd\holdinginserts\ 
+% is cleared, it should take it upon itself to restore it to a positive value before exiting.
+%
+% The branch with \cmd\holdinginserts\ set is executed first; the other
+% branch follows on practically immediately thereafter. In the first branch,
+% we simply execute the appropriate hook and then execute a dead cycle.
+%
+% In the branch with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared, the procedure
+% builds up the current column, which is now complete, with \cmd\@makecolumn, then
+% dispatches to the shipout routine associated with the current page grid, \cmd\output@column@.
+% At the end, it triggers the execution of an output routine to prepare the next column (or page).
+%
+% \subsection{Natural output routine}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\natural@output}
+% \begin{macro}{\output}
+% Here is the output routine that handles natural pagebreaks:
+% we now have page that needs to be shipped out or a portion of a page that is ready to be committed to the page grid.
+% Processing is of necessity divided into phases, \cmd\output@holding\ is executed upon first encountering the natural page-breaking point, while inserts are being held.
+% The second phase, \cmd\output@moving, is set in motion by the first: here the same material (in most cases) will be processed with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared,
+% and the insertions (e.g., footnotes) are split off into their assigned box registers. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\natural@output{\toggle@insert{\output@holding}{\output@moving}}%
+\output@latex{\natural@output}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In accordance with the scheme suggested by David Kastrup for allowing another output routine
+% to slip itself into ours, we use a token register called \cmd\output. 
+% However, we reserve the ability to restore things if we so desire.
+% This we must do in the case of the \filename{lineno.sty} package, because its functionality
+% is best served by being integrated into our own dispatcher-based output routine.
+%
+% To restore our own output routine, we can repeat the above assignment,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\output@latex{\natural@output}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% some time before the document begins.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output@holding}
+% \begin{macro}{\@if@exceed@pagegoal}
+% The procedure \cmd\output@holding\
+% is our first cycle through the output routine; \cmd\holdinginserts\ is still set.
+% We give the current environment a heads up
+% (it is through this means that \classname{longtable} sets its running header and footer),
+% then we execute a dead cycle, which should propagate marks. 
+%
+% One corner case that can crop up is the presence of a single unbreakable chunk whose size is larger
+% than \cmd\vsize.
+% Doing a dead cycle under such circumstances will not find the same breakpoint as this time
+% (remember we threw in a \cmd\mark\ node).
+% Instead, we attempt to remove the excess height of the material, so we can continue to propagate marks.
+%
+% The corner case is at hand if the natural size of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ exceeds \cmd\pagegoal\ and
+% the contents cannot be shrunk to fit.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace@box}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@holding{%
+ \csname output@init@\bot@envir\endcsname
+ \@if@exceed@pagegoal{\unvcopy\@cclv}{%
+  \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv}%
+  \outputdebug@sw{\trace@box\z@}{}%
+  \dimen@\ht\@cclv\advance\dimen@-\ht\z@
+  \dead@cycle@repair\dimen@
+ }{%
+  \dead@cycle
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@if@exceed@pagegoal#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \setbox\z@\vbox{#1}%
+  \dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@\dp\z@
+  \outputdebug@sw{\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+  \@ifdim{\dimen@>\pagegoal}{%
+   \setbox\z@\vbox{\@@mark{}\unvbox\z@}%
+   \splittopskip\topskip
+   \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth
+   \vbadness\@M
+   \vfuzz\maxdimen
+   \setbox\tw@\vsplit\z@ to\pagegoal
+   \outputdebug@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox\tw@\showbox\z@}}{}%
+   \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
+   \@ifdim{\ht\tw@=\z@}{%
+    \ltxgrid@info{Found overly large chunk while preparing to move insertions. Attempting repairs}%
+    \aftergroup\true@sw
+   }{%
+    \aftergroup\false@sw
+   }%
+ }{%
+  \aftergroup\false@sw
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output@moving}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cclv@nontrivial@sw}
+% The procedure \cmd\output@moving\ 
+% is our second cycle through the output routine; \cmd\holdinginserts\ is now cleared,
+% and \cmd\insert s will have been split off into their respective box registers, like \cmd\footins.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Set the values of \cmd\topmark\ and \cmd\firstmark.
+% \item
+%  If we got here because of a \cmd\clearpage\ command, remove the protection box that this mechanism has left on the MVL.
+% \item
+%  If the contents of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ are non-trivial, commit it to the current page (as a column) or ship it out, as the case may call for.
+% \item
+%  If not, discard it (we are at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing).
+% \item
+%  Set various values, including the available space for setting type on the next column (\cmd\@colroom).
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% The processing for a non-trivial \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ are:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Execute the head procedure for the current environment.
+% \item
+%  Make up a column and ship it out (or commit it to the current page) via a procedure keyed to the current page grid.
+% \item
+%  Put down an interrupt for \cmd\do@startcolumn@pen: this will force a visit to the output routine for the 
+%  purpose of committing floats to the next column.
+% \item
+%  Possibly put down an interrupt to continue \cmd\clearpage\ proccessing.
+% \item
+%  Execute the tail procedure for the current environment.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% The processing for a trivial \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ are:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Void out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and give appropriate warning messages and diagnostics.
+% \item
+%  Put down the same interrupts as for the non-trivial case above.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is followed by \cmd\output@column@, 
+% that is, it builds a column for \cmd\shipout\ rather than for adding to \cmd\pagesofar. 
+%
+% We need to handle cases where the \cmd\output@pre@, \cmd\output@column@, or \cmd\output@post@\
+% dispatchers come up \cmd\relax ed out: the default is to execute the corresponding 
+% procedures from the \env{docuemnt} environment and the one-column grid respectively.
+%
+% One such case comes up with frequency: at the end of the document, where the \cmd\botmark\ is
+% now empty.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Use procedures \cs{output@do@prep} and \cs{output@column@do} as dispatchers}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@moving{%
+ \set@top@firstmark
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty=\do@newpage@pen}{%
+  \setbox\@cclv\vbox{%
+   \unvbox\@cclv
+   \remove@lastbox
+   \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\ht\@protection@box}{\box\lastbox}{\unskip}%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+ \@cclv@nontrivial@sw{%
+  \expandafter\output@do@prep\csname output@prep@\bot@envir \endcsname
+  \@makecolumn\true@sw
+  \expandafter\output@column@do\csname output@column@\thepagegrid\endcsname
+  \protect@penalty\do@startcolumn@pen
+  \clearpage@sw{%
+   \protect@penalty\do@endpage@pen
+  }{}%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\output@post@\csname output@post@\bot@envir \endcsname
+  \outputdebug@sw{\say\output@post@}{}%
+  \@ifx{\output@post@\relax}{\output@post@document}{\output@post@}%
+ }{%
+  \void@cclv
+ }%
+ \set@colht
+ \global\@mparbottom\z@
+ \global\@textfloatsheight\z@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\output@do@prep\ dispatches to the proper procedure to prepare page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@do@prep#1{%
+ \outputdebug@sw{\class@info{Prep: \string#1}}{}%
+ \@ifx{#1\relax}{\output@prep@document}{#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\output@column@do\ dispatches to the proper procedure to output column or page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@column@do#1{%
+  \outputdebug@sw{\class@info{Output column: \string#1}}{}%
+  \@ifx{#1\relax}{\output@column@one}{#1}%
+}%
+\def\void@cclv{\begingroup\setbox\z@\box\@cclv\endgroup}%
+\def\remove@lastbox{\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@cclv@nontrivial@sw\ determines if this visit to \cmd\output@moving\
+% is a trivial one, which happens at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing and under some pathological circumstances.
+% It emits a Boolean, so it is syntactically like \cmd\true@sw, albeit does not execute solely via expansion.
+%
+% Note: the case where \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is void comes up at the very beginning of the job, when 
+% typesetting a (full-page-width) title block in a two-column layout.
+%
+% Note: the code that removes the last box and skip from the output is intended to detect the case
+% where the output has whatsit nodes followed by topskip and a protection box.
+% This is what happens under normal circumstances at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace@box}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cclv@nontrivial@sw{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@toplist{%
+  \@ifx@empty\@botlist{%
+   \@ifvoid\footins{%
+    \@ifvoid\@cclv{%
+     \false@sw
+    }{%
+     \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv}%
+     \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\topskip}{%
+      \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+       \unvbox\z@
+       \remove@lastbox
+       \dimen@\lastskip\unskip
+       \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\ht\@protection@box}{%
+        \advance\dimen@\ht\z@
+        \@ifdim{\dimen@=\topskip}{%
+         \aftergroup\true@sw
+        }{%
+         \aftergroup\false@sw
+        }%
+       }{%
+        \aftergroup\false@sw
+       }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End of \cmd\box\cmd\z@.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \egroup
+      {%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Normal for \clearpage
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \false@sw
+      }{%
+       \true@sw
+      }%
+     }{%
+      \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\z@}{%
+       \ltxgrid@info{Found trivial column. Discarding it}%
+       \outputdebug@sw{\trace@box\@cclv}{}%
+       \false@sw
+      }{%
+       \true@sw
+      }%
+     }%
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \true@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \true@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \true@sw
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\protect@penalty}
+% The procedure \cmd\protect@penalty\ is the utility procedure for invoking a 
+% one-off output routine. Such a routine can expect to find the protection box
+% above it in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv: it should remove that box.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\execute@message\ does the same thing as \cmd\protect@penalty, but
+% in a slightly different way.
+%
+% We create a specially formulated box that will be universally used when a protection box is needed.
+% In this way, we can always recognize when \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is trivial:
+% it will consist of whatsits followed by \cmd\topskip\ glue and the \cmd\@protection@box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\protect@penalty#1{\protection@box\penalty-#1\relax}%
+\newbox\@protection@box
+\setbox\@protection@box\vbox to1986sp{\vfil}%
+\def\protection@box{\nointerlineskip\copy\@protection@box}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dead@cycle}
+% \begin{macro}{\dead@cycle@repair}
+% The procedure \cmd\dead@cycle\ is defined separately as a utility which can be used by
+% any output processing routine to emulate what takes place in the standard output routine.
+%
+% Here, we have entered the output routine with \cmd\holdinginserts\ enabled, which means that we 
+% are not yet ready to ship out material, because the \cmd\insert\ registers are being held.
+% We want to clear \cmd\holdinginserts\ and come back here with the same page break as before, whereupon
+% we may properly proceed with page makeup.
+%
+% To do this, we
+% propagate marks, then spew the contents of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ followed by the 
+% original output penalty that landed us here (but only if it is not 10000,
+% the flag value for a pagebreak not at a penalty).
+%
+% However, the natural output routine should do this only if \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is nontrivial.
+% A pathological case exists wherein a box of height greater than \cmd\textheight\ would cause an infinite loop involving the output routine.
+% The procedure \cmd\dead@cycle@repair, attempts to catch this case and avoid the loop.
+%
+% The test of the height of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is not the correct one, because this test will run afoul in
+% the case where \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ contains nothing but an \cmd\insert\ node. What to do?
+%
+% It is possible that the pathological case can be detected by looking at \cmd\pagetotal. If that quantity is
+% zero, then \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ really is trivial.
+%
+% In the procedure \cmd\dead@cycle@repair, if \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is nontrivial, we execute \cmd\dead@cycle,
+% otherwise it contains nothing but a mark, so we dispense with propagating marks
+% and we simply spew out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ without an accompanying mark.
+% This has the effect of failing to propagate marks, but this problem is preferrable to the infinite loop,
+% which in principle could crash even a robust operating system by filling up the file system.
+%
+% If a document has such a large chunk, it should be fixed, so we give a message in the log.
+%
+% You ask, ``In what way does this infinite loop come about?'' Good question!
+%
+% The setup is a chunk in the MVL that is taller than \cmd\textheight. 
+% (Yes, it's that simple.)
+% As soon as the previous page ships out, the MVL will contain a mark (propagated from the previous page) followed
+% by that large chunk (call it the `big bad box', albeit does not need to be a single box).
+% The next visit to the output routine will be a natural page break, but
+% \TeX\ will select the juncture between the mark and the big bad box as the least-cost page break.
+% Unless the test in \cmd\dead@cycle\ is done, the cycle is perpetuated when the macro 
+% reinserts the mark.
+%
+% The crux matter is achieving, in a robust way, the goal of going from a \cmd\holdinginserts\ state to one
+% where the insertions are moving.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dead@cycle@repair#1{%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark
+ \expandafter{%
+              \@@botmark
+             }%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vbox to#1{\vss}%
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\@M}{\penalty\outputpenalty}{}%
+}%
+\def\dead@cycle@repair@protected#1{%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark
+ \expandafter{%
+              \@@botmark
+             }%
+ \begingroup
+  \unvbox\@cclv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remove the protection box
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \remove@lastbox
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \advance#1-\ht\@protection@box
+  \vbox to#1{\vss}%
+  \protection@box % Reinsert protection box
+  \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\@M}{\penalty\outputpenalty}{}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\dead@cycle{%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark
+ \expandafter{%
+              \@@botmark
+             }%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\@M}{\penalty\outputpenalty}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output@init@document}
+% \begin{macro}{\output@prep@document}
+% \begin{macro}{\output@post@document}
+% The default processing simply provides for insertion of held-over footnotes.
+% At a natural page break, we are either at the bottom of a column or at the bottom 
+% of a page. In either case, the \cmd\output@init@\ processing adjusts for the height
+% of the held-over footnotes and bails out.
+% Upon our return, at \cmd\output@prep@\ time, the page break will accomodate the material;
+% it is now actually inserted by concatenating it with the contents of \cmd\footins.
+% The default processing for \cmd\output@post@\ is nil.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Box \cs{footbox} changed to box \cs{footsofar}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@init@document{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\output@init@document}}{}%
+ \global\vsize\vsize
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% QUERY: the following procedure is very like \cmd\combine@foot@inserts. Should it be the same?
+% Answer: no, the two differ: this procedure makes a local assignment of \cmd\footins;
+% the latter makes a global assignment of \cmd\footsofar.
+%
+% Note: In a multicolumn document, footnotes must \emph{not} be balanced at this point.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@prep@document{%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\output@prep@document}\trace@scroll{\showbox\footins\showbox\footsofar}}{}%
+ \@ifvoid\footsofar{%
+ }{%
+  \global\setbox\footins\vbox\bgroup
+   \unvbox\footsofar
+   \@ifvoid\footins{}{%
+    \marry@baselines
+    \unvbox\footins
+   }%
+  \egroup
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box\footins}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\output@post@document{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@opcol}
+% The standard \LaTeX\ procedure \cmd\@opcol\ is now completely obsoleted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@opcol\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecolumn}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% The procedure \cmd\@makecolumn\ packages up a page along with all its insertions and floats.
+% Therefore it is essential that it be executed with \cmd\holdininserts\ cleared.
+%
+% Note that there is a corner case when in a multi-column grid, where the change back to 
+% one-column grid occurs just after a complete page ships out. We want to detect when
+% \cmd\@cclv\ contains nothing but a \cmd\mark, but this is a \TeX\ impossibility.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\@kludgeins: we have removed this mechanism from \LaTeX, because the implementation 
+% of \cmd\enlargethispage\ no longer requires it. 
+% Here, for consistency sake, we remove \cmd\@makespecialcolbox.
+% 
+% The argument of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is a Boolean and determines if we combine the footnote material
+% into the present column. If the procedure is building a column for shipping out, then we will
+% combine the footnote material, if not, we return with the \cmd\footins\ box unchanged.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/14}{(AO, 519) \cs{footins} content must be preserved and reintegrated}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) change calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} to expose box registers}%
+% I changed the behavior of this procedure in the case where the argument is \cmd\false@sw:
+% send the unused footnote material to \cmd\footsofar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makecolumn#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\@makecolumn\string#1}}{}%
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox\bgroup
+  \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
+  \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+  \unvbox\@cclv
+  \vskip-\@tempdima
+ \egroup
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}\global\let\@midlist\@empty
+ \show@text@box@size
+ \@combinefloats
+ #1{%
+  \@combineinserts\@outputbox\footins
+ }{%
+  \combine@foot@inserts\footsofar\footins
+ }%
+ \set@adj@colht\dimen@
+ \count@\vbadness
+ \vbadness\@M
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\dimen@\bgroup
+  \@texttop
+  \dimen@\dp\@outputbox
+  \unvbox\@outputbox
+  \vskip-\dimen@
+  \@textbottom
+ \egroup
+ \vbadness\count@
+ \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth
+}%
+\let\@makespecialcolbox\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combineinserts}
+% The procedure to add the specified insertions to the packaged-up page. 
+% All other classes of insertions should also be dealt with at this time. 
+%
+% Note that the second argument must be a \cmd\newinsert\ register: we access the \cmd\box\ along with the \cmd\skip.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) footnote rule is leaders, so that it may be removed by \cs{vsplit}; mechanism of \cs{kern} signals to indicate footnote height}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combineinserts#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\@combineinserts\string#1\string#2}\trace@box#2}{}%
+ \setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+  \unvbox#1%
+  \@ifvoid{#2}{}{%
+   \dimen@\ht#2\advance\dimen@\dp#2\advance\dimen@\skip#2%
+   \show@box@size{Combining inserts}#2%
+   \vskip\skip#2%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The footnote rule is created as leaders, so that it may be removed automatically (via \cmd\vsplit) 
+% in the event the footnote is recovered from this column. 
+% Note that if \cmd\color@begingroup\ or \cmd\normalcolor\ produce marks, this technique will be confounded. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \setbox\z@\vbox{\footnoterule}\dimen@i\ht\z@
+   \color@begingroup
+   \normalcolor
+   \cleaders\box\z@\vskip\dimen@i\kern-\dimen@i
+   \csname combine@insert@\the\pagegrid@col\endcsname#2%
+   \color@endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following tells \cmd\recover@column\ the size of the footnotes added here, including the skip glue above. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \kern-\dimen@\kern\dimen@
+  }%
+ \egroup
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box#1}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We provide for a layer of abstraction for the laying down of footnotes at the bottom of this column or page. 
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\combine@insert@tw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\combine@insert@@ne}
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn@grid@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolumn@grid@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\columngrid@setup}
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide setup code also for footnotes in a one-column document}%
+% The following two definitions cover the cases of a two-column document (with footnotes set on a single-column width),
+% and a one-column document.
+% However, the case of a two-column document with footnotes set on full text width is not covered. 
+% 
+% For a document in an overall two-column page grid, execute the commands
+% \cmd\twocolumn@grid@setup\ followed by \cmd\open@twocolumn;
+% if on the full page width (one-column grid), the command \cmd\onecolumn@grid@setup. 
+%
+% The following is the way REVTeX does the initialization.
+% The procedure \cmd\select@column@grid\ is executed at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time;
+% the boolean \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ selects between the two alternatives.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\select@column@grid{%
+% \twocolumn@sw{%
+%  \twocolumn@grid@setup
+%  \open@twocolumn
+% }{%
+%  \onecolumn@grid@setup
+% }%
+%}%
+%\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+% \select@column@grid
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\combine@insert@tw@#1{%
+ \compose@footnotes@two#1\@ifvbox{#1}{\unvbox}{\box}#1%
+}%
+\def\combine@insert@@ne#1{%
+ \compose@footnotes@one#1\@ifvbox{#1}{\unvbox}{\box}#1%
+}%
+\def\twocolumn@grid@setup{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine@insert@1\endcsname\combine@insert@tw@
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine@insert@2\endcsname\combine@insert@@ne
+}%
+\def\onecolumn@grid@setup{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine@insert@1\endcsname\combine@insert@@ne
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine@insert@2\endcsname\combine@insert@@ne
+}%
+\let\columngrid@setup\onecolumn@grid@setup
+\columngrid@setup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@floatplacement}
+% In standard \LaTeX, someone (DPC?) makes the assumption that \cmd\@fpmin\ can be assigned
+% locally. This is no longer true now that we ship no more than one page per visit to the output routine.
+% We apply a bandaid.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@floatplacement{%
+ \global\@fpmin\@fpmin
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagebreak@pen}
+% While we are in the way of registering certain penalty values,
+% let us register the smallest one that will force a visit to the output routine. 
+% However, this penalty will not have an assciated macro: we wish to execute the 
+% natural output routine instead.
+%
+% Note that this penalty is invoked by \cmd\clearpage\ and \cmd\newpage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\pagebreak@pen=\@M
+\expandafter\let\csname output@-\the\pagebreak@pen\endcsname\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Float placement}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@startcolumn@pen}
+% The procedure \cmd\do@startcolumn@pen\ is executed as a one-off output routine
+% just after a page is shipped out (or, in a multicolumn page grid, a column is salted away).
+%
+% Its job is to either generate a ``float page'' (in reality a column) for shipping out,
+% or to commit deferred floats to the fresh column, concluding with a dead cycle.
+% In the former case, we accomodate split footnotes and other insertions (by comparing \cmd\vsize\ and \cmd\pagegoal):
+% the floats are spewed onto the page, whereupon \LaTeX's output routine will place the footnotes and ship out,
+% iterating the process once again.
+%
+% Note that when this procedure is invoked, \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ still has within it the protection box, so we
+% start by removing it. Note also that if there was a split insertion held over from the previous page, the
+% insert node will be present in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, \emph{prior to} the protection box. For this reason, we cannot 
+% just throw away that box, as we might be tempted to do. 
+%
+% FIXME: where else do we possibly inappropriately discard \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv?
+%
+% Note that, because a column or page page had previously just been completed, 
+% we can assume that there is nothing of importance on the page,
+% and because no message is being passed, we can preserve marks in a simple way.
+%
+% A Note on terminology:
+% In a single-column page grid, you might expect that we would execute the procedure \cmd\do@startpage.
+% But this is not so.
+% \LaTeX\ has a confustion of long standing,
+% in which the procedures that handle full-page width floats in a two-column page grid all have in their names
+% the string `dbl', which erroneously suggests having something to do with ``double''. It does not:
+% when you see `dbl', think ``full page width''.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do@startcolumn@pen=10005
+\@namedef{output@-\the\do@startcolumn@pen}{\do@startcolumn}%
+\def\do@startcolumn{%
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\remove@lastbox\unskip}%
+ \clearpage@sw{\@clearfloatplacement}{\@floatplacement}%
+ \set@colht
+ \@booleanfalse\pfloat@avail@sw
+ \begingroup
+  \@colht\@colroom
+  \@booleanfalse\float@avail@sw
+  \@tryfcolumn\test@colfloat
+  \float@avail@sw{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\pfloat@avail@sw}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fcolmade@sw{%
+  \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox\unvbox\@cclv}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now ask for a return visit, this time with insertions and all.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \outputpenalty-\pagebreak@pen
+  \dead@cycle
+ }{%
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@elt\@scolelt
+   \let\reserved@b\@deferlist\global\let\@deferlist\@empty\reserved@b
+  \endgroup
+  \clearpage@sw{%
+   \outputpenalty\@M
+  }{%
+   \outputpenalty\do@newpage@pen
+  }%
+  \dead@cycle
+ }%
+ \check@deferlist@stuck\do@startcolumn
+ \set@vsize
+}%
+\def\@scolelt#1{\def\@currbox{#1}\@addtonextcol}%
+\def\test@colfloat#1{%
+ \csname @floatselect@sw@\thepagegrid\endcsname#1{}{\@testtrue}%
+ \@if@sw\if@test\fi{}{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\float@avail@sw}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtonextcol}
+% We must adjust \cmd\@addtonextcol\ to take held-over inserts into account.
+% Now that all deferred floats are queued up together (in order), we must have a way of 
+% differentiating them; this is done by the page grid-dependent procedure \cmd\@floatselect@sw@.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtonextcol{%
+ \begingroup
+  \@insertfalse
+  \@setfloattypecounts
+  \csname @floatselect@sw@\thepagegrid\endcsname\@currbox{%
+   \@ifnum{\@fpstype=8 }{}{%
+     \@ifnum{\@fpstype=24 }{}{%
+       \@flsettextmin
+       \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+       \advance \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+       \advance \@reqcolroom \vsize % take into account split insertions
+       \advance \@reqcolroom -\pagegoal
+       \@ifdim{\@colroom>\@reqcolroom}{%
+         \@flsetnum \@colnum
+         \@ifnum{\@colnum>\z@}{%
+            \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+            \@if@sw\if@test\fi{}{%
+              \@addtotoporbot
+            }%
+         }{}%
+       }{}%
+     }%
+   }%
+  }{}%
+  \@if@sw\if@insert\fi{}{%
+    \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@startpage@pen}
+% \begin{macro}{\forcefloats@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@output@combined@page}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sdblcolelt}
+% \begin{macro}{\test@dblfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\@if@notdblfloat}
+% Similar to \cmd\do@startcolumn,
+% the procedure \cmd\do@startpage\ starts up a new page (not column) in a multi-column page grid. 
+% It is invoked after a page is shipped out in a multi-column page grid, and
+% it commits full-page-width floats to the fresh page, possibly resulting in a float page.
+% In implementation, it is similar to \cmd\do@startcolumn, except that
+% it commits effectively via \cmd\@addtodblcol\ instead of \cmd\@addtonextcol.
+% Note that this procedure will inevitably be followed by \cmd\do@startcolumn.
+%
+% Some details of the procedure:
+%
+% We begin by removing the protection box from \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, then setting the values of the
+% float placement parameters appropriately, and resetting \cmd\@colht, \cmd\@colroom, and \cmd\vsize\ to base values.
+%
+% Next we attempt to compose a float page, a page consisting entirely of floats. If successful,
+% we ship out the float page and lay down an interrupt that will send us back here for another try.
+%
+% If no float page is formed, we attempt to commit full-page-width floats to the text page, and return with a dead cycle.
+% We are now ready to compose columns of text.
+%
+% Note that all floats (both column floats and full-page-width floats) move through a single queue.
+% To differentiate between the two, the width of the float is compared to \cmd\textwidth.
+% This comparison is encapsulated in the macro \cmd\@if@notdblfloat, which should be used whenever 
+% such a determination must be made. This procedure returns a Boolean.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do@startpage@pen=10006
+\@namedef{output@-\the\do@startpage@pen}{\do@startpage}%
+\def\do@startpage{%
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\remove@lastbox\unskip}%
+ \clearpage@sw{\@clearfloatplacement}{\@dblfloatplacement}%
+ \set@colht
+ \@booleanfalse\pfloat@avail@sw
+ \begingroup
+  \@booleanfalse\float@avail@sw
+  \@tryfcolumn\test@dblfloat
+  \float@avail@sw{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\pfloat@avail@sw}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fcolmade@sw{%
+  \global\setbox\pagesofar\vbox{\unvbox\pagesofar\unvbox\@outputbox}%
+  \@output@combined@page
+ }{%
+  \begingroup
+   \@booleanfalse\float@avail@sw
+   \let\@elt\@sdblcolelt
+   \let\reserved@b\@deferlist\global\let\@deferlist\@empty\reserved@b
+  \endgroup
+  \@ifdim{\@colht=\textheight}{% No luck...
+   \pfloat@avail@sw{% ...but a float *was* available!
+    \forcefloats@sw{%
+     \ltxgrid@warn{Forced dequeueing of floats stalled}%
+    }{%
+     \ltxgrid@warn{Dequeueing of floats stalled}%
+    }%
+   }{}%
+  }{}%
+  \outputpenalty\@M
+  \dead@cycle
+ }%
+ \check@deferlist@stuck\do@startpage
+ \set@colht
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\@output@combined@page\ is a utility that ships out a page consisting of the
+% result of \cmd\@combinepage\ and \cmd\@combinedblfloats, after which it prepares for 
+% the process to repeat.
+%
+% It is coincidentally identical to what needs to happen with 
+% a float page that has been built by \cmd\@tryfcolumn, in the multi-column page grid, 
+% and also handles the case where a page needs to be shipped out when in multicolumn mode.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output@combined@page}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@output@combined@page{%
+ \@combinepage\true@sw
+ \@combinedblfloats
+ \@outputpage
+ \global\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+ \protect@penalty\do@startpage@pen
+}%
+\def\@sdblcolelt#1{\def\@currbox{#1}\@addtodblcol}%
+\def\test@dblfloat#1{%
+ \@if@notdblfloat{#1}{\@testtrue}{}%
+ \@if@sw\if@test\fi{}{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\float@avail@sw}%
+}%
+\def\@if@notdblfloat#1{\@ifdim{\wd#1<\textwidth}}%
+\@booleanfalse\forcefloats@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtodblcol}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@addtodblcol\ is called into play at the beginning of each fresh page
+% and operates on each deferred float, in the hopes of placing one or more such floats
+% at the top of the current page.
+% 
+% We alter the procedure of standard \LaTeX\ by putting failed floats into 
+% \cmd\@deferlist\ instead of \cmd\@dbldeferlist. Having done so, we must have a means
+% of differentiating full-page-width floats from column-width floats.
+% We assume that the latter will always be narrower than \cmd\textwidth.
+%
+% In aid of detecting a stalled float flushing process, we set a Boolean if we encounter
+% a qualified full-page-width float here. Any that qualify but fail the rest of the tests
+% might still pass when reconsidered on an otherwise blank page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtodblcol{%
+ \begingroup
+  \@if@notdblfloat{\@currbox}{%
+   \false@sw
+  }{%
+   \@setfloattypecounts
+   \@getfpsbit \tw@
+   \@bitor \@currtype \@deferlist
+   \@if@sw\if@test\fi{%
+    \false@sw
+   }{%
+    \@ifodd\@tempcnta{%
+     \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\float@avail@sw
+     \@flsetnum \@dbltopnum
+     \@ifnum{\@dbltopnum>\z@}{%
+       \@ifdim{\@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox}{%
+        \true@sw
+       }{%
+        \@ifnum{\@fpstype<\sixt@@n}{%
+         \begingroup
+          \advance \@dbltoproom \@textmin
+          \@ifdim{\@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox}{%
+           \endgroup\true@sw
+          }{%
+           \endgroup\false@sw
+          }%
+        }{%
+         \false@sw
+        }%
+       }%
+     }{%
+      \false@sw
+     }%
+    }{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+  {%
+   \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+   \advance\@tempdima
+    -\@ifx{\@dbltoplist\@empty}{\dbltextfloatsep}{\dblfloatsep}%
+   \global \advance \@dbltoproom \@tempdima
+   \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+   \global \advance \@dbltopnum \m@ne
+   \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+  }{%
+   \@cons \@deferlist \@currbox
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tryfcolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@wtryfc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtryfc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ztryfc}
+% Whenever a page is shipped out, \LaTeX\ automatically tries out a float column:
+% a page containing nothing but floats (and, as we have added here, split footnotes).
+%
+% The following four procedures employ certain macros to communicate between each other:
+%
+% \cmd\fcolmade@sw, a boolean, says whether we were successful in making a float column.
+%
+% \cmd\if@test, a \cmd\newif\ switch, says a float has failed some test.
+% 
+% \cmd\@deferlist, is the input to the process, a list, of deferred floats.
+% 
+% \cmd\@trylist, a list, stores the deferred floats to be tried out on the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@failedlist, a list of floats that have failed the selection for the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@flfail, a list of floats that have failed the second selection for the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@flsucceed, a list, the floats that have been successfully placed on the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@freelist, a list, receives any freed floats.
+%
+% \cmd\@colht, a dimen, the available space for the column, including column floats and insertions (footnotes).
+%
+% \cmd\@fpmin, a dimen, the required minimum height for the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@outputbox, a box, the output of the process.
+%
+% \cmd\@fptop, \cmd\@fpsep, \cmd\@fpbot, glue, placed above, between, and below floats on the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@currtype, a count, used temporarily for the float's bits.
+%
+% \cmd\@tempcnta, a count, used temporarily for the float's bits.
+%
+% In \cmd\@tryfcolumn, we alter the criterion for a float page, because if footnotes are present at this point
+% (presumably due to a split insertion) then \cmd\@fpmin is no longer the right threshold to apply.
+% 
+% Note that we have changed \cmd\@tryfcolumn, \cmd\@xtryfc, and \cmd\@ztryfc\ syntactically so that the procedure
+% to test for the float's being a column float versus a full-page-width float is passed in as an 
+% argument.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tryfcolumn#1{%
+  \global\@booleanfalse\fcolmade@sw
+  \@ifx@empty\@deferlist{}{%
+    \global\let\@trylist\@deferlist
+    \global\let\@failedlist\@empty
+    \begingroup
+      \dimen@\vsize\advance\dimen@-\pagegoal\@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{%
+       \advance\@fpmin-\dimen@
+      }{}%
+      \def\@elt{\@xtryfc#1}\@trylist
+    \endgroup
+    \fcolmade@sw{%
+      \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\vskip \@fptop}%
+      \let \@elt \@wtryfc \@flsucceed
+      \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox
+        \unskip \vskip \@fpbot
+      }%
+      \let \@elt \relax
+      \xdef\@deferlist{\@failedlist\@flfail}%
+      \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@flsucceed}%
+    }{}%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\@wtryfc #1{%
+  \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox
+    \box #1\vskip\@fpsep
+  }%
+}%
+\def\@xtryfc#1#2{%
+  \@next\reserved@a\@trylist{}{}% trim \@trylist. Ugly!
+  \@currtype \count #2%
+  \divide\@currtype\@xxxii\multiply\@currtype\@xxxii
+  \@bitor \@currtype \@failedlist
+  \@testfp #2%
+  #1#2%
+  \@ifdim{\ht #2>\@colht   }{\@testtrue}{}%
+  \@if@sw\if@test\fi{%
+   \@cons\@failedlist #2%
+  }{%
+   \begingroup
+     \gdef\@flsucceed{\@elt #2}%
+     \global\let\@flfail\@empty
+     \@tempdima\ht #2%
+     \def \@elt {\@ztryfc#1}\@trylist
+     \@ifdim{\@tempdima >\@fpmin}{%
+       \global\@booleantrue\fcolmade@sw
+     }{%
+       \@cons\@failedlist #2%
+     }%
+   \endgroup
+   \fcolmade@sw{%
+     \let \@elt \@gobble
+   }{}%
+  }%
+}%
+\def\@ztryfc #1#2{%
+  \@tempcnta \count#2%
+  \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii\multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+  \@bitor \@tempcnta {\@failedlist \@flfail}%
+  \@testfp #2%
+  #1#2%
+  \@tempdimb\@tempdima
+  \advance\@tempdimb \ht#2\advance\@tempdimb\@fpsep
+  \@ifdim{\@tempdimb >\@colht}{%
+    \@testtrue
+  }{}%
+  \@if@sw\if@test\fi{%
+    \@cons\@flfail #2%
+  }{%
+    \@cons\@flsucceed #2%
+    \@tempdima\@tempdimb
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Clearing pages}%
+% 
+% Clearing the page is an elaboration of ending the page: it entails flushing all floats.
+%
+% This package might make number of float flushing algorithms available,
+% a very simple one that does not try to produce excellent pages,
+% another that tries to make the best use of space,
+% and a more complex one that tries to balance columns.
+% 
+% At the beginning of the page-clearing process, by definition all of the paragraph text involved is on the MVL and all floats have been encountered.
+% There may be material in \cmd\pagesofar, and (in a multi-column page grid) any number of columns of the page have been composed.
+% Also, there might be footnote material saved up in \cmd\footsofar.
+% 
+% Because we did not want to perform multiple \cmd\shipout s per visit to the output routine,
+% our multi-column page makeup will not compose multiple columns per visit.
+% This implementation detail may not require alteration, but it is not a limitation that is truly necessary:
+% it is only multiple \cmd\shipout s per visit that must be avoided.
+% 
+% The crux matter is how to continue with flushing floats even after the material in the MVL is exhausted.
+% At that point, we must, upon completion of the output routine, 
+% insert into the MVL an interrupt that triggers the next step in the processing.
+%
+% Therefore, after processing a \cmd\do@startcolumn\ interrupt, we must somehow force the completion of that column.
+% This could be done by inserting a \cmd\do@newpage@pen\ interrupt.
+% 
+% And after processing a \cmd\do@startpage@pen\ interrupt, that results in \cmd\@dbltopinsert s,
+% we must ensure that the multiple columns on the page get completed, so that the page itself finally gets shipped out.
+% This part will proceed automatically given that \cmd\do@startcolumn\ processing completes successfully.
+% 
+% The process will not be complete until all deferred floats have been placed and shipped out, and all saved-up footnotes have been inserted.
+% 
+% Full-page-width floats can get out of order of column floats. This problem can be remedied by holding them all in the same list.
+% We therefore stop using \cmd\@dbldeferlist\ entirely, and all of the procedures that formerly used it have been rewritten to
+% use \cmd\@deferlist\ instead. When traversing the list, we apply a selector on the given box that determines whether it is a column-width or page-width float.
+% This selector is different depending on the page grid.
+%
+% When the \cmd\@deferlist\ is processed (by any means), we have to take care of the case where a float of one category is passed over but we are looking for a float of the other category.
+% Here, we must terminate processing, to avoid disordering the floats. This we do by the usual means.
+% 
+% The system has a Boolean that says we are clearing pages: \cmd\clearpage@sw; if it is true,
+% then at the tail of \cmd\do@startcolumn\ processing, we should put down a (\cmd\vfil?) \cmd\do@newpage@pen\ interrupt.
+% This is because the MVL is now empty, so we have to force the columns to complete.
+% 
+% One potential very pathological case would be where there is one or more deferred floats that never successfully get placed:
+% placing floats has stalled, and we will ship out blank pages indefinitely. How to detect this case?
+% 
+% First, \cmd\do@startpage\ will evidently be stalled if the following are all true:
+% a) \cmd\@tryfcolumn\ and \cmd\@sdblcolelt\ both fail,
+% b) there are deferred floats available for page placement, and
+% c) the \cmd\@colht=\cmd\textheight, that is, the full page height is available for placement of column floats.
+% 
+% Second, \cmd\do@startcolumn\ will evidently be stalled if the following are all true:
+% a) tryfcolumn fails,
+% b) there are deferred floats available for column placement, and
+% a) the \cmd\@colroom=\cmd\textheight, that is, the full page height is available for placement of column floats.
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\clearpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\newpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\newpage@prep}
+% The function of \cmd\clearpage\ is to end the current page with \cmd\newpage\ and then
+% ship out additional pages until (\footins) inserts and (deferred) floats are exhausted.
+%
+% The method involves setting the float placement parameters to completely permissive values
+% and kicking out the current page (using a non-discardable penalty).
+% A possibly short page will be shipped out, followed
+% by any number of float pages. However these float pages, because using permissive float placement,
+% will exhaust all inserts and deferred floats.
+%
+% Bug Note: in the code for \cmd\clearpage, the first penalty we output is an unprotected \cmd\pagebreak@pen.
+% I tried using a protected \cmd\do@newpage@pen, but that gave rise to a corner case where a blank page
+% was output.
+%
+% At present, the \cmd\clearpage\ procedure does the same as \cmd\newpage,
+% except that \cmd\clearpage@sw\ is turned on,
+% and the (discardable) \cmd\newpage\ is inevitably followed by the same procedures
+% that are executed if a page is shipped out.
+%
+% FIXME: it seems that better than \cmd\pagebreak@pen\ would be an unprotected penalty of a special value that would
+% entail output routine processing consisting of the following steps:
+% 3) \cmd\unvbox\cmd\@cclv,
+% 1) set \cmd\clearpage@sw\ to \cmd\true@sw,
+% 2) put down a protected \cmd\do@startcolumn@pen,
+% 4) take a dead cycle.
+%
+% The effect would be to liberalize float placement options for the current column as well as further columns that may be output as part of \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% Of course, it would still be necessary to set \cmd\clearpage@sw\ again via an interrupt.
+%
+% An optimization might be to clear \cmd\clearpage@sw\ as part of the same interrupt,
+% but that would actually not work properly, because it is necessary for \cmd\do@endpage\ to
+% possibly invoke further visits to the output routine before clearpage processing ceases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newpage@prep{%
+  \if@noskipsec
+    \ifx \@nodocument\relax
+      \leavevmode
+      \global \@noskipsecfalse
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@inlabel
+    \leavevmode
+    \global \@inlabelfalse
+  \fi
+  \if@nobreak \@nobreakfalse \everypar{}\fi
+  \par
+}%
+\def \newpage {%
+ \newpage@prep
+ \do@output@MVL{%
+  \vfil
+  \penalty-\pagebreak@pen
+ }%
+}%
+\def\clearpage{%
+ \newpage@prep
+ \do@output@MVL{%
+  \vfil
+  \penalty-\pagebreak@pen
+  \global\@booleantrue\clearpage@sw
+  \protect@penalty\do@startcolumn@pen
+  \protect@penalty\do@endpage@pen
+ }%
+ \do@output@MVL{%
+  \global\@booleanfalse\clearpage@sw
+ }%
+}%
+\def\cleardoublepage{%
+ \clearpage
+ \@if@sw\if@twoside\fi{%
+  \@ifodd\c@page{}{%
+   \null\clearpage
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\clearpage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@endpage@pen}
+% The penalty \cmd\do@endpage@pen\ simply dispatches to the page grid procedure that forces an end page.
+% That procedure should test whether there is anything to ship out (say committed floats), then act accordingly.
+% Note that as part of this work, it should \cmd\unvbox\cmd\@cclv, which has been left boxed up so it can be 
+% measured.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do@endpage@pen=10007
+\@namedef{output@-\the\do@endpage@pen}{\csname end@column@\thepagegrid\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@newpage@pen}
+% The penalty \cmd\do@newpage@pen\ allows a ``non-discardable \cmd\newpage'' command:
+% a \cmd\newpage\ command that will not disappear at a pagebreak.
+% This visit to the output routine will not be dispatched to an interrupt,
+% rather the natural output routine will be executed, where it
+% will remove the protection box.
+% 
+% Call this routine by executing \cmd\protect@penalty\cmd\do@newpage@pen.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do@newpage@pen=10001
+\expandafter\let\csname output@-\the\do@newpage@pen\endcsname\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@clearfloatplacement}
+% The procedure \cmd\@clearfloatplacement\ sets the float placement parameters
+% to completely permissive values (except for \cmd\@fpmin). The standard values are:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+%\cmd\@topnum      &\cmd\c@topnumber\\
+%\cmd\@toproom     &\cmd\topfraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@botnum      &\cmd\c@bottomnumber\\
+%\cmd\@botroom     &\cmd\bottomfraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@colnum      &\cmd\c@totalnumber\\
+%\cmd\@fpmin       &\cmd\floatpagefraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@dbltopnum   &\cmd\c@dbltopnumber\\
+%\cmd\@dbltoproom  &\cmd\dbltopfraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@textmin     &\cmd\@colht\cmd\advance\cmd\@textmin -\cmd\@dbltoproom\\
+%\cmd\@fpmin       &\cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\cmd\textheight
+% \end{tabular}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@clearfloatplacement{%
+ \global\@topnum     \maxdimen
+ \global\@toproom    \maxdimen
+ \global\@botnum     \maxdimen
+ \global\@botroom    \maxdimen
+ \global\@colnum     \maxdimen
+ \global\@dbltopnum  \maxdimen
+ \global\@dbltoproom \maxdimen
+ \global\@textmin    \z@      
+ \global\@fpmin      \z@      
+ \let\@testfp\@gobble
+ \appdef\@setfloattypecounts{\@fpstype16\advance\@fpstype\m@ne}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@doclearpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefcolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
+% The \cmd\@doclearpage\ procedure is now obsoleted, as is \cmd\@makefcolumn, which it invoked.
+% We also completely avoid using \cmd\@makecol\ (in favor of \cmd\@makecolumn).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@doclearpage\@undefined
+\let\@makefcolumn\@undefined
+\let\@makecol\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clr@top@firstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@top@firstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@tail}
+% We want accurate values of \cmd\topmark\ and \cmd\firstmark, but we must deal with 
+% the fact that there are many different ways of contributing material
+% to the page. Only upon the first contribution to the page is the value of \cmd\topmark\
+% accurate. However, with \cmd\firstmark\ we must potentially examine each contribution
+% because the first mark on the page may happen to fall in the last piece of material contributed.
+%
+% To begin, we define the procedure that initializes the macros to appropriate flag values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clr@top@firstmark{%
+ \global\let\saved@@topmark\@undefined
+ \global\let\saved@@firstmark\@empty
+ \global\let\saved@@botmark\@empty
+}%
+\clr@top@firstmark
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that the flag value for \cmd\saved@@topmark\ is \cmd\@undefined, just as one would
+% expect. But that for \cmd\saved@@firstmark\ and \cmd\saved@@botmark\ is \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Next, we define procedure \cmd\set@top@firstmark; it will be exercised everywhere material is contributed,
+% capturing the mark values if appropriate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@top@firstmark{%
+ \@ifxundefined\saved@@topmark{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\saved@@topmark\expandafter{\@@topmark}}{}%
+ \@if@empty\saved@@firstmark{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\saved@@firstmark\expandafter{\@@firstmark}}{}%
+ \@if@empty\@@botmark{}{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\saved@@botmark\expandafter{\@@botmark}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% When should \cmd\set@top@firstmark\ be called?
+% A good candidate for a universal procedure for handling contributed material is
+% the natural output routine; are any other calls needed?
+%
+% Yes, in \cmd\save@column\ we must execute \cmd\set@top@firstmark\ because we are about to 
+% save away \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and we will never see its marks again (unless it is unboxed into the MVL),
+% because \TeX\ lets one access a box's marks only within an output routine that has put that box into \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% As soon as a page is shipped out, we initialize the two macros that
+% hold the values of \cmd\topmark\ and \cmd\firstmark, respectively.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@outputpage@tail{%
+ \clr@top@firstmark
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Other interfaces to \LaTeX}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@}
+% \begin{macro}{\fpsd@}
+% The \LaTeX\ kernel procedures \cmd\@float\ and \cmd\@dblfloat\ are treated on an equal footing.
+% Each now takes environment-specific float placement defaults.
+% If none are defined for the calling environment, we apply a default.
+%
+% A parameter is passed that will set the width of text within the float, normally \cmd\columnwidth,
+% and in the "dbl" version, \cmd\textwidth. However, an environment such as \env{turnpage}
+% may change the meanings of these macros to allow turnpage floats.
+%
+% \changes{4.0a}{2008/06/26 }{\cs{@yfloat}: de-fang \cs{set@footnotewidth} (see ltxutil.dtx): we have already done its job. }
+%
+% Note on \cmd\@xfloat: the optional argument must come to it fully expanded, because the macro
+% does a weird procedure on this argument, involving \cmd\@onelevel@sanitize, which I do not
+% understand, and which does not work if not so expanded. 
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Get rid of the \cs{reserved@a} idiom}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@float#1{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \verb+}]{+Brace-matching klootch
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@yfloat\width@float{#1}%
+ }{%
+  \@ifxundefined@cs{fps@#1}{}{\expandafter\let\expandafter\fps@\csname fps@#1\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\@argswap\expandafter{\expandafter[\fps@]}{\@yfloat\width@float{#1}}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@dblfloat#1{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@col=\@ne}{%
+  \@float{#1}%
+ }{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \verb+}]{+Brace-matching klootch
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@yfloat\widthd@float{#1}%
+  }{%
+   \@ifxundefined@cs{fpsd@#1}{}{\expandafter\let\expandafter\fpsd@\csname fpsd@#1\endcsname}%
+   \expandafter\@argswap\expandafter{\expandafter[\fpsd@]}{\@yfloat\widthd@float{#1}}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Turn off the \cs{set@footnotewidth} mechanism; a float `knows' its proper typesetting context}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+% \cmd\@yfloat\ is the go-to procdure for creating the proper environment for the content of a float.
+% Argument \verb+#1+ is the width of the float environment (we disable \cmd\set@footnotewidth), and 
+% we establish a self-contained (minipage) environment for footnotes. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@yfloat#1#2[#3]{%
+ \@xfloat{#2}[#3]%
+ \hsize#1\linewidth\hsize
+ \let\set@footnotewidth\@empty
+ \minipagefootnote@init
+}%
+\def\fps@{tbp}%
+\def\fpsd@{tp}%
+\def\width@float{\columnwidth}%
+\def\widthd@float{\textwidth}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\end@@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\check@currbox@count}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@here}
+% \LaTeX\ kernel procedures \cmd\end@float\ and \cmd\end@dblfloat\
+% have been changed to work alike; in particular, floats of both classes
+% are deferred into the same queue.
+% This measure ensures that they will be placed in their original order, 
+% an aspect in which \LaTeX\ is broken.
+%
+% Note: when retrieving floats from the queues, we can differentiate those of the two categories
+% by the width of the box.
+%
+% Floats are processed via an output routine message, and are checked for 
+% sanity in re the float placement options. In the case of full-page-width floats,
+% we ensure that the h and b float placement options are never asserted, because they
+% make no sense.
+%
+% Note that if we get to the end of the float box and still have pending
+% footnotes, we put then out.
+%
+% LaTeX Bug note: if a user types \cmd\begin{table*}[h], the float will never succeed in being placed!
+% we try to catch such cases.
+%
+% Note that the macro \cmd\check@currbox@count\ tries to catch cases where the float placement options
+% are such that the float can never be placed.
+%
+% The calls to \cmd\@iffpsbit\ are part of a procedure to deny certain of the float placement
+% parameters: ``h'' and ``b'' are not possible, the former because the \cmd\marginpar\ mechanism
+% cannot place a full-page-width float within a multicolumn page grid, the latter because nobody
+% has yet written the code to do so (pretty bad reason, I know).
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@iffpsbit} replaces \cs{@getfpsbit}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end@float{%
+ \end@@float{%
+  \check@currbox@count
+ }%
+}%
+\def\end@dblfloat{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@col=\@ne}{%
+  \end@float
+ }{%
+  \end@@float{%
+   \@iffpsbit\@ne{\global\advance\count\@currbox\m@ne}{}%
+   \@iffpsbit\f@ur{\global\advance\count\@currbox-4\relax}{}%
+   \global\wd\@currbox\textwidth % Klootch
+   \check@currbox@count
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\end@@float#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote@here
+ \@endfloatbox
+ #1%
+ \@ifnum{\@floatpenalty <\z@}{%
+  \@largefloatcheck
+  \@cons\@currlist\@currbox
+  \@ifnum{\@floatpenalty <-\@Mii}{%
+   \do@output@cclv{\@add@float}%
+  }{%
+   \vadjust{\do@output@cclv{\@add@float}}%
+   \@Esphack
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \classname{float} package of Anselm Lingnau fails when used under \classname{ltxgrid}, but
+% we can fix things. 
+% We also repair a bug in that package. 
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 531) Fix package \classname{float} }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\float@end@float{%
+ \@endfloatbox
+ \global\setbox\@currbox\float@makebox\columnwidth
+ \let\@endfloatbox\relax
+ \end@float
+}%
+\newcommand\float@end@ltx{%
+ \end@@float{%
+  \global\setbox\@currbox\float@makebox\columnwidth
+  \check@currbox@count
+ }%
+}%
+\newcommand\newfloat@float[3]{%
+ \@namedef{ext@#1}{#3} %!
+ \let\float@do=\relax
+ \xdef\@tempa{\noexpand\float@exts{\the\float@exts \float@do{#3}}}%
+ \@tempa
+ \floatplacement{#1}{#2}%
+ \@ifundefined{fname@#1}{\floatname{#1}{#1}}{} %!
+ \expandafter\edef\csname ftype@#1\endcsname{\value{float@type}}%
+ \addtocounter{float@type}{\value{float@type}} %!
+ \restylefloat{#1}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname fnum@#1\endcsname{%
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname fname@#1\endcsname{} %!
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname
+ }
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+  {%
+   \float@newx{#1}%
+  }{%
+   \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}{}%
+  }%
+}%
+\newcommand\newfloat@ltx[3]{%
+ \@namedef{ext@#1}{#3}%
+ \let\float@do=\relax
+ \xdef\@tempa{\noexpand\float@exts{\the\float@exts \float@do{#3}}}%
+ \@tempa
+ \floatplacement{#1}{#2}%
+ \@ifundefined{fname@#1}{\floatname{#1}{#1}}{}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname ftype@#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\the\c@float@type}%
+ \addtocounter{float@type}{\value{float@type}}%
+ \restylefloat{#1}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname fnum@#1\endcsname{%
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname fname@#1\endcsname{}%
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname
+ }
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+  {%
+   \float@newx{#1}%
+  }{%
+   \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}{}%
+  }%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\newfloat{}{%
+  \@ifx{\float@end\float@end@float}{%
+   \@ifx{\newfloat\newfloat@float}{\true@sw}{\false@sw}%
+   }{\false@sw}% 
+   {%
+    \class@warn{Repair the float package}%
+    \let\float@end\float@end@ltx
+    \let\newfloat\newfloat@ltx
+   }{%
+    \class@warn{Failed to patch the float package}%
+   }%
+ }% 
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Boolean procedure \cmd\@iffpsbit\ is similar to the \cmd\@getfpsbit\ of \LaTeX, except
+% that we do not expose the scratch count register or even change its value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iffpsbit#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \@tempcnta\count\@currbox
+  \divide\@tempcnta#1\relax
+  \@ifodd\@tempcnta{\aftergroup\true@sw}{\aftergroup\false@sw}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In procedure \cmd\check@currbox@count, we calculate the net float placement
+% directive (encoded into \cmd\count\ \cmd\@currbox's least significant four bits).
+% If zero, issue a warning.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Tally the height of the float}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@currbox@count{%
+ \@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\z@}{%
+  \count@\count\@currbox\divide\count@\sixt@@n\multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+  \@tempcnta\count\@currbox\advance\@tempcnta-\count@
+  \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{%
+   \ltxgrid@warn{Float cannot be placed}%
+  }{}%
+  \expandafter\tally@float\expandafter{\@captype}%
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In this case, the float is a \cmd\marginpar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+\providecommand\minipagefootnote@init{}%
+\providecommand\minipagefootnote@here{}%
+\providecommand\tally@float[1]{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@specialoutput}
+% The \cmd\@add@float\ procedure used to reside in standard \LaTeX's \cmd\@specialoutput,
+% which is no more.
+%
+% Historical Note: \cmd\@specialoutput\ and Lamport's method of an output routine dispatcher
+% is the genesis of our more powerful and refined way of using \TeX's output routine to 
+% safely accomplish page makeup tasks. To it and to him we owe acknowledgement and thanks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@specialoutput\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@add@float}
+% In the following, we do not need to execute \cmd\@reinserts, which was wrong anyway, as you cannot
+% reliably recover insertions when they split (unless you have a way of reinserting the captured insertion
+% ahead of the split-off part).
+%
+% Now that full-page-width floats are being processed the same as column floats, we
+% have to nip in here and cause them always to be deferred.
+%
+% At the very end, the \cmd\vsize\ is adjusted for any newly committed float.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@add@float{%
+ \@pageht\ht\@cclv\@pagedp\dp\@cclv
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \@next\@currbox\@currlist{%
+  \csname @floatselect@sw@\thepagegrid\endcsname\@currbox{%
+   \@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\z@}{%
+    \advance \@pageht \@pagedp
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do not assume \cmd\holdinginserts is cleared:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \advance \@pageht \vsize \advance \@pageht -\pagegoal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Commit an `h' float:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@addtocurcol
+   }{%
+    \@addmarginpar
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \@resethfps
+   \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+  }%
+ }{\@latexbug}%
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\z@}{%
+  \@if@sw\if@nobreak\fi{%
+   \nobreak
+  }{%
+   \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+  }%
+ }{}%
+ \set@vsize
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
+% The \cmd\@reinserts\ procedure of standard \LaTeX\ is now obsoleted (it had been erroneous anyway).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@reinserts\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtocurcol}
+% We modify the \cmd\@addtocurcol\ procedure of standard \LaTeX\ 
+% so that a float placed ``here'' may break over pages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@addtocurcol {%
+   \@insertfalse
+   \@setfloattypecounts
+   \ifnum \@fpstype=8
+   \else
+     \ifnum \@fpstype=24
+     \else
+       \@flsettextmin
+       \advance \@textmin \@textfloatsheight
+       \@reqcolroom \@pageht
+       \ifdim \@textmin>\@reqcolroom
+         \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+       \fi
+       \advance \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+       \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+         \@flsetnum \@colnum
+         \ifnum \@colnum>\z@
+           \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+           \if@test
+           \else
+             \@bitor\@currtype\@botlist
+             \if@test
+               \@addtobot
+             \else
+               \ifodd \count\@currbox
+                 \advance \@reqcolroom \intextsep
+                 \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+                   \global \advance \@colnum \m@ne
+                   \global \advance \@textfloatsheight \ht\@currbox
+                   \global \advance \@textfloatsheight 2\intextsep
+                   \@cons \@midlist \@currbox
+                   \if@nobreak
+                     \nobreak
+                     \@nobreakfalse
+                     \everypar{}%
+                   \else
+                     \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+                   \fi
+                   \vskip \intextsep
+                   \unvbox\@currbox %AO
+                   \penalty\interlinepenalty
+                   \vskip\intextsep
+                   \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mii \vskip -\parskip\fi
+                   \outputpenalty \z@
+                   \@inserttrue
+                 \fi
+               \fi
+               \if@insert
+               \else
+                 \@addtotoporbot
+               \fi
+             \fi
+           \fi
+         \fi
+       \fi
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   \if@insert
+   \else
+     \@resethfps
+     \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+   \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% The \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if@twocolumn\ is entirely unused. However its access words are invoked by
+% \LaTeX's \cmd\document\ procedure, so we de-fang it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@twocolumnfalse
+\let\@twocolumntrue\@twocolumnfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
+% The procedure \cmd\@addmarginpar\ used to access \cmd\if@twocolumn, but that switch is not reliable;
+% the better way is to use \cmd\thepagegrid. We establish a convention for a page-grid-oriented
+% procedure, e.g., \cmd\@addmarginpar@one, that emits a boolean, telling this procedure
+% whether to set the marginpar on the left or right.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar{%
+ \@next\@marbox\@currlist{%
+  \@cons\@freelist\@marbox\@cons\@freelist\@currbox
+ }\@latexbug
+ \setbox\@marbox\hb@xt@\columnwidth{%
+  \csname @addmarginpar@\thepagegrid\endcsname{%
+   \hskip-\marginparsep\hskip-\marginparwidth
+   \box\@currbox
+  }{%
+   \hskip\columnwidth\hskip\marginparsep
+   \box\@marbox
+  }%
+  \hss
+ }%
+ \setbox\z@\box\@currbox
+    \@tempdima\@mparbottom
+    \advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
+    \advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
+ \@ifdim{\@tempdima >\z@}{%
+   \@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}%
+ }{%
+   \@tempdima\z@
+ }%
+    \global\@mparbottom\@pageht
+    \global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
+    \global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
+    \global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
+    \advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
+    \global\setbox \@marbox
+                   \vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
+                          \box \@marbox}%
+    \global \ht\@marbox \z@
+    \global \dp\@marbox \z@
+    \kern -\@pagedp
+    \nointerlineskip
+  \box\@marbox
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{turnpage}
+% Any float (viz., \env{figure} or \env{table}) within the scope of this environment
+% will be a turnpage float: It will be assumed to occupy an entire page (constitute a float page),
+% the width will be \cmd\textheight, the height \cmd\textwidth, and the entire float will be presented
+% rotated 90 degrees. 
+%
+% The implementation requires the services of the \cmd\rotatebox\ command, so we supply a dummy definition
+% that explains things to the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{turnpage}{%
+ \def\width@float{\textheight}%
+ \def\widthd@float{\textheight}%
+ \appdef\@endfloatbox{%
+  \@ifxundefined\@currbox{%
+   \ltxgrid@warn{Cannot rotate! Not a float}%
+  }{%
+   \setbox\@currbox\vbox to\textwidth{\vfil\unvbox\@currbox\vfil}%
+   \global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\rotatebox{90}{\box\@currbox}}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}{%
+}%
+\def\rotatebox@dummy#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid@warn{You must load the graphics or graphicx package in order to use the turnpage environment}%
+ #2%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{document@inithook} instead of \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\rotatebox{\let\rotatebox\rotatebox@dummy}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{One-off output routines}
+%
+% These procedures are executed in lieu of \cmd\the\cmd\output\ when the output penalty has the associated flag value.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{output@-1073741824}
+% The first one-off output routine handles the end of the job, wherein
+% \LaTeX\ executes \cmd\@@end, and breaks to the output with a penalty of
+% $"40000000 = 2^{32}/4 = 1073741824$. 
+% We simply discard \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and leave.
+% This means that \LaTeX\ is obligated to do \cmd\clearpage\ as part of
+% its \enve{document} processing, otherwise material will be lost.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{output@-1073741824}{%
+ \deadcycles\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\showbox\@cclv
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \void@cclv
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save@column@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\penalty\cmd\save@column@pen\
+% will be called within a sequence of three such routines by \cmd\execute@message
+% or its companion routine \cmd\execute@message@insert.
+% This procedure must save away any the current page and preserve marks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\save@column@pen=10016
+\@namedef{output@-\the\save@column@pen}{\save@column}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cclv@saved}
+% We take over the \cmd\@holdpg\ box register. Hereafter,
+% we no longer use the \cmd\@holdpg\ box register, so let the world know.
+% This should decisively break packages that assume standard \LaTeX.
+% Breaking decisively is preferred to quietly proceeding erroneously.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let \@cclv@saved \@holdpg
+\let \@holdpg \@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save@column}
+% The procedure \cmd\save@column\ does the actual work of saving away the material
+% on the page. It is invoked both by \cmd\save@column@pen\ and by \cmd\save@column@insert@pen.
+% We save \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and the primitive \cmd\@@topmark.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\save@column{%
+ \@ifvoid\@cclv@saved{%
+  \set@top@firstmark
+  \global\@topmark@saved\expandafter{\@@topmark}%
+ }{}%
+ \global\setbox\@cclv@saved\vbox{%
+  \@ifvoid\@cclv@saved{}{%
+   \unvbox\@cclv@saved
+   \marry@baselines
+  }%
+  \unvbox\@cclv
+  \lose@breaks
+  \remove@lastbox
+ }%
+}%
+\newtoks\@topmark@saved
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prep@cclv}
+% The procedure \cmd\prep@cclv\ is used by message handlers to set up their environment
+% to ape that of the usual output routine, with the boxed-up page in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+% Here, we retrieve the material from \cmd\@cclv@saved, where it was saved away by
+% the one-off output routine associated with \cmd\save@column@pen.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prep@cclv{%
+ \void@cclv
+ \setbox\@cclv\box\@cclv@saved
+ \vbadness\@M
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save@column@insert@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\penalty\cmd\save@column@insert@pen\
+% is similar to that of \cmd\save@column@pen\ augmented with the processing of insertions.
+% It is called by \cmd\execute@message@insert\  (i.e., at a grid change)
+% and saves away the current page and preserves marks.
+% In addition, it saves away any insertions that fall on the current page.
+% As with the natural output routine, it executes in two phases,
+% first with \cmd\holdinginserts\ set, then cleared. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\save@column@insert@pen=10017
+\@namedef{output@-\the\save@column@insert@pen}{\toggle@insert{\savecolumn@holding}{\savecolumn@moving}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The procedure \cmd\savecolumn@holding\ is the first phase of saving a column with its inserts.
+% This phase must detect and remedy the one circumstance that will confound our efforts to propagate marks.
+% It is similar to \cmd\output@holding, except that we have to deal with the protection box, which must
+% remain, because the messaging mechanism is being used.
+%
+% If it appears that we have the pathological ``Big Bad Box'' case at hand, we use the \cmd\dead@cycle@repair@protected\
+% procedure instead of \cmd\dead@cycle\ to do our dead cycle.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{trace@box} instead of \cs{showbox}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savecolumn@holding{%
+ \@if@exceed@pagegoal{\unvcopy\@cclv\remove@lastbox}{%
+  \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv\remove@lastbox}%
+  \outputdebug@sw{\trace@box\z@}{}%
+  \dimen@\ht\@cclv\advance\dimen@-\ht\z@
+  \dead@cycle@repair@protected\dimen@
+ }{%
+  \dead@cycle
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace@box}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% The procedure \cmd\save@column@moving\ is the second phase of saving a column with its inserts. 
+% Now that \cmd\holdinginserts\ is cleared, we can look in the various \cmd\insert\ registers for 
+% our inserts (at present there is only one, \cmd\footins, along with \cmd\footins@saved). 
+% if anything is there, we save it away and ask for another cycle (because it may have split). 
+% 
+% Note that the message that is about to be executed had better deal properly with the contents of 
+% the \cmd\footins@saved\ box.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savecolumn@moving{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\savecolumn@moving}}{}%
+ \@cclv@nontrivial@sw{%
+  \save@column
+ }{%
+  \void@cclv
+ }%
+ \@ifvoid\footins{}{%
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\savecolumn@moving}\trace@scroll{\showbox\footins@saved\showbox\footins}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Save all away in \cmd\footins@saved. Note that if \cmd\footins\ is void, then \cmd\footins@saved\ remains untouched. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifvoid\footins@saved{%
+   \global\setbox\footins@saved\box\footins
+  }{%
+   \global\setbox\footins@saved\vbox\bgroup
+    \unvbox\footins@saved
+    \marry@baselines
+    \unvbox\footins
+   \egroup
+  }%
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box\footins@saved}{}%
+  \protect@penalty\save@column@insert@pen
+ }%
+}%
+\newbox\footins@saved
+\newbox\footins@recovered
+\newbox\column@recovered
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save@message@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\penalty\cmd\save@message@pen\
+% saves away the message that has been passed.
+% This procedure is penultimate in a sequence of one-off output routine calls;
+% earlier ones have saved away the MVL and preserved marks, the last executes the message.
+%
+% Note that we are passing tokens to \TeX's primitive \cmd\mark\ mechanism, so we must ensure
+% that they are not inappropriately expanded. We use the same mechanism for all such cases,
+% namely \cmd\let@mark.
+%
+% Note: we expect that \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv's contents are well known:
+% \cmd\topskip, protection box, and a \cmd\mark, the latter containing the message.
+% But if we came here via \cmd\penalty 10017, there might be an \cmd\insert\ node present as well, 
+% because a footnote may have split. 
+% Because this procedure simply voids out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, such material would be lost.
+% Perhaps we can repair things by manipulating the \cmd\insert \ mechanism temporarily.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\save@message@pen=10018
+\@namedef{output@-\the\save@message@pen}{\save@message}%
+\def\save@message{%
+ \void@cclv 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%FIXME: what if \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv is not empty?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@\expandafter{\@@firstmark}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@message@saved\expandafter{\the\toks@}%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark\expandafter{\the\@topmark@saved}%
+}%
+\gdef\@message@saved{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute@message@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\execute@message@pen\ 
+% simply executes the given message. It is last in a sequence of one-off output routine calls;
+% earlier ones have saved all that require saving.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\execute@message@pen=10019
+\@namedef{output@-\the\execute@message@pen}{\@message@saved}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Output messages}
+%
+% Message handlers are procedures that execute output messages, tokens that are passed to
+% the output routine for execution in an environment appropriate to page makeup.
+%
+% How it works. We put down three large negative penalties, each of which will be handled by
+% the output dispatcher (\emph{not} the natural output routine), each penalty being protected by
+% a removable, non-discardable item (i.e., a box).
+% Either three or four invocations of one-off output routines are involved per message.
+%
+% We make the last of the three protection boxes have a depth equal to the value of \cmd\prevdepth\
+% that was current when the procedure is called. This effectively restores \cmd\prevdepth.
+%
+% In each case, the one-off output routine will remove the extraneous box we have inserted.
+% And the second and third one-off routines will simply void \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, because its contents
+% are entirely artificial.
+%
+% FIXME: not so! If \cmd\holdinginserts\ is cleared, that box may have an insert node; it must be preserved, too.
+%
+% The first routine saves away the current column contents and remembers the \cmd\topmark\ for later
+% use. There is a variant routine that first clears \cmd\holdinginserts, so that the message can
+% handle any inserts present in the boxed-up page; this of course entails yet another
+% visit to the output routine.
+%
+% The penultimate routine saves away the tokens transmitted in via the \cmd\@@mark: the argument of
+% the macro. These tokens are of course the very thing we wish to execute within the safety
+% of the output routine. It also puts down a mark containing the \cmd\topmark\ tokens saved
+% by the first routine. By this means, the mark, which we have clobbered, is restored.
+%
+% The last routine simply executes the given tokens.
+% In the course of doing this, it must take care of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, either by shipping it out,
+% or by \cmd\unvbox ing it onto the MVL.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute@message}
+% The procedure \cmd\execute@message\ simply calls the utility procedure \cmd\@execute@message\
+% with a penalty value for the standard treatment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\execute@message{%
+ \@execute@message\save@column@pen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Implicit second argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute@message@insert}
+% The procedure \cmd\execute@message@insert\ is like \cmd\execute@message\ in all respects
+% except that the penalty value is \cmd\save@column@insert@pen, which arranges for the 
+% message handler involved to deal with the page's insertions.
+% At the same time, we prepare the \cmd\footins\ box so that these insertions can be dealt with.
+%
+% Note:
+% If more insertions are added to \LaTeX\ (presumably via \cmd\newinsert), then they
+% must be dealt with in a way entirely analogous to \cmd\footins.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\execute@message@insert#1{%
+ \@execute@message\save@column@insert@pen{%
+  \setbox \footins \box \footins@saved
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\execute@message@insert}\trace@box\footins}{}%
+  #1%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@execute@message}
+% The utility procedure \cmd\@execute@message\ is called by \cmd\execute@message\ and \cmd\execute@message@insert.
+% We prepare by creating a \cmd\vbox\ containing all the needed nodes and proceed by simply
+% \cmd\unvbox ing that box onto the MVL.
+% We ensure that \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is properly set up for the output message handler
+% by always inserting \cmd\prep@cclv\ in advance of the argument.
+%
+% Note that each one-off output routine is invoked effectively the same as
+% \cmd\protect@penalty, except that the second invocation involves an additional
+% \cmd\mark\ node, and the third a specially prepared protection box.
+%
+% Note also that \TeX's primitive \cmd\mark\ is called here without any expansion protection.
+% This is the only place where it is called that way, but it's OK because those tokens
+% have have been pre-expanded by procedures that call \cmd\execute@message.
+% FIXME: all procedures calling \cmd\execute@message\ must pre-expand their tokens!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@execute@message#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+  \dimen@\prevdepth\@ifdim{\dimen@<\z@}{\dimen@\z@}{}%
+  \setbox\z@\vbox{%
+   \protect@penalty#1%
+   \protection@box
+   \toks@{\prep@cclv#2}%
+   \@@mark{\the\toks@}%
+   \penalty-\save@message@pen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%  \hbox{\vrule\@height\z@\@width\z@\@depth\dimen@}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \setbox\z@\null\dp\z@\dimen@\ht\z@-\dimen@
+   \nointerlineskip\box\z@
+   \penalty-\execute@message@pen
+  }\unvbox\z@
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@output@cclv}
+% The procedure \cmd\do@output@cclv\ provides access to message handlers at their simplest.
+% The message will execute in the usual environment of the output routine, with
+% the boxed-up page in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and we assume that \cmd\holdinginserts\ remains set.
+% This procedure must be invoked within main vertical mode;
+% it is the obligation of the macro writer to ensure that this is the case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@output@cclv{\execute@message}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@output@MVL}
+% The procedure \cmd\do@output@MVL, like \cmd\do@output@cclv, is an interface for messages,
+% but provides two additional services: the command may also be invoked in horizontal mode, and
+% the message handler will execute with the MVL unboxed. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@output@MVL#1{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+  \begingroup\execute@message{\unvbox\@cclv#1}\endgroup
+ }{%
+  \@ifhmode{%
+   \vadjust{\execute@message{\unvbox\@cclv#1}}%
+  }{%
+   \@latexerr{\string\do@output@MVL\space cannot be executed in this mode!}\@eha
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lose@breaks}
+% The purpose of this procedure is to get rid of all the extraneous
+% \cmd\penalty\cmd\@M\ nodes that tend to build up in the MVL.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lose@breaks{%
+ \loopwhile{%
+  \count@\lastpenalty
+  \@ifnum{\count@=\@M}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note: 10000 is a TeX magic number!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \unpenalty\true@sw
+  }{%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removestuff}
+% \cmd\removestuff\ is a document-level command that removes the bottom skip glue item
+% from the MVL.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\removestuff{\do@output@MVL{\unskip\unpenalty}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removephantombox}
+% The procedure \cmd\removephantombox\ is a special-purpose message handler exclusively for 
+% preventing incorrect spacing above display math. It must be issued in
+% horizontal mode within the phantom paragraph generated when display math starts up in
+% vertical mode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\removephantombox{%
+ \vadjust{%
+  \execute@message{%
+   \unvbox\@cclv
+   \remove@lastbox
+   \unskip
+   \unskip
+   \unpenalty
+   \penalty\predisplaypenalty
+   \vskip\abovedisplayskip
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addstuff}
+% \cmd\addstuff\ is a document-level command that adds penalty, glue, or both to the 
+% MVL. The penalty and glue items are rearranged so that all penalties nodes precede all the glue nodes,
+% which is the canonical arrangement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addstuff#1#2{\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\do@output@MVL{\noexpand\@addstuff{#1}{#2}}}\@tempa}%
+\def\@addstuff#1#2{%
+ \skip@\lastskip\unskip
+ \count@\lastpenalty\unpenalty
+ \@if@empty{#1}{}{\penalty#1\relax}%
+ \@ifnum{\count@=\z@}{}{\penalty\count@}%
+ \vskip\skip@
+ \@if@empty{#2}{}{\vskip#2\relax}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\replacestuff}
+% \cmd\replacestuff\ is a document-level command similar to \cmd\addstuff;
+% but it replaces penalty, glue, or both in the MVL.
+% The penalty and glue items are rearranged so that all penalties nodes precede all the glue nodes,
+% which is the canonical arrangement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\replacestuff#1#2{\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\do@output@MVL{\noexpand\@replacestuff{#1}{#2}}}\@tempa}%
+\def\@replacestuff#1#2{%
+ \skip@\lastskip\unskip
+ \count@\lastpenalty\unpenalty
+ \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+ \@ifnum{\count@>\@M}{}{%
+   \@ifnum{\count@=\z@}{\count@=#1\relax}{%
+    \@ifnum{\count@<#1\relax}{}{%
+     \count@=#1\relax
+    }%
+   }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@ifnum{\count@=\z@}{}{\penalty\count@}%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{}{%
+  \@tempskipa#2\relax
+  \@ifdim{\z@>\@tempskipa}{%
+   \advance\skip@-\@tempskipa
+  }{%
+   \@ifdim{\skip@>\@tempskipa}{}{%
+    \skip@\@tempskipa
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+ \vskip\skip@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move@insertions}
+% \begin{macro}{\hold@insertions}
+% In order to avoid bolluxing up \cmd\insert\ registers by our one-off 
+% output routines, we set \cmd\holdinginserts\ to zero by default and only 
+% clear it (briefly) while we handle cases where we want inserts to show up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move@insertions{\global\holdinginserts\z@}%
+\def\hold@insertions{\global\holdinginserts\@ne}%
+\hold@insertions
+\def\toggle@insert#1#2{%
+ \@ifnum{\holdinginserts>\z@}{\move@insertions#1}{\hold@insertions#2}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Messages to alter the page grid}%
+%
+% Here is the implementation of the grid-switching procedures.
+% We perform two checks when changing the page grid; first to ensure that 
+% the target page grid is known (defensive programming), second to ensure that
+% the switch is a non-trivial one. The latter check must be performed within
+% the safety of the output routine, so requires using an output message.
+% Thus, a grid change requires two messages, for a total of six visits to the output routine.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@columngrid}
+% Utility procedure \cmd\do@columngrid\ changes the page grid.
+% Note that this command forces an end to the current paragraph. This is necessary, because
+% a page grid change makes no sense unless we can alter the \cmd\hsize\ before commencing to
+% typeset the following paragraph. So the command should never be executed in horizontal mode
+% anyway.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@columngrid#1#2{%
+ \par
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname open@column@#1\endcsname
+ \@ifx{\relax\@tempa}{%
+  \ltxgrid@warn{Unknown page grid #1. No action taken}%
+ }{%
+  \do@output@MVL{\start@column{#1}{#2}}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start@column}
+% Procedure \cmd\start@column\ lays down the interrupts to switch the page grid.
+% If the change to the page grid would have been trivial, it bails out.
+% It seems a reasonable tradeoff of processing versus security: once we commit
+% to changing the page grid, we clear \cmd\holdinginserts, so there is no turning back.
+% 
+% Note that the second argument to the macro allows us to pass an argument to the 
+% page grid that is starting up. This can be handy, because a single procedure can 
+% handle multiple page grids, differing only by the value of a parameter.
+%
+% FIXME: this means that you cannot switch between mlt page grids in a single step.
+% But do we want to do this, at all, at all?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\start@column#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1}\@ifx{\@tempa\thepagegrid}{%
+  \ltxgrid@info{Already in page grid \thepagegrid. No action taken}%
+ }{%
+  \expandafter\execute@message@insert
+  \expandafter{%
+               \csname shut@column@\thepagegrid\expandafter\endcsname
+               \csname open@column@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+               \set@vsize
+             }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thepagegrid}
+% The macro \cmd\thepagegrid\ tracks what kind of page grid we are in.
+%
+% Note: Access \cmd\thepagegrid\ only within the safety of the output routine.
+%
+% Warning: The page grid should be changed only within the safety of the output routine.
+% People who write multicol page grid mechanisms appear not to understand the matter, so they
+% should particularly heed this warning. Think about it: obviously Lamport did so, which is why
+% his \cmd\twocolumn\ command forced a pagebreak, which is limiting, but safe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thepagegrid{one}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Application Note: implementing a page grid}
+%
+% If you want to create a new page grid for \LaTeX,
+% you must define five procedures with specific names:
+% \cmd\open@column@ name, \cmd\shut@column@ name, \cmd\end@column@ name,
+% \cmd\output@column@ name, and \cmd\@addmarginpar@ name, where ``name'' is the 
+% name of your page grid.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\open@column@ name starts the new page grid. It should define \cmd\thepagegrid,
+% deal with \cmd\box\cmd\pagesofar\ and \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar\ (perhaps by leaving them alone),
+% and it should set the values of \LaTeX's page layout parameters for the column size and height.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\shut@column@ name should expect to be called with \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% cleared (it can assume that \cmd\holdinginserts\ will automatically be restored).
+% It should properly deal with insertions (like footnotes); calling \cmd\@makecolumn\
+% with an argument of \cmd\false@sw\ will do this.
+% It should know that the page grid is being terminated
+% in the middle of a page, so it should make arrangements to carry the footnotes down to the 
+% bottom of the column or page, and it should possibly salt away the material for later
+% incorporation into the page. The box registers \cmd\footsofar\ and \cmd\pagesofar\ are customarily used 
+% for this purpose.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\end@column@ name should kick out a possibly short page containing all the 
+% floats committed to the page. It will be invoked during \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% After that, it should \cmd\unvbox\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\output@column@ name should ship out or commit the current \cmd\@outputbox.
+% In a one-column layout, you ship out; in a multicolumn layout, you commit the box as the contents
+% of a particular column, and if that column is the last, you ship out.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@addmarginpar@ name should return a boolean (either \cmd\true@sw\ or \cmd\false@sw\ or an equivalent)
+% to tell the marginpar mechanism to place the marginal material to the right or left, respectively.
+%
+% You can use the existing page grids ``one'' and ``mlt'' as a point of departure for creating others.
+% The former can be the basis for, say, a single-column page grid with a side column.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagesofar}
+% \begin{macro}{\footsofar}
+% The box register \cmd\pagesofar\ holds the portion of the (full-width) page that is already composed into columns. 
+% This, plus the finished columns, each with its floats, plus \cmd\box255 constitute the full galley.
+%
+% The box register \cmd\footsofar\ holds all of the footnotes associated with \cmd\pagesofar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\pagesofar
+\newbox\footsofar
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\combine@foot@inserts}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% The procedure \cmd\combine@foot@inserts\ is for the purpose of merging 
+% the recently contributed footnotes (usually \cmd\box\cmd\footins)
+% with those saved from earlier on the page (usually \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar). 
+%
+% It is employed in a number of circumstances. 
+%
+% \cmd\@makecolumn (when its argument is \cmd\false@sw): 
+% we are not shipping out, so we need to salt away any footnotes there may be. 
+% 
+% \cmd\shut@column@one: we are leaving the one-column page grid, so recover the footnotes from that material
+% and combine them with those of \cmd\pagesofar. 
+%
+% \expandafter\cmd\csname balance@2\endcsname: two columns of type have been balanced, so now balance the footnotes. 
+% The \cmd\combine@foot@inserts\ procedure is first used to gather footnotes from the columns balanced with those of \cmd\pagesofar. 
+%
+% Bug 571 note: if balancing a two-column page grid, and there had been footnotes in the \cmd\pagesofar, 
+% those footnotes will have been balanced into a page-width box, \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar. 
+% We need to now re-cast them into a single, column-width galley, and only then 
+% combine them with those in \cmd\box\cmd\footins. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\combine@foot@inserts#1#2{%
+  \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\combine@foot@inserts\string#1\string#2}}{}%
+  \@ifvoid#1{%
+    \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box#2}{}\global\setbox#1\box#2%
+  }{%
+   \global\setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+    \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box#1}{}\unvbox#1%
+    \@ifvoid#2{}{%
+     \marry@baselines
+     \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box#2}{}\unvbox#2%
+    }%
+   \egroup
+  }%
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2}}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{One-column page grid}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolumngrid}
+% \begin{macro}{\open@column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\shut@column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\float@column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\end@column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\output@column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar@one}
+% Here are all the procedures necessary for the standard page grid named ``one'':
+% a single column layout. It is, of course, \LaTeX's familiar \cmd\onecolumn\ layout.
+% We begin with the procedure exposed to the style writer.
+% This is, however, not a \LaTeX\ command; users should not change the page grid.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\onecolumngrid{\do@columngrid{one}{\@ne}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that a document class that issues the command \cmd\onecolumn\ will break. This includes
+% \LaTeX's standard classes.dtx-based classes: if your class descends from one of these, you
+% must expunge it of all such commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\onecolumn\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\open@column@one\ takes advantage of the special nature of the one-column
+% page grid to deal with \cmd\box\cmd\pagesofar, therefore it must also reset \cmd\@colroom.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\open@column@one#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\open@column@one\string#1}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Throw the \cmd\pagesofar\ back onto the Main Vertical List. 
+% At this point, we must also \cmd\insert\ the footnotes back into the MVL. 
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \unvbox\pagesofar
+ \@ifvoid{\footsofar}{}{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup\unvbox\footsofar\egroup
+  \penalty\z@
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Record which page grid we are using. Then calculate the set width (\cmd\hsize) and the goal height (\cmd\vsize).
+%
+% Klootch: we set the \cmd\count\cmd\footins\ to a magic number. This is only correct in the case of a two-column document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\thepagegrid{one}%
+ \global\pagegrid@col#1%
+ \global\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+ \global\count\footins\@m
+ \global\divide\count\footins\tw@
+ \set@column@hsize\pagegrid@col
+ \set@colht
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\shut@column@one\ saves away the one-column material into the box register \cmd\pagesofar.
+% Because it is called from a message handler, we are assured that marks are properly taken care of.
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is building a column for saving into \cmd\pagesofar.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 519) Preserve footnotes that are in \cs{footsofar} across a page grid change}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+% We recover the footnotes into \cmd\footsofar\ (globally) and the column into \cmd\pagesofar\ (also globally), voiding \cmd\@outputbox\ by side effect. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\shut@column@one{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\shut@column@one}}{}%
+ \@makecolumn\false@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Split text portion of \cmd\@outputbox\ into \cmd\pagesofar,
+% and add its footnote portion to \cmd\footsofar.
+% Then void out \cmd\@outputbox.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox\pagesofar\vbox\bgroup
+  \recover@column\@outputbox\footsofar\column@recovered\footins@recovered
+ \egroup
+ \begingroup\setbox\z@\box\@outputbox\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% FIXME: is \cmd\combine@foot@inserts\ needed?
+% Also: if this procedure is immediately followed by \cmd\open@column@ \texttt{grid}, then \cmd\set@colht\ will be unneeded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \combine@foot@inserts\footsofar\footins
+ \set@colht
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%FIXME: the first line of a footnote should have an up-strut, and the last line a down-strut, so that they can marry baselines.
+% The latter is the case; how about the former?
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\float@column@one\ takes care of a float column that has been built by 
+% \cmd\@tryfcolumn, in the single-column page grid.
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is followed by \cmd\@outputpage: it is building 
+% a column for \cmd\shipout, rather than for saving into \cmd\pagesofar.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\float@column@one{%
+ \@makecolumn\true@sw
+ \@outputpage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\end@column@one\ is executed at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing,
+% if we were in a one-column page grid, once all permissive float pages have been shipped out.
+% At this point, one could perhaps
+% assume that nothing more need be done, but let us anyway test for committed floats and force a shipout.
+%
+% FIXME: this procedure does the same as \cmd\end@column@mlt 
+% (except for the test of \cmd\@ifx@empty\cmd\@dbltoplist):
+% the two could almost be the same procedure.
+%
+% I have changed this procedure to avoid the testing it once did: it simply puts down interrupts,
+% upon which it relies to correctly do what \cmd\clearpage\ requires.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end@column@one{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv\remove@lastbox
+ \protect@penalty\do@newpage@pen
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\output@column@one\ is dispatched from the output routine when
+% we have completed a page (that is, a column in a one-column page grid);
+% it ships out the page using the \cmd\@outputpage.
+% It will be followed up with an output routine message to prepare a new column.
+%
+% Query: by what mechanism do the footnotes get placed onto such a page?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@column@one{%
+ \@outputpage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure determines which side of the page a marginpar will appear.
+% It reproduces the behavior of standard \LaTeX.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar@one{%
+ \@if@sw\if@mparswitch\fi{%
+  \@ifodd\c@page{\false@sw}{\true@sw}%
+ }{\false@sw}{%
+  \@if@sw\if@reversemargin\fi{\false@sw}{\true@sw}%
+ }{%
+  \@if@sw\if@reversemargin\fi{\true@sw}{\false@sw}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure yields a Boolean value; it determines whether a float in the deferred queue
+% is appropriate for placing. In the one-column grid, all floats are so.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@floatselect@sw@one#1{\true@sw}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\onecolumngrid@push{%
+ \do@output@MVL{%
+  \@ifnum{\pagegrid@col=\@ne}{%
+   \global\let\restorecolumngrid\@empty
+  }{%
+   \xdef\restorecolumngrid{%
+    \noexpand\start@column{\thepagegrid}{\the\pagegrid@col}%
+   }%
+   \start@column{one}{\@ne}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\onecolumngrid@pop{%
+ \do@output@MVL{\restorecolumngrid}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Two-column page grid}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumngrid}
+% \begin{macro}{\open@column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\shut@column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\end@column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\output@column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@footnotewidth@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@footnotewidth@two}
+% \begin{macro}{\compose@footnotes@two}
+% Here are all the procedures necessary for the standard page grid named ``mlt'':
+% the multi-column page grid. With an argument of "2", it is,
+% of course, \LaTeX's familiar \cmd\twocolumn\ layout.
+%
+% We start with the procedure to switch to the two-column page grid.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\twocolumngrid{\do@columngrid{mlt}{\tw@}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The corresponding command of \LaTeX\ is obsolete.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\twocolumn\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Of course, \cmd\@topnewpage\ is also obsolete. Just do 
+%\begin{quote}
+% \cmd\clearpage\cmd\onecolumngrid<vertical mode material>\cmd\twocolumngrid.
+%\end{quote}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@topnewpage\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If your document class descends from one of \LaTeX's standard classes.dtx-derived
+% classes, it will break. You must expunge from it all such commands.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+%
+% Bug 571 note: it is not enough to have the \cmd\pagesofar, we must also deal with the \cmd\footsofar.
+% At this juncture, we should treat the case where the document has an essentially two-column page grid, 
+% with occasional excursions into the one-column grid. 
+% If a footnote is set within the latter grid, its set width should be that of the two-column grid. 
+%
+% When a page is shipped out, if we are currently in a one-column grid, we will compose the footnotes onto the page
+% in the form of balanced columns. This is only one way to handle footnotes: \classname{multicol}
+% appears to set footnotes on the full text width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\open@column@mlt#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\open@column@mlt\string#1}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, we must \cmd\insert\ the footnotes back into the Main Vertical List.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifvoid{\footsofar}{}{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup\unvbox\footsofar\egroup
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Record which page grid we are using. Then calculate the set width (\cmd\hsize) and the goal height (\cmd\vsize).
+%
+% Klootch: we set the \cmd\count\cmd\footins\ to a magic number. This value is valid whether footnotes are being
+% set on the column width or the full text width. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\thepagegrid{mlt}%
+ \global\pagegrid@col#1%
+ \global\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+ \global\count\footins\@m
+ \set@column@hsize\pagegrid@col
+ \set@colht
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\shut@column@mlt\ ends the current column, balances the columns, and
+% salts away all in \cmd\pagesofar. Because it is called in a message handler,
+% we are assured that marks are handled properly.
+% Attention: because this procedure balances columns, all footnotes are
+% held aside in \cmd\footsofar\ for placement at the bottom of the page.
+%
+% Bug note: the last macro executed by this procedure is \cmd\set@colht, 
+% but had been erroneously \cmd\set@colroom.
+% I now believe that the latter should be changed pretty much everywhere to the former.
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is building material for \cmd\pagesofar, rather than 
+% for \cmd\shipout.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\shut@column@mlt{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\shut@column@mlt}}{}%
+ \@cclv@nontrivial@sw{%
+  \@makecolumn\false@sw
+  \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur<\pagegrid@col}{%
+   \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname col@\the\pagegrid@cur\endcsname\box\@outputbox
+   \global\advance\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+  }{}%
+ }{%
+  \void@cclv
+ }%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur>\@ne}{%
+  \csname balance@\the\pagegrid@col\endcsname
+  \grid@column\@outputbox{}%
+  \@combinepage\false@sw
+  \@combinedblfloats
+  \global\setbox\pagesofar\box\@outputbox
+  \show@pagesofar@size
+ }{}%
+ \set@colht
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\float@column@mlt\ takes care of a float page that has been built by \cmd\@tryfcolumn,
+% in the multi-column page grid. It is coincidentally identical to what happens in 
+% \cmd\do@startpage\ when a page needs to be shipped out.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output@combined@page}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\float@column@mlt{%
+  \@output@combined@page
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\end@column@mlt\ is executed at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing,
+% if we were in a multi-column page grid, once all permissive float pages have been shipped out.
+% If no floats are committed and if no columns are yet filled, we have nothing to do.
+% Otherwise, we kick out a column and try again.
+%
+% Note that in our code to kick out a column, we must deal properly with the case where the column
+% is trivial: it will have nothing but \cmd\topskip\ glue plus a protection box. We substitute an ordinary
+% \cmd\null\ for the protection box.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end@column@mlt{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@toplist{%
+  \@ifx@empty\@botlist{%
+   \@ifx@empty\@dbltoplist{%
+    \@ifx@empty\@deferlist{%
+     \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur=\@ne}{%
+      \false@sw
+     }{%
+      \true@sw
+     }%
+    }{%
+     \true@sw
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \true@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \true@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \true@sw
+ }%
+ % true = kick out a column and try again
+ {%
+  \@cclv@nontrivial@sw{%
+   \unvbox\@cclv\remove@lastbox
+  }{%
+   \unvbox\@cclv\remove@lastbox\unskip\null
+  }%
+  \protect@penalty\do@newpage@pen
+  \protect@penalty\do@endpage@pen
+ }{%
+  \unvbox\@cclv\remove@lastbox
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\output@column@mlt (cf. \cmd\output@column@one)
+% is dispatched from the output routine when
+% we have completed a column in a multi-column page grid).
+% (It replaces the \cmd\@outputdblcol\ of standard \LaTeX.)
+% If a complete set of columns is at hand, it ships out the page and 
+% lays down an interrupt for \cmd\do@startpage@pen, which will commit the 
+% full-page-width floats to the next page.
+% Like \cmd\output@column@mlt, this is followed by
+% an output routine message to prepare a new column.
+%
+% If a page needs to be shipped out, it uses the same mechanism as \cmd\do@startpage.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output@combined@page}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@column@mlt{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur<\pagegrid@col}{%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname col@\the\pagegrid@cur\endcsname\box\@outputbox
+  \global\advance\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+ }{%
+  \set@adj@colht\dimen@
+  \grid@column\@outputbox{}%
+  \@output@combined@page
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The procedure \cmd\output@column@mlt\ obsoletes \LaTeX's \cmd\@outputdblcol
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@outputdblcol\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure yields a Boolean value; it determines whether a float in the deferred queue
+% is appropriate for placement in the column. In the multi-column grid, only those narrower than \cmd\textwidth\ are so.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@floatselect@sw@mlt#1{\@if@notdblfloat{#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure determines which side of the page a marginpar will appear.
+% It reproduces the behavior of standard \LaTeX.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar@mlt{% emits a boolean
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur=\@ne}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cmd\set@footnotewidth@one\ sets the width of type within footnotes to span the full text width; 
+% \cmd\set@footnotewidth@two\ to span a single column of the two-column grid, and 
+% more generally \cmd\set@footnotewidth@mlt\ for a multi-column page grid. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@footnotewidth@one{%
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \linewidth\hsize
+}%
+\def\set@footnotewidth@two{\set@footnotewidth@mlt\tw@}%
+\def\set@footnotewidth@mlt#1{%
+ \hsize\textwidth
+ \advance\hsize\columnsep
+ \divide\hsize#1%
+ \advance\hsize-\columnsep
+ \linewidth\hsize
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cmd\compose@footnotes\ is the procedure for arranging the footnotes for
+% placement at the bottom of the page or column. 
+% In the former case, the material will be shipped out; in the latter, we must allow
+% the column to possibly be balanced later on. 
+%
+% \cmd\compose@footnotes@one\ is a no-op, because the footnotes require no rearrangement. 
+% In a scheme where footnotes are set on the full text width, this would be the procedure called. 
+%
+% \cmd\compose@footnotes@two\ implements the case where a two-column document has been interrupted
+% with full-page-width text (e.g., the widetext environment or the end of the document), 
+% and a natural page break appears. 
+%
+% In either case, we assume that argument \verb+#1+ is an \cmd\insert\  register and must be assigned globally,
+% so that when it is accessed with \cmd\box\ or \cmd\unvbox, it will be voided globally as well. 
+% 
+% To extend this scheme to a three-column page grid \cmd\compose@footnotes@thr@@\ would be created:
+% it would balance the saved up footnotes into three columns. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\compose@footnotes@one#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\compose@footnotes@one\string#1}\trace@box#1}{}%
+}%
+\let\compose@footnotes\compose@footnotes@one
+\def\compose@footnotes@two#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\compose@footnotes@two\string#1}\trace@box#1}{}%
+ \setbox\z@\box\@tempboxa
+ \let\recover@column\recover@column@null
+ \let\marry@baselines\@empty
+ \balance@two#1\@tempboxa
+ \global\setbox#1\hbox to\textwidth{\box#1\hfil\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@box#1}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Page grid utility procedures}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagegrid@cur}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagegrid@col}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagegrid@init}
+% We take over \LaTeX's \cmd\col@number, and \cmd\@leftcolumn, which are obsolete (\cmd\@holdpg\ could also be taken over). 
+% We create two counters to hold the columns in the page grid and the current column within.
+% We also create the first of a set of box registers to hold the committted columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\pagegrid@cur\col@number
+\let\col@number\@undefined
+\newcount\pagegrid@col
+\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+\expandafter\let\csname col@\the\pagegrid@cur\endcsname\@leftcolumn
+\let\@leftcolumn\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default is for maximum two columns.
+% If your class will require more columns, assign that number to \cmd\pagegrid@col\
+% before \envb{document} time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\pagegrid@col\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\pagegrid@init\ is a loop, exercising \cmd\newbox\ sufficiently to create the 
+% boxes for holding the columns in the page grid; these have names like \expandafter\cmd\csname col@1\endcsname, etc. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagegrid@init{%
+ \advance\pagegrid@cur\@ne
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur<\pagegrid@col}{%
+  \csname newbox\expandafter\endcsname\csname  col@\the\pagegrid@cur\endcsname
+  \pagegrid@init
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \pagegrid@init
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\grid@column}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+% The procedure \cmd\grid@column\ knows how to lay up the columns in a multi-column page grid.
+% It uses utility procedures \cmd\append@column@\ and \cmd\box@column.
+%
+% The first argument is the box register to create, usually \cmd\@outputbox, and provides both input and output. 
+% The second argument a dimension, allowing us to strut down the depth of the box we create. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\grid@column#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\grid@column\string#1}}{}%
+ \global\setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+  \hb@xt@\textwidth\bgroup
+   \vrule\@height\z@\@width\z@\@if@empty{#2}{}{\@depth#2}%
+   \pagegrid@cur\@ne
+   \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur<\pagegrid@col}{\loopwhile{\append@column@\pagegrid@cur\pagegrid@col}}{}%
+   \box@column#1%
+  \egroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% FIXME: page depth!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \vskip\z@skip
+ \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\append@column@}
+% \begin{macro}{\box@column}
+% \begin{macro}{\marry@baselines}
+% The procedure \cmd\append@column@\ appends columns for \cmd\grid@column,
+% \cmd\box@column\ builds the columns for \cmd\append@column@,
+% and \cmd\marry@baselines\ pastes vertical things back together.
+% \changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{marry@height} }
+%
+% Note that \cmd\box@column\ makes an attempt to prevent excessive \cmd\topskip\
+% or \cmd\baselineskip\ glue
+% from being applied by \TeX\ when \cmd\@outputbox\ is contributed to the MVL.
+% If this is not done, it is possible to get into an infinite loop in the corner case,
+% wherein the page grid is changed to one column and the balanced-up columns are
+% already sufficient to fill the page.
+%
+% Note (AO 0920):  I have changed the dimension involved with \cmd\box@column\ from
+% \cmd\vsize\ to \cmd\textheight, because the former is certainly not the correct value
+% to use: it will change if floats have been placed in the last column of the page.
+% I believe \cmd\textheight\ is the correct parameter to use here.
+%
+% A REVTeX4 user, Sergey Strelkov (strelkov@maik.rssi.ru), wants the option
+% of ragged-bottom columns. Implementing this feature properly means reboxing the 
+% columns to their natural height only if \cmd\raggedcolumn@sw\ is true.
+% Otherwise, they get reboxed to their common height (\cmd\@colht?).
+%
+% Note that the default has hereby changed from ragged to flush. 
+% It's not clear that anyone but Sergey will notice.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\marry@skip\  addresses (in a limited way)
+% the fact that neither the value of \cmd\baselineskip\ nor that of \cmd\topskip\
+% can be relied upon for the purpose of marrying the baselines of two split columns.
+% (Because there might have been a local change to their values at the point where
+% the output routine got triggered.)
+%
+% For best results, your document class should call for grid changes only when in basal text
+% settings. The \cmd\marry@baselines\ procedure will use the values appropriate to that point
+% when attempting to put the columns back together.
+%
+% In any case, we are not attempting to solve the more general problem of how to marry baselines
+% where the leading can change arbitrarily within the galley or where glue could have been trimmed
+% at a page top.
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+% Procedure \cmd\append@column@\ composes a column onto the horizontal list along with its \cmd\columnseprule. 
+% Its arguments are: \verb+#1+---\cmd\pagegrid@cur, and \verb+#2+---\cmd\pagegrid@col
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\append@column@#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\box@column\csname col@\the#1\endcsname
+ \hfil\vrule\@width\columnseprule\hfil
+ \advance#1\@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This procedure is the argument of \cmd\loopwhile, so it must leave a Boolean (e.g., \cmd\true@sw) in \TeX's scanner. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{#1<#2}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine@foot@inserts} and \cs{grid@column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append@column@} its column counters}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% Procdure \cmd\box@column, used by \cmd\append@column@, puts down a box containing the specified column.
+% Its height is adjusted down to \cmd\@colht, if needed; likewise, the width is set to \cmd\columnwidth. 
+% The rag at the bottom is controlled by \cmd\raggedcolumn@skip. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\box@column#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\box@column\string#1}}{}%
+ \raise\topskip
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth\bgroup
+  \dimen@\ht#1\@ifdim{\dimen@>\@colht}{\dimen@\@colht}{}%
+  \count@\vbadness\vbadness\@M
+  \dimen@ii\vfuzz\vfuzz\maxdimen
+  \ltxgrid@info@sw{\saythe\@colht\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+  \vtop to\dimen@\bgroup
+   \hrule\@height\z@
+   \unvbox#1%
+   \raggedcolumn@skip
+  \egroup
+  \vfuzz\dimen@ii
+  \vbadness\count@
+  \hss
+ \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The purpose of procedure \cmd\marry@baselines\ is to ensure that the baseline spacing is correct; 
+% it does this by making adjustments to the previous line, compensating for its depth, and by adding in 
+% skip glue in an amount that assumes the added material has \cmd\topskip\ glue above. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\marry@baselines{%
+ \begingroup
+  \setbox\z@\lastbox
+  \@ifvoid{\z@}{%
+   \endgroup
+  }{%
+   \aftergroup\kern
+   \aftergroup-%
+   \expandafter\box\expandafter\z@\expandafter\endgroup\the\dp\z@\relax
+  }%
+ \vskip\marry@skip\relax
+}%
+\gdef\marry@skip{\z@skip}%
+\def\set@marry@skip{%
+ \begingroup
+  \skip@\baselineskip\advance\skip@-\topskip
+  \@ifdim{\skip@>\z@}{%
+   \xdef\marry@skip{\the\skip@}%
+  }{}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{document@inithook} instead of \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\raggedcolumn@sw{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw}{}%
+}%
+\def\raggedcolumn@skip{%
+ \vskip\z@\raggedcolumn@sw{\@plus.0001fil\@minus.0001fil}{}\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combinepage}
+% The procedure \cmd\@combinepage\ prepends the stored page (\cmd\pagesofar) to \cmd\@outputbox\ and
+% employs \cmd\@combineinserts\ to lay down the footnotes. 
+% The next event will usually be shipping out the made-up page, but not always. 
+% Therefore the argument of \cmd\@combinepage, which must be a Boolean, determines
+% if the footnotes are to be combined into this page.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 452) Support length checking: show size of shipped out text.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%
+% QUERY: In the following, if \cmd\box\cmd\footins\ is not void, its contents are lost. Can this ever happen?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combinepage#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\@combinepage\string#1}}{}%
+ \@ifvoid\pagesofar{}{%
+  \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+   \unvbox\pagesofar
+   \marry@baselines
+   \unvbox\@outputbox
+  }%
+ }%
+ #1{%
+  \@ifvoid\footsofar{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, \cmd\footins\ is empty; all of the footnotes have been combined into \cmd\footsofar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \show@box@size{Combining page footnotes}\footsofar
+   \setbox\footins\box\footsofar
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Depending on the page grid, we compose the footnotes for placement on the page. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \compose@footnotes
+   \@combineinserts\@outputbox\footins
+  }%
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%QUERY: The following line was removed, probably to fix a bug. When was this done?
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \global\setbox\footins\box\footsofar
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cflt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cflb}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{}
+% We modify \LaTeX's \cmd\@cflt\ and \cmd\@cflb\ to remove the unwanted glue with \cmd\unskip.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@cflt{%
+ \let \@elt \@comflelt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \@toplist
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+  \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+  \unvbox\@tempboxa\unskip
+  \topfigrule\vskip \textfloatsep
+  \unvbox\@outputbox
+ }%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@toplist}%
+ \global\let\@toplist\@empty
+}%
+\def \@cflb {%
+ \let\@elt\@comflelt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \@botlist
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+  \unvbox\@outputbox
+  \vskip \textfloatsep\botfigrule
+  \unvbox\@tempboxa\unskip
+ }%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@botlist}%
+ \global \let \@botlist\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combinedblfloats}
+% We modify \LaTeX's \cmd\@combinedblfloats\ to be more appropriate for incremental page building:
+% we \cmd\unvbox\ the \cmd\@outputbox.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combinedblfloats{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@dbltoplist{}{%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}%
+  \let\@elt\@comdblflelt\@dbltoplist
+  \let\@elt\relax\xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@dbltoplist}%
+  \global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty
+  \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+   %\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth   %% probably not needed, CAR
+   \unvbox\@tempboxa\unskip
+   \@ifnum{\@dbltopnum>\m@ne}{\dblfigrule}{}%FIXME: how is \@dbltopnum maintained?
+   \vskip\dbltextfloatsep
+   \unvbox\@outputbox
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@column@hsize}%
+% The procedure \cmd\set@column@hsize\ takes care of setting up the horizontal dimensions
+% for the current page grid. The present routine will certainly not be adequate for more
+% complex page layouts (e.g., with a side column), but works for the common ones.
+% \changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{set@marry@height} }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@column@hsize#1{%
+ \pagegrid@col#1%
+ \global\columnwidth\textwidth
+ \global\advance\columnwidth\columnsep
+ \global\divide\columnwidth\pagegrid@col
+ \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep
+ \global\hsize\columnwidth
+ \global\linewidth\columnwidth
+ \skip@\baselineskip\advance\skip@-\topskip
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid@col>\@ne}{\set@marry@skip}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@colht}%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@colroom}%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vsize}%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@adj@colht}%
+% The story of \cmd\textheight, \cmd\@colht, \cmd\@colroom, and \cmd\vsize.
+%
+% \cmd\textheight---height of the text column. Not a running parameter, however, each time a page is 
+% shipped out, the \cmd\textheight\ could in principle be altered. This must be done before
+%
+% \cmd\@colht---\cmd\textheight\ minus the height of any full-page-width floats. The latter are committed
+% only just after shipping out, and only if we are in a multicolumn page grid.
+% Therefore, \cmd\@colht\ should be set after a \cmd\shipout\ (by \cmd\@outputpage) and
+% will be adjusted when full-page-width floats are committed to the fresh page by \cmd\do@startpage.
+%
+% \cmd\@colroom---\cmd\@colht\ (adjusted by \cmd\pagesofar) minus the height of any column-width floats.
+% The latter are committed anywhere on the page, at which point \cmd\@colroom\ must be adjusted.
+% Therefore, \cmd\@colroom\ should be set (by \cmd\set@colroom) whenever a column is prepared (by ).
+%FIXME: committed (by \cmd\output@column@) and
+% will be adjusted (by \cmd\@add@float\ or \cmd\do@startcolumn) whenever a float is committted to the column.
+%
+% \cmd\vsize---\cmd\@colroom.
+% Therefore, \cmd\vsize\ should be set (by \cmd\set@vsize) whenever
+% the \cmd\@colroom\ is set (by \cmd\set@colroom) or adjusted (by \cmd\@add@float\ or \cmd\do@startcolumn)
+%FIXME: or when the \cmd\pagesofar\ box is changed (after invoking \cmd\open@column@).
+%
+% Question: what if there are committed floats? Footnotes?
+% Answer: full-page-width floats are only committed at top, and they are already reckoned with in \cmd\@colht.
+% Column-width committed floats are incorporated by \cmd\@makecolumn.
+%
+% As to footnotes, our scheme is to keep the \cmd\footins\ insert register up to date, and to use the insert mechanism 
+% to ensure room for footnotes. 
+% When a change is made to the page grid, the footnotes will need to be propagated back into the MVL. 
+%
+% Note: FIXME: adjusting for \cmd\pagesofar\ is done at not quite the right time. I need to reexamine \cmd\set@colht,
+% because \cmd\@dbltoplist\ and \cmd\pagesofar\ really should be on the same footing.
+% Perhaps \cmd\@colht\ and \cmd\@colroom\ should both deal with their respective ``lists'' in the same way?
+%
+% These concerns will be particularly germane if we ever extend this package to deal with full-page-width floats
+% placed at the bottom of the page, or committed on the same page as called out.
+%
+% It occurs to me that we should ditch \cmd\set@colroom\ and only ever execute \cmd\set@colht, 
+% which sets \cmd\@colroom\ as a side effect.
+% If so, we can make \cmd\@colht\ take \cmd\pagesofar\ into account, as it should. Then \cmd\@colht\ will return to its 
+% original significance as the value that \cmd\@colroom\ is set to after a column is committed.
+%
+% On the other hand, why not simply forget all this caching and (re-)calculate \cmd\vsize\ as late as possible?
+% Particularly, \cmd\@colht\ is an artifact of the old way of doing things, where once it was set, it would never change.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@colht{%
+ \set@adj@textheight\@colht
+ \global\let\enlarge@colroom\@empty
+ \set@colroom
+}%
+\def\set@adj@textheight#1{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\set@adj@textheight\string#1}\saythe\textheight}{}%
+ #1\textheight
+ \def\@elt{\adj@page#1}%
+ \@booleantrue\firsttime@sw\@dbltoplist
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \global#1#1\relax
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\saythe#1}{}%
+}%
+\def\set@colroom{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\set@colroom}}{}%
+ \set@adj@colht\@colroom
+ \@if@empty\enlarge@colroom{}{%
+  \global\advance\@colroom\enlarge@colroom\relax
+  \ltxgrid@info@sw{\saythe\@colroom}{}%
+ }%
+ \@ifdim{\@colroom>\topskip}{}{%
+  \ltxgrid@info{Not enough room: \string\@colroom=\the\@colroom; increasing to \the\topskip}%
+  \@colroom\topskip
+ }%
+ \global\@colroom\@colroom
+%<ignore> \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\set@colroom\string\vsize=\string\colroom}\saythe\vsize}{}%
+ \set@vsize
+}%
+%
+\def\set@vsize{%
+ \global\vsize\@colroom
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\set@vsize\string\vsize=\string\colroom}\saythe\vsize}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@adj@colht#1{%
+ #1\@colht
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\set@adj@colht\string#1-\string\pagesofar}\saythe#1}{}%
+ \@ifvoid\pagesofar{}{%
+  \advance#1-\ht\pagesofar\advance#1-\dp\pagesofar
+  \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\pagesofar}\saythe#1}{}%
+ }%
+ \def\@elt{\adj@column#1}%
+ \@booleantrue\firsttime@sw\@toplist
+ \@booleantrue\firsttime@sw\@botlist
+ \let\@elt\relax
+}%
+\def\adj@column#1#2{%
+ \advance#1-\ht#2%
+ \advance#1-\firsttime@sw{\textfloatsep\@booleanfalse\firsttime@sw}{\floatsep}%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\adj@column\string#1-\string#2}\saythe#1}{}%
+}%
+\def\adj@page#1#2{%
+ \advance#1-\ht#2%
+ \advance#1-\firsttime@sw{\dbltextfloatsep\@booleanfalse\firsttime@sw}{\dblfloatsep}%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\adj@page\string#1-\string#2}\saythe#1}{}%
+}%
+\def\set@adj@box#1#2{%
+ \@ifvoid#2{}{%
+  \advance#1-\ht#2\advance#1-\dp#2%
+  \@booleantrue\temp@sw
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\class@info{\string\set@adj@box\string#2}\saythe#1}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@tail}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% In \cmd\@outputpage@tail, we set \cmd\@colht\ and the float placement parameters
+% (this is the one point where it is appropriate to set \cmd\@colht).
+% At \cmd\do@startpage\ time, we adjust \cmd\@colht's value to reflect committed 
+% full-page-width floats.
+%
+% Note: with a correctly written output routine, a call to \cmd\@outputpage\ will inevitably be 
+% followed by a call to \cmd\do@startpage, so these procedure calls would be unneeded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@outputpage@tail{%
+ \set@colht          % FIXME: needed?
+ \@floatplacement    % FIXME: needed?
+ \@dblfloatplacement % FIXME: needed?
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{balance@2}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{balance@2} defined more transparently}%
+% We define procedures for balancing columns in a multicolumn layout.
+% For now, we define only one: a procedure for the two-column grid.
+% All others will simply \cmd\relax\ out.
+%
+% The following code defines \verb+\balance@2+ without all the clunky \cmd\csname\ commands
+% in the replacement part,
+% which appears on the right-hand side of the assignment to \cmd\toks@.
+%
+% The method is straightforward: balance the two columns of text, and balance the footnotes.
+% Later on, \cmd\@combineinserts\ will be called to place the footnotes after the now-balanced columns.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/14}{(AO, 519) \cs{footins} content must be preserved and reintegrated}
+% It was necessary to deal with the case where \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar\ was not empty
+% upon execution of this balancing code. We store it away in \cmd\box\cmd\footins\ and
+% add it back in afterwards.
+%
+% Here is a conundrum: if we switch between single-, two-, and three-column page grids:
+% On what measure should the footnotes be set?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\1=\cat@letter
+ \catcode`\2=\cat@letter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\toks@\ contains the repacement part for an effective \cmd\def\cs{balance@2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\balance@two, by side effect, strips footnotes into \cmd\box\cmd\footins. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setbox\footins\box\footsofar
+  \balance@two\col@1\@outputbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We ensure that the box assignments are global. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \global\setbox\col@1\box\col@1
+  \global\setbox\@outputbox\box\@outputbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line puts all footnotes into the footnote galley, \cmd\footsofar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \combine@foot@inserts\footsofar\footins
+ }%
+ \aftergroup\def\aftergroup\balance@2\expandafter
+\endgroup\expandafter{\the\toks@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\balance@two}
+% The procedure \cmd\balance@two\ takes two columns and balances them; in the process it removes
+% any footnotes that may be present to a place of safety \cmd\footsofar, 
+% for later placement at the foot of the shipped-out page. 
+% The box register \cmd\box\cmd\@ne\ is the aggregate of all columns.
+% The box register \cmd\box\cmd \z@\ is the last column.
+% The box register \cmd\box\cmd\tw@\ is the first column.
+% The \cmd\dimen\ register \cmd\dimen@\  is the trial value to \cmd\vsplit\ to, 
+% initially half the height of \cmd\box\cmd\@ne.
+% The \cmd\dimen\ register \cmd\dimen@i\ is the increment for the next trial;
+% its initial value is equal to the initial value of \cmd\dimen@.
+% The \cmd\dimen\ register \cmd\dimen@ii\ is the difference of the heights of the two columns.
+%
+% The procedure uses a binary search for that value of \cmd\dimen@\ which is stable to within .5\cmd\p@\ and which
+% makes the last column be shorter than the others.
+%
+% This procedure can be extended to multiple columns simply by changing it to execute \cmd\vsplit\ multiple
+% times (one less than the total number of columns in the page layout) and to calculating \cmd\dimen@ii\
+% to be the difference of the heights of last column and the \cmd\dimen@.
+% Upon termination of the search, one would excute the \cmd\vsplit s once again, this time 
+% using the actual \cmd\col@\ box registers to store the 
+% balanced columns, thereby clobbering their former contents.
+%
+% Bug Note:
+% as originally written, this macro had a bug, which is well worth avoiding under similar circumstances anywhere.
+% So, learn from the mistakes of others, as they say.
+% In trying to remove the depth of the boxes created via \cmd\vsplit\ within the \cmd\loopwhile\ control,
+% I originally coded
+% \cmd\unvbox
+% \cmd\z@\
+% \cmd\setbox
+% \cmd\z@
+% \cmd\lastbox\
+% \cmd\dimen@
+% \cmd\dp
+% \cmd\z@\
+% \cmd\box
+% \cmd\z@\
+% \cmd\vskip-%
+% \cmd\dimen@.
+% The error here is that the (horizontal) shift of the last box in the vertical list will be lost in the process.
+% Simply put, \cmd\setbox\cmd\z@\cmd\lastbox\ fails to retain the shift of the box node in the vertical list,
+% and when it is put down again via \cmd\box\cmd\z@, it will no longer have the correct shift.
+%
+% This bug affected things placed in the MVL with \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, \cmd\parshape, and 
+% \cmd\hangindent, as well as things shifted by \TeX's primitive mechanisms.
+%
+% A superior strategy for removing the depth of the last line of the list is more expensive, but safer:
+% make a separate copy of the list, measure the depth of the last box as above, but then discard
+% the list, retaining only the value of the dimension.
+% 
+% Note that this procedure will not work if the material within is excessively chunky.
+% A particular failure mode exists where none of the material is allocated to the last (right) column.
+% We detect this case and revert to unbalanced columns.
+%
+% Another failure mode is where a large chunk occurs at the beginning of the composite box.
+% In this case, the left column may fill up even when \cmd\dimen@\ is very small.
+% If this configuration leaves the left column longer than the right, then we are done,
+% but \cmd\dimen@\ by  no means represents the height of either finished box.
+%
+% Therefore the last step in the process is to rebox the two columns to a common height determined
+% independently of the balancing process.
+%
+% The dimension involved is checked against the current \cmd\@colroom\ to guard against the case where
+% excessive material happens to fall in either column.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set@colroom} to \cs{set@colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Footnotes, when columns are balanced or when they are composed with their column}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Change \cs{balance@two}'s balancing algorithm to more successfully balance extremely short columns.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\balance@two#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\balance@two\string#1\string#2}}{}%
+ \outputdebug@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The first step is to recover the footnotes from the bottoms of the two columns (globally, into \cmd\footsofar)
+% and to combine the text into \cmd\box\cmd\@ne, but without voiding either of the argument boxes. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\thr@@\copy\footsofar
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox\bgroup
+  \@ifvoid{#1}{}{%
+   \recover@column#1\footsofar\column@recovered\footins@recovered
+   \@ifvoid{#2}{}{\marry@baselines}%
+  }%
+  \@ifvoid{#2}{}{%
+   \recover@column#2\footsofar\column@recovered\footins@recovered
+  }%
+ \egroup
+ \outputdebug@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox\@ne}}{}%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox\footsofar}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Hereunder, \cmd\dimen@\ is the split value. We adjust it until the step size is small enough, while the split is acceptable. 
+% Also, \cmd\dimen@i\ is the step size. Once this value is greater than a half point, we must iterate. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\ht\@ne\divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \dimen@i\dimen@
+ \vbadness\@M
+ \vfuzz\maxdimen
+ \splittopskip\topskip
+ \loopwhile{%
+  \setbox\z@\copy\@ne\setbox\tw@\vsplit\z@ to\dimen@
+  \remove@depth\z@\remove@depth\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line would provide a diagnostic of the iterations of column balancing, were we to use it.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \outputdebug@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox\tw@\showbox\z@}}{}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% Hereunder, \cmd\dimen@ii\ is used to reckon the difference in height between the left box and the right. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \dimen@ii\ht\tw@\advance\dimen@ii-\ht\z@
+  \dimen@i=.5\dimen@i
+  \ltxgrid@info@sw{\saythe\dimen@\saythe\dimen@i\saythe\dimen@ii}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the columns are within a half-point of each other, 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifdim{\dimen@ii<.5\p@}{%
+   \@ifdim{\dimen@ii>-.5\p@}%
+  }{%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The above results in a Boolean, which now chooses between the following two brace-delimited clauses.
+% If the step size is less than a half-point, then terminate the loop. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {%
+   \true@sw
+  }{%
+   \@ifdim{\dimen@i<.5\p@}%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The above results in a Boolean, which now chooses between the following two brace-delimited clauses.
+% The true-part terminates the loop, otherwise iterate. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+  {%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For the next iteration, the candidate split dimension \cmd\dimen@\ will be one step larger 
+% if the height of the left box is less than that of the right box. 
+% Otherwise it will be one step smaller. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \advance\dimen@\@ifdim{\dimen@ii<\z@}{}{-}\dimen@i
+   \true@sw
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The loop has terminated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\saythe\dimen@\saythe\dimen@i\saythe\dimen@ii}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The algorithm has failed to find a satisfactory result if
+% the left column is of non-zero height and the right column is of zero height. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\z@}{%
+  \@ifdim{\ht\tw@=\z@}%
+ }{%
+  \true@sw
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\false@sw\ branch is executed if the algorithm has failed. 
+% We restore the original boxes. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ }{%
+  \ltxgrid@info{Unsatifactorily balanced columns: giving up}%
+  \setbox\tw@\box#1%
+  \setbox\z@ \box#2%
+  \global\setbox\footsofar\box\thr@@
+ }%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@\vskip\z@skip}%
+ \setbox\z@ \vbox{\unvbox\z@ \vskip\z@skip}%
+ \set@colht
+ \dimen@\ht\z@\@ifdim{\dimen@<\ht\tw@}{\dimen@\ht\tw@}{}%
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@>\@colroom}{\dimen@\@colroom}{}%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\saythe{\ht\z@}\saythe{\ht\tw@}\saythe\@colroom\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \setbox#1\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox\tw@\unskip\raggedcolumn@skip}%
+ \setbox#2\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox\z@ \unskip\raggedcolumn@skip}%
+ \outputdebug@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2}}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\remove@depth\ rearranges the given (vertical) box register so that it has zero depth. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\remove@depth#1{%
+  \setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+   \unvcopy#1%
+   \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+    \unvbox#1%
+    \setbox\z@\lastbox
+    \aftergroup\kern\aftergroup-\expandafter
+   \egroup
+   \the\dp\z@\relax
+  \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Abandon \cs{recover@footins} in favor of \cs{recover@column}}%
+% Procedure \cmd\recover@column\ is a utility to separate a column box into text and footnotes;
+% the former being contributed to the current (vertical) list, the latter appended to the given register, usually \cmd\footsofar. 
+% 
+% Argument \verb+#1+ is the input: it should be a \cmd\vbox, and it remains unaltered. 
+% Argument \verb+#2+ is the box into which to (globally) add the footnotes, usually \cmd\footsofar.
+% Arguments \verb+#3+ and \verb+#4+ are scratch box registers to use in this calculation.
+% As a side effect, \verb+#3+ will be unboxed into whatever vertical mode we are in at the moment (should be a \cmd\vbox). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\recover@column#1#2#3#4{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info{\string\recover@column\string#1\string#2\string#3\string#4}}{}%
+ \setbox#4\vbox{\unvcopy#1}%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox#4}}{}%
+ \dimen@\ht#4%
+ \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \setbox#4\vbox\bgroup
+  \unvbox#4\unskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We now strip the footnotes from the bottom of this box, adding them to \cmd\footsofar.
+% The method relies on a signal, consisting of a complementary pair of kerns, placed at the bottom of the box by \cmd\@combineinserts. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \dimen@i\lastkern\unkern\advance\dimen@i\lastkern
+  \@ifdim{\dimen@i=\z@}{%
+   \dimen@i\lastkern\unkern
+   \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\saythe\dimen@i}{}%
+   \aftergroup\dimen@i
+   \expandafter\egroup\the\dimen@i\relax
+  }{%
+   \egroup
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Split the column into \verb+#3+ and the footnote into \verb+#4+.
+% Append the footnote to \verb+#2+.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@i<\z@}{%
+  \advance\dimen@\dimen@i
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\saythe\dimen@i\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+  \splittopskip\z@skip
+  \global\setbox#3\vsplit#4 to\dimen@
+  \global\setbox#4\vbox{\unvbox#4}%
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2\showbox#3\showbox#4}}{}%
+  \global\setbox#2\vbox\bgroup\unvbox#2\vskip\z@skip\unvbox#4\egroup
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% What if \cmd\dimen@i\ is zero? 
+% In that case, \cmd\setbox\#3\cmd\box\#4, and do not touch \cmd\box\#2.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setbox#3\box#4%
+  \ltxgrid@foot@info@sw{\trace@scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2\showbox#3\showbox#4}}{}%
+ }%
+ \unvbox#3%
+ \loopwhile{\dimen@\lastskip\@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{\unskip\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+}%
+\def\recover@column@null#1#2#3#4{%
+ \unvcopy#1%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begindocumenthook}
+% Initialization:
+% we initialize to the page grid named ``one''.
+% If the class decides to initially set type in a different grid, it
+% should execute these same commands, but changing the first to the appropriate procedure.
+%
+% Note that the point where this sequence is executed would be an excellent place to arrange for 
+% floats to be committed to the first page of a document. 
+% That is, we execute \cmd\do@startpage, which triggers \cmd\do@startcolumn.
+%
+% FIXME: it should be the job of the page grid to determine the procedure to execute at 
+% the start of the job. Make this a hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\@begindocumenthook{%
+ \open@column@one\@ne
+ \set@colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Comment: our technique of balancing columns is severely limited, because it cannot properly work
+% with \env{longtable}, which places material at the bottom and top of the column break.
+%
+% The proper way to handle a grid change in the middle of the page is to accumulate all the material for
+% an entire article (or chapter) and then assemble finished pages therefrom. This approach is fundamentally
+% superior for complex layouts: it corresponds to real-world workflows.
+% Such a scheme is an excellent subject for another \LaTeX\ package.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patches for the longtable package}%
+%
+% \LaTeX's ``required'' package \classname{longtable} (written by David P. Carlilsle),
+% which is part of /latex/required/tools, is incmpatible with both
+% \LaTeX's ``required'' package \classname{multicol} and with
+% \LaTeX's native \cmd\twocolumn\ capability. There is no essential reason
+% for this incompatability, aside from implementation details, and the
+% \classname{ltxgrid} package gives us the ability to lift them.
+%
+% Only four of \classname{longtable}'s procedures require rewriting:
+% \cmd\longtable,
+% \cmd\endlongtable,
+% \cmd\LT@start, and
+% \cmd\LT@end@hd@ft. 
+% The procedure \cmd\switch@longtable\ checks against their expected meanings
+% and, if all is as expected, applies the patches.
+% In the process, we simplify things considerably and also make them more
+% secure.
+%
+% Why does \classname{longtable} need to access the output routine, anyway?
+% What it comes down to, is what happens when a pagebreak falls within a
+% long table. If this happens, we would like to append a row at the bottom of
+% the broken table and add a row at the top of the next page.
+%
+% These things can be accomodated easily by the \classname{ltxgrid} output
+% routine hooks.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\longtable}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\longtable@longtable{%
+ \par
+ \ifx\multicols\@undefined\else\ifnum\col@number>\@ne\@twocolumntrue\fi\fi
+ \if@twocolumn\LT@err{longtable not in 1-column mode}\@ehc\fi
+ \begingroup
+ \@ifnextchar[\LT@array{\LT@array[x]}%
+}%
+\def\longtable@new{%
+ \par
+  \@ifnextchar[\LT@array{\LT@array[x]}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endlongtable}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endlongtable@longtable{%
+  \crcr
+  \noalign{%
+    \let\LT@entry\LT@entry@chop
+    \xdef\LT@save@row{\LT@save@row}}%
+  \LT@echunk
+  \LT@start
+  \unvbox\z@
+  \LT@get@widths
+  \if@filesw
+    {\let\LT@entry\LT@entry@write\immediate\write\@auxout{%
+      \gdef\expandafter\noexpand
+        \csname LT@\romannumeral\c@LT@tables\endcsname
+          {\LT@save@row}}}%
+  \fi
+  \ifx\LT@save@row\LT@@save@row
+  \else
+    \LT@warn{Column \@width s have changed\MessageBreak
+             in table \thetable}%
+    \LT@final@warn
+  \fi
+  \endgraf\penalty -\LT@end@pen
+  \endgroup
+  \global\@mparbottom\z@
+  \pagegoal\vsize
+  \endgraf\penalty\z@\addvspace\LTpost
+  \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{}\fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Repair error in \cs{endlongtable@new} involving \cs{@ifx}: argument not delimited.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endlongtable@new{%
+  \crcr
+  \noalign{%
+   \let\LT@entry\LT@entry@chop
+   \xdef\LT@save@row{\LT@save@row}%
+  }%
+  \LT@echunk
+  \LT@start
+  \unvbox\z@
+  \LT@get@widths
+  \@if@sw\if@filesw\fi{%
+   {%
+    \let\LT@entry\LT@entry@write
+    \immediate\write\@auxout{%
+     \gdef\expandafter\noexpand\csname LT@\romannumeral\c@LT@tables\endcsname
+     {\LT@save@row}%
+    }%
+   }%
+  }{}%
+  \@ifx{\LT@save@row\LT@@save@row}{}{%
+   \LT@warn{%
+    Column \@width s have changed\MessageBreak in table \thetable
+   }\LT@final@warn
+  }%
+  \endgraf
+  \nobreak
+  \box\@ifvoid\LT@lastfoot{\LT@foot}{\LT@lastfoot}%
+ \global\@mparbottom\z@
+ \endgraf
+ \LT@post
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@start}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT@start@longtable{%
+  \let\LT@start\endgraf
+  \endgraf\penalty\z@\vskip\LTpre
+  \dimen@\pagetotal
+  \advance\dimen@ \ht\ifvoid\LT@firsthead\LT@head\else\LT@firsthead\fi
+  \advance\dimen@ \dp\ifvoid\LT@firsthead\LT@head\else\LT@firsthead\fi
+  \advance\dimen@ \ht\LT@foot
+  \dimen@ii\vfuzz
+  \vfuzz\maxdimen
+    \setbox\tw@\copy\z@
+    \setbox\tw@\vsplit\tw@ to \ht\@arstrutbox
+    \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
+  \vfuzz\dimen@ii
+  \advance\dimen@ \ht
+        \ifdim\ht\@arstrutbox>\ht\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
+  \advance\dimen@\dp
+        \ifdim\dp\@arstrutbox>\dp\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
+  \advance\dimen@ -\pagegoal
+  \ifdim \dimen@>\z@\vfil\break\fi
+      \global\@colroom\@colht
+  \ifvoid\LT@foot\else
+    \advance\vsize-\ht\LT@foot
+    \global\advance\@colroom-\ht\LT@foot
+    \dimen@\pagegoal\advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@foot\pagegoal\dimen@
+    \maxdepth\z@
+  \fi
+  \ifvoid\LT@firsthead\copy\LT@head\else\box\LT@firsthead\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At some point before version 4.11, the \cmd\nobreak\ was added. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\nobreak
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \output{\LT@output}%
+}%
+\def\LT@start@new{%
+ \let\LT@start\endgraf
+ \endgraf
+ \markthr@@{}%
+ \LT@pre
+ \@ifvoid\LT@firsthead{\LT@top}{\box\LT@firsthead\nobreak}%
+ \mark@envir{longtable}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@end}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT@end@hd@ft@longtable#1{%
+ \LT@echunk
+ \ifx\LT@start\endgraf
+  \LT@err{Longtable head or foot not at start of table}{Increase LTchunksize}%
+ \fi
+ \setbox#1\box\z@
+ \LT@get@widths\LT@bchunk
+}%
+\def\LT@end@hd@ft@new#1{%
+ \LT@echunk
+ \@ifx{\LT@start\endgraf}{%
+  \LT@err{Longtable head or foot not at start of table}{Increase LTchunksize}%
+ }%
+ \global\setbox#1\box\z@
+ \LT@get@widths
+ \LT@bchunk
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@array}
+%
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT@array@longtable[#1]#2{%
+  \refstepcounter{table}\stepcounter{LT@tables}%
+  \if l#1%
+    \LTleft\z@ \LTright\fill
+  \else\if r#1%
+    \LTleft\fill \LTright\z@
+  \else\if c#1%
+    \LTleft\fill \LTright\fill
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \let\LT@mcol\multicolumn
+  \let\LT@@tabarray\@tabarray
+  \let\LT@@hl\hline
+  \def\@tabarray{%
+    \let\hline\LT@@hl
+    \LT@@tabarray}%
+  \let\\\LT@tabularcr\let\tabularnewline\\%
+  \def\newpage{\noalign{\break}}%
+  \def\pagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt{\LT@no@pgbk-}4}%
+  \def\nopagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt\LT@no@pgbk4}%
+  \let\hline\LT@hline \let\kill\LT@kill\let\caption\LT@caption
+  \@tempdima\ht\strutbox
+  \let\@endpbox\LT@endpbox
+  \ifx\extrarowheight\@undefined
+    \let\@acol\@tabacol
+    \let\@classz\@tabclassz \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+    \def\@startpbox{\vtop\LT@startpbox}%
+    \let\@@startpbox\@startpbox
+    \let\@@endpbox\@endpbox
+    \let\LT@LL@FM@cr\@tabularcr
+  \else
+    \advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
+    \col@sep\tabcolsep
+    \let\@startpbox\LT@startpbox\let\LT@LL@FM@cr\@arraycr
+  \fi
+  \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{\vrule
+    \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+    \@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
+    \@width \z@}%
+  \let\@sharp##\let\protect\relax
+   \begingroup
+    \@mkpream{#2}%
+    \xdef\LT@bchunk{%
+       \global\advance\c@LT@chunks\@ne
+       \global\LT@rows\z@\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+       \LT@setprevdepth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At some point before version 4.11, the \cmd\noexpand\ was added. 
+% We need not change our own version, because we did it right, back in 1998 (using \cmd\appdef). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \tabskip\LTleft \noexpand\halign to\hsize\bgroup
+      \tabskip\z@ \@arstrut \@preamble \tabskip\LTright \cr}%
+  \endgroup
+  \expandafter\LT@nofcols\LT@bchunk&\LT@nofcols
+  \LT@make@row
+  \m@th\let\par\@empty
+  \everycr{}\lineskip\z@\baselineskip\z@
+  \LT@bchunk}%
+\def\LT@LR@l{\LTleft\z@   \LTright\fill}%
+\def\LT@LR@r{\LTleft\fill \LTright\z@  }%
+\def\LT@LR@c{\LTleft\fill \LTright\fill}%
+\def\LT@array@new[#1]#2{%
+ \refstepcounter{table}\stepcounter{LT@tables}%
+ \table@hook
+ \LTleft\fill \LTright\fill
+ \csname LT@LR@#1\endcsname
+ \let\LT@mcol\multicolumn
+ \let\LT@@hl\hline
+ \prepdef\@tabarray{\let\hline\LT@@hl}%
+ \let\\\LT@tabularcr
+ \let\tabularnewline\\%
+ \def\newpage{\noalign{\break}}%
+ \def\pagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt{\LT@no@pgbk-}4}%
+ \def\nopagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt\LT@no@pgbk4}%
+ \let\hline\LT@hline
+ \let\kill\LT@kill
+ \let\caption\LT@caption
+ \@tempdima\ht\strutbox
+ \let\@endpbox\LT@endpbox
+ \@ifxundefined\extrarowheight{%
+  \let\@acol\@tabacol
+  \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+  \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+  \def\@startpbox{\vtop\LT@startpbox}%
+  \let\@@startpbox\@startpbox
+  \let\@@endpbox\@endpbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Because \classname{ltxutil} patches \LaTeX's \cmd\@tabularcr and \cmd\@xtabularcr,
+% we must restore these procedures in the scope of \env{longtable}.
+% Ironically, the patches in \classname{ltxutil} were for the purpose of extending
+% the \env{tabular} environment to prevent pagebreaks with the *-form of \cmd\\,
+% just the same as is being done here. But the two mechanisms conflict. 
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT@array@new}: restore \cs{@tabularcr} and \cs{@xtabularcr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\LT@LL@FM@cr\@tabularcr@LaTeX
+  \let\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr@LaTeX
+ }{%
+  \advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
+  \col@sep\tabcolsep
+  \let\@startpbox\LT@startpbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT@array@new}: set \cs{LT@LL@FM@cr} to \cs{@arraycr@array} instead of \cs{@arraycr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\LT@LL@FM@cr\@arraycr@array
+ }%
+%
+ \let\@acoll\@tabacoll
+ \let\@acolr\@tabacolr
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+%
+ \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{%
+  \vrule
+  \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+  \@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
+  \@width \z@
+ }%
+ \let\@sharp##%
+ \let\protect\relax
+ \begingroup
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+  \@mkpream@relax
+  \edef\@preamble{\@preamble}%
+  \prepdef\@preamble{%
+   \global\advance\c@LT@chunks\@ne
+   \global\LT@rows\z@
+   \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+    \LT@setprevdepth
+    \tabskip\LTleft
+    \halign to\hsize\bgroup
+     \tabskip\z@
+     \@arstrut
+  }%
+  \appdef\@preamble{%
+     \tabskip\LTright
+     \cr
+  }%
+  \global\let\LT@bchunk\@preamble
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\LT@nofcols\LT@bchunk&\LT@nofcols
+ \LT@make@row
+ \m@th
+ \let\par\@empty
+ \everycr{}%
+ \lineskip\z@
+ \baselineskip\z@
+ \LT@bchunk
+}%
+\appdef\table@hook{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\switch@longtable}
+%
+% Here is the switch from standard \classname{longtable} to the new, \classname{ltxgrid}-compatible values.
+%
+% At this point, we extend \env{longtable} with a \env{longtable*} form, which signifies that we want to 
+% use the full page width for setting the table.
+% You can think this way: \env{longtable*} is to \env{longtable} as \env{table*} is to \env{table}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\switch@longtable{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{longtable}{%
+  \@ifx{\longtable\longtable@longtable}{%
+   \@ifx{\endlongtable\endlongtable@longtable}{%
+    \@ifx{\LT@start\LT@start@longtable}{%
+     \@ifx{\LT@end@hd@ft\LT@end@hd@ft@longtable}{%
+      \@ifx{\LT@array\LT@array@longtable}{%
+       \true@sw
+      }{\false@sw}%
+     }{\false@sw}%
+    }{\false@sw}%
+   }{\false@sw}%
+  }{\false@sw}%
+  {%
+   \class@info{Patching longtable package}%
+  }{%
+   \class@info{Patching unrecognized longtable package. (Proceeding with fingers crossed)}%
+  }%
+  \let\longtable\longtable@new
+  \let\endlongtable\endlongtable@new
+  \let\LT@start\LT@start@new
+  \let\LT@end@hd@ft\LT@end@hd@ft@new
+  \let\LT@array\LT@array@new
+  \newenvironment{longtable*}{%
+   \onecolumngrid@push
+   \longtable
+  }{%
+   \endlongtable
+   \onecolumngrid@pop
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Removed obsolete code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@pre}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@bot}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@top}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@post}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@adj}
+% Note that at the end of the longtable environment, we reestablish the \cmd\mark@envir\ of the
+% containing environment. We have left \cmd\curr@envir\ alone, so this will work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT@pre{\penalty\z@\vskip\LTpre}%
+\def\LT@bot{\nobreak\copy\LT@foot\vfil}%
+\def\LT@top{\copy\LT@head\nobreak}%
+\def\LT@post{\penalty\z@\addvspace\LTpost\mark@envir{\curr@envir}}%
+\def\LT@adj{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\null}\dimen@-\ht\z@
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\z@\LT@bot}\advance\dimen@\ht\z@
+ \global\advance\vsize-\dimen@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{output@init}
+% \begin{macro}{output@prep}
+% \begin{macro}{output@post}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output@init@longtable{\LT@adj}%
+\def\output@prep@longtable{\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\LT@bot}}%
+\def\output@post@longtable{\LT@top}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patches for index processing}%
+%
+% Another feature that uses the output routine hooks occurs within
+% an index, where one wishes to apply a ``continue head'' when a
+% column breaks within a primary index entry. 
+% Some book designs call for the continue head to only be applied
+% at a turnpage break.
+%
+% In any case, it is easy enough for \cmd\output@post@theindex\ 
+% to do this in conjunction with component marks.
+% Only the bare outlines are shown here.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\output@prep}
+% \begin{macro}{\output@post}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\output@init@theindex\@empty
+\let\output@prep@theindex\@empty
+\def\output@post@theindex{%
+ \@ifodd\c@page{}{%
+  \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur=\@ne}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have the leftmost column of a verso page:
+% Insert the current top-level continued head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Checking the auxiliary file}%
+%
+% We relegate the checking of the auxiliary file to the output routine.
+% This task must wait until the last page is shipped out, because otherwise
+% the stream might get closed before the last page is shipped out.
+% Obviously, we must use \cmd\do@output@MVL\ for the job.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@aux}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@aux{\do@output@MVL{\do@check@aux}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Dealing with stuck floats and stalled float dequeueing}%
+%
+% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is fundamentally flawed, as evidenced by 
+% its warning message ``too many unprocessed floats'', which users understandably find frustrating.
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package provides tools for ameliorating the situation somewhat.
+%
+% Two cases require detection and rectification:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  A float is ``stuck'' in the \cmd\@deferlist: for whatever reason, the float fails to be committed,
+%  even at the start of a fresh page.
+%  Once this condition prevails, following floats can never be committed, subsequently all of \LaTeX's 
+%  float registers are used up.
+%
+%  If this condition is detected, we reconsider float dequeueing under permissive (\cmd\clearpage-style) processing.
+%  
+% \item
+%  The \cmd\@freelist\ is exhausted:
+%  a large concentration of floats, say, uses up all of \LaTeX's float registers all at once.
+%  This condition commonly occurs when the user collects floats at the end of the document, for some reason.
+%
+%  When a float is encountered, \LaTeX\ uses a float register (allocated from a pool of free registers) to contain it until it can be placed.
+%  However, no further action is taken until the pagebuilder is visited, so floats can accumulate.
+%  Also, even after the pagebuilder is visited, deferred floats can accumulate, and these are not committed
+%  until a column (or page) of text is completed.
+%
+%  Once the last free float register is used, action should be taken that will commit some of the deferred floats,
+%  even if this might require ending the page right where we are (resulting in a short page).
+%
+%  Perhaps, committed floats should be stored using some mechanism other than a list, as is currently done.
+%  A feasible alternative storage method would be to use a \cmd\box\ register in place of 
+%  \cmd\@toplist,
+%  \cmd\@botlist, and
+%  \cmd\@dbltoplist.
+%  This is probably just fine, since such committed floats are not reconsidered (I think).
+%  
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% The  emergency processing implemented here immediately ends the current page and begins to output float pages under (\cmd\clearpage-style) rules.
+% It proceeds until all deferred floats have been flushed.
+%
+% Users should expect non-optimal page makeup under these circumstances.
+%
+% Note that there is a weakness in our approach that we have not attempted to repair: if floats are being
+% added as part of a paragraph, we will not be able to take these remedial steps until the paragraph ends.
+% This means that the approach implemented here cannot fix all \LaTeX\ documents. Users can still construct
+% documents that exhaust \LaTeX's pool of float registers!
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@deferlist@stuck}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@tail}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% We detect the case where, at the start of a fresh page, there are deferred floats, but none are
+% committed. We memorize the \cmd\@deferlist\ at \cmd\shipout\ time, then examine it at the point where
+% our efforts to commit floats to the new page are complete.
+% If it has not changed, the first float must be stuck, and we
+% attempt to fix things via \cmd\force@deferlist@stuck.
+%
+% This simple approach is comp[letely effective in for typical documents.
+%
+% Note that we try to avoid an infinite loop by examining the value of \cmd\clearpage@sw:
+% if we come here with that boolean true, we are in a loop.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@deferlist@stuck#1{%
+ \@ifx{\@deferlist@postshipout\@empty}{}{%
+  \@ifx{\@deferlist@postshipout\@deferlist}{%
+   \@fltstk
+   \clearpage@sw{%
+    \ltxgrid@warn{Deferred float stuck during \string\clearpage\space processing}%
+   }{%
+    \force@deferlist@stuck#1%
+   }%
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have successfully committed float(s)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }%
+  \global\let\@deferlist@postshipout\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@fltstk{%
+ \@latex@warning{A float is stuck (cannot be placed without \string\clearpage)}%
+}%
+\appdef\@outputpage@tail{%
+ \global\let\@deferlist@postshipout\@deferlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xnext}
+% We rewrite the \LaTeX\ kernel macros that dequeue float registers from, e.g., \cmd\@deferlist,
+% providing a test for the condition where the pool of free registers is about to underflow.
+%
+% In this case, we attempt to fix things via \cmd\force@deferlist@empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@next#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{#2\@empty}{\false@sw}{%
+  \expandafter\@xnext#2\@@#1#2%
+  \true@sw
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@xnext\@elt#1#2\@@#3#4{%
+ \def#3{#1}%
+ \gdef#4{#2}%
+ \def\@tempa{#4}\def\@tempb{\@freelist}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempa\@tempb}{%
+  \@ifx{#4\@empty}{%
+   \force@deferlist@empty%{Float register pool exhausted}%
+  }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@stuck}
+% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@forcecolumn@pen}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@forcecolumn}
+% The procedure \cmd\force@deferlist@empty\ is an attempt to rectify a situation where \LaTeX's float placement mechanism
+% may fail (``too many unprocessed floats'').
+%
+% We put down interrupts that call for the float placement to be redone, but under permissive conditions,
+% just the same as if \cmd\clearpage\ had been invoked.
+%
+% Note that the attempt to rectify the error is contingent on the setting of \cmd\force@deferlist@sw,
+% default false. A document class using this package that wishes to enable this error recovery mechanism should
+% set this boolean to true.
+%
+% The interrupt \cmd\do@forcecolumn@pen, which invokes the procedure \cmd\do@forcecolumn,
+% does the same as \cmd\do@startcolumn, except under permissive conditions:
+% we are trying to empty out the float registers completely.
+%
+% In order to properly with the case where there is material in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, 
+% \cmd\@toplist, \cmd\@botlist, \cmd\@dbltoplist, etc,
+% we do what amounts to \cmd\newpage\ to get things rolling.
+%
+% In \cmd\force@deferlist@stuck, we take advantage of already being in the output routine:
+% simply reinvoke \cmd\do@startcolumn\ under permissive conditions.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\force@deferlist@stuck#1{%
+ \force@deferlist@sw{%
+  \@booleantrue\clearpage@sw
+  \@booleantrue\forcefloats@sw
+  #1%
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\force@deferlist@empty{%
+ \force@deferlist@sw{%
+  \penalty-\pagebreak@pen
+  \protect@penalty\do@forcecolumn@pen
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw
+\mathchardef\do@forcecolumn@pen=10009
+\@namedef{output@-\the\do@forcecolumn@pen}{\do@forcecolumn}%
+\def\do@forcecolumn{%
+ \@booleantrue\clearpage@sw
+ \@booleantrue\forcefloats@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\unvbox\@cclv
+%\vfil
+%\penalty-\pagebreak@pen
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \do@startcolumn
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% A more thorough revision of \LaTeX's float placement mechanism would involve substituting a single \cmd\box\
+% register for the \cmd\@deferlist. This way, \LaTeX's ability to have latent floats would be limited by
+% box memory alone. 
+%
+% Because only the \cmd\box\ and \cmd\count\ components of the float box register are actually used by \LaTeX,
+% our scheme can be accomplished if we can find a way to encode the information held in the \cmd\count\ component.
+%
+% A first-in, first-out mechanism exists, wherein a box-penalty pair is dequeued by \cmd\lastbox\cmd\lastpenalty\cmd\unpenalty\ and enqueued
+% by \cmd\setbox\cmd\foo=\cmd\hbox\cmd\bgroup\cmd\penalty\cmd\floatpenalty\cmd\box\cmd\floatbox\cmd\unhbox\cmd\foo\cmd\egroup.
+%
+% Note that this scheme is made possible by our change to \LaTeX's float placement mechanism,
+% wherein we consolidated the two \cmd\@deferlist s into one.
+%
+% \section{Support for legacy \LaTeX\ commands}
+%
+% We provide support for the \cmd\enlargethispage\ command.
+%
+% Note: using a command of this sort does not automatically enlarge both pages of a spread, which would be the convention in page composition.
+%
+% Timing Note: In a multicolumn page grid, the user should issue the \cmd\enlargethispage\ command 
+% while the first column of the page is being typeset. 
+% We provide a helpful message if the timing is wrong.
+%
+% This code can serve as a model for introducing commands that need to execute within the safety of the output routine.
+% We ensure that the arguments are fully expanded, then execute \cmd\do@output@MVL\ to cause an output procedure,
+% \cmd\@@enlargethispage, to execute. When it does execute, the MVL will be exposed.
+%
+% The \cmd\@@enlargethispage\ procedure simply adjusts the vertical dimensions of the page.
+% The adjustment will persist until the column is committed, at which point the page dimension
+% will revert to its standard value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enlargethispage{%
+ \@ifstar{%
+  \@enlargethispage{}%
+ }{%
+  \@enlargethispage{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@enlargethispage#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+  \dimen@#2\relax
+  \edef\@tempa{#1}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\@@enlargethispage{\@tempa}{\the\dimen@}}%
+  \expandafter\do@output@MVL\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\@@enlargethispage#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempa{one}%
+ \@ifx{\thepagegrid\@tempa}{%
+  \true@sw
+ }{%
+  \def\@tempa{mlt}%
+  \@ifx{\thepagegrid\@tempa}{%
+   \@ifnum{\pagegrid@cur=\@ne}{% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%   OK to adjust this page
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \gdef\enlarge@colroom{#2}%
+    \true@sw
+   }{% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%   Can only adjust this column; give up
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ltxgrid@warn{Too late to enlarge this page; move the command to the first column.}%
+    \false@sw
+   }%
+  }{% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  Unknown page grid
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ltxgrid@warn{Unable to enlarge a page of this kind.}%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+ }%
+ {%
+  \class@info{Enlarging page \thepage\space by #2}%
+  \global\advance\@colroom#2\relax
+  \set@vsize
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Could not adjust this page
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+\let\enlarge@colroom\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\@kludgeins\ insert register is now unneeded.
+% Ensure that packages using this mechanism break (preferrable to subtle bugs).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@kludgeins\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Building the page for shipout}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@head}
+% We set \cmd\@outputpage@head\ to make the \cmd\@outputbox\ be of fixed height.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage@head} headpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\textheight@sw
+\prepdef\@outputpage@head{%
+ \textheight@sw{%
+  \count@\vbadness\vbadness\@M
+  \dimen@\vfuzz\vfuzz\maxdimen
+  \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\textheight{\unvbox\@outputbox}%
+  \vfuzz\dimen@
+  \vbadness\count@
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage@head}
+% For compatibility with David Carlisle's \classname{lscape} package, we need to allow the 
+% \cmd\LS@rot\ procedure to mung \cmd\@outputbox. 
+%
+% Implementation note: the \classname{lscape} package effectively tailpatches two \LaTeX\ internals to accomplish its purpose,
+% an approach that is not robust. It is more robust to headpatch \cmd\@outputpage, which is what we do here. 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 576) Allow \classname{lscape} to act on \cs{@outputbox} at the right time}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@outputpage@head{%
+ \@ifx{\LS@rot\@undefined}{}{\LS@rot}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Warning message}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@info}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@warn}
+% Something has happened that the user might be interested in.
+% Print a message to the log, but only if the user selected the verbose option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltxgrid@info{%
+ \ltxgrid@info@sw{\class@info}{\@gobble}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\ltxgrid@info@sw
+\def\ltxgrid@warn{%
+ \ltxgrid@warn@sw{\class@warn}{\@gobble}%
+}%
+\@booleantrue\ltxgrid@warn@sw
+\@booleanfalse\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Line-wise processing}%
+% Sometimes we wish to process each line of type that will be placed into the galley,
+% for example, applying line numbering to a document.
+% To accomplish the task, we have to force a visit to the output routine after each such line, whereupon
+% we can process it accordingly (in the case of line numbering, we could do as \filename{lineno.sty} and
+% append an appropriately formed box to the MVL).
+%
+% In implementing such a scheme, we will have to instantiate interrupts for the following cases:
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\cmd\interlinepenalty\ and friends] These include \cmd\clubpenalty, \cmd\widowpenalty, \cmd\displaywidowpenalty, and \cmd\brokenpenalty.
+%
+%
+% \item[Display math penalties] Includes \cmd\predisplaypenalty, \cmd\postdisplaypenalty, and \cmd\interdisplaylinepenalty.
+%
+%
+% \item[\cs{par}] The penalty following the last line of the paragraph.
+%
+%
+% \item[\cmd\vadjust] A trap for any \cmd\vadjust\ command that falls in the paragraph.
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\def@next@handler}
+% \begin{macro}{\def@line@handler}
+% Utility procedures \cmd\def@next@handler\ and \cmd\def@line@handler\ help in the creation of 
+% interrupt handlers. 
+%
+% \cmd\def@next@handler\ increments the scratch count register (argument 1), 
+% using this value to \cmd\mathchardef\ its second argument
+% as the negative of the flag value to be used as a penalty for exciting the interrupt (argument 3).
+% As a byproduct, it leaves the given scratch counter incremented. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def@next@handler#1#2#3{%
+ \advance#1\@ne\mathchardef#2\the#1%
+ \expandafter\def\csname output@-\the#1\endcsname{#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line is for diagnostic purposes.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \typeout{\string#2(\expandafter\string\csname output@\the#1\endcsname:\expandafter\meaning\csname output@\the#1\endcsname)}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\def@line@handler\ uses \cmd\int@parpenalty\ as a base.
+% The interrupt is the sum of that base with the first argument, 
+% and the handler is the second argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def@line@handler#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+  \@tempcnta\int@parpenalty
+  \advance\@tempcnta-#1%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line is for diagnostic purposes.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \typeout{Defining: \expandafter\string\csname output@\the\linenopenalty\endcsname}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \aftergroup\def
+  \expandafter\aftergroup\csname output@-\the\@tempcnta\endcsname
+ \endgroup{#2}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\int@parpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@handle@line@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@handle@line@ltx}
+% We first set \cmd\int@parpenalty\ to our chosen base value${}\le -11012$. 
+% We then define all the handlers for lines within a paragraph, of which there are 12 different cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\int@parpenalty11012
+\def@line@handler\z@{\@handle@line@ltx{}{}{}}%
+\def@line@handler\@ne{\@handle@line@ltx{}{}{\brokenpenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@line@handler\tw@{\@handle@line@ltx{}{\clubpenalty@ltx}{}}%
+\def@line@handler\thr@@{\@handle@line@ltx{\clubpenalty@ltx}{}{\brokenpenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@line@handler\f@ur{\@handle@line@ltx{\widowpenalty@ltx}{}{}}%
+\def@line@handler{5}{\@handle@line@ltx{\widowpenalty@ltx}{}{\brokenpenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@line@handler{6}{\@handle@line@ltx{\widowpenalty@ltx}{\clubpenalty@ltx}{}}%
+\def@line@handler{7}{\@handle@line@ltx{\widowpenalty@ltx}{\clubpenalty@ltx}{\brokenpenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@line@handler{8}{\@handle@line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty@ltx}{}{}}%
+\def@line@handler{9}{\@handle@line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty@ltx}{}{\brokenpenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@line@handler{10}{\@handle@line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty@ltx}{\clubpenalty@ltx}{}}%
+\def@line@handler{11}{\@handle@line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty@ltx}{\clubpenalty@ltx}{\brokenpenalty@ltx}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default handler for lines within a paragraph simply 
+% restores the value of the \cmd\penalty\ to the normal value.
+% If something more useful needs to be done, we can change the definition of \cmd\@@handle@line@ltx.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@handle@line@ltx#1#2#3{%
+ \@@handle@line@ltx
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty
+ \@tempcntb\interlinepenalty@ltx\relax
+ \@if@empty{#1}{}{\advance\@tempcntb#1\relax}%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{}{\advance\@tempcntb#2\relax}%
+ \@if@empty{#3}{}{\advance\@tempcntb#3\relax}%
+ \penalty\@ifnum{\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb}{\@tempcntb}{\@tempcnta}%
+}%
+\let\@@handle@line@ltx\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\int@postparpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int@vadjustpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int@whatsitpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int@predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int@interdisplaylinepenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int@postdisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@handle@display@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@handle@display@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\handle@par@ltx}
+% We herewith define all the handlers for cases relating to display math:
+% last line before a display math,
+% last line of a display math, and a line within a display math.
+% We also handle the last line of a paragraph, a whatsit node, and a \cmd\vadjust.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@tempcnta\int@parpenalty
+\def@next@handler\@tempcnta\int@postparpenalty{\reset@queues@ltx\handle@par@ltx}%
+\def@next@handler\@tempcnta\int@vadjustpenalty{\handle@vadjust@ltx}%
+\def@next@handler\@tempcnta\int@whatsitpenalty{\handle@whatsit@ltx}%
+\def@next@handler\@tempcnta\int@predisplaypenalty{\reset@queues@ltx\@handle@display@ltx{\predisplaypenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@next@handler\@tempcnta\int@interdisplaylinepenalty{\@handle@display@ltx{\interdisplaylinepenalty@ltx}}%
+\def@next@handler\@tempcnta\int@postdisplaypenalty{\@handle@display@ltx{\postdisplaypenalty@ltx}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The default handler for display math lines simply 
+% restores the value of the \cmd\penalty\ to the normal value.
+% If something more useful needs to be done, we can change the definition of \cmd\@@handle@display@ltx. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@handle@display@ltx#1{%
+ \@@handle@display@ltx
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty
+ \@tempcntb#1%
+ \penalty\@ifnum{\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb}{\@tempcntb}{\@tempcnta}%
+}%
+\let\@@handle@display@ltx\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We provide stub definitions for the handlers for the last line of a paragraph, a \cmd\vadjust, and a whatsit node (e.g., \cmd\write, \cmd\special). 
+% There is no canonical penalty for such cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\handle@par@ltx{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note that a whatsit needs to be handled differently from a \cmd\vadjust:
+% a whatsit node does not affect the (crucial) depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, while the more
+% general \cmd\vadjust\ may cause any kind of vertical mode material to be interposed just below the line
+% we are trying to trap, in particular \cmd\vskip s and \cmd\penalty s.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@linepenalties}
+% \begin{macro}{\restore@linepenalties}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@displaypenalties}
+% Now we define utility procedures that set up for a paragraph to be broken into lines, 
+% restoring the penalties afterwards.
+% 
+% Utility procedure \cmd\set@linepenalties\ systematically sets the penalties of paragraph breaking
+% to flag values, meanwhile storing away the normal values for access by the output routine. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@linepenalties{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\interlinepenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\interlinepenalty}%
+ \interlinepenalty-\int@parpenalty
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\brokenpenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\brokenpenalty}%
+ \brokenpenalty\@ne
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\clubpenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\clubpenalty}%
+ \clubpenalty\tw@
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\widowpenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\widowpenalty}%
+ \widowpenalty\f@ur
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\displaywidowpenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\displaywidowpenalty}%
+ \displaywidowpenalty8\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Utility procedure \cmd\restore@linepenalties\ restores the values of the penalty parameters that were
+% modified by \cmd\set@linepenalties.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\restore@linepenalties{%
+ \interlinepenalty\interlinepenalty@ltx
+ \brokenpenalty\brokenpenalty@ltx
+ \clubpenalty\clubpenalty@ltx
+ \widowpenalty\widowpenalty@ltx
+ \displaywidowpenalty\displaywidowpenalty@ltx
+ \relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In the following, the first argument should be a boolean (either \cmd\true@sw\ or \cmd\false@sw).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@displaypenalties#1{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\predisplaypenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\predisplaypenalty}%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\interdisplaylinepenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\interdisplaylinepenalty}%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\postdisplaypenalty@ltx\expandafter{\the\postdisplaypenalty}%
+ \@ifhmode{\predisplaypenalty-\int@predisplaypenalty\relax}{}%
+ #1{\interdisplaylinepenalty-\int@interdisplaylinepenalty\relax}{}%
+ #1{\postdisplaypenalty-\int@postdisplaypenalty\relax}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We provide no procedure to restore the respective penalties, because they are altered within a group:
+% \TeX 's context stack will automatically restore things.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enqueue@whatsit@ltx}%
+% \begin{macro}{\handle@whatsit@ltx}%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@whatsit}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@g@pop@ltx}%
+% Here is a facility for dealing with whatsit nodes while we are trapping paragraph lines. 
+% We simply enqueue a macro that will create the desired whatsit node, dequeueing it in the output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enqueue@whatsit@ltx#1{%
+ \gappdef\g@whatsit@queue{{#1}}%
+ \vadjust{\penalty-\int@whatsitpenalty}%
+}%
+\def\handle@whatsit@ltx{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \g@pop@ltx\g@whatsit@queue\@tempa
+ \expandafter\do@whatsit\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+}%
+\def\do@whatsit#1{}%
+\def\g@pop@ltx#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\@g@pop@ltx#1{}{}\@@#1#2%
+}%
+\def\@g@pop@ltx#1#2\@@#3#4{%
+ \gdef#3{#2}%
+ \def#4{#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vspace}%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagebreak}%
+% \begin{macro}{\nopagebreak}%
+% \begin{macro}{\\}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayparboxrestore}%
+% We wish to prevent \filename{lineno.sty} from patching \cmd\vspace\ and \cmd\pagebreak, 
+% because that package does it through global assignments, which is prone to failure. 
+%
+% We also wish to prevent that package from patching \cmd\@arrayparboxrestore, because
+% it prevents us from \cmd\unvbox ing vertical mode material into the MVL and numbering those
+% lines.
+% 
+% We start by retaining the original definitions of these commands, so we can restore them
+% if \filename{lineno.sty} does get loaded. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\vspace@ltx\vspace
+\let\pagebreak@ltx\pagebreak
+\let\nopagebreak@ltx\nopagebreak
+\let\endline@ltx\\
+\let\@arrayparboxrestore@ltx\@arrayparboxrestore
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next, we provide for line-wise processing by patching the procedures associated with these same three commands.
+%
+% There are exactly four core \LaTeX\ procedures that use \cmd\vadjust\ to insert vertical mode material 
+% into the main vertical list: \cmd\vspace, \cmd\pagebreak, \cmd\nopagebreak, and \cmd\\. 
+% Other commands may use \cmd\vadjust, but they are inserting an interrupt (via a penalty${}<10000$), 
+% and such a thing does not mask the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, hence is permissible.
+%
+% In each case, we replace the core \LaTeX\ procedure with one that itself replaces \cmd\vadjust\ with
+% \cmd\ex@vadjust@ltx. The meaning of this procedure can be left as \cmd\vadjust, or it can be changed to
+% one that accomplishes the equivalent without masking the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+% 
+% The first procedure is \cmd\@vspace, here shown in original form and in the patched alternative form. 
+% This procedure and \cmd\@vspacer\ implement the \cmd\vspace\ command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vspace@org #1{%
+  \ifvmode
+    \vskip #1
+    \vskip\z@skip
+   \else
+     \@bsphack
+     \vadjust{\@restorepar
+              \vskip #1
+              \vskip\z@skip
+              }%
+     \@esphack
+   \fi
+}%
+\def\@vspace@ltx#1{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+  \vskip#1\vskip\z@skip
+ }{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ex@vadjust@ltx{%
+   \@restorepar
+   \nobreak
+   \vskip#1\vskip\z@skip
+  }%
+  \@esphack
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% The second procedure is \cmd\@vspacer.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vspacer@org#1{%
+  \ifvmode
+    \dimen@\prevdepth
+    \hrule \@height\z@
+    \nobreak
+    \vskip #1
+    \vskip\z@skip
+    \prevdepth\dimen@
+  \else
+    \@bsphack
+    \vadjust{\@restorepar
+             \hrule \@height\z@
+             \nobreak
+             \vskip #1
+             \vskip\z@skip}%
+    \@esphack
+\fi
+}%
+\def\@vspacer@ltx#1{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+  \dimen@\prevdepth
+  \hrule\@height\z@
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip#1\vskip\z@skip
+  \prevdepth\dimen@
+ }{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ex@vadjust@ltx{%
+   \@restorepar
+   \hrule\@height\z@
+   \nobreak
+   \vskip#1\vskip\z@skip
+  }%
+  \@esphack
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@no@pgbk\ implements both \cmd\pagebreak\ and \cmd\nopagebreak.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@no@pgbk@org #1[#2]{%
+  \ifvmode
+    \penalty #1\@getpen{#2}%
+  \else
+    \@bsphack
+    \vadjust{\penalty #1\@getpen{#2}}%
+    \@esphack
+  \fi
+}%
+\def\@no@pgbk@ltx#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+  \penalty#1\@getpen{#2}%
+ }{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ex@vadjust@ltx{%
+   \penalty#1\@getpen{#2}%
+  }%
+  \@esphack
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The command to end a line of type, \cmd\\, is defined via \cmd\DeclareRobustCommand,
+% so we must proceed carefully: 
+% A procedure is defined whose \cmd\long\cmd\csname\ is contructed via the incantation:
+% \cmd\csname\cmd\expandafter\cmd\@gobble\cmd\string\cmd\\ \cmd\endcsname.
+% Note the non-trivial space character after the \cmd\\: it is incorporated into 
+% the \cmd\csname.
+%
+% Here is the original core \LaTeX\ definition for 
+% the procedure involved, along with our revised version. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\end@line@org{%
+ \let\reserved@e\relax
+ \let\reserved@f\relax
+ \@ifstar{%
+  \let\reserved@e\vadjust
+  \let\reserved@f\nobreak
+  \@xnewline
+ }%
+ \@xnewline
+}%
+\long\def\end@line@ltx{%
+ \let\reserved@e\relax
+ \let\reserved@f\relax
+ \@ifstar{%
+  \let\reserved@e\ex@vadjust@ltx
+  \let\reserved@f\nobreak
+  \@xnewline
+ }{%
+  \@xnewline
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An additional procedure requiring patching has the following original core \LaTeX\
+% definition; we modify it correspondingly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newline@org[#1]{%
+ \let\reserved@e\vadjust
+ \@gnewline{\vskip#1}%
+}%
+\def\@newline@ltx[#1]{%
+ \let\reserved@e\ex@vadjust@ltx
+ \@gnewline{\vskip#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We now install our patches. 
+% If some package overrides these macros, we will detect and complain.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifx{\@vspace\@vspace@org}{%
+  \@ifx{\@vspacer\@vspacer@org}{%
+   \@ifx{\@no@pgbk\@no@pgbk@org}{%
+    \@ifx{\@newline\@newline@org}{%
+     \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string\\ \endcsname\end@line@org}{%
+      \true@sw
+     }{\false@sw}%
+    }{\false@sw}%
+   }{\false@sw}%
+  }{\false@sw}%
+ }{\false@sw}%
+ {%
+  \class@info{Overriding \string\@vspace, \string\@vspacer, \string\@no@pgbk, \string\@newline, and \string\\ }%
+  \let\@normalcr\end@line@ltx
+  \expandafter\let\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string\\ \endcsname\@normalcr
+  \let\@newline\@newline@ltx
+  \let\@vspace\@vspace@ltx
+  \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@ltx
+  \let\@no@pgbk\@no@pgbk@ltx
+ }{%
+  \class@warn{%
+   Failed to recognize \string\@vspace, \string\@vspacer, \string\@no@pgbk, \string\@newline, and \string\\; 
+   no patches applied. Please get a more up-to-date class,
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we have assigned the same meaning to \cmd\@normalcr, which is necessary to \LaTeX.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\ex@vadjust@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\enqueue@vadjust@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\handle@vadjust@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\g@vadjust@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset@queues@ltx}
+% Here we give the default definition for \cmd\ex@vadjust@ltx\ along with
+% the definitions for the alternative version and its the associated handler. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ex@vadjust@ltx\vadjust
+\def\enqueue@vadjust@ltx#1{%
+ \gappdef\g@vadjust@queue{{#1}}%
+ \vadjust{\penalty-\int@vadjustpenalty}%
+}%
+\def\handle@vadjust@ltx{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \g@pop@ltx\g@vadjust@queue\@tempa
+ \expandafter\gappdef\expandafter\g@vadjust@line\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+}%
+\let\g@vadjust@line\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\reset@queues@ltx\ resets the whatsit queue and the \cmd\vadjust\ queues 
+% to their empty state. This should be done whenever we leave horizontal mode and
+% complete the processing of these queues: upon executing, effectively, primitive \cmd\par\
+% or interrupting a paragraph with display math. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reset@queues@ltx{%
+ \global\let\g@whatsit@queue\@empty
+ \global\let\g@vadjust@queue\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Patching the lineno.sty package}
+%
+% \filename{lineno.sty} is a \LaTeX\ package that applies line numbering to a document.
+% The basic method is to give \cmd\interlinepenalty\ and like penalties such a value as 
+% to force a visit to the output routine, where the line of type is given its number. 
+% In order to properly measure the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, it defers \cmd\vadjust\ 
+% commands that may insert \cmd\vskip\ or \cmd\penalty\ nodes.
+%
+% The implementation of that package, however, manipulates \cmd\holdinginserts\ in a dangerous
+% way: outside the safety of the output routine. It also alters the meaning of \cmd\vadjust\
+% using global assignments. We patch its code to avoid these problems. The \filename{ltxgrid}
+% package already has the needed mechanisms in place to do these jobs correctly.
+%
+% The methods we use can accomodate any values of penalties like \cmd\clubpenalty, etc:
+% we do not make assumptions about the range of values these penalty parameters could take.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathWithnumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathNonumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\endlinenomath}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberpar}
+% Here are the definitions of procedures in \filename{lineno.sty}
+% that alter \cmd\holdinginserts. They are current as of version v4.41, 2005/11/02.
+% We patch them to avoid doing this: in ltxgrid-based classes like REVTeX, the output routine properly manages \cmd\holdinginserts, so packages should not attempt to do so.
+% Also, we will want \cmd\linenumberpar\ to set \cmd\interlinepenaly\ to dispatch to \cmd\MakeLineNo. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\linenomathWithnumbers@LN{%
+  \ifLineNumbers 
+    \ifnum\interlinepenalty>-\linenopenaltypar
+      \global\holdinginserts\thr@@ 
+      \advance\interlinepenalty \linenopenalty
+     \ifhmode
+      \advance\predisplaypenalty \linenopenalty
+     \fi 
+      \advance\postdisplaypenalty \linenopenalty
+      \advance\interdisplaylinepenalty \linenopenalty
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ignorespaces
+}%
+\newcommand\linenomathNonumbers@LN{%
+  \ifLineNumbers 
+    \ifnum\interlinepenalty>-\linenopenaltypar
+      \global\holdinginserts\thr@@ 
+      \advance\interlinepenalty \linenopenalty
+     \ifhmode
+      \advance\predisplaypenalty \linenopenalty
+     \fi 
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ignorespaces
+}%
+\def\endlinenomath@LN{% 
+  \ifLineNumbers
+   \global\holdinginserts\@LN@outer@holdins
+  \fi 
+  \global\@ignoretrue
+}
+\def\linenumberpar@LN{%
+  \ifvmode \@@@par \else 
+    \ifinner \@@@par \else
+      \xdef\@LN@outer@holdins{\the\holdinginserts}%
+      \advance \interlinepenalty \linenopenalty
+      \linenoprevgraf \prevgraf
+      \global \holdinginserts \thr@@ 
+      \@@@par
+      \ifnum\prevgraf>\linenoprevgraf
+        \penalty-\linenopenaltypar
+      \fi
+      \@LN@parpgbrk 
+      \global\holdinginserts\@LN@outer@holdins
+      \advance\interlinepenalty -\linenopenalty
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class@documenthook}
+% We patch only if we recognize the definitions of all the procedures we are to patch. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
+  \@ifx{\linenomathWithnumbers\linenomathWithnumbers@LN}{%
+   \@ifx{\linenomathNonumbers\linenomathNonumbers@LN}{%
+    \@ifx{\endlinenomath\endlinenomath@LN}{%
+     \@ifx{\linenumberpar\linenumberpar@LN}{%
+      \true@sw
+     }{\false@sw}%
+    }{\false@sw}%
+   }{\false@sw}%
+  }{\false@sw}%
+  {%
+   \class@info{Overriding lineo.sty, restoring output routine,}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We commence overriding the procedures of \filename{lineno.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \let\linenumberpar\linenumberpar@ltx
+   \let\endlinenomath\endlinenomath@ltx
+   \expandafter\let\csname endlinenomath*\endcsname\endlinenomath@ltx
+   \let\linenomathWithnumbers\linenomathWithnumbers@ltx
+   \let\linenomathNonumbers\linenomathNonumbers@ltx
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Override \filename{lineno.sty}'s equipment for \cmd\vadjust\ and \cmd\linelabel:
+% we have existing interrupts and handlers for these purposes. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \let\ex@vadjust@ltx\ex@vadjust@line
+   \let\@LN@postlabel\enqueue@whatsit@ltx
+   \let\do@whatsit\write@linelabel
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Redirect handlers to those provided by \filename{lineno.sty}, and
+% give an appropriate meaning to the respective headpatch within the handlers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \let\handle@par@ltx\handle@par@LN
+   \let\@@handle@line@ltx\Make@LineNo@ltx
+   \let\@@handle@display@ltx\Make@LineNo@ltx
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we undo the action taken by \filename{lineno.sty} wherein it
+% took over the output routine. Instead, we service \filename{lineno.sty}
+% existing equipment of \filename{ltxgrid}.
+% We also revert the core \LaTeX\ definitions of 
+% \cmd\vspace, \cmd\pagebreak, \cmd\nopagebreak, and \cmd\\,
+% which that package takes over (we have our own ways of doing these things). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \output@latex{\natural@output}%
+   \let\vspace\vspace@ltx
+   \let\pagebreak\pagebreak@ltx
+   \let\nopagebreak\nopagebreak@ltx
+   \let\@arrayparboxrestore\@arrayparboxrestore@ltx
+   \let\\\endline@ltx
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Prevent line numbering within a footnote}
+% When line numbering  is in effect, we must avoid any attempt to number the lines of a footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \appdef\set@footnotefont{%
+    \let\par\@@@par
+    \let\@@par\@@@par
+   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At last, we detect if the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has already been given; 
+% if so, we do its assignments again, because we have changed the meaning of \cmd\linenumberpar. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@if@sw\ifLineNumbers\fi{%
+    \class@info{Reinvoke \string\linenumbers}%
+    \let\@@par\linenumberpar
+    \@ifx{\@par\linenumberpar@LN}{\let\@par\linenumberpar}{}%
+    \@ifx{\par\linenumberpar@LN}{\let\par\linenumberpar}{}%
+   }{%
+    \class@info{Line numbering not turned on yet}%
+   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here ends the ``true branch'' of the patch code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \filename{lineno.sty} package is loaded, but we fail to patch it, notify the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \class@warn{Failed to recognize lineno.sty procedures; no patches applied. Please get a more up-to-date class.}%
+  }%
+ }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \filename{lineno.sty} is not loaded, so no patches are needed. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@linenumberpar}
+% Procedure \cmd\linenumberpar\ takes the place of \cmd\par\ when line numbering is in effect; 
+% It executes the \cmd\par\ primitive if we are in vertical mode.
+% Otherwise we are in horizontal mode in the MVL and wish to end the current paragraph,
+% or we have \cmd\unvbox ed material onto the MVL. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\linenumberpar@ltx{\@ifvmode{\@@@par}{\@linenumberpar}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\@linenumberpar
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@linenumberpar{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Prepare for our trip into the output routine by 
+% saving away the current value of \cmd\prevgraf. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \linenoprevgraf\prevgraf
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following will be used in the output routine dispatcher
+% to sense that we came from here. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \set@linepenalties
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, call primitive \cmd\par\ with the signal value of \cmd\interlinepenalty\ and friends. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@@@par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We are now in vertical mode. 
+% If lines of type were contributed to the MVL (non-trivial paragraph),
+% we must force another trip into the output routine to apply
+% line numbering to the last line of the paragraph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@ifnum{\prevgraf>\linenoprevgraf}{
+    \penalty-\int@postparpenalty
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Execute procedure \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk, which has been set up in the 
+% output routine for us to invoke here.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@LN@parpgbrk
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% To wrap things up, we restore the original value of \cmd\interlinepenalty\ and friends.
+%
+% Query: why not employ \TeX's context stack to do the restore?
+% Would there be something wrong with executing primitive \cmd\par\ within a group?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \restore@linepenalties
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathWithnumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathNonumbers}
+% Here are the patched definitions for the commands enabling 
+% line numbering in display math. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\linenomathWithnumbers@ltx{\@linenomathnumbers@ltx\true@sw}%
+\newcommand\linenomathNonumbers@ltx{\@linenomathnumbers@ltx\false@sw}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@linenomathnumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\endlinenomath}
+% We have just begun a display math, and any paragraph we are setting will now end.
+% We set all relevant penalties to interrupt values; in the visit to the output routine, 
+% we will replace the penalty with its normal value. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@linenomathnumbers@ltx#1{%
+ \@if@sw\ifLineNumbers\fi{%
+   \set@linepenalties
+   \set@displaypenalties#1%
+ }{}%
+ \ignorespaces
+}%
+\def\endlinenomath@ltx{%
+ \global\@ignoretrue
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We provide a handler for the last line of a paragraph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\handle@par@LN{%
+ \Make@LineNo@ltx
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% After setting the line number, we arrange for an appropriate penalty to 
+% be laid down after this visit to the output routine ends.
+%
+% Query: why not contribute the penalty right here in the visit to the output routine?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty 
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{}{%
+  \expandafter\gdef
+  \expandafter\@LN@parpgbrk
+  \expandafter{% 
+   \expandafter\penalty
+               \the\@tempcnta
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% When \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk\ is executed, it resets itself to the default value,
+% \cmd\@LN@screenoff@pen. 
+%
+% Query: \cmd\@LN@screenoff@pen\ appears to try to restore the depth of the last box:
+% why is this being done outside the safety of the output routine?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \global\let\@LN@parpgbrk\@LN@screenoff@pen
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Make@LineNo}
+% The procedure \cmd\Make@LineNo\ sets the box containing the line number itself.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Make@LineNo@ltx{%
+ \@LN@maybe@normalLineNumber
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We measure the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and unbox it.
+% At this point, it is crucial that that box have the same depth as that of the last 
+% box within it. 
+%
+% In the simple case, \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is
+% a \cmd\vbox\ containing as its last box the \cmd\hbox\ of the paragraph we are processing.
+%
+% Query: under what circumstances will this \emph{not} be the case?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \boxmaxdepth\maxdimen\setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}%
+ \@tempdima\dp\z@
+ \unvbox\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Then we create the box with the line number, setting its height to zero.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{\hb@xt@\z@{\makeLineNumber}}%
+ \ht\@tempboxa\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% With these preparations, we invoke \cmd\@LN@depthbox, which
+% lays that box down (with its depth appropriately set):
+% this procedure depends on our having set \cmd\@tempdima\ and \cmd\@tempboxa
+% (kinda kludgy way of passing arguments, really).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@LN@depthbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now increment the line number. I have relocated this token past \cmd\@LN@depthbox: 
+% this may induce a bug, but I am going to hereby force the issue: 
+% why split up the procedure that lays down boxes with a procedure that sets a register value?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \stepLineNumber
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, execute the \cmd\vadjust s that fell within the line that we just handled. 
+%
+% Note that \cmd\enqueue@vadjust@ltx\ had queued up all the \cmd\vadjust\ commands for the paragraph
+% into \cmd\g@vadjust@queue, laying down an (\cmd\int@vadjustpenalty) interrupt in each ones' place.
+% The interrupts associated with this line of the paragraph have now moved the tokens to \cmd\g@vadjust@line,
+% which we now expand and execute.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \g@vadjust@line
+ \global\let\g@vadjust@line\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write@linelabel#1{% 
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+  \string\newlabel{#1}{{\theLineNumber}{\thepage}{}{}{}}%
+ }% 
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ex@vadjust@line{%
+ \@if@sw\ifLineNumbers\fi{\enqueue@vadjust@ltx}{\vadjust}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note that the \cmd\linelabel\ commands use a mechanism different from \cmd\vadjust, 
+% embodied in the procedure \cmd\enqueue@vadjust@ltx, wherein the 
+% \cmd\write\ primitives are enqueued while the paragraph is being processed, each replaced with
+% an interrupt, then dequeued and executed by the interrupt handler, leaving a \cmd\write\ node
+% in place of the interrupt (just where the \cmd\vadjust 's vertical mode material would had been) 
+% just below the box containing the line of type. This \cmd\write, like all whatsits,
+% does not affect the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, unlike the case of general vertical mode material,
+% which could have interfered.
+%
+% \section{End of the \file{ltxgrid} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here ends the module.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxutil.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxutil.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1ca98f82cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/ltxutil.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4328 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 107
+% ltxutil.dtx: utilities package
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxutil.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    ltxutil.sty, ltxutil.pdf
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex ltxutil.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex ltxutil.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Program calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex ltxutil.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxutil.idx
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxutil.gls ltxutil.glo
+%       pdflatex ltxutil.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist ltxutil.idx
+%       pdflatex ltxutil.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README-LTXUTIL.tex.
+
+License
+   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+   
+   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
+   without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY 
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+  %{ignore}
+  \file{ltxutil.sty}{%
+   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+  }%
+  \file{ltxutil.krn}{%
+   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}%
+  }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    ltxutil.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run ltxutil.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxutil.dtx}\CheckSum{4291}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "ltxutil.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.2c",
+%%%     date            = "2019/01/18",
+%%%     time            = "14:29:48 UT-5",
+%%%     checksum        = "4291",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society. Minor changes by Mark Doyle for version 4.2a-c.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "utilities package",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README-LTXUTIL} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-LTXUTIL}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README-LTXUTIL}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxutil.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxutil.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under pdflatex
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README-LTXUTIL ltxutil.pdf
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxutil.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting this file with \TeX\ generates
+% the package file.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxutil.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxutil.aux ltxutil.idx ltxutil.ind ltxutil.log ltxutil.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</doc|package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxutil%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% Give credit where due. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2019/01/18/14:29:48 4.2c utilities package (portions licensed from W. E. Baxter web at superscript.com)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{README-LTXUTIL} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+% \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+%\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxutil
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxutil.gls ltxutil.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying out these procedures
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README-LTXUTIL}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package of utility macros%
+ \thanks{%
+  This file has version number \fileversion,
+  last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+  Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the README-LTXUTIL file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxutil} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{journals.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains prebuilt runtime files, documentation, and full source, 
+ready to add to a TDS-compliant \TeX\ installation.
+
+The \classname{ltxutil} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License 1.3c,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself are distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\ 
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{ltxutil.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxutil.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxutil.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxutil.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxutil.dtx| (Note: do \emph{not} use \LaTeX\ for this task).
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxutil.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxutil.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxutil.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxutil.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with the file \file{README-LTXUTIL}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then 
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxutil.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxutil.gls ltxutil.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxutil.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxutil.sty}.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your 
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxutil.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxutil.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxutil.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete; 
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxutil\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Fixed spurious \texttt{CR} and (return) characters in output file. Also, if the document did not have the \cs{end}\texttt{figure} on a line of its own, the macro wouldn't work. Fixed.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Removed superfluous \cs{def}s, changed to using \cs{floats@sw} as the flag. Also stopped using DPC's \cs{if@twocolumn} flag: using \cs{floats@sw} instead. Also added \cs{par}\cs{vskip}\cs{z@skip} after the \cs{minipagefootnotes} so that the float box would have zero depth like the kernel one. }
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if there really were floats of the given type}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Support the hack with \cs{prepdef}, and delay until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time, since \classname{hyperref} clobbers \cs{caption}.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 110) Install hooks for endfloats processing}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 116) Hyperref compatibility}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 130) Interference from array package}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak at each float; only print section head if there is something there.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 127) Floats placed [h] to allow page breaks}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 174) kernel fix}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/19}{(AO, 224) Hyperref compatibility.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/23}{Allow things to break over pages by setting array@default.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/16}{(AO, 221) Remove samepage command from @xfloat@prep: If the float can break over pages, we want better control.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/07/13}{(AO, 404) Hyperref compatibility}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 459) do not assume \cs{class@name} is defined}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname from \cs{@dotsep} to \cs{ltxu@dotsep}. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 475) I had not properly reproduced the LaTeX macro \cs{eqnarray}.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 479) Per: Dylan Thurston<dpt at math.harvard.edu>}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Make \cs{addtocontents} a \cs{long} \cs{def}; gobble up \cs{footnote}}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Remove code that avoided changes to \cs{@xfootnotemark}}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO, 438) Complete rewrite of footnote macros.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/07/07}{\cs{@xfloat@prep} calls \cs{ltx@footnote@pop} to restore the original \cs{ltx@footmark} and \cs{ltx@foottext} procedures, in case footnote processing has switched.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{\cs{class@documenthook} is the last \cs{AtBeginDocument} token now}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{@pushfilename@ltx} and \cs{@p@pfilename@ltx}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{class@extension}, \cs{class@extensionfile}, and \cs{class@ext@hook}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Get rid of \cs{set@typesize@hook} \cs{set@pica@hook} and the \cs{normalsize} directive}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 487) Support for video figures and the \cs{setfloatlink} command}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Acquire \classname{hyperref} savoire}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Default assignment of \cs{float@sw} now, not at \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{If class option \classoption{lengthcheck} is in effect, log the height of this float class.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{No need to protect against undefined \cs{float@sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Patch the array package even later: after all package patches go in.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Refine toc processing: provide default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Tally and log the height of a float class}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{(AO, 511) Compatability with lineno.sty's erroneous way of detecting fleqn.clo}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Hook for setting the font of a footnote}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 532) Both arguments of \cs{href} get sanitized}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 539) Use of double-backslash in argument of \cs{section} gives error. The \classname{textcase} package is involved.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/06}{(AO) Incorporate change to ltmiscen.dtx v1.1i 2000/05/19}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute \classname{atveryend}'s \cs{Call@AfterLastShipout} at the proper time}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 574) protect against \classname{lineno.sty}, which forces a visit to the output routine, which appears to destroy the value of \cs{@tempdima}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/06}{(AO, 572) title block footnotes numbered independently from body footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 582) A patch of \classname{hyperref.sty} to provide backward compatibility to \TeX Live 2007's version 6.75r}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Use updated best practice to use https and doi.org}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2018/12/12}{(MD) Updated name of README file and use standard fonts when typesetting}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\end{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxutil}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}\end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment, but not at the document level.
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the 
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% The \classname{ltxutil} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxutil} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxutil}. This means that for
+% greatest compatibility, \classname{ltxutil} should be loaded \emph{after},
+% say, \classname{ftnright}, which overwrites \LaTeX's kernel
+% procedures \cmd\@outputdblcol, \cmd\@startcolumn, and \cmd\@makecol.
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+% \subsection{array}
+% This package alters the way tabular environments are done, 
+% therefore it could run afoul of the \LaTeX\ ``required'' package \classname{array} or any
+% package that calls for it to be loaded.
+% However, this package has provisions for remaining compatible with \classname{array}.
+% So long as the version of \classname{array} that is used with this package has the appropriate
+% meanings for the procedures it overwrites, all should be well.
+%
+% \subsection{longtable}
+% David Carlisle's \classname{longtable} package modifies both the \LaTeX\ kernel and the 
+% \classname{array} package. This package must therefore alter \cmd\LT@array. 
+% For now, that job is handled by \classname{ltxgrid}.
+% 
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission. 
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package@name{ltxutil}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package@name}{%
+ Utility macros for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Banner and beginning of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Errors and warnings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class@err}
+% \begin{macro}{\class@warn}
+% \begin{macro}{\class@info}
+% A few shorthands for Class messages.
+% Your document class should define \cmd\class@name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\class@err#1{\ClassError{\class@name}{#1}\@eha}%
+\def\class@warn#1{\ClassWarningNoLine{\class@name}{#1}}%
+\def\class@info#1{\ClassInfo{\class@name}{#1}}%
+\def\obsolete@command#1{%
+ \class@warn@end{Command \string#1\space is obsolete.^^JPlease remove from your document}%
+ \global\let#1\@empty
+ #1%
+}%
+\def\replace@command#1#2{%
+ \class@warn@end{Command \string#1\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string#2\space instead}%
+ \global\let#1#2%
+ #1%
+}%
+\def\replace@environment#1#2{%
+ \class@warn@end{Environment #1 is obsolete;^^JUse #2 instead}%
+ \glet@environment{#1}{#2}%
+ \@nameuse{#1}%
+}%
+\def\incompatible@package#1{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{#1}{%
+  \def\@tempa{I cannot continue. You must remove the \string\usepackage\ statement that caused that package to be loaded.}%
+  \ClassError{\class@name}{The #1 package cannot be used with \class@name}%
+  \@tempa\stop
+ }{%
+  \class@info{#1 was not loaded (OK!)}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\class@warn@end#1{%
+ \gappdef\class@enddocumenthook{\class@warn{#1}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 459) do not assume \cs{class@name} is defined}%
+% Give \cmd\class@name\ a meaning if it does not already have one. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\class@name
+ \def\class@name{ltxutil}%
+ \class@warn{You should define the class name before reading in this package. Using default}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{New Tools}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\t@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\t@{to}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen@iii}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dimendef\dimen@iii\thr@@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\halignt@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\halignt@{\halign\t@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\f@ur}
+% Analogous to \cmd\@ne, \cmd\tw@, and \cmd\thr@@.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\f@ur=4\relax
+\chardef\cat@letter=11\relax
+\chardef\other=12\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\let@environment}
+% \begin{macro}{\glet@environment}
+% The directive \cmd\let@environment\ takes care of a common programming
+% idiom whereby one environment is made a synonym for another.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\let@environment#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname
+}%
+\def\glet@environment#1#2{%
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingplain}
+% The command \cmd\tracingplain\ causes \TeX's tracing parameters to
+% return to the values set by default. This command is sometimes
+% useful when you have said \cmd\tracingall\ somewhere and want to
+% restore.
+% The \cmd\traceoutput\ command causes \cmd\tracingoutput\ diagnostics
+% upon \cmd\shipout.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tracingplain{%
+ \tracingonline\z@\tracingcommands\z@\tracingstats\z@
+ \tracingpages\z@\tracingoutput\z@\tracinglostchars\@ne
+ \tracingmacros\z@\tracingparagraphs\z@\tracingrestores\z@
+ \showboxbreadth5\showboxdepth3\relax %\errorstopmode
+ }%
+\newcommand\traceoutput{%
+ \appdef\@resetactivechars{\showoutput}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\say}
+% \begin{macro}{\saythe}
+% The commands \cmd\say\ and \cmd\saythe\ cause diagnostic messages in the
+% \TeX\ log that give the value of a control sequence name or a register
+% respectively.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\say[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\meaning#1>}}%
+\newcommand\saythe[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\the#1>}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fullinterlineskip}
+% Resets the \cmd\prevdepth\ so that the full amount of \cmd\baselineskip\ glue will be inserted by
+% the \cmd\baselinesklip\ mechanism. 
+% Can be invoked just after a \cmd\hrule\ to undo its default suppression of base line skip.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fullinterlineskip{\prevdepth\z@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\count@i}
+% \begin{macro}{\count@ii}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\count@i\@ne
+\countdef\count@ii\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Boolean Control}%
+% We introduce just enough of the Boolean calculus for \TeX.
+% Alan Jeffrey was the pioneer here, with an article in TUGboat
+% (Vol. 11, No. 2, page 237).
+% This implementation owes a debt to
+% William Baxter (web at superscript.com).
+% See articles by Baxter and Ogawa in the proceedings of the
+% 1994 TUG meeting, TUGboat Vol.~15, No.~3.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prepdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\appdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\gappdef}
+%
+% Provide the capability of performing head- and tail patches.
+% The procedure \cmd\prepdef\ prepends to the given macro
+% the tokens specified in its second argument.
+% Likewise for \cmd\appdef, except that it appends.
+% Note that the first 10 toks registers are utility registers,
+% and we simply make a control sequence name, \cmd\toks@ii, for one of
+% them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks@ii{#2}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks@ii{#2}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}%
+}%
+\long\def\gappdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks@ii{#2}%
+ \global\edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef@val#1#2{%
+ \appdef#1{{#2}}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef@e#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\appdef
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{#2}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef@eval#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\appdef@val
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{#2}%
+}%
+\toksdef\toks@ii=\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifxundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotrelax}
+% \begin{macro}{\@argswap}
+% \begin{macro}{\@argswap@val}
+%
+% Certain utility procedures use \cmd\@ifxundefined,
+% which is defined here in terms of \cmd\@ifx.
+% Others use \cmd\@ifnotrelax, namely when 
+% the control sequence name is manufactured by
+% the use of \cmd\csname.
+%
+% The procedures \cmd\@argswap and \cmd\@argswap@val
+% are used to facilitate control of expansion.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifxundefined#1{\@ifx{\undefined#1}}%
+\long\def\@ifnotrelax#1#2#3{\@ifx{\relax#1}{#3}{#2}}%
+\long\def\@argswap#1#2{#2#1}%
+\long\def\@argswap@val#1#2{#2{#1}}%
+\def\@ifxundefined@cs#1{\expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname#1\endcsname\relax}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@boolean}
+% \begin{macro}{\@boole@def}
+% In order to define \cmd\@ifx, we first must create the
+% ``defining word'' (term taken form our Forth vocabulary)
+% \cmd\@boole@def, which employs \cmd\@boolean\ to do its job.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@boolean#1#2{%
+  \long\def#1{%
+    #2% \if<something>
+      \expandafter\true@sw
+    \else
+      \expandafter\false@sw
+    \fi
+  }%
+}%
+\def\@boole@def#1#{\@boolean{#1}}% Implicit #2
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@booleantrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\@booleanfalse}
+% The procedures \cmd\@booleantrue\ and
+% \cmd\@booleanfalse\ are assignment operators
+% for Boolean flags.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@booleantrue#1{\let#1\true@sw}%
+\def\@booleanfalse#1{\let#1\false@sw}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifx@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@if@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifcat}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifdim}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifeof}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifhbox}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifhmode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifinner}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifmmode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnum}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifodd}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifvbox}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifvmode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifvoid}%
+% We can now invoke the defining word to create
+% the procedures \cmd\@ifx\ and friends.
+%
+% Compatibility Note: earlier versions of this package 
+% defined a procedure \cmd\@ifempty. However, for compatibility with AMS\LaTeX,
+% we must avoid the following three names:
+% \cmd\@ifempty, \cmd\@xifempty, and \cmd\@ifnotempty.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@boole@def\@ifx#1{\ifx#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifx@empty#1{\ifx\@empty#1}%
+\@boole@def\@if@empty#1{\if!#1!}%
+%\@boole@def\@if@sw#1{\csname if#1\endcsname}%
+\def\@if@sw#1#2{#1\expandafter\true@sw\else\expandafter\false@sw#2}%
+\@boole@def\@ifdim#1{\ifdim#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifeof#1{\ifeof#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifhbox#1{\ifhbox#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifhmode{\ifhmode}%
+\@boole@def\@ifinner{\ifinner}%
+\@boole@def\@ifmmode{\ifmmode}%
+\@boole@def\@ifnum#1{\ifnum#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifodd#1{\ifodd#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifvbox#1{\ifvbox#1}%
+\@boole@def\@ifvmode{\ifvmode}%
+\@boole@def\@ifvoid#1{\ifvoid#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\true@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\false@sw}
+%
+% Note that when a Boolean operator expands, it
+% employs two macros that act as selectors, defined here.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\true@sw#1#2{#1}%
+\long\def\false@sw#1#2{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loopuntil}
+% \begin{macro}{\loopwhile}
+%
+% Loop control using the Boolean idiom.
+% Superior to \cmd\loop\dots\cmd\repeat\ because these can be nested.
+% The tail of the argument must have a Boolean predicate.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\loopuntil#1{#1{}{\loopuntil{#1}}}%
+\long\def\loopwhile#1{#1{\loopwhile{#1}}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@provide}
+%
+% A defining word that refuses to clobber a prior meaning.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@provide#1{%
+ \@ifx{\undefined#1}{\true@sw}{\@ifx{\relax#1}{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+ {\def#1}{\def\j@nk}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Begin Document Structure}
+% The standard \LaTeX\ mechanism \cmd\AtBeginDocument\
+% is inadequate because the \cmd\vsize\ is bound much too early.
+% We supply here a mechanism whereby decisions about the 
+% page layout can be deferred until \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
+%
+% The problem we are working around is that the \cmd\AtBeginDocument\
+% hook in \cmd\document\ appears long after the calculation of
+% \cmd\vsize\ and \cmd\hsize, that is, \LaTeX\ provides no mechanism
+% for deferring the decision about the page grid until \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
+% We fix things by prepending a hook at the very beginning of \cmd\document.
+%
+% As it turns out, though, it appears feasible to simply invoke the desired 
+% column grid command at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, since the MVL has nothing in it
+% at that time that would be problematical.
+%
+% The facility depends on the stability of this part
+% of \LaTeX's kernel code (the first token of \cmd\document),
+% which could change, you see. But considering that \LaTeX\ is
+% at this point essentially stagnant once more, we risk it.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\document}
+% We begin by installing hooks into \cmd\document\ that
+% we will manage ourselves.
+% First, we do as \cmd\document\ does: end the group
+% begun by \cmd\begin. Last, we conclude our shenanigans by absorbing
+% the first token of the expansion of \cmd\document, which
+% we assume to be \cmd\endgroup.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Get rid of \cs{set@typesize@hook} \cs{set@pica@hook} and the \cs{normalsize} directive}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\document{%
+ \endgroup
+ \document@inithook
+ \true@sw{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\document@inithook}
+% To use, simply \cmd\appdef\cmd\document@inithook\arg{your tokens here}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\document@inithook\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class@documenthook}
+% \begin{macro}{\class@enddocumenthook}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{\cs{class@documenthook} is the last \cs{AtBeginDocument} token now}
+% We install the last \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ hook, namely the 
+% procedure \cmd\class@documenthook. Within the document class,
+% we will use this hook exclusively, so as to avoid interference from other packages.
+% Similarly with \cmd\class@enddocumenthook, installed via \cmd\AtEndDocument.
+%
+% A document class using this package should do as this package does and just say, 
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\class@documenthook\ instead of \cmd\AtBeginDocument,
+% and \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ instead of \cmd\AtEndDocument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\class@documenthook}%
+}%
+\AtEndDocument{%
+ \class@enddocumenthook
+}%
+\let\class@documenthook\@empty
+\let\class@enddocumenthook\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enddocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\check@aux}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@check@aux}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+% The standard \LaTeX\ \enve{document} processing is a potential problem,
+% particularly when the output routine has been changed by \classname{ltxgrid}.
+% We separate out the procedure that checks the auxiliary file at the end of
+% the job so that later it can be called from the safety of the output
+% routine.
+% We will do this to ensure that the \cmd\@mainaux\ stream is not closed until
+% the last page of the job is shipped out, and that can only be done by coordinating
+% with the output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enddocument{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/06}{(AO) Incorporate change to ltmiscen.dtx v1.1i 2000/05/19}%
+% The following line from \filename{ltmiscen.dtx} `resets \cmd\AtEndDocument for latex/3060'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AtEndDocument\@firstofone
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@enddocumenthook
+ \@checkend{document}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\clear@document\ statement ends the current page (we must guarantee no further shipouts),
+% then executes all cleanup procedures that must occur only after the last shipout.
+% Clients will queue up their procedures via \cmd\AfterLastShipout, if it exists, otherwise by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\clear@document. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \clear@document
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We are very close to ending the \TeX\ run, now.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \check@aux
+ \deadcycles\z@
+ \@@end
+}%
+\def\check@aux{\do@check@aux}%
+\def\do@check@aux{%
+ \@if@sw\if@filesw\fi{%
+  \immediate\closeout\@mainaux
+  \let\@setckpt\@gobbletwo
+  \let\@newl@bel\@testdef
+  \@tempswafalse
+  \makeatletter
+  \input\jobname.aux\relax
+ }{}%
+ \@dofilelist
+ \@ifdim{\font@submax >\fontsubfuzz\relax}{%
+  \@font@warning{%
+   Size substitutions with differences\MessageBreak
+   up to \font@submax\space have occured.\@gobbletwo
+  }%
+ }{}%
+ \@defaultsubs
+ \@refundefined
+ \@if@sw\if@filesw\fi{%
+  \@ifx{\@multiplelabels\relax}{%
+   \@if@sw\if@tempswa\fi{%
+    \@latex@warning@no@line{%
+     Label(s) may have changed.
+     Rerun to get cross-references right
+    }%
+   }{}%
+  }{%
+    \@multiplelabels
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clear@document}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+% The procedure \cmd\clear@document\ is responsible for flushing out the last page of the document,
+% if not already done. 
+% The procedure then executes those procedures that must wait for execution until
+% after the last page is shipped out. 
+% Clients of \classname{ltxutil}, such as \classname{ltxgrid} and \classname{revtex4}
+% will queue these procedures up via \cmd\AfterLastShipout, if it exists, otherwise by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\clear@document. 
+% 
+% The command \cmd\Call@AfterLastShipout\ is provided by Heiko Oberdiek's \classname{atveryend} package.
+% This package is compatible with \classname{ltxutil}. 
+%
+% Note on compatibility with \classname{atveryend}: 
+% we arrange for \cmd\Call@AfterLastShipout\ to be called from the safety of the output routine,
+% thereby ensuring that all of the procedures queued up by that package's
+% \cmd\AfterLastShipout\ are executed at the right time.
+% We also ensure that \cmd\Call@AfterLastShipout\ has a default definition, in case the package was never loaded. 
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute \classname{atveryend}'s \cs{Call@AfterLastShipout} at the proper time}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clear@document{%
+ \clearpage
+ \do@output@cclv{%
+  \Call@AfterLastShipout
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \providecommand\Call@AfterLastShipout{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Class Extensions}%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{class@extension}, \cs{class@extensionfile}, and \cs{class@ext@hook}.}
+% The \LaTeX\ procedure \cmd\@onefilewithoptions\ is the vehicle for reading in 
+% a \LaTeX\ class or package. 
+% The APS RevTeX class implements the use of what are called ``substyles'',
+% actually extensions to the class itself. 
+% Any document class can do likewise. 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\class@extension}
+% \begin{macro}{\class@extensionfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\class@ext@hook}
+% A procedure similar to \LaTeX's \cmd\@onefilewithoptions, but as an extension to the
+% current document class. 
+% 
+% Read in the given file as if it were a document class file.
+% Usage: \cmd\class@extensionfile\ \arg{class} \cmd\@extension,
+% where \marg{class} is a file (similar to \file{aps.rtx}) and where \cmd\@extension\ is 
+% the file extension for \marg{class}. 
+% For instance, to read in  the file \file{aps.rtx}, 
+% do \cmd\class@extensionfile\ \texttt{\{aps\}} \cmd\substyle@ext,
+% where the latter has been define to expand to \file{.rtx}. 
+%
+% Features supported include
+% passing existing class options on to the class extension,
+% \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ processing,
+% a stack that restores \cmd\@currname, \cmd\@currext, \cmd\@clsextension, and the \cmd\catcode\ of `@',
+% fall-back to a control sequence name (with leading `rtx@') if no file exists.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\LoadClass\ gives one the ability to write a class that calls in 
+% another class as a (sort of) module: this scheme is like \cmd\LoadClass, but
+% turned inside out. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\class@extension#1#2{%
+ \IfFileExists{#1.#2}{%
+  \expandafter\class@extensionfile\csname ver@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname{#1}#2%
+ }{%
+  \csname rtx@#1\endcsname
+ }%
+}%
+\def\class@extensionfile#1#2#3{%
+ \@pass@ptions#3\@unusedoptionlist{#2}%
+ \global\let\@unusedoptionlist\@empty
+ \expandafter\class@ext@hook\csname#2.#3-h@@k\endcsname#1{#2}#3%
+}%
+\def\class@ext@hook#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@pushfilename@ltx
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\CurrentOption\@empty
+ \@reset@ptions
+ \let#1\@empty
+ \xdef\@currname{#3}%
+ \global\let\@currext#4%
+ \global\let\@clsextension\@currext
+ \input{#3.#4}%
+ \@ifl@ter#4{#3}#2{%
+  \class@info{Class extension later than: #2}%
+ }{%
+  \class@info{Class extension earlier: #2}%
+  \@@end
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \let#1\@undefined
+ \expandafter\@p@pfilename@ltx\@currnamestack@ltx\@nil
+ \@reset@ptions
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pushfilename}
+% \begin{macro}{\@p@pfilename}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{@pushfilename@ltx} and \cs{@p@pfilename@ltx}.}
+% But! \LaTeX\ does not provide for a class extension other than \file{.cls}, therefore we 
+% must extend \LaTeX's file name stack with the file extension of a class extension. 
+% This way, procedures like 
+% \cmd\ProvidesPackage, \cmd\OptionNotUsed, \cmd\ProcessOptions, \cmd\@reset@ptions\ 
+% will still work properly. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pushfilename@ltx{%
+ \xdef\@currnamestack@ltx{%
+  {\@currname}%
+  {\@currext}%
+  {\@clsextension}%
+  {\the\catcode`\@}%
+  \@currnamestack@ltx
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@p@pfilename@ltx#1#2#3#4#5\@nil{%
+ \gdef\@currname{#1}%
+ \gdef\@currext{#2}%
+ \gdef\@clsextension{#3}%
+ \catcode`\@#4\relax
+ \gdef\@currnamestack@ltx{#5}%
+}%
+\global\let\@currnamestack@ltx\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% We carefully patch \LaTeX\ so that the current value of \cmd\@clsextension\ can be
+% restored after reading in a class file. 
+%
+% \subsection{Type Tools}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flushing}
+% Undoes \cmd\centering. Should also undo \cmd\raggedleft\ and \cmd\raggedright.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\flushing{%
+  \let\\\@normalcr
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \@rightskip\z@skip
+  \parfillskip\@flushglue
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 539) Use of double-backslash in argument of \cs{section} gives error. The \classname{textcase} package is involved.}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@centercr}
+% The \cmd\@centercr\ command is the replacement for \cmd\@normalcr\ when setting type centered or ragged.
+% Normally, the meaning of \cmd\\ is \cmd\@normalcr, which \LaTeX\ defines via \cmd\DeclareRobustCommand.
+% In centered or ragged typesetting, the meaning of \cmd\\ is \cmd\@centercr,
+% therefore it ought to to be defined via \cmd\DeclareRobustCommand\ (but unfortunately is not).
+% The fact that it is not is yet another of \LaTeX's early failures that will never get fixed.
+%
+% The following exemplar fails under \LaTeX\ version 2005/12/01, package \classname{textcase} 2004/10/07 v0.07:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{article}%
+%\usepackage[overload]{textcase}
+%\begin{document}
+%\centering
+%\section{\MakeTextUppercase{Section\\title}}
+%Text
+%\end{document}
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% The solution is to promote \cmd\@centercr\ to a robust command, just the same as \cmd\\.
+% We do that here without needing to know the meaning of the command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand\expandafter\@centercr\expandafter{\@centercr}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Display Math}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@LaTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed}
+% Team \LaTeX\ has stated they will never repair Leslie's broken definition of \env{eqnarray}.
+% Let us be bold\dots.
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} package compatibility: that package overrides
+% \cmd\eqnarray\ by wrapping it up in a larger procedure, so its changes
+% are compatible with this package's changes.
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 475) I had not properly reproduced the LaTeX macro \cs{eqnarray}.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqnarray@LaTeX{%
+   \stepcounter{equation}%
+   \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
+   \global\@eqnswtrue
+   \m@th
+   \global\@eqcnt\z@
+   \tabskip\@centering
+   \let\\\@eqncr
+   $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+       \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+      &\global\@eqcnt\@ne\hskip \tw@\arraycolsep \hfil${##}$\hfil
+      &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip \tw@\arraycolsep
+         $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+      &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@ \hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+         \tabskip\z@skip
+      \cr
+}
+\long\def\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\ltx@mathindent
+ \let\\=\@eqncr
+ \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
+ \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi
+ \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ $$%
+ \everycr{}%
+ \halignt@\linewidth\bgroup
+  \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+  &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
+   \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
+   \hfil${{}##{}}$\hfil
+  &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
+   \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
+   $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+  &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+   \tabskip\z@skip
+  \cr
+}%
+\@ifx{\eqnarray\eqnarray@LaTeX}{%
+ \class@info{Repairing broken LaTeX eqnarray}%
+ \let\eqnarray\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed
+ \newlength\eqncolsep
+ \setlength\eqncolsep\z@
+ \let\eqnarray@LaTeX\relax
+ \let\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed\relax
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The macro \cmd\ltx@mathindent\ is assigned to the \cmd\tabskip\ glue just
+% before the alignment preamble is expanded, the value therefore applying at the
+% left of the first column.
+%
+% The below value specifies the display math to be set centered, as is common practice.
+% Alternatively, \cmd\tabskip\ can be set to a different glue value, accomplishing 
+% flush-left display math. 
+% 
+% Note that the \filename{fleqn.clo} package provides its own meaning for 
+% the eqnarray environment, which is also broken. We do not patch that package, however.
+% 
+% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{(AO, 511) Compatability with lineno.sty's erroneous way of detecting fleqn.clo}%
+% Bug note: The \filename{lineno.sty} package detects \filename{fleqn.clo} 
+% by testing whether \cmd\mathindent\ is defined, instead of using correct \LaTeXe\ means.
+% Even though our eqnarray environment is modelled after \filename{fleqn.clo},
+% we must program defensively here. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@mathindent{\@centering}%
+\def\set@eqnarray@skips{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+%\begin{macro}{\prep@math}
+%\begin{macro}{\prep@math@patch}
+% If we are in vertical mode when display math mode is entered (via \verb+$$+), 
+% \TeX\ will first enter horizontal mode, then display math mode; this results in a phantom paragraph
+% containing a single \cmd\hbox\ consisting of the \cmd\parindent\ box followed by the \cmd\parskipfillskip\ glue. 
+% Of course, that \cmd\hbox\ is accompanied by \cmd\parskip\ glue and \cmd\baselineskip\ glue.
+%
+% The \cmd\prep@math\ procedure removes the \cmd\parindent\ box, thereby (magically) eliminating the phantom paragraph.
+% The \cmd\prep@math@patch\ procedure headpatches the \env{equation} and \env{eqnarray} environments
+% to accomplish this removal of the phantom paragraph.
+%
+% Note that there are three remaining ways to enter display math mode that we do not treat:
+% the \env{displaymath} environment (equivalent to \cmd\[/\cmd\]), and the primitive the \verb+$$+ markup.
+% I refrain from treating the first case because \env{displaymath} already detects the case
+% where it is entered from vertical mode: I do not wish to engage in the dubious enterprise of attempting to correct a procedure that is ill conceived from the outset. 
+% As to the primitive \verb+$$+, there is no help for users who insist upon employing procedural markup in their documents. 
+% in their documents.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prep@math{%
+ \@ifvmode{\everypar{{\setbox\z@\lastbox}}}{}%
+}%
+\def\prep@math@patch{%
+ \prepdef\equation{\prep@math}%
+ \prepdef\eqnarray{\prep@math}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A document class may invoke \cmd\prep@math@patch\ at any point it wishes to prevent the appearance
+% of the phantom paragraph: it may be a global declaration or a local one.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We fail to patch \cmd\[, \cmd\equation, however.
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 174) kernel fix}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotemark}
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotetest}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@xfootnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@footmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@foottext}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@make@current@footnote}
+% We repair an error in the \LaTeX\ kernel (see \file{ltfloat.dtx}) involving footnotes.
+% The symptom is that the \cmd\footnotemark\ command does not work properly within a \env{minipage} environment.
+% The source of the problem is in the way the \cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\@xfootnotemark\ procedures are defined:
+% they do not share the method, used by \cmd\footnote\ and other procedures, that allows a context switch to 
+% change the way footnotes behave within a minipage environment.
+% This is a \LaTeX\ bug of long standing; our fix dates to 1987. 
+%
+% While we are at it, we rewrite both the \cmd\footnote, \cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\footnotetext\ procedures,
+% achieving a cleaner separation of syntax and semantics. 
+% Note that the \cmd\@footnotetext\ procedure is not involved in context switching; 
+% \classname{hyperref} will take over that procedure, substituting its own processing around
+% its argument and passing this to \cmd\H@@footnotetext. 
+% We anticipate this, and do our context switching on \cmd\H@@footnotetext.
+%
+% The \cmd\@makefnmark\ continues as the method of formatting the footnote mark. 
+%
+% A note about the context switch mentioned above:
+% the \env{minipage} environment executes the following in order to alter the way footnotes
+% behave:\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+%\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+%\let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+%\let\@makefnmark\@mpmakefnmark
+%\c@mpfootnote\z@\end{verbatim}
+% This code changes the counter used in autonumbered footnotes, the choice of footnote marker,
+% and the procedure used on the footnote text. Changing the counter is needed because minipage
+% footnotes are in their own sequence, and the footnote marker is customarily different within
+% a minipage. The procedure that works on the footnote text must be different because the footnotes
+% are placed at the bottom of the minipage, not the bottom of the text column.
+%
+% Note that \LaTeX\ initially defines \cmd\@mpfn\ as \texttt{footnote} and \cmd\thempfn\ as \cmd\thefootnote,
+% so we are initially doing general footnotes. 
+%
+% Any procedure that establishes a minipage-like context (e.g., floats) can do the same as the mimipage context switch 
+% illustrated above.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO, 438) Complete rewrite of footnote macros.}
+%
+% Three user-level command, \cmd\footnote, \cmd\footnotemark, and \cmd\footnotetext\ are defined (see the \LaTeX\ manual for user-level details).
+% \begin{macro}{\footnote}
+% The first user-level command is \cmd\footnote. 
+% A simple way to look at this command is to think of it as
+% \cmd\footnotemark\ \oarg{number} \cmd\footnotetext\ \oarg{number} \arg{text},
+% where the optional argument is the same in both calls.
+% We also define a syntactical helper procedure \cmd\ltx@xfootnote.
+% 
+% We employ the procedures \cmd\ltx@stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx@def@footproc,
+% passing in the procedure to execute, in this case \cmd\ltx@footmark,
+% which sets the footnote mark.
+% In any case, we end on the procedure \cmd\ltx@foottext, which sets the footnote text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\ltx@xfootnote\ltx@yfootnote}%
+\def\ltx@xfootnote[#1]{%
+ \ltx@def@footproc\ltx@footmark[#1]%
+ \expandafter\ltx@foottext\expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+\def\ltx@yfootnote{%
+ \ltx@stp@footproc\ltx@footmark
+ \expandafter\ltx@foottext\expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\footmark\ user-level command is next. 
+% Here we use the procedures \cmd\ltx@stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx@def@footproc\ again,
+% but unlike \cmd\footnote, we do not set the footnote text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotemark{\@ifnextchar[\ltx@xfootmark\ltx@yfootmark}%
+\def\ltx@xfootmark{\ltx@def@footproc\ltx@footmark}%
+\def\ltx@yfootmark{\ltx@stp@footproc\ltx@footmark}%
+\def\ltx@footmark#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+ \begingroup
+  \expandafter\ltx@make@current@footnote\expandafter{\@mpfn}{#1}%
+  \expandafter\@argswap@val\expandafter{\Hy@footnote@currentHref}{\hyper@linkstart {link}}%
+   \@makefnmark
+  \hyper@linkend
+ \endgroup
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+ \relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The third user-level command is \cmd\footnotetext.
+% As with \cmd\footnotemark, we use the procedures \cmd\ltx@stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx@def@footproc,
+% this time passing in the procedure \cmd\ltx@foottext, which sets the footnote text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotetext{\@ifnextchar[\ltx@xfoottext\ltx@yfoottext}%
+\def\ltx@xfoottext{\ltx@def@footproc\ltx@foottext}%
+\def\ltx@yfoottext{\ltx@stp@footproc\ltx@foottext}%
+\long\def\ltx@foottext#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+  \expandafter\ltx@make@current@footnote\expandafter{\@mpfn}{#1}%
+  \@footnotetext{#2}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here are the definitions of the procedures \cmd\ltx@stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx@def@footproc.
+% The require argument is the procedure to execute afterwards, and
+% \cmd\ltx@def@footproc\ parses a bracket-delimited argument (it is not optional).
+% In each case the given procedure is executed with an argument prepared for it:
+% the value of the footnote counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@def@footproc#1[#2]{%
+ \begingroup
+   \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #2\relax
+   \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+\def\ltx@stp@footproc#1{%
+ \expandafter\stepcounter\expandafter{\@mpfn}%
+ \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here we provide for our good friend \classname{hyperref} 
+% to enter in like a bull in a china shop. If it is not loaded,
+% we do what it would have done, but gentlier and without hypertext functionality.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \let\footnote@latex\footnote
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{%
+  \let\H@@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+  \def\@footnotetext{\H@@footnotetext}%
+  \let\H@@mpfootnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+  \def\@mpfootnotetext{\H@@mpfootnotetext}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In the following, we must use \LaTeX's rococco equipment in the form of \cmd\protected@edef,
+% because of the presence of a font switch in the meaning of \cmd\thempfootnote.
+% But, really, isn't this a sloppy conflation of semantics and presentation?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@make@current@footnote#1#2{%
+  \csname c@#1\endcsname#2\relax
+  \protected@edef\Hy@footnote@currentHref{\@currentHref-#1.\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+}%
+\def\thempfootnote@latex{{\itshape \@alph \c@mpfootnote }}%
+\def\ltx@thempfootnote{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}%
+\@ifx{\thempfootnote\thempfootnote@latex}{%
+ \class@info{Repairing hyperref-unfriendly LaTeX definition of \string\mpfootnote}%
+ \let\thempfootnote\ltx@thempfootnote
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} compatibility:
+% In its ``Automated \LaTeX\ hypertext cross-references'',
+% the \classname{hyperref} package alters footnote processing,
+% but it does nothing to address the several issues of concern to us.
+%
+% The \classname{hyperref} package takes over the \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ and 
+% \cmd\@footnotetext\ procedures, wrapping the argument in its own code.
+% It also rewrites \cmd\@footnotemark, making it a hyperlink, and
+% \cmd\@xfootnotenext, removing from it all hypertext capabilities. 
+%
+% However, if the \cmd\footnotemark\ command has been supplied with an optional argument,
+% \classname{hyperref}'s changes do not apply: it punts in this case.
+%
+% At the same time, it attempts to turn off its changes during 
+% \cmd\maketitle\ processing, destroying one of the capabilities we desire. 
+%
+% We make ourself \classname{hyperref} savvy:
+% we re-implement footnote processing, using \classname{hyperref} capabilities if that 
+% package has been loaded. 
+%
+% Any other package that rewrites \LaTeX's footnote macros will be incompatible
+% with this package.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Remove code that avoided changes to \cs{@xfootnotemark}}%
+%
+% Two thoughts about \classname{hyperref}: what for does it define \cmd\realfootnote?
+% Apparently even SR himself cannot remember.
+%
+% Also: a document class that desires high hypertext capabilities might
+% well wish to reimplement \cmd\maketitle\ so that footnotes called out from there
+% are hypertext links: the \classname{hyperref} package's 
+% ``Automated \LaTeX\ hypertext cross-references''
+% does not do any of this:
+%\begin{quotation}
+% But the special footnotes in |\maketitle| are much too hard to deal with properly.
+% Let them revert to plain behaviour.
+%\end{quotation}
+% Note that the document class, in reimplementing \cmd\maketitle, must ensure
+% that the \classname{hyperref} package does not clobber its own definition!
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tpfootnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\make@footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@footnotewidth}
+% The two procedures \cmd\@footnotetext\ and \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ share code.
+% We make that explicit here.
+%
+% Note that the procedure calling \cmd\make@footnotetext\ will open a group
+% with \cmd\bgroup\ which is then closed by \cmd\minipagefootnote@drop.
+%
+% Difference from \LaTeX: here we do not set \cmd\floatingpenalty\ to infinity.
+% Doing this must date back to a time when \LaTeX\ could not accomodate split insertions (footnotes).
+% I cannot think of any other reason to do have done this.
+% At any rate, with the \classname{ltxgrid} package, split insertions are properly
+% taken care of, so we allow it.
+%
+% We provide the hook \cmd\set@footnotewidth\
+% that sets the footnote on a particular measure.
+% Some page grids are such as to set a footnote in a context where \cmd\columnwidth
+% is not the right parameter to use for the set width of a footnote.
+% In such a case, for the applicable scope, you should define
+% \cmd\set@footnotewidth\ to perform this job correctly.
+% 
+% If we are setting type on multiple page grids, we must still ensure that all footnotes that 
+% find their way into the \cmd\footins\ insert register are set on the same width. 
+% This implies the need for a document to have an ``overall'' page grid, which determines the set width of all footnotes
+% with the exception of minipage footnotes. 
+%
+% In general, remember that footnotes, like all insertions (including floats), 
+% are a step outside of the galley context, and all aspects of insertions need to be
+% properly handled, including the set width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{%
+ \hbox{%
+  \@textsuperscript{%
+   \normalfont\itshape\@thefnmark
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@footnotetext{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup
+  \make@footnotetext
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@mpfootnotetext{%
+ \minipagefootnote@pick
+  \make@footnotetext
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\make@footnotetext\ sets the footnote \verb+#1+ into type, with the proper 
+% font, color, leading, width, and label in effect. 
+% It also establishes a strut and null glue at the end of the last paragraph of the footnote;
+% The strut helps compensate for the lack of \cmd\interlineskip\ glue between \cmd\insert s;
+% the glue establishes a feasible \cmd\vsplit\ point between footnotes. 
+%
+% Note that in the title block (\classname{ltxfront}), the alternative definition, under the name \cmd\frontmatter@footnotetext, is used.
+% The only material difference there is the reference to \cmd\frontmatter@makefntext\ instead of \cmd\@makefntext. 
+% 
+% Dependency note: the \cmd\@makefntext\ procedure is used to further process the footnote text 
+% and to execute the \cmd\@makefnmark\ procedure to produce the footnote mark. 
+% The definition of the former is customarily found in the document class (hereunder that of \filename{article.cls}), 
+% the latter in \filename{latex.ltx}. They are as follows: 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\newcommand\@makefntext[1]{%
+% \parindent 1em\noindent
+% \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
+% #1%
+%}%
+%\def\@makefnmark{%
+% \hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/06}{(AO, 572) title block footnotes numbered independently from body footnotes}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\make@footnotetext#1{%
+  \set@footnotefont
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As noted above, we do \emph{not} do \cmd\floatingpenalty\ \cmd\@MM, as in standard \LaTeX. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \set@footnotewidth
+  \@parboxrestore
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we employ \cmd\@mpfn\ as a level of redirection for the footnotecounter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \csname p@\@mpfn\endcsname\@thefnmark
+  }%
+  \color@begingroup
+   \@makefntext{%
+    \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+% The following strut and glue are for spacing and splitting, as mentioned above. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@finalstrut\strutbox\vadjust{\vskip\z@skip}%
+   }%
+  \color@endgroup
+ \minipagefootnote@drop
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Hook for setting the font of a footnote}
+% \cmd\set@footnotefont\ is the procedure for setting the font of a footnote.
+% Other aspects of the environment may be set using this hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@footnotefont{%
+  \reset@font\footnotesize
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\footnotesep
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\set@footnotewidth\ is the procedure for setting the width of a footnote.
+% The default page grid, a single, full-width column, sets footnotes on the width of the text. 
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@footnotewidth{\set@footnotewidth@one}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Floats}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Usage notes}%
+% We extend the \LaTeX\ kernel for three purposes:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+%
+% \item
+%  When the \cmd\footnote\ command is used within the
+%  scope of a float, we do as \env{minipage} does.
+%
+% \item
+%  We provide a mechanism to write floats out to an external
+%  stream for temporary storage (deferred floats).
+%
+% \item
+%  We provide mechanism for placing a float \texttt{here}
+%  invariably, that is, floats are unfloated.
+%  This mechanism is used to read the external stream mentioned above.
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% To use these mechanisms, the document class should 
+% define a float, say, \env{figure} as per usual, and in addition:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+%
+% \item
+%  Optionally define an alternative, say \env{figure@write} as follows:
+%    \begin{verbatim}\newenvironment{figure@write}{%
+% \write@float{figure}%
+%}{%
+% \endwrite@float
+%}\end{verbatim}
+% That is, the alternative environment executes \cmd\write@float\
+% instead of \cmd\@float.
+% Note that this step is not needed if the float environment
+% is defined in the simple way of \file{classes.dtx}.
+% However, an environment like \env{longtable} will require it.
+%
+% \item
+%  Install into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ a call to \cmd\do@if@floats,
+%  with the float name and an appropriate file extension as its arguments.
+%    \begin{verbatim}\appdef\class@documenthook{\do@if@floats{figure}{.fgx}}\end{verbatim}
+%  
+% \item
+%  Optionally define a text entity \cmd\figuresname\ that will
+%  be the text of the head that is set over the 
+%  deferred floats.
+%  If not defined, there will be no head.
+%  
+% \item
+%  Optionally define a user-level command to allow
+%  the document to determine where the figures are printed out
+%  (default is to print at end of document). E.g.,
+%    \begin{verbatim}\newcommand\printfigures{\print@float{figure}}\end{verbatim}
+% \item
+%  Install into \cmd\appdef\cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ a call to \cmd\printfigures,
+%  or, if the latter is not defined, as follows:
+%    \begin{verbatim}\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\print@float{figure}}\end{verbatim}
+%  Note that installing this command into \cmd\AtBeginDocument
+%  is best done earlier than calls that assume the last page of
+%  the document is at hand.
+%  
+% \end{enumerate} 
+%
+% \subsubsection{Robustifying fragile commands}%
+% Certain of \LaTeX's  commands cannot be written out to a file or appear within a \cmd\mark\ command argument
+% because they do calculations during expansion.
+% We provide for a little help, but without changing the meanings of these commands.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\robustify@contents}
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Make \cs{addtocontents} a \cs{long} \cs{def}; gobble up \cs{footnote}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\robustify@contents{%
+ \let \label \@gobble
+ \let \index \@gobble
+ \let \glossary \@gobble
+ \let\footnote \@gobble
+ \def\({\string\(}%
+ \def\){\string\)}%
+ \def\\{\string\\}%
+}%
+\long\def\addtocontents#1#2{%
+ \protected@write\@auxout{\robustify@contents}{\string \@writefile {#1}{#2}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preparing for the \classname{hyperref package}}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\label}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx@contentsline}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Refine toc processing: provide default.}%
+% The \classname{hyperref} package assumes that the \cmd\contentsline\ command will be given four arguments.
+% Therefore it cannot successfully process a \filename{.toc} file that had been written by standard \LaTeX.
+% We fix things up by always writing that fourth argument and by supplying a \cmd\contentsline\ command that
+% can read them.
+%
+% We also give the \cmd\newlabel\ command's second argument five tokens.
+%
+% Finally, we wrap \LaTeX's \cmd\contentsline\ command with code to detect the case
+% where the expected procedure is not defined, and we give it a syntax with no semantics.
+%
+% We switch over to this new definition only after \classname{hyperref} has loaded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{%
+ \addtocontents{#1}{%
+  \protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{\thepage}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\label#1{%
+ \@bsphack
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+   \string\newlabel{#1}{{\@currentlabel}{\thepage}{}{}{}}%
+  }%
+ \@esphack
+}%
+\def\ltx@contentsline#1{%
+ \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname l@#1\endcsname{}{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname l@#1\endcsname\@gobbletwo
+ }%
+ \contentsline@latex{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \let\contentsline@latex\contentsline
+ \let\contentsline\ltx@contentsline
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes within floats, unfloating floats, float font}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\caption}
+% DPC: Er a bit of a hack, but seems best way of supporting normal
+% \LaTeX\ syntax at this point: If a caption is used below a table,
+% then put out the footnotes before the caption.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Support the hack with \cs{prepdef}, and delay until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time, since \classname{hyperref} clobbers \cs{caption}.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \prepdef\caption{\minipagefootnote@here}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} compatibility:
+% this change to the \cmd\caption\ command is compatible with the
+% ``Automated \LaTeX\ hypertext cross-references'' patches of that package.
+%
+% All the same, I think Sebastian's changes to \cmd\caption\ and \cmd\@caption\
+% could bear with some improvement.
+% The following implementation requires knowing only the pattern part of the 
+% \cmd\@caption\ macro:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\caption{%
+%  \H@refstepcounter\@captype
+%  \hyper@makecurrent{\@captype}%
+%  \@dblarg{\H@caption\@captype}%
+%}%
+%\def\H@caption#1[#2]#3{%
+% \@caption{#1}[#2]{%
+%  \ifHy@nesting
+%   \hyper@@anchor{\@currentHref}{#3}%
+%  \else
+%   \hyper@@anchor{\@currentHref}{\relax}#3%
+%  \fi
+% }%
+%}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@here}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@foot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@pick}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote@drop}
+% Procedure to deal with footnotes accumulated within a minipage environment.
+% These procedures encapsulate all uses of the \cmd\@mpfootins\ box.
+% 
+%
+% Note: \cmd\minipagefootnote@here\ must \emph{not} be executed within the MVL!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minipagefootnote@init{%
+ \setbox\@mpfootins\box\voidb@x
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote@pick{%
+ \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox\bgroup
+  \unvbox\@mpfootins
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote@drop{%
+ \egroup
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote@here{%
+    \par
+    \@ifvoid\@mpfootins{}{%
+      \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+      \fullinterlineskip
+      \@ifinner{%
+       \vtop{\unvcopy\@mpfootins}%
+       {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+      }{}%
+      \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    }%
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote@foot{%
+ \@ifvoid\@mpfootins{}{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup\unvbox\@mpfootins\egroup
+ }%
+}%
+\def\endminipage{%
+    \par
+    \unskip
+    \minipagefootnote@here
+    \@minipagefalse   %% added 24 May 89
+  \color@endgroup
+  \egroup
+  \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floats@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Default assignment of \cs{float@sw} now, not at \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}%
+% The Boolean \cmd\floats@sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated;
+% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document.
+% Note that the assignment of this Boolean is to be overridden by 
+% the document class in response to user-selected options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\floats@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpmakefntext}
+% The float start-code is redefined to set up footnotes in the style of minipage.
+% Also, the \cmd\floats@sw\ Boolean informs us that floats are to be 
+% all placed \texttt{here}.
+% Note that, to protect against the Boolean being undefined
+% at this late hour, we default it globally to true.
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Removed superfluous \cs{def}s, changed to using \cs{floats@sw} as the flag. Also stopped using DPC's \cs{if@twocolumn} flag: using \cs{floats@sw} instead. Also added \cs{par}\cs{vskip}\cs{z@skip} after the \cs{minipagefootnotes} so that the float box would have zero depth like the kernel one. }
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 110) Install hooks for endfloats processing}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 127) Floats placed [h] to allow page breaks}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/19}{(AO, 224) Hyperref compatibility.}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/16}{(AO, 221) Remove samepage command from @xfloat@prep: If the float can break over pages, we want better control.}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/07/07}{\cs{@xfloat@prep} calls \cs{ltx@footnote@pop} to restore the original \cs{ltx@footmark} and \cs{ltx@foottext} procedures, in case footnote processing has switched.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{No need to protect against undefined \cs{float@sw}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@xfloat@LaTeX\@xfloat
+\def\@xfloat#1[#2]{%
+  \@xfloat@prep
+  \@nameuse{fp@proc@#2}%
+  \floats@sw{\@xfloat@LaTeX{#1}[#2]}{\@xfloat@anchored{#1}[]}%
+}%
+\def\@xfloat@prep{%
+  \ltx@footnote@pop
+  \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+  \def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+  \c@mpfootnote\z@
+  \let\H@@footnotetext\H@@mpfootnotetext
+}%
+\let\ltx@footnote@pop\@empty
+\def\@xfloat@anchored#1[#2]{%
+ \def\@captype{#1}%
+ \begin@float@pagebreak
+  \let\end@float\end@float@anchored
+  \let\end@dblfloat\end@float@anchored
+        \hsize\columnwidth
+        \@parboxrestore
+        \@floatboxreset
+  \minipagefootnote@init
+}%
+\def\end@float@anchored{%
+  \minipagefootnote@here
+  \par\vskip\z@skip
+ \par
+ \end@float@pagebreak
+}%
+\def\begin@float@pagebreak{\par\addvspace\intextsep}%
+\def\end@float@pagebreak{\par\addvspace\intextsep}%
+\def\@mpmakefntext#1{%
+ \parindent=1em
+ \noindent
+ \hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
+ #1%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Writing floats out to a file}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@if@floats}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{No need to protect against undefined \cs{float@sw}}
+% The procedure \cmd\do@if@floats\ should be executed at
+% \cmd\class@documenthook\ time: it arranges to write out
+% the floats of the given class to a temporary file, to be 
+% read back later (deferred floats),
+% given that \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% Note that, to protect against the Boolean being undefined
+% at this late hour, we default it globally to true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@if@floats#1#2{%
+ \floats@sw{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Open the stream to save out the document's floats of this class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\newwrite
+              \csname#1write\endcsname
+  \expandafter\def
+              \csname#1@stream\endcsname{\jobname#2}%
+  \expandafter\immediate
+  \expandafter\openout
+              \csname#1write\endcsname
+              \csname#1@stream\endcsname\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Swap environments.
+% If the class writer has defined, e.g., \env{figure@write},
+% then we use this as the procedure to execute for writing
+% the float out to the external stream.
+% Otherwise, the replacement of \cmd\@float\ by \cmd\write@float\
+% should do the right thing for float environments defined
+% in the simple way of \classname{classes.dtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifxundefined\@float@LaTeX{%
+   \let\@float@LaTeX\@float
+   \let\@dblfloat@LaTeX\@dblfloat
+   \let\@float\write@float
+   \let\@dblfloat\write@floats
+  }{}%
+  \let@environment{#1@float}{#1}%
+  \let@environment{#1@floats}{#1*}%
+  \@ifxundefined@cs{#1@write}{}{%
+   \let@environment{#1}{#1@write}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\print@float}
+% The procedure \cmd\print@float\ prints out the
+% deferred floats.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if there really were floats of the given type}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak at each float; only print section head if there is something there.}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/23}{Allow things to break over pages by setting array@default.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{If class option \classoption{lengthcheck} is in effect, log the height of this float class.}
+%
+% Here, we make use of the \cmd\floats@sw\ Boolean to select
+% the non-floating type of processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\triggerpar{\leavevmode\@@par}%
+\def\oneapage{\def\begin@float@pagebreak{\newpage}\def\end@float@pagebreak{\newpage}}%
+\def\print@float#1#2{%
+ \lengthcheck@sw{%
+  \total@float{#1}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined@cs{#1write}{}{%
+  \begingroup
+   \@booleanfalse\floats@sw
+   #2%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \def\array@default{v}% floats must 
+   \let\@float\@float@LaTeX
+   \let\@dblfloat\@dblfloat@LaTeX
+   \let\trigger@float@par\triggerpar
+   \let@environment{#1}{#1@float}%
+   \let@environment{#1*}{#1@floats}%
+   \expandafter\prepdef\csname#1\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}%
+   \expandafter\prepdef\csname#1*\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}%
+   \@namedef{fps@#1}{h!}%
+   \expandafter\immediate
+   \expandafter\closeout
+               \csname#1write\endcsname
+   \everypar{%
+    \global\let\trigger@float@par\relax
+    \global\everypar{}\setbox\z@\lastbox
+    \@ifxundefined@cs{#1sname}{}{%
+     \begin@float@pagebreak
+     \expandafter\section
+     \expandafter*%
+     \expandafter{%
+                  \csname#1sname\endcsname
+                 }%
+    }%
+   }%
+   \input{\csname#1@stream\endcsname}%
+  \endgroup
+  \global\expandafter\let\csname#1write\endcsname\relax
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tally@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\total@float}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Tally and log the height of a float class}
+% If we are tallying column inches, \cmd\tally@float\ tallies a contribution to \cmd\ftype@\ \cmd\@captype,
+% depending upon the width of \cmd\@currbox.
+% In effect, each float class is tallied in two sections, one for narrow, one for wide floats.
+% 
+% If statistics are wanted, \cmd\total@float\ logs the tally for the given float class.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+% The quantity \cmd\@twopowerfourteen\ is $2^{14}$, \cmd\@twopowertwo\ is $2^{2}$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\@xvi=16\relax
+\mathchardef\@twopowerfourteen="4000
+\mathchardef\@twopowertwo="4
+\def\tally@float#1{%
+ \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We strip all but the least significant 5 bits from \cmd\count\ \cmd\@currbox,
+% and put them into \cmd\@tempcnta. We then subtract 16 from \cmd\count\ \cmd\@currbox
+% (unless this would make it negative), effectively reversing the process
+% carried out in \cmd\@float.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tempcnta\count\@currbox
+  \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+  \multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+  \advance\count\@currbox-\@tempcnta
+  \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+  \@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\@xvi}{%
+   \advance\count\@currbox-\@xvi\@booleantrue\@temp@sw
+  }{%
+   \@booleanfalse\@temp@sw
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If so desired, we log the characteristics of this float object:
+% float class and float placement parameters, height, depth, and width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \show@box@size@sw{%
+   \class@info{Float #1
+    (\the\@tempcnta)[\@temp@sw{16+}{}\the\count\@currbox]^^J%
+    (\the\ht\@currbox+\the\dp\@currbox)X\the\wd\@currbox
+   }%
+  }{}%
+ \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here we tally the height of this float object.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let
+ \expandafter\@tempa
+             \csname fbox@\csname ftype@#1\endcsname\endcsname
+ \@ifnotrelax\@tempa{%
+  \@ifhbox\@tempa{%
+   \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvcopy\@currbox\hrule}%
+   \dimen@\ht\@tempboxa
+   \divide\dimen@\@twopowerfourteen
+   \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa<\textwidth}{%
+    \advance\dimen@\ht\@tempa
+    \global\ht\@tempa\dimen@
+   }{%
+    \advance\dimen@\dp\@tempa
+    \global\dp\@tempa\dimen@
+   }%
+  }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\total@float#1{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \expandafter\@tempa
+             \csname fbox@\csname ftype@#1\endcsname\endcsname
+ \@ifnotrelax\@tempa{%
+  \@ifhbox\@tempa{%
+   \@tempdima\the\ht\@tempa\divide\@tempdima\@twopowertwo\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+   \@tempdimb\the\dp\@tempa\divide\@tempdimb\@twopowertwo\@tempcntb\@tempdimb
+   \class@info{Total #1: Column(\the\@tempcnta pt), Page(\the\@tempcnta pt)}%
+  }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\write@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\write@floats}
+% \begin{macro}{\write@@float}
+% Handles the case where the name of the float is the same as
+% that of the stream. Note that
+% \env{longtable} does \emph{not} fit this case.
+% Note also: \cmd\write@float\ is \emph{not} a user-level environment,
+% therefore it is properly not defined with \cmd\newenvironment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write@float#1{\write@@float{#1}{#1}}%
+\def\endwrite@float{\@Esphack}%
+\def\write@floats#1{\write@@float{#1*}{#1}}%
+\def\endwrite@floats{\@Esphack}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\write@@float}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Fixed spurious \texttt{CR} and (return) characters in output file. Also, if the document did not have the \cs{end}\texttt{figure} on a line of its own, the macro wouldn't work. Fixed.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write@@float#1#2{%
+  \ifhmode
+     \@bsphack
+  \fi
+  \chardef\@tempc\csname#2write\endcsname
+  \toks@{\begin{#1}}%
+  \def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname\endwrite@float
+  \catcode`\^^M\active
+  \@makeother\{\@makeother\}\@makeother\%
+  \write@floatline
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\write@floatline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@write@floatline}
+% \begin{macro}{\float@end@tag}
+% The procedure \cmd\write@floatline\ only parses; 
+% it passes its result to \cmd\@write@floatline, which
+% writes the line to output, then tests the line
+% for the \cmd\end\arg{float} tokens with 
+% aid of the \cmd\float@end@tag\ procedure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\[\the\catcode`\{\catcode`\]\the\catcode`\}\@makeother\{\@makeother\}%
+ \gdef\float@end@tag#1\end{#2}#3\@nul[%
+  \def\@tempa[#2]%
+  \@ifx[\@tempa\@tempb][\end[#2]][\write@floatline]%
+ ]%
+ \obeylines%
+ \gdef\write@floatline#1^^M[%
+  \begingroup%
+   \newlinechar`\^^M%
+   \toks@\expandafter[\the\toks@#1]\immediate\write\@tempc[\the\toks@]%
+  \endgroup%
+  \toks@[]%
+  \float@end@tag#1\end{}\@nul%
+ ]%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Counters}
+% The following definitions override those of the \LaTeX\ kernel,
+% providing for a greater range of inputs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@alph#1{\ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\else\@ialph{#1}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ialph#1{\ifcase#1\or \or \or \or \or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
+  k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
+  y\or z\or aa\or bb\or cc\or dd\or ee\or ff\or gg\or hh\or ii\or jj\or
+  kk\or ll\or mm\or nn\or oo\or pp\or qq\or rr\or ss\or tt\or uu\or
+  vv\or ww\or xx\or yy\or zz\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Customization of Sections}%
+%
+% Patch the standard \LaTeX\ sectioning procedure to:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%\item
+% Allow a sectioning command to trigger the title page, or more generally
+% to recognize that it is the first object in the document,
+% so we headpatch \cmd\@startsection.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow a tail command in |#6| to uppercase the title, so we retain
+% DPC's braces.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow each type of sectioning command to format its number differently,
+% so we generalize \cmd\@seccntformat.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow each type of sectioning command to format its argument differently,
+% so we generalize \cmd\@hangfrom.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow the starred form of the command to
+% mark (the running head) and
+% make an entry in the TOC,
+% so we put \cmd\@ssect\ on the same footing as \cmd\@sect.
+%
+% Note that the tokens passed to the TOC now are \emph{not}
+% the optional argument of the command, but the required.
+% This means that the user can no longer use the former
+% to put variant content in to the TOC as the Manual says.
+%
+% Instead, the optional argument is used to put an alternative
+% title into the running headers, a better choice.
+%
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+% Patch a head hook into the basic sectioning command.
+% Treat \cmd\@sect\ and \cmd\@ssect\ on an equal footing:
+% now their pattern parts are identical.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \@startsection@hook
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+  \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak
+  \everypar{}%
+ \else
+  \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \@ifstar
+  {\@dblarg{\@ssect@ltx{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+  {\@dblarg{\@sect@ltx {#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+}%
+\def\@startsection@hook{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% When defining \cmd\@svsec, do not expand \cmd\@seccntformat.
+% Put brace characters back where they were before David Carlisle got at them
+% (i.e., as if \cmd\@hangfrom\ had two arguments).
+% Protect the mark mechanism from an undefined meaning.
+% Pass |#8| to the TOC instead of |#7|.
+% Remove \cmd\relax\ from the replacement part of \cmd\@svsec.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@hangfrom\ and \cmd\@runin@to\ can
+% be used to process the argument of the head.
+% The head can define, e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom@section, to
+% do its own processing.
+%
+% In using \cmd\H@refstepcounter\ in place of \cmd\refstepcounter\ we rely on
+% either loading before any package that patches the latter, or 
+% the convention that the former is the original \LaTeX\ procedure.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\class@info{Repairing broken LateX \string\@sect}%
+\def\@sect@ltx#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+  \@ifnum{#2>\c@secnumdepth}{%
+    \def\H@svsec{\phantomsection}%
+    \let\@svsec\@empty
+  }{%
+    \H@refstepcounter{#1}%
+    \def\H@svsec{%
+     \phantomsection
+    }%
+    \protected@edef\@svsec{{#1}}%
+    \@ifundefined{@#1cntformat}{%
+     \prepdef\@svsec\@seccntformat
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\prepdef
+     \expandafter\@svsec
+                 \csname @#1cntformat\endcsname
+    }%
+  }%
+  \@tempskipa #5\relax
+  \@ifdim{\@tempskipa>\z@}{%
+    \begingroup
+      \interlinepenalty \@M
+      #6{%
+       \@ifundefined{@hangfrom@#1}{\@hang@from}{\csname @hangfrom@#1\endcsname}%
+       {\hskip#3\relax\H@svsec}{\@svsec}{#8}%
+      }%
+      \@@par
+    \endgroup
+    \@ifundefined{#1mark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1mark\endcsname}{#7}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+      \@ifnum{#2>\c@secnumdepth}{%
+       \protect\numberline{}%
+      }{%
+       \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+      }%
+      #8}%
+  }{%
+    \def\@svsechd{%
+      #6{%
+       \@ifundefined{@runin@to@#1}{\@runin@to}{\csname @runin@to@#1\endcsname}%
+       {\hskip#3\relax\H@svsec}{\@svsec}{#8}%
+      }%
+      \@ifundefined{#1mark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1mark\endcsname}{#7}%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+        \@ifnum{#2>\c@secnumdepth}{%
+         \protect\numberline{}%
+        }{%
+         \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+        }%
+        #8}%
+    }%
+  }%
+  \@xsect{#5}%
+}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}#3}%
+\def\@runin@to #1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% Put brace characters back where they were before David Carlisle got at them
+% (as if \cmd\@hangfrom\ has two arguments).
+% Possibly set a mark.
+% Make a TOC entry.
+%
+% Note that, for compatibility with the \classname{hyperref} package, we
+% need to provide the interface required by that package
+% (actually required by \file{pdfmark.def} and \file{nameref.sty}),
+% namely
+% the definition of \cmd\@currentlabelname\ (but now removed),
+% the insertion of the procedure \cmd\Sectionformat\ (but why is this needed?), and
+% the call to \cmd\phantomsection\ (which must precede the call to \cmd\addcontentsline).
+% We also have to sidestep the patch to \cmd\@ssect\ in that same file, therefore
+% we use a different control sequence name in the call from \cmd\@startsection.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 116) Hyperref compatibility}
+% \changes{4.0f}{2001/07/13}{(AO, 404) Hyperref compatibility}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ssect@ltx#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Removed |\def\@currentlabelname{#8}|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\H@svsec{\phantomsection}%
+  \@tempskipa #5\relax
+  \@ifdim{\@tempskipa>\z@}{%
+    \begingroup
+      \interlinepenalty \@M
+      #6{%
+       \@ifundefined{@hangfroms@#1}{\@hang@froms}{\csname @hangfroms@#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Removed |{\hskip#3\relax\H@svsec}{\Sectionformat{#8}{#1}}|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       {\hskip#3\relax\H@svsec}{#8}%
+      }%
+      \@@par
+    \endgroup
+    \@ifundefined{#1smark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1smark\endcsname}{#7}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\protect\numberline{}#8}%
+  }{%
+    \def\@svsechd{%
+      #6{%
+       \@ifundefined{@runin@tos@#1}{\@runin@tos}{\csname @runin@tos@#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Removed |{\hskip#3\relax\H@svsec}{\Sectionformat{#8}{#1}}|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       {\hskip#3\relax\H@svsec}{#8}%
+      }%
+      \@ifundefined{#1smark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1smark\endcsname}{#7}%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\protect\numberline{}#8}%
+    }%
+  }%
+  \@xsect{#5}%
+}%
+\def\@hang@froms#1#2{#1#2}%
+\def\@runin@tos #1#2{#1#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\init@hyperref}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Acquire \classname{hyperref} savoire}
+% Document classes that incorporate this package will be \classname{hyperref}-savvy.
+% (To accomplish this, we ensure that \cmd\hyperanchor\ and \cmd\hyper@last\ are both defined.)
+% Being \classname{hyperref}-savvy levels some requirements on us, but the benefits are many.
+%
+% One is that the TOC will not get amnesia and require a full set of three typesetting runs before its formatting is stable.
+% Instead, only two runs are required: the first updates the auxiliary file, the second the TOC.
+% However, the formatting of the document does not change.
+%
+% Another aspect of being \classname{hyperref}-savvy is that the syntax of commands in the \file{.aux} file will not change
+% if \classname{hyperref} is turned on or off. 
+%
+% Note that \cmd\hyper@anchorstart\ and \cmd\hyper@anchorend\ constitute the programming interface
+% for a hypertext anchor (the target of a hypertext link); \cmd\hyper@linkstart\ and \cmd\hyper@linkend\
+% are the interface for a hypertext link.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\init@hyperref{%
+ \providecommand\phantomsection{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper@makecurrent[1]{}%
+ \providecommand\Hy@raisedlink[1]{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper@anchorstart[1]{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper@anchorend{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper@linkstart[2]{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper@linkend{}%
+ \providecommand\@currentHref{}%
+}%
+\let\H@refstepcounter\refstepcounter
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \init@hyperref
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sec@upcase}
+% Upper case for sections (optional upper case items).  These are
+% created so that some headings can be toggled between mixed case and
+% upper case readily.
+% Headings that might be changed can be wrapped in the style file in
+% \cmd\sec@upcase\arg{text} constructs;
+% the expansion of \cmd\sec@upcase\ is
+% controlled here.  It is \cmd\relax\ by default (mixed case heads), and
+% can easily be changed to \cmd\uppercase\ if desired.
+% If mixed-case headings are wanted by the editor, authors {\em must}
+% supply mixed case text, although this is what authors should be doing
+% anyway.
+% (Mixed can be converted to upper,
+% but the reverse transformation cannot be automated.)
+%
+% The following setting gives the \LaTeX\ default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sec@upcase#1{\relax{#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patch the \env{tabular} and \env{array} Environments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Patch the array package even later: after all package patches go in.}
+% We headpatch the begin processing and tailpatch the end processing
+% of the \env{tabular} and \env{array} environments.
+% A document class can define these hooks as needed.
+%
+% We proceed with care to make further patches to 
+% support tabulars that break over pages.
+% Our patches will not necessarily be effective for 
+% other packages that replace the \LaTeX\ \env{array} and \env{tabular}
+% environments. I know of none that do so.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{array}{\switch@array}{\switch@tabular}%
+ \prepdef\endtabular{\endtabular@hook}%
+ \@provide\endtabular@hook{}%
+ \prepdef\endarray{\endarray@hook}%
+ \@provide\endarray@hook{}%
+ \providecommand\array@hook{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Install, effectively, a head patch to \cmd\tabular.
+% In order to avoid interference from, e.g., the \classname{array} package,
+% we must perform this patch only \emph{after} packages load.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 130) Interference from array package}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \prepdef\@tabular{\tabular@hook}%
+ \@provide\tabular@hook{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\switch@tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\switch@array}
+% The two procedures \cmd\switch@tabular\ and \cmd\switch@array\ 
+% apply needed patches to the various tabular procedures,
+% the former applying to the \LaTeX\ kernel, the latter to the 
+% required \classname{array} package (and to the number of other
+% required packages that load it).
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\switch@tabular{%
+ \let\@array@sw\@array@sw@array
+ \@ifx{\@array\@array@LaTeX}{%
+  \@ifx{\multicolumn\multicolumn@LaTeX}{%
+   \@ifx{\@tabular\@tabular@LaTeX}{%
+    \@ifx{\@tabarray\@tabarray@LaTeX}{%
+     \@ifx{\array\array@LaTeX}{%
+      \@ifx{\endarray\endarray@LaTeX}{%
+       \@ifx{\endtabular\endtabular@LaTeX}{%
+        \@ifx{\@mkpream\@mkpream@LaTeX}{%
+         \@ifx{\@addamp\@addamp@LaTeX}{%
+          \@ifx{\@arrayacol\@arrayacol@LaTeX}{%
+           \@ifx{\@tabacol\@tabacol@LaTeX}{%
+            \@ifx{\@arrayclassz\@arrayclassz@LaTeX}{%
+             \@ifx{\@tabclassiv\@tabclassiv@LaTeX}{%
+              \@ifx{\@arrayclassiv\@arrayclassiv@LaTeX}{%
+               \@ifx{\@tabclassz\@tabclassz@LaTeX}{%
+                \@ifx{\@classv\@classv@LaTeX}{%
+                 \@ifx{\hline\hline@LaTeX}{%
+                  \@ifx{\@tabularcr\@tabularcr@LaTeX}{%
+                   \@ifx{\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr@LaTeX}{%
+                    \@ifx{\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr@LaTeX}{%
+                     \@ifx{\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr@LaTeX}{%
+                      \true@sw
+                     }{%
+                      \false@sw
+                     }%
+                    }{%
+                     \false@sw
+                    }%
+                   }{%
+                    \false@sw
+                   }%
+                  }{%
+                   \false@sw
+                  }%
+                 }{%
+                  \false@sw
+                 }%
+                }{%
+                 \false@sw
+                }%
+               }{%
+                \false@sw
+               }%
+              }{%
+               \false@sw
+              }%
+             }{%
+              \false@sw
+             }%
+            }{%
+             \false@sw
+            }%
+           }{%
+            \false@sw
+           }%
+          }{%
+           \false@sw
+          }%
+         }{%
+          \false@sw
+         }%
+        }{%
+         \false@sw
+        }%
+       }{%
+        \false@sw
+       }%
+      }{%
+       \false@sw
+      }%
+     }{%
+      \false@sw
+     }%
+    }{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \false@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \false@sw
+ }%
+ {%
+  \class@info{Patching LaTeX tabular.}%
+ }{%
+  \class@info{Unrecognized LaTeX tabular. Please update this document class! (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+ }%
+ \let\@array\@array@ltx
+ \let\multicolumn\multicolumn@ltx
+ \let\@tabular\@tabular@ltx
+ \let\@tabarray\@tabarray@ltx
+ \let\array\array@ltx
+ \let\endarray\endarray@ltx
+ \let\endtabular\endtabular@ltx
+ \let\@mkpream\@mkpream@ltx
+ \let\@addamp\@addamp@ltx
+ \let\@arrayacol\@arrayacol@ltx
+ \let\@tabacol\@tabacol@ltx
+ \let\@arrayclassz\@arrayclassz@ltx
+ \let\@tabclassiv\@tabclassiv@ltx
+ \let\@arrayclassiv\@arrayclassiv@ltx
+ \let\@tabclassz\@tabclassz@ltx
+ \let\@classv\@classv@ltx
+ \let\hline\hline@ltx
+ \let\@tabularcr\@tabularcr@ltx
+ \let\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr@ltx
+ \let\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr@ltx
+ \let\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr@ltx
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) Try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\switch@array{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{colortbl}{\let\switch@array@info\colortbl@message}{\let\switch@array@info\array@message}%
+ \let\@array@sw\@array@sw@LaTeX
+ \@ifx{\@array\@array@array}{%
+  \@ifx{\@tabular\@tabular@array}{%
+   \@ifx{\@tabarray\@tabarray@array}{%
+    \@ifx{\array\array@array}{%
+     \@ifx{\endarray\endarray@array}{%
+      \@ifx{\endtabular\endtabular@array}{%
+       \@ifx{\@mkpream\@mkpream@array}{%
+        \@ifx{\@classx\@classx@array}{%
+         \@ifx{\insert@column\insert@column@array}{%
+          \@ifx{\@arraycr\@arraycr@array}{%
+           \@ifx{\@xarraycr\@xarraycr@array}{%
+            \@ifx{\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr@array}{%
+             \@ifx{\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr@array}{%
+              \true@sw
+             }{%
+              \false@sw
+             }%
+            }{%
+             \false@sw
+            }%
+           }{%
+            \false@sw
+           }%
+          }{%
+           \false@sw
+          }%
+         }{%
+          \false@sw
+         }%
+        }{%
+         \false@sw
+        }%
+       }{%
+        \false@sw
+       }%
+      }{%
+       \false@sw
+      }%
+     }{%
+      \false@sw
+     }%
+    }{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+   }{%
+    \false@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \false@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \false@sw
+ }{%
+  \class@info{Patching array package.}%
+ }{%
+  \switch@array@info
+ }%
+ \let\@array    \@array@array@new
+ \let\@@array   \@array % Cosi fan tutti
+ \let\@tabular  \@tabular@array@new
+ \let\@tabarray \@tabarray@array@new
+ \let\array     \array@array@new
+ \let\endarray  \endarray@array@new
+ \let\endtabular\endtabular@array@new
+ \let\@mkpream  \@mkpream@array@new
+ \let\@classx   \@classx@array@new
+ \let\@arrayacol\@arrayacol@ltx
+ \let\@tabacol  \@tabacol@ltx
+ \let\insert@column\insert@column@array@new
+ \expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname\endtabular % Cosi fan tutti
+ \let\@arraycr  \@arraycr@new
+ \let\@xarraycr \@xarraycr@new
+ \let\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr@new
+ \let\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr@new
+}%
+\def\array@message{%
+ \class@info{Unrecognized array package. Please update this document class! (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+}%
+\def\colortbl@message{%
+ \class@info{colortbl package is loaded. (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@array@sw}
+% The Boolean \cmd\@array@sw\ must be different depending on
+% whether the \classname{array} package is loaded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array@sw@LaTeX{\@ifx{\\\@tabularcr}}%
+\def\@array@sw@array{\@ifx{\d@llarbegin\begingroup}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabular}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% We provide the old versions of \cmd\@tabular\ along with the respective new versions.
+% The change here is to avoid committing to LR mode. That will be done later (as late as possible, naturally).
+%
+% Compatibility note: I had done \cmd\let\ \cmd\col@sep\ \cmd\@undefined\  here, but
+% this was not compatible with \classname{colortbl}. I have removed that statement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabular@LaTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox\bgroup$%
+  \let\@acol\@tabacol
+  \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+  \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+  \let\\\@tabularcr
+  \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\@tabular@ltx{%
+  \let\@acoll\@tabacoll
+  \let\@acolr\@tabacolr
+  \let\@acol\@tabacol
+  \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+  \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+  \let\\\@tabularcr
+  \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\@tabular@array{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox\bgroup$%
+  \col@sep\tabcolsep
+  \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
+  \let\d@llarend\endgroup
+  \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\@tabular@array@new{%
+  \let\@acoll\@tabacoll
+  \let\@acolr\@tabacolr
+  \let\@acol\@tabacol
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \let\col@sep\@undefined
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
+  \let\d@llarend\endgroup
+  \@tabarray
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabarray}
+% Here we provide old and new versions of the \cmd\@tabarray\ procedure.
+% The change here is to parametrize the default vertical alignment,
+% which is 'c' in standard \LaTeX.
+% Under some circumstances, we want to change this to, say, 'v'.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% FIXME: must decouple \env{array} and \env{tabular}. Done (it seems).
+%
+% Note on \classname{colortbl}: this package head-patches \cmd\@tabarray
+% with its own command \cmd\CT@start, and tails onto \cmd\endarray\ with \cmd\CT@end.
+% It fortuitously does the former at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, and, fortuitously, 
+% we do not patch \cmd\endarray, which it overwrites.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabarray@LaTeX{%
+ \m@th\@ifnextchar[\@array{\@array[c]}%
+}%
+\def\@tabarray@ltx{%
+ \m@th\@ifnextchar[\@array{\expandafter\@array\expandafter[\array@default]}%
+}%
+\def\@tabarray@array{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\@@array[c]}%
+}%
+\def\@tabarray@array@new{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\expandafter\@@array\expandafter[\array@default]}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tbpen}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xarraycr}
+% We provide for the \cmd\\ command within \env{tabular} to provide control over page breaking, just the same as
+% that of \env{eqnarray}.
+%
+% The count register \cmd\intertabularlinepenalty\ is similar to \cmd\interdisplaylinepenalty: it is the penalty
+% associated with each row of a tabular. When it is set to \cmd\@M, the tabular will cleave together.
+%
+% The count register \cmd\@tbpen\ is similar to \cmd\@eqpen: it memorizes the penalty to use after the current tabular row.
+% If the \cmd\\ command is in its star form, then \cmd\@eqpen\ is set to \cmd\@M.
+%
+% We append code to \cmd\samepage\ so that a tabular within its scope will cleave together.
+%
+% We keep the standard definition of \cmd\@tabularcr\ in \cmd\@tabularcr@LaTeX\ for reference,
+% and provide a new definition that works like \cmd\@eqncr: it sets \cmd\@tbpen\ to \cmd\@M\ if the star was given.
+%
+% We also provide new versions of \cmd\@xtabularcr, \cmd\@xargarraycr, and \cmd\@yargarraycr, all of which invoke \cmd\@tbpen.
+%
+% The \cmd\switch@tabular\ procedure switches in the new definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\intertabularlinepenalty
+\intertabularlinepenalty=100
+\newcount\@tbpen
+\appdef\samepage{\intertabularlinepenalty\@M}%
+\def\@tabularcr@LaTeX{{\ifnum 0=`}\fi \@ifstar \@xtabularcr \@xtabularcr}%
+\def\@tabularcr@ltx{{\ifnum 0=`}\fi \@ifstar {\global \@tbpen \@M \@xtabularcr }{\global \@tbpen \intertabularlinepenalty \@xtabularcr }}%
+\def\@xtabularcr@LaTeX{\@ifnextchar [\@argtabularcr {\ifnum 0=`{\fi }\cr }}%
+\def\@xtabularcr@ltx{\@ifnextchar [\@argtabularcr {\ifnum 0=`{\fi }\cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }}}%
+\def\@xargarraycr@LaTeX#1{\@tempdima #1\advance \@tempdima \dp \@arstrutbox \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth \@tempdima \@width \z@ \cr}%
+\def\@xargarraycr@ltx#1{\@tempdima #1\advance \@tempdima \dp \@arstrutbox \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth \@tempdima \@width \z@ \cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }}%
+\def\@yargarraycr@LaTeX#1{\cr \noalign {\vskip #1}}%
+\def\@yargarraycr@ltx#1{\cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen \vskip #1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the \classname{array} package has been loaded, we must alter the meanings of 
+% \cmd\@arraycr, \cmd\@xarraycr, \cmd\@xargarraycr, and \cmd\@yargarraycr.
+% In this case, it is \cmd\switch@array\ that switches in the new definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arraycr@array{%
+ \relax
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar \@xarraycr \@xarraycr
+}%
+\def\@arraycr@new{%
+ \relax
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar {\global \@tbpen \@M \@xarraycr }{\global \@tbpen \intertabularlinepenalty \@xarraycr }%
+}%
+\def\@xarraycr@array{%
+ \@ifnextchar [%]
+ \@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr}%
+}%
+\def\@xarraycr@new{%
+ \@ifnextchar [%]
+ \@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }}%
+}%
+\def\@xargarraycr@array#1{%
+ \unskip
+ \@tempdima #1\advance\@tempdima \dp\@arstrutbox
+ \vrule \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@
+ \cr
+}%
+\def\@xargarraycr@new#1{%
+ \unskip
+ \@tempdima #1\advance\@tempdima \dp\@arstrutbox
+ \vrule \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@
+ \cr
+ \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }%
+}%
+\def\@yargarraycr@array#1{%
+ \cr
+ \noalign{\vskip #1}%
+}%
+\def\@yargarraycr@new#1{%
+ \cr
+ \noalign{\penalty \@tbpen \vskip #1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\array}
+% We provide old and new versions of the \cmd\array\ procedure for both \LaTeX\ and the \classname{array} package.
+% The change here is to accomodate the new procedures that will be called for the array boundaries, even
+% though at present they are not special.
+% A thought: here is where matrices can be readily accomodated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\array@LaTeX{%
+ \let\@acol\@arrayacol
+ \let\@classz\@arrayclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@arrayclassiv
+ \let\\\@arraycr
+ \let\@halignto\@empty
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\array@ltx{%
+ \@ifmmode{}{\@badmath$}%
+ \let\@acoll\@arrayacol
+ \let\@acolr\@arrayacol
+ \let\@acol\@arrayacol
+ \let\@classz\@arrayclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@arrayclassiv
+ \let\\\@arraycr
+ \let\@halignto\@empty
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\array@array{%
+ \col@sep\arraycolsep
+ \def\d@llarbegin{$}\let\d@llarend\d@llarbegin\gdef\@halignto{}%
+ \@tabarray
+}
+\def\array@array@new{%
+ \@ifmmode{}{\@badmath$}%
+ \let\@acoll\@arrayacol
+ \let\@acolr\@arrayacol
+ \let\@acol\@arrayacol
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% Removed: \verb+\let\col@sep\@undefined+
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\d@llarbegin{$}%
+ \let\d@llarend\d@llarbegin
+ \gdef\@halignto{}%
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@array}
+% Here we provide old and new versions of \cmd\@array.
+% The change here is to provide a convenient, flexible, and extensible
+% mechanism for new vertical alignment options.
+%
+% Instead of testing the optional argument with \cmd\if, we
+% use a dispatcher based on \cmd\csname.
+%
+% We also refrain from using \cmd\ialign, which would set
+% the \cmd\tabskip\ to the wrong value.
+%
+% Finally, the procedure to set the \cmd\@arstrutbox\
+% is broken out so that it can be patched.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array@LaTeX[#1]#2{%
+  \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi\fi
+  \bgroup
+  \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{%
+    \vrule \@height\arraystretch\ht\strutbox
+           \@depth\arraystretch \dp\strutbox
+           \@width\z@}%
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+  \edef\@preamble{%
+    \ialign \noexpand\@halignto
+      \bgroup \@arstrut \@preamble \tabskip\z@skip \cr}%
+  \let\@startpbox\@@startpbox \let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+  \let\tabularnewline\\%
+    \let\par\@empty
+    \let\@sharp##%
+    \set@typeset@protect
+    \lineskip\z@skip\baselineskip\z@skip
+    \ifhmode \@preamerr\z@ \@@par\fi
+    \@preamble
+}%
+\def\@array@ltx[#1]#2{%
+ \@nameuse{@array@align@#1}%
+  \set@arstrutbox
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+  \prepdef\@preamble{%
+    \tabskip\tabmid@skip
+    \@arstrut
+  }%
+  \appdef\@preamble{%
+    \tabskip\tabright@skip
+    \cr
+    \array@row@pre
+  }%
+% \let\@startpbox\@@startpbox
+% \let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+  \let\tabularnewline\\%
+  \let\par\@empty
+  \let\@sharp##%
+  \set@typeset@protect
+  \lineskip\z@skip\baselineskip\z@skip
+  \tabskip\tableft@skip\relax
+  \ifhmode \@preamerr\z@ \@@par\fi
+  \everycr{}%
+  \expandafter\halign\expandafter\@halignto\expandafter\bgroup\@preamble
+}%
+%
+\def\set@arstrutbox{%
+  \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{%
+    \vrule \@height\arraystretch\ht\strutbox
+           \@depth\arraystretch \dp\strutbox
+           \@width\z@
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@array@array}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array@array[#1]#2{%
+  \@tempdima \ht \strutbox
+  \advance \@tempdima by\extrarowheight
+  \setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
+             \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+             \@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
+             \@width \z@}%
+  \begingroup
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+  \xdef\@preamble{\noexpand \ialign \@halignto
+                  \bgroup \@arstrut \@preamble
+                          \tabskip \z@ \cr}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@arrayleft
+  \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi \fi
+  \bgroup
+  \let \@sharp ##\let \protect \relax
+  \lineskip \z@
+  \baselineskip \z@
+  \m@th
+  \let\\\@arraycr \let\tabularnewline\\\let\par\@empty \@preamble
+}%
+\def\@array@array@new[#1]#2{%
+  \@tempdima\ht\strutbox
+  \advance\@tempdima by\extrarowheight
+  \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{%
+   \vrule \@height\arraystretch\@tempdima
+          \@depth \arraystretch\dp\strutbox
+          \@width \z@
+  }%
+  \begingroup
+   \@mkpream{#2}%
+   \xdef\@preamble{\@preamble}%
+  \endgroup
+  \prepdef\@preamble{%
+   \tabskip\tabmid@skip
+    \@arstrut
+  }%
+  \appdef\@preamble{%
+   \tabskip\tabright@skip
+   \cr
+   \array@row@pre
+  }%
+  \@arrayleft
+  \@nameuse{@array@align@#1}%
+  \m@th
+  \let\\\@arraycr
+  \let\tabularnewline\\%
+  \let\par\@empty
+  \let\@sharp##%
+  \set@typeset@protect
+  \lineskip\z@\baselineskip\z@
+  \tabskip\tableft@skip
+  \everycr{}%
+  \expandafter\halign\expandafter\@halignto\expandafter\bgroup\@preamble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% Here we provide old and new versions of \cmd\endarray.
+% The change here is to use a single procedure to close
+% out any array-like structure, namely \cmd\endarray@ltx.
+% It merely closes out the \cmd\halign.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endarray@LaTeX{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup
+}%
+\def\endarray@ltx{%
+ \crcr\array@row@pst\egroup\egroup
+}%
+\def\endarray@array{%
+ \crcr \egroup \egroup \@arrayright \gdef\@preamble{}%
+}%
+\def\endarray@array@new{%
+ \crcr\array@row@pst\egroup\egroup % Same as \endarray@ltx
+ \@arrayright
+ \global\let\@preamble\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endtabular@LaTeX{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup $\egroup
+}%
+\def\endtabular@ltx{%
+ \endarray
+}%
+\def\endtabular@array{%
+ \endarray $\egroup
+}%
+\def\endtabular@array@new{%
+ \endarray
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{endtabular*}
+% Here we provide a proper definition for the star-form of \enve{endtabular}.
+% It is one of the enduring curiosities that the \LaTeX\ kernel continues to use
+% dangerously and inappropriately ``optimized'' definitions for such commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{endtabular*}{\endtabular}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multicolumn}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\multicolumn@LaTeX#1#2#3{%
+ \multispan{#1}\begingroup
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+  \def\@sharp{#3}\set@typeset@protect
+  \let\@startpbox\@@startpbox\let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+  \@arstrut \@preamble\hbox{}\endgroup\ignorespaces
+}%
+\long\def\multicolumn@ltx#1#2#3{%
+ \multispan{#1}%
+ \begingroup
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+  \def\@sharp{#3}%
+  \set@typeset@protect
+ %\let\@startpbox\@@startpbox\let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+  \@arstrut
+  \@preamble
+  \hbox{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \ignorespaces
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@array@align@}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@default}
+% Here are the various procedures for the vertical alignment options.
+% The change from standard \LaTeX\ is that we do not go into math mode
+% in every case: only when required by \cmd\vcenter. 
+% Also, we use \cmd\aftergroup\ to close out the boxes and modes we have started.
+% It requires only that each procedure issue exactly one unmatched \cmd\bgroup.
+%
+% We establish here the default vertical alignment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array@align@t{\leavevmode\vtop\bgroup}%
+\def\@array@align@b{\leavevmode\vbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@array@align@c{\leavevmode\@ifmmode{\vcenter\bgroup}{$\vcenter\bgroup\aftergroup$\aftergroup\relax}}%
+\def\@array@align@v{%
+ \@ifmmode{%
+  \@badmath
+  \vcenter\bgroup
+ }{%
+  \@ifinner{%
+   $\vcenter\bgroup\aftergroup$
+  }{%
+   \@@par\bgroup
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\array@default{c}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@rst}
+% The procedure \cmd\array@row@rst\ reestablishes a default context for
+% an alignment, so that they can be nested.
+% Any environment or procedure that alters the way alignments are formatted
+% must patch this procedure to restore from that alteration.
+% To start things off, we equate \cmd\@array@align@v\ to \cmd\@array@align@c,
+% because it does not make sense to do the former in any context other 
+% than the MVL or in a list that will be unboxed onto the MVL.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\array@row@rst{%
+ \let\@array@align@v\@array@align@c
+}%
+\def\array@row@pre{}%
+\def\array@row@pst{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toprule}
+% \begin{macro}{\colrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\botrule}
+% Default definitions for \cmd\toprule, \cmd\colrule, \cmd\botrule
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\toprule{\tab@rule{\column@font}{\column@fil}{\frstrut}}%
+\newcommand\colrule{\unskip\lrstrut\\\tab@rule{\body@font}{}{\frstrut}}%
+\newcommand\botrule{\unskip\lrstrut\\\noalign{\hline@rule}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hline@LaTeX{%
+ \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth \futurelet
+   \reserved@a\@xhline
+}%
+\def\hline@ltx{%
+ \noalign{%
+  \ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \hline@rule
+  \futurelet\reserved@a\@xhline
+ % \noalign ended in \@xhline
+}%
+\def\@xhline@unneeded{%
+ \say\reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\hline
+  \vskip\doublerulesep
+  \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+ \fi
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+}%
+\def\tab@rule#1#2#3{%
+ \crcr
+ \noalign{%
+  \hline@rule
+  \gdef\@arstrut@hook{%
+   \global\let\@arstrut@hook\@empty
+   #3%
+  }%
+  \gdef\cell@font{#1}%
+  \gdef\cell@fil{#2}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\column@font{}%
+\def\column@fil{}%
+\def\body@font{}%
+\def\cell@font{}%
+\def\frstrut{}%
+\def\lrstrut{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut@hline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut@org}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut@hook}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrutbox@hline}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@arstrutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline@rule}
+% The procedure \cmd\@arstrut@hline\ is substantially the same as
+% \cmd\@arstrut, except the strut copied in is \cmd\@arstrutbox@hline
+% instead of \cmd\@arstrutbox.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@arstrut@hook\ is redefined in \cmd\tab@rule!
+%
+% The register \cmd\@arstrutbox@hline.
+%
+% We append to \cmd\set@arstrutbox\ the code necessary to set a strut following an \cmd\hline.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\hline@rule\ lays down a rule, and changes the meaning of \cmd\@arstrut\
+% so that the next line will be correctly strutted.
+%
+% The \cmd\@arstrut@hline@clnc\ is a klootch, a magic number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arstrut@hline{%
+ \relax
+ \@ifmmode{\copy}{\unhcopy}\@arstrutbox@hline
+ \@arstrut@hook
+}%
+%
+\let\@arstrut@org\@arstrut
+\def\@arstrut@hook{%
+ \global\let\@arstrut\@arstrut@org
+}%
+%
+\newbox\@arstrutbox@hline
+\appdef\set@arstrutbox{%
+  \setbox\@arstrutbox@hline\hbox{%
+    \setbox\z@\hbox{$0^{0}_{}$}%
+    \dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@\@arstrut@hline@clnc
+    \@ifdim{\dimen@<\arraystretch\ht\strutbox}{\dimen@=\arraystretch\ht\strutbox}{}%
+    \vrule \@height\dimen@
+           \@depth\arraystretch \dp\strutbox
+           \@width\z@
+  }%
+}%
+%
+\def\hline@rule{%
+ \hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth
+ \global\let\@arstrut\@arstrut@hline
+}%
+\def\@arstrut@hline@clnc{2\p@}% % Klootch: magic number
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft@skip{\z@skip}%
+\def\tabmid@skip{\z@skip}%\@flushglue
+\def\tabright@skip{\z@skip}%
+\def\tableftsep{\tabcolsep}%
+\def\tabmidsep{\tabcolsep}%
+\def\tabrightsep{\tabcolsep}%
+\def\cell@fil{}%
+\def\pbox@hook{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@arstrut{\@arstrut@hook}%
+\let\@arstrut@hook\@empty
+\def\@addtopreamble{\appdef\@preamble}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mkpream@LaTeX#1{%
+  \@firstamptrue\@lastchclass6
+  \let\@preamble\@empty
+  \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+  \let\@sharp\relax
+  \let\@startpbox\relax\let\@endpbox\relax
+  \@expast{#1}%
+  \expandafter\@tfor \expandafter
+    \@nextchar \expandafter:\expandafter=\reserved@a\do
+       {\@testpach\@nextchar
+    \ifcase \@chclass \@classz \or \@classi \or \@classii \or \@classiii
+      \or \@classiv \or\@classv \fi\@lastchclass\@chclass}%
+  \ifcase \@lastchclass \@acol
+      \or \or \@preamerr \@ne\or \@preamerr \tw@\or \or \@acol \fi
+}%
+\def\@mkpream@ltx#1{%
+ \@firstamptrue
+ \@lastchclass6
+ \let\@preamble\@empty
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \let\@sharp\relax
+%\let\@startpbox\relax\let\@endpbox\relax
+ \@expast{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@tfor\expandafter\@nextchar\expandafter:\expandafter=\reserved@a
+ \do{%
+  \expandafter\@testpach\expandafter{\@nextchar}%
+  \ifcase\@chclass
+   \@classz
+  \or
+   \@classi
+  \or
+   \@classii
+  \or
+   \@classiii
+  \or
+   \@classiv
+  \or
+   \@classv
+  \fi
+  \@lastchclass\@chclass
+ }%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+  \@acolr % right-hand column
+ \or
+ \or
+  \@preamerr\@ne
+ \or
+  \@preamerr\tw@
+ \or
+ \or
+  \@acolr % right-hand column
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\insert@column}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\insert@column@array{%
+   \the@toks \the \@tempcnta
+   \ignorespaces \@sharp \unskip
+   \the@toks \the \count@ \relax
+}%
+\def\insert@column@array@new{%
+ \the@toks\the\@tempcnta
+ \array@row@rst\cell@font
+ \ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip
+ \the@toks\the\count@
+ \relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream@relax}
+% The procedure \cmd\@mkpream@relax\ participates in a strange and wonderful
+% method of binding the alignment procedure---but only certain parts thereof.
+%
+% Here is how it works: in \LaTeX, the \classname{array} package, and in the
+% \classname{longtable} package alike, there is a need to create an alignment
+% preamble (using \cmd\@mkpream) for use by the upcoming \cmd\halign.
+% Then, in both \classname{array} and \classname{longtable}, \TeX's \cmd\edef\
+% is used to `compile in place' that alignment preamble. 
+%
+% In the case of \classname{array}, 
+% the operation is done in order to pre-expand the use of \texttt{*}; 
+% in \classname{longtable}, it is to set the widths of the columns.
+%
+% Now, during this \cmd\edef, certain control sequence names must \emph{not}
+% be expanded, and those are robustified by \cmd\@mkpream@relax.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mkpream@relax{%
+ \let\tableftsep   \relax
+ \let\tabmidsep    \relax
+ \let\tabrightsep  \relax
+ \let\array@row@rst\relax
+ \let\cell@font    \relax
+ \let\@startpbox   \relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
+% We insert \cmd\@mkpream@relax\ at the head of the procedure.
+% The robustifying of \cmd\@startpbox\ and \cmd\@endpbox\ is taken over by this mechanism.
+% We also invoke \cmd\@acolr\ instead of \cmd\@acol\ when a right-hand column is at hand.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% Note on \classname{colortbl}: this package head-patches \cmd\@mkpream\ to robustify
+% a number of its commands during the construction of the alignment preamble.
+% The best we can do is to supplement the \cmd\@mkpream@relax\ procedure to perform this action.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mkpream@array#1{%
+   \gdef\@preamble{}\@lastchclass 4 \@firstamptrue
+   \let\@sharp\relax \let\@startpbox\relax \let\@endpbox\relax
+   \@temptokena{#1}\@tempswatrue
+   \@whilesw\if@tempswa\fi{\@tempswafalse\the\NC@list}%
+   \count@\m@ne
+   \let\the@toks\relax
+   \prepnext@tok
+   \expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \@nextchar
+    \expandafter :\expandafter =\the\@temptokena \do
+   {\@testpach
+   \ifcase \@chclass \@classz \or \@classi \or \@classii
+     \or \save@decl \or \or \@classv \or \@classvi
+     \or \@classvii \or \@classviii
+     \or \@classx
+     \or \@classx \fi
+   \@lastchclass\@chclass}%
+   \ifcase\@lastchclass
+   \@acol \or
+   \or
+   \@acol \or
+   \@preamerr \thr@@ \or
+   \@preamerr \tw@ \@addtopreamble\@sharp \or
+   \or
+   \else  \@preamerr \@ne \fi
+   \def\the@toks{\the\toks}%
+}%
+\def\@mkpream@array@new#1{%
+ \gdef\@preamble{}%
+ \@lastchclass\f@ur
+ \@firstamptrue
+ \let\@sharp\relax
+ \@mkpream@relax
+%\let\@startpbox\relax\let\@endpbox\relax
+ \@temptokena{#1}\@tempswatrue
+ \@whilesw\if@tempswa\fi{\@tempswafalse\the\NC@list}%
+ \count@\m@ne
+ \let\the@toks\relax
+ \prepnext@tok
+ \expandafter\@tfor\expandafter\@nextchar\expandafter:\expandafter=\the\@temptokena
+ \do{%
+  \@testpach
+  \ifcase\@chclass
+   \@classz
+  \or
+   \@classi
+  \or
+   \@classii
+  \or
+   \save@decl
+  \or
+  \or
+   \@classv
+  \or
+   \@classvi
+  \or
+   \@classvii
+  \or
+   \@classviii
+  \or
+   \@classx
+  \or
+   \@classx
+  \fi
+  \@lastchclass\@chclass
+ }%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+  \@acolr % right-hand column
+ \or
+ \or
+  \@acolr % right-hand column
+ \or
+  \@preamerr\thr@@
+ \or
+  \@preamerr\tw@\@addtopreamble\@sharp
+ \or
+ \or
+ \else
+  \@preamerr\@ne
+ \fi
+ \def\the@toks{\the\toks}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream@relax}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% David P. Carlisle's \classname{colortbl} package headpatches \cmd\@mkpream\ in place
+% during package loading, so it does not know whom it is working on.
+% Let us try to accomodate this package by doing what it would have liked to have done.
+%
+% Note: it would be far better to break out this mechanism in the \classname{array} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@mkpream@relax{%
+ \let\CT@setup       \relax
+ \let\CT@color       \relax
+ \let\CT@do@color    \relax
+ \let\color          \relax
+ \let\CT@column@color\relax
+ \let\CT@row@color   \relax
+ \let\CT@cell@color  \relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addamp}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addamp@LaTeX{%
+  \if@firstamp\@firstampfalse\else\edef\@preamble{\@preamble &}\fi
+}%
+\def\@addamp@ltx{%
+ \if@firstamp\@firstampfalse\else\@addtopreamble{&}\fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayacol}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayacol@LaTeX{%
+ \edef\@preamble{\@preamble \hskip \arraycolsep}%
+}%
+\def\@arrayacol@ltx{%
+ \@addtopreamble{\hskip\arraycolsep}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabacol}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabacoll{%
+ \@addtopreamble{\hskip\tableftsep\relax}%
+}%
+\def\@tabacol@LaTeX{%
+ \edef\@preamble{\@preamble \hskip \tabcolsep}%
+}%
+\def\@tabacol@ltx{%
+ \@addtopreamble{\hskip\tabmidsep\relax}%
+}%
+\def\@tabacolr{%
+ \@addtopreamble{\hskip\tabrightsep\relax}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayclassz}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayclassz@LaTeX{%
+ \ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \or
+   \or \or \@addamp \or
+   \@acolampacol \or \@firstampfalse \@acol \fi
+ \edef\@preamble{\@preamble
+  \ifcase \@chnum
+     \hfil$\relax\@sharp$\hfil \or $\relax\@sharp$\hfil
+    \or \hfil$\relax\@sharp$\fi}%
+}%
+\def\@arrayclassz@ltx{%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+  \@acolampacol
+ \or
+  \@ampacol
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or
+  \@addamp
+ \or
+  \@acolampacol
+ \or
+  \@firstampfalse\@acoll
+ \fi
+ \ifcase\@chnum
+  \@addtopreamble{%
+   \hfil\array@row@rst$\relax\@sharp$\hfil
+  }%
+ \or
+  \@addtopreamble{%
+   \array@row@rst$\relax\@sharp$\hfil
+  }%
+ \or
+  \@addtopreamble{%
+   \hfil\array@row@rst$\relax\@sharp$%
+  }%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabclassz}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabclassz@LaTeX{%
+  \ifcase\@lastchclass
+    \@acolampacol
+  \or
+    \@ampacol
+  \or
+  \or
+  \or
+    \@addamp
+  \or
+    \@acolampacol
+  \or
+    \@firstampfalse\@acol
+  \fi
+  \edef\@preamble{%
+    \@preamble{%
+      \ifcase\@chnum
+        \hfil\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\hfil
+      \or
+        \hskip1sp\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\hfil
+      \or
+        \hfil\hskip1sp\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip
+      \fi}}%
+}%
+\def\@tabclassz@ltx{%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+  \@acolampacol
+ \or
+  \@ampacol
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or
+  \@addamp
+ \or
+  \@acolampacol
+ \or
+  \@firstampfalse\@acoll
+ \fi
+ \ifcase\@chnum
+  \@addtopreamble{%
+   {\hfil\array@row@rst\cell@font\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\hfil}%
+  }%
+ \or
+  \@addtopreamble{%
+   {\cell@fil\hskip1sp\array@row@rst\cell@font\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\hfil}%
+  }%
+ \or
+  \@addtopreamble{%
+   {\hfil\hskip1sp\array@row@rst\cell@font\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\cell@fil}%
+  }%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabclassiv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabclassiv@LaTeX{%
+ \@addtopreamble\@nextchar
+}%
+\def\@tabclassiv@ltx{%
+ \expandafter\@addtopreamble\expandafter{\@nextchar}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayclassiv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayclassiv@LaTeX{%
+ \@addtopreamble{$\@nextchar$}%
+}%
+\def\@arrayclassiv@ltx{%
+ \expandafter\@addtopreamble\expandafter{\expandafter$\@nextchar$}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classv@LaTeX{%
+ \@addtopreamble{\@startpbox{\@nextchar}\ignorespaces
+ \@sharp\@endpbox}%
+}%
+\def\@classv@ltx{%
+ \expandafter\@addtopreamble
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter \@startpbox
+ \expandafter {\@nextchar}%
+ \pbox@hook\array@row@rst\cell@font\ignorespaces\@sharp\@endpbox
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classx}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classx@array{%
+  \ifcase \@lastchclass
+  \@acolampacol \or
+  \@addamp \@acol \or
+  \@acolampacol \or
+  \or
+  \@acol \@firstampfalse \or
+  \@addamp
+  \fi
+}%
+\def\@classx@array@new{%
+ \ifcase \@lastchclass
+  \@acolampacol
+ \or
+  \@addamp \@acol
+ \or
+  \@acolampacol
+ \or
+ \or
+  \@firstampfalse\@acoll
+ \or
+  \@addamp
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Repair other broken parts of \LaTeX}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xbitor}
+% Expansion part has extraneous space token. Removed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xbitor@LaTeX #1{\@tempcntb \count#1
+   \ifnum \@tempcnta =\z@
+   \else
+     \divide\@tempcntb\@tempcnta
+     \ifodd\@tempcntb \@testtrue\fi
+   \fi}%
+\def\@xbitor@ltx#1{%
+ \@tempcntb\count#1\relax
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{}{%
+  \divide\@tempcntb\@tempcnta
+  \@ifodd\@tempcntb{\@testtrue}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\@ifx{\@xbitor\@xbitor@LaTeX}{%
+  \class@info{Repairing broken LaTeX \string\@xbitor}%
+}{%
+  \class@info{Unrecognized LaTeX \string\@xbitor. Please update this document class! (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+}%
+\let\@xbitor\@xbitor@ltx
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Syntax}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble@opt@one}
+% The \cmd\@gobble@opt@one\ command eats up an optional argument
+% and one required argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\@gobble@opt@one[2][]{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Auto-indented Contents}
+% Facility to automatically determine the proper indentation of
+% the TOC entries.
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} compatibility:
+% We must respect that
+% \cmd\contentsline\ now has a fourth argument.
+% So, instead of trying to override the meaning of \cmd\contentsline,
+% we use the aux file to remember max values from one run to the next.
+%
+% In this respect, this package retains compatibility with 
+% \classname{hyperref}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
+% Install hooks at beginning and end of the TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@starttoc#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \toc@pre
+    \makeatletter
+    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+    \if@filesw
+      \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+      \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+    \fi
+    \@nobreakfalse
+    \toc@post
+  \endgroup
+}%
+\def\toc@pre{}%
+\def\toc@post{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@@font}
+% Interface for setting the formatting characteristics of this part
+%  of the TOC.
+%
+% Note: \cmd\toc@@font\ is the common font for all auto-sizing toc commands,
+% although this, too, could become a dispatcher.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname from \cs{@dotsep} to \cs{ltxu@dotsep}. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@@font{}%
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{\z@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Interface for determining which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%
+% All of the \cmd\l@\dots\ commands simply go through the 
+% utility procedure \cmd\l@@sections. The calling convention is
+% to pass the name of self and the name of parent.
+% If you want to exclude any of these from the indentation
+% scheme, simply leave the \cmd\l@\dots\ command undefined.
+%
+% Note that the parent of ``section'' is nil, so we have to define a stub.
+% \begin{verbatim}\def\l@section{\l@@sections{}{section}}% Implicit #3#4\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{verbatim}\def\tocleft@{\z@}%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{verbatim}\def\l@subsection{\l@@sections{section}{subsection}}% Implicit #3#4\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{verbatim}\def\l@subsubsection{\l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}}% Implicit #3#4\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{verbatim}\def\l@paragraph{\l@@sections{subsubsection}{paragraph}}% Implicit #3#4\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{verbatim}\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{\l@@sections{paragraph}{subparagraph}}% Implicit #3#4\end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Glom some \cmd\dimen\ registers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tocdim@section       \leftmargini
+\let\tocdim@subsection    \leftmarginii
+\let\tocdim@subsubsection \leftmarginiii
+\let\tocdim@paragraph     \leftmarginiv
+\let\tocdim@appendix      \leftmarginv
+\let\tocdim@pagenum       \leftmarginvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@pre@auto}
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@post@auto}
+% We patch \cmd\@starttoc\ to:
+% 1) before TOC processing,
+% initialize the max registers and
+% set the needed dimensions from 
+% the values stored in the auxiliary file, and
+% 2) after TOC processing,
+% store out those max register values into the auxiliary file.
+%
+% Note that the font is set here: all other TOC entries must
+% override these font settings.
+% 
+% To activate this override of the standard \LaTeX\ processing,
+% the substyle does: \cmd\let\cmd\toc@pre\cmd\toc@pre@auto\
+% and \cmd\let\cmd\toc@post\cmd\toc@post@auto.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@pre@auto{%
+  \toc@@font
+  \@tempdima\z@
+  \toc@setindent\@tempdima{section}%
+  \toc@setindent\@tempdima{subsection}%
+  \toc@setindent\@tempdima{subsubsection}%
+  \toc@setindent\@tempdima{paragraph}%
+  \toc@letdimen{appendix}%
+  \toc@letdimen{pagenum}%
+}%
+\def\toc@post@auto{%
+  \if@filesw
+   \begingroup
+    \toc@writedimen{section}%
+    \toc@writedimen{subsection}%
+    \toc@writedimen{subsubsection}%
+    \toc@writedimen{paragraph}%
+    \toc@writedimen{appendix}%
+    \toc@writedimen{pagenum}%
+   \endgroup
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@setindent}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@setindent#1#2{%
+ \csname tocdim@#2\endcsname\tocdim@min\relax
+ \@ifundefined{tocmax@#2}{\@namedef{tocmax@#2}{\z@}}{}%
+ \advance#1\@nameuse{tocmax@#2}\relax
+ \expandafter\edef\csname tocleft@#2\endcsname{\the#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@letdimen}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@letdimen#1{%
+ \csname tocdim@#1\endcsname\tocdim@min\relax
+ \@ifundefined{tocmax@#1}{\@namedef{tocmax@#1}{\z@}}{}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname tocleft@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname tocmax@#1\endcsname
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@writedimen}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@writedimen#1{%
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{%
+  \gdef\expandafter\string\csname tocmax@#1\endcsname{%
+   \expandafter\the\csname tocdim@#1\endcsname
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@@sections}
+% The procedure for formatting the indented TOC entries.
+% We use control sequence names such as \cmd\tocmax@section\ and
+% \cmd\tocleft@section, the former being written to the auxiliary file
+% and the latter only defined for the duration of the TOC processing.
+%
+% Note that the assignment of \cmd\box\cmd\@tempboxa\ by \cmd\set@tocdim@pagenum\
+% must endure over the invocation of |#3|: it contains the 
+% page number which will be set just before the \cmd\par.
+% 
+% The arguments:\begin{enumerate}
+% \item[\#1] superior section
+% \item[\#2] this section
+% \item[\#3] content, including possible \cmd\numberline
+% \item[\#4] page number\end{enumerate}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@@sections#1#2#3#4{%
+ \begingroup
+  \everypar{}%
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum\@tempboxa{#4}%
+  \global\@tempdima\csname tocdim@#2\endcsname
+  \leftskip\csname tocleft@#2\endcsname\relax
+  \dimen@\csname tocleft@#1\endcsname\relax
+  \parindent-\leftskip\advance\parindent\dimen@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \let\numberline\numberline@@sections
+  \@nameuse{l@f@#2}%
+  \ignorespaces#3\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 574) protect against \classname{lineno.sty}, which forces a visit to the output routine, which appears to destroy the value of \cs{@tempdima}}%
+%
+% By side effect, set the value of, e.g., \cmd\tocdim@section. 
+%
+% Note that the \cmd\par\ must not be executed before the value of \cmd\@tempdima\ is expanded (outside the current group).
+% Otherwise, the \classname{lineno.sty} package may interfere (it unfortunately does a global assignment of \cmd\@tempdima). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\par
+  \expandafter\aftergroup\csname tocdim@#2%
+  \expandafter\endcsname
+  \expandafter\endgroup
+              \the\@tempdima\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 479) Per: Dylan Thurston<dpt at math.harvard.edu>}%
+% In the call to \cmd\set@tocdim@pagenum, I am now exposing the use of the particular box register. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@tocdim@pagenum#1#2{%
+ \setbox#1\hbox{\ignorespaces#2}%
+ \@ifdim{\tocdim@pagenum<\wd#1}{\global\tocdim@pagenum\wd#1}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline@@sections}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname from \cs{@dotsep} to \cs{ltxu@dotsep}. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+% The utility procedure for all \cmd\numberline\ processing in indented TOC entries.
+% The first argument is self.
+%
+% We use \cmd\@tempdima\ to pass a value around (via global assignment) because
+% \cmd\numberline\ executes inside a group if the 
+% \classname{hyperref} package is loaded.
+% Would that it were not so!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numberline@@sections#1{%
+ \leavevmode\hb@xt@-\parindent{%
+  \hfil
+  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+   \setbox\z@\hbox{#1.\kern\ltxu@dotsep}%
+   \@ifdim{\@tempdima<\wd\z@}{\global\@tempdima\wd\z@}{}%
+   \unhbox\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \ignorespaces
+}%
+\def\tocdim@min{\z@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Lists}
+% \begin{macro}{\list}
+% Using \cmd\parshape\ to implement lists was always suspect
+% (can you get behind \cmd\parshape\cmd\@ne?) and we now see that
+% it was a mistake all along. Why? Because \cmd\parshape, like
+% \cmd\hangindent, achieves its effect via ``shifting'' the \cmd\hbox es
+% in a paragraph
+% instead of using \cmd\leftskip\ and \cmd\parindent, which is 
+% robust during column balancing.
+%
+% We introduce the alternative method with a hook into
+% the \LaTeX\ kernel procedure \cmd\list, which is
+% the implementation of all lists. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\list#1#2{%
+  \ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
+  \fi
+  \rightmargin\z@
+  \listparindent\z@
+  \itemindent\z@
+  \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
+  \def\@itemlabel{#1}%
+  \let\makelabel\@mklab
+  \@nmbrlistfalse
+  #2\relax
+  \@trivlist
+  \parskip\parsep
+  \set@listindent
+  \ignorespaces
+}%
+\def\set@listindent@parshape{%
+ \parindent\listparindent
+ \advance\@totalleftmargin\leftmargin
+ \advance\linewidth-\rightmargin
+ \advance\linewidth-\leftmargin
+ \parshape\@ne\@totalleftmargin\linewidth
+}%
+\def\set@listindent@{%
+ \parindent\listparindent
+ \advance\@totalleftmargin\leftmargin
+ \advance\rightskip\rightmargin
+ \advance\leftskip\@totalleftmargin
+}%
+\let\set@listindent\set@listindent@parshape
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Hypertext capabilities}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\href}
+% \begin{macro}{\url}
+% \begin{macro}{\URL@prefix}
+% \begin{macro}{\doi}
+% \begin{macro}{\doibase}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 487) Support for video figures and the \cs{setfloatlink} command}%
+% We provide support for the \cmd\href, \cmd\url, and \cmd\doi\ commands.
+% Packages, like \classname{hyperref}, may override these definitions
+% and provide better semantics.
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 532) Both arguments of \cs{href} get sanitized}%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 545) Provide definition for \cs{doi} that does hypertext}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\href[0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url\@href}%
+\def\@href#1{\@@startlink{#1}\endgroup\@@href}%
+\def\@@href#1{#1\@@endlink}%
+\providecommand \url  [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url \@url }%
+\def \@url #1{\endgroup\@href {#1}{\URL@prefix#1}}%
+\providecommand \URL@prefix [0]{URL }%
+\providecommand\doi[0]{\begingroup\@sanitize@url\@doi}%
+\def\@doi#1{\endgroup\@@startlink{\doibase#1}doi:\discretionary {}{}{}#1\@@endlink }%
+%changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Use updated best practice to use https and doi.org}%
+\providecommand \doibase [0]{https://doi.org/}%
+\providecommand \@sanitize@url[0]{\chardef\cat@space\the\catcode`\ \@sanitize\catcode`\ \cat@space}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@startlink}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@endlink}
+% \begin{macro}{\pdfstartlink@attr}
+% \begin{macro}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}
+% How we define \cmd\@@startlink\ and \cmd\@@endlink\ will depend on 
+% whether we are running under \textsc{pdflatex}.
+% If so, and if PDF output is requested, then we use its primitives
+% to implement hypertext,
+% breaking out the link attributes in \cmd\pdfstartlink@attr\ 
+% and using the \classname{hyperref} defaults; 
+% \cmd\pdfstartlink@attr\ can be redefined by a client package.
+% Otherwise we fall back the Hyper\TeX\ standard and leave things to the DVI translator.
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+%
+% A class or package that wishes to employ hypertext capabilities should
+% execute the \cmd\hypertext@enable@ltx\ procedure. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@startlink#1{}%
+\def\@@endlink{}%
+\@ifxundefined \pdfoutput {\true@sw}{\@ifnum{\z@=\pdfoutput}{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+{%
+ \def\@@startlink@hypertext#1{\leavevmode\special{html:<a href="#1">}}%
+ \def\@@endlink@hypertext{\special{html:</a>}}%
+}{%
+ \def\@@startlink@hypertext#1{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \pdfstartlink\pdfstartlink@attr
+   user{/Subtype/Link/A<</Type/Action/S/URI/URI(#1)>>}%
+  \relax
+ }%
+ \def\@@endlink@hypertext{\pdfendlink}%
+ \def\pdfstartlink@attr{attr{/Border[0 0 1 ]/H/I/C[0 1 1]}}%
+}%
+\def\hypertext@enable@ltx{%
+ \let\@@startlink\@@startlink@hypertext
+ \let\@@endlink\@@endlink@hypertext
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\href}
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 582) A patch of \classname{hyperref.sty} to provide backward compatibility to \TeX Live 2007's version 6.75r}%
+% The \cmd\href\ command of \classname{hyperref} was extend somewhere 
+% between versions 6.75r and 6.80e. We apply a repair to the earlier
+% version (if present) so that it works like the later version.
+%
+% The issue is the presence of whitespace, either following the \cmd\href\ token
+% or following the first argument's closing brace character. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\href@Hy{\hyper@normalise \href@ }%
+\def\href@Hy@ltx{\@ifnextchar\bgroup\Hy@href{\hyper@normalise\href@}}%
+\def\Hy@href#{\hyper@normalise\href@}%
+\begingroup
+  \endlinechar=-1 %
+  \catcode`\^^A=14 %
+  \catcode`\^^M\active
+  \catcode`\%\active
+  \catcode`\#\active
+  \catcode`\_\active
+  \catcode`\$\active
+  \catcode`\&\active
+  \gdef\hyper@normalise@ltx{^^A
+    \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M\active
+    \def^^M{ }^^A
+    \catcode`\%\active
+    \let%\@percentchar
+    \let\%\@percentchar
+    \catcode`\#\active
+    \def#{\hyper@hash}^^A
+    \def\#{\hyper@hash}^^A
+    \@makeother\&^^A
+    \edef&{\string&}^^A
+    \edef\&{\string&}^^A
+    \edef\textunderscore{\string_}^^A
+    \let\_\textunderscore
+    \catcode`\_\active
+    \let_\textunderscore
+    \let~\hyper@tilde
+    \let\~\hyper@tilde
+    \let\textasciitilde\hyper@tilde
+    \let\\\@backslashchar
+    \edef${\string$}^^A
+    \Hy@safe@activestrue
+    \hyper@n@rmalise
+  }^^A
+  \catcode`\#=6 ^^A
+  \gdef\Hy@ActiveCarriageReturn@ltx{^^M}^^A
+  \gdef\hyper@n@rmalise@ltx#1#2{^^A
+    \def\Hy@tempa{#2}^^A
+    \ifx\Hy@tempa\Hy@ActiveCarriageReturn
+      \Hy@ReturnAfterElseFi{^^A
+        \hyper@@normalise{#1}^^A
+      }^^A
+    \else
+      \Hy@ReturnAfterFi{^^A
+        \hyper@@normalise{#1}{#2}^^A
+      }^^A
+    \fi
+  }^^A
+  \gdef\hyper@@normalise@ltx#1#2{^^A
+    \edef\Hy@tempa{^^A
+      \endgroup
+      \noexpand#1{\Hy@RemovePercentCr#2%^^M\@nil}^^A
+    }^^A
+    \Hy@tempa
+  }^^A
+  \gdef\Hy@RemovePercentCr@ltx#1%^^M#2\@nil{^^A
+    #1^^A
+    \ifx\limits#2\limits
+    \else
+      \Hy@ReturnAfterFi{^^A
+        \Hy@RemovePercentCr #2\@nil
+      }^^A
+    \fi
+  }^^A
+\endgroup
+\def\switch@hyperref@href{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname href \endcsname\href@Hy}{
+  \class@info{Repairing hyperref 6.75r \string\href}%
+  \let\hyper@normalise\hyper@normalise@ltx
+  \let\hyper@@normalise\hyper@@normalise@ltx
+  \let\hyper@n@rmalise\hyper@n@rmalise@ltx
+  \let\Hy@ActiveCarriageReturn\Hy@ActiveCarriageReturn@ltx
+  \let\Hy@RemovePercentCr\Hy@RemovePercentCr@ltx
+  \let\href\href@Hy@ltx
+ }{}%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{\switch@hyperref@href}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\typeout}
+% We make the \cmd\typeout\ procedure of \LaTeX\ be \cmd\long, 
+% because sometimes we are talking about \cmd\par.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\typeout@org#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@display@protect
+  \immediate\write\@unused{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\long\def\typeout@ltx#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@display@protect
+  \immediate\write\@unused{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\@ifx{\typeout\typeout@org}{%
+ \class@info{Making \string\typeout\space \string\long}%
+ \let\typeout\typeout@ltx
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here ends the module.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% \iffalse Here ends the programmer's documentation.\fi
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/reftest4-2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/reftest4-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..192514f478
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/reftest4-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+% ****** Start of file reftest.tex ******
+%
+%   This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.2 distribution.
+%   Version 4.2a of REVTeX, December, 2014.
+%
+%   Copyright (c) 2014 The American Physical Society.
+%
+%   See the REVTeX 4.2 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+\documentclass{revtex4}%
+\begin{document}%
+
+\typeout{Filename: reftest4-2.tex for revtex 4.X 2014/12/31 (AO)}
+% This document, when typeset, prompts for the name of a LaTeX auxiliary (.aux) file 
+% and then processes that file, paying attention to 
+% keys that have been cited (via \citation)
+% or defined (via \bibcite).
+% It then prints out diagnostics indicating 
+% * any keys that were cited but never defined,
+% * any keys that were defined but never cited, and
+% * keys that were cited and defined, but not in the same order.
+%
+% BibTeX takes care of such things automatically,
+% so there is little use for such a test when using BibTeX.
+%
+% A separate question: will this file run under revtex4.cls?
+% I can see two lines in my .aux with the potential for problems: 
+% \global \mathchardef \firstnote@num\z@ \relax 
+% \global\NAT@numberstrue
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\def\g@bbletw@#1#2{}%
+\def\g@bble@ne#1{}%
+
+\let\bibdata\g@bble@ne
+\let\newlabel\g@bbletw@
+\let\@writefile\g@bbletw@
+\let\bibstyle\g@bble@ne
+
+\@tempcnta\z@
+\@tempcntb\z@
+
+\def\bibcite#1#2{%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \expandafter\bib@one\csname bib#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\the\@tempcnta}{#1}%
+}
+
+\def\bib@one#1#2#3{%
+ \@ifnotrelax#1{%
+  \typeout{*** Tag "#3" used in more than one \string\bibitem.}%
+  \typeout{\space\space\space\space You must correct this problem before continuing (Bailing out).}%
+  \@@end
+ }{%
+  \def#1{#2}%
+  \expandafter\def\csname bib@num#2\endcsname{#3}%
+ }%
+}%
+
+\def\citation#1{%
+ \@for\@tempa:={#1}\do{%
+  \expandafter\cite@one\csname cite\@tempa\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ }%
+}
+
+\def\cite@one#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname cite*\endcsname#1}{%
+  \@booleantrue\@cite@star@sw
+ }{%
+  \@ifnotrelax#1{%
+  }{%
+   \advance\@tempcntb\@ne
+   \expandafter\cite@one@\expandafter#1\expandafter{\the\@tempcntb}{#2}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname cite*\endcsname{*}%
+\@booleanfalse\@cite@star@sw
+
+\def\cite@one@#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#2}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname cite@num#2\endcsname{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\strut{\vrule height12pt depth4pt width0pt}%
+
+\typein[\filename]{Type in file name (no extension)}%
+\expandafter\input\expandafter{\filename.aux}%
+
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\bibtotal\expandafter{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\citetotal\expandafter{\the\@tempcntb}%
+
+\def\app@undefined#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname#2#1\endcsname{}{%
+   \appdef#3{#1, }%
+  }
+}%
+
+\let\uncitedbibs\@empty
+\@tempcnta\z@
+\@ifnum{\bibtotal>\@tempcnta}{%
+ \loopwhile{%
+  \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+  \expandafter\app@undefined\csname bib@num\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{cite}\uncitedbibs
+  \@ifnum{\bibtotal>\@tempcnta}%
+ }%
+}%
+
+\let\undefinedcites\@empty
+\@tempcnta\z@
+\@ifnum{\citetotal>\@tempcnta}{%
+ \loopwhile{%
+  \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+  \expandafter\app@undefined\csname cite@num\the\@tempcnta\endcsname{bib}\undefinedcites
+  \@ifnum{\citetotal>\@tempcnta}%
+ }%
+}%
+
+\def\addit@bad#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname bib#1\endcsname{%
+  \@ifx{#1#2}{%
+   \addit{#1}{OK}%
+  }{%
+   \advance\@tempcntb\@ne
+   \addit{#1}{\bf Out of order}%
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \addit{#1}{\bf Undefined}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\ordertable{}%
+\def\table@line#1#2{%
+  \hbox to\hsize{%
+   \vrule
+   \hbox to.5\hsize{\ #1\hss}%
+   \hss\vrule\hss\strut
+   \hbox to.5\hsize{\ #2\hss}%
+   \vrule
+  }%
+  \hrule
+  \vskip\z@skip
+}%
+\def\addit#1#2{%
+ \appdef\ordertable{\table@line{#1}{#2}}%
+}%
+
+\@tempcnta\z@
+\@tempcntb\z@
+\@ifnum{\citetotal>\@tempcnta}{%
+ \loopwhile{%
+  \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+  \expandafter\addit@bad\csname cite@num\the\@tempcnta\expandafter\endcsname\csname bib@num\the\@tempcnta\endcsname
+  \@ifnum{\citetotal>\@tempcnta}%
+ }%
+}{}%
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\citesdisordered\expandafter{\the\@tempcntb}%
+
+Analysis of \filename.aux, according to rules of \emph{Physical Review}:
+All bibitems must occur in the bibliography in order of their first citation in the
+file, and all bibitems must be cited in the paper.
+
+\def\@tempa{\textbf{Bibitems that were not explicitly cited:} }%
+\@ifx@empty\uncitedbibs{%
+ \appdef\@tempa{none.}%
+}{%
+ \appdef\@tempa{\uncitedbibs\ \@cite@star@sw{were implicitly cited.}{please cite or remove bibitem(s).}}%
+}%
+\@tempa\expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\@tempa}\par
+
+\def\@tempa{\textbf{Citations not defined in bibliography:} }%
+\@ifx@empty\undefinedcites{%
+ \appdef\@tempa{none.}%
+}{%
+ \appdef\@tempa{\undefinedcites\space please add bibitem(s) or remove cite(s).}%
+}%
+\@tempa\expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\@tempa}\par
+
+\@ifnum{\citesdisordered=\z@}{%
+ \def\@tempa{\textbf{The order of the bibitems is OK.}}%
+ \@tempa\expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\@tempa}\par
+}{%
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \textbf{There 
+  \@ifnum{\citesdisordered<\tw@}{was an error}{were \citesdisordered\ errors}
+  in the order of your bibitems.}%
+ }%
+ \@tempa\expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\@tempa}
+ \@ifx@empty\uncitedbibs{\@ifx@empty\undefinedcites{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}{\false@sw}%
+ {(This is in addition to the problems noted above.) }{}%
+ Please check the following table to see what the problems were.
+ Status in boldface signifies that a correction is needed. \par
+}%
+ \emph{NOTE:
+  This table is a complete listing of all your citations, in order of their first occurrence: 
+  your bibitems should be in the order shown in the first column of this table.
+ }\par
+ \small
+ \smallskip
+ \hrule
+ \table@line{\textbf{Citation key}}{\textbf{Status}}%
+ \smallskip
+ \hrule
+ \ordertable
+\end{document}
+% ****** End of file reftest.tex ******
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-1.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-1.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..92df750df3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-1.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,8297 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 122
+% revtex4-1.dtx: package to typeset APS, AIP, OSA, ASA, etc. journal articles
+% Copyright (c) 2009 The American Physical Society.
+% http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/
+% mailto:revtex@aps.org
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file revtex4-1.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    revtex4.cls, revtex4.pdf
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex revtex4-1.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex revtex4-1.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-1.idx
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4-1.gls revtex4-1.glo
+%       pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-1.idx
+%       pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:bibtex/bst/revtex/
+%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from revtex4-1.dtx when run through TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+For the version number, search on the string %FileInfo
+
+Original version by David Carlisle
+Modified by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)
+
+Copyright (c) 2009 The American Physical Society.
+http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/
+mailto:revtex4@aps.org
+
+See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+\generate{%
+  \file{revtex4-1.cls}{%
+   \from{revtex4-1.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{revtex4-1.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{revtex4-1.dtx}{package}%
+  }%
+  \file{aps4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{aps}}%
+  \file{apsrmp4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{rmp}}%
+  \file{aps10pt4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{10pt}}%
+  \file{aps11pt4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{11pt}}%
+  \file{aps12pt4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{12pt}}%
+  \file{revsymb4-1.sty}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{revsymb}}%
+}%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    *.cls, *.rtx, and *.sty }
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run revtex4-1.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{revtex4-1.dtx}\CheckSum{7177}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "revtex4-1.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.1r",
+%%%     date            = "2010/07/25",
+%%%     time            = "20:33:00 UT-8",
+%%%     checksum        = "7177",
+%%%     author          = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "package to change page grid, MVL",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{00readme.tex} file,
+% which contains the frontmatter for the programmer's docs.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset this file with LaTeX.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{00readme.tex}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4-1.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex revtex4-1.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting ths file under \TeX\ itself runs the installer, 
+% which generates the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4-1.cls, revtex4.ins, revtex4.drv, aps4-1.rtx, 
+%aps10pt4-1.rtx, aps11pt4-1.rtx, aps12pt4-1.rtx, revsymp.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4.pdf, 
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4.aux revtex4.idx revtex4.ind revtex4.log revtex4.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
+%</doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
+%<kernel>\ProvidesClass{revtex4-1}
+%<aps>\ProvidesFile{aps4-1}
+%<rmp>\ProvidesFile{apsrmp4-1}
+%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{aps10pt4-1}
+%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{aps11pt4-1}
+%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{aps12pt4-1}
+%<revsymb>\ProvidesPackage{revsymb4-1}
+%<*doc>
+\ProvidesFile{revtex4-1.dtx}
+%</doc>
+%<*!package&!options>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25/20:33:00 4.1r (http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/ for documentation)]% \fileversion
+%</!package&!options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The current class name is remembered in \cmd\class@name.
+% This is something of a klootch, relying as it does on knowledge of the implementation of \cmd\ProvidesPackage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel>\let\class@name\@gtempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{00readme.txt} and sample document as needed.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The driver uses packages \file{ltxdoc.sty}, \file{ltxdocext.sty}, 
+% \file{hyperref.sty}, and whatever font package has been selected.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We ask for the usual indices and glossaries.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4.gls revtex4.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Frontmatter File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the frontmatter file. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}
+\title{%
+ The \classname{revtex4-1} document class of the American Physical Society%
+ \protect\thanks{Work under hire to The American Physical Society.}%
+}%
+\author{Arthur Ogawa%
+ \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Using \protect\revtex}
+
+The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
+
+User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
+
+The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file. 
+
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based  code, other bug fixes}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And that is the end of the driver for the programmer's documentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Overview}%
+% \revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of 
+% the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
+%
+% Certain packages are (should be) loaded by this class in any case:
+% \classname{amssymb}, \classname{amsmath}, \classname{bm}, \classname{natbib}.
+% 
+% Certain packages are automatically loaded by this class
+% when a corresponding class option has been invoked:
+% 
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \textbf{\revtex\ option}&\textbf{package}\\
+% \classoption{amsfonts}&\classname{amsfonts}\\
+% \classoption{amssymb}&\classname{amssymb}\\
+% \classoption{aps}&\classname{overcite}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Certain other packages are to be loaded by the
+% document through explicit use of \cmd\usepackage.
+% Some mentioned in the user documentation are
+% \classname{graphicx}, \classname{longtable}, \classname{hyperref}, 
+% and \classname{bm}.
+%
+% Certain commonly used packages are known to be incompatible with
+% \revtex, among them \classname{multicol} and \classname{cite}.
+% If such a package is found to be loaded, \revtex\ issues an error message
+% and halts the job.
+% Halting might be considered severe punishment for loading an incompatible 
+% package, but if we were to proceed, an even weirder error might be encountered
+% further down the road.
+%
+% This document class implements the substyle: a set of mutually
+% exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the 
+% document class to address multiple societies.
+% It also implements a sub-substyle, giving the 
+% journal of the given society.
+% Any society may create a substyle;
+% this file generates one for \classoption{aps}.
+%
+% FIXME: should always load the \classname{graphicx} package. No, allow user to load whichever graphics package is desired.
+% 
+% QUERY: since \classname{amsfonts} and \classname{amssymb} extend
+% syntax, why not load them in any case?
+% 
+% Certain processing occurs at the endgame for reading in \revtex, thereby establishing
+% precedence for assignments to \LaTeX's (and \revtex's) parameters:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Figure out which society is operative and read in the indicated \file{.rtx} file.
+% \item
+%  Figure out which journal option is operative and execute the indicated journal command. This may lead to reading in a journal substyle \file{.rtx} file.
+% \item
+%  Figure out which pointsize is operative and execute the indicateded pointsize command. This may lead to reading in a pointsize  \file{.rtx} file.
+% \item
+%  Execute all of the document's options, in the order declared within the document.
+% \item
+%  Read in all required packages (like \classname{natbib}, \classname{amsfonts}, \classname{amssymb}), that were determined by class, society, and journal.
+% \item
+%  The last required package, if existing, is the document's style file, the \file{.rty} file. 
+%  Note that the \file{.rty} file can override the assignments of \revtex, society, journal, and required packages, and even load its own packages.
+%  It can also, via appendations to \cmd\setup@hook, override the setup code itself.
+% \item
+%  Execute all of the setup code accumulated. Such code can be queued by \revtex\ itself, by the society, by the journal, or by the pointsize. 
+% \item
+%  At this point, \revtex\ has completed the process of inputting itself, 
+%  and \LaTeX\ will now execute the \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ procedures.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \revtex\ will have enqueued code to execute at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
+% in two different queues. 
+% \cmd\document@inithook\ executes immediately upon encountering the \cmd\begin\env{document} statement, 
+% \cmd\class@documenthook\ at the end of all the code enqueued via \cmd\AtBeginDocument. 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Install procedures to execute at the very end of the class's
+%  \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ processing, such as
+%  \begin{enumerate}
+%  \item
+%   closing out the page grid
+%  \item
+%   putting out the LastPage label.
+%  \item
+%   issuing a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, based on the value set
+%   by the society substyle.
+%  \item
+%   setting default values for parameters used in the document.
+%FIXME: differentiate between class's parameters that can wait until
+% they are used in the document, and parameters that are used at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
+%  \end{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Install procedures to execute the very last at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time,
+%  such as the \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% Certain events are optionally scheduled for \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Setting default values for the Booleans and for other procedures used in formatting.
+% \item
+%  In response to class options options, adjusting parameters and procedures used in formatting.
+% \item
+%  Implementing the \classoption{eqsecnum} option, if required.
+% \item
+%  Setting the state engine for data commands.
+% \item
+%  Memorizing procedures for later use.
+% \item
+%  Setting type size and area, for use by later calculations.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% Certain events are scheduled for \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ time:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Print out the migrated floats or the end notes, if needed.
+% \item
+%  Close out the page grid.
+% \item
+%  Label the last page of the document
+% \item
+%  (\classname{natbib}) prepare to read in the \file{.aux} file.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \section{Writing journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
+%
+% With this version of \revtex, we introduce a somewhat different
+% scheme for adapting \revtex\ to the needs of a specific journal.
+%
+% To create a journal substyle, you create new class options in 
+% \revtex\ for the society, say \classoption{osa}, and any of that society's journals,
+% one of which is, say, \classoption{josaa},
+% using the code for the APS as a guide.
+% In particular, each of your new options should separately define \cmd\@society\
+% and \cmd\@journal. That for the former will be the same for
+% all options relating to a particular society.
+%
+% Then, for the society, you create a corresponding \file{.rtx}
+% file, in our case \file{osa.rtx}.
+% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
+% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
+% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
+% Also within that file, you include a 
+% section of code for each journal, that for josaa looks like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@josaa}{%
+% <code specific to the josaa>
+% }{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% Thus far, the scheme is similar to that used in \revtex\ 3.1.
+% However, the new scheme does differ from the old in that 
+% the \file{.rtx} file should define no syntactical extensions
+% to \revtex.
+%
+% \section{The \classname{revtex4} Document Class}
+% Above, we took
+% advantage of 1) the \LaTeX\ definition of \cmd\ProvidesPackage\ and
+% 2) that the line of code immediately afterwards follows the \cmd\ProvidesClass\ statement above. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Print a banner in the log:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\GenericInfo{}{\space
+ Copyright (c) 2009 The American Physical Society.^^J
+ mailto:revtex@aps.org^^J
+ Licensed under the LPPL:^^Jhttp://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt^^J
+ Arthur Ogawa <arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net>^^J
+ Based on work by David Carlisle <david at dcarlisle.demon.co.uk>%
+ \@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility Processing}
+%
+% If the document has \cmd\documentstyle|{revtex4}|,
+% then, instead of attempting to run in compatability mode,
+% just complain and exit.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility    
+  \edef\reserved@a{\errhelp{%
+   Change your \string\documentstyle\space statement to
+   \string\documentclass\space and rerun.
+  }}\reserved@a
+  \errmessage{You cannot run \class@name\space in compatability mode}%
+  \expandafter\@@end
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here, we incorporate the utility, frontmatter, and page grid packages.
+% The \classname{ltxutil}, \classname{ltxfront}, and \classname{ltxgrid} source are distributed with 
+% \revtex.
+%
+% Here begins the \file{options} \textsc{docstrip} module.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Hooks}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
+% The procedure 
+% \cmd\setup@hook\
+% serves as the vehicle for all code that 
+% gives values to the class's parameters once all the 
+% society, journal, options, and packages have been processed. 
+%
+% Arrange for journal substyles to set their own default values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\setup@hook\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% After preamble processing is complete,
+% detect whether package \classname{longtable} has been loaded and patch it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \switch@longtable
+ \let\LT@makecaption\LT@makecaption@rtx
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@makecaption}
+% We override the caption processing method of the \classname{longtable} package:
+% space below the caption is created via strut instead of whitespace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT@makecaption@rtx#1#2#3{%
+  \LT@mcol\LT@cols c{%
+    \hbox to\z@{%
+     \hss
+     \parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{%
+      \sbox\@tempboxa{#1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip}%
+      \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
+        #1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip
+      \else
+        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+      \fi
+      \endgraf
+     }%
+     \hss
+    }%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\robust@boldmath}
+% Robustify the \cmd\boldmath command. 
+% If Team \LaTeX\ (or any package) ever gets around to fixing this problem, 
+% we will bow out. (This fix relates to bug \#394.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\protectdef@boldmath{%
+ \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname boldmath \endcsname{}{%
+  \class@info{Robustifying \string\LaTeX's \string\boldmath\space command}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname boldmath \endcsname\boldmath
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\boldmath\expandafter{\expandafter\protect\csname boldmath \endcsname}%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \protectdef@boldmath
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Compatability with the geometry package}
+%
+% The \classname{geometry} package of Hideo Umeki provides a way to 
+% specify the metrics of the media and page layout.
+% We want to ensure that \revtex\ does not foreclose on the use of 
+% this or any other such package, nor to interfere with
+% explicit assignments of such metric parameters within the 
+% document preamble.
+% 
+% The \LaTeX\ parameters (resp. \TeX\ primitives) set by \classname{geometry} are:
+% \cmd\paperwidth, \cmd\paperheight, 
+% \cmd\textwidth, \cmd\textheight, 
+% \cmd\topmargin, \cmd\headheight, \cmd\headsep, 
+% \cmd\footskip, \cmd\skip\cmd\footins, 
+% \cmd\marginparwidth, \cmd\marginparsep, 
+% \cmd\oddsidemargin, \cmd\evensidemargin, 
+% \cmd\columnsep, 
+% \cmd\hoffset, \cmd\voffset, \cmd\mag, 
+% \cmd\if@twocolumn, \cmd\if@twoside, \cmd\if@mparswitch, \cmd\if@reversemargin, 
+%
+% \revtex's assignments can be overridden by 
+% any package or other statement in the document preamble, 
+% so it should be compatible. 
+%
+%FIXME: one parameter is rendered semantically void (by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}): 
+% \cmd\if@twocolumn. 
+%
+% \section{Options}\label{sec:options}%
+%
+% \subsection{Define Booleans Used in Options}%
+% The following Booleans are used within the document class to
+% allow the document or the substyle to make selections
+% of formatting.
+% An explicit document class option overrides an assignment made by a substyle.
+%
+% \subsection{Declare Options}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Checkin: for Editorial Use}%
+% A document class option declaring that the document is being processed by the 
+% editorial staff.
+%
+% This option should:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% put date in footer along with folio
+% \item
+% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{preprint} class option.
+% \item
+% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{showpacs} class option.
+% \item
+% specify that when a float is placed h or H, it will be allowed to break over pages.
+% (Note: be sure that if the enclosed \env{tabular} has an optional argument, you change it to [v], or remove it entirely.)
+% \end{itemize}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{checkin}{%
+  \@booleantrue\dateinRH@sw
+  \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+  \def\@pointsize{12}%
+  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+  \def\fp@proc@h{\allow@breaking@tables}%
+  \def\fp@proc@H{\allow@breaking@tables}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\dateinRH@sw
+\def\checkindate{\dateinRH@sw{{\tiny(\today)}}{}}%
+\def\allow@breaking@tables{%
+ \def\array@default{v}% tabular can break over pages
+ \@booleanfalse\floats@sw % table can break over pages
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preprint Style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty@sw}
+% The boolean \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ signifies that 
+% the document is to be formatted in preprint style.
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{preprint}{%
+ \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+ \ExecuteOptions{12pt}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{reprint}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+ \@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw
+ \ExecuteOptions{10pt}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{manuscript}{%
+ \class@warn{Document class option manuscript is obsolete; use preprint instead}%
+ \ExecuteOptions{preprint}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw}
+% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
+% otherwise not.
+% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords.
+% \subsubsection{Showing PACS and keywords}%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{showpacs}{%
+  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noshowpacs}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{showkeys}{%
+  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noshowkeys}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
+\@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Balance the last page when in two-column page grid}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\balancelastpage@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% If we are in a two-column page grid, we may wish to balance the columns
+% of the last page. This will be done automatically if the 
+% \classoption{twocolumn} document class option is chosen.
+% This action will be turned off by the \classoption{nobalancelastpage}.
+% A complementary class option, \classoption{balancelastpage} is also provided.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{balancelastpage}{%
+  \@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{nobalancelastpage}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\balancelastpage@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Showing preprint numbers}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preprint@sw}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: default value of \cs{preprint@sw} follows \cs{preprintsty@sw}}
+% The boolean \cmd\preprint@sw\ signifies that 
+% the preprints (cf. \cmd\preprint) are to be formatted (usually on the title page).
+% The option \classoption{preprintnumbers} declares to do so,
+% \classoption{nopreprintnumbers} declares not to; 
+% the default is to follow \cmd\preprintsty@sw. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{nopreprintnumbers}{\@booleanfalse\preprint@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{preprintnumbers}{\@booleantrue\preprint@sw}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\preprint@sw{\let\preprint@sw\preprintsty@sw}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Hypertext Option}%
+%
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+% \changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hyperref}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following code had been commented out, it is now truly a comment:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\AtEndOfClass{%
+% \begingroup
+%  \edef\@tempa{%
+%   \let
+%   \noexpand\@clsextension
+%   \noexpand\@empty
+%   \noexpand\RequirePackage{hyperref}%
+%   \def\noexpand
+%   \@clsextension{\@clsextension}%
+%  }%
+%  \expandafter
+% \endgroup
+% \@tempa
+%}%
+% \def\@pointsize{10}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% If you have a hyper-foo enabled browser you may prefer this format
+% which does not print the URL for the home page, but just makes the
+% name a link, but by default print it so it works on paper.
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \class@warn{Class option "hyperref" is no longer supported.^^JEmploy \string\usepackage{hyperref} instead}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Type Size}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% Use \cmd\@pointsize|=10| rather than \cmd\@ptsize|=0| to allow easy extensions
+% to 9pt or whatever. 
+% Note: the three alternatives are mutually exclusive. 
+%
+% At this point, the parameter \cmd\@pointsize\ is set to \cmd\undefined:
+% a society \emph{must} give it a definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@pointsize{10}}%
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@pointsize{11}}%
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@pointsize{12}}%
+\let\@pointsize\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Media Size}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paperheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\paperwidth}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {210mm}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {148mm}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {176mm}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {11in}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{legalpaper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {14in}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{executivepaper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {7.25in}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{landscape}{%
+    \setlength\@tempdima   {\paperheight}%
+    \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {\@tempdima}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+% Effectively select \classoption{letterpaper}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ds@letterpaper
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibnotes}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce}
+% Frontmatter footnotes result from frontmatter commands like
+% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, and \cmd\thanks.
+% The default for \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce\ is
+% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote, which formats the frontmatter footnotes
+% at the foot of the title page. The \classoption{bibnotes} class option
+% defers them to the bibliography.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{bibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote}%
+\DeclareOption{nobibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}%
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footinbib}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% The boolean \cmd\footinbib@sw\ signifies that 
+% text footnotes are to be set in the bibliography, as endnotes.
+% 
+% The document may set the value one way or the other via
+% the following two class options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{footinbib}{\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw}
+\DeclareOption{nofootinbib}{\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The default value is \cmd\false@sw, and the society or journal
+% may override the default. 
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{altaffilletter}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffilletter@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% Determine the procedure \cmd\thefootnote\ used in frontmatter: 
+% the footnote symbol used in titlepage footnotes.
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{altaffilletter}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{altaffilsymbol}{\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{superbib}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The procedure \cmd\place@bibnumber\ produces the number
+% at the head of the \cmd\bibitem, in the bibliography.
+% By default, it has the \cmd\bibnumfmt\ meaning assigned by the \classname{natbib} package.
+% It may be overridden by society, journal, or by the document options.
+%
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{superbib}{%
+ \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+}%
+\def\place@bibnumber{\NATx@bibnumfmt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@sup}
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@inl}
+% For producing the \cmd\bibitem\ device,
+% we define two procedures to select from.
+%
+% Note that we could have used \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\ifNAT@super\
+% switch, but it does not allow for altering the meaning of \cmd\bibnumfmt.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\place@bibnumber@sup#1{\textsuperscript{#1}}%
+\def\place@bibnumber@inl#1{[#1]}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{citeautoscript}%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeautoscript@sw}
+% This class option allows you to automatically accomodate a change from non-superscripted, numbered references
+% to superscripted, bunmbered references.
+%
+% Note: you should always mark up your document with the assumption that references are \emph{not} going to be superscripted.
+% Otherwise this option has no hope of working properly.
+%
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{citeautoscript}{\@booleantrue\citeautoscript@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\citeautoscript@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Variants on the Bibliography Style}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+%
+% \revtex\ anticipates that a society or journal will provide two related Bib\TeX bibliography style variants,
+% designating one as the default.
+% A pair of document class options \classoption{longbibliography} and \classoption{nolongbibliography}
+% allows the user to explicitly select between them. 
+% \begin{macro}{\longbibliography@sw}
+%
+% \revtex's default for \cmd\longbibliography@sw\ is \cmd\false@sw.
+%
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{longbibliography}{\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{nolongbibliography}{\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eprint@enable@sw}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
+%
+% The document class options \classoption{eprint} and \classoption{noeprint}
+% give the user the ability to turn off production of the \texttt{eprint} field in the bibliography. 
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{eprint}{\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{noeprint}{\@booleanfalse\eprint@enable@sw}%
+\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Simplex/Duplex Pages}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twoside@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
+% The flag \cmd\twoside@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
+% formatted for duplex printing.
+% After the preamble is processed, we align the value
+% of the kernel \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if@twoside\ 
+% to that of \cmd\twoside@sw. 
+% \cmd\if@twoside\ itself is used in the kernel's
+% \cmd\cleardoublepage\ and \cmd\@outputpage\ procedures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \twoside@sw{\@twosidetrue}{\@twosidefalse}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+% The complementary options \classoption{twoside} and \classoption{oneside}
+% assert formatting for duplex or simplex printing, respectively.
+% At the same time, we arrange for the selection of the page grid 
+% with respect to the marginal column:
+% Because \cmd\if@reversemargin\ remains default (false),
+% if duplex printing, this column will always be on the (right),
+% if simplex printing, it will always be on the (outside).
+% QUERY: correct choice?
+%FIXME: assign \cmd\if@mparswitch\ later (and protect the assignment, too). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@booleantrue \twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse}%
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw\@mparswitchtrue}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Two-Column Page Grid}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
+% The flag \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
+% formatted in the two-column page grid.
+%
+% If no options relating to page grid are invoked by 
+% \cmd\AtBeginDcoument\ time, we set default values.
+% Up to that point, the class can check if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\
+% is \cmd\undefined\ to see if any related options have been invoked.
+%
+% \classoption{onecolumn} specifies one-column page grid.
+% The \classoption{twocolumn} class option employs the standard mechanism for
+% changing the column grid: the \classname{ltxgrid} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@booleantrue \twocolumn@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The column grid is determined by the state of the switch \cmd\twocolumn@sw
+% and is effected at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+% The society or journal file may re-define \cmd\select@column@grid\ 
+% to accomodate, e.g., more than two choices for the page grid. 
+%
+% Note that \cmd\open@column@two\ adds items to the Main Vertical List, 
+% so constitutes the true beginning of the document.
+%
+% Note also that if the selected column grid is a one-column grid, 
+% there is nothing to do, because \classname{ltxgrid} has already
+% set that up via \cmd\@begindocumenthook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\select@column@grid{%
+ \twocolumn@sw{%
+  \twocolumn@grid@setup
+  \open@twocolumn
+ }{%
+  \onecolumn@grid@setup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \open@onecolumn
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \select@column@grid
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clear@document}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+%
+% We install into \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ 
+% a trap for the procedure \cmd\clearpage\ that attempts to end the current page.
+% This procedure needs to be headpatched with \cmd\close@column\ to end the current page grid. 
+%
+% This procedure is executed after all typesetting is complete
+% i.e., after items like \cmd\printtables, as well as all commands queued up by \cmd\AtEndDocument. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \let\clearpage@ltx\clearpage
+ \prepdef\clear@document{\let\clearpage\clearpage@ltx\let\clear@document\@empty\close@column}%
+ \appdef\class@documenthook{%
+  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+   \let\clearpage\clear@document
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% The boolean \cmd\authoryear@sw\ signifies that we are to use author-year citations rather than numerical citations.
+% 
+% The \classoption{author-year} class option selects ``'author-year'' citations;  
+% \classoption{numerical} selectes ``numerical'' citations.
+% The former is the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{author-year}{\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{numerical}{\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\galley@sw}
+% The boolean \cmd\galley@sw\ signifies that 
+% the document is to be formatted in galley style.
+%
+% Asserting both \cmd\galley@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ 
+% may produce strange formatting results, but it is not illegal.
+% However, it \emph{is} illegal to assert galley and any 
+% twocolumn option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \classoption{galley} emulates setting the galleys of
+% a two-column journal.
+% CHANGED: this option should effectively set \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ false.
+% NOTE: it makes no sense to assert both galley and twocolumn.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{galley}{%
+  \ExecuteOptions{onecolumn}%
+  \@booleantrue\galley@sw
+  \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+  \appdef\setup@hook{%
+    \advance\textwidth-\columnsep
+    \textwidth.5\textwidth
+  }%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\galley@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{raggedbottom or flushbottom}%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumn@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The class options \classoption{raggedbottom} and \classoption{flushbottom} determine whether the columns (page)
+% are ragged bottom or flush bottom.
+% Note that we do not select a default here; that is done by the journal substyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{raggedbottom}{\@booleantrue\raggedcolumn@sw}
+\DeclareOption{flushbottom}{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \raggedcolumn@sw{\raggedbottom}{\flushbottom}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{tightenlines}%
+%
+% This class option specifies that standard leading 
+% is to be used to set the type.
+% If lacking, the leading will be loose.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tightenlines@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The boolean \cmd\tightenlines@sw\ signifies that 
+% the leading is to be made standard amount.
+% If false, it means that the leading is to be set extra open.
+% Has no effect on 10pt size option.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tightenlines}{\@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw}
+\@booleanfalse\tightenlines@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{lengthcheck}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lengthcheck@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\lengthcheck@sw\ signifies that 
+% the length checking is in effect.
+% It is up to the individual journal substyle 
+% to alter its formatting accordingly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\lengthcheck@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This class option specifies that the formatted document 
+% should approach as closely as possible the
+% formatting of an actual journal article 
+% to facilitate the author's performance of a length check.
+%
+%FIXME: society or journal may have its own definition of this option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{lengthcheck}{%
+ \@booleantrue\lengthcheck@sw
+ \ExecuteOptions{reprint}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In addition, if length checking is in effect, we will enable 
+% the tally of text length. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \lengthcheck@sw{\@booleantrue\tally@box@size@sw}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Draft and Final}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\draft@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\draft@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
+% formatted in draft mode. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \draft@sw{\overfullrule 5\p@}{\overfullrule\z@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Certain packages may pay attention to the 
+% class option \classoption{draft} that sets this Boolean.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\@booleantrue\draft@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{final}{\@booleanfalse\draft@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\draft@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{eqsecnum}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum@sw}
+% The flag \cmd\eqsecnum@sw\ signifies that equations are to be 
+% numbered with the section, e.g., ``Eq. (2.13)''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \eqsecnum@sw{%
+  \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
+  \def\theequation@prefix{\arabic{section}.}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \classoption{eqsecnum} class option signifies that equations are
+% to be numbered within sections.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\@booleantrue\eqsecnum@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\eqsecnum@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{secnumarabic}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
+% The \classoption{secnumarabic} class option signifies that sectioning commands are
+% to be numbered arabic: 
+% the procedure \cmd\secnums@arabic\ is executed as the default. 
+% Otherwise, the procedure \cmd\secnums@rtx\ determines things. 
+% The society or journal may redefine either procedure,
+% and may change the definition of \cmd\setup@secnums\ itself, 
+% thereby establishing a different default. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \setup@secnums
+}%
+\DeclareOption{secnumarabic}{%
+ \def\setup@secnums{\secnums@arabic}%
+}%
+\def\setup@secnums{\secnums@rtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The code that defines \cmd\secnums@rtx\ and \cmd\secnums@arabic\ appears
+% in Section~\ref{sec:secnumarabic}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{fleqn}
+% FIXME: model fleqn after amsfonts. I no longer understand why I said this.
+% \file{fleqn.clo} is not a package, so it can simply be \cmd\input. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
+ \input{fleqn.clo}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{floats/endfloats}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floats@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\floatp@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The Boolean \cmd\floats@sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated;
+% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document.
+% By default, the former.
+% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
+% the document class in response to user-selected options.
+% 
+% This boolean and the assignment of its default value is done by
+% the \classname{ltxutil} package.
+%
+% The Boolean \cmd\floatp@sw\ signifies that endfloats are to be set one per page;
+% if false, that endfloats are to be set with multiple floats per page permitted.
+% By default, the latter.
+% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
+% the document class in response to user-selected options.
+% The default is established here.
+%
+% These options control, via the Boolean \cmd\floats@sw, 
+% whether floats are to be migrated to the end of the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{floats}{\@booleantrue\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
+\DeclareOption{endfloats}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
+\DeclareOption{endfloats*}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleantrue\floatp@sw}
+\@booleantrue\floats@sw
+\@booleantrue\floatp@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{titlepage/notitlepage}%
+% These options control, via \cmd\titlepage@sw, 
+% whether the title block is to be set on a separate page.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\titlepage@sw\ signifies that a forced 
+% page break is to follow the title page: the article
+% title appears on a page by itself.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw}
+\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw}
+\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Substyle and Sub-substyle}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\change@society}
+% \begin{macro}{\change@journal}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+% If the society or, resp., journal has already been assigned,
+% notify user whether it is being overridden. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\change@society#1{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1}%
+ \@ifxundefined\@society{%
+  \class@info{Selecting society \@tempa}%
+  \let\@society\@tempa
+ }{%
+  \@ifx{\@tempa\@society}{}{%
+   \class@warn{Conflicting society \@tempa<>\@society; not selected}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\change@journal#1{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1}%
+ \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+  \class@info{Selecting journal \@tempa}%
+  \let\@journal\@tempa
+ }{%
+  \@ifx{\@tempa\@journal}{}{%
+   \class@warn{Conflicting journal \@tempa<>\@journal; not selected}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here had been the class options relating to the APS.
+% Now that all societies are on an equal footing, this code is in the
+% respective \file{.rtx} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Optical Society of America}%
+% Here are the class options relating to the Optical Society of America.
+%
+% Note: as of 2008, the only OSA module being distributed by ctan is \file{osajnl.rtx}.
+% The class options declared here are, I think, unused.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{osa}{\change@society{osa}\let\@journal\@undefined}%
+\DeclareOption{osameet}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{osameet}}%
+\DeclareOption{opex}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{opex}}%
+\DeclareOption{tops}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{tops}}%
+\DeclareOption{josa}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{josa}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@require@packages}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The procedure \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ accumulates all \cmd\RequirePackage\ statements
+% in the course of loading the document class. 
+% Carrying out these operations at that time is needed:
+% \cmd\ProcessOptions\ must be executed first. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\rtx@require@packages\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+% We load the \classname{textcase} package of David Carlisle.
+% Now that its bug of long standing has been repaired, we no longer need to doctor it up. 
+% And, because its loading has been deferred until \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time, 
+% we no longer override \LaTeX\ here. Instead, the \classname{textcase} package
+% will be asked to do that. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage[overload]{textcase}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following code used to
+% let the \classname{textcase} commands override those of \LaTeX:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\appdef\setup@hook{%
+% \expandafter
+% \let\csname MakeUppercase \expandafter\endcsname
+%    \csname MakeTextUppercase \endcsname
+% \expandafter
+% \let\csname MakeLowercase \expandafter\endcsname
+%    \csname MakeTextLowercase \endcsname
+% }%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{amsfonts}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The class option \classoption{amsfonts} has the
+% same effect as if the document preamble contained
+% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsfonts}$ statement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{amsfonts}{%
+  \def\class@amsfonts{\RequirePackage{amsfonts}}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noamsfonts}{%
+  \let\class@amsfonts\@empty
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \@ifxundefined\class@amsfonts{}{\class@amsfonts}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{amssymb}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The class option \classoption{amssymb} has the
+% same effect as if the document preamble contained
+% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amssymb}$ statement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{amssymb}{%
+  \def\class@amssymb{\RequirePackage{amssymb}}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noamssymb}{%
+  \let\class@amssymb\@empty
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \@ifxundefined\class@amssymb{}{\class@amssymb}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{amsmath}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The class option \classoption{amsmath} has the
+% same effect as if the document preamble contained
+% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsmath}$ statement.
+%
+% We require version 1.2 (datestamped 1997/03/20) or later.
+% The \expandafter\cmd\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname, will 
+% 
+% \LaTeX\ note:
+% Certain \LaTeX\ procedures have an arbitrary and pointless restriction that they may be used only within the preamble.
+% We get around this by preserving the procedures in private \cmd\csname s.
+%
+% FIXME note: it is difficult to ensure that an error summary will be printed on the console at the very end,
+% but \classname{ltxgrid} allows accomplishing this via an interrupt, put down at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{amsmath}{%
+  \def\class@amsmath{\RequirePackage{amsmath}[\ver@amsmath@prefer]}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noamsmath}{%
+  \let\class@amsmath\@empty
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \preserve@LaTeX
+ \@ifxundefined\class@amsmath{}{\class@amsmath}%
+ \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\test@amsmath@ver}%
+}%
+\appdef\preserve@LaTeX{%
+ \let\@ifl@aded@LaTeX\@ifl@aded
+ \let\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX\@ifpackageloaded
+ \let\@pkgextension@LaTeX\@pkgextension
+ \let\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX\@ifpackagelater
+ \let\@ifl@ter@LaTeX\@ifl@ter
+ \let\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX\@ifl@t@r
+ \let\@parse@version@LaTeX\@parse@version
+}%
+\appdef\restore@LaTeX{%
+ \let\@ifl@aded\@ifl@aded@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifpackageloaded\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX
+ \let\@pkgextension\@pkgextension@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifpackagelater\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifl@t@r\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX
+ \let\@parse@version\@parse@version@LaTeX
+}%
+\def\test@amsmath@ver{%
+ \begingroup
+  \restore@LaTeX
+  \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
+   \@ifpackagelater{amsmath}{\ver@amsmath@prefer}{}{%
+     \class@warn{%
+      You have loaded amsmath, version "\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname",\MessageBreak
+      but this class requires version "\ver@amsmath@prefer", or later.\MessageBreak
+      Please update your LaTeX installation.
+     }%
+   }%
+  }{%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\ver@amsmath@prefer{2000/01/15 v2.05 AMS math features}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Presenting Authors and Their Affiliations}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+% Class options for presenting authors and their affiliations are now defined in 
+% \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Typeset by \revtex}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\byrevtex@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\byrevtex@sw\ signifies that the document should
+% bear an imprint to the effect that it was formatted by this document class.
+%
+% The class option \classoption{byrevtex} signifies that you want the 
+% ``Typeset by \revtex'' byline to appear on your formatted output.
+% By default, no such byline appears.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{byrevtex}{\@booleantrue\byrevtex@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\byrevtex@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Attempt to fix float placement failure}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% \revtex\ uses the \classname{ltxgrid} package, which provides the ability to attempt repairs when 
+% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is about to fail, but that facility is turned off by default.
+% Users should invoke the \classoption{floatfix} document class option to enable this \LaTeX\ extension.
+% If not, a helpful message is printed in the log, indicating how to work around the difficulty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{floatfix}{\@booleantrue\force@deferlist@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{nofloatfix}{\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fltovf}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fltstk}
+%  The \LaTeX\ kernel error message \cmd\@fltovf\ may now be a bit more helpful to the user;
+%  likewise for the \cmd\@fltstk\ message of \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@fltovf{%
+ \@latex@error{%
+  Too many unprocessed floats%
+  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
+ }\@ehb
+}%
+\def\@fltstk{%
+ \@latex@warning{%
+  A float is stuck (cannot be placed)%
+  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@info@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\outputdebug@sw}
+% The two options \classoption{ltxgridinfo} and \classoption{outputdebug} turn on informative diagnostics within the 
+% package \classname{ltxgrid}. Only people who really want to see this output will select these class options.
+% Consult documentation for the \classname{ltxgrid} package to see what output the related switches enable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{ltxgridinfo}{%
+ \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
+%\@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{outputdebug}{%
+ \@booleantrue\outputdebug@sw
+ \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
+ \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
+ \traceoutput
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Option to relax page height}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight@sw}
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package can set text pages to their natural height or force them to the full 
+% text height; the latter is the default.
+% If setting the pages with a variable length,
+% the running foot will move up or down with the natural length of the text column.
+% While I recommend against doing so, this option will turn that switch to the latter setting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{raggedfooter}{\@booleanfalse\textheight@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{noraggedfooter}{\@booleantrue\textheight@sw}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Selecting procedure for processing abstract}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+% Code defining options \classoption{newabstract} and \classoption{oldabstract} has been removed.
+%
+% \subsection{Option to turn on diagnostics in the frontmatter}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatterverbose@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+% A diagnostic option, not for the average enduser, which reveals 
+% the workings of the frontmatter.
+% This code interfaces to that of \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumbers@sw}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+% An option to number the lines of type in the output in the manner of \classname{lineno}.
+%
+% At present, we use that very package to implement this functionality.
+% This means that users may modify the workings of that package per its documentation (which see).
+%
+% However, compatibility with \classname{amsmath} requires that \classname{lineno} be loaded afterwards.
+% Therefore, we defer loading of this package until after the preamble is completed. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{%
+ \appdef
+ \class@documenthook{%
+  \RequirePackage{lineno}[2005/11/02 v4.41]%
+  \linenumbersep4pt\relax
+  \linenumbers\relax
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% By default, line numbering is off. 
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+% Add class option nomerge, to turn off natbib 8.3 syntax for citation key. 
+% The default value of REVTeX 4.1 for \cmd\NAT@merge is \cmd\thr@@, which turns on  
+% the new syntax along with its semantics. 
+% Legacy documents that would be incompatible with the new syntax can be successfully processed 
+% with class option \classoption{nomerge}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{nomerge}{%
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\z@}{\let\NAT@merge\z@}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Default Option, Society, Journal, and pointsize}%
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+% This change will not break OSA documents because that society is still built in to revtex4.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@society}
+% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
+% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@society\ parses the options passed to this document class 
+% for the \cmd\@society. 
+% It is like \cmd\ProcessOptions*\ in that it accesses
+% \cmd\@ptionlist\{\cmd\@currname.\cmd\@currext\}.
+% Any undefined option is considered: if there is a corresponding \file{.rtx} file,
+% it will change the society accordingly
+% and define a placeholder class option for the society thus found
+% (thus preventing a spurious "option not found" message). 
+% 
+% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@\ parses the document's options
+% for any that set the \cmd\csname\ provided. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@parse@class@options@society{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{}{%
+   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
+    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
+    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+   }{}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@parse@class@options@#1{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
+   \begingroup\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
+    \@ifxundefined#1{%
+     \endgroup
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1}%
+    }%
+  }{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@parse@class@options@journal{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
+   \begingroup
+    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
+    \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+     \endgroup
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@journal\expandafter{\@journal}%
+    }%
+  }{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@parse@class@options{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
+   \begingroup
+    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
+    \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
+     \endgroup
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize}%
+    }%
+  }{%
+   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
+    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
+    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+   }{}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+% The class option \classoption{hypertext} enables the built-in hypertext capabilities,
+% which coincide with those of \classname{custom-bib}-generated BIBTeX styles
+% using the guard code \texttt{hypertext}. 
+%
+% Note that APS has these capabilities turned off by default;
+% Loading the hyperref package turns them on.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hypertext}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default handling for a document class option depends upon whether the \cmd\@society\ is 
+% defined. 
+%
+% If not, then hunt for a \file{.rtx} file with that name.
+% If it exists, then we will take this option as the name of the society, 
+% otherwise, declare the option as not used.
+% 
+% (This behavior is similar to the \LaTeX2.09 handling, where
+% one looked for a \file{.sty} file, except that 
+% in this case, we must provide for journal substyles that may be 
+% defined in the society file, or have their own journal substyle file.)
+%
+% At the point where the class file is finished loading, 
+% we then read in the society file. 
+% That file can define further class options, such as the journal substyle.
+%
+% For users, this will mean that they can specify the society and journal simply 
+% by specifying first the former and then the latter among their document class options.
+% The society \emph{must} have a corresponding \file{.rtx}.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@process@society}
+% \begin{macro}{\@process@journal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@process@pointsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\substyle@post{4-1}%
+\def\substyle@ext{rtx}%
+\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A society substyle may define its own options, via \cmd\DeclareOption. 
+%
+% At the end of this document class, we process the society file,
+% using \file{aps.rtx} if none has been specified in the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@society#1{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@society{%
+  \class@warn{No Society specified, using default society #1}%
+  \def\@society{#1}\let\@journal\@undefined
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\input\expandafter{\@society\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% A society substyle can encompass any number of journal substyles;
+% we use the following procedure to invoke the proper one.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@journal#1{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+  \class@warn{No journal specified, using default #1}%
+  \def\@journal{#1}%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@journal}%
+}%
+\def\rtx@do@substyle#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{}{\csname rtx@#1\endcsname}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Document class options \classoption{10pt}, \classoption{11pt}, and \classoption{12pt} 
+% are implemented by \revtex\ itself and determine \cmd\@pointsize. 
+% These provide formatting settings appropriate to the society's journals. 
+%
+% If not specified by the document, a value \cmd\@pointsize@default\ is used. 
+% This default can be set by the journal. Here, the society sets its default. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@pointsize#1{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
+  \def\@pointsize{#1}%
+  \class@warn{No type size specified, using default \@pointsize}%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@pointsize pt}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Class-Asserted Options}%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+% Here we establish the default document class options.
+% Those of the document itself will override these.
+%
+% \section{Procedures Dependent Upon Options}
+%
+% Here we introduce \classname{classes.dtx} definitions for 
+% the page styles that people will expect to be able to use.
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\ps@headings{%
+      \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+      \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+      \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+      \let\@mkboth\markboth
+    \def\sectionmark##1{%
+      \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
+        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+          \thesection\quad
+        \fi
+        ##1}}{}}%
+    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
+      \markright {%
+        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
+          \thesubsection\quad
+        \fi
+        ##1}}}%
+\def\ps@myheadings{%
+    \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+    \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+    \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+    \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@article}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@article@final}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@preprint}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@article{%
+    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
+    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+    \def\@oddfoot{}%
+    \def\@evenfoot{}%
+    \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps@article@final{%
+    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
+    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+    \def\@oddfoot{}%
+    \def\@evenfoot{}%
+    \let\@mkboth\markboth
+    \def\sectionmark##1{%
+      \markboth{%
+       \MakeTextUppercase{%
+        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\z@}{\thesection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
+         ##1%
+       }%
+       }{}%
+    }%
+    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
+      \markright {%
+        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\@ne}{\thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
+         ##1%
+      }%
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\heading@cr{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@preprint{%
+  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddhead{}%
+  \def\@evenhead{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@oddhead\@empty
+\let\@evenhead\@empty
+\let\@oddfoot\@empty
+\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@putlabel}
+% Support the default meaning of \cmd\@endpage.
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+% Name of this macro (and the \cmd\label\ key) taken from 
+% \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/other/lastpage}%
+% with code optimised slightly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lastpage@putlabel{%
+ \if@filesw
+  \begingroup
+    \advance\c@page\m@ne
+    \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{LastPage}{{}{\thepage}{}{}{}}}%
+  \endgroup
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Install a procedure into document endgame processing that 
+% labels the last page of the document.
+% This is done just before the \file{.aux} file
+% is closed, and does not require a \cmd\shipout, because it writes
+% directly to the \file{.aux} file.
+% Note that we assume no further \cmd\shipout s will be done past this point.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\clear@document{%
+ \do@output@cclv{%
+  \lastpage@putlabel
+  \tally@box@size@sw{\total@text}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\providecommand\write@column@totals{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Required Packages}
+% \url{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/other/misc/url.sty}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage{url}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Incompatible Packages}
+%
+% We wait until after the preamble is processed, then check for any packages 
+% that might have been loaded which we know to be incompatible with \revtex.
+%
+% The \classname{multicol} package is incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, which replaces it.
+% The \classname{cite} package is incompatible with \classname{natbib}, which replaces its functionality.
+% The functionality of the \classname{mcite} package is provided by \classname{natbib}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \incompatible@package{cite}%
+ \incompatible@package{mcite}%
+ \incompatible@package{multicol}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Society- and Journal-Specific Code}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@journal}
+% Journal test helper, used as
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\@ifx{\@journal\journal@pra}{%
+%  <journal-specific setup>
+%\fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Journal code might like to further specify (if as yet undefined) or distinguish on
+% the following Booleans.
+%
+% Note: the journal substyle code should only alter the value of one of these Booleans if
+% the Boolean is \cmd\undefined. This convention is what makes the document's
+% options take precedence over the values set by the journal.
+% 
+% FIXME: make this table an exhaustive listing of all the parameters set by
+% the class options.
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \cmd\@pointsize      &(10|11|12), depending on the type size\\
+% \cmd\footinbib@sw    &true if footnotes are to be formatted in the bibliography\\
+% \cmd\preprintsty@sw  &true for preprint and hyperpreprint\\
+% \cmd\eqsecnum@sw     &true means that equations are numbered within sections\\
+% \cmd\groupauthors@sw &true means authors listed separately for each address\\
+% \cmd\preprint@sw     &true means to produce the preprint numbers as part of the title block\\
+% \cmd\showPACS@sw     &true means to produce the PACS as part of the title block\\
+% \cmd\showKEYS@sw     &true means to produce the keywords as part of the title block\\
+% \cmd\@affils@sw      &true means each affiliation is printed, for each author\\
+% \cmd\runinaddress@sw &true means author addresses are printed run-in\\
+% \cmd\draft@sw        &true implies that PACS will be printed\\
+% \cmd\tightenlines@sw &true if preprint single spaced\\
+% \cmd\lengthcheck@sw  &true if length checking is in effect\\
+% \cmd\byrevtex@sw     &true means to announce ``typeset by \revtex''\\
+% \cmd\titlepage@sw    &true for title is to be set on a separate page\\
+% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if two-column page grid\\
+% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if we are to automatically balance the columns of the last page\\
+% \cmd\twoside@sw      &true means to format pages for duplex printing\\
+% \cmd\floats@sw       &false means floats are migrated to end of document\\
+% \cmd\floatp@sw       &true means endfloats are set one to a page\\
+% \cmd\class@amsfonts  &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amsfonts} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
+% \cmd\class@amssymb   &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amssymb} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
+% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (\cmd\footnote) will be used\\
+% \cmd\place@bibnumber &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (inline) will be used\\
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Note: if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ are both false,
+% then `galley' style is in effect. The \classoption{galley} option invokes
+% \classoption{onecolumn}, but does not affect the \cmd\preprintsty@sw.
+%
+% Note: \cmd\paperwidth\ and \cmd\paperheight\ are not integrated into this scheme,
+% and should be selected by the document alone.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Body}
+%
+% \subsection{counters}
+% The following definitions are probably identical to those in 
+% \file{classes.dtx}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelitemi{\textbullet}
+\def\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash}
+\def\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered}
+\def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{float parameters}
+%
+% from the old aps.sty. (DPC: same as article I think)
+% AO: here, \LaTeX's standard classes fail very poorly
+% (the price of backward compatability): the values for
+% \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and \cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\
+% need to be raised to avoid creating extremely short
+% float pages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+\def\topfraction{.9}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
+\def\bottomfraction{.9}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
+\def\textfraction{.1}
+\def\floatpagefraction{.9}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
+\def\dbltopfraction{.9}
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.9}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{List Environments}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}{%
+  \let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{%
+    \itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}{%
+  \list{}{%
+    \listparindent 1.5em
+    \itemindent\listparindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quote}{%
+  \list{}{%
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+  \hspace\labelsep \normalfont\bfseries #1\unskip:%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{description}{%
+ \list{}{%
+    \labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+    \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Sectioning Commands\label{sec:secnumarabic}}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Sectioning Commands and Their Productions}%
+% The following counters are defined by LaTeX's standard document classes.
+% We do likewise, then assign flag values to the productions, awaiting
+% overrides.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{part}%
+\let\thepart\@undefined
+\newcounter{section}%
+\let\thesection\@undefined
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]%
+\let\thesubsection\@undefined
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]%
+\let\thesubsubsection\@undefined
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]%
+\let\theparagraph\@undefined
+\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]%
+\let\thesubparagraph\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The procedure invoked by \cmd\setup@secnums\ provides meanings for these productions. 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\secnums@rtx}
+% \begin{macro}{\secnums@arabic}
+% These two procedures define the meanings of each of the productions
+% of the counters of the sectioning commands,
+% but only if nothing else has defined it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secnums@rtx{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection\,}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,\theparagraph\,}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\secnums@arabic{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The Acknowledgments Environment}%
+% This user-level markup produces a head introducing 
+% the acknowledgments, and acts as a wrapper for the text.
+% In this implementation, it is an unnumbered section,
+% but appears within the toc.
+%
+% For compatiability's sake, we implement it under the alternative
+% spelling \env{acknowledgements}.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{acknowledgments}{%
+ \acknowledgments@sw{%
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\acknowledgmentsname}%
+ }{%
+  \par
+  \phantomsection
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\acknowledgmentsname}%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \par
+}%
+\@booleantrue\acknowledgments@sw
+\newenvironment{acknowledgements}{%
+ \replace@environment{acknowledgements}{acknowledgments}%
+}{%
+ \endacknowledgments
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Part Opener}%
+% section setup copied verbatim from revtex3 aps/osa.
+% Does not explicitly depend on pointsize options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\part{\par
+   \addvspace{4ex}%
+   \@afterindentfalse
+   \secdef\@part\@spart}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
+        \refstepcounter{part}%
+        \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ }{%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+    \parindent \z@ \raggedright
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
+      \Large \bf \partname~\thepart%
+      \par\nobreak
+    }{}%
+    \huge \bf
+    #2%
+    \markboth{}{}\par
+ \endgroup
+   \nobreak
+   \vskip 3ex
+   \@afterheading
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@spart#1{{\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \huge \bf
+    #1\par}
+    \nobreak
+    \vskip 3ex
+    \@afterheading}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% Here are the class default definitions for sectioning commands.
+% A society or a journal substyle will likely override these definitions.
+%
+% In doing so, you can customize the formatting for a particular level by defining,
+% e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom@section\ or \cmd\@subsectioncntformat.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {\normalfont\small\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Math}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
+% We change the production of the equation counter so that 
+% we can accomodate the \classoption{eqsecnum} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theequation{%
+ \theequation@prefix\arabic{equation}%
+}%
+\def\theequation@prefix{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Type Size-Dependent Settings}
+%
+% \subsection{All Point Sizes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lineskip 1pt
+\normallineskip 1pt
+\def\baselinestretch{1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@lowpenalty   51
+\@medpenalty  151
+\@highpenalty 301
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
+\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\arraycolsep 3pt
+\tabcolsep 2pt
+\arrayrulewidth .4pt
+\doublerulesep 2pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\@mpfootins = 0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fboxsep  = 3.0pt
+\fboxrule = 0.4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Figures}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{figure}
+% We define the \env{figure} environment.
+% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
+% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{figure}
+               {\@float{figure}}
+               {\end@float}
+\newenvironment{figure*}
+               {\@dblfloat{figure}}
+               {\end@dblfloat}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% If caption is one line long, to be centered; if lines turn, then set justified.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\abovecaptionskip
+\newlength\belowcaptionskip
+\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+% There is a hook \cmd\@caption@fignum@sep\ for determining 
+% the separator following the float number, e.g., ``Fig.1''.
+% Formerly, we had defined it to be ``: '', now the colon has been replace by a period (full stop). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \par
+% \nobreak
+  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \begingroup
+   \small\rmfamily
+   \sbox\@tempboxa{%
+    \let\\\heading@cr
+    \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}%
+   }%
+   \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\hsize}{%
+    \begingroup
+     \samepage
+     \flushing
+     \let\footnote\@footnotemark@gobble
+     \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}\par
+    \endgroup
+   }{%
+     \global \@minipagefalse
+     \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+   }%
+  \endgroup
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}%
+\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
+ \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
+  {#1}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
+}%
+\def\@footnotemark@gobble{%
+ \@footnotemark
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@gobble@opt@i}{\@gobble}%
+}%
+\def\@gobble@opt@i[#1]#2{}%
+\def\@mpmakefntext#1{%
+ \flushing
+ \parindent=1em
+ \noindent
+ \hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
+ #1%
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{. }%
+\def\setfloatlink{\def\float@link}%
+\let\float@link\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
+% The figure counter and float placement defaults.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{figure}
+\renewcommand \thefigure {\@arabic\c@figure}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
+% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
+% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
+% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname\hbox{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{figure} Floats}%
+%
+% We determine if figures are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printfigures\ time. 
+% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \do@if@floats{figure}{.fgx}%
+}%
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+ \printfigures\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\printfigures}
+% The user-level command \cmd\printfigures\ determines
+% where the figures are to appear in a document in which
+% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
+% insert a \cmd\printfigures\ command, 
+% the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
+% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
+% it amounts to a no-op.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printfigures{%
+ \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+ {%
+  \print@float{figure}{\oneapage}%
+ }{%
+  \print@float{figure}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat@prep}
+% We patch into the procedure \cmd\@xfloat@prep. 
+% This patch applies to all floats (not \env{figure} alone)
+% and makes the type center.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@xfloat@prep{%
+ \appdef\@parboxrestore{\centering}%
+%\let\@makefnmark\@makefnmark@latex
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Tables}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+%
+% DPC: More or less taken from \file{revtex2} \file{aps.sty},
+% but using dcolumn for decimal alignment.
+% \begin{environment}{table}
+% We define the \env{table} environment.
+% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
+% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{table}
+               {\@float{table}}
+               {\end@float}
+\newenvironment{table*}
+               {\@dblfloat{table}}
+               {\end@dblfloat}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
+% Table counter and default float placement declarations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{table}
+\renewcommand\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
+% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
+% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
+% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname\hbox{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\table@hook}
+% \begin{macro}{\squeezetable}
+% Assign a meaning to the hook installed into float processing.
+%
+% By default floats are \cmd\small. The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration
+% makes them smaller (\cmd\scriptsize). In general you can locally
+% redefine \cmd\table@hook\ to be whatever you like.
+% (DPC: |\Huge\color{magenta}|\ldots?)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\table@hook{\small}%
+\def\squeezetable{\def\table@hook{\scriptsize}}%
+\appdef\@floatboxreset{\table@hook}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{table} Floats}%
+%
+% After all packages are loaded, we decide
+% if tables will float or will be deferred until \cmd\printtables\ time.
+%
+% We also deal with the possibility of \env{longtable} environments.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@table@environments{%
+ \floats@sw{}{%
+  \let@environment{longtable@float}{longtable}%
+  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@write}%
+  \let@environment{longtable*@float}{longtable*}%
+  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@write}%
+  \let@environment{turnpage@float}{turnpage}%
+  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@write}%
+ }%
+ \do@if@floats{table}{.tbx}%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \set@table@environments
+}%
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+ \printtables\relax
+}%
+\newenvironment{longtable@write}{%
+ \write@@float{longtable}{table}%
+}{%
+ \endwrite@float
+}%
+\newenvironment{longtable*@write}{%
+ \write@@float{longtable*}{table}%
+}{%
+ \endwrite@float
+}%
+\newenvironment{turnpage@write}{%
+ \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\begin{turnpage}}%
+}{%
+ \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\end{turnpage}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printtables}
+% The user-level command \cmd\printtables\ determines
+% where the tables are to appear in a document in which
+% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% If the user invokes the \classoption{nofloats} and fails to
+% insert a \cmd\printtables\ command, 
+% the tables will be printed at the end of the document.
+% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
+% it amounts to a no-op.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printtables{%
+ \begingroup
+  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@float}%
+  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@float}%
+  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@anchored}%
+  \prepdef\longtable{\trigger@float@par}%
+  \expandafter\prepdef\csname longtable*\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}%
+  \expandafter\prepdef\csname table@floats\endcsname{%
+   \onecolumngrid@push
+  }%
+  \expandafter\appdef\csname endtable@floats\endcsname{%
+   \onecolumngrid@pop
+  }%
+  \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+  {%
+   \print@float{table}{\oneapage}%
+  }{%
+   \print@float{table}{}%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\newenvironment{turnpage@anchored}{%
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \setbox\z@\vbox to\textwidth\bgroup
+  \columnwidth\textheight
+}{%
+  \vfil
+ \egroup
+ \rotatebox{90}{\box\z@}%
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Videos}
+%\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{video}
+% We define the \env{video} environment analogously to the 
+% \env{figure} and \env{table} environments; it is intended to contain a video.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{video}
+ {\@float{video}}
+ {\end@float}%
+\newenvironment{video*}
+ {\@dblfloat{video}}
+ {\end@dblfloat}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thevideo}
+% The video counter, float placement defaults, strings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{video}
+\renewcommand \thevideo {\@arabic\c@video}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% File extension and localizable strings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ext@video{lov}%
+\def\fname@video{Video}%
+\def\lovname{List of Videos}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Float type and default placement. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@video{tbp}%
+\def\ftype@video{4}%
+\def\fnum@video{\fname@video~\thevideo}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\c@float@type{}{%
+  \global\setcounter{float@type}{8}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname\hbox{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The documentation for the \classname{hyperref} package, \file{hyperref.dtx} states:
+% ``classes or package which introduce new elements need to define 
+%   an equivalent  \verb+\theH<name>+  for every  \verb+\the<name>+''
+% We do accordingly here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\theHvideo\thevideo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% But \file{hyperref.dtx} goes on to say, 
+% ``We do make a trap to make \verb+\theH<name>+ be the same as \verb+\arabic{<name>}+,
+% if \verb+\theH<name>+ is not defined\ldots''
+% However, it's not doing that right now (as of 6.77u), 
+% and I cannot find any such code in there anymore.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listofvideos{\print@toc{lov}}%
+\let\l@video\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{video} Floats}%
+%
+% We determine if videos are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printvideos\ time. 
+% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \do@if@floats{video}{.vdx}%
+}%
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+ \printvideos\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\printvideos}
+% The user-level command \cmd\printvideos\ determines
+% where the videos are to appear in a document in which
+% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
+% insert a \cmd\printvideos\ command, 
+% the videos will be printed at the end of the document.
+% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
+% it amounts to a no-op.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printvideos{%
+ \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+ {%
+  \print@float{video}{\oneapage}%
+ }{%
+  \print@float{video}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Tabular}
+% Every APS tabular has a double (Scotch) rule above and below.
+% The column specifier ``d'' is implemented using the \classname{dcolumn}
+% package, if available.
+% FIXME: always load dcolumn!
+% \begin{macro}{\tabular@hook}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular@hook}
+% \begin{environment}{ruledtabular}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endtabular@hook{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\RequirePackage{dcolumn}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{dcolumn}{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname NC@find@d\endcsname{}{%
+   \newcolumntype{d}{D{.}{.}{-1}}%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline}%
+\def\colrule{\hline}%
+\def\botrule{\hline\hline}%
+\newenvironment{ruledtabular}{%
+ \def\array@default{v}%
+ \appdef\tabular@hook{\def\@halignto{to\hsize}}%
+ \let\tableft@skip@default\tableft@skip
+ \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@float
+ \let\tabmid@skip@default\tabmid@skip
+ \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@float
+ \let\tabright@skip@default\tabright@skip
+ \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@float
+ \let\array@row@pre@default\array@row@pre
+ \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@float
+ \let\array@row@pst@default\array@row@pst
+ \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@float
+ \appdef\array@row@rst{%
+  \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@default
+  \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@default
+  \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@default
+  \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@default
+  \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@default
+  \appdef\tabular@hook{\let\@halignto\@empty}%
+ }%
+}{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Footnote Text}
+%
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% We customize the presentation of the footnote mark: it will not be italic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \parindent1em%
+  \noindent
+  \hb@xt@1.8em{%
+   \hss\@makefnmark
+  }%
+  #1%
+  \par
+}%
+\def\@makefnmark{%
+ \hbox{%
+  \@textsuperscript{%
+   \normalfont\@thefnmark
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Citations, Bibliography, Endnotes}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}
+%
+% Load Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package,
+% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib}
+%
+% Note that \classname{natbib} assumes that it loads
+% over a document class, such as the \classname{article} class, 
+% that has already defined \env{thebibliography} and \cmd\@listi.
+%
+% Note also that \classname{natbib} also installs a command
+% \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ which presumes
+% that the proper \cmd\bibpunct\ command has been issued.
+% 
+% Note that the macro \cmd\NAT@sort\ controls 
+% whether citations are left alone (\cmd\NAT@sort=0), sorted (\cmd\NAT@sort=1), or sorted and compressed (\cmd\NAT@sort=2).
+% Since we give \classname{natbib} the \classoption{sort\&compress} option,
+% if you prefer \classoption{sort}, you need only \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\@ne.
+% However, if you prefer the effect of having neither \classoption{sort} nor \classoption{sort\&compress},
+% you must \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\z@ and you must also define 
+% \cmd\let\cmd\NAT@cmprs\ to be \cmd\z@.
+%
+% As of version 8.2, \classname{natbib} now no longer binds at the point where it is read in.
+% This means that we can freely change \cmd\NAT@sort, \cmd\NAT@cmprs, and the new
+% \cmd\NAT@merge. Henceforth, we require that this later version be used.
+%
+% For other \classname{natbib} customizations, you may proceed as if you were going to use
+% the \file{natbib.cfg} file: anything that you can modify by this means is fair game.
+% Once \revtex\ is finished loading, you can assert any definitions for \classname{natbib} that you wish.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rev@citet}
+% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealp}
+% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealpnum}
+% We define variants on \classname{natbib}'s commands \cmd\citet, \cmd\citealp, and \cmd\citealpnum. 
+% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ uses a numerical citation.
+% \cmd\rev@citealp\ and \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ are the aliases of \cmd\onlinecite,
+% \cmd\rev@citet\ that of \cmd\textcite.
+% 
+% In each case, we invoke \cmd\rtx@swap@citea\ to effect different productions between 
+% multiple arguments to the \cmd\cite\ command.
+%
+% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ provides textual citations where superscript citations are the default.
+% These should be accessible via the \cmd\citet\ command.
+%
+% Therefore we remember how to do a numerical citation
+% even when the superscript citation has been selected.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
+\expandafter\rev@citet
+\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
+  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
+              \csname citet \endcsname
+}%
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
+\expandafter\rev@citealp
+\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
+  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
+              \csname citealp \endcsname
+}%
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
+\expandafter\rev@citealpnum
+\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citenum
+  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
+              \csname citealp \endcsname
+}%
+\def\rtx@swap@citenum{%
+  \rtx@swap@citea
+  \let\@cite\NAT@citenum
+  \let\NAT@mbox\mbox
+  \let\citeyear\NAT@citeyear
+  \let\NAT@space\NAT@spacechar
+}%
+\def\g@bblefirsttoken{%
+ \expandafter\true@sw
+ \expandafter\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citesuper}
+% We prepare to redefine \classname{natbib}'s procedure \cmd\NAT@citesuper,
+% which is executed when setting a superscript citation.
+% The \cmd\hspace\ is removed: in any case, it
+% should really be \cmd\hspace*, to prevent an unwanted pagebreak.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\rtx@citesuper[3]{%
+ \ifNAT@swa
+  \leavevmode
+  \unskip
+% \hspace{1\p@}%
+  \textsuperscript{\normalfont#1}%
+  \if*#3*\else\ (#3)\fi
+ \else
+  #1%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark@cite}
+% We define a procedure that will set a footnote mark the same way that
+% a citation is set. If footnotes are put in the bibliography with
+% \cmd\footinbib@sw, then the corresponding mark should look the same
+% as the result of a \cmd\cite. This is how we do it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark@cite{\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\@cite{{\@thefnmark}}{}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@bibsection}
+% Prepare to override \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\bibsection.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@bibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par
+ }{%
+% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@swap@citea}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@close}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@box}
+% The procedures |\rtx@def@citea|, |\rtx@def@citea@close|, and |\rtx@def@citea@box| 
+% can take over the management of \classname{natbib}'s |\@citea| macro to effect more sophisticated
+% behavior of the punctuation between textual citations. The switch is performed by \cmd\rtx@swap@citea.
+%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+% In these procedures, we use \cmd\count@\ to count the number of arguments of the \cmd\cite\ command,
+% and we use \cmd\c@NAT@ctr\ to keep track of which argument we are processing.
+% The latter counter is created by \classname{natbib} and used there solely in bibliography processing,
+% where it keeps track of the reference number. 
+% We take over its use in these macros, but only locally; therefore these procedures should work properly, even within the bibliography.
+%FIXME: check whether this is true!
+%
+% Because we are using a scratch counter \cmd\count@, we are vulnerable to other \TeX\ programmers
+% who patch in to \classname{natbib}'s processing and who might use that counter at the same time we are doing so.
+% This is a potential source of trouble for us. 
+%FIXME: store the value of \cmd\count@\ in a private \cmd\csname!
+%
+% Note that \cmd\rtx@def@citea\ begins the same as \cmd\NAT@def@citea, which it replaces, 
+% then makes further decisions based on the values of the counters. 
+%
+% Note also that, in \classname{natbib}, the replacement part of \cmd\NAT@def@citea@close\ could be rewritten as
+% \cmd\NAT@def@citea\cmd\prepdef\cmd\@citea\verb+{+\cmd\NAT@@close\verb+}+, which 
+% would them obviate the need for us to override its meaning. 
+%
+% Note, too, the effect of \cmd\rtx@def@citea@box, which replaces \cmd\NAT@def@citea@box,
+% is almost the same as the latter, except the entire \cmd\@citea\ is given as the argument
+% of \cmd\NAT@mbox.
+%
+% Finally, bear in mind that the English (and some American editors) do not place a comma
+% before the ``and''; our procedures do (but they could be rewritten with that convention). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@swap@citea{%
+ \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
+ \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
+ \let\NAT@def@citea@box\rtx@def@citea@box
+}%
+\def\rtx@def@citea{%
+ \def\@citea{\NAT@separator\NAT@space}%
+ \advance\c@NAT@ctr\@ne
+ \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+  \@ifnum{\c@NAT@ctr=\count@}{\appdef\@citea{\NAT@conj\NAT@space}}{}%
+ }{%
+  \def\@citea{\NAT@space\NAT@conj\NAT@space}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\rtx@def@citea@close{%
+ \rtx@def@citea
+ \prepdef\@citea{\NAT@@close}%
+}%
+\def\rtx@def@citea@box{%
+ \rtx@def@citea@close
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citea\expandafter{\expandafter\NAT@mbox\expandafter{\@citea}}%
+}%
+\def\NAT@conj{and}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BibitemShut}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibAnnote}
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
+% We remember a temporary patch to \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\BibitemShut.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NAT@BibitemShut#1{%
+ \def\@bibstop{#1}%
+ \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
+ \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
+ \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following is a bug fix to \classname{natbib} version 8.31b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BibitemShut@ltx#1{%
+ \unskip
+ \def\@bibstop{#1}%
+ \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
+ \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
+ \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[3]{%
+%  \BibitemShut{#1}%
+%  \def\@tempa{#3}\@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{}{%
+%   \begin{quotation}\noindent
+%    \textsc{Key:}\ #2\\\textsc{Annotation:}\ \@tempa
+%   \end{quotation}%
+%  }%
+%  \ignorespaces
+%}%
+%\def\@bibitemShut{}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{thebibliography}{}{}%
+\let\@listi\@empty
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage[sort&compress]{natbib}[2009/11/07 8.31a (PWD, AO)]%
+ \let@environment{NAT@thebibliography}{thebibliography}%
+ \let@environment{thebibliography}{rtx@thebibliography}%
+ \let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
+ \let\NAT@citesuper\rtx@citesuper
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetup}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibnumfmt}
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
+% and gently coax \classname{natbib} into using
+% the formatting procedures that \emph{we} want it to use.
+%
+% This way of setting up \env{thebibliography} 
+% automatically sets the label width based on
+% the largest number used within the bibliography.
+% This scheme will not work properly using the
+% author/year style of bib entry, though.
+%
+% We define \cmd\bibnumfmt\ to be \cmd\place@bibnumber, which is a macro
+% managed by \revtex. If the document defines \cmd\bibnumfmt, then that
+% definition will be used instead, which is what the \classname{natbib}
+% package gives as its programming interface.
+%
+% We set \cmd\NAT@merge\ to \cmd\tw@, which turns on \classname{natbib}'s
+% \classname{mcite} capabilities. This is the default setting. 
+% If numerical citations are not to be used, then \cmd\NAT@merge\ 
+% should be set to \cmd\@ne\ (syntax is still enabled, but semantics are turned off). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibsection\rtx@bibsection
+\let\NATx@bibsetnum\NAT@bibsetnum
+\def\NAT@bibsetnum#1{%
+ \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
+ \NATx@bibsetnum{\ref{LastBibItem}}%
+}%
+\let\NATx@bibsetup\NAT@bibsetup
+\def\NAT@bibsetup{%
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\listparindent}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}%
+ \NATx@bibsetup
+}%
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+\let\NATx@bibnumfmt\bibnumfmt
+\def\bibnumfmt{\place@bibnumber}%
+\let\NAT@merge\thr@@
+\let\NAT@citeyear\citeyear
+\let\onlinecite\rev@citealp
+\let\textcite\rev@citet
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following is needed until \classname{natbib} is at 8.31b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifx{\BibitemShut\NAT@BibitemShut}{%
+ \class@info{Repairing natbib's \string\BibitemShut}%
+ \let\BibitemShut\BibitemShut@ltx
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+% We arrange for the selection of bibliography style
+% to occur either due to the document's explicit
+% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ statement or
+% via the journal substyle.
+%
+% Note that \revtex\ is incompatible with 
+% any package that patches \cmd\bibliographystyle.
+% Since \classname{natbib} does this, we need a fix.
+%
+% The Boolean \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ signifies that the document  contains explicit
+% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup. If, on the contrary, the bibliography style is set by
+% the the society or the journal, then no explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command appears in the document instance.
+% In this case \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ will be \cmd\false@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
+\def\bibliographystyle{\@booleantrue\bibliographystyle@sw\def\@bibstyle}%
+\@booleanfalse\bibliographystyle@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/11/03}{(AO, 551) Punctuation at end of reference when optional arguments to the cite key are given.}
+% The following had been bug fixes to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\bibitemStop{\@bibitemShut}%
+%\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
+% \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue
+% \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% The following are alterations to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a to 
+% accommodate the possible space character preceding \cmd\BibitemShut,
+% and to handle the case of merged references, where the first ends with a stop character. 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
+ \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue@Stop
+ \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitemNoStop{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{.\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitemContinue{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitemContinue@Stop{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
+% We used to customize one of the productions of \classname{natbib}, but no longer.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\let\bibitemContinue\bibitemContinue@rtx
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Here ends the code to be executed at \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+% Redefine a macro of \classname{natbib} so that merged references are separated with a semicolon.
+% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\bibitemContinue@rtx{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\onlinecite}
+% \begin{macro}{\textcite}
+% We extend \classname{natbib}'s syntax with two commands to set a citation
+% on the baseline (as opposed to superscripted) and as text (rather than parenthetical), respectively.
+% A journal substyle that makes citations be superscripted or parenthetical as the case may be, should ensure
+% that the author has continued access to these two styles. 
+%
+% Note that the society or journal substyle override the meanings of \cmd\@onlinecite\ or
+% \cmd\@textcite\ given here.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\onlinecite{\@onlinecite}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textcite{\@textcite}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% Provide a hook for supplying Bib\TeX\ a bibliographic database that may contain, say, 
+% footnotes.
+% 
+% Note that Bib\TeX\ chokes if the argument of the \cmd\bibdata\ command has null fields,
+% hence these tests.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibliography@latex\bibliography
+\def\bibliography#1{%
+ \auto@bib@empty
+ \begingroup
+  \let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty
+  \@ifx@empty{\pre@bibdata}{%
+   \bibliography@latex{#1}%
+  }{%
+   \@if@empty{#1}{%
+    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata}%
+   }{%
+    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata,#1}%
+   }%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\let\pre@bibdata\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{rtx@thebibliography}%
+% \begin{macro}{\present@bibnote}%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+% We put a tail patch into \cmd\thebibliogrphy\ and
+% a headpatch into \cmd\endthebibliography.
+%
+% Here we provide a default treatment for frontmatter notes 
+% deferred to the bibliography; a journal substyle 
+% might want to override the definition of \cmd\present@bibnote.
+%
+% We make provisions for the case where there are no \cmd\bibitem s 
+% for the bibliography: we produce no bibliography head at all.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{rtx@thebibliography}[1]{%
+ \NAT@thebibliography{#1}%
+ \let\@TBN@opr\present@bibnote
+ \@FMN@list
+}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line was commented out:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\@endnotesinbib
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ directive has been moved from the begin processing to the end processing.
+% This means that the content of the \env{thebibliography} environment can itself prevent the 
+% automatic reading in of the .bbl file. This would be needed when the user has pasted in the 
+% content of the .bbl file into the document itself, something required by APS and AIP editorial direction.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \auto@bib@innerbib
+ \edef\@currentlabel{\arabic{NAT@ctr}}%
+ \label{LastBibItem}%
+ \endNAT@thebibliography
+ \aftergroup\auto@bib@empty
+}%
+\def\present@bibnote#1#2{%
+ \item[%
+  \textsuperscript{%
+   \normalfont
+   \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.#1}\hyper@anchorend}%
+   \begingroup
+    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+    \frontmatter@thefootnote
+   \endgroup
+  }%
+ ]#2\par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line was commented out:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\global\let\NAT@bibitem@first@sw\@secondoftwo
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{write@bibliographystyle}
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+% We wish to delay committing the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ until as late as possible.
+% The journal substyle will define a default bibliography style, and 
+% the document's explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, if any, will override that default.
+%
+% The \cmd\bibstyle\ command is allowed appear quite late in the \file{.aux} file. 
+% We now delay the automatic writing of the \cmd\bibstyle\ command to the end of the job.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\write@bibliographystyle\ tests whether a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command has 
+% already been given.
+% If not, it effectively executes the needed \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, then neutralizes itself
+% (we only need to do this once per job).
+%
+% If the document lacks explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup, we execute
+% \cmd\@bibdataout@rev, a hook for \revtex-aware processing. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write@bibliographystyle{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@bibstyle{}{%
+  \expandafter\bibliographystyle@latex\expandafter{\@bibstyle}%
+  \bibliographystyle@sw{}{\@bibdataout@rev}%
+ }%
+ \global\let\write@bibliographystyle\relax
+}%
+\AtEndDocument{\write@bibliographystyle}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@@citetp}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citex}
+% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@let}
+% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@end}
+% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@swap}
+% We wish to extend \classname{natbib} to move spaces and citations around
+% a superscript-style citation, imitating Donald Arseneau's \classname{cite} package
+% with the \classoption{super}.
+%
+% The \cmd\rtx@@citetp\ procedure is substituted for \cmd\NAT@@citetp;
+% it then calls the \cmd\rtx@citex\ procedure and implements the features of the
+% \classoption{citeautoscript} class option.
+% In the end, \cmd\@citex\ is called with its customary parameters. 
+%
+% The document should be marked up as if citations were \emph{not} superscripted,
+% and then if you select a journal substyle that has superscripted citations, \revtex\ will do its best
+% to alter the formatting of the \cmd\cite s to accomodate superscript style.
+%
+% Only citations set as superscript are affected by this procedure,
+% because we check \cmd\@cite\ against \cmd\NAT@citesuper. 
+%
+% Here's a subtle point: when is the argument of \cmd\super@cite@swap\ not the same as the token \cmd\@let@token?
+% Answer: when the latter is \cmd\@sptoken! This case has to be handled separately.
+% 
+% Note that whether a punctuation is movable is determined by the definition
+% of a particular control sequence name.
+% A society or journal can alter things: to remove a character from the set,
+% do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\relax.
+% To add a character to the set, do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Implementation note: due to a \TeX\ peculiarity, we have to check for the case
+% where \cmd\@let@token\ is a space token \emph{before} we parse forward.
+% At issue is the corner case where an end of file is at hand. If we 
+% were to let \cmd\super@cite@swap\ parse forward, we would encounter a \TeX\ end-of-file
+% error. Note that the test will be true in many distinct cases:
+% the file ends, the next character is a line terminator, the next character is a space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@@citetp[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\rtx@citex[#1]}{\rtx@citex[][#1]}}%
+\def\rtx@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
+ \begingroup
+  \def\@tempa{[#1][#2]{#3}}%
+  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
+   \leavevmode
+   \skip@\lastskip
+   \unskip
+   \super@cite@let
+  }{%
+   \super@cite@end
+  }%
+}%
+\def\super@cite@let{%
+ \futurelet\@let@token\super@cite@check
+}%
+\def\super@cite@end{%
+ \aftergroup\@citex\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa
+}%
+\def\super@cite@check{%
+ \@ifx{\@let@token\@sptoken}{%
+  \super@cite@end
+ }{%
+  \super@cite@swap
+ }%
+}%
+\long\def\super@cite@swap#1{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname rtx@automove#1\endcsname\@empty}{%
+  #1%
+  \super@cite@let
+ }{%
+  \super@cite@end
+  #1%
+ }%
+}%
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove.\endcsname\@empty
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove,\endcsname\@empty
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove:\endcsname\@empty
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove;\endcsname\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following must execute only after \classname{natbib} is loaded and has set
+% up its parameters (which it does at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time).
+% If superscript citations have been selected, and 
+% if the \classoption{citeautoscript} class option has been selected, 
+% we patch into \classname{natbib}'s mechanism to migrate punctuation around the 
+% citation, as in class \classname{cite} with the \classoption{superscript} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \citeautoscript@sw{%
+  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
+   \let\NAT@@citetp\rtx@@citetp
+  }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Resolve an incompatability between \classname{natbib} and \classname{listings}.
+% The latter package tests \cmd\chapter (which has now been \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ as a side effect \classname{natbib}'s use of \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifundefined).
+%
+% We couch our fix in such terms that will not be disruptive if \cmd\chapter\ is actually defined at this point.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\@ifx{\chapter\relax}{\let\chapter\@undefined}{}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{endnote}s and \cs{rtx@bibnote}s}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mini@note}
+% \begin{macro}{\save@note}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% QUERY: how do footnotes get thrown to the bibliography. \cmd\footinbib@sw\ appears to be irrelevant. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mini@note{\save@note\mini@notes}%Implicit #2
+\def\save@note#1#2{%
+  \stepcounter\@mpfn
+  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+  \@footnotemark
+  \expandafter\g@addto@macro
+  \expandafter#1%
+  \expandafter{%
+  \expandafter \@@footnotetext
+  \expandafter {\@thefnmark}{#2}%
+              }%
+}%
+\long\def\@@footnotetext#1{\def\@thefnmark{#1}\@footnotetext}%
+\let\mini@notes\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endnote}
+% A version of footnote that appears in the bibliography, or where \cmd\printendnotes\ appears.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@endnote{%
+% \begingroup
+%  \aftergroup\@footnotemark
+%  \aftergroup\@endnotetext
+%  \@ifnextchar[{%
+%   \@xendnote
+%  }{%
+%   \stepcounter{footnote}%
+%   \protected@xdef\@tempa{\thefootnote}%
+%   \expandafter\@xendnote\expandafter[\the\c@footnote]%
+% }%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xendnote}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\unused@xendnote[#1]{%
+%  \begingroup
+%   \c@footnote#1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% New for 4.1
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%   \unrestored@protected@xdef\@endnotelabel{Note\thefootnote}%
+%   \authoryear@sw{%
+%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\noexpand\ref{\@endnotelabel}}%
+%   }{%
+%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\@endnotelabel}%
+%   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Was:
+% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{endnote\thefootnote}%
+% End 4.1 changes
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%  \endgroup
+% \endgroup
+%}%
+%\def\@endnotemark{%
+% \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rev@citemark#1{%
+ \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
+}%
+\def\rev@endtext#1{%
+ \let\@endnotelabel\@thefnmark
+ \@endnotetext
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endnote@ext}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@app}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@ext}
+% The macro \cmd\endnote@ext\ is the file extension for the auxiliary file holding footnotes.
+% The \cmd\bibdata@app\ and \cmd\bibdata@ext\ macros are used to form the name of a
+% Bib\TeX\ database file holding footnotes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endnote@ext{.end}%
+\def\bibdata@app{Notes}%
+\def\bibdata@ext{bib}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% The procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ writes a Bib\TeX\ .bib file for the purpose
+% of insering a footnote into the (numbered, unsorted) bibliography.
+%
+% We need to define \cmd\pre@bibdata\ to be 
+% \cmd\jobname\cmd\endnote@ext, and we probably should define \cmd\endnote@ext\ to 
+% be something like ``Notes.bib''.
+%
+% In each case, the material to be written out requires robustification, provided by \cmd\endnote@relax.
+% The commands \cmd\label, \cmd\index, and \cmd\glossary,
+% which are robustified for \cmd\markright\ and \cmd\addcontentsline,
+% are likewise robustified here.
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext@note\ is the alias for \cmd\@endnotetext\ when the endnotes are to be
+% processed separately from the bibliography (generally true when citations are not sorted).
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\long\def\unused@endnotetext@note#1{%
+%  \@ifxundefined\@endnoteout{%
+%    \newwrite\@endnoteout
+%    \gdef\endnote@stream{\jobname\endnote@ext}%
+%    \immediate\openout\@endnoteout\endnote@stream\relax
+%  }{}%
+%  \begingroup
+%    \endnote@relax
+%    \immediate\write\@endnoteout{\string\@doendnote{\@endnotelabel}{#1}}%
+%  \endgroup
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \cmd\@doendnote\ is obsolete.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@doendnote#1#2{\bibitem{#1}#2}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
+% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ is the operative procedure\ when the endnotes are to be
+% collated in with the other references, typically true when numerical citations are being used.
+% The technique involves writing a .bib file (\cmd\@bibdataout) with each endnote typed as 
+% a \texttt{@FOOTNOTE} entry. 
+%
+% Timing note: doing \cmd\openout\ should be deferred until the beginning of the document,
+% as is done here. This allows one to make a format (\filename{.fmt}) file out of this class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@endnotetext#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \endnote@relax
+    \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+     @FOOTNOTE{%
+      \@endnotelabel,%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{key} field is recommended in cases where there is no author (see \filename{btxdoc}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      key="\@endnotelabel",%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{note} field is simply the content of the footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      note="#1"%
+     }%
+    }%
+  \endgroup
+}%
+\newwrite\@bibdataout
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endnote@relax}
+% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\endnote@relax\ robustifies commands that ought not to be expanded when
+% the endnote is written out.
+% Note the similarity between \cmd\endnote@relax\ and  \cmd\protected@write.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endnote@relax{%
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \let\cite \relax \let\ref  \relax \let\pageref \relax
+ \let\(    \relax \let\)    \relax \let\\       \relax
+ \let~\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\let\protect\noexpand
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \protect \@unexpandable@protect
+ \newlinechar`\^^M%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\newlinechar`\ %
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\begin\relax \let\end\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
+% The hook is available for use by a society to place its own @CONTROL record in the \cmd\@bibdataout\ stream.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{\@bibdataout@init}%
+\def\@bibdataout@init{%
+ \immediate\openout\@bibdataout\pre@bibdata.\bibdata@ext\relax
+}%
+\def\@bibdataout@rev{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+% The citation key (REVTEX41Control) is effectively a version number,
+% which the \filename{.bst} can use to interpret the bib entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   REVTEX41Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say if we want the \texttt{eprint} field disabled. Otherwise accept the default of the \filename{.bst}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \eprint@enable@sw{}{,eprint=""}%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{REVTEX41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printendnotes}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+% We have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX, so the \cmd\printendnotes\ command now does nothing.
+%
+% Moving footnotes to the bibliogrphy is now accomplished through 
+% the automatic generation of a job BiB\TeX\ database (called \cmd\pre@bibdata) containing the footnotes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\printendnotes{%
+ \class@warn{The \string\printendnotes\space command no longer serves any function. Please remove it from your document.}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbib}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbibliography}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% We define a function \cmd\@endnotesinbib,
+% and a variant \cmd\@endnotesinbibliography.
+% The former is invoked at the start of 
+% the end processing for \enve{thebibliography};
+% the latter is a synonym.
+%
+% The procedure typesets the footnotes that are to 
+% appear in the bibliography; the default is to
+% simply arrange for the footnote counter to be
+% reset at the start of the document.
+%
+% Note that this code make the assumption that 
+% the counter used in \env{thebibliography} is \cmd\c@NAT@ctr.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+%
+% Here is the sole place where \cmd\footinbib@sw\ has an effect, other code simple assigning its value.
+% If it is false, or \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true, then footnotes are handled by the default mechanism.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \authoryear@sw{}{%
+   \ltx@footnote@push
+   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
+   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The endnotes facility has been removed. 
+% Also, there is no need to queue up \cmd\auto@bib\ here, since it is always queued up elsewhere. 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+%  \let\printendnotes\relax
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@footnote@push{%
+ \let\ltx@footmark@latex\ltx@footmark
+ \let\ltx@foottext@latex\ltx@foottext
+ \let\thempfn@latex\thempfn
+ \def\ltx@footnote@pop{%
+  \let\ltx@footmark\ltx@footmark@latex
+  \let\ltx@foottext\ltx@foottext@latex
+  \let\thempfn\thempfn@latex
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The switchover to setting footnotes in the bibliography
+% changes the meaning of \cmd\footnote\ and
+% substitutes the synonym for \cmd\@endnotesinbib. 
+%
+% We arrange for the procedure \cmd\make@footnote@endnote\ to be executed
+% at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time (we mustn't do this earlier because
+% the meaning of \cmd\@footnotemark\ must not be changed before then, 
+% for the sake of \file{ltxutil.dtx}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \make@footnote@endnote
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib}
+% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\test@bbl@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitem@set}
+% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@innerbib}
+% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography@nogroup}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+% Under some circumstances, we must typeset the bibliography automatically.
+% If the document requires footnotes to be  set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{footinbib}), 
+% or that frontmatter footnotes be set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{bibnotes}), 
+% but contains no explicit \cmd\bibliography\ statement.
+%
+% Note that this facility is not able to work more than once per document.
+% If multiple bibliographys are required (e.g., per article), it will be the responsibility of the journal style
+% to restore \cmd\auto@bib\ to its original meaning so it can be re-invoked.
+% 
+% In procedure \cmd\auto@bib, we first test for the presence of frontmatter footnotes deferred to the bibliography.
+% If none, we further test for the presence of \cmd\bibitem\ commands in the job's \filename{.bbl} file.
+% If either condition is met, we ask for a bibliography. 
+% We know that the document itself lacks a \cmd\bibliography\ statement, 
+% so we know the argument of the \cmd\bibliography\ that we will issue.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\auto@bib{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@FMN@list{%
+  \footinbib@sw{%
+   \@ifnum{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname>\z@}{%
+    \true@sw
+   }{%
+    \test@bbl@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \test@bbl@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \true@sw
+ }%
+ {%
+  \bibliography{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\auto@bib@empty{%
+ \let\auto@bib\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Testing the \filename{.bbl} file involves defanging all expected commands
+% and processing that file inside a box register (that will be simply discarded).
+% We provide a new meaning for the \cmd\bibitem\ command: it queues a Boolean.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@bbl@sw{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+  \let\providecommand\providecommand@j@nk
+  \let\bibfield\@gobbletwo
+  \let\bibinfo\@gobbletwo
+  \let\translation\@gobble
+  \let\BibitemOpen\@empty
+  \let\bibitemStop\@empty
+  \let\bibitemNoStop\@empty
+  \let\EOS\@empty
+  \let\BibitemShut\@gobble
+  \let\bibAnnoteFile\@gobbletwo
+  \let\bibAnnote\@gobblethree
+  \let\textbf\@gobble
+  \let\emph\@gobble
+  \@booleanfalse\bibitem@sw
+  \let\bibitem\bibitem@set
+  \auto@bib@innerbib
+  \bibitem@sw{\aftergroup\true@sw}{\aftergroup\false@sw}%
+ \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\bibitem@set\ is an alias for \cmd\bibitem\ for the purpose of detecting a non-trivial bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bibitem@set[1][]{%
+ \bibitem@sw{}{%
+  \@booleantrue\bibitem@sw
+  \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\bibitem@sw
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ procedure reads in the \filename{.bbl} file (if it exists)
+% within a context where its \env{thebibliography} environment does nothing, not even establishing a group. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\auto@bib@innerbib{%
+ \begingroup
+  \let@environment{thebibliography}{thebibliography@nogroup}%
+  \bibliography{}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Environment \env{thebibliography@nogroup} is an alias of the \env{thebibliography} environment that cancels itself. 
+% It assumes that it is called within a \env{thebibliography} environment. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thebibliography@nogroup#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \def\@currenvir{thebibliography}%
+}%
+\def\endthebibliography@nogroup{\begingroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following should be part of \filename{ltxutil}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \@gobblethree #1#2#3{}%
+\def\providecommand@j@nk#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifnum{#2=\z@}{\def\j@nk}{%
+  \@ifnum{#2=\@ne}{\def\j@nk##1}{%
+   \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}{\def\j@nk##1##2}{%
+    \@ifnum{#2=\thr@@}{\def\j@nk##1##2##3}{%
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Initial setup}
+% 
+% The standard LaTeX document classes execute certain commands 
+% that are best deferred until \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+% Here, we effectively split \cmd\pagenumbering\ into two halves,
+% with a default definition for \cmd\thepage
+% and an initialization of \cmd\c@page\ at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+%
+% The meaning of \cmd\thepage\ can be overridden by society, journal, or
+% anywhere within the document pramble, and the counter itself will be 
+% preset at the beginning of the document. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thepage{\@arabic\c@page}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+% Note that this code is executed at \cmd\setup@hook\ time 
+% to allow for the possibility of overrides by packages like \classname{geometry}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \tabbingsep \labelsep
+ \leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \let\@listi\@listI
+ \@listi
+}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% We ensure that the ``environment'' component mark (implemented by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}) 
+% is initialized properly (via a hook, itself defined via \file{ltxutil.dtx}). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \global\c@page\@ne
+ \def\curr@envir{document}%
+ \mark@envir{\curr@envir}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\open@onecolumn}%
+% \begin{macro}{\open@column@two}%
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+% When setting the column grid, we have to override the procedure
+% for formatting lists. 
+% Because \cmd\twocolumngrid\ requires rebalancing columns at some points, 
+% typesetting must employ only the manipulation of 
+% \cmd\leftskip\ and \cmd\rightskip, and must avoid the use of
+% \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, and \cmd\parshape. 
+%
+% It is one of the stranger features of \TeX\ that these two separate
+% mechanisms exist. The latter three have the effect of adding things to the 
+% Main Vertical List that cannot be removed and later added back with all their
+% properties intact.
+%
+% In detail, \cmd\moveleft, say, adds a box to the MVL with
+% its reference point shifted horizontally by some amount relative to the 
+% reference point of the enclosing list. If that box is removed from the 
+% MVL (via a \cmd\lastbox\ operation in the output routine), and later
+% thrown back to the MVL, the shift of the box will have been ``forgotten'' by \TeX.
+% This is a bug, but not one ``acceptible to D. E. Knuth'', so it will never be fixed. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\open@onecolumn{%
+ \open@column@one\@ne
+ \set@colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+}%
+\def\open@twocolumn{%
+ \open@column@mlt\tw@
+ \set@colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \sloppy
+ \let\set@listindent\set@listindent@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{\cs{appendix}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\newif\ifappendixon
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that, within appendices, 
+% equations are numbered within sections (appendices).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\appendix{%
+ \par
+%\appendixontrue
+ \setcounter{section}\z@
+ \setcounter{subsection}\z@
+ \setcounter{subsubsection}\z@
+ \def\thesubsection{\arabic{subsection}}%
+ \def\thesubsubsection{\alph{subsubsection}}%
+ \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
+ \def\theequation@prefix{\thesection}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\appendix}%
+ \@ifstar{%
+  \def\thesection{\unskip}%
+  \def\theequation@prefix{A.}%
+ }{%
+  \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Changing the page grid}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+%
+% \subsection{Avoiding Grid Changes}%
+%
+% In preprint styles, ``wide text'' is a no-op, and the title page
+% processing involves no grid change.
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\title@column}%
+% \begin{macro}{\close@column}%
+% Provide default meanings for \cmd\title@column\ and \cmd\close@column,
+% in case they were never defined. 
+% Note that the society or journal substyle may define 
+% \cmd\title@column\ or \cmd\close@column: this code will not override. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\title@column#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote@init
+ #1%
+ \minipagefootnote@foot
+}%
+\def\close@column{%
+ \newpage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Galley Style: Margin Changes}%
+% A variant of preprint processing. Emulate journal appearance somewhat.
+%
+% \begin{environment}{widetext@galley}
+% DPC: We're in galley style so do a lob sided display environment.
+%
+% QUERY: How can we be sure that we are in galley style?
+% ANSWER: as noted elsewhere, require that both \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ be false.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\galley@outdent{\rightmargin-\columnwidth\advance\rightmargin-\columnsep}%
+\let\widetext@outdent\@empty
+\newenvironment{widetext@galley}{%
+  \list{}{%
+    \topsep        \z@skip
+    \listparindent \parindent
+    \itemindent    \parindent
+    \leftmargin    \z@
+    \parsep        \z@\@plus\p@
+    \widetext@outdent
+    \relax
+  }%
+  \item\relax
+}{
+  \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Grid Changing Via \classname{ltxgrid}}%
+%
+% In case \classoption{twocolumngrid} has been invoked,
+% switch column grid using the column grid-changing commands.
+% Supply stub definitions of those commands here.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title@column@grid}%
+% \begin{macro}{\close@column@grid}%
+% The title block always starts at the top of a new page.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+%
+% Note that, for the procedure \cmd\close@column@grid,
+% we balance columns by switching to the one-column page grid. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\title@column@grid#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote@init
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+%<ignore>  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \twocolumngrid
+ \minipagefootnote@foot
+}%
+\def\close@column@grid{%
+ \balancelastpage@sw{%
+  \onecolumngrid
+%<ignore>  \twocolumngrid
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{widetext@grid}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+% We slip into the one-column page grid
+% within the scope of this environment.
+%
+% Note that we set adornments above and below the \env{widettext}.
+% These are set as leaders, so they will disappear at a page break.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{widetext@grid}{%
+  \par\ignorespaces
+  \setbox\widetext@top\vbox{%
+%<ignore>  \vskip15\p@
+   \hb@xt@\hsize{%
+    \leaders\hrule\hfil
+    \vrule\@height6\p@
+   }%
+%<ignore>  \vskip6\p@
+  }%
+  \setbox\widetext@bot\hb@xt@\hsize{%
+    \vrule\@depth6\p@
+    \leaders\hrule\hfil
+  }%
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \vskip10\p@
+  \dimen@\ht\widetext@top\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@top
+  \cleaders\box\widetext@top\vskip\dimen@
+%<ignore> \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
+  \vskip6\p@
+  \prep@math@patch
+}{%
+  \par
+  \vskip6\p@
+  \setbox\widetext@bot\vbox{%
+   \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\widetext@bot}%
+%<ignore>  \vskip14\p@
+  }%
+  \dimen@\ht\widetext@bot\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@bot
+  \cleaders\box\widetext@bot\vskip\dimen@
+  \vskip8.5\p@
+  \twocolumngrid\global\@ignoretrue
+  \@endpetrue
+}%
+\newbox\widetext@top
+\newbox\widetext@bot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% Decide, finally, how the page grid is to be manipulated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@page@grid{%
+ \twocolumn@sw{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following two assignments determine what procedures are to be executed when 
+% the footnote set width is calculated, and how footnotes are to be composed at the bottom of the page. 
+% A society or journal wishing to do otherwise will override this code. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
+  \let\compose@footnotes\compose@footnotes@two
+  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@grid}%
+  \let\title@column\title@column@grid
+  \let\close@column\close@column@grid
+ }{%
+  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@galley}%
+  \preprintsty@sw{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Change the page grid not at all.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we are galley style, change the page margin only.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \galley@sw{%
+    \let\widetext@outdent\galley@outdent
+   }{}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{\set@page@grid}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Old font commands}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{English-Language Texts}
+% As this class is just for English language journals, we
+% could hardwire these texts,
+% but to make it easier to use this as a
+% basis for the code for similar journal styles, separate out all the
+% fixed text strings into babel-style macros of the form 
+% |\|\ldots|name|
+%
+% Note: for babel compatability, use version 1999/05/05 v3.6x or later.
+%
+% Some of these might need changing in the society-specific code.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in 
+% this document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+  \space\number\day, \number\year}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\notesname}
+% Text entity \cmd\notesname\ had been used in \cmd\printendnotes.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+% However, we have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX.
+% 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\notesname{Notes}
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partname}
+% Text entity \cmd\partname\ is used in \cmd\@part.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partname{Part}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tocname}
+% Text entity \cmd\tocname\ is used in \cmd\tableofcontents,
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocname{Contents}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lofname}
+% Text entity \cmd\lofname\ is used in \cmd\listoffigures,
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lofname{List of Figures}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lotname}
+% Text entity \cmd\lotname\ is used in \cmd\listoftables,
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lotname{List of Tables}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+% Text entity \cmd\refname\ is used in \env{thebibliography}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
+% Text entity \cmd\indexname\ is used in \env{theindex},
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+% Text entity \cmd\figurename\ is used in \env{figure},
+% \cmd\figuresname\ in \cmd\printfigures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\figurename{FIG.}
+\def\figuresname{Figures}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+% Text entity \cmd\tablename\ is used in \env{table},
+% \cmd\tablesname\ in \cmd\printtables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tablename{TABLE}
+\def\tablesname{Tables}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
+% Text entity \cmd\abstractname\ is used in \env{abstract}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\abstractname{Abstract}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixesname}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
+% Text entity \cmd\appendixesname\ is used in TOC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\appendixesname{Appendixes}%
+\def\appendixname{Appendix}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgmentsname}
+% Text entity \cmd\acknowledgmentsname\ is used in \env{acknowledgments}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\acknowledgmentsname{Acknowledgments}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\journalname}
+% This should be set by the society journal options, eg `pra'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\journalname{??}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\copyrightname}
+% Default layout does not assign copyright, but a journal that wants
+% to might use this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\copyrightname{??}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\andname}
+% The text string ``and'' for use in author lists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\andname{and}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keys@name}
+% The text string prepended to PACS numbers, resp. to keywords.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pacs@name{PACS numbers: }%
+\def\@keys@name{Keywords: }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ppname}
+% The text string ``pp'' for use in page ranges.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ppname{pp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numbername}
+% The text string ``number'' for use in article reference.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numbername{number}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\volumename}
+% The text string ``volume'' for use in article reference.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\volumename{volume}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Dated@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Received@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Revised@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Accepted@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Published@name}
+% These texts are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Dated@name{Dated: }%
+\def\Received@name{Received }%
+\def\Revised@name{Revised }%
+\def\Accepted@name{Accepted }%
+\def\Published@name{Published }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Legacy Commands}
+% We define some commands left over from version 3.1, or give default meanings.
+% Some definitions can be overridden
+% in the document preamble or in included packages.
+%
+% Note on the namespace: command names like \cmd\REV@\emph{name} are used here,
+% because it is not clear that any of this code is generally useful.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\address{\replace@command\address\affiliation}%
+\def\altaddress{\replace@command\altaddress\altaffiliation}%
+\newenvironment{references}{%
+ \class@warn@end{The references environment is not supported; use thebibliography instead.}
+ \gdef\references{\thebibliography{}}\references
+}{%
+ \endthebibliography
+}%
+\def\draft{%
+ \class@warn@end{Command \string\draft\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option draft instead.}%
+ \@booleantrue\draft@sw
+}%
+\def\tighten{%
+ \class@warn@end{Command \string\tighten\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option tightenlines instead.}%
+ \@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw
+}%
+\def\tableline{%
+ \noalign{%
+  \class@warn@end{Command \string\tableline\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string\colrule\space instead.}%
+  \global\let\tableline\colrule
+ }%
+ \tableline
+}%
+\def\case{\replace@command\case\frac}%
+\def\slantfrac{\replace@command\slantfrac\frac}%
+\def\tablenote{\replace@command\tablenote\footnote}%
+\def\tablenotemark{\replace@command\tablenotemark\footnotemark}%
+\def\tablenotetext{\replace@command\tablenotetext\footnotetext}%
+% Lose the following definition:
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@text[1]{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+  \mathchoice
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }#1}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }#1}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\let\f@size\sf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\let\f@size\ssf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
+  \glb@settings
+ \else
+  \mbox{#1}%
+ \fi
+}%
+% Lose the following definition:
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bbox[1]{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+  \mathchoice
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+  \glb@settings
+ \else
+  \mbox{#1}%
+ \fi
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bm[1]{%
+ \class@warn@end{To use \string\bm, please load the bm package!}%
+ \global\let\bm\relax
+}%
+\def\FL{\obsolete@command\FL}%
+\def\FR{\obsolete@command\FR}%
+\def\narrowtext{\obsolete@command\narrowtext}%
+\def\mediumtext{\obsolete@command\mediumtext}%
+\newenvironment{quasitable}{%
+ \let@environment{tabular}{longtable}%
+}{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\text}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
+% \begin{macro}{\url}
+% 
+% If not otherwise defined, give default meanings to certain commands.
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+%FIXME: \cmd\bibinfo?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\text\REV@text
+\let\bm\REV@bm
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \providecommand\bibinfo[2]{#2}%
+ \providecommand\eprint[2][]{#2}%
+%\providecommand\url[1]{#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbox}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbox#1{%
+ \class@warn@end{\string\bbox\space is obsolete,^^Jload the bm package and use \string\bm\space instead.}%
+ \global\let\bbox\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathletters}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{mathletters}{%
+ \class@warn@end{Environment {mathletters} is obsolete;^^Jload the amsmath package and use {subequations}!}%
+ \global\let\mathletters\@empty
+}{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnum}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqnum#1{%
+ \class@warn@end{\string\eqnum\space is obsolete, load the amsmath package and use \string\tag!}%
+ \global\let\eqnum\@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We read in the symbol definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage{revsymb4-1}%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{\revsymb@inithook}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Patches for lineno.sty}
+%
+% The \classname{lineno} package detects the case where the package has been loaded
+% and the document invokes \cmd\linelabel, but the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has not been
+% issued: it treats this case as an error. 
+%
+% It is wrong for validity of document syntax to be dependent upon package semantics: 
+% we make the condition a warning rather than an error.  
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@LN@LLerror@org{%
+ \PackageError{lineno}{%
+  \string\linelabel\space without \string\linenumbers
+ }{% 
+  Just see documentation. (New feature v4.11)%
+ }%
+ \@gobble
+}%
+\def\@LN@LLerror@ltx{%
+ \PackageWarning{lineno}{%
+  To make the \string\linelabel\space command work, you must issue the \string\linenumbers\ command 
+ }%
+ \@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% If appropriate, enable line numbering within the abstract. 
+%
+% This mechanism applies generally:
+% Create the box in a context in which the meaning of \cmd\par\ has been patched by \classname{lineno},
+% then \cmd\unvbox\ the box in a context where \cmd\set@linepenalties\ has been executed, and 
+% follow up with \cmd\@linenumberpar, which forces a visit to the output routine just there.
+% Note that here, we have to de-fang \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk, which would otherwise causes the appearance
+% of a box with depth -1000 points. Go figure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \@ifx{\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@org}{%
+  \class@info{Overriding \string\@LN@LLerror}%
+  \let\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@ltx
+ }{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
+  \@ifxundefined{\set@linepenalties}{}{%
+   \def\prep@absbox{\set@linepenalties}%
+   \def\post@absbox{\let\@LN@parpgbrk\@empty\@linenumberpar}%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% One may well ask: how to obtain line numbering within an alignment in a float?
+% This objective, along with line numbering within footnotes, would require extraordinary measures.
+% The float would have to be thrown onto the MVL in order to acquire its line numbers, but
+% that fragment of MVL would then have to be protected from being shipped out.
+% The question of how to coordinate those lines' numbers with those of lines in the MVL would 
+% also require dealing with.
+%
+% \section{Endgame for the Document Class}
+%
+% We provide for a ``job macro package'' that can override
+% definitions and assignments made by the class or any other packages it loads.
+%
+% \subsection{Job Macro Package}
+% You can create a ``job macro package'' for your document
+% that will be read in automatically every time
+% your document is processed.
+% Thus, if your job is a file called \file{myarticle.tex},
+% then the file \file{myarticle.rty} will be read in
+% just the same as if you had placed a 
+% \cmd\usepackage|{myarticle.rty}| statement
+% immediately following your \cmd\documentclass\ statement.
+%
+% Within your \file{.rty} file,
+% you can define and use control sequence names that use the |@| character
+% and you can override any of the definitions or assignments made 
+% by the \revtex\ document class or the selected journal substyle.
+% That is, you have the power to really mess things up badly.
+%
+% If you choose to have a job macro package, you are well 
+% advised to read the \LaTeX\ guide to document classes,
+% \file{clsguide.tex} or read up on the subject 
+% in a book like the \LaTeX\ Companion.
+%
+% The file \file{template.rty} contains a template for
+% creating your own job macro package.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.rty}{}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Endgame Processing for the Document Class}
+%
+% The remaining steps in processing the document class involve
+% determining the needed society, journal, and pointsize from 
+% the document's class options and inputting the needed files or
+% executing the indicated procedures. 
+%
+% Note that the society file is expected to declare options that will
+% allow us to determine the journal involved, and the society and journal
+% themselves determine the which pointsize options are declared, along with
+% their meanings. 
+% 
+% Note also that required packages are read in only after the document options
+% have been processed, because the latter can affect the former. 
+% 
+% Finally, the setup code is executed: this is code that depends on the 
+% meanings of the switches we define and on the code within the packages we load. 
+%
+% Note that there are other hooks in use: \cmd\document@inithook, which is 
+% executed right at the beginning of the document, and \cmd\class@documenthook, 
+% which serves as a vehicle for any \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ code we might wish to
+% execute. 
+%
+%FIXME: use \cmd\class@documenthook\ only for things that bear on the MVL; 
+% use \cmd\document@inithook\ for all patches to procedures defined within the preamble. 
+%
+% Remember that \classname{natbib} changes its state at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
+% so we have to install our own code at a later point in the processing.
+%
+% We determine the proper \cmd\@society\ by examining the document's class options. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@parse@class@options@society
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then, we input the society's substyle
+% (which may in turn lead to loading a journal substyle or a pointsize substyle). 
+% The substyle should not assume the value of any class option: 
+% instead, it should install code into \cmd\setup@hook. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@process@society{aps}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now that the society has defined the class options relating to journals,
+% and has defined \cmd\@journal@default, we can process the journal substyle. 
+% We parse the options for one that sets \cmd\@journal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@parse@class@options@\@journal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And we process the journal. 
+% Note that \emph{it is an error} for a society file to fail to define
+% \cmd\@journal@default.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\@process@journal\expandafter{\@journal@default}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now that the society and journal have finished defining any options relating to 
+% point size, we process the class options for any that set \cmd\@pointsize.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@parse@class@options@\@pointsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And we process the pointsize.
+% Note that it is an error for the society and journal to leave \cmd\@pointsize@default\ 
+% undefined at this point, however, the journal may have overriden the assignment of the society. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\@process@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize@default}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next, we process the class options for once and all. 
+% Doing so sets values for some of the Booleans that were introduced along with
+% the \cmd\DeclareOption\ statements above. 
+%
+%CHANGE: We process the options in the order declared in the document; this 
+% gives the document greater control. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@options
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Now that the class options have been processed, we can load all the 
+% packages that we know need loading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\rtx@require@packages
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% At this point, the society substyle, the journal substyle, and the 
+% pointsize have all been processed, along with the document class options.
+% Some of these have left things for later; we do these now.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
+%
+% This portion of the code for this class file
+% \emph{must} appear at the very end:
+% The procedure 
+% \cmd\setup@hook\
+% should be executed at the very end of the class file. 
+% Any code that relies on the value of any of the \texttt{@sw} switches
+% or will patch the code of one of the required packages
+% should be executed here. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setup@hook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Warn if past maturation date. This code to be enabled only in beta software.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+% \changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ignore>
+ \def\rtx@fin@year{2010}%
+ \def\rtx@fin@month{01}%
+ \def\rtx@fin@day{01}%
+ \def\rtx@fin@warn{%
+  \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@year>\the\year\relax}{\true@sw}{%
+   \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@month>\the\month\relax}{\true@sw}{%
+    \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@day>\the\day\relax}{\true@sw}{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+  {%
+   \class@info{Beta software expires \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; updates available at http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/}%
+  }{%
+   \class@warn{Outdated software expired \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; please retrieve an update at http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/}%
+  }%
+ }%
+%</ignore>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In shipping (non-beta) software, the following line should be commented out.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\rtx@fin@warn}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% End of the class file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Symbols: the \texttt{revsymb} module}
+% We immediately define a utility command: this module's warning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*revsymb>
+\def\REVSYMB@warn#1{\PackageWarningNoLine{revsymb}{#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lambdabar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\lambdabar{%
+  \bgroup
+    \def\@tempa{%
+      \hbox{%
+        \raise.73\ht\z@
+        \hb@xt@\z@{%
+          \kern.25\wd\z@
+          \vrule \@width.5\wd\z@\@height.1\p@\@depth.1\p@
+          \hss
+        }%
+        \box\z@
+      }%
+    }%
+    \mathchoice
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\displaystyle     \lambda$}\@tempa}%
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\textstyle        \lambda$}\@tempa}%
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptstyle      \lambda$}\@tempa}%
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\lambda$}\@tempa}%
+  \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openone}
+% DPC: Really should use a font that includes this glyph.
+% Unfortunately not in AMS ones, but is in bbold, cmbb.
+% (I think, must check),
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+% FIXME: check for bbold.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\openone{\leavevmode\hbox{\small1\normalsize\kern-.33em1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\corresponds}
+% \begin{macro}{\overdots}
+% \begin{macro}{\overcirc}
+% J\"org Knappen suggests the replacements:
+% replace \cmd\corresponds\ with \cmd\triangleq, source \classname{amssymb};
+% replace \cmd\overcirc\ with \cmd\mathring, source \classname{latex2e};
+% replace \cmd\overdots\ with \cmd\dddot, source \classname{amsmath}.
+%
+% Any use of any of these commands will result in a warning message at the end 
+% of the log file. If the corresponding package is not loaded, a
+% definition will quietly be provided.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\corresponds{\replace@command\corresponds\triangleq}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\overcirc{\replace@command\overcirc\mathring}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\overdots{\replace@command\overdots\dddot}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@triangleq{%
+ {\lower.2ex\hbox{=}}{\kern-.75em^\triangle}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@dddot[1]{%
+ \@ontopof{#1}{\cdots}{1.0}\mathord{\box2}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\succsim}
+% \begin{macro}{\precsim}
+% \begin{macro}{\lesssim}
+% \begin{macro}{\gtrsim}
+% \begin{macro}{\alt}
+% \begin{macro}{\agt}
+% These version 3.1 commands are always supplied, 
+% but the definitions in \classname{amssymb} are preferred.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\altsuccsim{\succ\kern-.9em_\sim\kern.3em}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\altprecsim{\prec\kern-1em_\sim\kern.3em}%
+\let\REV@succsim\altsuccsim
+\let\REV@precsim\altprecsim
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@lesssim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{<}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@gtrsim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{>}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\alt{\lesssim}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\agt{\gtrsim}
+\def\vereq#1#2{%
+ \lower3\p@\vbox{%
+  \baselineskip1.5\p@
+  \lineskip1.5\p@
+  \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfill##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr\sim\crcr}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tensor}
+% \begin{macro}{\overstar}
+% \begin{macro}{\loarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\roarrow}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\tensor[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftrightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\overstar[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\ast}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\loarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\roarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\rightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ontopof}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ontopof#1#2#3{%
+ {%
+  \mathchoice
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\displaystyle     \scriptstyle      }%
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\textstyle        \scriptstyle      }%
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptstyle      \scriptscriptstyle}%
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptscriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@ontopof}
+% Same as \revtex3, more or less.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@ontopof#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{$#4#1$}%
+  \setbox\f@ur\hbox{$#5#2$}%
+  \setbox\tw@\null\ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@
+  \@ifdim{\wd\z@>\wd\f@ur}{%
+    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@\wd\z@{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
+    \mathord{\rlap{\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}\box\z@}%
+  }{%
+    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@.9\wd\f@ur{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
+    \setbox\z@\hb@xt@\wd\f@ur{\hss$#4\relax#1$\hss}%
+    \mathord{\rlap{\copy\z@}\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frak}
+% Deal with legacy \cmd\frak:
+% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
+% Also, says to use \cmd\mathfrak\ instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\frak{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\frak\space unsupported:^^J%
+  please use \string\mathfrak\space instead.%
+ }%
+ \global\let\frak\mathfrak
+ \frak
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\mathfrak\space undefined:^^J%
+  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
+ }%
+ \global\let\mathfrak\@firstofone
+ \mathfrak
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Bbb}
+% Deal with legacy \cmd\Bbb:
+% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
+% Also, says to use \cmd\mathbb\ instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Bbb{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\Bbb\space unsupported:^^J%
+  please use \string\mathbb\space instead.%
+ }%
+ \global\let\Bbb\mathbb
+ \Bbb
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\mathbb\space undefined:^^J%
+  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
+ }%
+ \global\let\mathbb\@firstofone
+ \mathbb
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Bigglb}
+% Deal with legacy bold delimiters. 
+% Each of the following takes an implicit argument consisting of
+% the delimiter to be made big and bold.
+% FIXME: \cmd\DeclareBoldMathCommand\ is not the right tool!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Bigglb{\REV@boldopen \Bigg}%
+\def\Biglb {\REV@boldopen \Big }%
+\def\bigglb{\REV@boldopen \bigg}%
+\def\biglb {\REV@boldopen \big }%
+\def\Biggrb{\REV@boldclose\Bigg}%
+\def\Bigrb {\REV@boldclose\Big }%
+\def\biggrb{\REV@boldclose\bigg}%
+\def\bigrb {\REV@boldclose\big }%
+\def\REV@pmb#1{%
+ \hbox{%
+  \setbox\z@=\hbox{#1}%
+  \kern-.02em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
+  \kern .04em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
+  \kern-.02em
+  \raise.04em\copy\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\def\REV@boldopen #1#2{\mathopen {\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
+\def\REV@boldclose#1#2{\mathclose{\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\revsymb@inithook}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% Package dependencies are taken care of at \cmd\setup@hook\ time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\revsymb@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\dddot{\let\dddot\REV@dddot}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\triangleq{\let\triangleq\REV@triangleq}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\succsim{\let\succsim\altsuccsim}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\precsim{\let\precsim\altprecsim}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\lesssim{\let\lesssim\REV@lesssim}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\gtrsim {\let\gtrsim \REV@gtrsim }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\mathfrak{\let\mathfrak\REV@mathfrak}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\mathbb{\let\mathbb\REV@mathbb}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</revsymb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{10pt} class option: the \texttt{10pt} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+% The file \file{aps10pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 10.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 10pt selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{11.5}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+   \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+   \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+   \let\@listi\@listI
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\small{%
+  \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10.5}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotesize{%
+  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scriptsize{%
+ \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt
+}%
+\def\tiny{%
+ \@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt
+}%
+\def\large{%
+ \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14pt}%
+}%
+\def\Large{%
+ \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18pt}%
+}%
+\def\LARGE{%
+ \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22pt}%
+}%
+\def\huge{%
+ \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
+}%
+\def\Huge{%
+ \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The values of these margin parameters are dependent upon 
+% \cmd\twoside@sw; any society or journal that 
+% has its own preferences should override these assignments
+% by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\setup@hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \twoside@sw{%
+%   \oddsidemargin  -.1in
+%   \evensidemargin -.4in
+    \oddsidemargin  -20pt
+    \evensidemargin -20pt
+    \marginparwidth 107pt
+ }{%
+    \oddsidemargin  -.25in
+    \evensidemargin -.25in
+    \marginparwidth 30pt
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparsep 6pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topmargin -61pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\headheight 25pt
+\headsep 16pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topskip 10pt
+\splittopskip\topskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footskip 30pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \textheight = 56pc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\textwidth42.5pc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\columnsep 1.5pc
+\columnseprule 0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footnotesep 1pt
+\skip\footins 39pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
+\def\footnoterule{%
+ \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\floatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+\textfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\intextsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dblfloatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparpush 5pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
+\parindent 10pt
+\emergencystretch8\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargini 25pt
+\leftmarginii 22pt
+\leftmarginiii 18.7pt
+\leftmarginiv 17pt
+\leftmarginv 10pt
+\leftmarginvi 10pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listI{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+  \topsep 8\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@
+  \itemsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\labelsep 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \parsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep \z@
+  \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \topsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiv{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listv{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listvi{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</10pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{11pt} class option: the \texttt{11pt} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+% The file \file{11pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 11.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*11pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 11pt selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+    \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
+    \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \let\@listi\@listI
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\small{%
+   \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+   }%
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotesize{%
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+   }%
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scriptsize{%
+  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}%
+}%
+\def\tiny{%
+  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt
+}%
+\def\large{%
+  \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}%
+}%
+\def\Large{%
+  \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}%
+}%
+\def\LARGE{%
+  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}%
+}%
+\def\huge{%
+    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
+}%
+\def\Huge{%
+  \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</11pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{12pt} class option: the \texttt{12pt} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+% The file \file{12pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 12.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 12pt selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+  \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip  6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+  \let\@listi\@listI
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\small{%
+  \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{14.5pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
+    \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Same baselineskip as \cmd\small\ ?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\footnotesize{%
+  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt{14.5pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+    \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scriptsize{%
+  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
+}%
+\def\tiny{%
+  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7pt}%
+}%
+\def\large{%
+  \@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18pt}%
+}%
+\def\Large{%
+  \@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22pt}%
+}%
+\def\LARGE{%
+  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25pt}%
+}%
+\def\huge{%
+    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
+}%
+\let\Huge=\huge
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Page parameters}%
+% This code is common to both \classoption{11pt} and \classoption{12pt}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*11pt|12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \twoside@sw{%
+  \oddsidemargin   0pt
+  \evensidemargin  0pt
+  \marginparwidth 60pt
+ }{%
+  \oddsidemargin 0pt
+  \evensidemargin 0pt
+  \marginparwidth 44pt
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparsep 10pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topmargin -37pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\headheight 12pt
+\headsep 25pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topskip 10pt
+\splittopskip\topskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footskip 30pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\textheight=665.5\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \tightenlines@sw{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ }{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\textwidth 468pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\columnsep 10pt
+\columnseprule 0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footnotesep 1pt
+\skip\footins 25.25pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
+\def\footnoterule{%
+ \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\f@ur
+ \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\floatsep        14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\textfloatsep    20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\intextsep       14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dblfloatsep     14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@fpsep 10pt plus 2fil
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfpsep 10pt plus 2fil%
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparpush 7pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
+\parindent 15pt
+\emergencystretch8\p@
+\partopsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargini   30pt
+\leftmarginii  26pt
+\leftmarginiii 22pt
+\leftmarginiv  20pt
+\leftmarginv   12pt
+\leftmarginvi  12pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+  \topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@
+  \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\labelsep 6pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \parsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \topsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</11pt|12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{aps} class extension: the \texttt{aps} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+% The file \file{aps.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}.
+%
+% Here, code specific to APS journals is separated out from the \revtex\ document class.
+% (Other societies can customize \revtex\ by supplying their own \file{.rtx} file.)
+%
+% This class extension file is a model for a class extension you might write yourself.
+%
+% First, incorporate a \cmd\ProvidesFile\ command with an optional argument giving
+% the version information, e.g.,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ProvidesFile{foo}[2001/09/11 v1.1 Docinfo]%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Within the society substyle, there are two things we must do as well:
+% define the default journal, 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@journal@default{pra}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% And do likewise for the point size:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@pointsize@default{10}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% We first define some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
+% then some APS-specific initialisations,
+% then code for particular APS journals.
+% In the latter case, the choice is 
+% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*aps>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX society APS selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here are the class options relating to the APS:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{pra}{\change@journal{pra}}%
+\DeclareOption{prb}{\change@journal{prb}}%
+\DeclareOption{prc}{\change@journal{prc}}%
+\DeclareOption{prd}{\change@journal{prd}}%
+\DeclareOption{pre}{\change@journal{pre}}%
+\DeclareOption{prl}{\change@journal{prl}}%
+\DeclareOption{prstab}{\change@journal{prstab}}%
+\DeclareOption{prstper}{\change@journal{prstper}}%
+\DeclareOption{rmp}{\change@journal{rmp}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Abbreviations}%
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
+% The following macros constitute typing shortcuts for
+% certain journal names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ao{Appl.\  Opt.}%
+\def\ap{Appl.\  Phys.}%
+\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}%
+\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}%
+\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}%
+\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}%
+\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}%
+\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}%
+\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}%
+\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}%
+\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}%
+\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}%
+\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}%
+\def\nat{Nature (London)}%
+\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}%
+\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}%
+\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}%
+\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}%
+\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}%
+\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}%
+\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}%
+\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}%
+\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}%
+\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\vr{Vision Res.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{APS Setup}%
+% Here we define the default procedures for APS journals.
+% Individual APS journals may override these definitions.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title block}%
+%
+% The specifics of the title block.
+% Apply to all APS journals; individual journals may override these settings.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% The \LaTeX\ kernel definition of \cmd\@fnsymbol\ is overridden.
+% The definition in \filename{fixltx2e.sty} serves as a guide to the new way to symbol,
+% working in both text- and math modes. 
+%
+% \filename{fixltx2e.sty} duplicates some features of \filename{ltxgrid} and \filename{ltxutil},
+% however, so it may be incompatible with \revtex. 
+% In case it is not loaded, we must provide a meaning for \cmd\TextOrMath,
+% which that package makes robust. 
+% I believe that it is \cmd\@fnsymbol\ itself that ought to be robustified.
+% e\TeX\ further complicates matters; we do not especially accomodate it. 
+%
+% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+%
+% Not! \cmd\TextOrMath\ must be made robust in any case (Bug 530). I return things to follow
+% core \LaTeXe\ (\filename{latex.ltx}). 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{%
+ \ensuremath{%
+  \ifcase#1\or 
+   *\or
+   \dagger\or
+   \ddagger\or
+   \mathsection\or
+   \mathparagraph\or
+%  \|\or
+   **\or
+   \dagger\dagger\or
+   \ddagger\ddagger\else
+   \mathsection\mathsection\or
+   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
+   ***\or
+   \dagger\dagger\dagger\or
+   \ddagger\ddagger\ddagger\else
+   \mathsection\mathsection\mathsection\or
+   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
+%
+   \@ctrerr 
+  \fi
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\TextOrMath{%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\TextOrMath{\@ifmmode{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\let\thefootnote@latex\thefootnote
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We assign the default titlepage style for APS; a journal or document instance 
+% may override by invoking one of the other \cmd\clo@... procedures defined in \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clo@groupedaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+  \c@page\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A comment: ``article.cls sets this to one not zero?''
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}{%
+  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% APS Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
+% However, if the user has specified the \classoption{preprint} class option,
+% then the abstract will have a head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \centering\large
+   \abstractname
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractwidth}
+% All APS journals set the abstract to the same width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{400\p@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% All APS journals set the abstract body the same way.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 123) add parskip to the abstract.}
+% \changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+ \small
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \adjust@abstractwidth
+}%
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \dimen@\textwidth\advance\dimen@-\frontmatter@abstractwidth
+ \divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \galley@sw{%
+  \advance\rightskip\tw@\dimen@
+ }{%
+  \advance\leftskip\dimen@
+  \advance\rightskip\dimen@
+ }%
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All APS journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
+% 
+% In effect, we establish a society default value for \cmd\preprintsty@sw,
+% and for \cmd\titlepage@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We choose the page style for all APS journals. 
+% The journal may override by inserting its own code in \cmd\setup@hook. 
+% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
+% command anywhere in the preamble; it will override the assignments here. 
+%
+% Here is the big switch for APS preprints. Note that \cmd\preprintsty@sw
+% is also consulted in various procedures, but we assume its value does 
+% not change after \cmd\setup@hook\ time. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{%
+   \ps@preprint
+   \def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}%
+   \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}%
+   \let\section\section@preprintsty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
+   \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
+  }{%
+   \ps@article
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% All APS journals set the author list the same.
+% The leading is 11.5 points, and
+% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
+% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
+% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \centering
+ \advance\baselineskip\p@
+ \parskip11.5\p@\relax
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
+% \addvspace{0\p@}%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% APS Journals have 24 points b-b above an affiliation group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
+% \addvspace{11\p@}%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% APS Journals have no extra space between author group down to common affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \centering
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+ \addvspace{3.5\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \addvspace{12\p@}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% All APS journals set the affiliation the same.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
+ \small\it
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above}
+% PRL: 1.5 points extra: 13 points base-to-base above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+ }{%
+  \parskip1.5\p@\relax
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% All APS journals set the title page using the same font and size.
+% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
+% we assert none here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% All APS journals set the article title the same.
+%
+% Note: Spacing from title to author is 23 points base-to-base.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{\large\bfseries\centering\parskip\z@skip}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
+% All APS journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
+ \addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% All APS journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+%
+% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \small
+  \centering
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \everypar{\hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase}%
+  \def\par{\@ifvmode{}{\unskip)\egroup\@@par}}%
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+   \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parindent\z@
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+   \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parindent\z@
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
+% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
+% stacked flush right at the right margin.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@titlepage{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+   \hfill
+   \preprint@sw{%
+    \expandafter\produce@preprints\expandafter{\@preprint}%
+   }{}%
+  }%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+   \hfil
+   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
+   \quad\checkindate
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce@preprints#1{%
+ \vtop to \z@{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \small
+  \let\preprint\preprint@count
+  \count@\z@
+  #1%
+  \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+   \hbox{%
+    \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
+    #1%
+    \setbox\z@\lastbox
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \let\preprint\preprint@cr
+   \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+   \par
+   \vss
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% All APS journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
+% Also, no hanging section number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument. 
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
+% purpose.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+      \normalfont\small\bfseries
+      \centering
+    }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\bfseries
+     \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\itshape
+     \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty}
+% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
+% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+      \normalfont\small\bfseries
+%     \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\bfseries
+%    \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\itshape
+%    \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% By default, APS journals set titlepage notes as footnotes.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
+% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, 
+% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}%
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}%
+\def\@dotsep{2}%
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}%
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
+ \print@toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@munge{%
+  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
+  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@restore{%
+  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following definition of \cmd\l@part\ is a variant on
+% the definition of \cmd\l@@sections\ in \file{ltxutil.dtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum\@tempboxa{#2}%
+% \@tempdima 3em %
+  \parindent \z@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+  \large \bf %
+  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+  \par
+  \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%
+% We set the TOC to the standard of RMP. 
+% If APS has its own specification, we will code it, and RMP must override.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ %\bf
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the auto TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
+% All APS journal styles have flush bottoms.
+%\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float}
+% All APS publications have the same table specification:
+% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all APS journals.
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefntext}
+% We ensure that frontmatter footnotes format similarly to body footnotes. 
+% But we provide our own hypertext anchor, otherwise not provided.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper@anchorend}%
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+%
+% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
+% this task requires three components:
+% the \BibTeX\ \file{apsrev.bst} and \file{apsrmp.bst} style files, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
+% (if the document does not do so).
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+%  To generate \file{apsrev.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
+%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
+%  accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
+%
+% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
+% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
+% \QandA{ORDERING OF REFERENCES}{c}{seq-no}Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART}{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{i}{nm-init,ed-au}Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR}{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES}{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
+% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT}{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS}{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
+% \QandA{DATE FORMAT}{*}{yr-par}Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
+% \QandA{DATE EMPTY}{-}{date-nil-x}If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{-}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
+% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
+% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{}{article-series}article can has series
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
+% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT INSTITUTION}{}{techreport-institution-par}format tech report institution like book publisher
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{x}{vnum-x}Journal vol, without number as 34
+% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
+% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
+% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
+% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{d}{pub-date}Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{}{pre-pub}Publisher before volume, chapter, pages 
+% \QandA{}{}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
+% \QandA{}{p}{pre-pub,pre-edn}Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
+% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS)}{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
+% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'}{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
+% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
+% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
+% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
+% \QandA{URL ADDRESS}{*}{url,url-prefix-x}URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{apsrev.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-02-12 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+%  head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
+%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
+%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
+%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)
+%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
+%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
+%  blkyear,%: Missing date left blank 
+%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
+%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
+%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
+%  article-series,%: article can has series
+%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
+%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+%  vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
+%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
+%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+%  pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+%  pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
+%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
+%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
+%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
+%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
+%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+%  }}
+%\generate{\file{apsrev4-1.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Comparing apsrev.bst and apsrmp.bst}\label{sec:CompRevRmp}
+% These two bibliographic styles differ as follows:
+% \file{apsrev.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrmp.dbj} does not:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \CandE{seq-no}%
+%    Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% \CandE{nm-init,ed-au}%
+%    Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \CandE{blkyear}%
+%    Missing date left blank 
+% \CandE{date-nil-x}%
+%    If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+% \CandE{inproceedings-chapter}%
+%    produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% \CandE{techreport-institution-par}%
+%    format tech report institution like book publisher
+% \CandE{vnum-x}%
+%    Journal vol, without number as `34'
+% \CandE{pub-date}%
+%    Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+% \CandE{pre-pub}%
+%    Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages. Note that both use guard code pre-edn.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \file{apsrmp.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrev.dbj} does not:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \CandE{nm-rev1}%
+%    Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
+% \CandE{dt-beg}%
+%    Date after authors 
+% \CandE{vnum-sp}%
+%    Journal vol (num) as `34 (2)'
+% \CandE{pp-last}%
+%    Pages at end, but before any notes
+% \CandE{pub-par}%
+%    Publisher in parentheses
+% \CandE{school-par}%
+%    School/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
+% \CandE{bkedcap}%
+%    `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
+% \CandE{and-com}%
+%    Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
+%    
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
+% in the matter by installing the (default) APS code 
+% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aps-defaults}).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% Numerical citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is false.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted.
+% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
+% 
+% Set up for APS numerical citations (once the packages are loaded). 
+% The journal substyle can override these choices.
+%
+% Note that, prior to \classname{natbib} version 8.21, changing \cmd\NAT@sort\ at this late hour would not be totally effective;
+% you would have to give \classname{natbib} the relevant options at load time.
+% From version 8.21 on, \cmd\NAT@sort\ and \cmd\NAT@cmprs\ are not bound at all. 
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \bibpunct{[}{]}{,}{n}{}{,}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
+% 
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%
+% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibsection{%
+  \par
+  \onecolumngrid@push
+  \begingroup
+   \baselineskip26\p@
+   \bib@device{\textwidth}{245.5\p@}%
+  \endgroup
+  \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
+  \addvspace{19\p@}%
+  \par
+  \onecolumngrid@pop
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bib@device}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bib@device#1#2{%
+ \hb@xt@\z@{%
+  \hb@xt@#1{%
+   \hfil
+   \phantomsection
+   \addcontentsline {toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\refname}%
+%  \hyper@anchorstart {\@currentHref }%
+   \hb@xt@#2{%
+    \skip@\z@\@plus-1fil\relax
+                           \leaders\hrule height.25 \p@ depth.25 \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus1fil
+    \hskip\skip@
+    \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil\leaders\hrule height.375\p@ depth.375\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.75fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil
+    \hskip\skip@
+    \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil\leaders\hrule height.5  \p@ depth.5  \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.5 fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil
+    \hskip\skip@
+    \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil\leaders\hrule height.625\p@ depth.625\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.25fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil
+ %  \hskip\skip@
+ %  \hfil
+   }%
+%  \hyper@anchorend
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \hss
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \let\bibpreamble\@empty
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+ \def\newblock{\ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
+% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+  \small
+  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Index}%
+% FIXME: the following call to \cmd\twocolumn\ appears wrong if we were in two-column grid.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}{%
+%\onecolumngrid@pop
+}%
+%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}%
+%
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}%
+%
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}%
+%
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Journal- and Pointsize-Specific Code}%
+%
+% After this substyle is read in, we will execute the code specific to the selected 
+% journal: execute the society/journal \file{.rtx} file if it exists, or
+% execute the society/journal macro (if the latter is not defined, it will \cmd\relax\ out). 
+% Here we define the default journal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journal@default{pra}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Typesize-Specific Code}%
+%
+% After this society file is read in, we will process the \cmd\@pointsize-specific
+% code. Here we define the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pointsize@default{10}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note: the convention in \revtex\ and its substyles is that 
+% the substyle must not override any explicit class options
+% declared by the document.
+% This means that the various Booleans of Section~\ref{sec:options}
+% may be assigned here only if they are still undefined at this point.
+%
+% For the APS, we supply code specific to journals PRA, PRB, PRC, PRD, PRE, PRL, and RMP.
+% At present, they are identical,
+% with the exception of PRB and RMP.
+%
+% For most all of the APS journals, the journal-dependent 
+% code is relatively meager and is therefore embedded in this file.
+% However, the RMP code is sufficiently extensive that 
+% splitting it out into a separate file is more convenient.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pra}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{pra}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apspra{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRA selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prb}}%
+% We define a \cmd\citealp-like procedure that uses a numerical citation; it is for use in 
+% the PRB journal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprb{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRB selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% PRB requires superscript citations.
+% We use Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package,
+% and hyperref and other packages are already set up to cope with this.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% By default, PRB selects the \classoption{bibnotes} option.
+% We also set up for numerical citations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+  \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% 
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Invoke \classoption{superbib} option. 
+% If the document makes a selection of its own, it will override this assignment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{prb} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prc}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prc}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprc{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRC selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prd}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prd}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprd{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRD selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pre}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{pre}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apspre{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRE selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prl}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprl{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRL selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In PRL, the default is the \classoption{bibnotes} option,
+% and the Acknowledgments section has no head.
+%
+% The References head is a device that may be described as a lozenge centered on the baseline,
+% 71 points wide by 2 points thick, with the ends tapering to a half point in thickness.
+% Space above 26 points base to base, below 31 base to base.
+%FIXME: this code may confound \classname{geometry}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote
+ \@booleanfalse\acknowledgments@sw
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \def\bibsection{%
+   \par
+   \begingroup
+    \baselineskip26\p@
+    \bib@device{\hsize}{72\p@}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
+   \addvspace{19\p@}%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Implement length checking.
+% Use the \classname{times} and \classname{mathtime} packages,
+% plus whatever other processing is required
+% to make the formatted output be true
+% to the metrics of the journal.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \lengthcheck@sw{%
+   \RequirePackage{times}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Wait. Do not use mathtime after all. APS has their own way of doing math pi, involving
+% Adobe Mathematical Pi and other fonts.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \RequirePackage{mathtime}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A PRL does not have numbered sections.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \c@secnumdepth=-\maxdimen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note: we defer this code until after type size file is read in.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \@ifnum{\@pointsize=10\relax}{%
+   \lengthcheck@sw{%
+    \def\large{%
+     \@setfontsize\large{12.5}{14\p@}%
+    }%
+    \def\normalsize{%
+     \@setfontsize\normalsize{10.5}\@xiipt
+     \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus5\p@
+     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \let\@listi\@listI
+    }%
+    \def\small{%
+     \@setfontsize\small{9.5}\@xipt
+     \abovedisplayskip 5\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus4\p@
+     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \let\@listi\@listI
+    }%
+    \DeclareMathSizes{12.5}{12.5}{9}{6}%
+    \DeclareMathSizes{10.5}{10.5}{7.5}{5}%
+    \DeclareMathSizes{9.5}{9.5}{7.0}{5}%
+   }{%
+    \def\normalsize{%
+     \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
+     \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \let\@listi\@listI
+    }%
+   }%
+  }{}%
+ }%
+ \textheight = 694.0\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{prl} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{per}}%
+% Here is code specific to \classoption{per}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprstper{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRST-PER selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% To first order, PER is the same as PRB, with superscript citations.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \rtx@apsprb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Per Mark Doyle (2009-12-22), the default is longbibliography.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% ``Section heads are bold, centered (Roman numeral, Latin letter)''
+% 
+% Article titles do not have surrounding double-quotes!
+%
+% End of \classoption{prb} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prstab}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prstab}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprstab{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRSTAB selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rmp}}%
+% If this option has been selected, we will read in the needed code from the file \file{apsrmp.rtx}. 
+%
+% \subsection{Establish APS Defaults}\label{sec:aps-defaults}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% All APS journals except RMP effectively invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
+% We rely on the RMP-specific code to override this assignment. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ has the job of writing the control record into the
+% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. 
+% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning 
+% is set by the society (APS) and journal. 
+% For all but RMP, we select the Physical Review style.
+% For the latter case, we change the meaning, per the code in \file{apsrmp.rtx}.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aps}%
+\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   apsrev41Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \longbibliography@sw{%
+    ,author="00",editor="1",pages="1",title="0",year="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="",year="1"%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrev41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% We install code that will select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
+% and govern the \BibTeX\ processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@inl
+\def\@bibstyle{apsrev\substyle@post}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\appdef\setup@hook{%
+% \longbibliography@sw{%
+% \appdef\@bibstyle{long}%
+% }{}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{APS Sanity Checking}\label{sec:aps-sanity}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+%
+% Rule: if \cmd\place@bibnumber\ is \cmd\place@bibnumber@sup\ 
+% (citations are numbered and set superscript),
+% then it makes no sense for \cmd\footinbib@sw\ to be \cmd\false@sw\ 
+% (footnotes set in the bibliography, as endnotes). 
+% If both conditions prevailed, then the document would have footnotes
+% and citations both as superscript arabic numbers, but independently numbered, 
+% which would be confusing. 
+%
+% Any society that provides for both superscript numbered citations as well as for 
+% numbered footnotes should check for this same condition, and deal with it. 
+%
+% Note: an alternative would be for footnotes to use the same sequence of footnote devices
+% that are used by the frontmatter footnotes 
+% (\cmd\frontmatter@thefootnote\ instead of arabic numbers). 
+%
+% In this case, we would want to refrain from resetting \cmd\c@footnote\ at the end of 
+% the title page formatting.
+% We would also want to treat body footnotes identically to frontmatter footnotes: 
+% the assignments in \cmd\titleblock@produce\ would persist throughout the document.
+%
+% But APS do not choose to go that route. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \@ifx{\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup}{%
+  \footinbib@sw{}{%
+   \class@warn{Citations are superscript numbers: footnotes must be endnotes; changing to that configuration}%
+   \@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Here ends the substyle for society APS.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</aps>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{rmp} journal substyle: the \texttt{rmp} module}
+%
+% The file \file{apsrmp.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}
+% and \cmd\@journal\ has the value \classoption{rmp}.
+%
+% It is read at the end of the \file{aps.rtx}, so all definitions
+% and assignments in that file are operative unless overridden here.
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*rmp>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Protect this file from being read in as a society instead of a journal.
+% In such a case, \cmd\@journal\ will be undefined. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% One alternative: abort the document.
+% Another alternative: try to recover: force load the aps society file
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \class@warn{Please specify the REVTeX options [aps,rmp]!}%
+ \@@end
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Log the journal substyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \class@info{APS journal RMP selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Frontmatter}%
+%
+% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
+% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clo@groupedaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont\sffamily\raggedright
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PACS@warn}
+% Per Mark Doyle, RMP  never displays the PACS, so they don't want the `use showpacs' warning spit out.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PACS@warn{RMP documents do not display PACS. Your \string\pacs\space will be ignored}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}% HelveticaNeue-Medium(Italic) 14pt.
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{12\p@}}% 24pt b-b down to first author
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+% Set the rag to a milder value, because we want to do true ragged right
+% typesetting, as opposed to the \LaTeX\ default, which gives very poor results.
+%
+% Note: author font is 9.8bp. 19.2bp/14.3bp above/below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{\vskip0.5pc\relax}{}%
+ \@tempskipa\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
+ \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@flushglue\@tempskipa
+ \parskip\z@skip
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@affiliationfont\ controls the formatting of affiliations and affiliation groups.
+% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@above@affilgroup\ is invoked just before proceeding with author/affiliation processing.
+% The \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress} style,
+% and \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+%
+% Note: affiliation font is 9.03/10.4bp, 14.3bp/19.2bp b-b above/below
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{% Helvetica 9/10.2
+ \small\slshape\selectfont\baselineskip10.5\p@\relax
+ \@tempskipa\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
+ \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@flushglue\@tempskipa
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \let\def@after@address\def@after@address@empty
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{\addvspace{7.2\p@}}% additional leading above an author
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{\addvspace{5.3\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the default RMP style for title block authors and affiliations.
+% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
+% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+%
+% This command should override the effect of the 
+% corresponding command in the society substyle,
+% and any document class option bearing on same will in turn override. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clo@groupedaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+% Note: in RMP, if we are not in preprint mode, the date will not be produced.
+%
+% Note: Helvetica C/lc, 8.98bp, space above: 16.3bp b-b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{7.3\p@}%
+  \small
+  \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+\def\produce@RRAP#1{%
+  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+   \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{}%
+   \unskip(\ignorespaces#1\unskip)\quad
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% Space above 21.8bp b-b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \centering\large
+   \abstractname
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+  \vspace{.5pc}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% TimesTen 8.93bp/9.6bp X 360bp, indented 36bp, with 21.9/37.6bp b-b above/below
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+ \footnotesize
+ \hsize360\p@
+ \leftskip=0.5in
+ \parindent\z@
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block.
+% Should be 22/36 points base-to-base.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{7.7\p@}%
+\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{24.6\p@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% FIXME: Not done: PACS.
+% FIXME: TOC: Head is same as \section: HelveticaNeue 8.98. 32/22bp b-b above/below,
+%             Body: TimesTen 8/10.5.
+%
+% \subsection{General Text}%
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% If not in preprint mode, RMP sets the type size to 10/12 point. Note: s/b 11.6bp leading
+%FIXME: define \cmd\normalsize\ only if nobody else has done so. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+   \def\normalsize{%
+    \@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
+    \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ plus2\p@ minus5\p@
+    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \let\@listi\@listI
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Footnote mods:
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \footnotesep 9.25pt
+ \skip\footins 36pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
+ \def\footnoterule{%
+  \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\thr@@
+  \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Sectioning}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
+%
+% We override the meaning of \cmd\secnums@rtx. 
+% The class option \classoption{secnumarabic} will continue to work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secnums@rtx{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection.}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection.\thesubsection.}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.\theparagraph.}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In RMP, put a period (.), followed by `nut space', after the section number.
+% Also, hang the section number (the \LaTeX\ default).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\hskip0.5em\relax}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument. 
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
+% purpose.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\section{%
+  \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
+  {%
+   \small\sffamily\bfseries\selectfont
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+ \def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+ \def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
+  {%
+   \small\sffamily\bfseries
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
+  {%
+   \small\sffamily\selectfont
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
+  {%
+   \small\slshape\selectfont
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{3.25ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
+  {\normalsize\bfseries\selectfont}%
+ }%
+%
+ \setcounter{tocdepth}{4}% FIXME: has no effect
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\appendix{%
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1\appendixname\@if@empty{#2}{}{:\ #2}%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Figure and Table Caption Formatting}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \vbox{%
+   \flushing
+   \small\rmfamily
+   \noindent
+   #1\@caption@fignum@sep#2\par
+  }%
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{\nobreak\hskip.5em plus.2em\ignorespaces}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Citations and Bibliography}%
+%
+% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
+% this task requires three components:
+% a \BibTeX\ \file{.bst} style file,
+% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
+% (if the document does not do so).
+%
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+%  To generate \file{apsrmp.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 3.89d1 or later.
+%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, with the following options:
+%
+% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
+% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \QandA{STYLE OF CITATIONS}{a}{ay}Author-year with some non-standard interface
+% \QandA{AUTHOR}{*}{nat}Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
+% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
+% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART }{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{a}{nm-rev1}Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
+% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR }{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES }{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
+% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT }{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS }{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
+% \QandA{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING }{*}{keyxyr}Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
+% \QandA{DATE POSITION}{b}{dt-beg}Date after authors 
+% \QandA{DATE FORMAT }{m}{yr-com}Date preceded by comma as `, 1993'
+% \QandA{INCLUDE MONTHS}{m}{aymth}Include month in date 
+% \QandA{REVERSED DATE }{r}{dtrev}Date as year month 
+% \QandA{TRUNCATE YEAR }{*}{note-yr}Year text full as 1990--1993 or `in press'
+% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
+% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{?}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
+% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{?}{article-series}article can has series
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{?}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{s}{vnum-sp}Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
+% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
+% \QandA{POSITION OF PAGES}{e}{pp-last}Pages at end but before any notes
+% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
+% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
+% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{p}{pub-par}Publisher in parentheses 
+% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{e}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
+% \QandA{SCHOOL}{p}{school-par}school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
+% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
+% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+% \QandA{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES}{a}{bkedcap}`Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
+% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS }{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
+% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' }{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' }{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
+% \QandA{COMMA BEFORE `AND'}{c}{and-com}Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
+% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
+% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{?}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
+% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
+% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{apsrmp.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-02-12 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+%  head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
+%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
+%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
+%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+%  nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
+%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
+%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
+%  dt-beg,%: Date after authors 
+%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
+%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
+%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
+%  article-series,%: article can has series
+%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
+%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+%  vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
+%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
+%  pp-last,%: Pages at end but before any notes
+%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+%  pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses 
+%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+%  pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
+%  school-par,%: school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
+%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+%  bkedcap,%: `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
+%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
+%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
+%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
+%  and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
+%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
+%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
+%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+%  }}
+%\generate{\file{apsrmp4-1.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For a comparison between apsrmp.bst and apsrev.bst, see Section~\ref{sec:CompRevRmp}. 
+%
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bibstyle{apsrmp\substyle@post}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% Author-year citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@rmp}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% When the journal is RMP, the meaning of the procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ needs to be different 
+% because of the way the author names are formatted. In other respects, it is the same. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+% This entry's cite key is \texttt{apsrmp41Control}, which serves as a version number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   apsrmp41Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \longbibliography@sw{%
+    ,author="03",editor="0",pages="1",title="0",year="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,author="0B",editor="0",pages="0",title="",year="1"%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrmp41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibhang}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted.
+% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
+% 
+% Set up for author-year citations:
+% when \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ executes (at \envb{document} time), the \cmd\@biblabel\ will
+% be set to \cmd\NAT@biblabel.
+%
+% Per Karie Friedman (friedman@phys.washington.edu), multiple citations are separated by semicolons, e.g., 
+% (Jones, 1999; Abbott and Smith, 2000; Wortley, 2001a), 
+% and 
+% multiple citations by the same author by commas, e.g., 
+% Abela et al. (1995, 1997a, 1997b).
+% The third argument of \cmd\bibpunct\ handles the former.
+%
+% The fifth argument puts a comma after the author when the year is not in parens:
+% (Lee et al., 1996).
+%
+% Incidently, this \cmd\bibpunct\ command specifies the \classname{natbib} default values. 
+%
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%
+% We change \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\NAT@def@citea\ procedure to effect more elaborate
+% punctuation for RMP: see item 473: 
+% \cmd\cite\ order punctuation: ``If possible, \cmd\textcite should put the word 'and' between two citations and before the last citation in a list of 3 or more.''
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define the punctuation to use in the \cmd\cite\ command's production.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \bibpunct{(%)
+ }{%(
+ )}{;}{a}{,}{,}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bibsection{%
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+ \let\bibpreamble\@empty
+ \def\newblock{\ }%
+ \bibhang10\p@
+ \bibsep\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Per Mark Doyle, \cmd\cite\ is mapped to \cmd\citep\ in RMP.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\cite\citep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of code to be delayed until after \classname{natbib} loads.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% Footnotes in bibliography are consistent only with numbered citations,
+% and are particularly nasty under \classname{natbib}:
+% the packcage will automatically change to numbered references if
+% any \cmd\bibitem\ commands lack the optional argument.
+% Therefore, we must uninvoke it now, even if invoked by the document.
+% The same is quietly done with 
+% \classname{natbib}'s \classoption{mcite} and \classoption{compress} options. 
+% 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+% (AO 523) I changed the code that alters \cmd\NAT@merge\ so that it will not override
+% when \cmd\NAT@merge\ has been set to \cmd\z@.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \class@warn{%
+   Footnotes in bibliography are incompatible with RMP.^^J%
+   Undoing the footinbib option.
+  }%
+  \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+ }{}%
+ \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\@ne}{\let\NAT@merge\@ne}{}%
+ \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
+% RMP requires the \cmd\eprint\ field in the bib entry to be set off with the word ``eprint''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eprint#1{eprint #1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Table of Contents}
+%
+% We set up for auto-sizing of certain TOC elements.
+% 
+% To do this, we override the definitions for 
+% the default TOC font (\cmd\toc@@font),
+% and define
+% formatting for the needed elements (\cmd\l@\dots).
+% Finally, we activate the autosizing by 
+% assigning \cmd\toc@pre\ and \cmd\toc@post.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@@font}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+% Set the formatting characteristics of the auto-indenting part
+%  of the TOC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@@font{%
+ \footnotesize\rmfamily
+ \def\\{\space\ignorespaces}%
+}%
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{5.5pt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+%\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</rmp>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-2.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-2.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..844a1edad1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-2.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,8384 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 122
+% revtex4-2.dtx: package to typeset APS, AIP, SOR, ASA, etc. journal articles
+% Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.
+% https://journals.aps.org/revtex/
+% mailto:revtex@aps.org
+%
+% Disclaimer
+%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+%   without even the implied warranty of
+%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
+%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
+%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file revtex4-2.dtx
+% and the derived files
+%    revtex4-2.cls, revtex4-2.pdf
+% Distribution:
+%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+%    tex revtex4-2.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+%    latex revtex4-2.dtx; ...
+%
+%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-2.idx
+%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4-2.gls revtex4-2.glo
+%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
+%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-2.idx
+%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+%    TDS:bibtex/bst/revtex/
+%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from revtex4-2.dtx when run through TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+For the version number, search on the string %FileInfo
+
+Original version by David Carlisle
+Modified by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)
+
+Version (4.2a, unreleased)
+Modified by Aptara on behalf of American Physical Society and American Institute of Physics
+
+Version (4.2b,4.2c)
+Modified by Mark Doyle, American Physical Society (mailto:revtex at aps.org)
+
+Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.
+https://journals.aps.org/revtex/
+mailto:revtex@aps.org
+
+See the REVTeX 4.2 README-REVTEX file for restrictions and more information.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+\generate{%
+  \file{revtex4-2.cls}{%
+   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{kernel}%
+   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{options}%
+   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{package}%
+  }%
+  \file{aps4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{aps}}%
+  \file{apsrmp4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{rmp}}%
+  \file{aps10pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{10pt}}%
+  \file{aps11pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{11pt}}%
+  \file{aps12pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{12pt}}%
+  \file{revsymb4-2.sty}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{revsymb}}%
+}%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{*    *.cls, *.rtx, and *.sty }
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+       run revtex4-2.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{revtex4-2.dtx}
+% \CheckSum{6584}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "revtex4-2.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "4.2c",
+%%%     date            = "2019/01/18",
+%%%     time            = "14:29:48 UT-5",
+%%%     checksum        = "6584",
+%%%     author          = "Mark Doyle (mailto: revtex at aps.org), Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa, Version 4.2 Copyright (C) 2019 American Physical Society
+%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
+%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
+%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%%                        ",
+%%%     address         = "Mark Doyle,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "",
+%%%     FAX             = "",
+%%%     email           = "mailto colon revtex at aps.org",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%%  }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README-REVTEX.tex} file,
+% which contains the frontmatter for the programmer's docs.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset this file with LaTeX.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-REVTEX.tex}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README-REVTEX.tex}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4-2.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex revtex4-2.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting ths file under \TeX\ itself runs the installer, 
+% which generates the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4-2.cls, revtex4.ins, revtex4.drv, aps4-2.rtx, 
+%aps10pt4-2.rtx, aps11pt4-2.rtx, aps12pt4-2.rtx, revsymp.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4.pdf, 
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%revtex4.aux revtex4.idx revtex4.ind revtex4.log revtex4.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
+%</doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
+%<kernel>\ProvidesClass{revtex4-2}
+%<aps>\ProvidesFile{aps4-2}
+%<rmp>\ProvidesFile{apsrmp4-2}
+%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{aps10pt4-2}
+%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{aps11pt4-2}
+%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{aps12pt4-2}
+%<revsymb>\ProvidesPackage{revsymb4-2}
+%<*doc>
+\ProvidesFile{revtex4-2.dtx}
+%</doc>
+%<*!package&!options>
+%<version>
+ [2019/01/18/14:29:48 4.2c (https://journals.aps.org/revtex/ for documentation)]% \fileversion
+%</!package&!options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The current class name is remembered in \cmd\class@name.
+% This is something of a klootch, relying as it does on knowledge of the implementation of \cmd\ProvidesPackage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel>\let\class@name\@gtempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{README-REVTEX.txt} and sample document as needed.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The driver uses packages \file{ltxdoc.sty}, \file{ltxdocext.sty}, 
+% \file{hyperref.sty}, and whatever font package has been selected.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We ask for the usual indices and glossaries.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4.gls revtex4.glo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
+%    from this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Frontmatter File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the frontmatter file. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README-REVTEX.tex}
+\title{%
+ The \classname{revtex4-2} document class of the American Physical Society%
+ \protect\thanks{Work under hire to American Physical Society. Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society}%
+}%
+\author{Arthur Ogawa and Mark Doyle%
+ \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle, all released versions of 4.0 and 4.1 by Art Ogawa, 4.2a (unreleased) by Aptara, 4.2b,c by Mark Doyle}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.2 document class
+for electronic submissions to journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{https://journals.aps.org/revtex/},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Using \protect\revtex}
+
+The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
+
+User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
+
+The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file. 
+
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based  code, other bug fixes}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara, MD) Added initial support for SOR and AAPM journals, additional journals for APS, and additional journals and proceedings for AIP, unreleased.}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara) Make prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals.}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara) Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Make long bibliography style the default now.}%
+\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/28}{(MD) Add call to normalsize to be a good citizen and allow booktabs.sty to work properly}.%
+\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Make titles in bibliography default, prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals, add a unified physrev option as well as prx and prapplied options. Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
+\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Update options for new titles without "Special Topics" and make prper match style of other journal options}%
+\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Add options for new APS journals and a generic physrev option for future-proofing}%
+\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) Change default to not use a title page - it seems antiquated}%
+\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) MD - not sure why these parameters were different previously. Made them match except for title.}%
+\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) PACS are obsolete altogether now}%
+\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Improve control over display of e-print ids in bibliography.}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}% TeXSupport
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And that is the end of the driver for the programmer's documentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Overview}%
+% \revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of 
+% the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
+%
+% Certain packages are (should be) loaded by this class in any case:
+% \classname{amssymb}, \classname{amsmath}, \classname{bm}, \classname{natbib}.
+% 
+% Certain packages are automatically loaded by this class
+% when a corresponding class option has been invoked:
+% 
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \textbf{\revtex\ option}&\textbf{package}\\
+% \classoption{amsfonts}&\classname{amsfonts}\\
+% \classoption{amssymb}&\classname{amssymb}\\
+% \classoption{aps}&\classname{overcite}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Certain other packages are to be loaded by the
+% document through explicit use of \cmd\usepackage.
+% Some mentioned in the user documentation are
+% \classname{graphicx}, \classname{longtable}, \classname{hyperref}, 
+% and \classname{bm}.
+%
+% Certain commonly used packages are known to be incompatible with
+% \revtex, among them \classname{multicol} and \classname{cite}.
+% If such a package is found to be loaded, \revtex\ issues an error message
+% and halts the job.
+% Halting might be considered severe punishment for loading an incompatible 
+% package, but if we were to proceed, an even weirder error might be encountered
+% further down the road.
+%
+% This document class implements the substyle: a set of mutually
+% exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the 
+% document class to address multiple societies.
+% It also implements a sub-substyle, giving the 
+% journal of the given society.
+% Any society may create a substyle;
+% this file generates one for \classoption{aps}.
+%
+% FIXME: should always load the \classname{graphicx} package. No, allow user to load whichever graphics package is desired.
+% 
+% QUERY: since \classname{amsfonts} and \classname{amssymb} extend
+% syntax, why not load them in any case?
+% 
+% Certain processing occurs at the endgame for reading in \revtex, thereby establishing
+% precedence for assignments to \LaTeX's (and \revtex's) parameters:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Figure out which society is operative and read in the indicated \file{.rtx} file.
+% \item
+%  Figure out which journal option is operative and execute the indicated journal command. This may lead to reading in a journal substyle \file{.rtx} file.
+% \item
+%  Figure out which pointsize is operative and execute the indicateded pointsize command. This may lead to reading in a pointsize  \file{.rtx} file.
+% \item
+%  Execute all of the document's options, in the order declared within the document.
+% \item
+%  Read in all required packages (like \classname{natbib}, \classname{amsfonts}, \classname{amssymb}), that were determined by class, society, and journal.
+% \item
+%  The last required package, if existing, is the document's style file, the \file{.rty} file. 
+%  Note that the \file{.rty} file can override the assignments of \revtex, society, journal, and required packages, and even load its own packages.
+%  It can also, via appendations to \cmd\setup@hook, override the setup code itself.
+% \item
+%  Execute all of the setup code accumulated. Such code can be queued by \revtex\ itself, by the society, by the journal, or by the pointsize. 
+% \item
+%  At this point, \revtex\ has completed the process of inputting itself, 
+%  and \LaTeX\ will now execute the \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ procedures.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \revtex\ will have enqueued code to execute at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
+% in two different queues. 
+% \cmd\document@inithook\ executes immediately upon encountering the \cmd\begin\env{document} statement, 
+% \cmd\class@documenthook\ at the end of all the code enqueued via \cmd\AtBeginDocument. 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Install procedures to execute at the very end of the class's
+%  \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ processing, such as
+%  \begin{enumerate}
+%  \item
+%   closing out the page grid
+%  \item
+%   putting out the LastPage label.
+%  \item
+%   issuing a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, based on the value set
+%   by the society substyle.
+%  \item
+%   setting default values for parameters used in the document.
+%FIXME: differentiate between class's parameters that can wait until
+% they are used in the document, and parameters that are used at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
+%  \end{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Install procedures to execute the very last at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time,
+%  such as the \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% Certain events are optionally scheduled for \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Setting default values for the Booleans and for other procedures used in formatting.
+% \item
+%  In response to class options options, adjusting parameters and procedures used in formatting.
+% \item
+%  Implementing the \classoption{eqsecnum} option, if required.
+% \item
+%  Setting the state engine for data commands.
+% \item
+%  Memorizing procedures for later use.
+% \item
+%  Setting type size and area, for use by later calculations.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% Certain events are scheduled for \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ time:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%  Print out the migrated floats or the end notes, if needed.
+% \item
+%  Close out the page grid.
+% \item
+%  Label the last page of the document
+% \item
+%  (\classname{natbib}) prepare to read in the \file{.aux} file.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \section{Writing journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
+%
+% With this version of \revtex, we introduce a somewhat different
+% scheme for adapting \revtex\ to the needs of a specific journal.
+%
+% To create a journal substyle, you create new class options in 
+% \revtex\ for the society, say \classoption{osa}, and any of that society's journals,
+% one of which is, say, \classoption{josaa},
+% using the code for the APS as a guide.
+% In particular, each of your new options should separately define \cmd\@society\
+% and \cmd\@journal. That for the former will be the same for
+% all options relating to a particular society.
+%
+% Then, for the society, you create a corresponding \file{.rtx}
+% file, in our case \file{osa.rtx}.
+% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
+% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
+% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
+% Also within that file, you include a 
+% section of code for each journal, that for josaa looks like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@josaa}{%
+% <code specific to the josaa>
+% }{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% Thus far, the scheme is similar to that used in \revtex\ 3.1.
+% However, the new scheme does differ from the old in that 
+% the \file{.rtx} file should define no syntactical extensions
+% to \revtex.
+%
+% \section{The \classname{revtex4} Document Class}
+% Above, we took
+% advantage of 1) the \LaTeX\ definition of \cmd\ProvidesPackage\ and
+% 2) that the line of code immediately afterwards follows the \cmd\ProvidesClass\ statement above. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Print a banner in the log:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\GenericInfo{}{\space
+ Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.^^J
+ mailto:revtex@aps.org^^J
+ Licensed under the LPPL:^^Jhttp://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt^^J
+ Arthur Ogawa <arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net>^^J
+ Based on work by David Carlisle <david at dcarlisle.demon.co.uk>%
+ Version (4.2c): Modified by Mark Doyle^^J
+ \@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility Processing}
+%
+% If the document has \cmd\documentstyle|{revtex4}|,
+% then, instead of attempting to run in compatability mode,
+% just complain and exit.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility    
+  \edef\reserved@a{\errhelp{%
+   Change your \string\documentstyle\space statement to
+   \string\documentclass\space and rerun.
+  }}\reserved@a
+  \errmessage{You cannot run \class@name\space in compatability mode}%
+  \expandafter\@@end
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here, we incorporate the utility, frontmatter, and page grid packages.
+% The \classname{ltxutil}, \classname{ltxfront}, and \classname{ltxgrid} source are distributed with 
+% \revtex.
+%
+% Here begins the \file{options} \textsc{docstrip} module.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Hooks}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
+% The procedure 
+% \cmd\setup@hook\
+% serves as the vehicle for all code that 
+% gives values to the class's parameters once all the 
+% society, journal, options, and packages have been processed. 
+%
+% Arrange for journal substyles to set their own default values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\setup@hook\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% After preamble processing is complete,
+% detect whether package \classname{longtable} has been loaded and patch it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \switch@longtable
+ \let\LT@makecaption\LT@makecaption@rtx
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@makecaption}
+% We override the caption processing method of the \classname{longtable} package:
+% space below the caption is created via strut instead of whitespace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT@makecaption@rtx#1#2#3{%
+  \LT@mcol\LT@cols c{%
+    \hbox to\z@{%
+     \hss
+     \parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{%
+      \sbox\@tempboxa{#1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip}%
+      \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
+        #1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip
+      \else
+        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+      \fi
+      \endgraf
+     }%
+     \hss
+    }%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\robust@boldmath}
+% Robustify the \cmd\boldmath command. 
+% If Team \LaTeX\ (or any package) ever gets around to fixing this problem, 
+% we will bow out. (This fix relates to bug \#394.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\protectdef@boldmath{%
+ \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname boldmath \endcsname{}{%
+  \class@info{Robustifying \string\LaTeX's \string\boldmath\space command}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname boldmath \endcsname\boldmath
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\boldmath\expandafter{\expandafter\protect\csname boldmath \endcsname}%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \protectdef@boldmath
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Compatability with the geometry package}
+%
+% The \classname{geometry} package of Hideo Umeki provides a way to 
+% specify the metrics of the media and page layout.
+% We want to ensure that \revtex\ does not foreclose on the use of 
+% this or any other such package, nor to interfere with
+% explicit assignments of such metric parameters within the 
+% document preamble.
+% 
+% The \LaTeX\ parameters (resp. \TeX\ primitives) set by \classname{geometry} are:
+% \cmd\paperwidth, \cmd\paperheight, 
+% \cmd\textwidth, \cmd\textheight, 
+% \cmd\topmargin, \cmd\headheight, \cmd\headsep, 
+% \cmd\footskip, \cmd\skip\cmd\footins, 
+% \cmd\marginparwidth, \cmd\marginparsep, 
+% \cmd\oddsidemargin, \cmd\evensidemargin, 
+% \cmd\columnsep, 
+% \cmd\hoffset, \cmd\voffset, \cmd\mag, 
+% \cmd\if@twocolumn, \cmd\if@twoside, \cmd\if@mparswitch, \cmd\if@reversemargin, 
+%
+% \revtex's assignments can be overridden by 
+% any package or other statement in the document preamble, 
+% so it should be compatible. 
+%
+%FIXME: one parameter is rendered semantically void (by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}): 
+% \cmd\if@twocolumn. 
+%
+% \section{Options}\label{sec:options}%
+%
+% \subsection{Define Booleans Used in Options}%
+% The following Booleans are used within the document class to
+% allow the document or the substyle to make selections
+% of formatting.
+% An explicit document class option overrides an assignment made by a substyle.
+%
+% \subsection{Declare Options}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Checkin: for Editorial Use}%
+% A document class option declaring that the document is being processed by the 
+% editorial staff.
+%
+% This option should:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% put date in footer along with folio
+% \item
+% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{preprint} class option.
+% \item
+% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{showpacs} class option.
+% \item
+% specify that when a float is placed h or H, it will be allowed to break over pages.
+% (Note: be sure that if the enclosed \env{tabular} has an optional argument, you change it to [v], or remove it entirely.)
+% \end{itemize}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{checkin}{%
+  \@booleantrue\dateinRH@sw
+  \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+  \def\@pointsize{12}%
+  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+  \def\fp@proc@h{\allow@breaking@tables}%
+  \def\fp@proc@H{\allow@breaking@tables}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\dateinRH@sw
+\def\checkindate{\dateinRH@sw{{\tiny(\today)}}{}}%
+\def\allow@breaking@tables{%
+ \def\array@default{v}% tabular can break over pages
+ \@booleanfalse\floats@sw % table can break over pages
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preprint Style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty@sw}
+% The boolean \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ signifies that 
+% the document is to be formatted in preprint style.
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{preprint}{%
+ \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
+ \ExecuteOptions{12pt}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{reprint}{%
+\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+\@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw
+ \ExecuteOptions{10pt}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{manuscript}{%
+ \class@warn{Document class option manuscript is obsolete; use preprint instead}%
+ \ExecuteOptions{preprint}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw}
+% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
+% otherwise not.
+% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords.
+% \subsubsection{Showing PACS and keywords}%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{showpacs}{%
+  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noshowpacs}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{showkeys}{%
+  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noshowkeys}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
+\@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Balance the last page when in two-column page grid}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\balancelastpage@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% If we are in a two-column page grid, we may wish to balance the columns
+% of the last page. This will be done automatically if the 
+% \classoption{twocolumn} document class option is chosen.
+% This action will be turned off by the \classoption{nobalancelastpage}.
+% A complementary class option, \classoption{balancelastpage} is also provided.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{balancelastpage}{%
+  \@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{nobalancelastpage}{%
+  \@booleanfalse\balancelastpage@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Showing preprint numbers}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preprint@sw}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: default value of \cs{preprint@sw} follows \cs{preprintsty@sw}}
+% The boolean \cmd\preprint@sw\ signifies that 
+% the preprints (cf. \cmd\preprint) are to be formatted (usually on the title page).
+% The option \classoption{preprintnumbers} declares to do so,
+% \classoption{nopreprintnumbers} declares not to; 
+% the default is to follow \cmd\preprintsty@sw. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{nopreprintnumbers}{\@booleanfalse\preprint@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{preprintnumbers}{\@booleantrue\preprint@sw}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\preprint@sw{\let\preprint@sw\preprintsty@sw}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Hypertext Option}%
+%
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+% \changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hyperref}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following code had been commented out, it is now truly a comment:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\AtEndOfClass{%
+% \begingroup
+%  \edef\@tempa{%
+%   \let
+%   \noexpand\@clsextension
+%   \noexpand\@empty
+%   \noexpand\RequirePackage{hyperref}%
+%   \def\noexpand
+%   \@clsextension{\@clsextension}%
+%  }%
+%  \expandafter
+% \endgroup
+% \@tempa
+%}%
+% \def\@pointsize{10}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% If you have a hyper-foo enabled browser you may prefer this format
+% which does not print the URL for the home page, but just makes the
+% name a link, but by default print it so it works on paper.
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \class@warn{Class option "hyperref" is no longer supported.^^JEmploy \string\usepackage{hyperref} instead}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Type Size}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% Use \cmd\@pointsize|=10| rather than \cmd\@ptsize|=0| to allow easy extensions
+% to 9pt or whatever. 
+% Note: the three alternatives are mutually exclusive. 
+%
+% At this point, the parameter \cmd\@pointsize\ is set to \cmd\undefined:
+% a society \emph{must} give it a definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@pointsize{10}}%
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@pointsize{11}}%
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@pointsize{12}}%
+\let\@pointsize\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Media Size}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paperheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\paperwidth}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {210mm}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {148mm}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {176mm}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {11in}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{legalpaper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {14in}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{executivepaper}{%
+    \setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {7.25in}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{landscape}{%
+    \setlength\@tempdima   {\paperheight}%
+    \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
+    \setlength\paperwidth  {\@tempdima}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+% Effectively select \classoption{letterpaper}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ds@letterpaper
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibnotes}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce}
+% Frontmatter footnotes result from frontmatter commands like
+% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, and \cmd\thanks.
+% The default for \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce\ is
+% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote, which formats the frontmatter footnotes
+% at the foot of the title page. The \classoption{bibnotes} class option
+% defers them to the bibliography.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{bibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote}%
+\DeclareOption{nobibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}%
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footinbib}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% The boolean \cmd\footinbib@sw\ signifies that 
+% text footnotes are to be set in the bibliography, as endnotes.
+% 
+% The document may set the value one way or the other via
+% the following two class options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{footinbib}{\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw}
+\DeclareOption{nofootinbib}{\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The default value is \cmd\false@sw, and the society or journal
+% may override the default. 
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{altaffilletter}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffilletter@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% Determine the procedure \cmd\thefootnote\ used in frontmatter: 
+% the footnote symbol used in titlepage footnotes.
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{altaffilletter}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{altaffilsymbol}{\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{superbib}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The procedure \cmd\place@bibnumber\ produces the number
+% at the head of the \cmd\bibitem, in the bibliography.
+% By default, it has the \cmd\bibnumfmt\ meaning assigned by the \classname{natbib} package.
+% It may be overridden by society, journal, or by the document options.
+%
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{superbib}{%
+ \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
+}%
+\def\place@bibnumber{\NATx@bibnumfmt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@sup}
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@inl}
+% For producing the \cmd\bibitem\ device,
+% we define two procedures to select from.
+%
+% Note that we could have used \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\ifNAT@super\
+% switch, but it does not allow for altering the meaning of \cmd\bibnumfmt.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\place@bibnumber@sup#1{\textsuperscript{#1}}%
+\def\place@bibnumber@inl#1{[#1]}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{citeautoscript}%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeautoscript@sw}
+% This class option allows you to automatically accomodate a change from non-superscripted, numbered references
+% to superscripted, bunmbered references.
+%
+% Note: you should always mark up your document with the assumption that references are \emph{not} going to be superscripted.
+% Otherwise this option has no hope of working properly.
+%
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{citeautoscript}{\@booleantrue\citeautoscript@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\citeautoscript@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Variants on the Bibliography Style}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+%
+% \revtex\ anticipates that a society or journal will provide two related Bib\TeX bibliography style variants,
+% designating one as the default.
+% A pair of document class options \classoption{longbibliography} and \classoption{nolongbibliography}
+% allows the user to explicitly select between them. 
+% \begin{macro}{\longbibliography@sw}
+%
+%\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Make long bibliography style the default now.}
+% \revtex's default for \cmd\longbibliography@sw\ is \cmd\true@sw.
+%
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{longbibliography}{\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{nolongbibliography}{\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw}%
+\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eprint@enable@sw}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
+%
+% The document class options \classoption{eprint} and \classoption{noeprint}
+% give the user the ability to turn off production of the \texttt{eprint} field in the bibliography. 
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{eprint}{\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{noeprint}{\@booleanfalse\eprint@enable@sw}%
+\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Simplex/Duplex Pages}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twoside@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
+% The flag \cmd\twoside@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
+% formatted for duplex printing.
+% After the preamble is processed, we align the value
+% of the kernel \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if@twoside\ 
+% to that of \cmd\twoside@sw. 
+% \cmd\if@twoside\ itself is used in the kernel's
+% \cmd\cleardoublepage\ and \cmd\@outputpage\ procedures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \twoside@sw{\@twosidetrue}{\@twosidefalse}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+% The complementary options \classoption{twoside} and \classoption{oneside}
+% assert formatting for duplex or simplex printing, respectively.
+% At the same time, we arrange for the selection of the page grid 
+% with respect to the marginal column:
+% Because \cmd\if@reversemargin\ remains default (false),
+% if duplex printing, this column will always be on the (right),
+% if simplex printing, it will always be on the (outside).
+% QUERY: correct choice?
+%FIXME: assign \cmd\if@mparswitch\ later (and protect the assignment, too). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@booleantrue \twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse}%
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw\@mparswitchtrue}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Two-Column Page Grid}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
+% The flag \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
+% formatted in the two-column page grid.
+%
+% If no options relating to page grid are invoked by 
+% \cmd\AtBeginDcoument\ time, we set default values.
+% Up to that point, the class can check if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\
+% is \cmd\undefined\ to see if any related options have been invoked.
+%
+% \classoption{onecolumn} specifies one-column page grid.
+% The \classoption{twocolumn} class option employs the standard mechanism for
+% changing the column grid: the \classname{ltxgrid} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The column grid is determined by the state of the switch \cmd\twocolumn@sw
+% and is effected at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+% The society or journal file may re-define \cmd\select@column@grid\ 
+% to accomodate, e.g., more than two choices for the page grid. 
+%
+% Note that \cmd\open@column@two\ adds items to the Main Vertical List, 
+% so constitutes the true beginning of the document.
+%
+% Note also that if the selected column grid is a one-column grid, 
+% there is nothing to do, because \classname{ltxgrid} has already
+% set that up via \cmd\@begindocumenthook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\select@column@grid{%
+ \twocolumn@sw{%
+  \twocolumn@grid@setup
+  \open@twocolumn
+ }{%
+  \onecolumn@grid@setup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \open@onecolumn
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \select@column@grid
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clear@document}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+%
+% We install into \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ 
+% a trap for the procedure \cmd\clearpage\ that attempts to end the current page.
+% This procedure needs to be headpatched with \cmd\close@column\ to end the current page grid. 
+%
+% This procedure is executed after all typesetting is complete
+% i.e., after items like \cmd\printtables, as well as all commands queued up by \cmd\AtEndDocument. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \let\clearpage@ltx\clearpage
+ \prepdef\clear@document{\let\clearpage\clearpage@ltx\let\clear@document\@empty\close@column}%
+ \appdef\class@documenthook{%
+  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+   \let\clearpage\clear@document
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% The boolean \cmd\authoryear@sw\ signifies that we are to use author-year citations rather than numerical citations.
+% 
+% The \classoption{author-year} class option selects ``'author-year'' citations;  
+% \classoption{numerical} selectes ``numerical'' citations.
+% The former is the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{author-year}{\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{numerical}{\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\galley@sw}
+% The boolean \cmd\galley@sw\ signifies that 
+% the document is to be formatted in galley style.
+%
+% Asserting both \cmd\galley@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ 
+% may produce strange formatting results, but it is not illegal.
+% However, it \emph{is} illegal to assert galley and any 
+% twocolumn option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \classoption{galley} emulates setting the galleys of
+% a two-column journal.
+% CHANGED: this option should effectively set \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ false.
+% NOTE: it makes no sense to assert both galley and twocolumn.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{galley}{%
+  \ExecuteOptions{onecolumn}%
+  \@booleantrue\galley@sw
+  \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+  \appdef\setup@hook{%
+    \advance\textwidth-\columnsep
+    \textwidth.5\textwidth
+  }%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\galley@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{raggedbottom or flushbottom}%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumn@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The class options \classoption{raggedbottom} and \classoption{flushbottom} determine whether the columns (page)
+% are ragged bottom or flush bottom.
+% Note that we do not select a default here; that is done by the journal substyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{raggedbottom}{\@booleantrue\raggedcolumn@sw}
+\DeclareOption{flushbottom}{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \raggedcolumn@sw{\raggedbottom}{\flushbottom}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{tightenlines}%
+%
+% This class option specifies that standard leading 
+% is to be used to set the type.
+% If lacking, the leading will be loose.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tightenlines@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The boolean \cmd\tightenlines@sw\ signifies that 
+% the leading is to be made standard amount.
+% If false, it means that the leading is to be set extra open.
+% Has no effect on 10pt size option.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tightenlines}{\@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw}
+\@booleanfalse\tightenlines@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{lengthcheck}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lengthcheck@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\lengthcheck@sw\ signifies that 
+% the length checking is in effect.
+% It is up to the individual journal substyle 
+% to alter its formatting accordingly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\lengthcheck@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This class option specifies that the formatted document 
+% should approach as closely as possible the
+% formatting of an actual journal article 
+% to facilitate the author's performance of a length check.
+%
+%FIXME: society or journal may have its own definition of this option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{lengthcheck}{%
+ \@booleantrue\lengthcheck@sw
+ \ExecuteOptions{reprint}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In addition, if length checking is in effect, we will enable 
+% the tally of text length. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \lengthcheck@sw{\@booleantrue\tally@box@size@sw}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Draft and Final}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\draft@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\draft@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
+% formatted in draft mode. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \draft@sw{\overfullrule 5\p@}{\overfullrule\z@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Certain packages may pay attention to the 
+% class option \classoption{draft} that sets this Boolean.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\@booleantrue\draft@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{final}{\@booleanfalse\draft@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\draft@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{eqsecnum}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum@sw}
+% The flag \cmd\eqsecnum@sw\ signifies that equations are to be 
+% numbered with the section, e.g., ``Eq. (2.13)''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \eqsecnum@sw{%
+  \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
+  \def\theequation@prefix{\arabic{section}.}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \classoption{eqsecnum} class option signifies that equations are
+% to be numbered within sections.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\@booleantrue\eqsecnum@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\eqsecnum@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{secnumarabic}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
+% The \classoption{secnumarabic} class option signifies that sectioning commands are
+% to be numbered arabic: 
+% the procedure \cmd\secnums@arabic\ is executed as the default. 
+% Otherwise, the procedure \cmd\secnums@rtx\ determines things. 
+% The society or journal may redefine either procedure,
+% and may change the definition of \cmd\setup@secnums\ itself, 
+% thereby establishing a different default. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \setup@secnums
+}%
+\DeclareOption{secnumarabic}{%
+ \def\setup@secnums{\secnums@arabic}%
+}%
+\def\setup@secnums{\secnums@rtx}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The code that defines \cmd\secnums@rtx\ and \cmd\secnums@arabic\ appears
+% in Section~\ref{sec:secnumarabic}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{fleqn}
+% FIXME: model fleqn after amsfonts. I no longer understand why I said this.
+% \file{fleqn.clo} is not a package, so it can simply be \cmd\input. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
+ \input{fleqn.clo}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{floats/endfloats}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floats@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\floatp@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The Boolean \cmd\floats@sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated;
+% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document.
+% By default, the former.
+% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
+% the document class in response to user-selected options.
+% 
+% This boolean and the assignment of its default value is done by
+% the \classname{ltxutil} package.
+%
+% The Boolean \cmd\floatp@sw\ signifies that endfloats are to be set one per page;
+% if false, that endfloats are to be set with multiple floats per page permitted.
+% By default, the latter.
+% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
+% the document class in response to user-selected options.
+% The default is established here.
+%
+% These options control, via the Boolean \cmd\floats@sw, 
+% whether floats are to be migrated to the end of the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{floats}{\@booleantrue\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
+\DeclareOption{endfloats}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
+\DeclareOption{endfloats*}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleantrue\floatp@sw}
+\@booleantrue\floats@sw
+\@booleantrue\floatp@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{titlepage/notitlepage}%
+% These options control, via \cmd\titlepage@sw, 
+% whether the title block is to be set on a separate page.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\titlepage@sw\ signifies that a forced 
+% page break is to follow the title page: the article
+% title appears on a page by itself.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw}
+\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw}
+\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Substyle and Sub-substyle}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\change@society}
+% \begin{macro}{\change@journal}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+% If the society or, resp., journal has already been assigned,
+% notify user whether it is being overridden. 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\change@society#1{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1}%
+ \@ifxundefined\@society{%
+  \class@info{Selecting society \@tempa}%
+  \let\@society\@tempa
+ }{%
+  \@ifx{\@tempa\@society}{}{%
+   \class@warn{Conflicting society \@tempa<>\@society; not selected}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\change@journal#1{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1}%
+ \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+  \class@info{Selecting journal \@tempa}%
+  \let\@journal\@tempa
+ }{%
+  \@ifx{\@tempa\@journal}{}{%
+   \class@warn{Conflicting journal \@tempa<>\@journal; not selected}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here had been the class options relating to the APS.
+% Now that all societies are on an equal footing, this code is in the
+% respective \file{.rtx} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Optical Society of America}%
+% Here are the class options relating to the Optical Society of America.
+%
+% Note: as of 2008, the only OSA module being distributed by ctan is \file{osajnl.rtx}.
+% The class options declared here are, I think, unused.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{osa}{\change@society{osa}\let\@journal\@undefined}%
+\DeclareOption{osameet}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{osameet}}%
+\DeclareOption{opex}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{opex}}%
+\DeclareOption{tops}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{tops}}%
+\DeclareOption{josa}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{josa}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@require@packages}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The procedure \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ accumulates all \cmd\RequirePackage\ statements
+% in the course of loading the document class. 
+% Carrying out these operations at that time is needed:
+% \cmd\ProcessOptions\ must be executed first. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\rtx@require@packages\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+% We load the \classname{textcase} package of David Carlisle.
+% Now that its bug of long standing has been repaired, we no longer need to doctor it up. 
+% And, because its loading has been deferred until \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time, 
+% we no longer override \LaTeX\ here. Instead, the \classname{textcase} package
+% will be asked to do that. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage[overload]{textcase}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following code used to
+% let the \classname{textcase} commands override those of \LaTeX:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\appdef\setup@hook{%
+% \expandafter
+% \let\csname MakeUppercase \expandafter\endcsname
+%    \csname MakeTextUppercase \endcsname
+% \expandafter
+% \let\csname MakeLowercase \expandafter\endcsname
+%    \csname MakeTextLowercase \endcsname
+% }%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{amsfonts}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The class option \classoption{amsfonts} has the
+% same effect as if the document preamble contained
+% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsfonts}$ statement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{amsfonts}{%
+  \def\class@amsfonts{\RequirePackage{amsfonts}}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noamsfonts}{%
+  \let\class@amsfonts\@empty
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \@ifxundefined\class@amsfonts{}{\class@amsfonts}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{amssymb}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The class option \classoption{amssymb} has the
+% same effect as if the document preamble contained
+% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amssymb}$ statement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{amssymb}{%
+  \def\class@amssymb{\RequirePackage{amssymb}}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noamssymb}{%
+  \let\class@amssymb\@empty
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \@ifxundefined\class@amssymb{}{\class@amssymb}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{amsmath}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+% The class option \classoption{amsmath} has the
+% same effect as if the document preamble contained
+% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsmath}$ statement.
+%
+% We require version 1.2 (datestamped 1997/03/20) or later.
+% The \expandafter\cmd\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname, will 
+% 
+% \LaTeX\ note:
+% Certain \LaTeX\ procedures have an arbitrary and pointless restriction that they may be used only within the preamble.
+% We get around this by preserving the procedures in private \cmd\csname s.
+%
+% FIXME note: it is difficult to ensure that an error summary will be printed on the console at the very end,
+% but \classname{ltxgrid} allows accomplishing this via an interrupt, put down at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{amsmath}{%
+  \def\class@amsmath{\RequirePackage{amsmath}[\ver@amsmath@prefer]}%
+}%
+\DeclareOption{noamsmath}{%
+  \let\class@amsmath\@empty
+}%
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \preserve@LaTeX
+ \@ifxundefined\class@amsmath{}{\class@amsmath}%
+ \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\test@amsmath@ver}%
+}%
+\appdef\preserve@LaTeX{%
+ \let\@ifl@aded@LaTeX\@ifl@aded
+ \let\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX\@ifpackageloaded
+ \let\@pkgextension@LaTeX\@pkgextension
+ \let\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX\@ifpackagelater
+ \let\@ifl@ter@LaTeX\@ifl@ter
+ \let\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX\@ifl@t@r
+ \let\@parse@version@LaTeX\@parse@version
+}%
+\appdef\restore@LaTeX{%
+ \let\@ifl@aded\@ifl@aded@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifpackageloaded\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX
+ \let\@pkgextension\@pkgextension@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifpackagelater\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@LaTeX
+ \let\@ifl@t@r\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX
+ \let\@parse@version\@parse@version@LaTeX
+}%
+\def\test@amsmath@ver{%
+ \begingroup
+  \restore@LaTeX
+  \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
+   \@ifpackagelater{amsmath}{\ver@amsmath@prefer}{}{%
+     \class@warn{%
+      You have loaded amsmath, version "\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname",\MessageBreak
+      but this class requires version "\ver@amsmath@prefer", or later.\MessageBreak
+      Please update your LaTeX installation.
+     }%
+   }%
+  }{%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\ver@amsmath@prefer{2000/01/15 v2.05 AMS math features}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Presenting Authors and Their Affiliations}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+% Class options for presenting authors and their affiliations are now defined in 
+% \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Typeset by \revtex}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\byrevtex@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% The flag \cmd\byrevtex@sw\ signifies that the document should
+% bear an imprint to the effect that it was formatted by this document class.
+%
+% The class option \classoption{byrevtex} signifies that you want the 
+% ``Typeset by \revtex'' byline to appear on your formatted output.
+% By default, no such byline appears.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{byrevtex}{\@booleantrue\byrevtex@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\byrevtex@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Attempt to fix float placement failure}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% \revtex\ uses the \classname{ltxgrid} package, which provides the ability to attempt repairs when 
+% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is about to fail, but that facility is turned off by default.
+% Users should invoke the \classoption{floatfix} document class option to enable this \LaTeX\ extension.
+% If not, a helpful message is printed in the log, indicating how to work around the difficulty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{floatfix}{\@booleantrue\force@deferlist@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{nofloatfix}{\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fltovf}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fltstk}
+%  The \LaTeX\ kernel error message \cmd\@fltovf\ may now be a bit more helpful to the user;
+%  likewise for the \cmd\@fltstk\ message of \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@fltovf{%
+ \@latex@error{%
+  Too many unprocessed floats%
+  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
+ }\@ehb
+}%
+\def\@fltstk{%
+ \@latex@warning{%
+  A float is stuck (cannot be placed)%
+  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@info@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\outputdebug@sw}
+% The two options \classoption{ltxgridinfo} and \classoption{outputdebug} turn on informative diagnostics within the 
+% package \classname{ltxgrid}. Only people who really want to see this output will select these class options.
+% Consult documentation for the \classname{ltxgrid} package to see what output the related switches enable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{ltxgridinfo}{%
+ \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
+%\@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
+}%
+\DeclareOption{outputdebug}{%
+ \@booleantrue\outputdebug@sw
+ \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
+ \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
+ \traceoutput
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Option to relax page height}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight@sw}
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package can set text pages to their natural height or force them to the full 
+% text height; the latter is the default.
+% If setting the pages with a variable length,
+% the running foot will move up or down with the natural length of the text column.
+% While I recommend against doing so, this option will turn that switch to the latter setting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{raggedfooter}{\@booleanfalse\textheight@sw}%
+\DeclareOption{noraggedfooter}{\@booleantrue\textheight@sw}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Selecting procedure for processing abstract}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+% Code defining options \classoption{newabstract} and \classoption{oldabstract} has been removed.
+%
+% \subsection{Option to turn on diagnostics in the frontmatter}%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatterverbose@sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+% A diagnostic option, not for the average enduser, which reveals 
+% the workings of the frontmatter.
+% This code interfaces to that of \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose@sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumbers@sw}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+% An option to number the lines of type in the output in the manner of \classname{lineno}.
+%
+% At present, we use that very package to implement this functionality.
+% This means that users may modify the workings of that package per its documentation (which see).
+%
+% However, compatibility with \classname{amsmath} requires that \classname{lineno} be loaded afterwards.
+% Therefore, we defer loading of this package until after the preamble is completed. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{%
+ \appdef
+ \class@documenthook{%
+  \RequirePackage{lineno}[2005/11/02 v4.41]%
+  \linenumbersep4pt\relax
+  \linenumbers\relax
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% By default, line numbering is off. 
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+% Add class option nomerge, to turn off natbib 8.3 syntax for citation key. 
+% The default value of REVTeX 4.1 for \cmd\NAT@merge is \cmd\thr@@, which turns on  
+% the new syntax along with its semantics. 
+% Legacy documents that would be incompatible with the new syntax can be successfully processed 
+% with class option \classoption{nomerge}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{nomerge}{%
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\z@}{\let\NAT@merge\z@}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Default Option, Society, Journal, and pointsize}%
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+% This change will not break OSA documents because that society is still built in to revtex4.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@society}
+% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
+% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@society\ parses the options passed to this document class 
+% for the \cmd\@society. 
+% It is like \cmd\ProcessOptions*\ in that it accesses
+% \cmd\@ptionlist\{\cmd\@currname.\cmd\@currext\}.
+% Any undefined option is considered: if there is a corresponding \file{.rtx} file,
+% it will change the society accordingly
+% and define a placeholder class option for the society thus found
+% (thus preventing a spurious "option not found" message). 
+% 
+% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@\ parses the document's options
+% for any that set the \cmd\csname\ provided. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@parse@class@options@society{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{}{%
+   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
+    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
+    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+   }{}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@parse@class@options@#1{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
+   \begingroup\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
+    \@ifxundefined#1{%
+     \endgroup
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1}%
+    }%
+  }{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@parse@class@options@journal{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
+   \begingroup
+    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
+    \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+     \endgroup
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@journal\expandafter{\@journal}%
+    }%
+  }{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@parse@class@options{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
+   \begingroup
+    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
+    \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
+     \endgroup
+    }{%
+     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize}%
+    }%
+  }{%
+   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
+    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
+    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+   }{}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+% The class option \classoption{hypertext} enables the built-in hypertext capabilities,
+% which coincide with those of \classname{custom-bib}-generated BIBTeX styles
+% using the guard code \texttt{hypertext}. 
+%
+% Note that APS has these capabilities turned off by default;
+% Loading the hyperref package turns them on.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hypertext}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default handling for a document class option depends upon whether the \cmd\@society\ is 
+% defined. 
+%
+% If not, then hunt for a \file{.rtx} file with that name.
+% If it exists, then we will take this option as the name of the society, 
+% otherwise, declare the option as not used.
+% 
+% (This behavior is similar to the \LaTeX2.09 handling, where
+% one looked for a \file{.sty} file, except that 
+% in this case, we must provide for journal substyles that may be 
+% defined in the society file, or have their own journal substyle file.)
+%
+% At the point where the class file is finished loading, 
+% we then read in the society file. 
+% That file can define further class options, such as the journal substyle.
+%
+% For users, this will mean that they can specify the society and journal simply 
+% by specifying first the former and then the latter among their document class options.
+% The society \emph{must} have a corresponding \file{.rtx}.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@process@society}
+% \begin{macro}{\@process@journal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@process@pointsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\substyle@post{4-2}%
+\def\substyle@ext{rtx}%
+\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A society substyle may define its own options, via \cmd\DeclareOption. 
+%
+% At the end of this document class, we process the society file,
+% using \file{aps.rtx} if none has been specified in the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@society#1{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@society{%
+  \class@warn{No Society specified, using default society #1}%
+  \def\@society{#1}\let\@journal\@undefined
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\input\expandafter{\@society\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% A society substyle can encompass any number of journal substyles;
+% we use the following procedure to invoke the proper one.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@journal#1{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+  \class@warn{No journal specified, using default #1}%
+  \def\@journal{#1}%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@journal}%
+}%
+\def\rtx@do@substyle#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{}{\csname rtx@#1\endcsname}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Document class options \classoption{10pt}, \classoption{11pt}, and \classoption{12pt} 
+% are implemented by \revtex\ itself and determine \cmd\@pointsize. 
+% These provide formatting settings appropriate to the society's journals. 
+%
+% If not specified by the document, a value \cmd\@pointsize@default\ is used. 
+% This default can be set by the journal. Here, the society sets its default. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@pointsize#1{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
+  \def\@pointsize{#1}%
+  \class@warn{No type size specified, using default \@pointsize}%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@pointsize pt}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Class-Asserted Options}%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+% Here we establish the default document class options.
+% Those of the document itself will override these.
+%
+% \section{Procedures Dependent Upon Options}
+%
+% Here we introduce \classname{classes.dtx} definitions for 
+% the page styles that people will expect to be able to use.
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\ps@headings{%
+      \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+      \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+      \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+      \let\@mkboth\markboth
+    \def\sectionmark##1{%
+      \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
+        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+          \thesection\quad
+        \fi
+        ##1}}{}}%
+    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
+      \markright {%
+        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
+          \thesubsection\quad
+        \fi
+        ##1}}}%
+\def\ps@myheadings{%
+    \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+    \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+    \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+    \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@article}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@article@final}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@preprint}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@article{%
+    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
+    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+    \def\@oddfoot{}%
+    \def\@evenfoot{}%
+    \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps@article@final{%
+    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
+    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+    \def\@oddfoot{}%
+    \def\@evenfoot{}%
+    \let\@mkboth\markboth
+    \def\sectionmark##1{%
+      \markboth{%
+       \MakeTextUppercase{%
+        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\z@}{\thesection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
+         ##1%
+       }%
+       }{}%
+    }%
+    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
+      \markright {%
+        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\@ne}{\thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
+         ##1%
+      }%
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\heading@cr{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@preprint{%
+  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddhead{}%
+  \def\@evenhead{}%
+  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@oddhead\@empty
+\let\@evenhead\@empty
+\let\@oddfoot\@empty
+\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@putlabel}
+% Support the default meaning of \cmd\@endpage.
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+% Name of this macro (and the \cmd\label\ key) taken from 
+% \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/other/lastpage}%
+% with code optimised slightly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lastpage@putlabel{%
+ \if@filesw
+  \begingroup
+    \advance\c@page\m@ne
+    \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{LastPage}{{}{\thepage}{}{}{}}}%
+  \endgroup
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Install a procedure into document endgame processing that 
+% labels the last page of the document.
+% This is done just before the \file{.aux} file
+% is closed, and does not require a \cmd\shipout, because it writes
+% directly to the \file{.aux} file.
+% Note that we assume no further \cmd\shipout s will be done past this point.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\clear@document{%
+ \do@output@cclv{%
+  \lastpage@putlabel
+  \tally@box@size@sw{\total@text}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\providecommand\write@column@totals{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Required Packages}
+% \url{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/other/misc/url.sty}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage{url}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Incompatible Packages}
+%
+% We wait until after the preamble is processed, then check for any packages 
+% that might have been loaded which we know to be incompatible with \revtex.
+%
+% The \classname{multicol} package is incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, which replaces it.
+% The \classname{cite} package is incompatible with \classname{natbib}, which replaces its functionality.
+% The functionality of the \classname{mcite} package is provided by \classname{natbib}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \incompatible@package{cite}%
+ \incompatible@package{mcite}%
+ \incompatible@package{multicol}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Society- and Journal-Specific Code}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@journal}
+% Journal test helper, used as
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\@ifx{\@journal\journal@pra}{%
+%  <journal-specific setup>
+%\fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Journal code might like to further specify (if as yet undefined) or distinguish on
+% the following Booleans.
+%
+% Note: the journal substyle code should only alter the value of one of these Booleans if
+% the Boolean is \cmd\undefined. This convention is what makes the document's
+% options take precedence over the values set by the journal.
+% 
+% FIXME: make this table an exhaustive listing of all the parameters set by
+% the class options.
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \cmd\@pointsize      &(10|11|12), depending on the type size\\
+% \cmd\footinbib@sw    &true if footnotes are to be formatted in the bibliography\\
+% \cmd\preprintsty@sw  &true for preprint and hyperpreprint\\
+% \cmd\eqsecnum@sw     &true means that equations are numbered within sections\\
+% \cmd\groupauthors@sw &true means authors listed separately for each address\\
+% \cmd\preprint@sw     &true means to produce the preprint numbers as part of the title block\\
+% \cmd\showPACS@sw     &true means to produce the PACS as part of the title block\\
+% \cmd\showKEYS@sw     &true means to produce the keywords as part of the title block\\
+% \cmd\@affils@sw      &true means each affiliation is printed, for each author\\
+% \cmd\runinaddress@sw &true means author addresses are printed run-in\\
+% \cmd\draft@sw        &true implies that PACS will be printed\\
+% \cmd\tightenlines@sw &true if preprint single spaced\\
+% \cmd\lengthcheck@sw  &true if length checking is in effect\\
+% \cmd\byrevtex@sw     &true means to announce ``typeset by \revtex''\\
+% \cmd\titlepage@sw    &true for title is to be set on a separate page\\
+% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if two-column page grid\\
+% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if we are to automatically balance the columns of the last page\\
+% \cmd\twoside@sw      &true means to format pages for duplex printing\\
+% \cmd\floats@sw       &false means floats are migrated to end of document\\
+% \cmd\floatp@sw       &true means endfloats are set one to a page\\
+% \cmd\class@amsfonts  &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amsfonts} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
+% \cmd\class@amssymb   &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amssymb} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
+% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (\cmd\footnote) will be used\\
+% \cmd\place@bibnumber &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (inline) will be used\\
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Note: if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ are both false,
+% then `galley' style is in effect. The \classoption{galley} option invokes
+% \classoption{onecolumn}, but does not affect the \cmd\preprintsty@sw.
+%
+% Note: \cmd\paperwidth\ and \cmd\paperheight\ are not integrated into this scheme,
+% and should be selected by the document alone.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Body}
+%
+% \subsection{counters}
+% The following definitions are probably identical to those in 
+% \file{classes.dtx}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelitemi{\textbullet}
+\def\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash}
+\def\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered}
+\def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{float parameters}
+%
+% from the old aps.sty. (DPC: same as article I think)
+% AO: here, \LaTeX's standard classes fail very poorly
+% (the price of backward compatability): the values for
+% \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and \cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\
+% need to be raised to avoid creating extremely short
+% float pages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+\def\topfraction{.9}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
+\def\bottomfraction{.9}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
+\def\textfraction{.1}
+\def\floatpagefraction{.9}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
+\def\dbltopfraction{.9}
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.9}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{List Environments}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}{%
+  \let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{%
+    \itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}{%
+  \list{}{%
+    \listparindent 1.5em
+    \itemindent\listparindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quote}{%
+  \list{}{%
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+  \hspace\labelsep \normalfont\bfseries #1\unskip:%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{description}{%
+ \list{}{%
+    \labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+    \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Sectioning Commands\label{sec:secnumarabic}}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Sectioning Commands and Their Productions}%
+% The following counters are defined by LaTeX's standard document classes.
+% We do likewise, then assign flag values to the productions, awaiting
+% overrides.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{part}%
+\let\thepart\@undefined
+\newcounter{section}%
+\let\thesection\@undefined
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]%
+\let\thesubsection\@undefined
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]%
+\let\thesubsubsection\@undefined
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]%
+\let\theparagraph\@undefined
+\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]%
+\let\thesubparagraph\@undefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The procedure invoked by \cmd\setup@secnums\ provides meanings for these productions. 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\secnums@rtx}
+% \begin{macro}{\secnums@arabic}
+% These two procedures define the meanings of each of the productions
+% of the counters of the sectioning commands,
+% but only if nothing else has defined it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secnums@rtx{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection\,}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,\theparagraph\,}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\secnums@arabic{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The Acknowledgments Environment}%
+% This user-level markup produces a head introducing 
+% the acknowledgments, and acts as a wrapper for the text.
+% In this implementation, it is an unnumbered section,
+% but appears within the toc.
+%
+% For compatiability's sake, we implement it under the alternative
+% spelling \env{acknowledgements}.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{acknowledgments}{%
+ \acknowledgments@sw{%
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\acknowledgmentsname}%
+ }{%
+  \par
+  \phantomsection
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\acknowledgmentsname}%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \par
+}%
+\@booleantrue\acknowledgments@sw
+\newenvironment{acknowledgements}{%
+ \replace@environment{acknowledgements}{acknowledgments}%
+}{%
+ \endacknowledgments
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Part Opener}%
+% section setup copied verbatim from revtex3 aps/osa.
+% Does not explicitly depend on pointsize options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\part{\par
+   \addvspace{4ex}%
+   \@afterindentfalse
+   \secdef\@part\@spart}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
+        \refstepcounter{part}%
+        \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ }{%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+    \parindent \z@ \raggedright
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
+      \Large \bf \partname~\thepart%
+      \par\nobreak
+    }{}%
+    \huge \bf
+    #2%
+    \markboth{}{}\par
+ \endgroup
+   \nobreak
+   \vskip 3ex
+   \@afterheading
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@spart#1{{\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \huge \bf
+    #1\par}
+    \nobreak
+    \vskip 3ex
+    \@afterheading}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% Here are the class default definitions for sectioning commands.
+% A society or a journal substyle will likely override these definitions.
+%
+% In doing so, you can customize the formatting for a particular level by defining,
+% e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom@section\ or \cmd\@subsectioncntformat.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {\normalfont\small\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Math}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
+% We change the production of the equation counter so that 
+% we can accomodate the \classoption{eqsecnum} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theequation{%
+ \theequation@prefix\arabic{equation}%
+}%
+\def\theequation@prefix{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Type Size-Dependent Settings}
+%
+% \subsection{All Point Sizes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lineskip 1pt
+\normallineskip 1pt
+\def\baselinestretch{1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@lowpenalty   51
+\@medpenalty  151
+\@highpenalty 301
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
+\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\arraycolsep 3pt
+\tabcolsep 2pt
+\arrayrulewidth .4pt
+\doublerulesep 2pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\@mpfootins = 0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fboxsep  = 3.0pt
+\fboxrule = 0.4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Figures}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{figure}
+% We define the \env{figure} environment.
+% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
+% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{figure}
+               {\@float{figure}}
+               {\end@float}
+\newenvironment{figure*}
+               {\@dblfloat{figure}}
+               {\end@dblfloat}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% If caption is one line long, to be centered; if lines turn, then set justified.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\abovecaptionskip
+\newlength\belowcaptionskip
+\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+% There is a hook \cmd\@caption@fignum@sep\ for determining 
+% the separator following the float number, e.g., ``Fig.1''.
+% Formerly, we had defined it to be ``: '', now the colon has been replace by a period (full stop). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \par
+% \nobreak
+  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \begingroup
+   \small\rmfamily
+   \sbox\@tempboxa{%
+    \let\\\heading@cr
+    \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}%
+   }%
+   \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\hsize}{%
+    \begingroup
+     \samepage
+     \flushing
+     \let\footnote\@footnotemark@gobble
+     \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}\par
+    \endgroup
+   }{%
+     \global \@minipagefalse
+     \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+   }%
+  \endgroup
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}%
+\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
+ \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
+  {#1}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
+}%
+\def\@footnotemark@gobble{%
+ \@footnotemark
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@gobble@opt@i}{\@gobble}%
+}%
+\def\@gobble@opt@i[#1]#2{}%
+\def\@mpmakefntext#1{%
+ \flushing
+ \parindent=1em
+ \noindent
+ \hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
+ #1%
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{. }%
+\def\setfloatlink{\def\float@link}%
+\let\float@link\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
+% The figure counter and float placement defaults.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{figure}
+\renewcommand \thefigure {\@arabic\c@figure}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
+% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
+% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
+% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname\hbox{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{figure} Floats}%
+%
+% We determine if figures are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printfigures\ time. 
+% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \do@if@floats{figure}{.fgx}%
+}%
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+ \printfigures\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\printfigures}
+% The user-level command \cmd\printfigures\ determines
+% where the figures are to appear in a document in which
+% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
+% insert a \cmd\printfigures\ command, 
+% the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
+% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
+% it amounts to a no-op.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printfigures{%
+ \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+ {%
+  \print@float{figure}{\oneapage}%
+ }{%
+  \print@float{figure}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat@prep}
+% We patch into the procedure \cmd\@xfloat@prep. 
+% This patch applies to all floats (not \env{figure} alone)
+% and makes the type center.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@xfloat@prep{%
+ \appdef\@parboxrestore{\centering}%
+%\let\@makefnmark\@makefnmark@latex
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Tables}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+%
+% DPC: More or less taken from \file{revtex2} \file{aps.sty},
+% but using dcolumn for decimal alignment.
+% \begin{environment}{table}
+% We define the \env{table} environment.
+% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
+% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{table}
+               {\@float{table}}
+               {\end@float}
+\newenvironment{table*}
+               {\@dblfloat{table}}
+               {\end@dblfloat}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
+% Table counter and default float placement declarations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{table}
+\renewcommand\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
+% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
+% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
+% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname\hbox{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\table@hook}
+% \begin{macro}{\squeezetable}
+% Assign a meaning to the hook installed into float processing.
+%
+% By default floats are \cmd\small. The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration
+% makes them smaller (\cmd\scriptsize). In general you can locally
+% redefine \cmd\table@hook\ to be whatever you like.
+% (DPC: |\Huge\color{magenta}|\ldots?)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\table@hook{\small}%
+\def\squeezetable{\def\table@hook{\scriptsize}}%
+\appdef\@floatboxreset{\table@hook}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{table} Floats}%
+%
+% After all packages are loaded, we decide
+% if tables will float or will be deferred until \cmd\printtables\ time.
+%
+% We also deal with the possibility of \env{longtable} environments.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@table@environments{%
+ \floats@sw{}{%
+  \let@environment{longtable@float}{longtable}%
+  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@write}%
+  \let@environment{longtable*@float}{longtable*}%
+  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@write}%
+  \let@environment{turnpage@float}{turnpage}%
+  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@write}%
+ }%
+ \do@if@floats{table}{.tbx}%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \set@table@environments
+}%
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+ \printtables\relax
+}%
+\newenvironment{longtable@write}{%
+ \write@@float{longtable}{table}%
+}{%
+ \endwrite@float
+}%
+\newenvironment{longtable*@write}{%
+ \write@@float{longtable*}{table}%
+}{%
+ \endwrite@float
+}%
+\newenvironment{turnpage@write}{%
+ \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\begin{turnpage}}%
+}{%
+ \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\end{turnpage}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printtables}
+% The user-level command \cmd\printtables\ determines
+% where the tables are to appear in a document in which
+% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% If the user invokes the \classoption{nofloats} and fails to
+% insert a \cmd\printtables\ command, 
+% the tables will be printed at the end of the document.
+% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
+% it amounts to a no-op.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printtables{%
+ \begingroup
+  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@float}%
+  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@float}%
+  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@anchored}%
+  \prepdef\longtable{\trigger@float@par}%
+  \expandafter\prepdef\csname longtable*\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}%
+  \expandafter\prepdef\csname table@floats\endcsname{%
+   \onecolumngrid@push
+  }%
+  \expandafter\appdef\csname endtable@floats\endcsname{%
+   \onecolumngrid@pop
+  }%
+  \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+  {%
+   \print@float{table}{\oneapage}%
+  }{%
+   \print@float{table}{}%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\newenvironment{turnpage@anchored}{%
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \setbox\z@\vbox to\textwidth\bgroup
+  \columnwidth\textheight
+}{%
+  \vfil
+ \egroup
+ \rotatebox{90}{\box\z@}%
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Videos}
+%\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{video}
+% We define the \env{video} environment analogously to the 
+% \env{figure} and \env{table} environments; it is intended to contain a video.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{video}
+ {\@float{video}}
+ {\end@float}%
+\newenvironment{video*}
+ {\@dblfloat{video}}
+ {\end@dblfloat}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thevideo}
+% The video counter, float placement defaults, strings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{video}
+\renewcommand \thevideo {\@arabic\c@video}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% File extension and localizable strings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ext@video{lov}%
+\def\fname@video{Video}%
+\def\lovname{List of Videos}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Float type and default placement. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@video{tbp}%
+\def\ftype@video{4}%
+\def\fnum@video{\fname@video~\thevideo}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\c@float@type{}{%
+  \global\setcounter{float@type}{8}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname\hbox{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The documentation for the \classname{hyperref} package, \file{hyperref.dtx} states:
+% ``classes or package which introduce new elements need to define 
+%   an equivalent  \verb+\theH<name>+  for every  \verb+\the<name>+''
+% We do accordingly here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\theHvideo\thevideo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% But \file{hyperref.dtx} goes on to say, 
+% ``We do make a trap to make \verb+\theH<name>+ be the same as \verb+\arabic{<name>}+,
+% if \verb+\theH<name>+ is not defined\ldots''
+% However, it's not doing that right now (as of 6.77u), 
+% and I cannot find any such code in there anymore.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listofvideos{\print@toc{lov}}%
+\let\l@video\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{video} Floats}%
+%
+% We determine if videos are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printvideos\ time. 
+% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \do@if@floats{video}{.vdx}%
+}%
+\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
+ \printvideos\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\printvideos}
+% The user-level command \cmd\printvideos\ determines
+% where the videos are to appear in a document in which
+% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
+% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
+% insert a \cmd\printvideos\ command, 
+% the videos will be printed at the end of the document.
+% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
+% it amounts to a no-op.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printvideos{%
+ \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
+ {%
+  \print@float{video}{\oneapage}%
+ }{%
+  \print@float{video}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Tabular}
+% Every APS tabular has a double (Scotch) rule above and below.
+% The column specifier ``d'' is implemented using the \classname{dcolumn}
+% package, if available.
+% FIXME: always load dcolumn!
+% \begin{macro}{\tabular@hook}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular@hook}
+% \begin{environment}{ruledtabular}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endtabular@hook{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\RequirePackage{dcolumn}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{dcolumn}{%
+  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname NC@find@d\endcsname{}{%
+   \newcolumntype{d}{D{.}{.}{-1}}%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline}%
+\def\colrule{\hline}%
+\def\botrule{\hline\hline}%
+\newenvironment{ruledtabular}{%
+ \def\array@default{v}%
+ \appdef\tabular@hook{\def\@halignto{to\hsize}}%
+ \let\tableft@skip@default\tableft@skip
+ \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@float
+ \let\tabmid@skip@default\tabmid@skip
+ \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@float
+ \let\tabright@skip@default\tabright@skip
+ \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@float
+ \let\array@row@pre@default\array@row@pre
+ \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@float
+ \let\array@row@pst@default\array@row@pst
+ \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@float
+ \appdef\array@row@rst{%
+  \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@default
+  \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@default
+  \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@default
+  \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@default
+  \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@default
+  \appdef\tabular@hook{\let\@halignto\@empty}%
+ }%
+}{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Footnote Text}
+%
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% We customize the presentation of the footnote mark: it will not be italic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \parindent1em%
+  \noindent
+  \hb@xt@1.8em{%
+   \hss\@makefnmark
+  }%
+  #1%
+  \par
+}%
+\def\@makefnmark{%
+ \hbox{%
+  \@textsuperscript{%
+   \normalfont\@thefnmark
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Citations, Bibliography, Endnotes}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}
+%
+% Load Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package,
+% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib}
+%
+% Note that \classname{natbib} assumes that it loads
+% over a document class, such as the \classname{article} class, 
+% that has already defined \env{thebibliography} and \cmd\@listi.
+%
+% Note also that \classname{natbib} also installs a command
+% \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ which presumes
+% that the proper \cmd\bibpunct\ command has been issued.
+% 
+% Note that the macro \cmd\NAT@sort\ controls 
+% whether citations are left alone (\cmd\NAT@sort=0), sorted (\cmd\NAT@sort=1), or sorted and compressed (\cmd\NAT@sort=2).
+% Since we give \classname{natbib} the \classoption{sort\&compress} option,
+% if you prefer \classoption{sort}, you need only \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\@ne.
+% However, if you prefer the effect of having neither \classoption{sort} nor \classoption{sort\&compress},
+% you must \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\z@ and you must also define 
+% \cmd\let\cmd\NAT@cmprs\ to be \cmd\z@.
+%
+% As of version 8.2, \classname{natbib} now no longer binds at the point where it is read in.
+% This means that we can freely change \cmd\NAT@sort, \cmd\NAT@cmprs, and the new
+% \cmd\NAT@merge. Henceforth, we require that this later version be used.
+%
+% For other \classname{natbib} customizations, you may proceed as if you were going to use
+% the \file{natbib.cfg} file: anything that you can modify by this means is fair game.
+% Once \revtex\ is finished loading, you can assert any definitions for \classname{natbib} that you wish.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rev@citet}
+% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealp}
+% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealpnum}
+% We define variants on \classname{natbib}'s commands \cmd\citet, \cmd\citealp, and \cmd\citealpnum. 
+% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ uses a numerical citation.
+% \cmd\rev@citealp\ and \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ are the aliases of \cmd\onlinecite,
+% \cmd\rev@citet\ that of \cmd\textcite.
+% 
+% In each case, we invoke \cmd\rtx@swap@citea\ to effect different productions between 
+% multiple arguments to the \cmd\cite\ command.
+%
+% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ provides textual citations where superscript citations are the default.
+% These should be accessible via the \cmd\citet\ command.
+%
+% Therefore we remember how to do a numerical citation
+% even when the superscript citation has been selected.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
+\expandafter\rev@citet
+\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
+  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
+              \csname citet \endcsname
+}%
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
+\expandafter\rev@citealp
+\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
+  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
+              \csname citealp \endcsname
+}%
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
+\expandafter\rev@citealpnum
+\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citenum
+  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
+              \csname citealp \endcsname
+}%
+\def\rtx@swap@citenum{%
+  \rtx@swap@citea
+  \let\@cite\NAT@citenum
+  \let\NAT@mbox\mbox
+  \let\citeyear\NAT@citeyear
+  \let\NAT@space\NAT@spacechar
+}%
+\def\g@bblefirsttoken{%
+ \expandafter\true@sw
+ \expandafter\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citesuper}
+% We prepare to redefine \classname{natbib}'s procedure \cmd\NAT@citesuper,
+% which is executed when setting a superscript citation.
+% The \cmd\hspace\ is removed: in any case, it
+% should really be \cmd\hspace*, to prevent an unwanted pagebreak.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\rtx@citesuper[3]{%
+ \ifNAT@swa
+  \leavevmode
+  \unskip
+% \hspace{1\p@}%
+  \textsuperscript{\normalfont#1}%
+  \if*#3*\else\ (#3)\fi
+ \else
+  #1%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark@cite}
+% We define a procedure that will set a footnote mark the same way that
+% a citation is set. If footnotes are put in the bibliography with
+% \cmd\footinbib@sw, then the corresponding mark should look the same
+% as the result of a \cmd\cite. This is how we do it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark@cite{\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\@cite{{\@thefnmark}}{}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@bibsection}
+% Prepare to override \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\bibsection.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@bibsection{%
+ \@ifx@empty\refname{%
+  \par
+ }{%
+% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@swap@citea}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@close}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@box}
+% The procedures |\rtx@def@citea|, |\rtx@def@citea@close|, and |\rtx@def@citea@box| 
+% can take over the management of \classname{natbib}'s |\@citea| macro to effect more sophisticated
+% behavior of the punctuation between textual citations. The switch is performed by \cmd\rtx@swap@citea.
+%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+% In these procedures, we use \cmd\count@\ to count the number of arguments of the \cmd\cite\ command,
+% and we use \cmd\c@NAT@ctr\ to keep track of which argument we are processing.
+% The latter counter is created by \classname{natbib} and used there solely in bibliography processing,
+% where it keeps track of the reference number. 
+% We take over its use in these macros, but only locally; therefore these procedures should work properly, even within the bibliography.
+%FIXME: check whether this is true!
+%
+% Because we are using a scratch counter \cmd\count@, we are vulnerable to other \TeX\ programmers
+% who patch in to \classname{natbib}'s processing and who might use that counter at the same time we are doing so.
+% This is a potential source of trouble for us. 
+%FIXME: store the value of \cmd\count@\ in a private \cmd\csname!
+%
+% Note that \cmd\rtx@def@citea\ begins the same as \cmd\NAT@def@citea, which it replaces, 
+% then makes further decisions based on the values of the counters. 
+%
+% Note also that, in \classname{natbib}, the replacement part of \cmd\NAT@def@citea@close\ could be rewritten as
+% \cmd\NAT@def@citea\cmd\prepdef\cmd\@citea\verb+{+\cmd\NAT@@close\verb+}+, which 
+% would them obviate the need for us to override its meaning. 
+%
+% Note, too, the effect of \cmd\rtx@def@citea@box, which replaces \cmd\NAT@def@citea@box,
+% is almost the same as the latter, except the entire \cmd\@citea\ is given as the argument
+% of \cmd\NAT@mbox.
+%
+% Finally, bear in mind that the English (and some American editors) do not place a comma
+% before the ``and''; our procedures do (but they could be rewritten with that convention). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@swap@citea{%
+ \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
+ \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
+ \let\NAT@def@citea@box\rtx@def@citea@box
+}%
+\def\rtx@def@citea{%
+ \def\@citea{\NAT@separator\NAT@space}%
+ \advance\c@NAT@ctr\@ne
+ \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+  \@ifnum{\c@NAT@ctr=\count@}{\appdef\@citea{\NAT@conj\NAT@space}}{}%
+ }{%
+  \def\@citea{\NAT@space\NAT@conj\NAT@space}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\rtx@def@citea@close{%
+ \rtx@def@citea
+ \prepdef\@citea{\NAT@@close}%
+}%
+\def\rtx@def@citea@box{%
+ \rtx@def@citea@close
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citea\expandafter{\expandafter\NAT@mbox\expandafter{\@citea}}%
+}%
+\def\NAT@conj{and}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BibitemShut}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibAnnote}
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
+% We remember a temporary patch to \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\BibitemShut.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NAT@BibitemShut#1{%
+ \def\@bibstop{#1}%
+ \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
+ \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
+ \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following is a bug fix to \classname{natbib} version 8.31b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BibitemShut@ltx#1{%
+ \unskip
+ \def\@bibstop{#1}%
+ \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
+ \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
+ \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[3]{%
+%  \BibitemShut{#1}%
+%  \def\@tempa{#3}\@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{}{%
+%   \begin{quotation}\noindent
+%    \textsc{Key:}\ #2\\\textsc{Annotation:}\ \@tempa
+%   \end{quotation}%
+%  }%
+%  \ignorespaces
+%}%
+%\def\@bibitemShut{}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{thebibliography}{}{}%
+\let\@listi\@empty
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage[sort&compress]{natbib}[2009/11/07 8.31a (PWD, AO)]%
+ \let@environment{NAT@thebibliography}{thebibliography}%
+ \let@environment{thebibliography}{rtx@thebibliography}%
+ \let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
+ \let\NAT@citesuper\rtx@citesuper
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetup}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibnumfmt}
+% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
+% and gently coax \classname{natbib} into using
+% the formatting procedures that \emph{we} want it to use.
+%
+% This way of setting up \env{thebibliography} 
+% automatically sets the label width based on
+% the largest number used within the bibliography.
+% This scheme will not work properly using the
+% author/year style of bib entry, though.
+%
+% We define \cmd\bibnumfmt\ to be \cmd\place@bibnumber, which is a macro
+% managed by \revtex. If the document defines \cmd\bibnumfmt, then that
+% definition will be used instead, which is what the \classname{natbib}
+% package gives as its programming interface.
+%
+% We set \cmd\NAT@merge\ to \cmd\tw@, which turns on \classname{natbib}'s
+% \classname{mcite} capabilities. This is the default setting. 
+% If numerical citations are not to be used, then \cmd\NAT@merge\ 
+% should be set to \cmd\@ne\ (syntax is still enabled, but semantics are turned off). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibsection\rtx@bibsection
+\let\NATx@bibsetnum\NAT@bibsetnum
+\def\NAT@bibsetnum#1{%
+ \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
+ \NATx@bibsetnum{\ref{LastBibItem}}%
+}%
+\let\NATx@bibsetup\NAT@bibsetup
+\def\NAT@bibsetup{%
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\listparindent}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}%
+ \NATx@bibsetup
+}%
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+\let\NATx@bibnumfmt\bibnumfmt
+\def\bibnumfmt{\place@bibnumber}%
+\let\NAT@merge\thr@@
+\let\NAT@citeyear\citeyear
+\let\onlinecite\rev@citealp
+\let\textcite\rev@citet
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following is needed until \classname{natbib} is at 8.31b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifx{\BibitemShut\NAT@BibitemShut}{%
+ \class@info{Repairing natbib's \string\BibitemShut}%
+ \let\BibitemShut\BibitemShut@ltx
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+% We arrange for the selection of bibliography style
+% to occur either due to the document's explicit
+% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ statement or
+% via the journal substyle.
+%
+% Note that \revtex\ is incompatible with 
+% any package that patches \cmd\bibliographystyle.
+% Since \classname{natbib} does this, we need a fix.
+%
+% The Boolean \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ signifies that the document  contains explicit
+% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup. If, on the contrary, the bibliography style is set by
+% the the society or the journal, then no explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command appears in the document instance.
+% In this case \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ will be \cmd\false@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
+\def\bibliographystyle{\@booleantrue\bibliographystyle@sw\def\@bibstyle}%
+\@booleanfalse\bibliographystyle@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1j}{2009/11/03}{(AO, 551) Punctuation at end of reference when optional arguments to the cite key are given.}
+% The following had been bug fixes to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\bibitemStop{\@bibitemShut}%
+%\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
+% \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue
+% \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% The following are alterations to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a to 
+% accommodate the possible space character preceding \cmd\BibitemShut,
+% and to handle the case of merged references, where the first ends with a stop character. 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
+ \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue@Stop
+ \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitemNoStop{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{.\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitemContinue{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitemContinue@Stop{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
+% We used to customize one of the productions of \classname{natbib}, but no longer.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\let\bibitemContinue\bibitemContinue@rtx
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Here ends the code to be executed at \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+% Redefine a macro of \classname{natbib} so that merged references are separated with a semicolon.
+% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\bibitemContinue@rtx{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\onlinecite}
+% \begin{macro}{\textcite}
+% We extend \classname{natbib}'s syntax with two commands to set a citation
+% on the baseline (as opposed to superscripted) and as text (rather than parenthetical), respectively.
+% A journal substyle that makes citations be superscripted or parenthetical as the case may be, should ensure
+% that the author has continued access to these two styles. 
+%
+% Note that the society or journal substyle override the meanings of \cmd\@onlinecite\ or
+% \cmd\@textcite\ given here.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\onlinecite{\@onlinecite}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textcite{\@textcite}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% Provide a hook for supplying Bib\TeX\ a bibliographic database that may contain, say, 
+% footnotes.
+% 
+% Note that Bib\TeX\ chokes if the argument of the \cmd\bibdata\ command has null fields,
+% hence these tests.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibliography@latex\bibliography
+\def\bibliography#1{%
+ \auto@bib@empty
+ \begingroup
+  \let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty
+  \@ifx@empty{\pre@bibdata}{%
+   \bibliography@latex{#1}%
+  }{%
+   \@if@empty{#1}{%
+    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata}%
+   }{%
+    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata,#1}%
+   }%
+  }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\let\pre@bibdata\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{rtx@thebibliography}%
+% \begin{macro}{\present@bibnote}%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+% We put a tail patch into \cmd\thebibliogrphy\ and
+% a headpatch into \cmd\endthebibliography.
+%
+% Here we provide a default treatment for frontmatter notes 
+% deferred to the bibliography; a journal substyle 
+% might want to override the definition of \cmd\present@bibnote.
+%
+% We make provisions for the case where there are no \cmd\bibitem s 
+% for the bibliography: we produce no bibliography head at all.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{rtx@thebibliography}[1]{%
+ \NAT@thebibliography{#1}%
+ \let\@TBN@opr\present@bibnote
+ \@FMN@list
+}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line was commented out:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\@endnotesinbib
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ directive has been moved from the begin processing to the end processing.
+% This means that the content of the \env{thebibliography} environment can itself prevent the 
+% automatic reading in of the .bbl file. This would be needed when the user has pasted in the 
+% content of the .bbl file into the document itself, something required by APS and AIP editorial direction.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \auto@bib@innerbib
+ \edef\@currentlabel{\arabic{NAT@ctr}}%
+ \label{LastBibItem}%
+ \endNAT@thebibliography
+ \aftergroup\auto@bib@empty
+}%
+\def\present@bibnote#1#2{%
+ \item[%
+  \textsuperscript{%
+   \normalfont
+   \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.#1}\hyper@anchorend}%
+   \begingroup
+    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+    \frontmatter@thefootnote
+   \endgroup
+  }%
+ ]#2\par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line was commented out:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\global\let\NAT@bibitem@first@sw\@secondoftwo
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{write@bibliographystyle}
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+% We wish to delay committing the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ until as late as possible.
+% The journal substyle will define a default bibliography style, and 
+% the document's explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, if any, will override that default.
+%
+% The \cmd\bibstyle\ command is allowed appear quite late in the \file{.aux} file. 
+% We now delay the automatic writing of the \cmd\bibstyle\ command to the end of the job.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\write@bibliographystyle\ tests whether a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command has 
+% already been given.
+% If not, it effectively executes the needed \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, then neutralizes itself
+% (we only need to do this once per job).
+%
+% If the document lacks explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup, we execute
+% \cmd\@bibdataout@rev, a hook for \revtex-aware processing. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write@bibliographystyle{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@bibstyle{}{%
+  \expandafter\bibliographystyle@latex\expandafter{\@bibstyle}%
+  \bibliographystyle@sw{}{\@bibdataout@rev}%
+ }%
+ \global\let\write@bibliographystyle\relax
+}%
+\AtEndDocument{\write@bibliographystyle}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@@citetp}
+% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citex}
+% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@let}
+% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@end}
+% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@swap}
+% We wish to extend \classname{natbib} to move spaces and citations around
+% a superscript-style citation, imitating Donald Arseneau's \classname{cite} package
+% with the \classoption{super}.
+%
+% The \cmd\rtx@@citetp\ procedure is substituted for \cmd\NAT@@citetp;
+% it then calls the \cmd\rtx@citex\ procedure and implements the features of the
+% \classoption{citeautoscript} class option.
+% In the end, \cmd\@citex\ is called with its customary parameters. 
+%
+% The document should be marked up as if citations were \emph{not} superscripted,
+% and then if you select a journal substyle that has superscripted citations, \revtex\ will do its best
+% to alter the formatting of the \cmd\cite s to accomodate superscript style.
+%
+% Only citations set as superscript are affected by this procedure,
+% because we check \cmd\@cite\ against \cmd\NAT@citesuper. 
+%
+% Here's a subtle point: when is the argument of \cmd\super@cite@swap\ not the same as the token \cmd\@let@token?
+% Answer: when the latter is \cmd\@sptoken! This case has to be handled separately.
+% 
+% Note that whether a punctuation is movable is determined by the definition
+% of a particular control sequence name.
+% A society or journal can alter things: to remove a character from the set,
+% do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\relax.
+% To add a character to the set, do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Implementation note: due to a \TeX\ peculiarity, we have to check for the case
+% where \cmd\@let@token\ is a space token \emph{before} we parse forward.
+% At issue is the corner case where an end of file is at hand. If we 
+% were to let \cmd\super@cite@swap\ parse forward, we would encounter a \TeX\ end-of-file
+% error. Note that the test will be true in many distinct cases:
+% the file ends, the next character is a line terminator, the next character is a space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@@citetp[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\rtx@citex[#1]}{\rtx@citex[][#1]}}%
+\def\rtx@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
+ \begingroup
+  \def\@tempa{[#1][#2]{#3}}%
+  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
+   \leavevmode
+   \skip@\lastskip
+   \unskip
+   \super@cite@let
+  }{%
+   \super@cite@end
+  }%
+}%
+\def\super@cite@let{%
+ \futurelet\@let@token\super@cite@check
+}%
+\def\super@cite@end{%
+ \aftergroup\@citex\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa
+}%
+\def\super@cite@check{%
+ \@ifx{\@let@token\@sptoken}{%
+  \super@cite@end
+ }{%
+  \super@cite@swap
+ }%
+}%
+\long\def\super@cite@swap#1{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname rtx@automove#1\endcsname\@empty}{%
+  #1%
+  \super@cite@let
+ }{%
+  \super@cite@end
+  #1%
+ }%
+}%
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove.\endcsname\@empty
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove,\endcsname\@empty
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove:\endcsname\@empty
+\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove;\endcsname\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following must execute only after \classname{natbib} is loaded and has set
+% up its parameters (which it does at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time).
+% If superscript citations have been selected, and 
+% if the \classoption{citeautoscript} class option has been selected, 
+% we patch into \classname{natbib}'s mechanism to migrate punctuation around the 
+% citation, as in class \classname{cite} with the \classoption{superscript} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \citeautoscript@sw{%
+  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
+   \let\NAT@@citetp\rtx@@citetp
+  }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Resolve an incompatability between \classname{natbib} and \classname{listings}.
+% The latter package tests \cmd\chapter (which has now been \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ as a side effect \classname{natbib}'s use of \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifundefined).
+%
+% We couch our fix in such terms that will not be disruptive if \cmd\chapter\ is actually defined at this point.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\@ifx{\chapter\relax}{\let\chapter\@undefined}{}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{endnote}s and \cs{rtx@bibnote}s}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mini@note}
+% \begin{macro}{\save@note}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% QUERY: how do footnotes get thrown to the bibliography. \cmd\footinbib@sw\ appears to be irrelevant. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mini@note{\save@note\mini@notes}%Implicit #2
+\def\save@note#1#2{%
+  \stepcounter\@mpfn
+  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+  \@footnotemark
+  \expandafter\g@addto@macro
+  \expandafter#1%
+  \expandafter{%
+  \expandafter \@@footnotetext
+  \expandafter {\@thefnmark}{#2}%
+              }%
+}%
+\long\def\@@footnotetext#1{\def\@thefnmark{#1}\@footnotetext}%
+\let\mini@notes\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endnote}
+% A version of footnote that appears in the bibliography, or where \cmd\printendnotes\ appears.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@endnote{%
+% \begingroup
+%  \aftergroup\@footnotemark
+%  \aftergroup\@endnotetext
+%  \@ifnextchar[{%
+%   \@xendnote
+%  }{%
+%   \stepcounter{footnote}%
+%   \protected@xdef\@tempa{\thefootnote}%
+%   \expandafter\@xendnote\expandafter[\the\c@footnote]%
+% }%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xendnote}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\unused@xendnote[#1]{%
+%  \begingroup
+%   \c@footnote#1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% New for 4.1
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%   \unrestored@protected@xdef\@endnotelabel{Note\thefootnote}%
+%   \authoryear@sw{%
+%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\noexpand\ref{\@endnotelabel}}%
+%   }{%
+%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\@endnotelabel}%
+%   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Was:
+% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{endnote\thefootnote}%
+% End 4.1 changes
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%  \endgroup
+% \endgroup
+%}%
+%\def\@endnotemark{%
+% \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rev@citemark#1{%
+ \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
+}%
+\def\rev@endtext#1{%
+ \let\@endnotelabel\@thefnmark
+ \@endnotetext
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endnote@ext}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@app}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@ext}
+% The macro \cmd\endnote@ext\ is the file extension for the auxiliary file holding footnotes.
+% The \cmd\bibdata@app\ and \cmd\bibdata@ext\ macros are used to form the name of a
+% Bib\TeX\ database file holding footnotes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endnote@ext{.end}%
+\def\bibdata@app{Notes}%
+\def\bibdata@ext{bib}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% The procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ writes a Bib\TeX\ .bib file for the purpose
+% of insering a footnote into the (numbered, unsorted) bibliography.
+%
+% We need to define \cmd\pre@bibdata\ to be 
+% \cmd\jobname\cmd\endnote@ext, and we probably should define \cmd\endnote@ext\ to 
+% be something like ``Notes.bib''.
+%
+% In each case, the material to be written out requires robustification, provided by \cmd\endnote@relax.
+% The commands \cmd\label, \cmd\index, and \cmd\glossary,
+% which are robustified for \cmd\markright\ and \cmd\addcontentsline,
+% are likewise robustified here.
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext@note\ is the alias for \cmd\@endnotetext\ when the endnotes are to be
+% processed separately from the bibliography (generally true when citations are not sorted).
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\long\def\unused@endnotetext@note#1{%
+%  \@ifxundefined\@endnoteout{%
+%    \newwrite\@endnoteout
+%    \gdef\endnote@stream{\jobname\endnote@ext}%
+%    \immediate\openout\@endnoteout\endnote@stream\relax
+%  }{}%
+%  \begingroup
+%    \endnote@relax
+%    \immediate\write\@endnoteout{\string\@doendnote{\@endnotelabel}{#1}}%
+%  \endgroup
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \cmd\@doendnote\ is obsolete.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@doendnote#1#2{\bibitem{#1}#2}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
+% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ is the operative procedure\ when the endnotes are to be
+% collated in with the other references, typically true when numerical citations are being used.
+% The technique involves writing a .bib file (\cmd\@bibdataout) with each endnote typed as 
+% a \texttt{@FOOTNOTE} entry. 
+%
+% Timing note: doing \cmd\openout\ should be deferred until the beginning of the document,
+% as is done here. This allows one to make a format (\filename{.fmt}) file out of this class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@endnotetext#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \endnote@relax
+    \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+     @FOOTNOTE{%
+      \@endnotelabel,%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{key} field is recommended in cases where there is no author (see \filename{btxdoc}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      key="\@endnotelabel",%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{note} field is simply the content of the footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      note="#1"%
+     }%
+    }%
+  \endgroup
+}%
+\newwrite\@bibdataout
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endnote@relax}
+% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\endnote@relax\ robustifies commands that ought not to be expanded when
+% the endnote is written out.
+% Note the similarity between \cmd\endnote@relax\ and  \cmd\protected@write.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endnote@relax{%
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \let\cite \relax \let\ref  \relax \let\pageref \relax
+ \let\(    \relax \let\)    \relax \let\\       \relax
+ \let~\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\let\protect\noexpand
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \protect \@unexpandable@protect
+ \newlinechar`\^^M%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\newlinechar`\ %
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\begin\relax \let\end\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+%\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Improve control over display of e-print ids in bibliography.}%
+% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
+% The hook is available for use by a society to place its own @CONTROL record in the \cmd\@bibdataout\ stream.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{\@bibdataout@init}%
+\def\@bibdataout@init{%
+ \immediate\openout\@bibdataout\pre@bibdata.\bibdata@ext\relax
+}%
+\def\@bibdataout@rev{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+% The citation key (REVTEX42Control) is effectively a version number,
+% which the \filename{.bst} can use to interpret the bib entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   REVTEX42Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say if we want the \texttt{eprint} field disabled. Otherwise accept the default of the \filename{.bst}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \eprint@enable@sw{}{,eprint="1"}%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{REVTEX42Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printendnotes}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+% We have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX, so the \cmd\printendnotes\ command now does nothing.
+%
+% Moving footnotes to the bibliogrphy is now accomplished through 
+% the automatic generation of a job BiB\TeX\ database (called \cmd\pre@bibdata) containing the footnotes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\printendnotes{%
+ \class@warn{The \string\printendnotes\space command no longer serves any function. Please remove it from your document.}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbib}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbibliography}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% We define a function \cmd\@endnotesinbib,
+% and a variant \cmd\@endnotesinbibliography.
+% The former is invoked at the start of 
+% the end processing for \enve{thebibliography};
+% the latter is a synonym.
+%
+% The procedure typesets the footnotes that are to 
+% appear in the bibliography; the default is to
+% simply arrange for the footnote counter to be
+% reset at the start of the document.
+%
+% Note that this code make the assumption that 
+% the counter used in \env{thebibliography} is \cmd\c@NAT@ctr.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+%
+% Here is the sole place where \cmd\footinbib@sw\ has an effect, other code simple assigning its value.
+% If it is false, or \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true, then footnotes are handled by the default mechanism.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \authoryear@sw{}{%
+   \ltx@footnote@push
+   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
+   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The endnotes facility has been removed. 
+% Also, there is no need to queue up \cmd\auto@bib\ here, since it is always queued up elsewhere. 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
+%  \let\printendnotes\relax
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx@footnote@push{%
+ \let\ltx@footmark@latex\ltx@footmark
+ \let\ltx@foottext@latex\ltx@foottext
+ \let\thempfn@latex\thempfn
+ \def\ltx@footnote@pop{%
+  \let\ltx@footmark\ltx@footmark@latex
+  \let\ltx@foottext\ltx@foottext@latex
+  \let\thempfn\thempfn@latex
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The switchover to setting footnotes in the bibliography
+% changes the meaning of \cmd\footnote\ and
+% substitutes the synonym for \cmd\@endnotesinbib. 
+%
+% We arrange for the procedure \cmd\make@footnote@endnote\ to be executed
+% at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time (we mustn't do this earlier because
+% the meaning of \cmd\@footnotemark\ must not be changed before then, 
+% for the sake of \file{ltxutil.dtx}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \make@footnote@endnote
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib}
+% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\test@bbl@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitem@set}
+% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@innerbib}
+% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography@nogroup}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+% Under some circumstances, we must typeset the bibliography automatically.
+% If the document requires footnotes to be  set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{footinbib}), 
+% or that frontmatter footnotes be set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{bibnotes}), 
+% but contains no explicit \cmd\bibliography\ statement.
+%
+% Note that this facility is not able to work more than once per document.
+% If multiple bibliographys are required (e.g., per article), it will be the responsibility of the journal style
+% to restore \cmd\auto@bib\ to its original meaning so it can be re-invoked.
+% 
+% In procedure \cmd\auto@bib, we first test for the presence of frontmatter footnotes deferred to the bibliography.
+% If none, we further test for the presence of \cmd\bibitem\ commands in the job's \filename{.bbl} file.
+% If either condition is met, we ask for a bibliography. 
+% We know that the document itself lacks a \cmd\bibliography\ statement, 
+% so we know the argument of the \cmd\bibliography\ that we will issue.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\auto@bib{%
+ \@ifx@empty\@FMN@list{%
+  \footinbib@sw{%
+   \@ifnum{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname>\z@}{%
+    \true@sw
+   }{%
+    \test@bbl@sw
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \test@bbl@sw
+  }%
+ }{%
+  \true@sw
+ }%
+ {%
+  \bibliography{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\auto@bib@empty{%
+ \let\auto@bib\@empty
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Testing the \filename{.bbl} file involves defanging all expected commands
+% and processing that file inside a box register (that will be simply discarded).
+% We provide a new meaning for the \cmd\bibitem\ command: it queues a Boolean.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@bbl@sw{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+  \let\providecommand\providecommand@j@nk
+  \let\bibfield\@gobbletwo
+  \let\bibinfo\@gobbletwo
+  \let\translation\@gobble
+  \let\BibitemOpen\@empty
+  \let\bibitemStop\@empty
+  \let\bibitemNoStop\@empty
+  \let\EOS\@empty
+  \let\BibitemShut\@gobble
+  \let\bibAnnoteFile\@gobbletwo
+  \let\bibAnnote\@gobblethree
+  \let\textbf\@gobble
+  \let\emph\@gobble
+  \@booleanfalse\bibitem@sw
+  \let\bibitem\bibitem@set
+  \auto@bib@innerbib
+  \bibitem@sw{\aftergroup\true@sw}{\aftergroup\false@sw}%
+ \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\bibitem@set\ is an alias for \cmd\bibitem\ for the purpose of detecting a non-trivial bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bibitem@set[1][]{%
+ \bibitem@sw{}{%
+  \@booleantrue\bibitem@sw
+  \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\bibitem@sw
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ procedure reads in the \filename{.bbl} file (if it exists)
+% within a context where its \env{thebibliography} environment does nothing, not even establishing a group. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\auto@bib@innerbib{%
+ \begingroup
+  \let@environment{thebibliography}{thebibliography@nogroup}%
+  \bibliography{}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Environment \env{thebibliography@nogroup} is an alias of the \env{thebibliography} environment that cancels itself. 
+% It assumes that it is called within a \env{thebibliography} environment. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thebibliography@nogroup#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \def\@currenvir{thebibliography}%
+}%
+\def\endthebibliography@nogroup{\begingroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following should be part of \filename{ltxutil}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \@gobblethree #1#2#3{}%
+\def\providecommand@j@nk#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifnum{#2=\z@}{\def\j@nk}{%
+  \@ifnum{#2=\@ne}{\def\j@nk##1}{%
+   \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}{\def\j@nk##1##2}{%
+    \@ifnum{#2=\thr@@}{\def\j@nk##1##2##3}{%
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Initial setup}
+% 
+% The standard LaTeX document classes execute certain commands 
+% that are best deferred until \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+% Here, we effectively split \cmd\pagenumbering\ into two halves,
+% with a default definition for \cmd\thepage
+% and an initialization of \cmd\c@page\ at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
+%
+% The meaning of \cmd\thepage\ can be overridden by society, journal, or
+% anywhere within the document pramble, and the counter itself will be 
+% preset at the beginning of the document. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thepage{\@arabic\c@page}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+% Note that this code is executed at \cmd\setup@hook\ time 
+% to allow for the possibility of overrides by packages like \classname{geometry}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \tabbingsep \labelsep
+ \leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \let\@listi\@listI
+ \@listi
+}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% We ensure that the ``environment'' component mark (implemented by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}) 
+% is initialized properly (via a hook, itself defined via \file{ltxutil.dtx}). 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \global\c@page\@ne
+ \def\curr@envir{document}%
+ \mark@envir{\curr@envir}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\open@onecolumn}%
+% \begin{macro}{\open@column@two}%
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+% When setting the column grid, we have to override the procedure
+% for formatting lists. 
+% Because \cmd\twocolumngrid\ requires rebalancing columns at some points, 
+% typesetting must employ only the manipulation of 
+% \cmd\leftskip\ and \cmd\rightskip, and must avoid the use of
+% \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, and \cmd\parshape. 
+%
+% It is one of the stranger features of \TeX\ that these two separate
+% mechanisms exist. The latter three have the effect of adding things to the 
+% Main Vertical List that cannot be removed and later added back with all their
+% properties intact.
+%
+% In detail, \cmd\moveleft, say, adds a box to the MVL with
+% its reference point shifted horizontally by some amount relative to the 
+% reference point of the enclosing list. If that box is removed from the 
+% MVL (via a \cmd\lastbox\ operation in the output routine), and later
+% thrown back to the MVL, the shift of the box will have been ``forgotten'' by \TeX.
+% This is a bug, but not one ``acceptible to D. E. Knuth'', so it will never be fixed. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\open@onecolumn{%
+ \open@column@one\@ne
+ \set@colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+}%
+\def\open@twocolumn{%
+ \open@column@mlt\tw@
+ \set@colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \sloppy
+ \let\set@listindent\set@listindent@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{\cs{appendix}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\newif\ifappendixon
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that, within appendices, 
+% equations are numbered within sections (appendices).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\appendix{%
+ \par
+%\appendixontrue
+ \setcounter{section}\z@
+ \setcounter{subsection}\z@
+ \setcounter{subsubsection}\z@
+ \def\thesubsection{\arabic{subsection}}%
+ \def\thesubsubsection{\alph{subsubsection}}%
+ \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
+ \def\theequation@prefix{\thesection}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\appendix}%
+ \@ifstar{%
+  \def\thesection{\unskip}%
+  \def\theequation@prefix{A.}%
+ }{%
+  \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Changing the page grid}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+%
+% \subsection{Avoiding Grid Changes}%
+%
+% In preprint styles, ``wide text'' is a no-op, and the title page
+% processing involves no grid change.
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\title@column}%
+% \begin{macro}{\close@column}%
+% Provide default meanings for \cmd\title@column\ and \cmd\close@column,
+% in case they were never defined. 
+% Note that the society or journal substyle may define 
+% \cmd\title@column\ or \cmd\close@column: this code will not override. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\title@column#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote@init
+ #1%
+ \minipagefootnote@foot
+}%
+\def\close@column{%
+ \newpage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Galley Style: Margin Changes}%
+% A variant of preprint processing. Emulate journal appearance somewhat.
+%
+% \begin{environment}{widetext@galley}
+% DPC: We're in galley style so do a lob sided display environment.
+%
+% QUERY: How can we be sure that we are in galley style?
+% ANSWER: as noted elsewhere, require that both \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ be false.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\galley@outdent{\rightmargin-\columnwidth\advance\rightmargin-\columnsep}%
+\let\widetext@outdent\@empty
+\newenvironment{widetext@galley}{%
+  \list{}{%
+    \topsep        \z@skip
+    \listparindent \parindent
+    \itemindent    \parindent
+    \leftmargin    \z@
+    \parsep        \z@\@plus\p@
+    \widetext@outdent
+    \relax
+  }%
+  \item\relax
+}{
+  \endlist
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Grid Changing Via \classname{ltxgrid}}%
+%
+% In case \classoption{twocolumngrid} has been invoked,
+% switch column grid using the column grid-changing commands.
+% Supply stub definitions of those commands here.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title@column@grid}%
+% \begin{macro}{\close@column@grid}%
+% The title block always starts at the top of a new page.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+%
+% Note that, for the procedure \cmd\close@column@grid,
+% we balance columns by switching to the one-column page grid. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\title@column@grid#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote@init
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \begingroup
+   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
+%<ignore>  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
+   \ltx@no@footnote
+   #1%
+  \endgroup
+  \twocolumngrid
+ \minipagefootnote@foot
+}%
+\def\close@column@grid{%
+ \balancelastpage@sw{%
+  \onecolumngrid
+%<ignore>  \twocolumngrid
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{widetext@grid}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+% We slip into the one-column page grid
+% within the scope of this environment.
+%
+% Note that we set adornments above and below the \env{widettext}.
+% These are set as leaders, so they will disappear at a page break.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{widetext@grid}{%
+  \par\ignorespaces
+  \setbox\widetext@top\vbox{%
+%<ignore>  \vskip15\p@
+   \hb@xt@\hsize{%
+    \leaders\hrule\hfil
+    \vrule\@height6\p@
+   }%
+%<ignore>  \vskip6\p@
+  }%
+  \setbox\widetext@bot\hb@xt@\hsize{%
+    \vrule\@depth6\p@
+    \leaders\hrule\hfil
+  }%
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \vskip10\p@
+  \dimen@\ht\widetext@top\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@top
+  \cleaders\box\widetext@top\vskip\dimen@
+%<ignore> \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
+  \vskip6\p@
+  \prep@math@patch
+}{%
+  \par
+  \vskip6\p@
+  \setbox\widetext@bot\vbox{%
+   \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\widetext@bot}%
+%<ignore>  \vskip14\p@
+  }%
+  \dimen@\ht\widetext@bot\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@bot
+  \cleaders\box\widetext@bot\vskip\dimen@
+  \vskip8.5\p@
+  \twocolumngrid\global\@ignoretrue
+  \@endpetrue
+}%
+\newbox\widetext@top
+\newbox\widetext@bot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% Decide, finally, how the page grid is to be manipulated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@page@grid{%
+ \twocolumn@sw{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following two assignments determine what procedures are to be executed when 
+% the footnote set width is calculated, and how footnotes are to be composed at the bottom of the page. 
+% A society or journal wishing to do otherwise will override this code. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
+  \let\compose@footnotes\compose@footnotes@two
+  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@grid}%
+  \let\title@column\title@column@grid
+  \let\close@column\close@column@grid
+ }{%
+  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@galley}%
+  \preprintsty@sw{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Change the page grid not at all.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we are galley style, change the page margin only.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \galley@sw{%
+    \let\widetext@outdent\galley@outdent
+   }{}%
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{\set@page@grid}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Old font commands}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{English-Language Texts}
+% As this class is just for English language journals, we
+% could hardwire these texts,
+% but to make it easier to use this as a
+% basis for the code for similar journal styles, separate out all the
+% fixed text strings into babel-style macros of the form 
+% |\|\ldots|name|
+%
+% Note: for babel compatability, use version 1999/05/05 v3.6x or later.
+%
+% Some of these might need changing in the society-specific code.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in 
+% this document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+  \space\number\day, \number\year}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\notesname}
+% Text entity \cmd\notesname\ had been used in \cmd\printendnotes.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+% However, we have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX.
+% 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\notesname{Notes}
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partname}
+% Text entity \cmd\partname\ is used in \cmd\@part.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partname{Part}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tocname}
+% Text entity \cmd\tocname\ is used in \cmd\tableofcontents,
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocname{Contents}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lofname}
+% Text entity \cmd\lofname\ is used in \cmd\listoffigures,
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lofname{List of Figures}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lotname}
+% Text entity \cmd\lotname\ is used in \cmd\listoftables,
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lotname{List of Tables}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+% Text entity \cmd\refname\ is used in \env{thebibliography}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
+% Text entity \cmd\indexname\ is used in \env{theindex},
+% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+% Text entity \cmd\figurename\ is used in \env{figure},
+% \cmd\figuresname\ in \cmd\printfigures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\figurename{FIG.}
+\def\figuresname{Figures}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+% Text entity \cmd\tablename\ is used in \env{table},
+% \cmd\tablesname\ in \cmd\printtables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tablename{TABLE}
+\def\tablesname{Tables}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
+% Text entity \cmd\abstractname\ is used in \env{abstract}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\abstractname{Abstract}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixesname}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
+% Text entity \cmd\appendixesname\ is used in TOC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\appendixesname{Appendixes}%
+\def\appendixname{Appendix}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgmentsname}
+% Text entity \cmd\acknowledgmentsname\ is used in \env{acknowledgments}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\acknowledgmentsname{Acknowledgments}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\journalname}
+% This should be set by the society journal options, eg `pra'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\journalname{??}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\copyrightname}
+% Default layout does not assign copyright, but a journal that wants
+% to might use this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\copyrightname{??}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\andname}
+% The text string ``and'' for use in author lists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\andname{and}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keys@name}
+% The text string prepended to PACS numbers, resp. to keywords.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pacs@name{PACS numbers: }%
+\def\@keys@name{Keywords: }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ppname}
+% The text string ``pp'' for use in page ranges.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ppname{pp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numbername}
+% The text string ``number'' for use in article reference.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numbername{number}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\volumename}
+% The text string ``volume'' for use in article reference.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\volumename{volume}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Dated@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Received@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Revised@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Accepted@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Published@name}
+% These texts are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Dated@name{Dated: }%
+\def\Received@name{Received }%
+\def\Revised@name{Revised }%
+\def\Accepted@name{Accepted }%
+\def\Published@name{Published }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Legacy Commands}
+% We define some commands left over from version 3.1, or give default meanings.
+% Some definitions can be overridden
+% in the document preamble or in included packages.
+%
+% Note on the namespace: command names like \cmd\REV@\emph{name} are used here,
+% because it is not clear that any of this code is generally useful.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\address{\replace@command\address\affiliation}%
+\def\altaddress{\replace@command\altaddress\altaffiliation}%
+\newenvironment{references}{%
+ \class@warn@end{The references environment is not supported; use thebibliography instead.}
+ \gdef\references{\thebibliography{}}\references
+}{%
+ \endthebibliography
+}%
+\def\draft{%
+ \class@warn@end{Command \string\draft\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option draft instead.}%
+ \@booleantrue\draft@sw
+}%
+\def\tighten{%
+ \class@warn@end{Command \string\tighten\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option tightenlines instead.}%
+ \@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw
+}%
+\def\tableline{%
+ \noalign{%
+  \class@warn@end{Command \string\tableline\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string\colrule\space instead.}%
+  \global\let\tableline\colrule
+ }%
+ \tableline
+}%
+\def\case{\replace@command\case\frac}%
+\def\slantfrac{\replace@command\slantfrac\frac}%
+\def\tablenote{\replace@command\tablenote\footnote}%
+\def\tablenotemark{\replace@command\tablenotemark\footnotemark}%
+\def\tablenotetext{\replace@command\tablenotetext\footnotetext}%
+% Lose the following definition:
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@text[1]{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+  \mathchoice
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }#1}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }#1}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\let\f@size\sf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\let\f@size\ssf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
+  \glb@settings
+ \else
+  \mbox{#1}%
+ \fi
+}%
+% Lose the following definition:
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bbox[1]{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+  \mathchoice
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\boldmath$#1$}}}%
+  \glb@settings
+ \else
+  \mbox{#1}%
+ \fi
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bm[1]{%
+ \class@warn@end{To use \string\bm, please load the bm package!}%
+ \global\let\bm\relax
+}%
+\def\FL{\obsolete@command\FL}%
+\def\FR{\obsolete@command\FR}%
+\def\narrowtext{\obsolete@command\narrowtext}%
+\def\mediumtext{\obsolete@command\mediumtext}%
+\newenvironment{quasitable}{%
+ \let@environment{tabular}{longtable}%
+}{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\text}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
+% \begin{macro}{\url}
+% 
+% If not otherwise defined, give default meanings to certain commands.
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+%FIXME: \cmd\bibinfo?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\text\REV@text
+\let\bm\REV@bm
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \providecommand\bibinfo[2]{#2}%
+ \providecommand\eprint[2][]{#2}%
+%\providecommand\url[1]{#1}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbox}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbox#1{%
+ \class@warn@end{\string\bbox\space is obsolete,^^Jload the bm package and use \string\bm\space instead.}%
+ \global\let\bbox\relax
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathletters}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{mathletters}{%
+ \class@warn@end{Environment {mathletters} is obsolete;^^Jload the amsmath package and use {subequations}!}%
+ \global\let\mathletters\@empty
+}{%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnum}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqnum#1{%
+ \class@warn@end{\string\eqnum\space is obsolete, load the amsmath package and use \string\tag!}%
+ \global\let\eqnum\@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We read in the symbol definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \RequirePackage{revsymb4-2}%
+}%
+\appdef\class@documenthook{\revsymb@inithook}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Corrected Indentation for \texttt{tableofcontents}}
+% \changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(MD, Aptara) Make titles in bibliography default, prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals, add a unified physrev option as well as prx, prapplied, prmaterials, prfluids, prab, and prper options. Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
+%
+% Corrected indentation for \texttt{tableofcontents}, when appearing with \texttt{listoffigure} or \texttt{listoftable}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%
+\def\@startflt#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    %\toc@pre
+    \makeatletter
+    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+    \if@filesw
+      \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+      \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+    \fi
+    \@nobreakfalse
+    %\toc@post
+  \endgroup
+}%
+\def\att@TOC{toc}%
+\def\print@toc#1{%
+ \begingroup
+  \expandafter\section
+  \expandafter*%
+  \expandafter{%
+              \csname#1name\endcsname
+              }%
+  \let\appendix\appendix@toc
+  \def\tempa{#1}%
+  \ifx\tempa\att@TOC%%
+  \@starttoc{#1}%
+  \else%%
+  \@startflt{#1}%%
+  \fi%%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Patches for lineno.sty}
+%
+% The \classname{lineno} package detects the case where the package has been loaded
+% and the document invokes \cmd\linelabel, but the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has not been
+% issued: it treats this case as an error. 
+%
+% It is wrong for validity of document syntax to be dependent upon package semantics: 
+% we make the condition a warning rather than an error.  
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@LN@LLerror@org{%
+ \PackageError{lineno}{%
+  \string\linelabel\space without \string\linenumbers
+ }{% 
+  Just see documentation. (New feature v4.11)%
+ }%
+ \@gobble
+}%
+\def\@LN@LLerror@ltx{%
+ \PackageWarning{lineno}{%
+  To make the \string\linelabel\space command work, you must issue the \string\linenumbers\ command 
+ }%
+ \@gobble
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% If appropriate, enable line numbering within the abstract. 
+%
+% This mechanism applies generally:
+% Create the box in a context in which the meaning of \cmd\par\ has been patched by \classname{lineno},
+% then \cmd\unvbox\ the box in a context where \cmd\set@linepenalties\ has been executed, and 
+% follow up with \cmd\@linenumberpar, which forces a visit to the output routine just there.
+% Note that here, we have to de-fang \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk, which would otherwise causes the appearance
+% of a box with depth -1000 points. Go figure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class@documenthook{%
+ \@ifx{\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@org}{%
+  \class@info{Overriding \string\@LN@LLerror}%
+  \let\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@ltx
+ }{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
+  \@ifxundefined{\set@linepenalties}{}{%
+   \def\prep@absbox{\set@linepenalties}%
+   \def\post@absbox{\let\@LN@parpgbrk\@empty\@linenumberpar}%
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% One may well ask: how to obtain line numbering within an alignment in a float?
+% This objective, along with line numbering within footnotes, would require extraordinary measures.
+% The float would have to be thrown onto the MVL in order to acquire its line numbers, but
+% that fragment of MVL would then have to be protected from being shipped out.
+% The question of how to coordinate those lines' numbers with those of lines in the MVL would 
+% also require dealing with.
+%
+% \section{Endgame for the Document Class}
+%
+% We provide for a ``job macro package'' that can override
+% definitions and assignments made by the class or any other packages it loads.
+%
+% \subsection{Job Macro Package}
+% You can create a ``job macro package'' for your document
+% that will be read in automatically every time
+% your document is processed.
+% Thus, if your job is a file called \file{myarticle.tex},
+% then the file \file{myarticle.rty} will be read in
+% just the same as if you had placed a 
+% \cmd\usepackage|{myarticle.rty}| statement
+% immediately following your \cmd\documentclass\ statement.
+%
+% Within your \file{.rty} file,
+% you can define and use control sequence names that use the |@| character
+% and you can override any of the definitions or assignments made 
+% by the \revtex\ document class or the selected journal substyle.
+% That is, you have the power to really mess things up badly.
+%
+% If you choose to have a job macro package, you are well 
+% advised to read the \LaTeX\ guide to document classes,
+% \file{clsguide.tex} or read up on the subject 
+% in a book like the \LaTeX\ Companion.
+%
+% The file \file{template.rty} contains a template for
+% creating your own job macro package.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.rty}{}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Endgame Processing for the Document Class}
+%
+% The remaining steps in processing the document class involve
+% determining the needed society, journal, and pointsize from 
+% the document's class options and inputting the needed files or
+% executing the indicated procedures. 
+%
+% Note that the society file is expected to declare options that will
+% allow us to determine the journal involved, and the society and journal
+% themselves determine the which pointsize options are declared, along with
+% their meanings. 
+% 
+% Note also that required packages are read in only after the document options
+% have been processed, because the latter can affect the former. 
+% 
+% Finally, the setup code is executed: this is code that depends on the 
+% meanings of the switches we define and on the code within the packages we load. 
+%
+% Note that there are other hooks in use: \cmd\document@inithook, which is 
+% executed right at the beginning of the document, and \cmd\class@documenthook, 
+% which serves as a vehicle for any \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ code we might wish to
+% execute. 
+%
+%FIXME: use \cmd\class@documenthook\ only for things that bear on the MVL; 
+% use \cmd\document@inithook\ for all patches to procedures defined within the preamble. 
+%
+% Remember that \classname{natbib} changes its state at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
+% so we have to install our own code at a later point in the processing.
+%
+% We determine the proper \cmd\@society\ by examining the document's class options. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@parse@class@options@society
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then, we input the society's substyle
+% (which may in turn lead to loading a journal substyle or a pointsize substyle). 
+% The substyle should not assume the value of any class option: 
+% instead, it should install code into \cmd\setup@hook. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@process@society{aps}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now that the society has defined the class options relating to journals,
+% and has defined \cmd\@journal@default, we can process the journal substyle. 
+% We parse the options for one that sets \cmd\@journal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@parse@class@options@\@journal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And we process the journal. 
+% Note that \emph{it is an error} for a society file to fail to define
+% \cmd\@journal@default.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\@process@journal\expandafter{\@journal@default}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now that the society and journal have finished defining any options relating to 
+% point size, we process the class options for any that set \cmd\@pointsize.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@parse@class@options@\@pointsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And we process the pointsize.
+% Note that it is an error for the society and journal to leave \cmd\@pointsize@default\ 
+% undefined at this point, however, the journal may have overriden the assignment of the society. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\@process@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize@default}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next, we process the class options for once and all. 
+% Doing so sets values for some of the Booleans that were introduced along with
+% the \cmd\DeclareOption\ statements above. 
+%
+%CHANGE: We process the options in the order declared in the document; this 
+% gives the document greater control. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@options
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Now that the class options have been processed, we can load all the 
+% packages that we know need loading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\rtx@require@packages
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% At this point, the society substyle, the journal substyle, and the 
+% pointsize have all been processed, along with the document class options.
+% Some of these have left things for later; we do these now.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
+%
+% This portion of the code for this class file
+% \emph{must} appear at the very end:
+% The procedure 
+% \cmd\setup@hook\
+% should be executed at the very end of the class file. 
+% Any code that relies on the value of any of the \texttt{@sw} switches
+% or will patch the code of one of the required packages
+% should be executed here. 
+%\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/28}{(MD) Add call to \normalsize to be a good citizen and allow booktabs.sty to work properly}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{\normalsize}%
+\setup@hook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Warn if past maturation date. This code to be enabled only in beta software.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+% \changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ignore>
+ \def\rtx@fin@year{2010}%
+ \def\rtx@fin@month{01}%
+ \def\rtx@fin@day{01}%
+ \def\rtx@fin@warn{%
+  \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@year>\the\year\relax}{\true@sw}{%
+   \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@month>\the\month\relax}{\true@sw}{%
+    \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@day>\the\day\relax}{\true@sw}{%
+     \false@sw
+    }%
+   }%
+  }%
+  {%
+   \class@info{Beta software expires \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; updates available at https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}%
+  }{%
+   \class@warn{Outdated software expired \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; please retrieve an update at https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}%
+  }%
+ }%
+%</ignore>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In shipping (non-beta) software, the following line should be commented out.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\rtx@fin@warn}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% End of the class file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Symbols: the \texttt{revsymb} module}
+% We immediately define a utility command: this module's warning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*revsymb>
+\def\REVSYMB@warn#1{\PackageWarningNoLine{revsymb}{#1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lambdabar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\lambdabar{%
+  \bgroup
+    \def\@tempa{%
+      \hbox{%
+        \raise.73\ht\z@
+        \hb@xt@\z@{%
+          \kern.25\wd\z@
+          \vrule \@width.5\wd\z@\@height.1\p@\@depth.1\p@
+          \hss
+        }%
+        \box\z@
+      }%
+    }%
+    \mathchoice
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\displaystyle     \lambda$}\@tempa}%
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\textstyle        \lambda$}\@tempa}%
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptstyle      \lambda$}\@tempa}%
+      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\lambda$}\@tempa}%
+  \egroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openone}
+% DPC: Really should use a font that includes this glyph.
+% Unfortunately not in AMS ones, but is in bbold, cmbb.
+% (I think, must check),
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+% FIXME: check for bbold.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\openone{\leavevmode\hbox{\small1\normalsize\kern-.33em1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\corresponds}
+% \begin{macro}{\overdots}
+% \begin{macro}{\overcirc}
+% J\"org Knappen suggests the replacements:
+% replace \cmd\corresponds\ with \cmd\triangleq, source \classname{amssymb};
+% replace \cmd\overcirc\ with \cmd\mathring, source \classname{latex2e};
+% replace \cmd\overdots\ with \cmd\dddot, source \classname{amsmath}.
+%
+% Any use of any of these commands will result in a warning message at the end 
+% of the log file. If the corresponding package is not loaded, a
+% definition will quietly be provided.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\corresponds{\replace@command\corresponds\triangleq}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\overcirc{\replace@command\overcirc\mathring}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\overdots{\replace@command\overdots\dddot}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@triangleq{%
+ {\lower.2ex\hbox{=}}{\kern-.75em^\triangle}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@dddot[1]{%
+ \@ontopof{#1}{\cdots}{1.0}\mathord{\box2}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\succsim}
+% \begin{macro}{\precsim}
+% \begin{macro}{\lesssim}
+% \begin{macro}{\gtrsim}
+% \begin{macro}{\alt}
+% \begin{macro}{\agt}
+% These version 3.1 commands are always supplied, 
+% but the definitions in \classname{amssymb} are preferred.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\altsuccsim{\succ\kern-.9em_\sim\kern.3em}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\altprecsim{\prec\kern-1em_\sim\kern.3em}%
+\let\REV@succsim\altsuccsim
+\let\REV@precsim\altprecsim
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@lesssim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{<}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@gtrsim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{>}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\alt{\lesssim}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\agt{\gtrsim}
+\def\vereq#1#2{%
+ \lower3\p@\vbox{%
+  \baselineskip1.5\p@
+  \lineskip1.5\p@
+  \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfill##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr\sim\crcr}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tensor}
+% \begin{macro}{\overstar}
+% \begin{macro}{\loarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\roarrow}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\tensor[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftrightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\overstar[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\ast}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\loarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\roarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\rightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ontopof}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ontopof#1#2#3{%
+ {%
+  \mathchoice
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\displaystyle     \scriptstyle      }%
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\textstyle        \scriptstyle      }%
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptstyle      \scriptscriptstyle}%
+    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptscriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@ontopof}
+% Same as \revtex3, more or less.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@ontopof#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{$#4#1$}%
+  \setbox\f@ur\hbox{$#5#2$}%
+  \setbox\tw@\null\ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@
+  \@ifdim{\wd\z@>\wd\f@ur}{%
+    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@\wd\z@{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
+    \mathord{\rlap{\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}\box\z@}%
+  }{%
+    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@.9\wd\f@ur{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
+    \setbox\z@\hb@xt@\wd\f@ur{\hss$#4\relax#1$\hss}%
+    \mathord{\rlap{\copy\z@}\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}%
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frak}
+% Deal with legacy \cmd\frak:
+% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
+% Also, says to use \cmd\mathfrak\ instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\frak{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\frak\space unsupported:^^J%
+  please use \string\mathfrak\space instead.%
+ }%
+ \global\let\frak\mathfrak
+ \frak
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\mathfrak\space undefined:^^J%
+  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
+ }%
+ \global\let\mathfrak\@firstofone
+ \mathfrak
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Bbb}
+% Deal with legacy \cmd\Bbb:
+% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
+% Also, says to use \cmd\mathbb\ instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Bbb{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\Bbb\space unsupported:^^J%
+  please use \string\mathbb\space instead.%
+ }%
+ \global\let\Bbb\mathbb
+ \Bbb
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
+ \REVSYMB@warn{%
+  Command \string\mathbb\space undefined:^^J%
+  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
+ }%
+ \global\let\mathbb\@firstofone
+ \mathbb
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Bigglb}
+% Deal with legacy bold delimiters. 
+% Each of the following takes an implicit argument consisting of
+% the delimiter to be made big and bold.
+% FIXME: \cmd\DeclareBoldMathCommand\ is not the right tool!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Bigglb{\REV@boldopen \Bigg}%
+\def\Biglb {\REV@boldopen \Big }%
+\def\bigglb{\REV@boldopen \bigg}%
+\def\biglb {\REV@boldopen \big }%
+\def\Biggrb{\REV@boldclose\Bigg}%
+\def\Bigrb {\REV@boldclose\Big }%
+\def\biggrb{\REV@boldclose\bigg}%
+\def\bigrb {\REV@boldclose\big }%
+\def\REV@pmb#1{%
+ \hbox{%
+  \setbox\z@=\hbox{#1}%
+  \kern-.02em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
+  \kern .04em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
+  \kern-.02em
+  \raise.04em\copy\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\def\REV@boldopen #1#2{\mathopen {\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
+\def\REV@boldclose#1#2{\mathclose{\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\revsymb@inithook}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% Package dependencies are taken care of at \cmd\setup@hook\ time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\revsymb@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\dddot{\let\dddot\REV@dddot}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\triangleq{\let\triangleq\REV@triangleq}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\succsim{\let\succsim\altsuccsim}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\precsim{\let\precsim\altprecsim}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\lesssim{\let\lesssim\REV@lesssim}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\gtrsim {\let\gtrsim \REV@gtrsim }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\mathfrak{\let\mathfrak\REV@mathfrak}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\mathbb{\let\mathbb\REV@mathbb}{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</revsymb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{10pt} class option: the \texttt{10pt} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+% The file \file{aps10pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 10.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 10pt selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{11.5}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+   \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+   \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+   \let\@listi\@listI
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\small{%
+  \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10.5}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotesize{%
+  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scriptsize{%
+ \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt
+}%
+\def\tiny{%
+ \@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt
+}%
+\def\large{%
+ \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14pt}%
+}%
+\def\Large{%
+ \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18pt}%
+}%
+\def\LARGE{%
+ \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22pt}%
+}%
+\def\huge{%
+ \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
+}%
+\def\Huge{%
+ \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The values of these margin parameters are dependent upon 
+% \cmd\twoside@sw; any society or journal that 
+% has its own preferences should override these assignments
+% by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\setup@hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \twoside@sw{%
+%   \oddsidemargin  -.1in
+%   \evensidemargin -.4in
+    \oddsidemargin  -20pt
+    \evensidemargin -20pt
+    \marginparwidth 107pt
+ }{%
+    \oddsidemargin  -.25in
+    \evensidemargin -.25in
+    \marginparwidth 30pt
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparsep 6pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topmargin -61pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\headheight 25pt
+\headsep 16pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topskip 10pt
+\splittopskip\topskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footskip 30pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \textheight = 56pc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\textwidth42.5pc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\columnsep 1.5pc
+\columnseprule 0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footnotesep 1pt
+\skip\footins 39pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
+\def\footnoterule{%
+ \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\floatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+\textfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\intextsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dblfloatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparpush 5pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
+\parindent 10pt
+\emergencystretch8\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargini 25pt
+\leftmarginii 22pt
+\leftmarginiii 18.7pt
+\leftmarginiv 17pt
+\leftmarginv 10pt
+\leftmarginvi 10pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listI{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+  \topsep 8\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@
+  \itemsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\labelsep 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \parsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep \z@
+  \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \topsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiv{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listv{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listvi{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</10pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{11pt} class option: the \texttt{11pt} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+% The file \file{11pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 11.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*11pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 11pt selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+    \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
+    \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \let\@listi\@listI
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\small{%
+   \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+   }%
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotesize{%
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+   }%
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scriptsize{%
+  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}%
+}%
+\def\tiny{%
+  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt
+}%
+\def\large{%
+  \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}%
+}%
+\def\Large{%
+  \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}%
+}%
+\def\LARGE{%
+  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}%
+}%
+\def\huge{%
+    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
+}%
+\def\Huge{%
+  \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</11pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{12pt} class option: the \texttt{12pt} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+% The file \file{12pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 12.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 12pt selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+  \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip  6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+  \let\@listi\@listI
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\small{%
+  \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{14.5pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
+    \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Same baselineskip as \cmd\small\ ?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\footnotesize{%
+  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt{14.5pt}%
+  \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+  \def\@listi{%
+    \leftmargin\leftmargini
+    \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+    \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+    \itemsep \parsep
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scriptsize{%
+  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
+}%
+\def\tiny{%
+  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7pt}%
+}%
+\def\large{%
+  \@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18pt}%
+}%
+\def\Large{%
+  \@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22pt}%
+}%
+\def\LARGE{%
+  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25pt}%
+}%
+\def\huge{%
+    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
+}%
+\let\Huge=\huge
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Page parameters}%
+% This code is common to both \classoption{11pt} and \classoption{12pt}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*11pt|12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \twoside@sw{%
+  \oddsidemargin   0pt
+  \evensidemargin  0pt
+  \marginparwidth 60pt
+ }{%
+  \oddsidemargin 0pt
+  \evensidemargin 0pt
+  \marginparwidth 44pt
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparsep 10pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topmargin -37pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\headheight 12pt
+\headsep 25pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\topskip 10pt
+\splittopskip\topskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footskip 30pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\textheight=665.5\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \tightenlines@sw{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ }{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}%
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\textwidth 468pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\columnsep 10pt
+\columnseprule 0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footnotesep 1pt
+\skip\footins 25.25pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
+\def\footnoterule{%
+ \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\f@ur
+ \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\floatsep        14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\textfloatsep    20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\intextsep       14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dblfloatsep     14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@fpsep 10pt plus 2fil
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfpsep 10pt plus 2fil%
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparpush 7pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
+\parindent 15pt
+\emergencystretch8\p@
+\partopsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargini   30pt
+\leftmarginii  26pt
+\leftmarginiii 22pt
+\leftmarginiv  20pt
+\leftmarginv   12pt
+\leftmarginvi  12pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+  \topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@
+  \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\labelsep 6pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \parsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \topsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</11pt|12pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{aps} class extension: the \texttt{aps} module}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+% The file \file{aps.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}.
+%
+% Here, code specific to APS journals is separated out from the \revtex\ document class.
+% (Other societies can customize \revtex\ by supplying their own \file{.rtx} file.)
+%
+% This class extension file is a model for a class extension you might write yourself.
+%
+% First, incorporate a \cmd\ProvidesFile\ command with an optional argument giving
+% the version information, e.g.,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ProvidesFile{foo}[2001/09/11 v1.1 Docinfo]%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Within the society substyle, there are two things we must do as well:
+% define the default journal, 
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@journal@default{pra}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+% And do likewise for the point size:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@pointsize@default{10}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% We first define some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
+% then some APS-specific initializations,
+% then code for particular APS journals.
+% In the latter case, the choice is 
+% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*aps>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class@info{RevTeX society APS selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here are the class options relating to the APS:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{pra}{\change@journal{pra}}%
+\DeclareOption{prb}{\change@journal{prb}}%
+\DeclareOption{prc}{\change@journal{prc}}%
+\DeclareOption{prd}{\change@journal{prd}}%
+\DeclareOption{pre}{\change@journal{pre}}%
+\DeclareOption{prl}{\change@journal{prl}}%
+%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Update options for new titles without "Special Topics" and make prper match style of other journal options}
+\DeclareOption{prab}{\change@journal{prab}}%
+\DeclareOption{prper}{\change@journal{prper}}%
+\DeclareOption{rmp}{\change@journal{rmp}}%
+%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Add options for new APS journals and a generic physrev option for future-proofing}
+\DeclareOption{prx}{\change@journal{prx}}%
+\DeclareOption{prapplied}{\change@journal{prapplied}}%
+\DeclareOption{prmaterials}{\change@journal{prmaterials}}%
+\DeclareOption{prfluids}{\change@journal{prfluids}}%
+\DeclareOption{physrev}{\change@journal{physrev}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Abbreviations}%
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
+% The following macros constitute typing shortcuts for
+% certain journal names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adv{AIP Advances}%
+\def\ao{Appl.\ Opt.}%
+\def\ap{Appl.\ Phys.}%
+\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\apm{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.\ Mater.}%
+\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}%
+\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}%
+\def\bmf{Biomicrofluidics}%
+\def\cha{Chaos}%
+\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}%
+\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}%
+\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}%
+\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}%
+\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jap{J.\ Appl.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jmp{J.\ Math.\ Phys.}%
+\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}%
+\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}%
+\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}%
+\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}%
+\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}%
+\def\jpr{J.\ Phys.\ Chem.\ Ref.\ Data}%
+\def\ltp{Low.\ Temp.\ Phys.}%
+\def\nat{Nature (London)}%
+\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}%
+\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}%
+\def\pop{Phys.\ Plasmas}%
+\def\pof{Phys.\ Fluids}%
+\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}%
+\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}%
+\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}%
+\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}%
+\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}%
+\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}%
+\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}%
+\def\rsi{Rev.\ Sci.\ Instrum.}%
+\def\rse{J.\ Renewable Sustainable Energy}%
+\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}%
+\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
+\def\vr{Vision Res.}%
+\def\sd{Structural\ Dynamics}%
+\def\jor{J.\ Rheol.}%
+\def\cp{AIP\ Conference\ Proceedings}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{APS Setup}%
+% Here we define the default procedures for APS journals.
+% Individual APS journals may override these definitions.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title block}%
+%
+% The specifics of the title block.
+% Apply to all APS journals; individual journals may override these settings.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% The \LaTeX\ kernel definition of \cmd\@fnsymbol\ is overridden.
+% The definition in \filename{fixltx2e.sty} serves as a guide to the new way to symbol,
+% working in both text- and math modes. 
+%
+% \filename{fixltx2e.sty} duplicates some features of \filename{ltxgrid} and \filename{ltxutil},
+% however, so it may be incompatible with \revtex. 
+% In case it is not loaded, we must provide a meaning for \cmd\TextOrMath,
+% which that package makes robust. 
+% I believe that it is \cmd\@fnsymbol\ itself that ought to be robustified.
+% e\TeX\ further complicates matters; we do not especially accomodate it. 
+%
+% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+%
+% Not! \cmd\TextOrMath\ must be made robust in any case (Bug 530). I return things to follow
+% core \LaTeXe\ (\filename{latex.ltx}). 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{%
+ \ensuremath{%
+  \ifcase#1\or 
+   *\or
+   \dagger\or
+   \ddagger\or
+   \mathsection\or
+   \mathparagraph\or
+%  \|\or
+   **\or
+   \dagger\dagger\or
+   \ddagger\ddagger\else
+   \mathsection\mathsection\or
+   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
+   ***\or
+   \dagger\dagger\dagger\or
+   \ddagger\ddagger\ddagger\else
+   \mathsection\mathsection\mathsection\or
+   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
+%
+   \@ctrerr 
+  \fi
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\document@inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\TextOrMath{%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\TextOrMath{\@ifmmode{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\let\thefootnote@latex\thefootnote
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We assign the default titlepage style for APS; a journal or document instance 
+% may override by invoking one of the other \cmd\clo@... procedures defined in \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clo@groupedaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
+  \onecolumngrid
+  \newpage
+  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+  \c@page\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A comment: ``article.cls sets this to one not zero?''
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}{%
+  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% APS Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
+% However, if the user has specified the \classoption{preprint} class option,
+% then the abstract will have a head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \centering\large
+   \abstractname
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractwidth}
+% All APS journals set the abstract to the same width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{400\p@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% All APS journals set the abstract body the same way.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 123) add parskip to the abstract.}
+% \changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+ \small
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \adjust@abstractwidth
+}%
+\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
+ \dimen@\textwidth\advance\dimen@-\frontmatter@abstractwidth
+ \divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \galley@sw{%
+  \advance\rightskip\tw@\dimen@
+ }{%
+  \advance\leftskip\dimen@
+  \advance\rightskip\dimen@
+ }%
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) Change default to not use a title page - it seems antiquated}
+% All APS journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
+% 
+% In effect, we establish a society default value for \cmd\preprintsty@sw,
+% and for \cmd\titlepage@sw.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
+\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We choose the page style for all APS journals. 
+% The journal may override by inserting its own code in \cmd\setup@hook. 
+% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
+% command anywhere in the preamble; it will override the assignments here. 
+%
+% Here is the big switch for APS preprints. Note that \cmd\preprintsty@sw
+% is also consulted in various procedures, but we assume its value does 
+% not change after \cmd\setup@hook\ time. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{%
+   \ps@preprint
+   \def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}%
+   \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}%
+   \let\section\section@preprintsty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
+   \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
+  }{%
+   \ps@article
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% All APS journals set the author list the same.
+% The leading is 11.5 points, and
+% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
+% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
+% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \centering
+ \advance\baselineskip\p@
+ \parskip11.5\p@\relax
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
+% \addvspace{0\p@}%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% APS Journals have 24 points b-b above an affiliation group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
+% \addvspace{11\p@}%
+%}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% APS Journals have no extra space between author group down to common affiliation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \centering
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+ \addvspace{3.5\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \addvspace{12\p@}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% All APS journals set the affiliation the same.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
+ \small\it
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above}
+% PRL: 1.5 points extra: 13 points base-to-base above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+ }{%
+  \parskip1.5\p@\relax
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% All APS journals set the title page using the same font and size.
+% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
+% we assert none here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% All APS journals set the article title the same.
+%
+% Note: Spacing from title to author is 23 points base-to-base.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{\large\bfseries\centering\parskip\z@skip}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
+% All APS journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
+\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+  \normalfont\@thefnmark
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
+ \addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% All APS journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+%
+% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \small
+  \centering
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \everypar{\hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase}%
+  \def\par{\@ifvmode{}{\unskip)\egroup\@@par}}%
+}%
+\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
+   \addvspace{11\p@}%
+   \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parindent\z@
+   \parskip\z@skip
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
+   \footnotesize
+   \adjust@abstractwidth
+   \parindent\z@
+   \samepage
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
+% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
+% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
+% stacked flush right at the right margin.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@titlepage{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+   \hfill
+   \preprint@sw{%
+    \expandafter\produce@preprints\expandafter{\@preprint}%
+   }{}%
+  }%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+   \hfil
+   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
+   \quad\checkindate
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce@preprints#1{%
+ \vtop to \z@{%
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \small
+  \let\preprint\preprint@count
+  \count@\z@
+  #1%
+  \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+   \hbox{%
+    \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
+    #1%
+    \setbox\z@\lastbox
+   }%
+  }{%
+   \let\preprint\preprint@cr
+   \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+   \par
+   \vss
+  }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% All APS journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
+% Also, no hanging section number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument. 
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
+% purpose.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+      \normalfont\small\bfseries
+      \centering
+    }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\bfseries
+     \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\itshape
+     \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {paragraph}%
+    {4}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subparagraph}%
+    {5}%
+    {\parindent}%
+    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {-1em}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty}
+% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
+% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {section}%
+    {1}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {0.5cm}%
+    {%
+      \normalfont\small\bfseries
+%     \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsection}%
+    {2}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\bfseries
+%    \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
+  \@startsection
+    {subsubsection}%
+    {3}%
+    {\z@}%
+    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+    {.5cm}%
+    {%
+     \normalfont\small\itshape
+%    \centering
+    }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% By default, APS journals set titlepage notes as footnotes.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
+% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, 
+% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}%
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}%
+\def\@dotsep{2}%
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}%
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
+ \print@toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@munge{%
+  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
+  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth@restore{%
+  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following definition of \cmd\l@part\ is a variant on
+% the definition of \cmd\l@@sections\ in \file{ltxutil.dtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+  \set@tocdim@pagenum\@tempboxa{#2}%
+% \@tempdima 3em %
+  \parindent \z@
+  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+  \large \bf %
+  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
+  \par
+  \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%
+% We set the TOC to the standard of RMP. 
+% If APS has its own specification, we will code it, and RMP must override.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ %\bf
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the auto TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
+% All APS journal styles have flush bottoms.
+%\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float}
+% All APS publications have the same table specification:
+% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all APS journals.
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefntext}
+% We ensure that frontmatter footnotes format similarly to body footnotes. 
+% But we provide our own hypertext anchor, otherwise not provided.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper@anchorend}%
+ \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
+  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+%
+% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
+% this task requires three components:
+% the \BibTeX\ \file{apsrev.bst} and \file{apsrmp.bst} style files, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
+% (if the document does not do so).
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+%  To generate \file{apsrev.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
+%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
+%  accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
+%
+% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
+% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
+% \QandA{ORDERING OF REFERENCES}{c}{seq-no}Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART}{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{i}{nm-init,ed-au}Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR}{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES}{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
+% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT}{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS}{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
+% \QandA{DATE FORMAT}{*}{yr-par}Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
+% \QandA{DATE EMPTY}{-}{date-nil-x}If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{-}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
+% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
+% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{}{article-series}article can has series
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
+% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT INSTITUTION}{}{techreport-institution-par}format tech report institution like book publisher
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{x}{vnum-x}Journal vol, without number as 34
+% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
+% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
+% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
+% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{d}{pub-date}Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{}{pre-pub}Publisher before volume, chapter, pages 
+% \QandA{}{}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
+% \QandA{}{p}{pre-pub,pre-edn}Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
+% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS)}{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
+% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'}{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
+% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
+% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
+% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
+% \QandA{URL ADDRESS}{*}{url,url-prefix-x}URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{apsrev.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-02-12 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+%  head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
+%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
+%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
+%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)
+%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
+%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
+%  blkyear,%: Missing date left blank 
+%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
+%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
+%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
+%  article-series,%: article can has series
+%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
+%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+%  vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
+%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
+%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+%  pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+%  pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
+%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
+%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
+%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
+%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
+%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+%  }}
+%\generate{\file{apsrev4-2.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Comparing apsrev.bst and apsrmp.bst}\label{sec:CompRevRmp}
+% These two bibliographic styles differ as follows:
+% \file{apsrev.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrmp.dbj} does not:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \CandE{seq-no}%
+%    Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% \CandE{nm-init,ed-au}%
+%    Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \CandE{blkyear}%
+%    Missing date left blank 
+% \CandE{date-nil-x}%
+%    If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+% \CandE{inproceedings-chapter}%
+%    produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% \CandE{techreport-institution-par}%
+%    format tech report institution like book publisher
+% \CandE{vnum-x}%
+%    Journal vol, without number as `34'
+% \CandE{pub-date}%
+%    Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+% \CandE{pre-pub}%
+%    Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages. Note that both use guard code pre-edn.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \file{apsrmp.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrev.dbj} does not:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \CandE{nm-rev1}%
+%    Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
+% \CandE{dt-beg}%
+%    Date after authors 
+% \CandE{vnum-sp}%
+%    Journal vol (num) as `34 (2)'
+% \CandE{pp-last}%
+%    Pages at end, but before any notes
+% \CandE{pub-par}%
+%    Publisher in parentheses
+% \CandE{school-par}%
+%    School/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
+% \CandE{bkedcap}%
+%    `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
+% \CandE{and-com}%
+%    Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
+%    
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
+% in the matter by installing the (default) APS code 
+% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aps-defaults}).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% Numerical citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is false.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted.
+% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
+% 
+% Set up for APS numerical citations (once the packages are loaded). 
+% The journal substyle can override these choices.
+%
+% Note that, prior to \classname{natbib} version 8.21, changing \cmd\NAT@sort\ at this late hour would not be totally effective;
+% you would have to give \classname{natbib} the relevant options at load time.
+% From version 8.21 on, \cmd\NAT@sort\ and \cmd\NAT@cmprs\ are not bound at all. 
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \bibpunct{[}{]}{,}{n}{}{,}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
+% 
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%
+% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibsection{%
+  \par
+  \onecolumngrid@push
+  \begingroup
+   \baselineskip26\p@
+   \bib@device{\textwidth}{245.5\p@}%
+  \endgroup
+  \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
+  \addvspace{19\p@}%
+  \par
+  \onecolumngrid@pop
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bib@device}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bib@device#1#2{%
+ \hb@xt@\z@{%
+  \hb@xt@#1{%
+   \hfil
+   \phantomsection
+   \addcontentsline {toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\refname}%
+%  \hyper@anchorstart {\@currentHref }%
+   \hb@xt@#2{%
+    \skip@\z@\@plus-1fil\relax
+                           \leaders\hrule height.25 \p@ depth.25 \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus1fil
+    \hskip\skip@
+    \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil\leaders\hrule height.375\p@ depth.375\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.75fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil
+    \hskip\skip@
+    \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil\leaders\hrule height.5  \p@ depth.5  \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.5 fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil
+    \hskip\skip@
+    \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil\leaders\hrule height.625\p@ depth.625\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.25fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil
+ %  \hskip\skip@
+ %  \hfil
+   }%
+%  \hyper@anchorend
+   \hfil
+  }%
+  \hss
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \let\bibpreamble\@empty
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+ \def\newblock{\ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
+% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+  \small
+  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+ }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Index}%
+% FIXME: the following call to \cmd\twocolumn\ appears wrong if we were in two-column grid.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid@push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid@pop
+}{%
+%\onecolumngrid@pop
+}%
+%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}%
+%
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}%
+%
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}%
+%
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Journal- and Pointsize-Specific Code}%
+%
+% After this substyle is read in, we will execute the code specific to the selected 
+% journal: execute the society/journal \file{.rtx} file if it exists, or
+% execute the society/journal macro (if the latter is not defined, it will \cmd\relax\ out). 
+% Here we define the default journal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journal@default{pra}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Typesize-Specific Code}%
+%
+% After this society file is read in, we will process the \cmd\@pointsize-specific
+% code. Here we define the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pointsize@default{10}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note: the convention in \revtex\ and its substyles is that 
+% the substyle must not override any explicit class options
+% declared by the document.
+% This means that the various Booleans of Section~\ref{sec:options}
+% may be assigned here only if they are still undefined at this point.
+%
+% For the APS, we supply code specific to journals PRA, PRB, PRC, PRD, PRE, PRL, PRX, PRAPPLIED, PRMATERIALS, PRFLUIDS, PRAB (was PRSTAB), PRPER (was PRSTPER), and RMP.
+% At present, they are identical,
+% with the exception of PRL and RMP.
+% We also introduce a new generic physrev style now that all of the Phys. Rev. journals 
+% are identical
+% In 4.2, we make the inclusion of titles in the bibliography the default
+%
+% For most all of the APS journals, the journal-dependent 
+% code is relatively meager and is therefore embedded in this file.
+% However, the RMP code is sufficiently extensive that 
+% splitting it out into a separate file is more convenient.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pra}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{pra}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apspra{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRA selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prb}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prb}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprb{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRB selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prc}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prc}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprc{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRC selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prd}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prd}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprd{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRD selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pre}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{pre}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apspre{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRE selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prl}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprl{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRL selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In PRL, the default is the \classoption{bibnotes} option,
+% and the Acknowledgments section has no head.
+%
+% The References head is a device that may be described as a lozenge centered on the baseline,
+% 71 points wide by 2 points thick, with the ends tapering to a half point in thickness.
+% Space above 26 points base to base, below 31 base to base.
+%FIXME: this code may confound \classname{geometry}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote
+ \@booleanfalse\acknowledgments@sw
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \def\bibsection{%
+   \par
+   \begingroup
+    \baselineskip26\p@
+    \bib@device{\hsize}{72\p@}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
+   \addvspace{19\p@}%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Implement length checking.
+% Use the \classname{times} and \classname{mathtime} packages,
+% plus whatever other processing is required
+% to make the formatted output be true
+% to the metrics of the journal.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \lengthcheck@sw{%
+   \RequirePackage{times}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Wait. Do not use mathtime after all. APS has their own way of doing math pi, involving
+% Adobe Mathematical Pi and other fonts.
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%  \RequirePackage{mathtime}%
+%    \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A PRL does not have numbered sections.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \c@secnumdepth=-\maxdimen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note: we defer this code until after type size file is read in.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \@ifnum{\@pointsize=10\relax}{%
+   \lengthcheck@sw{%
+    \def\large{%
+     \@setfontsize\large{12.5}{14\p@}%
+    }%
+    \def\normalsize{%
+     \@setfontsize\normalsize{10.5}\@xiipt
+     \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus5\p@
+     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \let\@listi\@listI
+    }%
+    \def\small{%
+     \@setfontsize\small{9.5}\@xipt
+     \abovedisplayskip 5\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus4\p@
+     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \let\@listi\@listI
+    }%
+    \DeclareMathSizes{12.5}{12.5}{9}{6}%
+    \DeclareMathSizes{10.5}{10.5}{7.5}{5}%
+    \DeclareMathSizes{9.5}{9.5}{7.0}{5}%
+   }{%
+    \def\normalsize{%
+     \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
+     \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+     \let\@listi\@listI
+    }%
+   }%
+  }{}%
+ }%
+ \textheight = 694.0\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{prl} code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prper}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prper}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprper{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRPER selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prab}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prab}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprab{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRAB selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prx}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prx}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprx{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRX selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prapplied}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prapplied}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprapplied{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRApplied selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prmaterials}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{prmaterials}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprmaterials{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRMaterials selected}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{prfluids}}%
+%  PRFluids uses a one-column format for journal format, but if authors want this, they should use the onecolumn option and not the reprint option.
+% Parsing of documentclass options is rather involved and hard to control precisely enough to have the correct behavior using the reprint option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsprfluids{%
+ \class@info{APS journal PRFluids selected}%
+ \@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{physrev}}%
+% There is no code specific to \classoption{physrev}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx@apsphysrev{%
+ \class@info{APS unified Physical Review journal style selected}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rmp}}%
+% If this option has been selected, we will read in the needed code from the file \file{apsrmp.rtx}. 
+%
+% \subsection{Establish APS Defaults}\label{sec:aps-defaults}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% All APS journals except RMP effectively invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
+% We rely on the RMP-specific code to override this assignment. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ has the job of writing the control record into the
+% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. 
+% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning 
+% is set by the society (APS) and journal. 
+% For all but RMP, we select the Physical Review style.
+% For the latter case, we change the meaning, per the code in \file{apsrmp.rtx}.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aps}%
+\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   apsrev42Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style.
+% \changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) MD - not sure why these parameters were different previously. Made them match except for title.}%
+% Use binary flags on control.* flags in bst file to set appropriate parameters
+% author = 08 corresponds to initials, jrnlst
+% editor = 1 corresponds to format identical to authors
+% title = 0  means to include title in journal references if present; title ="" means omit the title even if present (this should be the only difference between long and short bib styles)
+% year = 1 corresponds to truncate
+% page = 0 corresponds to using single page number rather than a range
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \longbibliography@sw{%
+    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="0",year="1"% 
+   }{%
+    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="",year="1"%
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrev42Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% We install code that will select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
+% and govern the \BibTeX\ processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@inl
+\def\@bibstyle{apsrev\substyle@post}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\appdef\setup@hook{%
+% \longbibliography@sw{%
+% \appdef\@bibstyle{long}%
+% }{}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{APS Sanity Checking}\label{sec:aps-sanity}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+%
+% Rule: if \cmd\place@bibnumber\ is \cmd\place@bibnumber@sup\ 
+% (citations are numbered and set superscript),
+% then it makes no sense for \cmd\footinbib@sw\ to be \cmd\false@sw\ 
+% (footnotes set in the bibliography, as endnotes). 
+% If both conditions prevailed, then the document would have footnotes
+% and citations both as superscript arabic numbers, but independently numbered, 
+% which would be confusing. 
+%
+% Any society that provides for both superscript numbered citations as well as for 
+% numbered footnotes should check for this same condition, and deal with it. 
+%
+% Note: an alternative would be for footnotes to use the same sequence of footnote devices
+% that are used by the frontmatter footnotes 
+% (\cmd\frontmatter@thefootnote\ instead of arabic numbers). 
+%
+% In this case, we would want to refrain from resetting \cmd\c@footnote\ at the end of 
+% the title page formatting.
+% We would also want to treat body footnotes identically to frontmatter footnotes: 
+% the assignments in \cmd\titleblock@produce\ would persist throughout the document.
+%
+% But APS do not choose to go that route. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \@ifx{\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup}{%
+  \footinbib@sw{}{%
+   \class@warn{Citations are superscript numbers: footnotes must be endnotes; changing to that configuration}%
+   \@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
+  }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Here ends the substyle for society APS.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</aps>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{rmp} journal substyle: the \texttt{rmp} module}
+%
+% The file \file{apsrmp.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}
+% and \cmd\@journal\ has the value \classoption{rmp}.
+%
+% It is read at the end of the \file{aps.rtx}, so all definitions
+% and assignments in that file are operative unless overridden here.
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*rmp>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+  \endinput
+  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+  \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Protect this file from being read in as a society instead of a journal.
+% In such a case, \cmd\@journal\ will be undefined. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifxundefined\@journal{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% One alternative: abort the document.
+% Another alternative: try to recover: force load the aps society file
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \class@warn{Please specify the REVTeX options [aps,rmp]!}%
+ \@@end
+}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Log the journal substyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \class@info{APS journal RMP selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Frontmatter}%
+%
+% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
+% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clo@groupedaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@setup{%
+ \normalfont\sffamily\raggedright
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PACS@warn}
+% Per Mark Doyle, RMP  never displays the PACS, so they don't want the `use showpacs' warning spit out.
+%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) PACS are obsolete altogether now}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PACS@warn{RMP documents do not display PACS and PACS are obsolete. Your \string\pacs\space will be ignored}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@title@above{}%
+\def\frontmatter@title@format{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}% HelveticaNeue-Medium(Italic) 14pt.
+\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{12\p@}}% 24pt b-b down to first author
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+% Set the rag to a milder value, because we want to do true ragged right
+% typesetting, as opposed to the \LaTeX\ default, which gives very poor results.
+%
+% Note: author font is 9.8bp. 19.2bp/14.3bp above/below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{\vskip0.5pc\relax}{}%
+ \@tempskipa\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
+ \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@flushglue\@tempskipa
+ \parskip\z@skip
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@affiliationfont\ controls the formatting of affiliations and affiliation groups.
+% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@above@affilgroup\ is invoked just before proceeding with author/affiliation processing.
+% The \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress} style,
+% and \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+%
+% Note: affiliation font is 9.03/10.4bp, 14.3bp/19.2bp b-b above/below
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{% Helvetica 9/10.2
+ \small\slshape\selectfont\baselineskip10.5\p@\relax
+ \@tempskipa\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
+ \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@flushglue\@tempskipa
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \let\def@after@address\def@after@address@empty
+}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{\addvspace{7.2\p@}}% additional leading above an author
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{\addvspace{5.3\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the default RMP style for title block authors and affiliations.
+% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
+% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+%
+% This command should override the effect of the 
+% corresponding command in the society substyle,
+% and any document class option bearing on same will in turn override. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clo@groupedaddress
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+% Note: in RMP, if we are not in preprint mode, the date will not be produced.
+%
+% Note: Helvetica C/lc, 8.98bp, space above: 16.3bp b-b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
+  \addvspace{7.3\p@}%
+  \small
+  \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+\def\produce@RRAP#1{%
+  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
+   \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{}%
+   \unskip(\ignorespaces#1\unskip)\quad
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
+% Space above 21.8bp b-b.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
+ \preprintsty@sw{%
+  \begingroup
+   \centering\large
+   \abstractname
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+  \vspace{.5pc}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
+% TimesTen 8.93bp/9.6bp X 360bp, indented 36bp, with 21.9/37.6bp b-b above/below
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
+ \footnotesize
+ \hsize360\p@
+ \leftskip=0.5in
+ \parindent\z@
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block.
+% Should be 22/36 points base-to-base.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{7.7\p@}%
+\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{24.6\p@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% FIXME: Not done: PACS.
+% FIXME: TOC: Head is same as \section: HelveticaNeue 8.98. 32/22bp b-b above/below,
+%             Body: TimesTen 8/10.5.
+%
+% \subsection{General Text}%
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+% If not in preprint mode, RMP sets the type size to 10/12 point. Note: s/b 11.6bp leading
+%FIXME: define \cmd\normalsize\ only if nobody else has done so. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef\setup@hook{%
+  \preprintsty@sw{}{%
+   \def\normalsize{%
+    \@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
+    \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ plus2\p@ minus5\p@
+    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
+    \let\@listi\@listI
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Footnote mods:
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \footnotesep 9.25pt
+ \skip\footins 36pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
+ \def\footnoterule{%
+  \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\thr@@
+  \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Sectioning}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
+%
+% We override the meaning of \cmd\secnums@rtx. 
+% The class option \classoption{secnumarabic} will continue to work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secnums@rtx{%
+ \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
+  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
+  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
+  \def\p@section        {}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection.}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
+  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection.\thesubsection.}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
+  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
+  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
+  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.\theparagraph.}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In RMP, put a period (.), followed by `nut space', after the section number.
+% Also, hang the section number (the \LaTeX\ default).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\hskip0.5em\relax}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument. 
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
+% purpose.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\section{%
+  \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
+  {%
+   \small\sffamily\bfseries\selectfont
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+ \def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+ \def\subsection{%
+  \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
+  {%
+   \small\sffamily\bfseries
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\subsubsection{%
+  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
+  {%
+   \small\sffamily\selectfont
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\paragraph{%
+  \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
+  {%
+   \small\slshape\selectfont
+   \raggedright
+   \parindent\z@
+  }%
+ }%
+ \def\subparagraph{%
+  \@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{3.25ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
+  {\normalsize\bfseries\selectfont}%
+ }%
+%
+ \setcounter{tocdepth}{4}% FIXME: has no effect
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\appendix{%
+ \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if@empty{#2}{%
+  #3%
+ }{%
+  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
+ #1\appendixname\@if@empty{#2}{}{:\ #2}%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Figure and Table Caption Formatting}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \vbox{%
+   \flushing
+   \small\rmfamily
+   \noindent
+   #1\@caption@fignum@sep#2\par
+  }%
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}%
+\def\@caption@fignum@sep{\nobreak\hskip.5em plus.2em\ignorespaces}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Citations and Bibliography}%
+%
+% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
+% this task requires three components:
+% a \BibTeX\ \file{.bst} style file,
+% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
+% (if the document does not do so).
+%
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+%  To generate \file{apsrmp.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 3.89d1 or later.
+%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, with the following options:
+%
+% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
+% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \QandA{STYLE OF CITATIONS}{a}{ay}Author-year with some non-standard interface
+% \QandA{AUTHOR}{*}{nat}Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
+% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
+% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART }{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{a}{nm-rev1}Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
+% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR }{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES }{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
+% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT }{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
+% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS }{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
+% \QandA{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING }{*}{keyxyr}Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
+% \QandA{DATE POSITION}{b}{dt-beg}Date after authors 
+% \QandA{DATE FORMAT }{m}{yr-com}Date preceded by comma as `, 1993'
+% \QandA{INCLUDE MONTHS}{m}{aymth}Include month in date 
+% \QandA{REVERSED DATE }{r}{dtrev}Date as year month 
+% \QandA{TRUNCATE YEAR }{*}{note-yr}Year text full as 1990--1993 or `in press'
+% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
+% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{?}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
+% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{?}{article-series}article can has series
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{?}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{s}{vnum-sp}Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
+% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
+% \QandA{POSITION OF PAGES}{e}{pp-last}Pages at end but before any notes
+% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
+% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
+% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
+% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{p}{pub-par}Publisher in parentheses 
+% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{e}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
+% \QandA{SCHOOL}{p}{school-par}school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
+% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
+% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+% \QandA{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES}{a}{bkedcap}`Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
+% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS }{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
+% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' }{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
+% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' }{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
+% \QandA{COMMA BEFORE `AND'}{c}{and-com}Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
+% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
+% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{?}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
+% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
+% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
+% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{apsrmp.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-02-12 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+%  head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
+%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
+%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
+%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+%  nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
+%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
+%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
+%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
+%  dt-beg,%: Date after authors 
+%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
+%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
+%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
+%  article-series,%: article can has series
+%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
+%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
+%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+%  vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
+%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
+%  pp-last,%: Pages at end but before any notes
+%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
+%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+%  pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses 
+%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+%  pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
+%  school-par,%: school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
+%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+%  bkedcap,%: `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
+%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
+%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
+%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
+%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
+%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
+%  and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
+%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
+%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
+%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+%  }}
+%\generate{\file{apsrmp4-2.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For a comparison between apsrmp.bst and apsrev.bst, see Section~\ref{sec:CompRevRmp}. 
+%
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bibstyle{apsrmp\substyle@post}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+% Author-year citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@rmp}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% When the journal is RMP, the meaning of the procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ needs to be different 
+% because of the way the author names are formatted. In other respects, it is the same. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
+% This entry's cite key is \texttt{apsrmp41Control}, which serves as a version number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  @CONTROL{%
+   apsrmp41Control%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \longbibliography@sw{%
+    ,author="03",editor="0",pages="1",title="0",year="0"%
+   }{%
+    ,author="0B",editor="0",pages="0",title="0",year="1"% TeXSupport
+   }%
+  }%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrmp41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibhang}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted.
+% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
+% 
+% Set up for author-year citations:
+% when \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ executes (at \envb{document} time), the \cmd\@biblabel\ will
+% be set to \cmd\NAT@biblabel.
+%
+% Per Karie Friedman (friedman@phys.washington.edu), multiple citations are separated by semicolons, e.g., 
+% (Jones, 1999; Abbott and Smith, 2000; Wortley, 2001a), 
+% and 
+% multiple citations by the same author by commas, e.g., 
+% Abela et al. (1995, 1997a, 1997b).
+% The third argument of \cmd\bibpunct\ handles the former.
+%
+% The fifth argument puts a comma after the author when the year is not in parens:
+% (Lee et al., 1996).
+%
+% Incidently, this \cmd\bibpunct\ command specifies the \classname{natbib} default values. 
+%
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%
+% We change \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\NAT@def@citea\ procedure to effect more elaborate
+% punctuation for RMP: see item 473: 
+% \cmd\cite\ order punctuation: ``If possible, \cmd\textcite should put the word 'and' between two citations and before the last citation in a list of 3 or more.''
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define the punctuation to use in the \cmd\cite\ command's production.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \bibpunct{(%)
+ }{%(
+ )}{;}{a}{,}{,}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bibsection{%
+  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+  \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+ \let\bibpreamble\@empty
+ \def\newblock{\ }%
+ \bibhang10\p@
+ \bibsep\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Per Mark Doyle, \cmd\cite\ is mapped to \cmd\citep\ in RMP.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\cite\citep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of code to be delayed until after \classname{natbib} loads.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
+% Footnotes in bibliography are consistent only with numbered citations,
+% and are particularly nasty under \classname{natbib}:
+% the packcage will automatically change to numbered references if
+% any \cmd\bibitem\ commands lack the optional argument.
+% Therefore, we must uninvoke it now, even if invoked by the document.
+% The same is quietly done with 
+% \classname{natbib}'s \classoption{mcite} and \classoption{compress} options. 
+% 
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+% (AO 523) I changed the code that alters \cmd\NAT@merge\ so that it will not override
+% when \cmd\NAT@merge\ has been set to \cmd\z@.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+\appdef\setup@hook{%
+ \footinbib@sw{%
+  \class@warn{%
+   Footnotes in bibliography are incompatible with RMP.^^J%
+   Undoing the footinbib option.
+  }%
+  \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
+ }{}%
+ \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\@ne}{\let\NAT@merge\@ne}{}%
+ \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
+% RMP requires the \cmd\eprint\ field in the bib entry to be set off with the word ``eprint''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eprint#1{eprint #1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Table of Contents}
+%
+% We set up for auto-sizing of certain TOC elements.
+% 
+% To do this, we override the definitions for 
+% the default TOC font (\cmd\toc@@font),
+% and define
+% formatting for the needed elements (\cmd\l@\dots).
+% Finally, we activate the autosizing by 
+% assigning \cmd\toc@pre\ and \cmd\toc@post.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@@font}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+% Set the formatting characteristics of the auto-indenting part
+%  of the TOC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toc@@font{%
+ \footnotesize\rmfamily
+ \def\\{\space\ignorespaces}%
+}%
+\def\ltxu@dotsep{5.5pt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
+\def\l@section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l@subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+%\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{}%
+\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the TOC processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
+\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</rmp>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput